MDG-3

Masonry
Designers’
Guide
Third Edition

Based on
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS 402-99)

and
Specification for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99)

with
Illustrated Design Applications
MASONRY DESIGNERS' GUIDE
Third Edition

Based on

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

(ACI 530-99 / ASCE 5-99 / TMS 402-99)

and

Specifications for Masonry Structures

(ACI 530.1-99 / ASCE 6-99 / TMS 602-99)

with

Illustrated Design Applications

John H. Matthys, Editor

© 2001 The Masonry Society

All rights reserved including rights of reproduction and use in any form or by any
means, including the making of copies by any photo process, or by any electronic or
mechanical device, printed, written or oral, recording for sound or visual reproduction or
for any use in any knowledge retrieval system or device, unless permission in writing is
obtained from The Masonry Society.

Printed in the United States of America

ISBN 1-929081-12-X

The Masonry Designers' Guide is not intended to teach a novice how to design or build
masonry structures, or to replace sound engineering knowledge, experience, and
judgement. The Guide should be used by professionals who are qualified to evaluate the
significance, limitations, and applicability of the information reported, and who will
accept the responsibility for its proper use. The publishers and editor disclaim any and
all responsibility for the application of the information.

While all reasonable efforts were made to ensure the information contained here in is
accurate, the publishers and editor are not responsible for any errors or omissions this
Guide may contain. To assist with future editions of this Guide, The Masonry Society
would appreciate the reader bringing to our attention any errors or inconsistencies found.

Direct all correspondence to:

Masonry Designers' Guide
The M a s o n r y Society
3970 Broadway, Suite 201-D
Boulder, Colorado 80304-1135
Phone: (303) 939-9700
Fax: (303) 541-9215
Email: info@masonrysociety.org

T h e purpose of the third edition of the Masonry
Designers' Guide (MDG) is the same as that of
the first and second editions that were published
in 1993 and 1999 respectively- to assist those involved
in the design, construction, and regulation of masonry
structures. The third edition was prepared to help users
apply the provisions of Building Code Requirements for
Masonry Structures (ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS 402-
99) and Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI
530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99). These two
documents were updated from the 1995 Code and
Specification by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee
(MSJC) which includes members of the American
Concrete Institute, the American Society of Civil
Engineers, and The Masonry Society.
Emphasis in the MDG is on application of the two
documents. Background information on the development
of the Code and Specification provisions is not
emphasized. For such information the reader is referred
to Commentary on Building Code Requirements for
Masonry Structures (ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS 402-
99) and Commentary on Specification for Masonry
Structures (ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99).
For ease in referencing the documents described
above, an abbreviated notation is used in the MDG.
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures is
shortened to MSJC Code or Code. Specification or
Spec. means Specification for Masonry Structures. Code
Commentary and Spec. Commentary refer to the
respective commentaries.
The third edition of the MDG is a combined effort
of The Masonry Society (TMS) and the Council for
Masonry Research (CMR). TMS, the professional
society of the masonry industry, provided the masonry
expertise of its members to revise the second edition of
the MDG. The CMR, a consortium of national trade
masonry industry associations, had the financial
resources to fund the Guide's revision. The American
Concrete Institute published the MDG first and second
editions. The third edition of the MDG is published
independently by TMS.
The updated MDG is a valuable reference for
engineers, contractors, architects, inspectors, building
code authorities, and educators. The initial chapters
. o .
III
FOREWORD
address materials, testing, quality assurance, quality
control, and construction methods, with reference to
specific provisions of the MSJC Code and Specification.
Subsequent chapters on design illustrate concepts and
applications of Code provisions to the structural design
of masonry. There are 75 numerical example problems
included in a separate chapter on building design. A
Code Reference Index and Specification Reference Index
correlate each discussion and design application example
to a particular MSJC Code or Specification section. The
MDG third edition reflects new Code/Specification
material on prestressed masonry, adhered veneer, hot
weather construction provisions and inspection and
quality assurance criteria. The seismic chapter includes a
historical development of seismic provisions for masonry
and shows how to apply the pseudo-strength method to
design for seismic loads.
The MDG third edition was developed by The
Masonry Society under the direction of John H. Matthys,
Professor of Civil Engineering and Director of the
Construction Research Center, The University of Texas
at Arlington. Professor Matthys provided guidance to
individual authors/reviewers in development of all
chapters and served as managing editor. The Masonry
Society staff assisted with word processing and graphics.
The production/revision of Part I, General, was the
direct responsibility of John H. Matthys.
The production/revision of Part II, Materials and
Testing, and Part III, Construction, was the direct
responsibility of an architectural/construction practices
group chaired by Christine Beall.
The production/revision of Part IV, Design, was the
direct responsibility of a Masonry Design Brain Trust
composed of consulting structural engineers and
academicians. The production/revision of Chapter 17,
Building Design, was the direct responsibility of the
Building Design Example Committee.
The voluntary contributions of all primary authors
and reviewers are recognized. Each section/chapter of
the finished Guide is a meshing of concepts of authors
and numerous reviewers. In addition many of the
example problems were developed and refined by several
authors.

AUTHORS/SECTIONS/CHAPTERS
Daniel P. Abrams - Professor of Civil Engineering,
University of Illinois, Champalgn-Urbana, Illinois -
Sections 11.2 and 12.3 on Pilasters
Amde M. Amde - Professor of Civil Engineering,
University of Maryland, College Park, Maryland -
Section 11.3 on Beams and Lintels
Subhash C. Anand - Professor of Civil Engineering,
Clemson University, Clemson, South Carolina -
Section 9.0 Introduction and Section 9.3 on Local
Load Distribution
Jefferson W. Asher - KPFF Consulting Engineers, Inc.,
Santa Monica, California - Lateral Load Distribution
and Computer Calculations for RCJ Hotel
Christine Beall - Architect, McQueeny, Texas -Section
5.1 on Submittals, Section 6.1 on Preparation,
Section 7.1 on Hot Weather Construction, and
Section 7.2 on Cold Weather Construction,
Reviewed Chapter 4 on Testing and Chapter 7 on
Hot & Cold Weather Construction
David Biggs - Ryan Biggs Associates, Troy, New York
- Section 8.7 on Prestressed Masonry, Prestressed
Masonry Example Problems
Russell H. B r o w n - Professor of Civil Engineering,
Clemson University, Clemson, South Carolina -
Section 12.1 on Columns and Section 12.2 on Walls
Gerald A. Dalrymple - Whitlock Dalrymple Poston &
Associates, Manassas, Virginia - Section 3.4 on
Masonry and Chapter 10 on Movements
Howard L. Droz - Architect, Smith, Hinchman & Grylls,
Phoenix, Arizona - Section 6.3 on Tolerances
Harry A. Fine - Former Executive Director, Masonry
Institute of St. Louis, St. Louis, Missouri - Section
5.2 on Sample Panels - Deceased 1992
Dave Gustafson - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute,
Schaumburg, Illinois Section 3.5 on Metal
Connectors and Reinforcement
Ahmad A. Hamid - Professor of Civil Engineering,
Drexel University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
Section 13.2 on Shear Walls
Edwin T. Huston - Smith & Huston Inc., Consulting
Engineers, Seattle, Washington Lateral Load
Distribution - Hand Calculations for RCJ Hotel and
Chapter 16 on Provisions for Seismic Design
Albert W. Isberner - Consultant, Portage, Wisconsin -
Chapter 3 on Materials, Chapter 4 on Testing and
Section 5.5 on Compliance
Rochelle C. Jaffe - Construction Technology Laboratory,
Inc., Skokie, Illinois - Development and Basic
iv
FOREWORD
Design o f the TMS Shopping Center, DPC
Gymnasium and RCJ Hotel, Chapter 8 on Design
Methodology and Philosophy, and Section 6.5 on
Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist
Richard E. Klingner - Professor of Civil Engineering,
The University of Texas at Austin, Austin, Texas -
Chapter 14 on Reinforcement and Connectors and
Chapter 8 on Design Methodology and Philosophy
Robert J. Kudder - Raths, Paths, and Johnson, Inc.,
Willowbrook, Illinois - Section 5.4 on Testing
Walter Laska - Masonry Technologies, Downers Grove,
Illinois - Reviewed Chapter 3 on Materials
W. Mark McGinley Professor of Architectural
Engineering, North Carolina A&T State University,
Greensboro, North Carolina - Section 9.2 on Global
Lateral Load Distribution
Don McMican - DGM Consultants, Overland Park,
Kansas - Reviewed Chapter 5 on Quality
Construction
W. Thomas Munsell - Munsell Associates, Inc.,
Southfield, Michigan - Chapter 15 on Empirical
Design
Max Porter - Professor of Civil Engineering, Iowa State
University, Ames, Iowa - Section 13.1 on Design for
Shear in Masonry Components
Chester Smolenski - Consultant, Mary~ille, Pennsylvania
- Hollow Glass Units and Glass Unit Masonry
Christine Subasic - C. Callista Subsic, Raleigh, N.C.
Reviewed Chapter 6 on Quality Control
John G. Tawresey - Vice President, KPFF Consulting
Engineers Inc., Seattle, Washington - Development
of TMS Shopping Center, DPC Gymnasium, and
RCJ Hotel - Section 11.0 Introduction and 11.1 on
Walls, Section 12.0 Introduction, Section 13.0
Introduction, and Section 15.5 on Veneer
Diane B. Throop - International Masonry Institute, Ann
Arbor, Michigan - Section 5.3 on Inspection and
Section 6.4 on Cleaning
Terence A. Weigel - Professor o f Civil Engineering,
University of Louisville, Louisville, Kentucky -
Section 11.1 on Walls
A. Rhett Whitlock - Whitlock Dakrymple Poston &
Associates, Manassas, Virginia - Section 3.4 on
Masonry and Chapter 10 on Movements
Gary L. Zwayer - Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates,
Northbrook, Illinois - Section 6.2 on Placement and
Section 6.5 on Quality Assurance/Quality Control
Checklist
FOREWORD
For the MDG third edition all numerical examples
were reviewed, revised, and expanded by a Building
Design Example Committee in Chapter 17 on Building
Design. The primary change was revision of numerical
values using new modulus of elasticity values for clay
and concrete masonry from the 1999 MSJC Code. New
examples on prestressed masonry were added. The
Building Design Example Committee consisted of:
David Biggs - Ryan Biggs Associates, Troy, New York
Russell H. Brown - Clemson University, Clemson, South
Carolina
REVIEWS
A final technical review of the submitted draft of the
MDG third edition was conducted by the Technical
Activities Committee of TMS, and the Technical
Committee of CMR.
A final editorial review of the entire Guide was
conducted by an editorial committee of:
Rochelle C. Jaffe - Construction Technology Laboratory,
Inc., Skokie, Illinois
Richard E. Klingner - The University of Texas at Austin,
Austin, Texas
John H. Matthys - The University of Texas at Arlington,
Arlington, Texas
V
Edwin T. Huston - Smith & Huston Inc., Seattle,
Washington
Rochelle C. Jaffe - Construction Technology Laboratory,
Inc. - Skokie, Illinois
Richard E. Klingner - The University of Texas at Austin.
Austin, Texas
John H. Matthys - The University of Texas at Arlington,
Arlington, Texas
Mark McGinley- North Carolina A&T State University,
Greensboro, North Carolina
John G. Tawresey - KPFF Consulting Engineers Inc.,
Seattle, Washington
The editor, his staff, and The Masonry Society staff
were involved in the production of the Guide to camera
ready form, both hard copy and electronic disks. Special
thanks go to:
Stephen Kitchens - B.S.C.E. - University of Texas at
Arlington
The editor would like to extend a personal note of
appreciation to all who participated in the process of
making the third edition of the Masonry Designers'
Guide a reality.
John H. Matthys, MDG Editor
Professor of Civil Engineering
Director of Construction Research Center
University of Texas at Arlington
 THE MASONRY SOCIETY

The Masonry Society is an international gathering of people interested in the art and science of masonry.
Founded in 1977, it is a professional, technical, and educational non-profit association dedicated to the
advancement of the knowledge on masonry. TMS members are design engineers, architects, builders,
researchers, educators, building officials, material suppliers, manufacturers, and others who want to
contribute to and benefit from the global pool of knowledge on masonry. Membership in TMS is open to
anyone interested in the activities and goals of the Society.

TMS gathers and disseminates technical information through its committees, publications, codes and
standards, slide sets, videotapes, computer software, newsletter, refereed journal, educational programs,
professors' workshop, scholarships, certification programs, disaster investigation team, and conferences.

TMS encourages its members to get involved in TMS committee work in order to gain the contacts,
knowledge, and recognition needed to thrive in their professions, while at the same time contributing to the
benefit of the industry. Additional information on membership, publications, and programs of The
Masonry Society is available by calling 303-939-9700.

COUNCIL FOR MASONRY RESEARCH

The Council for Masonry Research was formed to fulfill the need for an organization to lead and assist in
the development of material and construction oriented research designed to increase and preserve markets
for masonry materials. The Council represents diverse interests from within the masonry industry.
Through its contributing members the Council has sponsored and actively participated in both industry and
federally funded research while also providing continuing technical support for research programs.
 CONTENTS
PART I - GENERAL

FOREWORD ....................................................... iii

CONTENTS ....................................................... vii
CODE REFERENCE INDEX ........................................... xi
SPECIFICATION REFERENCE INDEX .................................. xv

lu INTRODUCTION ................................................... 1-1

2. NOTATION, DEFINITIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS ....................... 2-1

PART II - MATERIALS AND TESTING

. MATERIALS
3.0 Introduction .............................................. 3-1
3.1 Units .................................................... 3-2
3.2 Mortar ................................................... 3-9
3.3 Grout ................................................... 3-12
3.4 Masonry ................................................ 3-13
3.5 Metal Connectors and Reinforcement ........................ 3-17
References ...................................................... 3-21

. TESTING
4.0 Introduction .............................................. 4-1
4.1 Materials Testing .......................................... 4-1
4.2 Assemblage Testing-Prisms ................................. 4-2

PART III - CONSTRUCTION

. QUALITY CONSTRUCTION
5.0 Introduction .............................................. 5-1
5.1 S ubmittals ............................................... 5-2
5.2 Sample Panels ............................................ 5-2
5.3 Inspection ................................................ 5-4
5.4 Testing .................................................. 5.5
5.5 Compliance ............................................. 5-10
References ...................................................... 5-10

. QUALITY CONTROL
6.0 Introduction .............................................. 6-1
6.1 Preparation ............................................... 6-1

vii
 Contents

6.2 Placements ............................................... 6-8

6.3 Tolerances .............................................. 6-19
6.4 Cleaning ................................................ 6-22
6.5 Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist .................. 6-23
References ...................................................... 6-29

. HOT A N D C O L D W E A T H E R C O N S T R U C T I O N
7.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Hot Weather Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Cold Weather Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Select Bibliography ................................................ 7-6

PART IV - DESIGN

. DESIGN P H I L O S O P H Y A N D M E T H O D O L O G Y
8.0 W h a t is M a s o n r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Characteristics of Masonry .................................. 8-2
8.2 S t r u c t u r a l A n a l y s i s and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 L o a d s a n d Load C o m b i n a t i o n s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4 Structural Considerations for Masonry Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5 Structural Considerations for Masonry Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.6 Structural Considerations for Masonry Beam-Columns ......... 8-14
8.7 Structural Considerations for Prestressed Masonry Walls . . . . . . . 8-14
References ...................................................... 8-16

. DISTRIBUTION OF L O A D S
9.0 Introduction .............................................. 9-1
9.1 G l o b a l D i s t r i b u t i o n of G r a v i t y Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 G l o b a l D i s t r i b u t i o n o f Lateral L o a d s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3 Local Distribution of Loads ................................. 9-5
References ....................................................... 9-9

10. MOVEMENTS
10.0 Introduction ............................................. t0-1
10.1 M o v e m e n t s A s s o c i a t e d w i t h C o n s t r u c t i o n Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Thermal Movements ...................................... 10-2
t0.3 Moisture-Related Movements ............................... 10-3
10.4 Structural Movements ..................................... 10-4
10.5 A c c o m m o d a t i o n of M o v e m e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

viii
 Contents

11. FLEXURE
11.0 Introduction ............................................. 11-1
11.1 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.2 Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.3 B e a m s and Lintels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2t

12. FLEXURE AND A X I A L LOAD

12.0 Introduction ............................................. 12-1
12.1 Columns ................................................ 12-1
12.2 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.3 Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32

t3. SHEAR
13.0 Introduction ............................................. 13-1
13.1 Design f o r S h e a r in M a s o n r y C o m p o n e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 S h e a r Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

14. REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS

14.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Steel R e i n f o r c e m e n t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.3 Connectors .............................................. 14-7
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9

15, EMPIRICAL DESIGN & V E N E E R

15.1 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.2 General D e s c r i p t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.3 Limitations .............................................. 15-2
15.4 E m p i r i c a l Design R e q u i r e m e n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.5 Veneer .................................................. 15-8
Select Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11

16, PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN

16.0 Introduction ............................................. 16-1
16.t History of Seismic Code Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t6-3
16.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.3 Design of Masonry Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.4 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10

ix
 Contents

17. BUILDING DESIGN

17.0 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-t
17.1 TMS Shopping Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.2 DPC Gymnasium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-107
17.3 RCJ Hotel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-193

APPENDIX A MATERIAL PROPERTIES

Clay Masonry Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-t
Concrete Masonry Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Composite Masonry Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

APPENDIX B CONVERSION FACTORS-Sl UNITS

APPENDIX C INDEX

X
 1999 MSJC
CODE REFERENCE INDEX
Code Section M D G Pa~es Code Section M D G Pa~es

1.1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3, 13-7, 17-1 1.9.4.2.5 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9, 17-191

1.2.2 (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 1.9.4.2.5.(c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
1.2.2 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11, 6-12 1.10.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13, 10-5, 10-6, 11-13, 15-8,
1.2.2 (h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 15-9, 17-77, 17-149, 17-181
1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 1.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
1.3.3.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-186 1.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
1.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2, 11-5, 12-1, 14-1, 17-272, 17-273 1.12.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
1.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 1.12.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
1.7.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5, 15-7 1.12.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-20, 14-7
1.7.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 1.12.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-254
1.7.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17, 8-5, 12-9 1.12.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7, 17-75
1.7.5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 11-6, 17-34 1.12.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-259, 17-306, 17-311
1.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 1.12.3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-75, 17-259, 17-306, 17-311
1.8.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-72, 17-172, 17-307 1.12.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6, 17-75
1.8.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-257, 17-316 1.12.4.1.(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-259
1.8.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-139, 17-185, 17-257 1.12.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-79
1.8.2.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-14, 5-5, 5-7, 8-4, 11-6, 12-7, 1.12.5.(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-267
17-48, 17-51, 17-127, 17-275 1.12.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-264, 17-267
1.8.2.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 1.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 16-1
1.8.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7, 17-185 1.13.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
1.8.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5, 10-2 1.13.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
1.8.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3, 17-248, 17-249 1.13.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
1.8.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3, 17-9 1.13.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5, 16-2
1.8.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5, 10-3, 17-248, 17-249 1.13.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 16-2, 17-168, 17-171
1.8.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5, 10-4 1.13.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3, 16-9, 17-18, 17-167
1.8.5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 1.13.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3, 16-5
1.8.5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-250 1.13.4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-167
1.8.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5, 11-21 1.13.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
1.8.6.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-250 1.13.5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
1.9.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 1.13.5.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
1.9.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5, 17-81, 17-84 1.13.5.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
1.9.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 17-152, 17-153, 17-156, 17-164 1.13.5.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
1.9.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-11, 17-118 1.13.5.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2, 17-192
1.9.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16 I. 13.5.3.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
1.9.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 13-10 1.13.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
1.9.4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-191 1.13.6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6, 17-277, 17-285, 17-302
1.9.4.2 ............... 8-4, 8-6, 8-12, 17-124, 17-126, 17-212 1.13.6.5 .......... 11-5, 12-2, 16-7, 17-192, 17-255, 17-256
1.9.4.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 11-10, 17-212 1.13.6.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
1.9.4.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10, 13-10, 14-6, 17-191 1.13.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
1.9.4.2.5 (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 1.13.7.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

xi

Code Section MDG Pases
1.13.7.3 ...................................................... 16-6
1.15.1 ..................................................... 3-1, 8-1
1.15.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
2.1 ........................................... 11-16, 15-7, 17-30
2.1.1.1 ................................ 8-5, 13-7, 17-52, 17-307
2.1.1.1.1 ....................... 12-29, 17-243, 17-251, 17-254
2.1.1.1.3 ......... 8-5, 8-6, 11-6, 11-7, 11-13, 12-14, 12-18,
12-30, 17-13, 17-32, 17-42, 17-98, 17-101,
17-122, 17-127, 17-132, 17-144, 17-154,
17-157, 17-166, 17-167, 17-173, 17-174,
17-177, 17-183, 17-186, 17-242, 17-247,
17-251, 17-252, 17-275, 17-276, 17-279,
17-292, 17-296, 17-304, 17-307, 17-310,
17-316, 17-318
2.1.1.2 ........................................................ 16-2
2.1.1.2.1 ....................................................... 8-3
2.1.1.2.2 ........................................................ 8-3
2.1.1.2.3 ................. 16-2, 17-1, 17-30, 17-144, 17-155,
17-162, 17-163, 17-304
2.1.1.2.3.1 ..................... 17-15, 17-28, 17-125, 17-165
2.1.1.2.3.2 ................ 16-2, 17-15, 17-16, 17-18, 17-28,
17-29, 17-65, 17-123, 17-135, 17-144,
17-162, 17-163, 17-184, 17-281, 17-296,
17-305, 17-307, 17-310, 17-316
2.1.1.2.3.3 ................ 16-2, 17-16, 17-17, 17-18, 17-65,
17-144, 17-162, 17-163, 17-166, 17-281,
17-305, 17-307, 17-310, 17-316
2.1.1.2.3.3 (b) ............................................. 17-135
2.1.1.2.3.3 .(c) ............................................ 17-184
2.1.1.3 ............................................. 12-15, 17-186
2.1.2 ............................................. 6-12, 14-1, 14-8
2.1.2.2.1 ............................................. 14-8, 17-89
2.1.2.2.3 ............................................ 17-90, 17-98
2.1.2.2.4 .................................................... 17-91
2.1.3.2 ....................................................
2.1.3.2.1 .............. 9-8, 17-158, 17-162, 17-166, 17-191
2.1.3.2.2 ................................. 3-16, 8-4, 9-8, 17-166
2.1.3.2.2.(lo) ................ 17-154, 17-156, 17-158, 17-177
2.1.3.2.3 ....................................................... 8-4
2.1.3.2.5 ............. 14-7, 17-142, 17-162, 17-166, 17-191
2.1.3.3 ................................ 8-2, 8-4, 17-121, 17-122
2.1.3.3.1 .................................................. 9-6, 9-7
2.1.3.3.1 (b) ................ 17-116, 17-129, 17-130,17-131
2.1.3.3.1 (c) ......................................... 8-4, 17-119
2.1.3.3.1 (d) .................... 8-4, 17-120, 17-132,17-241
2.1.3.3.1 (f) ............................................ 8-4, 14-8
2.1.3.3.2 ......... 14-7, 14-8, 14-9, 17-118, 17-132, 17-142
MSJC Code R e f e r e n c e I n d e x
Code Section MDG Paces
2.1.3.3.2 (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
2.1.4 ............................................. 8-14, 11-8, 12-1
2.1.4.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
2. 1.4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
2.1.4.3 ..................................................... 17-251
2.1.4.4 .............................................. 11-5, 17-252
2.1.4.6 ........ 8-14, 11-4, 11-5, 11-11, 12-3, 12-18, 17-74,
17-79, 17-141, 17-192, 17-254, 17-256
2.1.4.6 (a) ................................................. 17-192
2.1.4.6 (b) ................................................. 17-192
2.1.4.6.(c) ................................................. 17-253
2.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 11-8
2.1.5.1 ..................................................... 17-124
2.1.5.2 ..................................................... 17-192
2.1.6 .............. ; ...................................... 8-7, 12-2
2.1.6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2.1.7 ............................. 11-19, 17-82, 17-87, 17-188
2.1.7.1 ................... 8-7, 9-5, 9-6, 11-20, 17-81, 17-84,
17-129, 17-272, 17-273
2.1.7.2 .................................... 8-8, 9-6, 17-85, 17-86
2.1.7.3 ................. 8-8, 9-5, 9-6, 17-93, 17-149, 17-181,
17-247, 17-294, 17-314
2.1.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1, 14-7
2.1.8.2 ............... 17-79, 17-94, 17-264, 17-267, 17-302
2.1.8.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-304
2.1.8.3.1.3 ...................................... 17-268, 17-269
2.1.8.3.1.4 ......... '. ...................................... 17-269
2.1.8.3.1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-269
2.1.8.3.1.6 ................................................ 17-302
2.1.8.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7, 17-80, 17-267
2.1.8.3.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7, 17-268
2.1.8.4.1 .......................................... 17-95, 17-267
2.1.8.5.1.2 .................................................. 17-79
2.1.8.5.1.5 ................................................ 17-264
8-2, 8-4 2.1.8.6.1.1 ................................................ 17-268
2.2 .............................. 8-10, 8-13, 10-5, 11-6, 12-14
13-3, 14-6, 15-1, 15-9, 16-5
2.2.2.1 (b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-173
2.2.3 ................. 8-7, 13-6, 17-27, 17-54, 17-57, 17-104
2.2.3.1 ......................... 8-10, 17-130, 17-134, 17-166,
17-167, 17-276, 17-316
2.2.3.1 (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-134
2.2.3.1 (c) ............................ 17-134, 17-257, 17-323
2.2.3.2 .......... 3-10, 3-11, 3-15, 11-2, 11-8, 12-18, 13-10,
17-13, 17-17, 17-27, 17-122, 17-124, 17-133
2.2.4 .......................................... 11-6, 13-3, 17-164
2.2.5 ............ 8-10, 13-1, 13-2, 13-5, 13-6, 13-11, 17-17,
xii
 M S J C Code R e f e r e n c e I n d e x

Code Section M D G Pa2es Code Section M D G Pa~es

17-18, 17-27, 17-57, 17-58, 17-137, 17-164 17-301, 17-310

2.2.5.1 ............ 17-125, 17-158, 17-162, 17-165, 17-321 2.3.5.5 ............... 17-49, 17-78, 17-176, 17-261, 17-279,
2.2.5.1 (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-247 17-300, 17-304, 17-305,
2.2.5.2 .......................... 3-16, 8-5, 11-13, 13-3, 13-11, 17-309, 17-314, 17-318
17-28, 17-125, 17-143, 17-145, 2.24 ......................................................... 12-14
17-165, 17-183, 17-184, 17-321 4.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-99
2.2.5.2 (c) ................................................. 17-183 4.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-99
2.3 ....................... 8-13, 10-5, 11-6, 11-16, 12-2, 13-3, 4.3.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-99
13-6, 14-6, 15-1, 16-5 4.5.1 ....................................................... 17-102
2.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2, 13-10, 14-6 4.5.3 ................................................ 17-99,17-103
2.3.2.1 .................... 11-7, 11-13, 11-16, 11-17, 12-18, 4.5.3.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-100
12-30, 17-42, 17-51, 17-72, 17-78, 4.5.3.2 ......................................................... 2-3
17-181, 17-275, 17-300, 17-304, 4.5.3.2.2 .................................................. 17-101
17-307, 17-310, 17-313, 17-316 4.5.3.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-101
2.3.2.1 (b) ............................ 17-127, 17-257, 17-296 4.5.3.2.6 .................................................. 17-101
2.3.2.2 ..................... 11-4, 11-7, 11-16, 17-74, 17-126 5.1.1 ............................................... 17-36, 17-169
2.3.2.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 5.1.2 .......................................................... 15-2
2.3.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 5.1.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-168, 17-271, 17-272, 17-273
2.3.3.2 .................................................. 8-7, 12-2 5.1.2.2 ........................ 17-36, 17-168, 17-272, 17-273
2.3.3.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2, 12-9 5.2 ................... 17-36, 17-169, 17-271, 17-272, 17-273
2.3.3.2.2 ......... 11-13, 11-16, 11-17, 12-30, 13-10, 17-43, 5.3.1.1 ......... 15-3, 17-36, 17-38, 17-168, 17-271, 17-273
17-51, 17-65, 17-72, 17-127, 17-173, 5.3.1.2 ................................... 17-37, 17-38, 17-168,
17-174, 17-188, 17-251, 17-307 17-169, 17-271, 17-273
2.3.3.3.1 ............................. 11-7, 17-42, 17-45, 17-53 5.3.1.3 ............................ 15-3, 17-37, 17-38, 17-168,
2.3.3.4 ......................................... 8-13, 11-13, 15-8 17-169, 17-271, 17-273
2.3.3.4.1 ......................... 17-33, 17-73, 17-258, 17-299 5.4 .................................................. 15-3, 17-271
2.3.3.4.3 ................ 8-13, 17-33, 17-73, 17-257, 17-312 5.4.2 .................................... 17-37, 17-169, 17-170,
2.3.3.4.4 ............................................. 8-13, 17-73 17-271, 17-272, 17-274
2.3.3.4.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 5.4.2.1 ..................................................... 17-169
2.3.5 ................................. 8-11, 11-13, 11-16, 13-1, 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
13-2, 13-5, 13-6, 17-305 5.5.1 .................. 17-38, 17-39, 17-169, 17-170, 17-272
2.3.5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-164 5.5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
2.3.5.2 .......................... 13-5, 13-10, 17-164, 17-301 5.6.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
2.3.5.2.1 ....................... 17-49, 17-78, 17-128, 17-176, 5.6.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-168
17-177, 17-261, 17-279, 17-281, 5.6.3 ............................................ 15-2, 15-3, 15-5
17-290, 17-305, 17-310, 17-323 5.6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
2.3.5.2.1 (a) .............................................. 17-318 5.6.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-38, 17-39
2.3.5.2.2 ............. 17-50, 17-68, 17-78, 17-128, 17-176, 5.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
17-177, 17-262, 17-279, 17-310, 17-323 5.7.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-28, 17-207
2.3.5.2.2 (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-305, 17-314 5.7.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
2.3.5.2.2 Co). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-281 5.7.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
2.3.5.2.3 ............ 17-78, 17-262, 17-301, 17-305, 17-310 5.7.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
2.3.5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-78, 17-262, 17-291, 5.7.5.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
17-301, 17-310, 17-314 5.8.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 15-6
2.3.5.3.1 .......................... 13-5, 13-12, 17-79, 17-263, 5.8.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
17-301, 17-310 5.8.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
2.3.5.3.2 .......................... 13-5, 13-12, 17-79, 17-263, 5.8.2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7

. . °

XIII
 M S J C Code R e f e r e n c e I n d e x

Code Section M D G Pases Code Section M D G Pa~es

5.8.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7, 17-40, 1 7 - 2 7 4 6.2.2.5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

5.8.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 6.2.2.5.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

5.9.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 6.2.2.5.6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6.2.2.5.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
5.9.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
6.2.2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
5.9.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
6.2.2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
5.9.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
6.2.2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
5.12.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-271 6.2.2.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
6.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 6.2.2.10 .............................................. 6-13, 15-10
6.1.1.2 ....................................................... 15-9 6.3.2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 6-13
6.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 7.3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-70
6.2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 7.3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-70
6.2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 7.4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-71
6.2.2.5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 7.4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-70
6.2.2.5.2 ..................................................... 6-13 7.5.2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-262
6.2.2.5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 7.5.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-262
6.2.2.5.4 ..................................................... 6-11 7.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-71

~v
 1999 MSJC
SPECIFICATION
REFERENCE INDEX
Specification A r t i c l e MDG Paaes Specification A r t i c l e M D G Pages

P3 ............................................................. 3-1 1.6D. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

P5 ............................................................. 3-1 1.6D.l.b ...................................................... 5-2
1.1.C.1 ....................................................... 6-17 1.6D.2 ................................................... 5-2, 5-3
1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 1.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1, 6-4, 6-26
1.4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 1.7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-I
1.4B.2 ................................ 5-5, 5-7, 17-127, 17-139 1.7D .......................................................... 6-1
1.4B.2a ................................................ 3-13, 5-9 1.7E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
1.4B.2b ................................................ 3-14, 5-9 1.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
1.4B.3 ................... 3 - 1 3 , 5 - 5 , 5 - 7 , 8-3, 1 7 - 1 2 7 , 1 7 - 1 3 9 1.8A ......................................................... 6-26
1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 5-2 1.8B ......................................................... 6-26
1.5A. 1 ....................................................... 6-23 1.8C .............................................. 6-26, 7-3, 7-4
1.5A.2 ....................................................... 6-23 1.8C.l.a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
1.5B .................................................. 6-23, 6-25 1.8C.l.b ....................................................... 7-3
1.5B.2.a ..................................................... 6-24 1.8C.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
1.5B.2.b ...................................................... 6-24 1.8D ............................................. 6 - 1 4 , 6 - 2 6 , 7-1
1.5B.2.c ..................................................... 6-24 1.8D.3 ....................................................... 6-14
1.5B.3.a ..................................................... 6-24 2.1 ............................................................. 3-9
1.5B.3.b .................................................... 6-24 2.1A .......................................................... 3-10
1.5B.3.c ..................................................... 6-24 2.3A .......................................................... 3-3
1.5B.3.d .................................................... 6-24 2.3B .......................................................... 3-3
1.5B.4 ................................................... 4-1, 6-25 2.3C .......................................................... 3-7
1.5B.4.a ..................................................... 6-25 2.3D .......................................................... 3-8
1.5B.4.b ................................................ 4-1, 6-25 2.4 ........................................................... 14-1
1.5B.4.c ..................................................... 6-25 2.4A ................................................... 3 - 2 1 , 14-1
1.5B.4.d ............................................... 4-1, 6-25 2.4]3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 4 , 14-1
1.5B.5.a ..................................................... 6-24 2.4C ......................................................... 14-1
1.5B.5.b .................................................... 6-24 2.4C.1 ...................................................... 3-21
1.5B.5.c ..................................................... 6-24 2.4D ................................................... 14-1, 14-2
1.5B.5.d .................................................... 6-24 2.4D.4 .......................................... 17-142, 17-191
1.5B.6.a ..................................................... 6-24 2.4E ............................................ 3-17, 14-1, 14-8
1.5B.6.b .................................................... 6-24 2.4F ............................................. 3-17, 14-1, 14-8
1.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-9 2.4F.lb ......................................... 17-142, 17-191
1.6A ......................................................... 6-23 2.4G ......................................................... 14-1
1.6A.1 ................................................. 5-4, 6-25 2.4H ......................................................... 14-1
1.6B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 2.5A ......................................................... 6-17
1.6B.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 6 - 2 6 2.5B ......................................................... 6-17
1.6D ............................................ 5-4, 6 - 2 3 , 6 - 2 4 2.5D ......................................................... 6-22
 MSJC Specification Reference Index

Specification A r t i c l e MDG Pages Specification A r t i c l e MDG Panes

2.6A.2 ...................................................... 3-12 3.3G ......................................................... 6-19

2.6A.3 ...................................................... 3-12 3.3G.l.a .................................................... 6-21
2.6A.4 ......................................................... 6-5 3.3G.l.b ..................................................... 6-21
2.6B.2 ................................................... 6-5, 6-25 3.4A .................................................... 6-4, 6-12
3.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 6 - 3 , 6 - 1 9 3.4C.2 ........................................................ 6-11
3.1A. 1....................................................... 6-26 3.4C.3 ........................................................ 6-12
3.2 ............................................................. 5-5 3.4C.4 ........................................................ 6-12
3.2A ................................................... 6-4, 6-12 3.4C.5 ........................................................ 6-11
3.2B .......................................................... 6-3 3.4D .................................................. 14-8, 6-13
3.2C .................................................... 6-4, 6-14 3.4D.1 ............................. 6-12, 14-8, 17-142, 17-191
3.2C.1 ........................................................ 6-14 3.4D.3 ....................................................... 6-12
3.2C.2 ........................................................ 6-4 3.4D.6 ....................................................... 6-12
3.2F .......................................................... 6-11 3.4E .......................................................... 6-19
3.3 ............................................................. 6-8 3.4E. 1 ........................................................ 6-11
3.3B ......................................................... 6-13 3.4E.2 ........................................................ 6-11
3.3B.3.a ................................................... 17-183 3AE.3 ........................................................ 6-12
3.3B.3.b ................................................... 17-183 3.5 ........................................................... 6-16
3.3B.3.d .................................................... 6-15 3.5E .......................................................... 6-16
3.3B.4.c ....................................................... 6-9 3.6B ......................................................... 6-25
3.3B.6.a ................................................. 6-9, 6-14 3.7A ..................................................... 5-6, 6-25
3.3C .................................................. 4-3, 15-11 3.7B ..................................................... 5-8, 6-25
3.3E.6 ....................................................... 6-17 3.7C ......................................................... 6-25
3.3E.7 ....................................................... 6-18 3.7D ......................................................... 6-25
3.3F ........................................................... 6-7 3.8 ........................................................... 6-22

xvi

INTRODUCTION
asonry consists of relatively small units bonded
M together with mortar, and sometimes grouted
and reinforced with steel. Masonry units may be
stone, fired-clay, concrete, glass, or ceramic. Masonry is
one of mankind's oldest building materials.
Early masonry codes were entirely empirical, as
shown by requirements of minimum wall thicknesses and
maximum building heights. The so-called modem
empirical masonry code, ANSI A41.1, has for years been
the basis for the empirical design provisions for masonry
that are found in the model building codes.
In the early 1960s, masonry industry associations
began development of a technological data base of
masonry materials and assemblage performance through
internally- or externally- sponsored research and testing
programs. The result of these efforts culminated in such
design standards as the Brick Institute of America's (BIA)
Recommended Practice For Engineered Brick Masonry in
1966 and the National Concrete Masonry Association's
(NCMA) Specifications for Loadbearing Concrete
Masonry in 1970. Each document addressed only selected
masonry materials. In 1970, the American Concrete
Institute (ACI) Committee 531 published a report,
Concrete Masonry Structures - Design and Construction
and in 1976 published Specifications for Concrete
Masonry Construction (ACI 531.1-76). Both of these
documents served as the basis for Building Code
Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures (ACI 531-
79), which addressed only concrete masonry.
In the mid-1970s, The Masonry Society (TMS) began
development of a single structural masonry standard that
1-1
1
addressed both clay and concrete masonry. The TMS
standard, completed in 1981, served as the source
document for major changes to Chapter 24 of the Uniform
Building Code (UBC) that first appeared in the 1985
edition.
The masonry industry associations recognized the
need for a national design code covering all masonry
materials. The American Society of Civil Engineers
(ASCE) and the American Concrete Institute (ACI)
undertook this activity in the late 1970s. An agreement
resulted in the development by ACI/ASCE 530 Masonry
Structures Joint Committee, formed in 1978, of a
consensus standard for masonry design. The committee
members consisted of building officials, contractors,
researchers, educators, consultants, and material producers.
The developed document had to meet the rigid procedural
and consensus acceptance requirements of both
organizations. A code, to address design, and a
specification, to address construction, were drafted for
committee ballot by 1984. Final adoption of Code,
Specification, and Commentaries by ASCE and ACI
occurred in October 1988. The Building Code
Requirements for Masonry Structures was primarily
directed to the designer and code enforcement official.
The Specification for Masonry Structures was primarily
directed to the contractor and inspector.
The original joint ACI/ASCE Masonry Structures
Committee is now under the auspices of TMS, ACI, and
ASCE and has been renamed the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee (MSJC). This committee oversees revisions
and expansions to the original 1988 Code (now the MSJC

Code) and Specification (now the MSJC Specification).
The first revision of the 1988 documents passed public
review and was published in 1992.
Based on these activities, it became evident to TMS,
ACI, and the Council for Masonry Research (CMR - - a
coalition of national masonry trade associations) that a
manual, handbook, or guide document that specifically
addressed the application of the MSJC Code and
Specification with illustrative examples would be of
tremendous benefit to the industry. An agreement was
made among TMS, CMR, and ACI to prepare such a
guide. The Masonry Society wrote the document, CMR
provided financial resources during its development, and
ACI reviewed and published the product. The result of
these efforts was the first edition of the Masonry
Designers' Guide (MDG), published in 1993. The 1992
Code and Specification were superseded by the 1995
versions, which reflected updated provisions to the 1992
documents, plus new material on glass unit masonry,
anchored veneer, and seismic design. The second edition
of the Masonry Designers' Guide published in 1999
reflected these modifications. The 1995 Code and
Specification were then superceded by the 1999 Code and
Specification which was entirely reformatted and included
a number of new provisions on modulus of elasticity,
prestressed masonry, adhered veneer, hot weather
construction provisions, and inspection and quality
assurance criteria. Thus there was a need to revise the
second edition of the MDG.
Like the second edition of the Masonry Designers'
Guide, the third edition is composed of four major parts
divided into 17 chapters. Part I, General, is administrative
and applies to all other parts. Background information on
development of the MDG including author and reviewer
contributions is given in the Foreword and Chapter 1 -
Introduction. The Code Reference Index and the
Specification Reference Index tie discussions and design
example problem procedures to the appropriate MSJC
Code/Specification sections. Chapter 2 - Notation,
Definitions, and Abbreviations presents the MSJC Code
notation and definitions with modifications and
abbreviations found in the MDG. Where appropriate,
notation is defined within the MDG text.
Part II, Materials and Testing, primarily addresses the
Specification provisions as related to materials and testing.
The Code dictates compliance with the Specification.
Chapter 3 - Materials examines the provisions for clay or
shale masonry units, concrete masonry units, glass masonry
units, stone masonry units, mortar, grout, masonry
assemblages, reinforcement, and connectors. Chapter 4 -
1-2
Chapter 1
Testing addresses Specification requirements for testing
frequency and quality assurance provisions. The material
provisions during preconstruction and construction are
addressed along with assemblage testing.
Part HI, Construction, addresses quality assurance,
quality control, and hot and cold weather construction.
Quality assurance (QA) includes the administrative policies
and requirements related to quality control measures that
will achieve the owner's quality objectives. Chapter 5 -
Quality Construction addresses the items comprising
quality assurances including organizational responsibilities,
materials control, inspection, testing and evaluating,
noncomplying conditions, and records. Quality control is
the systematic performance of construction, testing, and
inspection. It consists of the operations of the contractor at
the construction site to obtain compliance with the contract
documents. Chapter 6 - Quality Control (QC) examines
the Specification provisions for masonry construction
preparation, such as: storage and protection of materials;
placement of materials including units, mortar, grout,
reinforcement, and connectors; and tolerances.
Chapters 5 and 6 deal with masonry construction in
light of quality assurance and quality control provisions in
the Specification. The Specification contains some
requirements that are mandatory and others that are
optional. The latter become mandatory when required by
the specifier. A compilation of these requirements in the
form of a checklist is given in MDG Table 6.5.1. The
extent of the quality assurance and quality control program
will vary with the size of the project. Suggested
applications of the Specification QA/QC provisions to
three usual types of masonry buildings (TMS Shopping
Center, DPC Gymnasium, RCJ Hotel) are presented in
MDG Table 6.5.2. Chapter 7 - Hot and Cold Weather
Construction addresses precautions during hot and cold
weather extremes.
Part IV, Design, covers the application of the Code
provisions to the structural design of masonry components
(beams, walls, columns, pilasters) for different types of
construction (multiwythe composite and noncomposite,
single wythe, unreinforced and reinforced) based on the
structural analysis of three different masonry buildings
(TMS Shopping Center, DPC Gymnasium, RCJ Hotel) for
various load conditions. These are the same buildings for
which Quality Assurance/Quality Control recommen-
dations are suggested in Chapter 6. Provisions on
prestressed masonry are presented throughout Part IV
culminating in structural design examples in Chapter 17.
Chapter 8 - Design Philosophy and Methodology
provides background on material strengths, loads, load
Introduction
combinations, masonry construction, and performance that
have produced a philosophy of masonry structural design.
Significant time is spent describing the structural behavior
of walls under different load conditions, boundary
conditions, and wall configurations. Basic beam behavior
is examined along with design criteria. Basic structural
considerations for beam-column behavior and prestressed
masonry are presented. The design methodology for each
component type as found in the Code is discussed and
referenced to appropriate Code sections in this chapter.
Chapter 9 - Distribution of Loads deals with structural
analysis aspects of gravity and lateral load distributions.
These are discussed first in global terms. Next the
evaluation of the global loads into loads on or within
individual components is considered. Example problems
with respect to global gravity and lateral load distribution,
along with interwall and intrawall load distribution, are
presented in Chapter 17-Building Design.
Chapter 10 - Movements covers the causes and
consequences of movements related to masonry
construction. Methods for determining the magnitude of
specific movements are presented. The chapter deals with
ways of accommodating the calculated movement in
masonry construction. Example problems to determine the
size and location of control joints and expansion joints are
given in Chapter 17. Based on the information presented
in Chapters 9 and 10, design of individual walls, lintels,
columns, and pilasters can be addressed in light of the
design methodology of the Code.
Chapter 11 - Flexure addresses the structural design
aspects of elements where flexure may occur - - walls,
pilasters, and beams. Both unreinforced and reinforced
elements are considered. Design example problems in
Chapter 17 detail the design procedure for elements such
as multiwythe composite and noncomposite walls,
unreinforced and reinforced retaining walls, unreinforced
and reinforced pilasters, lintels, and simple and continuous
reinforced masonry beams.
Chapter 12 - Flexure and Axial Load discusses
structural design aspects of columns, walls, and pilasters,
subjected to flexure and axial load. Columns are
reinforced elements as required by the Code. Walls and
pilasters may be unreinforced or reinforced. Design
examples in Chapter 17 for the three masonry structures
illustrate the Code methodology.
Chapter 13 - Shear presents the topic from the
viewpoint of out-of-plane loads (shear in masonry
components) and in-plane loads (shear walls). Design
examples in Chapter 17, some coordinated to previous
t-3
examples considered for flexure only, show application of
the Code shear provisions.
Chapter t4 - Reinforcement and Connectors
addresses strength requirements, corrosion resistance and
protection provisions, embedment criteria, and design
aspects of reinforcement and connectors. Numerous
design examples in Chapter 17 show not only application
of specific Code provisions for reinforcement and
connectors but also typical design methodology for several
typical connections.
Chapter 15 - Empirical Design and Veneer presents
the background of empirical codes ~om the original
Hammurabi Code through the provisions found in the 1999
Code. The Code's specific criteria for empirical design
restrictions, strength requirements, support provisions, and
minimum wall thickness are discussed. Aspects of bonding
wythes and anchoring intersecting walls, roofs, and floor
diagrams are presented. Design examples are presented in
Chapter 17 to address various aspects of masonry design
using the empirical provisions of the Code. In addition, the
new MSJC Code provisions for anchored and adhered
veneer are presented in Chapter 15.
Chapter 16 - Provisions For Seismic Design describes
how earthquake-resistant design of masonry buildings
requires provisions for ductility not generally required for
wind or other lateral loads. This chapter discusses these
provisions and presents the criteria of Code Section 1.13
that include minknum requirements for different seismic
performance categories intended to provide proper
performance of masonry structures subjected to
earthquakes.
Chapter 17 - Building Design presents application of
the Code and Specification provisions to three typical
masonry structures - - a single-story strip shopping center
(the TMS Shopping Center), a single-story gymnasium (the
DPC Gymnasium), and a four-story hotel (the RCJ Hotel).
For each structure, plans and elevations are presented,
followed by calculations of gravity design loads and lateral
design loads. For the generated load conditions, design
examples are presented to address masonry design.
The MDG is written in inch-pound units. Chapters 1
through 16 include approximate SI equivalents in
parentheses. Chapter 17 does not include SI equivalents.
 2

NOTATION, DEFINITIONS,
AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1 N O T A T I O N
A cross-sectional area of element, in.2 (mnl2) ba = total applied design axial force on an anchor bolt,
Aa = seismic coefficient representing effective peak lb(N)
acceleration bt,. = width of the transformed section at the plane of
mb = cross-sectional area of an anchor bolt, in.2 (mm2) interest, in. (mm)
A n = net cross-sectional area of masonry, in.2 (mm2) by = total applied design shear force on an anchor bolt,
4 , = projected area, on the masonry surface, of a right lbfN)
circular cone for anchor bolt allowable shear and bw = width of wall beam, in. (mm)
tension calculations, in.2 (mm2) C = compression force, lb (N)
Ap8 area of prestressing steel, in.2 (ram2) C = numeric coefficient in seismic load calculations,
A s = area of tension reinforcement, in.2 (mm2) ASCE 7
rD c = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber in
As- area of compression reinforcement, in.2 (mm2)
Ash = area of tension reinforcement for balanced bending, in. (mm)
condition, ino2(mlTl2) D = dead load or related internal moments and forces
ASl total area of laterally tied longitudinal reinforcing d = distance from extreme compression fiber to
steel in a reinforced masonry column or pilaster, centroid of tension reinforcement, in. (mm)
in? (mm2) d' = distance from extreme compression fiber to
AV cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement, in) centroid of compression reinforcement, in. (mm)
(mm2) db = nominal diameter of reinforcement, in. (mm)
A ~ seismic coefficient representing effective peak
"~ dv = actual depth of masonry in direction of shear
velocity-related acceleration considered, in. (mm)
Aw = pilaster cross-sectional area without flange, in.2 E = load effects of earthquake, or related internal
(mm2) moments and forces
A 1 wall influence area per ASCE 7, f (m2)
= Eg = modulus of elasticity of grout, psi (MPa)
A1 = bearing area, in.2 (mm2) Em = modulus of elasticity of masonry in compression,
A2 = effective bearing area, in.2 (ram2) psi (MPa)
a = depth of equivalent compression zone at nominal Es = modulus of elasticity of steel, psi (MPa)
strength, in. (mm) F~ = modulus of rigidity (shear modulus) of masonry,
B~ allowable axial force on an anchor bolt, lb (N) psi (MPa)
B ~ = allowable shear force on an anchor bolt, lb (N) e = eccentricity of axial load, in. (mm)
b = width of section, in. (mm) Fa = allowable compressive stress due to axial load
only, psi (MPa)

2-1
 Chapter 2
Fb allowable compressive stress due to flexure only, n lateral pressure of soil or related internal moments
psi (MPa) and forces
F b ~ = allowable bearing pressure, psi (MPa) h = effective height of column, wall or pilaster, in.
Fb, = allowable tensile stress due to flexure only, psi (mm)
(MPa) =
height above the base to the highest level of the
~= seismic force applied to a component of a building building, ft (m)
or equipment at its center of gravity, lb (N) h t = height of column, wall, or pilaster, in. (mm)
F, = allowable tensile or compressive stress in 1 = moment of inertia of masonry, in.4 (mm4)
reinforcement, psi (MPa) ~ = moment of inertia of cracked transformed section,
F~= allowable shear stress in masonry, psi (MPa) in. 4 ([nln 4)
f = calculated stress, psi (MPa) = effective moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
f~ = calculated compressive stress in masonry due to =
moment of inertia of gross section, neglecting
axial load only, psi (MPa) reinforcement, in.4 (mm4)
f~b = combined compressive stress in masonry due to ~r moment of inertia of the transformed area about
flexure and axial load, psi (MPa) the neutral axis, in.4 (mm4)
A = calculated compressive stress in masonry due to J ratio of distance between centroid of flexural
flexure only, psi (MPa) compressive forces and centroid of tensile forces
calculated bearing pressure, psi (MPa) to depth, d
f,= compressive strength of clay brick, psi (MPa) ratio of the distance between the neutral axis and
s~, = calculated tensile stress in masonry due to flexure the extreme fiber in compression to the depth, d
only, psi (MPa) coefficient of creep of masonry, per psi (MPa)
f-= specified compressive strength of concrete, psi coefficient of irreversible moisture expansion of
(MPa) clay masonry
f~.= net area compressive strength of concrete masonry element stiffness, in.-1 (mrn-1)
unit, psi (MPa) coefficient of shrinkage of concrete masonry
fg = compressive strength of grout, psi (MPa) coefficient of thermal expansion of masonry per
f,. = compressive strength of masonry, psi (MPa) degree Fahrenheit (degree Celsius)
f.= specified compressive strength of masonry, psi live load or related internal moments and forces
(MPa) 4 = bearing width, in. (mm)
fgi= specified compressive strength of masonry at the ~ = length of bearing plate, in. (mm)
time of prestress transfer, psi (MPa) l = clear span between supports, in. (mm)
f;~.= stress in prestressing tendon at nominal strength, =
effective embedment length of plate, headed or
psi (MPa) bent anchor bolts, in. (mm)
f;o= specified tensile strength of prestressing tendon, =
edge distance measured from the surface of an
psi (MPa) anchor bolt to the nearest free edge of masonry, in.
f~,= specified yield strength of prestressing tendon, psi (mm)
(MPa) embedment length or lap length of straight
f~ modulus of rupture, psi (MPa)
= reinforcement, in. (mm)
A calculated tensile or compressive stress in
= =
equivalent embedment length provided by
reinforcement, psi (MPa) standard hooks, in. (mm)
f . = compressive stress of steel, psi (MPa) =
horizontal length of wall, in. (mm)
f*b = ultimate shear strength of brick masonry, psi M = maximum moment occurring simultaneously with
(SPa) design shear force V at the section under
fse = effective stress in prestressing tendon after consideration, in.-lb (N-m)
prestress losses have occurred, psi (MPa) maximum moment in member at stage deflection
f~ = calculated shear stress in masonry, psi (MPa) is computed, in-lb (N-m)
f~ = specified yield strength of steel for reinforcement ~= moment at balanced condition without
and anchors, psi (MPa) compression steel, in.-lb (N-m)
g = ratio of distance between tension steel and M e t ~- cracking moment, in.-Ib (N-m)
compression steel to the overall column depth

2-2
Notation, Definitions, and Abbreviations
m -~-
moment as limited by allowable flexural T = forces and moments caused by restraint of
compression stress in masonry, in.-lb (N-m) temperature, shrinkage, and creep strains or
Il15~ bending moment at midspan of members, in.-lb differential movements
(N-m) t = nominal thickness of wall, or overall depth of
M.= nominal flexural strength of section, in.-lb (N-m) member cross-section, in. (mm)
ip= moment of applied load with respect to the tp = thickness of pilaster, in. (mm)
centroid of internal compressive force,in.-lb (N-m) v = shear stress, psi (MPa)
M,= moment as limited by allowable tension stress in V = design shear force, lb (N)
reinforcement, in.-lb (N-m) W = wind load or related internal moments and forces
M2= moment due to compression steel, in.-lb (N-m) W = total dead load, ASCE 7
N~= force acting normal to shear surface, lb (N) w = uniform loading, plf(N/m)
n = modular ratio Y = centroid of compression forces, in. (mm)
p = design axial load, lb (N) y = distance from neutral axis to a fiber in cross-
Pe = Euler buckling load, lb (N) section, in. (mm)
P.= allowable compressive force in reinforced yt = distance from centroidal axis o f gross section,
masonry due to axial load, lb (N) neglecting reinforcement, to extreme fiber in
PI = lateral load, Ib (N) tension
Pp~= prestressing tendon force at time and location 13 = 0.25 for fully grouted masonry or 0.15 for other
relevant for design, lb (N) than fully grouted masonry
t.= factored axial load used in Code Section 4.5.3.2, 13b = ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area
lb (N) of tension reinforcement at a section
O = first moment about the neutral axis of a section of A = change in length or deflection, in. (mm)
that portion of the cross section lying between the A = distance from the axial load to the centroid of the
plane under consideration and extreme fiber, in. 3 tension steel divided by d
(ram3) = strain, in./in. (mm/mm)
R radius of curvature, in. (mm) ~,, = compressive strain in masonry, in./in. (mm/mm)
R = reduction factor for slenderness ~, = tensile strain in reinforcement, in./in. (mm/mm)
R = seismic response modification factor = long term deflection factor
= relative rigidity 9 = ratio of tension reinforcement = A , / b d
r = radius of gyration, in. (ram) 9~ = ratio of compression reinforcement = A : , / b d
S = section modulus, in.3 (ram3) Pt = ratio of total longitudinal reinforcement = A.,t/bt
S = coefficient for the soil profile characteristics ~,, = compressive stress in masonry, psi (MPa)
S = spacing of reinforcement, in. (ram) (3 m = stress in masonry at location of compression
S1 = total linear drying shrinkage of concrete masonry reinforcement, psi (MPa)
units determined in accordance with ASTM C 426 ~s = tensile stress in steel, psi (MPa)
T ~___ tension force, lb ~ = compressive stress in steel, psi (MPa)
T = fundamental elastic period of vibration of the dp = strength reduction factor
building or structure, ASCE 7

2.2 DEFINITIONS
Anchor - Metal rod, wire, or strap that secures
masonry to its structural support.
A r c h i t e c t ~ E n g i n e e r ( A / E ) - T h e architect, engineer,
architectural firm, engineering firm, or architectural
engineering firm, issuing project drawings and
specifications, or administering the work under contract
specifications and drawings, or both.
Area, g r o s s c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l - T h e area delineated by
the out-to-out dimensions of masonry in the plane under
consideration.
Area, n e t c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l - T h e area of masonry units,
grout, and mortar crossed by the plane under consideration
based on out-to-out dimensions.
B a c k i n g - The wall or surface to which the veneer is
secured; typically concrete, masonry, steel framing, or
wood framing.

2-3

B e d j o i n t - The horizontal layer of mortar on which a
masonry unit is laid.
Bonded prestressing tendon - Prestressing tendon that
is encapsulated by prestressing grout in a corrugated duct
that is bonded to the surrounding masonry through
grouting.
Building o f f i c i a l - The officer or other designated
authority charged with the administration and enforcement
of the Code, or the building official's duly authorized
representative.
Camber - A deflection that is intentionally built into a
structural element to improve appearance or to nullify the
deflection of the element under the effects of loads,
shrinkage, and creep.
Cavity w a l l - A mutltiwythe noncomposite masonry
wall with a continuous air space within the wall (with or
without insulation), which is tied together with metal ties.
Collar j o i n t - Vertical longitudinal joint between
wythes of masonry or between masonry wythe and back-up
construction which is permitted to be filled with mortar or
grout.
Column - A n isolated vertical member whose
horizontal dimension measured at right angles to the
thickness does not exceed 3 times its thickness and whose
height is greater than 4 times its thickness.
Composite action - Transfer of stress between
components of a member designed so that in resisting
loads, the combined components act together as a single
member.
Composite masonry - Multicomponent masonry
members acting with composite action.
Compressive strength o f masonry, f , , - Maximum
compressive force resisted per unit of net cross-sectional
area of masonry, determined by the testing of masonry
prisms or by strength of individual masonry units, mortar,
and grout (the unit strength method) in accordance with the
provisions ofACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Connector - A mechanical device for securing two or
more pieces, parts, or members together, including
anchors, wall ties, and fasteners.
Design story drift - The difference of deflections at
the top and bottom of the story under consideration,
calculated by multiplying the deflections determined from
an elastic analysis under ASCE 7 seismic forces by the
appropriate deflection amplification factor, Ca.
Diaphragm - A roof or floor system designed to
transmit lateral forces to shear walls or other vertical
resisting elements.
Dimension, nominal - A nominal dimension is equal
to a specified dimension plus an allowance for the joints
2-4
Chapter 2
with which the units are to be laid. Nominal dimensions
are usually stated in whole numbers with the thickness
given first, followed by height and then length.
Dimensions, s p e c i f i e d - Dimensions specified for the
manufacture or construction of a unit, joint, or element.
Effective h e i g h t - Clear height of a braced member
between lateral supports and used for calculating the
slenderness ratio of a member. Effective height for
unbraced members shall be calculated.
Effective prestress - Stress remaining in prestressing
tendons after all losses have occurred.
Foundation p i e r - A n isolated vertical foundation
member whose horizontal dimension measured at right
angles to its thickness does not exceed 3 times its thickness
and whose height is equal to or less than 4 times its
thickness.
Glass unit masonry - Nonloadbearing masonry
composed of glass units bonded by mortar.
Head j o i n t - Vertical mortar joint placed between
masonry units within the wythe at the time the masonry
units are laid.
Header (Bonder) - A masonry unit that connects two
or more adjacent wythes of masonry.
Laterally-restrained prestressing tendon -
Prestressing tendon that is not free to move laterally within
the cross section of the member.
Laterally-unrestrained prestressing tendon -
Prestressing tendon that is free to move laterally within the
cross section of the member.
Load, d e a d - Dead weight supported by a member, as
defined by the general building code.
Load, live - Live load specified by the general
building code.
Load, service - Service load specified by the general
building code.
Modulus o f elasticity - Ratio of normal stress to
corresponding strain for tensile or compressive stresses
below proportional limit of material.
Modulus o f rigidity - Ratio of unit shear stress to
shear strain for unit shear stress below the proportional
limit of the material.
Post-tensioning - Method of prestressing in which
prestressing tendon is tensioned after the masonry has been
placed.
Prestressed masonry - Masonry in which internal
stresses have been introduced to counteract stresses
resulting from applied loads.
P r e t e n s i o n i n g - Method of prestressing in which
prestressing tendon is tensioned before the transfer of
stress into the masonry.
Notation, Definitions, and Abbreviations
Prestressing g r o u t - A cementitious mixture used to
encapsulate bonded prestressing tendons.
Prestressing t e n d o n - Steel elements such as wire,
bar, or strand, used to impart prestress to masonry.
Project drawings - The drawings that accompany the
project specifications and complete the descriptive
information for constructing the work required by the
contract documents.
Quality assurance - The administrative and
procedural requirements established by the contract
documents to assure that constructed masonry is in
compliance with the contract documents.
Reinforcement- Nonprestressed steel reinforcement.
Running b o n d - The placement of masonry units such
that head joints in successive courses are horizontally
offset at least one-quarter the unit length.
Specified compressive strength o f masonry f'~ -
Minimum compressive strength (expressed as force per
unit of net cross-sectional area) required of the masonry
used in construction by the contract documents, and upon
which the project design is based. Whenever the quantity
f ; , is under the radical sign, the square root of the
numerical value only is intended and the result still has
units of psi (MPa).
Stack b o n d - For the purpose of this code, stack bond
is anything other than running bond. Usually the
placement of units is such that the head joints in successive
courses are vertically aligned.
Stone masonry - Masonry composed of field,
quarried, or cast stone units bonded by mortar.
Stone masonry, ashlar - Stone masonry composed of
rectangular units having sawed, dressed, or squared bed
surfaces and bonded by mortar.
Stone masonry, rubble - Stone masonry composed of
irregular shaped units bonded by mortar.
Tendon anchorage - In post-tensioning, a device used
to anchor the prestressing tendon to the masonry or
concrete member; in pre-tensioning, a device used to
anchor the prestressing tendon during hardening of
2.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A C 1 - American Concrete Institute
A/E- architect/engineer
A N S I - American National Standards Institute
A S C E - A m e r i c a n Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE 7 - American Society of Civil Engineers Minimum
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
A S T M - American Society for Testing and Materials
B/A - Brick Industry Association
2-5
masonry mortar, grout, prestressing grout, or concrete.
Tendon coupler - A device for connecting two tendon
ends, thereby transferring the prestressing force from end
to end.
Tendon jacking f o r c e - Temporary force exerted by a
device that introduces tension into prestressing tendons.
Tie, lateral - Loop of reinforcing bar or wire
enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.
Tie, wall - Metal connector which connects wythes of
masonry walls together.
Transfer - Act of applying to the masonry member the
force in the prestressing tendons.
Unbonded prestressing tendon - Prestressing tendon
that is not permanently bonded to masonry.
Unreinforced m a s o n r y - Masonry in which the tensile
resistance of masonry is taken into consideration and the
resistance of the reinforcing steel is neglected.
Veneer, a d h e r e d - Masonry veneer secured to and
supported by the backing through adhesion.
Veneer, a n c h o r e d - Masonry veneer secured to and
supported laterally by the backing through anchors and
supported vertically by the foundation or other structural
elements.
Veneer, m a s o n r y - A masonry wythe that provides the
exterior fmish of a wall system and transfers out-of-plane
load directly to a backing, but is not considered to add load
resisting capacity to the wall system.
W a l l - A vertical element with a horizontal length at
least 3 times its thickness, used to enclose space.
Wall, loadbearing - Wall carrying vertical loads
greater than 200 lb/ft (2900 N/m) in addition to its own
weight.
Wall, masonry bonded hollow - A multiwythe wall
built with masonry units arranged to provide an air space
between the wythes and with the wythes bonded together
with masonry units.
Wythe - Each continuous, vertical section of a wall,
one masonry unit in thickness.
Code or MSJC Code or 530 Code or ACI/ASCE 530 -
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(AC1530/ASCE 5/TMS 402)
Code Commentary - Commentary on Building Code
Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530/ASCE 5
/TMS 402)
C M R - Council for Masonry Research
C M - center of mass
CMU- concrete masonry unit

CR - center of rigidity
IRA - initial rate of absorption
L L R F - live load reduction factor
M D G - Masonry Designers' Guide
M S J C - Masonry Standards Joint Committee
N.A. - neutral axis
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
-
PCA - Portland Cement Association
PCL - portland cement-hydrated lime
p s f - pounds per square foot
p / f - pounds per linear foot
2-6
Chapter 2
QA - quality assurance
Q C - quality control
S C F - slenderness correction factor
S E A O C - Structural Engineers Association of California
Spec. or 530.1 Specification - Specifcation f o r Masonry
Structures (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)
Spec. Commentary - Commentary on Specification f o r
Masonry Structures (AC1530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602)
S T P - Special Technical Publication
T M S - The Masonry Society
U B C - Uniform Building Code
UL - Underwriters Laboratory

3.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Specifications for structures designed under the
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structttres
(ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS 402-99) are written in
conformance with the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee (MSJC) Specification for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99). The
Specification encompasses provisions for commonly
used masonry materials and integrates provisions for
construction and quality assurance common to these
materials.
By direct reference in Code Section 1.15.1, the
Specification becomes a part of the Code and has the
same force of law as the Code when the Code is adopted
by a local governing body. Code Section 1.15.1 states:
Composition, quality, storage, handlin~
preparation and placement of materials, quality
assurance for materials and masonry, and
construction of masonry shall comply with ACI
530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
The variety and availability of materials produced by
the masonry industry provides designers with extensive
options to satisfy structural, aesthetic, fire resistance, and
other requirements for construction.
3,0.1 General Intent
The general intent of the materials provisions of the
Code and Specification is to ensure that products of
acceptable and defined quality are used throughout
masonry construction.
3-1
3
MATERIALS
3.0.2 Specification m Preface and
Checklists
To assist all members of the design and construction
team, the Preface (Specification, Article P3) and the
Specification Checklist (Specification, Article P5)
identify those areas of the Specification where decisions
regarding administration of the job, materials, and
submittals have to be made, or can be made. The
Specification Checklist consists of two parts:
• Mandatory Requirements Checklist
• Optional Requirements Checklist
3.0.3 Mandatory Specification
Requirements Checklist
Mandatory items required to be specified by the A/E
are significant since the A/E designates the desired level
of quality and performance of the masonry.
Typical examples in the Mandatory Specification
Checklist alert the A/E to:
2.1 Mortar materials: Specifiy type, color and
cementitious materials to be used in mortar
and mortar to be used for the various parts of
the project and the type of mortar to be used
with each type of masonry unit.
2.3 Masonry unit materials: Specify the masonry
units to be used for the various parts of the
projects.

3.0.4 Optional Specification
Requirements Checklist
The Optional Specification Checklist lists various
choices that can be made by the A/E while preparing the
contract documents. The decision to incorporate specific
items into the project specification depends on the level
of quality assurance required or specific project
requirements. Such requirements might include bond
pattern, mortar bedding, cold weather construction
procedures, and sample panels. When the A/E does not
decide to require certain specifications, the provisions
revert to default requirements. Caution and care are
required to ensure the quality of the end product. Each
project is different and decisions from previous projects
should not be applied indiscriminately to new projects.
3.0.5 Submittals
Submittals are addressed in Specification Article 1.5
Submittals.
When required by the contract documents,
submittals are to be made. These are optional
requirements of the Specification.
Good industry practice requires submittals. These
submittals, after approval, become the reference for
quality control acceptance or rejection of materials and
construction practices. Submittals should be maintained
throughout the entire construction period and handled as
described in the quality assurance program.
Sample masonry units should be submitted
whenever aesthetics are a primary consideration. These
samples should reflect the full range of colors, textures,
and finishes. Additionally, mortar samples should be
submitted when colored mortars are to be used. These
submittals should reflect the acceptable ranges. Neither
the Specification or material standards include
requirements or methods of evaluating aesthetic features
of materials. Representative sample materials in the
submittals are necessary to ensure complete
understanding of acceptable characteristics.
Mortar and grout material proportions determined
from tests to satisfy the property requirements of ASTM
Specifications C 270 and C 476, respectively, should also
be submitted when required.
3.1 U N I T S
The A/E should select the desired unit based on the
needs of the project, compliance with product
specifications, including requirements such as aesthetics,
strength, durability, availability, and such other attributes
as may be important. The ASTM product standards
3-2
Chapter 3
3.0.6 Material Specification
References
Material standards are referenced in Specification
Article 1.3. It is important that the specific standard be
used for acceptance or rejection of a given material,
basing such acceptance or rejection on
conformance/nonconformance with requirements
contained within the standard. Product standards may
contain provisions for a manufacturer's certification of
compliance of the product. Such certification by the
manufacturer provides an alternate to extensive testing
before product acceptance.
3.0.7 Material Specification
Requirements (ASTM)
ASTM product material specifications contain
requirements for acceptance or rejection of a material.
The requirements are either chemical or physical, or both,
depending on the specific product. Product
classifications are used to further identify the desired
product from within a range of similar products with
differing performance characteristics. Acceptance
without concern as to product subclassifications results in
confusion unless the materials specification contains a
default. In the absence of specific direction, the default
becomes the requirement. For example, ASTM C 270
contains both a proportion and a property specification
for mortars for unit masonry. The A/E may select either
specification but not both from within the standard. If the
A/E fails to indicate which specification will apply, the
standard dictates that the proportion specification shall
apply.
In Specification Article 1.3, material specifications
are identified by designation number, year of adoption,
and sometimes a letter to indicate the edition. If a
manufacturer supplies material under a standard with a
different edition than given in the specification or Code,
the designer needs to examine the standard for variations
from the specified edition. Specifiers are encouraged to
frequently update their job specifications to reference the
most current edition of each material specification.
reflect minimum requirements for any project. When
more stringent requirements are necessary, they must be
stated in the contract documents.
Masonry units are generally defined as either solid
or hollow. In general, solid units are not 100% solid
Materials
unless so specified. Units are usually formed with core
holes, to allow for more even curing or firing, and to
decrease the mass of the units without significantly
sacrificing performance. Units having core holes that
constitute 25 percent of the gross cross-sectional area
or less are considered solid units. If the core holes
remove more than 25 percent of the gross cross-
sectional area, the units are considered hollow. Hollow
masonry units are generally from 40 to slightly less
than 75 percent solid.
Masonry units covered within the Specification
include concrete masonry units, clay or shale masonry
units, stone masonry units, and hollow glass units.
Providing that the design criteria are met, individual units
selected may vary in composition and possess differing
chemical and physical properties. The longevity and
durability of the units in service and under expected
exposure conditions must be considered.
3.1.1 Product Specifications for
Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units are available with varied
compositions and performance characteristics. Based on
the intended application, units can be specified using the
following product specifications as given in Specification
Article 2.3A:
ASTMC 55 Standard Specification for Concrete
Brick
ASTMC73 Specification for Calcium Silicate
Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick)
ASTM C 90 Specification for Loadbearing
Concrete Masonry Units
ASTMC129 Specification for Non-Loadbearing
Concrete Masonry Units
ASTMC744 Specification for Prefaced Concrete
and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units
Various combinations of materials used in the
manufacture of the product affect product characteristics.
The specifications include specifying options and
associated requirements. For example, requirements for
natural or manufactured lightweight aggregates are
covered within material sections of each specification.
Use of these aggregates affects the weight of the finished
product. Classifications are assigned to various unit
weights and associated physical property requirements
are included based on classification. Some standards also
include grades and types that should be considered during
specification preparation.
3-3
Acceptance or rejection of the product is based on
conformance to the requirements of the specification.
The classification and property requirements are listed in
MDG Table 3.1.1.
Concrete masonry units are typically manufactured
to the minimum compressive strength listed in ASTM
standards. Higher unit strengths are available when
required by the design, but these higher strengths must be
specified and designers should be aware that these units
are not typically stocked and thus may require longer lead
times to obtain and have greater unit costs.
To limit potential volume change of concrete
masonry units, maximum allowable drying shrinkage is
limited to 0.065%.
The ASTM standards referenced by the 1999 MSJC
Specifications include provisions for limiting the
moisture content of concrete masonry units at the time of
delivery, depending upon their shrinkage properties and
the environmental moisture conditions (average annual
relative humidity) at the job site. These provisions are
structured so that similar performance (residual shrinkage
potential) can be anticipated regardless of the inherent
shrinkage properties of the units. Units with high
shrinkage potential are required to have lower moisture
content than units with low shrinkage potential. Type II
units are required to comply with all the same physical
criteria as Type I units with the exception of moisture
content. ASTM C 90-00 does not have Type I or Type II
designations and thus no moisture content requirements
at all. This change is expected to be reflected in the next
update of the MSJC Specifications.
3.1.2 Product Specifications for Clay
or Shale Masonry Units
Clay or shale masonry units are available with varied
core configurations and performance characteristics.
These units are covered by several product specifications
as noted in Specification Article 2.3 B:
ASTM C 34 Specification for Structural Clay Load-
Bearing Wall Tile
ASTMC 56 Specification for Structural Clay Non-
Load-Bearing Tile
ASTM C 62 Specification for Building Brick (Solid
Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C 126 Specification for Ceramic Glazed
Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick,
and Solid Masonry Units

ASTM C212 Specification for Structural Clay Facing
Tile
ASTM C216 Specification for Facing Brick (Solid
Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C 652 Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow
Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C 1088Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units
Made from Clay or Shale
ANSI 137.1 Specification for Ceramic Tile
As indicated by their titles, the product specifications
address clay or shale products consisting of brick, both
solid and hollow, and tile, both loadbearing and
nonloadbearing. Ceramic glazed units are available as
facing brick and tile and as solid units. The unit
properties that have requirements in the ASTM standards
are summarized in MDG Table 3.1.2.
These product specifications contain requirements
addressing durability and appearance when units are
intended for use as facing components as well as
structural components of the masonry. For example,
most brick used for facing will be required to meet the
3-4
Chapter 3
requirements of ASTM C 216 or ASTM C 652. The
primary difference between these two specifications is
the allowable percentage of void area. Under these
specifications the Grade classification addresses physical
properties of compressive strength and water absorption
for durability. Bricks produced in the U.S. typically have
compressive strengths that substantially exceed the
ASTM minimum values. The average compressive
strength of bricks in the marketplace is on the order of
12,000 psi (83 MPa). Strengths needed above the
required ASTM minimums must be specified by the
designer. The designer must select the required Grade ifa
Grade other than the most durable is desired. If no Grade
is specified, the most durable Grade is specified by
default. The Type classification addresses appearance.
Color, texture, and size are not covered by the
specification and must be specified by the purchaser.
Acceptance or rejection of the product is based on
conformance to the requirements of the specification.
The requirements for clay or shale masonry units are
listed in MDG Table 3.1.2.
Materials

Table 3.1.1 Product Specifications and Property Requirements According to ASTM Specifications
Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM Specification

C 55 C 73 C 90 I C 129 C 744

Classification

Grade N E
Grade S E
Grade MW E
Grade SW E, A
Type I, Moisture-controlled E E
Type II, Non-moisture-controlled E E
Weight Class E E

Property Requirements

Absorption, Water E E
Compressive Strength E E
Dimensions E E E
Distortion E
Facing Requirements U
Craze Resistance E
I .....

Chemical Resistance E
I '"

Adhesion E
Abrasion E
Surface Bum
Color and Change E
Soil and Clean E
Moisture Content I I I
Product Standard E
Visual E E l E

E Specification Entry I Type I units, singly

A Accepted in lieu of other classification U Base Unit Specification Applies

3-5
 Chapter 3
Table 3.t.2 Product Specifications and Property Requirements According to ASTM Specifications n
Cla or Shale Mason Units
ASTM Specification
C34 I C56 C62 C126 C212 [ C216 I C652 C1088
Classification

Grade Exterior
Grade LBX E,A
Grade LB E
Grade NB E
Grade SW E,A,D E,&D ~&D
Grade MW E,A E E
Grade NW E
Grade S E,D
Grade SS
E,D E
E
Solid Units E E E
Hollow Units E E E E
E
E
Standard E,D
E,A
)e FBS E,D
E
~BA E
E,D
E
E
E
E,D
E
E
Property Requirements
Absorption E E E E E
Cells E E E E E
Compressive Strength E E E E E E
Coring and Frogging E E
Dimensions Distortion E E E E E E E E
Durability E E E E
Efflorescence E E E
Saturation Coefficient E E E E
Shell and Web Thickness E E E E
Special Test Methods E
Visual Finish Properties E E E E E E
Weight E
E Specification Entry D Specified by Default A Accepted in lieu of other classification

3-6
Materials
3.1.3 Product Specifications for ASTM C 629 Specification for Slate Building Stone
Stone Masonry Units
ASTM specifications cover an array of building These specifications classify the building stone by
stones with compositions varying from marble to slate. composition, density, and application.
These are covered by several specifications as noted in The specifications require conformance to physical
Specification Article 2.3 C: requirements including one or more of the following
physical properties: absorption, density, compressive
ASTM C 503 Specification for Marble Building
strength, tensile strength (modulus of rupture), abrasion,
Stone (Exterior)
and acid resistance. Acceptance or rejection of the
ASTM C 568 Specification for Limestone Building
product is based on conformance to the requirements of
Stone
the applicable specification. The classifications and
ASTMC615 Specification for Granite Building
property requirements for stone masonry units are listed
Stone
in MDG Table 3.1.3.
ASTM C 616 Specification for Sandstone Building
Stone

Table 3,1.3 Product Specifications and Property Requirements According to ASTM Specifications m
Building Stone

ASTM Specification
C503 C568 { C615 [ C616 [ C629

Classification
I Calcite E
II Dolomite E
111 Serpentine E
IV Travertine E
I Low Density E
II Medium Density E
III High Density E
By Application E
I Sandstone E
II Quartzitic Sandstone E
III Quartzite E
I Interior E
II Exterior E
Property Requirements
Abrasion by C 241 E E E E E
Absorption by C 97 E E E E Ec 121
Acid Resistance by C 217 E
Compressive Strength by C 170 E E E E
Density by C 97 E E E E
Flexural Strength by C 880 E E
Modulus of Rupture by C 99 E E E E Ec t2o
E Specification
Entry

3-7

3.1.4 Product Specifications for
Hollow Glass Units
The MSJC Specification, in Article 2.3 D, requires
that hollow glass units be partially evacuated and have a
minimum glass face thickness of 3/16 in. (4.8 mm).
Solid units are to be used where required. All units are to
have those surfaces that will be in contact with mortar
treated with polyvinyl butyral or latex-based paint.
Reclaimed units are not to be used.
There are currently no ASTM standards for glass
masonry units. Fire resistance of glass unit masonry is
defined in Underwriters Laboratory Classification
R2556, Underwriters Laboratory of Canada File CR1715,
and in accordance with NFPA 80 as fire-rated window
assemblies as tested in accordance with ASTM E 163,
U.L. 9, or CAN4-S106-MS0.
Product specifications for glass masonry units are
available from manufacturers. These specifications
provide details on unit dimensions and patterns, as well
as thermal properties, fire resistance, sound trausmission,
and other physical characteristics for three types of glass
blocks:
Hollow B l o c k - Molded half-block units that are beat-
sealed at high temperature (glass-to-glass-seal),
which produces a partial vacuum within the unit.
Solid Block - - Primarily used in security and vandalism-
prone applications.
Solid Paver B l o c k - - Used for walkways and skylights.
Hollow glass blocks or solid glass blocks may be
standard or thin units. Standard glass units have a
specified thickness of 3-7/8 in. (98.4 ram). Thin glass
units have a specified thickness of 3-1/8 in. (79.4 mm)
for hollow units or 3 in. (76.2 mm) for solid units.
Glass units are available in a variety of face-
dimension sizes, as follows:
Square - - 6-in. nominal (152 mm); 8-in. nominal (203
mm); or 12-in. nominal (305 mm)
Rectangular-- 4 x 8-in. nominal (101 x 203 ram); or 6 x
8-in. nominal (152 x 203 mm)
Comer Sizes - - 6-in. nominal (152 mm) and 8-in.
nominal (203 mm) (referenced by height dimension)
A variety of face patterns are also available: clear
glass with smooth faces providing high transparency;
3-8
Chapter 3
wavy and fluted patterns with minimal or moderate
visual distortion; stippled and diamond patterns for visual
privacy; and ribbed patterns for maximum privacy as
well as light diffusion and glare reduction.
3.1.5 Product Testing and
Conformance
Individual product standards reference applicable
test methods to measure the required physical properties.
Test methods of special interest to the designer and the
properties covered by each are noted in MDG Table
3.1.4.
The test procedures are delineated for each of the
individual physical properties of interest. Test methods
provide no acceptance or rejection criteria. Acceptance
or rejection criteria are contained in the product
specifications.
3.1.6 Product Receipt and Storage
Following acceptance of the product, handling and
storage of the units on site will affect the quality of the
masonry. The units should be received and stored so as
to prevent degradation of desired properties (see MDG
Section 6.1.1). Unprotected units and stone can be
degraded by allowing water to contact the units, thereby
altering their moisture content, or by allowing ground or
soil to contaminate surfaces, thereby altering the bonding
characteristics and appearance of the units.
The degree of protection to be provided a product
from the time of its manufacture until the time of its use
should be mutually agreed to by the manufacturer and the
purchaser. Plastic wrapping that envelops palletized
products provide an easy system for product protection.
3,1,7 Manufacturers'
Recommendations
Product manufacturers are in key positions to learn
of successful applications and procedures. Unsuccessful
applications and procedures are also well known to
them. In specifying product applications and procedures,
manufacturers' recommendations (usually contained in a
product description or technical sheet, or listed on a tag
attached to palletized units) should be considered
together with past performance of the products and the
personal experience of the designer.
Materials

Table 3.1.4 ASTM Test Methods and Properties for Masonry Units
ASTM Standard [ Title Properties Covered

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

ASTM C 140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Compressive Strength
Units Absorption
Weight
Moisture Content
Dimensions
ASTM C 426 Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Drying Shrinkage
Units
CLAY AND SHALE MASONRY UNITS
ASTM C 67 Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Modulus of Rupture
Clay Tile Compressive Strength
Absorption
Saturation Coefficient
Freezing & Thawing Resistance
Efflorescence
Initial Rate of Absorption
Weight
Size
Warpage
Length Change
Void Area
Out of Square

STONE
ASTM C 97 Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Absorption
Natural Building Stone Bulk Specific Gravity
ASTM C 99 Modulus of Rupture of Natural Building Modulus of Rupture
Stone
ASTM C 120 Flexural Testing of Slate Modulus of Rupture
Modulus of Elasticity
ASTM C 121 Water Absorption of Slate Water Absorption
ASTM C 170 Compressive Strength of Natural Building Compressive Strength
Stone

3.2 MORTAR
Mortar is the bonding agent that holds the individual
units, reinforcement, and connectors together to act as a
complete assembly.
Many mortar properties contribute to proper
performance of a wall. Compressive strength is only
one of the properties, and may not be the most
important one. Mortar-unit bond has a more significant
influence on the flexural strength of unreinforced
masonry, and can also be related to resistance to
moisture penetration. Fluidity and workability affect
the mason's ability to place the mortar, and may affect
the quality of workmanship.
For construction projects in which masonry
strength properties are critical, pre-construction testing
of prisms built with the specified units and mortar may
be warranted. Flexural strength can be assessed in the
laboratory by flexural prism tests or by bond wrench
testing (MDG Sections 4.1, 4.2, and 5.4.1.5).
Most masonry mortars are produced at the
construction site, though prebatched mortars are available
in certain geographical areas. The MSJC Specification
addresses mortars prepared at the construction site. By
exception to Specification Article 2.1 and to ASTM C
270, the contract documents may permit the use of ready-
mixed mortars or prebatched mortar mixes. Dry mortar

3-9

ingredients may also be delivered to the job for use in
prebatched silo systems that are capable of producing
controlled, on-site automatic mixing.
3.2.1 Selection of Mortar Type
The selection of the proper mortar, coupled with a
specified masonry unit, to attain the desired masonry
strength and other performance characteristics, should be
based on a knowledge of the units, the various mortar
types available, and the compatibility of the two
components. No single mortar type or combination of
mortar type and unit type is considered appropriate for all
applications. Allowable flexuml tensile stress as a
function of mortar type and mortar materials is given in
Code Table 2.2.3.2. The compressive strength of clay
masonry and concrete masonry as a function of mortar
type is given in Specification Tables 1 and 2,
respectively.
Specification Article 2.1A requires the use of ASTM
Specification C 270, Mortars for Unit Masonry. The
mortar specification consists of a proportion specification
and a property specification. Mortar should be specified
either by proportion or by property, but not by both.
When neither the proportion nor the property
specification is specified, the proportion specification
governs. Both specifications recognize four types of
mortar.
Cementitious materials that can be used in the
production of the mortar include portland cement, lime,
mortar cement and masonry cement. Sixteen mortar
combinations are listed. To ease selection of the mortar
type, ASTM C 270 contains an extensive appendix that
lists and discusses many considerations.
The A/E should recognize that the provisions of the
proportion specifications of ASTM C 270 are based on
performance of the indicated combinations of
cementitious materials and aggregate ratios. The
combinations have been time-tested.
The A/E should consider the merits of the various
mortar compositions and types with regard to the
materials available within the project area. The following
considerations are good practice:
1. Use the mortar type that provides the desired
physical characteristics; do not use a mortar type
with higher compressive strength than necessary.
2. Unless dictated by compressive strength or
durability requirements, avoid the selection of Type
M mortar over Type S mortar.
3-10
Chapter 3
3.2.2 ASTM C 270 Mortar Types
3.2.2.1 Proportion Specification - -
Under the proportion specification within ASTM C 270,
four mortar types are recognized. Composition of the
mortar is based on the selection of portland cement in
combination with hydrated lime, portland cement in
combination with masonry cement or masonry cement
alone, portland cement in combination with mortar
cement or mortar cement alone. The proportions of
cementitious materials (portland cement, lime, mortar
cement and masonry cement) and the volume ratio of
aggregate to the sum of the cementitious materials are
prescribed.
The proportion specification gives more control to
the specifier over the quantities of materials to be used in
the mortar. It is not equivalent in performance to the
property specification and typically yields higher
compressive strength mortars than the minimum
prescribed in the property specification counterpart.
3.2.2.2 Property Specification-
Under the optional property specification within ASTM
C 270, trial combinations of cementitious materials,
aggregates, and water are laboratory tested to establish
the proportions of ingredients that yield a mortar that
complies with the specifications.
The property specification allows any combination
of permitted cementitious materials with 2-1/4 to 3-1/2
parts by volume of damp, loose aggregate. Those
properties that must be evaluated are compressive
strength, air content, and water retention. The
requirements for these properties in ASTM C 270 apply
only to mortar mixed in the laboratory under specified
conditions and should not be used to evaluate field
mortars. In-situ mortar compressive strength is not
covered by ASTM C 270.
3.2.3 Cementitious Materials
Cementitious materials used in masonry mortars
include portland cements, blended cements, slag cements,
mortar cements, masonry cements, and hydrated lime.
Each of these materials is covered by a unique material
specification. The most common materials used in
masonry mortars are combinations of portland cement
with lime, combinations of portland cement with
masonry cement or mortar cement, and masonry cement
or mortar cement alone. Slag cements are allowed when
used under the property specification of ASTM C 270.
Materials
Individual materials possess certain desired
characteristics that influence the workability of masonry
mortar. Masonry cements are now available as Types M,
S, and N. These cements are special formulations
addressing the needs of the masonry industry. In some
geographical areas, blended mixtures of portland cement
and hydrated lime are available and are suitable for the
production of ASTM C 270 mortars Type M, S, or N.
These preblended cementitious materials, though not
covered by an existing product specification, provide the
single-bag advantage common to masonry cements.
Mortar cement was added in the 1999 MSJC and is
also included in the latest ASTM C 270 specification.
Mortar cement, is similar to masonry cement. Unlike
masonry cement, however, mortar cement is required to
satisfy type-dependent requirements for minimum
flexural bond strength in ASTM C 1329.
For masonry structural design considerations
involving flexural tension, the allowable stress according
to Code Table 2.2.3.2 is influenced by the type of
cementitious material used in the mortar. The Code
assigns lower values of allowable flexural tensile stresses
for masonry made with masonry cement or air-entrained
portland cement-lime mortar than for masonry made with
non-air-entrained portland cement-lime mortars or mortar
cement mortars. Type N mortar and masonry cement
mortar are not allowed to be used as part of the lateral
force-resisting system in Seismic Performance Categories
D andE.
3.2.4 Aggregates
Aggregates for masonry mortar are covered by
ASTM C 144. This specification recognizes the need for
certain chemical and physical characteristics of fine
aggregate used in masonry mortars. The specification
lists separate grading requirements for natural and
manufactured sand, and includes criteria intended to
control deleterious materials and organic impurities, to
ensure soundness.
A masonry sand should impart good workability and
strength to the masonry mortar. Fine, round particles are
desired, along with desirable gradation, to allow support
of masonry units after placement. Masonry sands
generally possess fine gradations which, when used in
mortar, facilitate handling and placement. However, with
mortar composed of fine graded sand only, the water
demand is higher, resulting in lower compressive
strength.
Masonry sand can comply with ASTM C 144 by
meeting either the grading requirements or the use
3-11
requirements of that standard. The latter requires that the
sand produce a mortar meeting the property requirements
ofASTM C 270.
3.2.5 W a t e r
Water used in mortar should be relatively free of
chlorides, organic impurities, and other deleterious
substances. Potable water typically is acceptable.
3.2.6 Mortars Containing Hydrated
Lime
Masonry mortars prepared using a combination of
portland cement and hydrated lime have performance
characteristics dependent on the amount of hydrated lime
added to the mixture. High-cement-content mortars
possess higher compressive strength; high lime-content
mortars possess better workability and higher water-
retention.
Portland cement-lime mortars generally require high
water contents, considered beneficial for satisfying water
demand of units with higher absorption. The paste
resulting from the combination of cement, hydrated lime,
and water promotes the intimate contact of mortar with
unit, thus enhancing bond between the two components.
Hydrated lime hardens over time as a result of the
chemical combination with carbon dioxide in the air.
Thus complete hardening of portland cement-lime mortar
takes place over a long time period. This characteristic
aids in filling small hairline shrinkage cracks.
During cold-weather masonry construction, high
water contents of portland cement-lime mortars make
them more susceptible to early freezing. For above-
normal temperatures, dry conditions, or while using
highly-absorptive masonry units, portland cement-lime
mortars perform better when their lime content is
increased.
Unhydrated oxides in mortar will hydrate over time,
causing expansion and consequent cracking. ASTM C
207 gives the limits on the unhydrated oxide content of
Type S, special-hydrated lime, thus assuring the
soundness of mortar. ASTM C 270 requires the use of
ASTM C 207 Types S or SA lime unless tests or
performance records indicate that a particular Type N or
Type NA lime will not be detrimental to mortar
soundness.
3.2.7 Mortars Containing Masonry
C e m e n t or Mortar C e m e n t
Masonry cement and mortar cement are
manufactured products consisting of a mixture of

portland or blended cement and plasticizing materials
(such as hydrated lime or finely ground limestone)
together with other materials introduced to enhance
performance. Air entrainment improves freeze thaw
durability, workability, and water retention
characteristics. The portland cement fraction of the
masonry cement or mortar cement, due to fineness of
grinding, hydrates more rapidly than the portland cement
in ordinary portland cement-lime mixtures.
ASTM C 91 recognizes three types of masonry
cement: M, S, and N. ASTM C 1329 covers three types
of mortar cement: M, S, and N. These masonry cements
and mortar cements promote ease of mortar preparation
at the project. The single-bag concept tends to reduce on-
site variables during mortar preparation.
Masonry cement and mortar cement mortars,
because of their intentionally-entrained air, require less
water than portland cement-lime mortars. The lower
water content is beneficial in cold weather construction
and with low-absorption units. However, the lower water
content becomes a detriment when using very absorptive
masonry units on hot, low-relative-humidity days. The
information in the Appendix of ASTM C 270 provides
the designer with guidance in determining the selection
of mortar for a specific use.
3.2.8 Admixtures
As indicated in ASTM C 270, the use of admixtures
in mortar is prohibited unless specified by the A/E or the
owner's designated representative. This prohibition is in
3.3 GROUT
Grout is a fluid cementitious mixture used to bond
together adjacent masonry units or wythes, to bond steel
reinforcement positioned in the collar joint between
adjacent wythes, or to bond steel reinforcement in the
cores of masonry units to the masonry. Grout is also
used to fill reinforced bond beams. Slump ranges of 8 in.
(203 mm) to 11 in. (279 mm) allow the grout to flow
properly into the cavities of cells. Mortar should not be
used for these purposes because its fluidity is inadequate
to completely fill voids.
Proportions and strength requirements for fine and
coarse grout materials are specified in ASTM C 476.
Selection of the appropriate grout type depends on the
grout space available in the masonry. Selection of either
3-12
Chapter 3
keeping with the concept that admixtures should not be
used indiscriminately and that proof of the suitability of
admixtures should be demonstrated by tests involving the
materials under temperature and relative humidity
conditions that presumably require their use. Admixtures
containing more than 0.2 percent chloride ions are
disallowed by Specification Article 2.6 A.3.
When specified, mineral oxides or carbon black may
be used to impart color to mortar. Specification Article
2.6 A.2 delineates types and proportions of pigment that
are permitted to be used in masonry mortars. Using
excessive amounts of pigment may reduce compressive
and bond strength of mortars. Providing limits in the
Specification is an attempt to keep such losses to an
acceptable level.
The Specification implies the use of job-site
pigments only. However, colored cementitious materials
are available from various manufacturers. If specified,
colored mortar must comply with the property
specifications ofASTM C 270, no matter what procedure
is used for coloring.
Testing in accordance with the property
specifications of ASTM C 270 is recommended for any
mortar containing an admixture. Acceptance of the
mortar mixture containing an admixture should be based
on materials tested under the conditions of temperature
and relative humidity that will prevail during use.
Consideration should be given to the effect of admixtures
on embedded materials, such as steel or aluminum.
fine or coarse grout is controlled by Code Section 1.15.2.
When specified by strength, a minimum compressive
strength of 2000 psi (14 MPa) is required, although the
A/E can specify a higher strength grout if needed. Grout
strength is determined using ASTM Test Method C 1019.
Fine grout is composed of one part by volume
portland cement, 0 to 1/10 part by volume hydrated lime,
and some portion of free aggregate, as defined by product
specification ASTM C 404. The aggregate-to-
cementitious material ratio is 2-1/4 to 3, on a volumetric
basis. Coarse grout is similar to fine grout but contains
an additional 1 to 2 parts by volume of coarse aggregate
as defined in ASTM C 404.
Materials
3.4 M A S O N R Y
The basic materials used in masonry assemblages
include clay units, concrete units, stone units, glass unit
masonry, mortar, grout, and steel reinforcement. The
mechanical properties of masonry used by the designer in
sizing an assemblage or evaluating performance include
compressive strength, flexural strength, shear strength,
and modulus of elasticity. Fire rating, acoustics,
esthetics, durability, heat transmission, dimensional
stability and economics must also be considered.
Masonry strength in compression, flexure, and shear
is affected by many factors. It varies depending on the
mortar type, the mortar materials, the units used, and the
workmanship. Both the unit size and the direction of
loading (parallel or perpendicular to the mortar bed joint)
affect masonry strength.
Bond strength is affected by the initial rate of
absorption, texture, and cleanliness of the masonry units.
The water retentivity, flow, cement content, and air
content of mortar affect plastic properties as well as its
bond strength.
3.4.1 Compressive Strength of Clay
Masonry
Specification Table 1 is given here as MDG Table
3.4.1; it is based on the assumption that for Types M or S
mortar the masonry compressive strength f ~ (psi)
=1.22(0.25 f~ + 400), and for Type N mortar f~, (psi) =
1.22(0.2 f~, + 400), where f~ is the compressive strength
(in psi) of the brick units as determined by ASTM C 67.
The table indicates that masonry made with the material
combinations listed will have at least the compressive
strengths given.
The table and interpolation equations may be used to
verify design requirements or estimate masonry
compressive strength without having to test the materials
as an assemblage.
Use of the assumed values given by the table is
permitted only under the following according to
Specification Article 1.4B.2a:
1. The units must conform to appropriate ASTM
standards,
3-13
2. The mortar bed joints cannot exceed 5/8 in. (16 ram)
thickness, and
3. If used, grout must conform to ASTM C 476 or have
a compressive strength at least of 2000 psi (13.8
MPa) measured according to ASTM C 1019, but not
less thanf~,.
If these conditions are not met, prism testing is
required. Tests of masonry prisms must be performed if
more accurate values of compressive strength are desired.
Measured strengths are likely to exceed the values in the
table. Prism testing also allows the designer to choose
the combinations of materials to achieve the strength
used in the design. The test prism is an assemblage of
masonry units, mortar and grout if the actual construction
is design as grouted masonry. The tests are to be
performed in accordance with ASTM C 1314.
3.4.2 Elastic Modulus of Clay
Masonry
The elastic modulus of clay masonry is related to
individual constituent properties and correlates well with
the compressive strength of clay masonry. The Code
permits the estimation of elastic modulus based on the
specified compressive strength of the masonry, f~n as
described in Code Section 1.8.2.2.1.
Thus for clay masonry: Em= 700f~,
In previous editions of the MSJC Code, modulus of
elasticity was estimated based on the mortar type and
compressive strength of units. The committee modified
this in the 1999 Code because the new equation is simple
to use and provides reasonably accurate results. MDG
Table 3A.2 shows elastic moduli for typicalf~, values.
Alternatively, the elastic modulus can be determined by
testing in accordance with ASTM E 111 and the
provisions of Specification, Article 1.4 B.3 and Code
Section 1.8.2.2.1 where it is specified that Em be
determined as the chord modulus taken between 0.05 f~,
and 0.33 f ' .
 Chapter 3

Table 3.4.1 Compressive Strength of Clay Masonry Based on the Compressive Strength of Clay Masonry
Units and Type of Mortar Used in Construction

Net Area Compressive Strength of Clay Masonry Units, psi (MPa) Net Area Compressive Strength of

Type M or S mortar Type N mortar Masonry, psi (MPa)

1700 (11.72) 2100 (14.48) 1,000 (6.90)

3350 (23.10) 4150 (28.61) 1,500 (10.34)
4950 (34.13) 6200 (42.75) 2,000 (13.79)
6600 (45.51) 8250 (56.88) 2,500 (17.24)
8250 (56.88) 10,300 (71.02) 3,000 (20.69)
9900 (68.26) --- 3,500 (24.13)
13,200 (91.01) 4,000 (27.58)

Table 3.4.2 Values of Elastic Modulus and Shear Modulus for Clay Masonry

Specified Compressive Strength of Modulus of Elasticity, Era, psi Modulus of Rigidity, E~, psi
Masonry, f ~ , psi (Mpa) (Ml'a) (MVa)
1000(6.90) 700,000(4,830) 280,000 (1,930)
1500(10.34) 1,050,000 (7,245) 420,000(2,900)
2000(13.79) 1,400,000 (9,660) 560,000 (3,865)
2500(17.24) 1,750,000 (12,075) 700,000 (4,830)
3000(20.69) 2,100,000(14,490) 840,000 (5,795)
3500(24.13) 2,450,000(16905) 980,000 (6,760)
4000 (27.58) 2,800,000 (19,320) 1,120,000 (7,730)
Basedon E~,= 700f~,andE~= 0.4F_~

3.4.3 Compressive Strength of 3.4.4 Elastic Modulus of Concrete

Concrete Masonry
The compressive strength of concrete masonry
depends on properties of the masonry units, mortar, and
grout. As with clay brick masonry, the compressive
strength can be conservatively estimated from
Specification Article 1.4B.2b as shown in MDG Table
3.4.3.
For more accurate determination of concrete
masonry compressive strength, prism testing can be
employed. Tests are to be performed in accordance with
ASTM C 1314. See MDG Section 3.4.1 for restrictions
on the use of the assumed table values and required
procedures for prism testing.
Masonry
As with clay masonry, the elastic modulus of
concrete masonry is now based on the specified
compressive strength of the masonry, f~, as described in
Code Section 1.8.2.2.1.
Thus for concrete masonry: Em= 9 0 0 f "
In previous editions of the MSJC Code, modulus of
elasticity was estimated based on the mortar type and
compressive strength of units. The committee modified
this in the 1999 Code because the new equation is simple
to use and provides reasonably accurate results. MDG
Table 3.4.4 shows elastic moduli for typicalf',, values.

3-14
Materials

Table 3.4.3 Compressive Strength of Concrete Masonry Based on the Compressive Strength of
Concrete Masonry Units and Type of Mortar Used in Construction

Net Area Compressive Strength Net Area Compressive Strength of

Of Concrete Masonry Units, psi (MPa) Masonry, psi 1 (MPa)

Type M or S mortar Type N mortar

1250(8.62) 1300(8.96) 1000(6.90)
1900(13.10) 2150(14.82) 1500(10.34)
2800(19.31) 3050(21.03) 2000(13.79)
3750(25.86) 4050(27.92) 2500(17.24)
4800(33.10) 5250 (36.20) 3000 (20.69)
l Forunitsof lessthan4 in. (102mm)height,use 85 percentofthe valueslisted.
Table 3.4.4 Values of Elastic Modulus and Shear Modulus for Concrete Masonry

Specified Compressive Strength of Modulus of Elasticity, Era, psi Modulus of Rigidity, Ev, psi (MPa)
Masonry,f~,, psi (MPa) (MPa)
1000 (6.90) 900,000 (6,205) 360,000 (2,480)
1500 (10.34) 1,350,00 (9,310) 540,000 (3,725)
2000 (13.79) 1,800,000 (12,415) 720,000 (4,965)
2500 (17.24) 2,250,000 (15,519) 900,000 (6,208)
3000 (20.69) 2,700,000 (18,620) 1,080,000 (7,450)
3500 (24.13) 3,150,000 (21,725) 1,260,000 (8,690)
4000 (27.58) 3,600,000 (24,830) 1,440,000 (9,930)
Basedon E~--900f'm andF~=0.4Em

3.4.5 F l e x u r a l S t r e n g t h of M a s o n r y
Flexural cracks in masonry form primarily at the
unit-mortar interface. Resistance to such cracks depends
on the tensile bond strength of the unit - mortar
combination. Therefore, bond strength is an important
physical property of masonry, because higher bond
strength is normally associated with reduced cracking.
Bond strength is primarily a function of:
1. Initial rate of absorption, texture, and cleanliness of
unit;
2. Water retentivity, flow, cement and air content of
mortar;
3. Quality of workmanship; and
4. Curing Environment.
Typically, bond strength provided by portland cement-
lime mortar and mortar cement mortar is higher than that
provided by masonry cement mortar. The higher bond
strength achieved by the use of non-air-entrained portland
cement - lime mortar and mortar cement mortar is
recognized in Code Table 2.2.3.2, given here as MDG
Table 3.4.5.

3-15
 Chapter 3

Table 3.4.5 Allowable Flexural Tensile ;tress for Clay and Concrete Masonry, psi (kPa)
Mortar Types
Portland Cement/Lime or Masonry Cement and Air-Entrained
Masonry Type Mortar Cement Portland Cement/Lime

M or S N M or S N

Normal to bed joints

Solid units 40 (276) 30 (207) 24 (166) 15 (103)
Hollow units 1
Ungrouted 25 (172) 19(131) 15 (103) 9 (62)
Fully grouted 68 (469) 58 (4oo) 41 (283) 29 (0200)

Parallel to bed joints in running bond

Solid units 80 (552) 60 (414) 48 (331) 30 (207)
Hollow units
Ungrouted and partially grouted 50 (345) 38 (262) 30 (2o7) 19 (131)
Fully grouted 80 (552) 60 (414) 48 (331) 30 (207)

For partially grouted masonry, allowable stresses shall be determined on the basis of linear interpolation between hollow units that are fully grouted or
ungrouted and hollow units based on amount of grouting.

3.4.6 S h e a r in M a s o n r y = 60 psi (414 kPa) for masonry in running bond

3.4.6.1 A l l o w a b l e S h e a r Stresses - that is grouted solid
The allowable shear stresses in clay and concrete 4. 15 psi (103 kPa) for masonry in other than running
masonry depend on the direction of the load. For out-of- bond with other than open end units that are grouted
plane loading of multiwythe walls, Code Section solid.
2.1.3.2.2 allows: 3.4.6.2 S h e a r Modulus - For computing
1. for mortared collar joints, 5 psi (34.5 kPa) deflection of deep masonry members such as shear walls,
2. for grouted collar joints, 10 psi (69.0 kPa) the shear modulus of elasticity is needed. In Code
3. for headers, Section 1.8.2.2.2, the shear modulus is estimated using
~/unit compressive strength o f h e a d e r s , psi the following relationship:
Ev = 0.4 E,,
(MPa).
Since the 1999 Code estimates the modulus of elasticity
These allowable values are for shear stresses developed
for clay masonry as 7 0 0 f ' , E~ can be calculated directly
at the interfaces of wythes and collar joints or within
from the specified compressive strength of the masonry
headers.
as:
In-plane allowable shear stresses, such as developed
E~ = 280f~
in shear walls, are governed by Code Section 2.2.5.2.
MDG Table 3.4.2 shows shear modulus values for clay
These allowable stresses are:
masonry of various strengths.
1. 1.5 ~ m '
2. 120 psi (827 kPa) Since the 1999 Code estimates the modulus of elasticity
3. v+O.45N~/A. for concrete masonry as 900 f~,, E~ can be calculated
Where v : directly from the specified compressive strength of the
= 37 psi (255 kPa) for masonry in running bond masonry as:
that is not grouted solid, or E~ = 360f~,
= 37 psi (255 kPa) for masonry in other than MDG Table 3.4.4 shows shear modulus values for
running bond with open end units that are concrete masonry of various strengths.
grouted solid, or

3-16
Materials
3.5 METAL CONNECTORS AND REINFORCEMENT
3.5.1 General 3.5.5 Joint R e i n f o r c e m e n t
All connectors used for modem masonry
construction in North America are metallic. Connectors
can be made from wire, sheet metal, or structural steel
shapes. MDG Table 3.5.1 lists the majority of the metals
used in masonry.
3.5.2 Steel Wire
Steel wire used for reinforcement or connectors is
cold-drawn wire, which must conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 82. This type of wire usually
does not have a well-defined yield point. Yield strength
is generally defined as the stress at a strain of 0.005. In
addition, ASTM A 82 specifies a minimum amount of
area reduction at the point of rupture to evaluate
ductility. See MDG Table 3.5.2 for wire sizes and
properties.
Stainless steel wire is made of nickel-chromium
steel, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A 580 and
is annealed in the manufacturing process. Annealed
nickel-chromium steels are austenitic and as a result are
non-magnetic. This is important since in some
applications, ferro-magnetie reinforcement in masonry
walls is undesirable, due to its effect on magnetic fields
created by medical diagnostic equipment and some
military equipment.
3.5.3 Steel S h e e t M e t a l
Sheet metal used for connectors is made from either
cold-rolled carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 366 and
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, or from
stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 167 Type 304.
See MDG Table 3.5.3 for sheet metal thicknesses and
weights. Cold-drawn carbon steel is not as ductile as
annealed stainless steel.
3.5.4 Steel Plates and Bent Bars
Steel plates and bent bars used as anchors are made
from carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 36, or from
austenitic stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 666
Type 304. Anchor bolts must conform to ASTM A307.
3-17
Joint reinforcement must conform to the
requirements ofASTM A 951, deformed reinforcing wire
to ASTM A 496, plain welded wire fabric to ASTM A
185, and deformed welded fabric to ASTM A 497.
3.5.6 Structural Steel
Structural steel connectors, such as those used to
support stone work or as strap ties at intersecting walls,
are required to conform to ASTM A 36. This is the
steel typically used throughout the industry. It is possible
and permitted to use stainless steel as well as A 36 steel.
3.5.7 Prestressing Tendons
Prestressing tendons for prestressed masonry must
conform to a series of ASTM standards depending on the
strength of tendon used. Wire, strands and bars with
specified ultimate tensile strengths of 150 ksi (1034 MPa)
or more must conform to the requirements of ASTM A
421, A 416/417 or A 722/722M. Bars and wires of less
than 150 ksi (1034 MPa) and conforming to ASTM A 82,
A 510/510M, A 615/615M, A 616/616M, A 617/617M
or A 706/706M are permitted if stress relaxation
properties have been tested in accordance with ASTM E
328 and other nonstress-related requirements of Code
Chapter 4 are met.
3.5.8 Corrosion Protection
All carbon steel except reinforcing bars and wire
fabric is required to be protected against corrosion. This
can be accomplished by galvanizing or epoxy coating
(Specification Article 2.4 F) or by the use of Type 304
stainless steel (Specification Article 2.4 E). Galvanizing
must be by hot dipping. Electrogalvanizing is not
permitted. The amount of zinc coating required on the
galvanized product varies in accordance with the
exposure (exterior versus interior) and the amount of
protection afforded by the mortar. Three different levels
of galvanizing are specified.
 Table 3.5.1 Metals Used in Masonry
Governing Minimum Yield Minimum Tensile
Function Title Grade
Spedfication Strengt hI, psi (MPa) Strength, psi (MPa)
ASTMA615/A Deformed & Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 4o (3o0) 40,000 (300) 70,000 (500)
615M2 Reinforcement 60 (420) 60,000 (420) 90,000 (620)
ASTM A616/A Rail-Steel Deformed & Plain Bars for Concrete 50(350) 50,000(350) 80,000(550)
616M2 Reinforcement 60 (420 60,000 (420) 90,000 (620)
Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 617/A Axle-Steel Deformed & Plain Bars for Concrete 40 (300) 40,000 (300) 70,000 (500)
617M2 Reinforcement 60 (420) 60,000 (420) 90,000 (620)
ASTMA 706/A Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete 60 (420) 60,000 (420) 80,000 (550)
706M Reinforcement
Wire Joint ASTM A 82 Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement 70,000(483) 80,000 (552)
Reinforcement, Ties
ASTM A 580 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Wire 30,000 (207) 75,000 (517)
and Anchors
Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet, Commercial
ASTM A 366
Quality
Sheet Metal Ties and ASTM A 525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
_x

Anchors Class G 60 (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process

Stainless & Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
ASTM A 167 30,000 (205) 75,000 (515)
Plate, Sheet, and Strip
I ASTM A 307
Anchor Bolts Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs
Grade A
Plate and Bent Bar ASTM A 666 Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and 30,000 (205) 75,000 (515)
Anchors Flat Bar for Structural Applications
Rolled Shapes, 58,000-80,000 (400-
Lintels, and Plate and ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel 36,000 (250) 550)
Bent Bar Anchors
ASTM 416 Steel strand, uncoated seven-wire for prestressed 416 (250) 250,000 (1725)
concrete (270) 270,000 (1860)
Uncoated stress-relieved steel wire for prestressed BA 199,750 (1377) 235,000 (1620)
Prestressing Tendons ASTM 421 421 O
concrete WA 199,750(1377) 235,000 (1620)
DI
Uncoated high-strength steel bar for prestressing
ASTM 722 150,000 (1035) pit
concrete ID
ml
1. Yieldpoint,yieldstrength - see specification,2. Weldabilityis not part ofthe specification
Materials

Table 3.5.2 Dimensions and Properties of Wire for Masonry ~

Wire Size Nominal2 Nominal Nominal Tensile Strength

Diameter, Area Perimeter
in. (mm) sq in. (mm2) in. (mm)
ASTM Gage Yield Ultimate
A 82 Number Ib (N) lb (N)
WI.1 No. 11 0.1205 (3.061) 0.0114(7.355) 0.379 (9.63) 798 (3,550) 912 (4,057)

Wl.7 No. 9 0.1483 (3.767) 0.0173 (11.161) 0.466 (11.84) 1,211 (5,387) 1,384 (6,156)

W2.1 No. 8 0.1620(4.115) 0.0206(13.290) 0.509 (12.93) 1,442 (6,414) 1,648 (7,331)

W2.8 3/16" 0.1875 (4.762) 0.0276 (17.806) 0.589 (14.96) 1,932 (8,594) 2,228 (9,911)

W4.9 1/4" 0.2500(6.350) 0.0491 (31.677) 0.785 (19.94) 3,437 (15,289) 3,928 (17,473)

i Basedon requirementsofASTMA 82 for colddrawnsteelwire

2ASTMA 82 permitsvariationof plus or minus0.003 in. fromdiametersshown

For metal in interior walls, the galvanizing results in
0.1 oz of zinc per ft2 (31 g / m2) of surface area. For
sheet metal it amounts to 0.6 oz of zinc/it2 (183 g / m2)
of area (0.3 o z / ~ on each side) (91 g / m 2 on each side).
For ASTM A 525 and A 641 the metal is normally
galvanized before fabrication and hence there is no zinc
coating on sheared ends, at holes or at welds. Also since
the metal is usually bent during fabrication, the thickness
of zinc coating is limited to prevent flaking when the
metal is formed.
For exterior walls, sheet metal ties and wire ties must
be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. If galvanizing
is performed after a part is fabricated, the sheared edges
and welds are subsequently coated with zinc.
Conditions often exist where an A/E may want to
use dissimilar metals together. Galvanic action can
occur whenever dissimilar metals are in contact with
each other. The severity of this galvanic action
depends on the relative position of the metals in the
electrochemical series (see MDG Table 3.5.4) (Ref
3.5.1). In some cases (for example, aluminum and
structural steel), the possibility of galvanic action is
serious enough to warrant use of an insulator to
separate the two materials. In other cases (for example,
steels with slightly different alloy contents), galvanic
action is theoretically possible but not sufficiently
serious to warrant the use of insulating separators.
The Specification provides alternative measures
for corrosion protection for prestressing tendons
depending on whether they are bonded or unbonded.
Bonded tendons must be encapsulated in corrosion-
resistant watertight grout-filled ducts of high-density
polyethylene or polypropylene. Unbonded tendons
must be coated with a material meeting specified
requirements and sheathed in an approved polyethylene
or polypropylene protective covering. Stainless steel
or ASTM A 153 Class B galvanized tendons are an
approved alternative for corrosion protection, but the
galvanized coating should not produce hydrogen
embrittlement of the steel.
3.5.9 Reinforcing Bars for Masonry
Reinforcing bars for masonry are the same as used in
reinforced concrete. The bars should conform to one of a
number of ASTM Specifications (A 615, A 616, A 617,
and A 706) depending on the material strength (grade) or
other properties desired. A major distinction between
reinforcing bars used in masonry and concrete is the
limitation on size of bars for masonry to #11 as stated in
Code Section 1.12.2.1, and the limitation of the
maximum specified yield strength that is obtained with
Grade 60 reinforcement. ASTM A 706 should be
specified when controlled tensile properties or controlled
chemical composition for weldability, or both, are
required. See MDG Table 3.5.5 for reinforcing bar sizes.

3-19
 Chapter 3
Table 3.5.3 Sheet Metal Thicknesses
Gage Thickness Weight
in. (mm) oz/sq ft (kg/m 2)

10 0.1345 0.416) 90 (27.5)

12 0.1046 (2.657) 70 (21.4)

14 0.0747 (1.897) 50 (15.3)

16 0.0598 (1.519) 40 (12.2)

18 0.0478 (1.214) 32 (9.8)

20 0.0359 (0.912) 24 (7.3)

22 0.0299 (0.759) 20 (6.1)

24 0.0239 (0.607) 16 (4.9)

26 0.0179 (0.455) 12 (3.7)

28 0.0149 (0.378) 10 (3.0)

Table 3.5.4 Galvanic Compatibility of Metals*

Copper Aluminum Stainless Galvanized Zinc Alloy Lead

Steel Steel

Aluminum

Stainless Steel [3

Galvanized Steel 4- [3 4-
Zinc [3

Lead 4- 4- 4,
Brass 4, • [] 4, • 4,

Bronze 4, m [] 4, • 4,

Monel 4, O • 4, • 4,

Uncured Mortar or Cement O m ~ o o •

Woods With Acid (Redwood and D • [3 4, • o

Red Cedar)
Iron/Steel [] 4- 4- 4- • 0

This table compares galvanic compatibility of metals commonly used with some of the more common building materials. Galvanic reactions occur
most readily when materials touch, but may also occur when water mm from one material onto another. (Ref. 3.5.1)
Galvanic action will occur
Galvanic action may occur under certain circumstancesor over a period of time
Galvanic action is insignificantunder normal circumstances

3-20
Materials

Table 3.5.5 Standard Reinforcing Bars

Bar Size Nominal Diameter Nominal Area Nominal Weight

English Metric in. Inn'l in. 2 I/1/112 plf kg/m

#3 #10 0.375 9.5 0.11 71 0.376 0.560
#4 #13 0.500 12.7 0.20 129 0.668 0.944
#5 #16 0.625 15.9 0.31 199 1.043 1.552
#6 #19 0.750 19.1 0.44 284 1.502 2.235
#7 #22 0.875 22.2 0.60 387 2.044 3.092
#8 #25 1.000 25.4 0.79 510 2.670 3.973
#9 #29 1.128 28.7 1.00 645 3.400 5.060
#10 #32 1.270 32.3 1.27 819 4.303 6.404
#11 #36 1.410 35.8 1.56 1006 5.313 7.907

3.5.10 Deformed vs. Plain
Reinforcement
All bar reinforcement is required to be deformed, per
Specification Article 2.4 A. There can be no confusion
for reinforcing bars since the standards are clearly
defined and virtually all reinforcing bars are deformed.
This is not the case for wire products. There are
specifications for deformations in wire used to make
deformed mesh (ASTM A 496), but there are no
standards for deformations of wire used to make joint
reinforcement. As a result, Specification Article 2.4 C.1
contains special requirements for wire deformations in
joint reinforcement. It is also important to note that
reinforcing bars are hot-rolled to form protrusions or
lugs, while wire is cold-formed by rolling indentations
into it.
Wire fabric is allowed to be used as principal
reinforcement of masonry wails. The application of this
wire fabric would be in multiwythe walls that have
continuous grout space between masonry wythes. When
this material is used it must conform to either ASTM A
185 or A 497. Welded wire fabric of plain wire is
acceptable since wire fabric derives its bond from the
grip of the cross-wires in the grout.

REFERENCES
3.5.1 "Curtain-Wall Connections," Architectural
Technology, May/June 1986, p. 37
Select Bibliography
National Testing Program, Brick Institute of America,
October 1964, pp. 5-16.
Gross, J. G., R. D. Dickers, and J. C. Grogan,
Recommended Practice for Engineered Brick
Masonry, Brick Industry Association, Reston, VA,
November 1969, pp. 252-262.
Allen, M.H. and R.B. Taylor, "Compressive, Flexural,
and Diagonal Tensile Testing of Small Scale Four-
inch Brick Masonry Specimens," Progress Report I,
Brick Institute of America, McLean, VA, October
1964.
Allen, M.H. and C.B. Monk Jr., "Compressive and
Transverse Slrength Tests of Eight-Inch Brick
WaUs," Research Report No. 10, Brick Institute of
America, McLean, VA, October 1966.
Davison, J.I., "Effect of Air Content on Durability of
Cement-Lime Mortars," Durability of Building
Materials, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co., Vol. 1,
1982, pp. 23-34.
Fishbum, C.C., "Effect of Mortar Properties on the
Strength of Masonry," U.S. National Bureau of
Standards, Monograph 36, November 1961, pp. 1-
45.
Matthys, J.H., "Conventional Masonry Mortar
Investigation," National Lime Association, August
1988.
Huizer, A., M.A. Ward, and H. Mustead, "Field and
Laboratory Study Using Current and Proposed
Procedure For Testing Masonry Mortar," Masonry:
Past and Present, ASTM STP 589, American
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA,
1975, pp. 107-122.
Dubovoy, V.S. and J.W. Ribar, "Masonry Cements - A
Laboratory Investigation," Construction Technology

3-21

Laboratories Inc., Skokie, IL, January 1989, pp 9
and 12.
Grimm, C.T. and J.T. Houston, "Effect of Brick Height
on Masonry Compressive Strength," Journal of
Materials, American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, PA, September 1972, Vol.
7, No. 2, pp. 388-392
Grimm, C.T. and C. Fok, "Brick Masonry Strength at
First Crack, " Masonry International, University of
Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland, UK, Vol. 1, No. 2,
July 1984, pp. 18-23.
Abrams, D. P., J. L. Noland, and R. H. Atkinson,
"Response of Clay-Unit Masonry To Repeated
Compressive Forces," Proceedings of the 7th
International Brick Masonry Conference, Brick
Development Research Institute, University of
Melbourne, Australia, February, 1985, p. 565.
Atkinson, R. H. and G. G. Yan, A Statistical Study of
Masonry Deformability, Atkinson-Noland &
Associates, Boulder, CO, February 1990, pp. 20-21.
"Testing for Engineered Brick Masonry Determination of
Allowable Design Stresses," Technical Notes on
Brick Construction, #39A, Brick Industry
Association, Reston, VA, Dec. 1987.
Johnson, W. V., "Effect of Mortar Properties on the
Flexural Strength of Masonry," Master Thesis,
Clemson University, May 1986.
Ritchie, T., and J.I. Davison, "Factors Affecting Bond
Strength and Resistance to Moisture Penetration of
Brick Masonry," Symposium on Masonry Testing,
ASTM, STP 320, June 1962, p. 16.
Commentary on Specification for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530.1-95), American Concrete Institute,
Detroit, MI, 1995.
Cheema, T. and R. E. Klingner, "Compressive Strength
of Concrete Masonry Prisms," ACI Journal, Detroit,
MI, January/February 1986, pp. 88-97.
Hamid, A. and R. G. Drysdale, "Concrete Masonry
Under Combined Shear and Compression Along the
Mortar Joints," ACI Journal, Detroit, MI,
September/October 1980, pp. 341-320.
Drysdale, R. G. and A. A. Hamid, "Behavior of Concrete
Block Masonry Under Axial Compression," ACI
Journal, Detroit, MI, June 1979, pp. 707-721.
3-22
Chapter 3
Drysdale, R. G. and A. A. Hamid, "Capacity of Concrete
Block Masonry Prisms Under Eccentric
Compression Loading," ACI Journal, Detroit, MI,
March/April 1983, pp. 102-108.
Maurenbrecher, A.H.P., "Compressive Strength of
Hollow Concrete Blockwork," Proceedings of the
4th Canadian Masonry Symposium, University of
New Brunswick, N.B., Canada, Vol. 1, June 1986,
pp. 553-568. Compressive Strength of Composite
Masonry Prisms and Walls, NCMA/BIA, Reston,
VA, May 1972.
Recommended Building Code Requirements for
Engineered Concrete Masonry, "Research Data and
Comments," NCMA, Herndon, VA, 1967.
Drysdale, R. G. and A. A. Harold, "Effect of Grouting on
the Flexural Tensile Strength of Concrete Block
Masonry," The Masonry Society Journal, Vol. 3, No.
2, 1984, pp. T10-T19.
Dubovoy, V.S., and Ribar, J.W., "Masonry Properties as
Influenced by Mortars," ASTM Cement, Concrete,
and Aggregates, Vol 14, No. 2, 1992, pp. 71-77.
"Brick Masonry Material Properties," Technical Notes
3,4, Brick Industry Association, Reston, VA,
December 1992.
"Manufacturing, Selection, and Classification of Brick,"
Technical Notes 9, 9A, and 9B, Brick Industry
Association, Reston, VA, March 1986, June 1989,
December 1995.
"Research Evaluation of the Flexural Tensile Strength of
Concrete Masonry," Publication MR-10, NCMA,
Herndon, VA, 1994.
Borchelt, J.G., and Tann, J.A., "Bond Strength and Water
Penetration of Low IRA Brick and Mortar,"
Proceedings of the 7th NAMC, TMS, Boulder, CO,
1996, pp. 206-216.
Masonry Mortars, IS040, PCA, Skokie, 1995.
Maurenbrecher, A.H.C.T. Grimm and R.J. Brousseau,
"Corrosion of metal connectors in Masonry
Cladding," The Construction Specifier, The
Construction Specifications Institute, Alexandria,
VA, October, 1998, pp 51-64.

4.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Test reports on the materials to be used on a project
are a means of verifying their c~nformance with the
Specification, and are a part of the quality control portion
of the quality assurance program. The A/E determines
what testing is to be included by placing the requirements
in the project specifications. The Specification, in Article
1.5 B.4, identifies test reports or evaluations that may be
included and would be given to the A/E as required
submittals. Examples are:
1.5 B.4.b Results of mortar evaluations performed in
accordance with ASTM C 780.
1.5 B.4.d Results of tests of masonry units and
materials attesting compliance.
While testing alone will not assure the quality of the
masonry, it may be used to determine compliance with the
4.1 M A T E R I A L S T E S T I N G
4.1.1 Preconstruction Testing
Preconstruction testing is recommended to assure that
materials selected by the A/E comply with the
requirements of the product specification and to provide
the required properties. In many cases, a manufacturer's
certification may be acceptable in lieu of preconstruction
testing.
The selected masonry mortar must comply with
ASTM C 270. If mortar is specified under the property
specifications of ASTM C 270, test reports indicating
conformance to ASTM C 270 are required. Such tests are
to be performed on materials intended for use in
4-1
4
Ii TING
specifications or evaluate materials. See MDG Section
5.0.1 and 5.5 for resolution of noncomplying
conditions.
The A/E determines what testing is to be included
and the frequency of the tests in accordance with the
Code provisions. The A/E then stipulates these
requirements by placing them in the project
specification. When testing is required, the
Specification stipulates the following frequencies of
testing:
Masonry units: in accordance with indicated materials
specification
Masonry prisms: preconstruction and one test per 5,000
square feet (464.5 m 2) of wall
Mortar: preconstruction for each mortar type, when
specified by properties rather than proportions
Grout: one test per each 5,000 square feet (464.5 m 2) of
masonry wall
construction prior to the initiation of work. If mortar is
specified under the proportion specifications of ASTM
C 270, test reports may be required on component
mortar materials, to provide evidence that they conform
to specification requirements, but no testing is required
of the mortar itself. Acceptance is made on the basis
that approved mortar materials are proportioned in
accordance with the proportion specification table of
ASTM C 270.
If testing of mortar properties using ASTM C 780
test procedures will be required during construction,
preconstruction test reports of mortar properties

determined on mortar mixed to the proportions and
consistency intended for use during construction should be
required regardless of whether the mortar is specified by
the property or proportion requirements of ASTM C 270.
These values can be used as a benchmark for comparison
with values obtained during construction. However,
compressive strength of mortar determined according to
ASTM C 780 is not expected to meet the compressive
strength requirements ofASTM C 270.
It is not the intent of ASTM C 780 that tests be
performed at some fLxed frequency. The test methods are
classed as quality-control tests that allow rapid isolation of
the reason for any loss of quality control that might occur.
The array of tests, except for compressive strength and
tensile splitting tests, can easily be performed in a period of
one or two working days. Thus, the level of quality control
exercised at the project may be immediately appraised and
documented. Variations from batch to batch and day to
day can be easily evaluated.
In performing preconstruction tests, materials to be
used during construction should be sampled, combined,
and prepared using equipment and procedures that will be
used during actual construction. The merits in performing
these tests, in addition to establishing basic comparative
values, are that they allow all parties to agree on the
interpretation of the project specifications and on the
execution of the specification requirements.
4.1.2 Construction Testing
Testing done during construction should be directed
toward establishing compliance with the Specification
requirements and the quality control requirements
delineated in the project specifications. As indicated in
ASTM C 270, testing of hardened masonry mortar samples
removed from a structure is not addressed. Specialized
chemical and petrographic tests can be used to evaluate the
types and quantities of constituents in in-place mortars.
However, the quality control tests of ASTM C 780 are
more easily completed. Testing during construction is
preferable to testing after construction has been completed.
Strength characteristics of masonry mortar prepared at
4.2 A S S E M B L A G E T E S T I N G
4.2.1 Prisms
The Code and Specification allow for testing of
masonry assemblages to determine if the assembled
components meet specified or mandated requirements.
Testing for compressive strength of masonry, with
the masonry units and mortar combined in an
4-2
Chapter 4
the project are generally not as large as the property-
specified strengths ofASTM C 270. This is due in part
to the increased water content of job-prepared mortars.
Mortar quality control under C 270 is actually obtained
by measurement of materials used to mix the mortar.
Any testing of site-prepared mortars should be
referenced back to the ASTM C 780, preconstruction
tests, and the base test results.
Testing of masonry mortars during actual
construction should involve selected tests from ASTM
C 780. If the intent is to monitor air content of mortars,
the air-content test should be performed. If the intent is
to evaluate mortar proportions, both water content and
cement-to-aggregate ratio tests should be performed.
The test results should be referenced back to the
preconstruction test results. External factors, such as
temperature, may influence the results; therefore,
external influences should be systematically recorded.
The sample data sheet provided as a part of ASTM
C 780 (Annex A9) is recommended.
The selected masonry grout must be in compliance
with ASTM C 476. ASTM C 476 contains provisions
for fine grout and coarse grout using acceptable
materials. Grout is specified either by volume
proportions or by compressive strength. When grout is
specified by strength, a minimum compressive strength
of 2000 psi (14 MPa) is required at 28 days, unless the
specifier designates a higher minimum strength. The
sampling and testing of grout is conducted in
accordance with ASTM C 1019. This standard can be
used initially to select the materials and proportions to
satisfy the specified minimum compressive strength
requirement ofASTM C 476. ASTM C 1019 can also
be used as a quality-control test for uniformity of grout
preparation during construction. The MSJC
Specification indicates that grout is to be mixed to a
consistency that results in a slump between 8 and 11 in.
(203 and 279 mm). Grout consistency should be
measured in laboratory testing and at the construction
site by determining the slump in accordance with
ASTM C 143.
assemblage, may be specified by the A/E. The test
method involves fabrication of brick or concrete masonry
assemblages called masonry prisms, in accordance with
ASTM C 1314. Previous versions of the MSJC
Specification required testing of masonry prisms in
accordance with ASTM E 447 Method B, as modified
Testing
with revisions. ASTM C 1314 is a relatively new 4.2.2 A d h e r e d V e n e e r
standard to test prisms and is now the preferred method Shear strength of the adhesion developed between
as it gives more consistent and reliable results. adhered veneer units and their backing may be tested in
The A/E may require that prism testing be a part of accordance with ASTM C 482 for compliance with Code
the design process and the materials selection process. Section 6.3.2.4. A minimum shear strength of 50 psi
Thereafter, the masonry prism test may be required (345 kPa) is required. If the adhered veneer is installed
during construction, serving as a quality control test. The in accordance with Specification Article 3.3 C, no testing
combined materials forming the assemblage should is required.
reflect the individual materials, as used, and also the
workmanship. The specimen may be subject to
temperature influences; therefore, as in the case of
ASTM C 780 mortar testing, interpretation of prism test
results must consider external influences.

4-3

QUALITY
CONSTRUCTION
5.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Both quality assurance and quality control requirements
should be incorporated within the project specification to
ensure a quality constructed facility. Quality control is the
systematic performance of construction testing and
inspection. Quality assurance provides administrative
policies and requirements related to the quality control
measures expected to assure the owner's quality objectives.
The extent of the quality assurance and quality control
programs will vary with the size of the project. The quality
objective of the owner should be met when construction is
completed in accordance with proper design concepts, using
acceptable construction practices and materials complying
with product specifications. Success depends on open
communications among responsible parties within the design
and construction team. Records documenting the successful
completion of the structure in accordance with the owners
objectives complement the contract documents.
5.0.1 Quality Assurance
The quality assurance program incorporated in the
contract documents is found in both the project
specifications and drawings and should address the
following:
1. organizational responsibilities,
2. materials control
3. inspection,
4. testing and evaluation,
5. identification and resolution of noncomplying
conditions, and
6. record control.
5-1
5
Quality assurance considerations are described in ACI
121R (Ref. 5.0.1).
According to Specification Commentary Article 1.6, it
is necessary to delineate the responsibility, authority, and
lines of communication of the parties involved in quality
assurance. Procedures should be established for the
identification and resolution of nonconformances.
Material control verifies the chemical and physical
characteristics of individual materials required in the
contract documents. Materials should be monitored
throughout construction for compliance with the contract
documents.
Inspection control should be established to ensure that
the masonry materials and construction practices comply
with the requirements of the contract documents.
Inspection programs, personnel, and records should be
regarded as inspection control measures.
Testing and evaluation should be described in the
quality assurance program. The evaluation of test results
by the testing agency should indicate compliance or
noncompliance with a referenced standard.
Procedures for identification and resolution of
noncomplying conditions should be described in the
contract documents. Noncomplying conditions should be
either accepted as is or else rejected and then repaired or
reworked. Repair and rework should initiate reinspection.
Records control should be described in the contract
documents. Distribution of documents during and after
construction should be clearly defined. Review of
documents should continue throughout the construction
period to assure that all parties are informed and that

records for documenlJng construction occurrences are
available and correct after construction has been
completed.
As an example of quality assurance, the general
contractor may require that the masonry subcontractor
submit a written procedure for cold weather masonry
construction practices.
5.0.2 Quality Control
The specific requirements of the project
specification related to design and to procurement and
use of materials should be implemented by quality
control measures. Quality control measures may be
dictated by the owner's representative or self-imposed by
a responsible party charged with the conduct of a specific
task associated with or contained in the project
specification.
The quality control program essentially follows the
quality assurance requirements documented in specific
sections of the project specifications or related sections.
Members of the design and construction team affected by
quality control requirements include the owner, A/E,
inspection agency, contractor, and subcontractor.
5.1 S U B M I T T A L S
The contract documents can require verification of
conformance of a product either by pre-construction
sampling and testing or by submittal of a Manufacturer's
Certification of Compliance.
Tests allow establishing conformance with a product
specification. The measured test results are compared
with the specification limits for the chemical or physical
properties.
The alternative to sampling and testing the product
is to rely on the manufacturer's quality control data
obtained during production of the product to be used on
the project. Certification by the manufacturer provides
5.2 S A M P L E PANELS
5.2.1 Recommended Practices
Specification Article 1.6 D. 1 states "When required,
construct sample panels of masonry walls using materials
and procedures conforming to the requirements." (see
also Specification Article 1.6 D.2).
In accordance with Specification Article 1.6 D. 1.b,
job-site sample panels should be constructed to establish
an acceptable standard of quality for the project. Sample
5-2
Chapter 5
The person responsible for the quality assurance
provisions contained within the contract documents
should impose certain responsibilities on those who will
perform quality control testing while granting them
access to the construction site to carry out sampling,
testing, and inspection. Those inspection and testing
agencies being considered for performing the quality
control tests should be evaluated for conformance to the
requirements of ASTM C 1093. The testing agency
should be required to produce its laboratory accreditation
document, which is essentially its quality assurance
program. This document should indicate organization,
testing capabilities, qualification of personnel, test
procedures, calibration schedule of physical test
equipment, and records control.
The approved testing agency should designate the
representatives who will be a part of the quality control
program, and the qualifications of those representatives.
Knowledge of the proper procedures for sampling and
testing masonry materials is essential.
As an example of quality control, the masonry
subcontractor may be required to carry out the cold
weather masonry construction practices described in the
approved quality assurance program.
the consumer with documentation indicating that on a
certain date the product was tested in accordance with
indicated test methods and measured test results were in
compliance with the requirements of the product
specification. The company representative certifies the
documentation. Using these data, the consumer can
reduce overall testing.
The specifier must identify all submittals required on
each individual project (see Specification Optional
Checklist P5 and Specification Article 1.5).
Documentation of all submittals should follow the
guidelines given in MDG Section 5.5.
panels should be used to evaluate the appearance and
construction of the finished masonry work. Job-site
sample panels should contain all aspects of the combined
masonry materials and the specified construction
procedures described in MDG Section 5.2.2.
The A/E or owner's representative may choose to
use more than one type of bond and mortar-joint finish
on the sample panel to help make final choices of
Quality C o n s t r u c t i o n
fmished appearance. Mortar-joint finish greatly
influences the appearance of the wall. All submittals
should be approved before the sample panel is
constructed. The panel should be constructed before the
masonry work begins by the mason contractor selected
for the project and it should not be removed or destroyed
until all work has been accepted (Specification Article
1.6 D.2).
The construction of the sample panel is based on the
contract documents and is approved when the owner or
an authorized representative accepts the appearance and
construction characteristics of the panel. Usually, one
panel is constructed for appearance and workmanship.
Specimens required for strength tests on site-made
materials (ASTM C 780) may be made when the sample
panel is constructed. After the panel is approved, the
construction project can proceed. The panel is then
referred to as the approved project standard. It becomes
an important tool in the evaluation and acceptance of the
masonry work during the construction period. Opinions
relating to appearance are much easier to resolve if a
standard of quality, embodied by an approved sample, is
available for evaluation at the construction site.
Therefore, it is to everyone's benefit that sample panels
be made a part of the project requirements for masonry
work. It is especially important where appearance,
establishment of procedures, and construction
characteristics are important.
5.2.2 Suggested Criteria for
Construction of Sample Panels
Two levels of sample panels are suggested. A
Sample Panel Level 1 is based on aesthetic criteria alone.
A Sample Panel Level 2 is intended to address
performance criteria as well as aesthetic criteria.
SAMPLE PANEL LEVEL 1 -- Scope of
compliance should include:
• Masonry unit types, sizes, shapes, color range,
texture, surface configuration, and other
characteristics. Chippage dimensions, and warpage
limits of units controlled by product specifications or
more restrictive in-wall criteria determined by the
A/E.
5-3
• Mortar joint size, alignment, color, tooling, and
texture. Mortar should be evaluated for appearance
after it is surface dry. If colored mortar is used, the
color should be judged after the sample panel has
had sufficient time to dry (Ref. 5.2.1).
• Bond pattern and color pattern if masonry units are
of more than one color.
• The conformance of representative workmanship to
that specified in the contract documents.
• Quality of appearance of sample panel where
approved cleaning material was applied by the
approved methods proposed for the finished work.
• Quality of appearance of sample panel where
approved masonry surface-treatment material was
applied by the approved methods proposed for the
finished work, if required.
• Workmanship with respect to unit and mortar
placement, location of accessories and
reinforcement, dimensional tolerances, and grout
placement.
SAMPLE PANEL LEVEL 2 -- In addition to
Level 1 items, scope of compliance should include:
• Weep hole type and spacing, and finish material, if
any.
• Flashing material, lapping and sealing joint details,
end dams, back-dam height, and termination
conditions.
• Anchor and tie types, materials, spacing, and
placement requirements.
• Reinforcement type, location, and methods of
securing.
• Expansion joint and control joint material and
configuration.
• Joint-sealant type, color, and configuration.
• Gasket and joint-filler type and configuration.
• Portholes for observation of hidden construction
components, clean-outs, and other items as specified
in the contract documents.
• Full capability for testing the sample panel
according to the tests required by the contract
documents.

5.3 I N S P E C T I O N
5.3.1 Purpose
The purpose of inspection is to observe and record
that the work performed during construction complies
with the contract documents. Thus the duties and
responsibilities of the inspector are to observe that the
work generally complies with the drawings and
specifications and to maintain a record of the findings.
The inspector can be the A/E or an independent
inspection service retained by the owner. Some model
building code authorities certify masonry inspectors after
written examination and review of qualifications.
The intent of the Code and Specification is to
require inspection, to an extent and at a frequency to be
determined by the A/E, based on the project
requirements. Possible inspection activities and
procedures are presented in this section.
5.3.2 Planning
The inspector represents the owner. The inspector
should have a complete knowledge of the contract
documents, construction practices, materials, and test
procedures. Ideally the inspector should attend prebid
meetings with the A/E and project bidders. The
inspector should attend preconstruction meetings with the
A/E and the successful contractor and subcontractor.
5.3.3 Sample Panel
When specified, the sample panel must be approved
by the A/E or the owner's designated representative
before construction begins. The acceptable standard for
the project is established by the accepted panel
(Specification Article 1.6 D). The inspector will review
the sample panel with the A/E or the owner's designated
representative for compliance with the requirements.
5.3.4 Material & Testing Submittals
Products specified in the contract documents must
meet applicable material specifications. All submittals
are to be approved by the AYE or the owner's designated
representative before construction begins, as described in
MDG Sections 5.1 and 5.2.
The A/E or the owner's designated representative
should approve any preconstruction test reports required
by the contract documents before construction begins, as
described in MDG Section 4.1.1.
Construction test reports are to be submitted to the
inspector unless otherwise noted in the contract
documents. The inspector then notifies the A/E or the
owner's designated representative in writing prior to
5-4
Chapter 5
masonry instaUation. All changes must be approved by
the A/E or owner's designated representative in writing
prior to installation.
All shop drawings must be approved by the A/E or
owner's designated representative in writing before
beginning fabrication or production.
5.3.5 Inspection Files
The inspector should have a copy of all approved
submittals, shop drawings, changes, job site tests, and
laboratory tests, as required by the contract documents,
for all products and procedures.
In accordance with the procedures established in the
quality assurance program, accurate quality control
records should be kept of all material deliveries,
indicating the type of product, manufacturer, date of
delivery, where it is placed on the job site, and how it is
protected from the environment. These records, if not
generated by the inspector, should be delivered to the
inspector weekly for review and filing.
In accordance with the procedures established in the
quality assurance program, a daily quality control log
shall be kept by the inspector, which includes weather
conditions at the job site (for example, temperature,
relative humidity, and general conditions, both in the
morning and afternoon) and any observations of things
not in compliance with the contract documents.
5.3.6 Construction Inspection
The MSJC Code and Specification require
inspection to verify that the construction conforms with
the minimum Code requirements. The 1999 edition is
the first to defme specific inspection requirements.
Specification Article 1.6 A. 1 states simply that the work
shall be tested in accordance with Specification Table 3,
4, or 5. Specification Article 1.6 B. 1 states that the work
shall be inspected and evaluated in accordance with
Specification Table 3, 4, or 5. The three tables identify
three levels of quality assurance, each of which lists
minimum tests and submittals and minimum inspection
requirements which may be appropriate to various types
of buildings or projects of various size and scope. The
A/E must specify which level of quality assurance is
required on a given project.
Specification Article 1.6 B outlines specific
requirements for reporting on quality assurance
inspections.
As designated by the owner, the inspector has the
authority to judge materials, workmanship, and
Quality Construction
procedures employed in construction, based on contract-
document requirements. Approval or disapproval should
be reported to the A/E and contractor. The inspector
does not have the authority to direct the work of the
contractor.
Prior to the start of masonry construction, the
inspector should require verification that foundation
tolerances are acceptable, reinforcing dowels are in
correct locations, and that surfaces are properly prepared
to accept the masonry (Specification Article 3.1 and 3.2).
In accordance with the requirements for Level I,
Level 2, or Level 3 Quality Assurance, inspectors should
observe such things as workmanship, masonry bond,
mortar and grout mixing and placement, mortar-joint
finish, and placement of connectors, anchors, and
reinforcement. The inspector should verify that masonry
materials meet required standards and approved
submittals. Mortar and grout mixture proportions should
be verified by use of a method that is acceptable to both
the mason contractor and the inspector and that is in
conformance with the contract documents.
The inspector should observe and note how
materials are stored and handled to be sure that these
procedures will not adversely affect the finished
masonry. Materials are to be stored off the ground and
5.4 TESTING
A well planned, thoroughly-specified, and properly-
implemented testing program during the construction of a
project is an important component of an overall
inspection and quality control program to ensure a
quality constructed facility. Tests are performed to verify
the consistency of materials, workmanship, protection
and curing conditions, and the in-place performance and
strength characteristics achieved during construction.
The tests discussed below are commonly applied to
masonry construction. In most cases, the procedures are
well established and governed by standards. The
interpretation of test results is based on project
requirements.
5.4.1 Testing as Part of a
Construction Quality
Assurance Program
Correct implementation of a testing program should
result in productive and meaningful activity serving the
interests of all parties involved in the project. The
construction testing program must be rationally related to
preconstruction testing requirements and be based on the
5-5
covered when not in use. When handling units on site,
proper care should be taken to minimize damage, such as
chipping. The inspector should understand the materials
and the effect that weather changes have on them, and, if
appropriate, should verify that hot or cold weather
construction practices are used in accordance with the
construction documents.
The inspector must verify that reinforcing steel, joint
reinforcement, ties, anchors, and accessories meet the
requirements of the contract documents, and that the
appropriate corrosion-resistant material is used (see
MDG Section 6.1.4).
The inspector should verify that flashing, weep
holes, anchors, ties, and wall vents are installed in
accordance with the contract documents (see MDG
Sections 6.2.3 and 6.2.6). The inspector should observe
and confirm that movement joints are installed as
specified in the contract documents (see MDG Section
6.2.7).
The inspector observes the preparation of job-site
test specimens.
The inspector assures that walls and materials are
covered at the end of the workday as specified in the
contract documents.
knowledge of masonry behavior, the required properties,
and the required performance of the completed masonry.
Project requirements for the compressive strength of
masonry can be based on the unit strength method in
Specification Article 1.4 B.2, in which case the required
properties of the individual masonry units are verified by
testing. A rational quality control program for a project
based on the unit strength method might include a
planned repetition of tests on units sampled during
construction. Sampling and testing should be in
accordance with ASTM C 67 for clay masonry units and
ASTM C 140 for concrete masonry units. For grouted
masonry, the grout must satisfy the requirements in
ASTM C 476. For a project designed and specified on
the basis of the unit strength method, it should not be
necessary to test masonry prisms.
As an alternative to the unit strength method, design
assumptions and materials acceptance criteria could
include measured properties of masonry assemblages.
These measured properties could include: the prism
strengths (Specification Article 1.4 B.3), modulus of
elasticity (Code Section 1.8.2.2.1), permeability
performance, modulus of rupture, and other physical
 Chapter 5
properties of the completed masonry. To develop 7. A clear statement on the reconstruction of rejected
acceptable and agreed-upon values, pre-construction work.
testing is normally required. Similar tests are repeated
In the sections below, various tests that are useful for
during construction as a part of a quality control
a construction quality control program are briefly
program.
discussed. Not all tests are needed for every project. The
Specifications for a properly implemented
design professional should formulate a construction
construction testing program must include more than a
testing program to address masonry properties that are
simple requirement for a certain number of tests. The
necessary for compliance with the Code, and those
program will only serve its intended purpose if the
critical to the success and durability of the project.
following issues are addressed in the project
5.4.1.1 Initial Rate of Absorption
specifications:
Tests - - Both laboratory and field investigations have
1. Corresponding preconstmction testing require-
shown that high-suction clay brick may cause excessive
ments. Construction tests should not be specified
absorption of mixing water from the mortar, resulting in
unless an equivalent preconstruction test has also
poor adhesion, incomplete bond, and water-permeable
been specified.
joints of low strength. Thus, some clay masonry
2. A clearly defined acceptance criterion, based on
products may require wetting so that the proper
careful consideration of actual project requirements.
interaction with the mortar can be achieved and proper
Minimum test results for both the preconstruction
bond and weather resistance can be achieved (Ref.
and construction tests must be specified, and they
5.4.1). The initial rate of absorption (IRA) test is used to
must be related to each other. It would be
determine if wetting is necessary. The Specification
reasonable to permit lower levels of performance for
requires wetting if the field IRA is greater than 30 grams
test results during construction as compared with the
per 30 sq. in. per minute (0.0016 gm/min/mm2.
corresponding preconstruction laboratory test
Preconstmction laboratory IRA testing will detenrtine if
results. In its simplest form, a minimum average can
wetting should be a general project requirement.
be specified. For designs based on strength, a
Construction (field) IRA testing can be used for periodic
minimum average related to the measured
quality control checks or as part of a response to extreme
coefficient of variation of the test results should be
temperature and wind conditions that might adversely
considered.
affect the curing of the mortar and necessitate a
3. A clear definition of the required frequency of
temporary adjustment in construction procedures.
testing based on time, the maximum constructed
ASTM C 67 contains two procedures for measuring
area, or the maximum number of installed masonry
the IRA. In both methods the brick is suspended and
units between test cycles. For example,
immersed to a depth of 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) in a pan of
Specification Article 3.7 A, when specified, requires
water. For laboratory tests, the amount of water
one prism test for each 5,000 square feet (464.5 m 2)
absorbed by an oven-dried unit is determined by
of wall area or portion thereof. The sampling
weighing the brick accurately before and after soaking.
method, specimen handling, and the test methods
For field tests, the amount of water absorbed by the unit
must also be specified.
in its existing condition can be determined by measuring
4. A protocol for recording, reporting, and
the volume of water in the pan before and after soaking,
disseminating the test results, and a process for
using a graduated flask. Weighing the brick is best suited
obtaining written review of the results from the
to the laboratory procedure; the graduated flask method
design professional.
can be used on-site, but may be difficult because of the
5. A planned response to test results that do not meet
need to control the depth of immersion and the levelness
the specified acceptance criteria. The response
of the pan.
could include retesting, re-evaluation of strength and
Masons often use a more convenient approximate
performance requirements by the design professional
method to determine the IRA. A circle, one inch in
specifically for the area affected, and finally, a
diameter, is marked with a wax pencil on the bedding
rejection protocol.
surface of the brick, and 25 drops of water are deposited
6. A clear definition of which party is responsible for
using an eyedropper. The outline of a quarter (U.S.
scheduling the tests, performing the tests, obtaining
$0.25) is the customary guide for this circle. If it takes
the samples, and paying for the tests.
more than 1-1/2 minutes for the brick to absorb the drops

5-6
Quality Construction
of water, wetting is usually not required. If this
procedure is allowed on a project, its acceptability should
be determined by preconstruction laboratory tests for
comparison with the more rigorous ASTM C 67 IRA
test.
5.4.1.2 Prism Testing to Verify the
Compressive Strength of Masonry - -
Testing masonry prisms to verify compliance with the
specified masonry compressive strength, f ", is a useful
quality control procedure for comparison with
preconstruction qualifying tests. Testing is required when
specified or when the properties of the masonry materials
or masonry do not qualify for the use of the unit strength
method (Specification Article 1.4 B.2). Code Section
1.8.2.2.1 permits designing on the basis of the actual
modulus of elasticity of masonry used for a project. The
modulus of elasticity is determined during a prism
compressive strength test. The standard procedure for
Solid Unit Prism Hollo~ Unit Prism
Prisms reduced by
3aw cutting
Hollow Unit Grouted Hollow Unit
Fig. 5.4-1 Examples of Prism Compressive Strength Test Specimens
5-7
prism tests is ASTM C 1314 as described in
Specification Article 1.4 B.3; for the modulus of
elasticity, the chord method and the procedures of ASTM
E 111 are permitted by Code Section 1.8.2.2.1.
Using project materials and techniques, three prisms
are fabricated in stack bond, one unit wide and one unit
thick, with a full mortar joint between units. Clay
masonry prisms must have a height-to-thickness ratio
between 2.0 and 5.0. Concrete masonry prisms must
have a height-to-thickness ratio between 1.33 and 5.0,
and contain at least one mortar joint. The length of
masonry prisms may be reduced from that of an
individual unit by saw cutting units prior to prism
construction as shown in MDG Fig. 5.4-1. Prisms are
constructed in a bag which is then sealed to provide a
more ideal curing environment for masonry mortar and /
or grout. After fabrication, the prisms should be stored
on-site for about 48 hours in a location where they
Grouted Hollow
Prism
Grouted Multi-Wythe
Prism

will not be disturbed. Temporary wood top and bottom
caps can be strapped onto each prism for protection prior
to transportation to a laboratory for testing. The prisms
must be stored and transported carefully to avoid
damaging the mortar and the masonry units, which will
invalidate results. At 28 days of age, the prisms are
capped, and tested in compression to failure. Prism
weight should be limited to approximately 150 pounds
unless special arrangements are made with the testing
laboratory for handling and capping. The physical size
and load capacity of the testing machine should also be
considered in determining the size of a prism. Test
results are corrected for the aspect ratio of the prism
using the factors in ASTM C 1314.
5.4.1.3 Testing to Evaluate M o r t a r -
Mortars are classified by type using the letter
designations M, S, N and O. Two methods of specifying
mortars are given in ASTM C 270: (1) proportion
specifications and (2) property specifications. One or the
other method, but not both, should be used to specify the
mortar. The procedures and criteria for testing in ASTM
C 270 are for laboratory-prepared samples only, and
should be used for qualifying materials and the mix
proportions for use on a project. The property
requirements of ASTM C 270 are therefore not the
appropriate basis for a construction quality control
testing program. Once a mortar mixture qualifies in
accordance with ASTM C 270 in the laboratory, the
volume proportions of ingredients in that mixture serve
as the quality control measure. If verification of
conformance of mortar materials with the property
requirements of ASTM C 270 is required during
construction, samples of the cementitious materials and
sand may be taken from the project and mixed and tested
in the laboratory in accordance with procedures of
ASTM C 270 (Specification Article 3.7B). As noted in
Specification Commentary Article 3.7B, ASTM C 270 is
not appropriate for sampling and testing of field-mixed
mortars. The procedures of ASTM C 780 can be used
for quality control testing or mortar during construction,
provided preconstruction data has been developed as a
basis for comparison using ASTM C 780 procedures.
Eight test procedures are given in ASTM C 780: (1)
consistency by cone penetration, (2) consistency
retention, (3) consistency and consistency retention using
a modified concrete penetrometer, (4) mortar aggregate
ratio, (5) mortar water content, (6) mortar air content, (7)
5-8
Chapter 5
compressive strength of molded mortar cylinders and
cubes, and (8) splitting tensile strength of molded mortar
cylinders. While it is impractical to use all of these
methods for quality control on a given project, the results
of one or more of these procedures, repeated over the
course of construction, are compared to preconstruction
results from the same procedure. The reader is referred
to the TMS monograph on mortar testing (Ref. 5.4.2).
Currently, mortar compressive strength is the most
com_mon procedure specified for quality control testing.
Perhaps the results of this procedure is more intuitive.
Mortar cylinder strength tests are performed in cubes or
cylinders cast from samples of the project mortar. To
achieve consistency in the cast specimens, complete
instructions are given for filling the mold; on spading the
plastic mortar; and for curing, transporting, storing, and
capping the specimens required. A protocol is also
prescribed for rejecting results from specimens that are
judged to be "manifestly faulty."
While compressive strength testing is used most
frequently, the results are often misunderstood and
misinterpreted. ASTM standards do not include pass/fail
requirements for compressive strength of field prepared
mortar. Strength tests of job-site mortar should not be
compared to ASTM C 270 requirements which were
established for laboratory prepared mortar that has a
lower water content. Compressive strengths from field
mortar may vary significantly due to different mix water
required for the mortar based on the environment
conditions (heat, sunlight, wind) and the absorptive
properties of the units.
Mortar compressive strength and mortar splitting
tension tests also require time for curing specimens.
Therefore, they cannot provide the immediate
information necessary to adjust mortar batching
procedures in a timely fashion.
Good mortar performance typically results from
correct proportions of mortar to aggregate. Thus the
mortar aggregate ratio procedure should be considered as
a method of verifying that the proportions used are
consistent with that specified. Other visual inspection
methods can also provide this assurance.
Regardless of the method used, quality assurance of
mortar should rarely be based on exceeding fixed
requirements. Rather, these test methods are used to
verify consistency in mortar properties throughout the
course of the construction project.
Quality Construction
5.4.1.4 T e s t i n g to E v a l u a t e G r o u t -
Specification Articles 1.4 B.2.a and 1.4 B.2.b require
that grout conform to the requirements of ASTM C 476
or that its strength be equal to or greater thanf'm but not
less than 2,000 psi (13.79 MPa) when determined in
accordance with ASTM C 1019. The procedures of
ASTM C 1019 can be used both to verify compliance of
grout mixture proportions and as the basis of a grout
quality control testing program. The objective of the test
is to subject the grout specimen to curing and absorption
conditions similar to those in the wall. To achieve this
objective, masonry units intended for use in the wall are
used as the form for the grout specimens. To avoid
damage that would invalidate the test results, carefully
store, handle and transport the grout specimens. Grout
must be removed from the masonry form for testing, so it
is necessary to prevent bonding by lining the form with a
permeable sheet such as a paper towel. After the grout
specimen is separated from the mold, it should be kept in
a moist condition, and then placed in a moist room until
it is tested.
5 . 4 . 1 . 5 T e s t i n g t o D e t e r m i n e t h e Flex-
ural Bond S t r e n g t h - - I f flexural bond strength is
important for the performance of a project,
preconstruction testing should be specified to
demonstrate the compatibility of masonry materials and
their ability to provide the required flexural bond
strength. Tests can also be performed during
construction as a quality control procedure, and should
be specified if the reliability of a design depends on the
bond strength. Currently, however, neither the Code nor
the Specification requires such testing. The standard test
method, ASTM C 1357, provides appropriate procedures
to measure fiexural bond strength (Ref. 5.4.3).
Laboratory flexural bond strength tests are
performed on a stack bond prism fabricated in a jig to
assure proper alignment. After curing, the sample can be
tested either as a beam in bending, according to ASTM E
518, or by evaluation of each joint in the prism using a
special bond wrench device, according to ASTM C
1072. Because neither test method is referenced in the
Code or the Specification, they would have to be added
to the project specifications.
5.4.2 Procedures Useful for Inspec-
tion Programs
Specification Article 1.6 discusses an inspection
5-9
program to be implemented during the construction
process. Important items, such as anchor and tie spacing,
filling of collar joints, grouting, flashing installation
details, clearances and obstructions in the cavity,
clogging of the weep system and flashing, and joint
filling are easier to observe while a wall is being built
than to evaluate after the wall is completed. There may
be occasions when it is necessary to determine conditions
that are concealed by the finished masonry, and several
techniques are available for this purpose, as described
below.
5.4.2.1 Omitting Masonry to Permit
I n s p e c t i o n W i t h i n a C a v i t y W a l l - - The most
direct way to simplify inspection of conditions within a
completed wall is to anticipate the need, and to specify
that masonry be periodically omitted to provide
inspection openings. Inspection openings are particularly
useful immediately above flashing and at the bottom of
grout pours before placing grout. They can also be used
to clean out debris that fall on the flashing during
construction.
If inspection openings have not been left during
construction, they can be created by removing one or two
units of masonry. If done carefully, adjacent
construction will not be damaged, and only the removed
units require replacement. After inspection, the opening
must be closed and properly pointed. Exactly matching
the surrounding mortar color is virtually impossible, so
some allowance must be made for color variations.
A small inspection mirror and a flashlight can be
used to observe the adjacent construction. By shining the
flashlight beam at the inspection mirror along the line of
sight, the area within view in the mirror can be
illuminated from outside the wall.
5.4.2.2 Fiber-optic Borescope -- A
fiber-optic borescope can also be used to inspect
concealed conditions. The viewing wand of this device
is inserted in a small hole, which is usually drilled in a
mortar joints without damage to the adjacent masonry.
Light to illuminate the view is transmitted from a light
box to the end of the wand along optical fibers, and the
image is transmitted to an eyepiece. The resulting image
can be recorded by replacing the eyepiece with a camera.

5.5 COMPLIANCE
Documents contained within the quality assurance
file should show compliance of all construction activities
with the individual specification requirements. The
documents should reflect the following:
1. Documentation for approved submittals.
2. Documentation for masonry materials certified or
tested and in conformance with the product
specification.
3. Documentation for mortar selection and
conformance of that mortar to the requirements of
ASTM C 270.
4. Documentation of mortar quality control measures
and tests.
5. Documentation of masonry materials quality control
tests.
6. Documentation of masonry prism compressive-
strength tests.
7. Documentation of special construction practices:
a. During cold weather construction.
b. During hot weather construction.
8. Documentation of grout compressive strength.
9. Documentation of inspection and findings.
A paperwork path to provide evidence of
compliance of the construction practice with the
Specification requirements is established by: identifying
the project specification requirement; documenting
actions taken, such as recording dates of sampling and
testing; providing written results of tests, including
indications of whether the test results prove compliance;
providing signatures of the tester and agency on all test
reports; and marking all documents as received and
approved by the QA manager. The supporting
documents are appropriate for material submittals and
REFERENCES
5.0.1 "Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete
Construction," ACI 121R-85, American
Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1985.
5.2.1 Beall, C., "Coloring Mortar (Mortar--How to
Specify and Use Masonry Mortar)," Aberdeen's
Magazine of Masonry Construction, October
1989, p. 33.
5.4.1 "Mortars for Brick Masonry," Technical Notes
8, Revised, Brick Industry Association, Reston,
Virginia, August 1995.
5-10
Chapter 5
testing, as well as inspections required by the A/E to
assure quality.
Compliance is indicated when a specific part of the
quality assurance plan has been completed in its entirety.
Any nonconformance that occurs during construction
should be documented to reflect: the specification
requirement, nature of the nonconformance, corrective
action taken and verification that the corrective action
taken has resolved the occurrence, and changes to
prevent its recurrence. Appropriate signatures and
approvals by the A/E or the owner's designated
representative should be a part of the documentation. In
summary, what is sought is certification that the
requirement was completed, or where not completed
properly, has been corrected to restore the structure to its
specified condition.
For example, if quality control tests of a material
(such as masonry units) are found to be in
nonconformance with the materials specification,
documentation should allow one to trace the sample from
its manufacture to testing during which the noncon-
formance was detected. The same document should
establish the people involved and the corrective action
taken. No part of the masonry, or that part of the
masonry structure containing the questionable materials,
is permitted to be impaired or degraded by the inclusion
of the product. The corrective measures should also
consider additional steps to prevent recurrence, such as
prohibition of that product until on-site lots have been
sampled, tested, and approved.
An additional part of the compliance should include
record retention and disposal. Records should be
provided to the owner for documentation of original
conslruction and for use by maintenance personnel.
5.4.2 "Compressive Strength Testing of Masonry
Mortar," TMS 5301-96, The Masortry Society,
Boulder, Colorado, 1997.
5.4.3 "Standard Test Methods for Evaluating
Masonry Bond Strength," ASTM C 1357-98,
ASTM, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania.
Quality Construction
Select Bibliography
Beall, C., Masonry Design and Detailingfor Architects,
Engineers and Builders, 4th ed., 1997, p. 461-472.
McGinley, W.M., "IRA and the Flextwal Bond Strength
of Brick Masonry," Masonry: Components to
Assemblages, ASTM STP 1063, John H. Matthys,
Ed., American Society for Testing and Materials,
Pennsylvania, 1990.
Sarker, A., and R_ H. Brown, "Flexural Strength of Brick
Masonry Using the Bond Wrench," Research Report
Number 20, Brick Institute of American, Reston,
Virginia, November, 1987.
"Quality Assurance for Masonry Mortar, IS279,"
Portland Cement Association, Skokie, Illinois, 1995.

5-11

QUALITY CONTROL
6.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Quality control, as discussed in this section, consists
of the operations of the contractors and other members
of the project team at the construction site to ensure
compliance with the contract documents. The Code and
Specification mandate certain operations; other
operations may be desirable or helpful to achieve the
desired level of quality. The operations at the site begin
with the receipt, inspection, storage, and handling of the
materials. Prior to beginning the work, the areas where
the masonry will be constructed should be inspected to
6.1 P R E P A R A T I O N
Preparations for masonry construction include
proper storage and protection of materials from the
weather, inspection of supporting elements for
completion and accuracy, examination of units and
materials, and provision for construction protection.
6.1.1 Materials Delivery, Storage,
and Handling
Delivery, storage, and handling of materials prior to
construction are critical to the performance and
appearance of the finished masonry. Improper
procedures can result in physical damage to traits and
accessories, or in contamination or degradation of
mortar and grout ingredients. Specification Article 1.7
B requires that moisture-controlled concrete masonry
units and cementitious material be protected from
precipitation and ground water. Materials that have
been contaminated by deleterious substances should not
be used, according to Specification Article 1.7 C.
6-1
6
ensure that they are ready and that the specified
tolerances have been met. The actual placement of the
masonry begins with the preparation of the mortar and
continues through the installation of a variety of
materials and products that, when properly combined,
form the completed product. Partially completed or
completed portions of the work should be protected
during the remainder of the construction to prevent
damage.
In general, masonry units should be delivered and
stored to prevent moisture migration from the ground,
and covered with waterproof sheets for protection
from the weather and from staining or discoloration
during construction (MDG Fig. 6.1-1). Units should
be handled so as to avoid chipping and breaking.
Aggregates should also be protected from rain, ice,
snow and against contamination from blowing dust
and soil (MDG Fig. 6.1-2). Different aggregates
should be stored in separate stockpiles, according to
Specification Article 1.7 D.
Packaged mortar and grout ingredients should be
stored off the ground and covered to prevent moisture
penetration, deterioration, or intrusion of foreign
materials (MDG Fig. 6.1-3). Packaged materials
should be in the original containers with
manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken
packages, open containers, or packages with missing
or illegible labels should be rejected.
 Chapter 6

Fig. 6.1-1 Protection of Units

Fig. 6.1-2 Protection of Aggregate

6-2
Quality Control
According to Specification Article 1.7 E
reinforcement, ties, and metal accessories should be
protected against permanent distortion, and should be
stored off the ground to prevent soiling or wetting that
could inhibit bond or promote corrosion.
Weather conditions should not affect the
performance of weather-protected materials. Masonry
units properly stored and covered immediately after
delivery will remain in good condition. Dry masonry
units that have been subjected to freezing temperaatres
may be used in construction without damage to the units
or to the masonry, if proper procedures are used. Wet
masonry units that have frozen, however, must be
thawed prior to use.
For special material storage and protection requirements
during hot and cold weather, refer to MDG Sections 7.1
and 7.2.
6.1.2 Inspecting Surfaces to Receive
Masonry
Specification Article 3.1 requires that the contractor
inspect foundations prior to the start of masonry work to
verify that construction is within the tolerances required
by ACI 117 and that reinforcing dowels are positioned
in accordance with the project drawings. Supporting
elements must be leveled within acceptable tolerances
set by the contract documents (see MDG Section 6.3).
Concrete foundations and brick ledges should be
Fig. 6.1-3 Protection of Mortar and Grout Materials
6-3
inspected for conformance to design dimensions and
for correct condition of surfaces. Other masonry
supports above the foundation level should be
inspected for correct location. Deficiencies should be
noted, reported to the A/E, and corrected by the
contractor before masonry construction begins.
Specification Article 3.2 B requires that the
masonry contractor remove laitance, loose aggregate,
and other substances that would prevent mortar from
bonding to the foundation.
6.1.3 Masonry Units
Masonry units must be examined and sometimes
modified, for example by wetting, prior to installation.
The color, texture, and size of units delivered to the
job site should be compared with the approved sample
panel. Based on industry standards of sampling,
concrete and clay units should be checked to verify
that cracks, chips, warpage, and size tolerances do not
exceed the maximum allowed by the applicable ASTM
standard.
During construction the product should be
maintained in the "as received" condition or upgraded,
for example, by allowing concrete masonry units to
dry. After receipt, protected products should be main-
tained in this condition until use. Nonprotected
products may have to be upgraded prior to use in the
masonry. Drying and cleaning of the units may
forestall their rejection.

The IRA (initial rate of absorption, also sometimes
called suction) of clay or shale masonry units must be
checked well in advance of construction. Specification
Article 3.2 C.2 requires that clay or shale masonry units
with IRAs in excess of one gram per minute per sq. in.
(0.0016 grams per minute per mm2), when measured in
accordance with the ASTM C 67 field test, be wetted to
produce an IRA not to exceed one gram per minute per
sq. in. when the units are used. Units should be wetted
by spraying, dipping in water, or using a soaker hose.
Units may be wetted immediately before laying, but it is
recommended that they be thoroughly wetted 3 to 24
hours prior to use to allow time for moisture to become
distributed throughout the unit. Units should be
saturated but surface dry when laid. They can be broken
in half to check wetting conditions as shown in MDG
Fig. 6.1-4. Units generally should not be wetted in cold
weather, because some high suction units may produce
better bond strength than low suction units (see MDG
Section 7.2 on cold weather construction). Before
placing, do not wet concrete masonry units or clay
masonry units that have an IRA of less than 0.2 of a
gram per minute per sq. in. (0.00031 grams per minute
per mm2) (Specification Article 3.2 C. and ASTM C
90). All masonry units should be clean and free of
contaminants such as dirt, oil, or sand that might inhibit
bond or proper suction (see MDG Section 3.1.6).
6.1.4 Reinforcement, Connectors,
and Accessories
Specification Article 3.4 A requires that reinforce-
ment, ties, and accessories be checked for the correct
size and configuration. Before placing reinforcing steel
Dry
Saturated
Fig. 6.1-4 Moisture States of Units
Chapter 6
or metal accessories in the wall, Specification Article
3.2A requires that oil, dirt, ice, and other
contaminants be removed so that good bond with the
mortar or grout can be achieved.
6.1.5 Mortar and Grout
Mortar and grout ingredients should be checked
for conformance with the contract documents and with
the material storage and protection requirements of
Specification Article 1.7 and 1.8 (see MDG Section
6.1.1). Mortar and grout are usually mixed at the job
site throughout the workday, but ready-mixed and
prebatched mortars and grout are also available.
These newer mortar and grout systems prepared at
central batching locations attempt to control field
variables that can adversely affect the quality and
consistency of the mortar.
6,1.5.1 Mortar - - Mortar mixtures should be
prepared so that the desired proportions are obtained
(either selected from the proportion specifications of
ASTM C 270 or derived from laboratory tests in
accordance with the property specifications of ASTM C
270). The ingredients should be measured and batched
either by weight or by volume, so that the specified
proportions can be controlled and consistently
maintained. Ingredient proportions and properties of the
various types of conventional ASTM C 270 mortar are
covered in MDG Section 3.2
Inspection should not focus on actual water content,
but on assuring batch-to-batch consistency of the
volumes of cementitious materials and aggregate. The
mortar should be prepared by mixing the ingredients in
a mechanical drum or paddle-type mixer.
Surface Moist
Saturated but Surface
Dr,/
6-4
Quality Control
A good mixture generally results when about three-
fourths of the required water, one-half the sand, and all
of the cementitious materials are briefly mixed together.
The balance of the sand is then added, along with the
remaining water. Mixing time should usually be a
minimum of three and a maximum of five minutes after
the last mixing water has been added. Overmixing
entraps air in the mortar, thus reducing bond strength.
Any specified admixtures and pigments should be
added in the approved quantities according to
manufacturer's instructions. Pigments should always be
added in prebatched amounts.
Retempering of nonpigmented mortars should be
permitted, but only to replace water lost by evaporation.
Retempering of pigmented mortar may cause changes of
mortar color. Retempering slightly decreases mortar
compressive strength but restores bond strength. The
amount of strength loss increases with time after initial
mixing. Mortar will begin to stiffen and lose work-
ability as it loses moisture and the cement hydrates.
Mois~tre loss due to evaporation is a function of wind
speed, temperature, humidity, and time. Mortar that has
begun to set should be discarded. Mortar must be used
within 2-1/2 hours of mixing.
Glass unit masonry, unlike brick, is totally
nonabsorbent. The mortar mixture must therefore be
much drier than that with which most masons are
familiar. According to Specification Article 2.6 A.4,
mortar cannot be retempered after initial set and any
unused mortar must be discarded within 1-1/2 hours
after initial mixing.
6.1.5.2 Grout - - ASTM C 476 requires that
the method of measuring materials be such that specified
proportions can be controlled and accurately
maintained. Required mixing time is at least five
minutes. Admixtures are frequently used in grout to act
as water-retention agents, plasticizers, and gas-forming
agents. The use of expansive admixtures in grouts is
highly recommended to compensate for grout shrinkage
and ensure more intimate contact and bond between
grout and units.
One might consider preparing trial grout mixes so
that costly surprises, such as low strengths or segre-
gation when grout is pumped, do not occur at the job
site (Ref. 6.1.1). ASTM C 476 lists grout proportions
by loose volume. However, testing laboratories and
ready-mixed grout suppliers typically batch by weight.
Volume proportions can be changed to weight values by
using the loose density of the materials.
6-5
The design criteria for grout should consider
compressive strength, durability, grout space, and
consistency. When grout is specified by strength, the
Code requires that it have compressive strength equal
to or exceeding the specified compressive strength of
the masonry, f~,, but not less than 2,000 psi (14 MPa).
The durability of grout is typically not a concern since
it is usually protected from moisture saturation and is
not susceptible to freeze-thaw damage.
ASTM C 476 classifies grouts as free or coarse
depending on the maximum aggregate size used. If the
maximum aggregate size is less than 3/8 in. (10 mm),
the grout is classified as free; if the aggregate is 3/8 in.
(10 mm) or larger, the grout is classified as coarse.
Since grout must flow easily into confined spaces, the
smaller the space, the smaller the maximum
permissible aggregate size for the grout. Coarse grout
is preferred whenever possible because it shrinks less,
and is more economical since it requires a smaller
proportion of cement. Specification Table 7 gives
recommended grout types for different grout spaces.
For a project that requires grouting of both collar joint,
and cells of masonry units, two different grout mixes
might be used on the job.
To flow around reinforcement and to completely
fill cavities, grout, whether pumped or poured, needs
to be very fluid. This requires a higher water content
than for masonry mortars. Specification Article 2.6
B.2 requires a consistency that results in a slump
between 8 and 11 in. (203 and 279 mm) when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 143. Within that specified
range lower slumps should be used for masonry units
with low absorption, and higher slumps for masonry
units with high absorption. In addition, one should
consider temperature and humidity conditions and the
sizes of cavities in determining required grout
consistency. Cavity size affects the grout's contact
surface area. The greater the surface-to-volume ratio
of the grout mass, the greater the amount of water
absorbed.
Although a contractor can use volume
proportioning on the job, a grout producer is usually
selected who can provide grout that economically
meets the design criteria. The grout producer or test
lab makes trial batches using materials that conform to
ASTM standards to develop a grout mixture to meet
design requirements.
 Chapter 6

Fig. 6.1-5 Wall Protection

Fig. 6.1-6 Scaffold Board Storage

6-6
Q u a l i t y Control
6.1.6 Protection
The Specification requires that the top of unfinished
masonry be protected from the weather. Therefore, the
top of exposed masonry construction should be covered
at the end of each day and whenever work is not in
progress. Excess moisture entering the masonry during
construction can saturate the masonry and it may take
weeks or months to dry out. Such prolonged wetting
dissolves even slightly soluble salts, and may result in
efflorescence. Covers, such as heavy plastic sheets,
should extend at least two feet down each side of the
masonry and be held securely in place (MDG Fig. 6.1-
5). Mortar boards and scaffold planks are not acceptable
as covers because they do not provide watertight
protection.
During construction, scaffold boards should be
turned on edge whenever work is not in progress, so that
rain will not splash mortar droppings or dirt onto the
face of the masonry and cause staining (MDG Fig. 6.1-
6). The base of masonry should also be protected from
%.
Fig. 6.1-7 Example of Wall Bracing
Un
Joint
Fig. 6.2-1 Wall Components
6-7
rain-splashed mud and mortar droppings by spreading
plastic sheets 3 to 4 ft (0.9 to 1.2 m) on the ground and
2 to 3 ft (0.6 to 0.9 m) up the masonry.
Partially completed work should be braced during
construction, as required in Specification Article 3.3 F,
against lateral loads from wind or other forces applied
before full design strength is attained (MDG Fig. 6.1-
7). Bracing should remain in place until sufficient
strength is reached or until other elements of the
building provide adequate support (Ref. 6.1.2).
Protection of the work is necessary during
extremely hot or cold weather, as outlined in MDG
Sections 7.1 and 7.2.
Adjacent work should be protected from damage
during masonry construction. In particular, door and
window frames, sills, ledges, and exposed finish
materials should be covered to avoid mortar splatter.
During cleaning operations, these elements should also
be protected from stains caused by cleaning solutions
that run down the masonry.
Yl

6.2 P L A C E M E N T
The Specification gives requirements for the
placement of mortar, reinforcement, ties, units, grout,
flashing, weep holes, and movement joints. This section
discusses the purposes of Code and Specification
mandated procedures for the placement of items. MDG
Fig. 6.2-1 shows many of the items that are discussed.
6.2.1 Mortar Placement
Specification Article 3.3 - Masonry Erection
includes several specific requirements for mortar
placement which relate primarily to the structural
integrity of the masonry.
• Head and bed joints must be 3/8 in. thick unless
otherwise required by the project drawings. Non-
modular units or special types of unit masonry such
as glazed-face clay or concrete masonry might
necessitate other joint sizes. Generally, however, a
3/8 in. mortar joint thickness is standard for most
work and with allowable placement and unit size
tolerances, assures adequate bedding and leveling
of the units. Thicker joints reduce prism
compressive strength. Thinner joints may reduce
bond strength.
• At the starting course of masonry at the foundation,
joints must be a minimum of 1/4 in. and a maximum
of 3/4 in. This allows for leveling of uneven
supporting surfaces.
• Joints in a glass unit masonry are limited to 1/4 in.
thickness to minimize the combined effects of non-
absorptive surfaces and the weight of the units.
• Head joints in solid unit masonry must be filled by
shoving rather than slushing, and furrowing of bed
joints is prohibited. This maximizes the extent of
bond between mortar and units and is intended to
minimize voids in the joints.
• Face shell bedding is required for hollow unit
masonry except at piers, columns, pilasters, the
starting course of foundations, and where
containment of grout or loose fill insulation
necessitates mortaring of webs as well. Generally,
face shell bedding achieves the net bearing area for
hollow units upon which the allowable stresses in
the Code are based, and allows the lateral flow of
grout within an element to help interlock the units
together. In piers, columns and pilasters which will
likely carry greater loads, full bedding of face shells
and webs maximizes the net bearing area.
6-8
Chapter 6
• Mortar protrusions of more than 1/2 in. must be
removed from cells or cavities which will be
grouted to ensure the free flow of grout into the
spaces.
• Collar joints less than 3/4 in. wide must be filled
with mortar as the work progresses. This assures
that the joint is solidly filled and without voids
which would decrease the strength of composite
walls or increase the likelihood of water
penetration to the interior wythe.
• Adhered masonry must be placed in the specified
manner to ensure that the mortar backing is
between 3/8 in. and 1-1/4 in. thick and is solidly
filled and without voids. This maximizes the
bonding area and minimizes the risk of water
penetration behind the veneer units.
• Units which are disturbed after initial bond is
achieved must be removed and relaid with fresh
mortar to ensure adequate bond strength and
minimize the likelihood of water penetration into
an unbonded j oint.
• Unless otherwise required by the project
documents, joints must be tooled to a concave
profile.
Variations in aesthetic effect can be achieved by
using different types of mortar joints (see MDG Fig
6.2-2). The most effective and moisture resistant
joints are the concave and V-shaped, tooled joints.
Mortar squeezes out of the joints as the masonry units
are set in place, and the excess is struck off with a
trowel. After the mortar has become '~thumbprint"
hard (i.e., when a clear thumbprint can be impressed
and the cement paste does not stick to the thumb),
joints are finished with a jointing tool slightly wider
than the joint itself. Tooling compresses the mortar
against the unit and compacts the surface making it
more dense and more resistant to moisture penetration.
Concave or V-tooled joints are recommended for use
in areas Subject to heavy rains and high winds.
Rough-cut or flush joints are used when other finish
materials, such as stucco, gypsum board, or textured
coatings, are to be applied over the masonry.
Weathered joints are more difficult to form, but some
compaction does occur, and the joint sheds water
naturally. Struck joints are easily cut with a trowel
point, but the small ledge created collects water, which
may then penetrate the wall. Raked joints are made by
Q u a l i t y Control
scraping out a portion of the mortar while it is still soft,
using a square-edged tool. It is difficult to make the
joint weather resistant, and it is not recommended where
rain, high winds, or freezing are likely to occur. The cut
of the joint does have an influence on net area, forms a
shadow, and tends to give the wall a darker appearance.
Weeping or extruded joints leave excess mortar
protruding from the joint to give a rustic appearance, but
again are not weather resistant. Other, more specialized
effects can be achieved with tools to bead or groove the
joint. Joint profiles other than the concave or V-joint
will allow more moisture to penetrate a wall and should
be used only in mild to moderate climates or protected
exposures.
The majority of these requirements are intended to
ensure that the units and mortar are fully and properly
bonded together. Furrowing of the mortar bed joints is
discouraged, since it can reduce the contact area and
create voids as shown in MDG Fig. 6.2-3. Specification
Article 3.3 B.4c prohibits deeply furrowed bed joints
with solid units. Slushing to fill the head joints after the
units are placed is to be avoided because slushed mortar
will not be placed under pressure and may not develop
proper contact for bond. The slushing process could
also disturb the unit and break the contact that occurs
when the unit is initially placed. Specification Article
CONCAVE * RAKED V-JOINT *
V/////
V/Y/ V/// •'/y/
WEATHERED FLUSH SQUEEZED
OR WEEPING
Fig. 6.2-2 Typical Mortar Joints
6-9
3.3 B.6a states that units are to be removed if the
initial bond is broken. Disturbing the unit at any time
after it has been initially set can break the initial bond
of the mortar to the unit; therefore, any unit that is
disturbed should be removed and reset using new
mortar.
In walls that are to be fully grouted, only the face
shells of hollow units need to be fully mortared.
Where only selected cells are to be grouted, the cross
webs adjacent to those cells should also be fully
mortared to confine the grout to the specific cell.
Cells should align. Protrusions greater than 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm) should be removed in hollow cells and
cavities that are to be grouted. Protrusions in spaces
for cavities or ceils that are either to remain open or be
grouted can fall to the bottom and block weep holes,
inhibit the free flow of moisture along the flashing, or
prevent the proper filling of the space by the grout. At
levels above the flashing in the wall, mortar that
bridges across the collar joint can transfer moisture.
Three methods assist in keeping the spaces clean
(Refs. 6.2.1 and 6.2.2). MDG Fig. 6.2-4 shows two o f
the methods that can be used to keep the spaces clean
and free o f unwanted mortar promlsions. The proper
placement of mortar along the bed joint includes not
placing excessive amounts of mortar, and beveling the
V/////
V/Y/
BEADED STRUCK
* MOST WEATHER
RESISTANT
GRAPEVINE
 Chapter 6

Fig. 6.2-3 Furrowed Mortar Bed Joints Not Recommended

BeveledBed Joints
\

I II I

I II I
I ......tl I
J II I

~ ~ WoodenStripTo Catch
MortarDroppings

Fig. 6.2-4 Techniques for Maintaining a Clean Collar Joint

6-10
Quality Control
back side of the mortar bed before placing the next unit.
A wooden strip can be used in the collar joint to catch
the mortar droppings and facilitate their removal. A
similar system using a compressible material, such as a
sponge, could be employed in cells to be grouted. A
third method is to use cleanout openings at the bottoms
of cavities, collar joints, and ceils for inspection and
access to remove mortar droppings. Cleanouts are
required when grout pour height exceeds 5 ft (1.52 m).
6.2.2 Placement of Reinforcement
6.2.2.1 General -- The placement of
reinforcing bars and the placement of joint
reinforcement are quite different. Reinforcing bars must
always be embedded in grout; joint reinforcement can be
embedded in mortar or grout. Individual ties and
anchors are discussed in MDG Section 6.2.3. Code
Section 1.2.2(0 requires that the size, grade, type, and
location of reinforcement be shown on the project
drawings and in typical details. Code Section 1.12.1.1
requires that the details of reinforcement be shown or
covered by notes on the project drawings. The
requirements shown or noted on the project drawings are
to be followed during placement. If this information is
not provided in the contract documents, the contractor
should obtain it before proceeding with the work.
It is generally acceptable to lay joint reinforcement
directly on top of the masonry course. Mortar is then
spread over the wire and face shell in one operation.
Due to irregularities in the masonry and the wire, mortar
surrounds the wire, providing bonding for elements of
the assemblage. It is generally not recommended to
place the wire between thin layers of bed-joint mortar,
since thin layers of mortar have a tendency to dry out
and lose bond to the masonry or between the thin layers.
Table 6.2.1 Reinforcing Placement Tolerances
Distance from Centerline of Steel to the Opposite Face of Masonry
Element <8 in. (203 mm)
but <_24in. (610 mm)
Walls and Flexural + 1/2 in. (12.7 ram)
Elements
Walls For vertical bars, within 2 in. (50.8 mm) of location along length of wall
indicated on the Project Drawing
6-11
Cover requirements for joint reinforcement,
according to Specification Article 3.4 C.5, are 1/2 in.
(12.7 mm) on the inside face and at least 5/8 in. (15.9
ram) on the exterior face of a wall; these are clearly
less than that recommended for other reinforcement.
Code Section 6.2.2.5.4 for veneers, requires that
ladder or tab-type joint reinforcement have a minimum
wire size of W1.7 (MW 11) spaced at a maximum of
16 in. (406.4 mm) on center with welded cross wires
and a minimum of 5/8 in. (15.9 mm) of cover on each
side of the wire.
Bar reinforcement must be placed carefully into
cells or cavities that are to be grouted to ensure that
there is enough grout around the bar, and to ensure
that the bar is correctly located. To guarantee full
encapsulation and proper bond between reinforcing
steel and grout, Specification Article 3.4 C.2 requires
that bars have a clear distance from any face of
masonry or formed surface of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) for fine
grout and 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) for coarse grout.
Specification Article 3.2F requires cleanouts in the
bottom course of masonry for each grout pour when
the grout pour exceeds 5 ft. (1.52 m) in height. Often
cleanouts are provided at vertical reinforcing bar
locations. For solid grouted masonry, space cleanouts
at a maximum horizontal spacing of 32 in. (810 mm)
when the grout pour exceeds 5 ft. (1.52 m) in height.
The minimum cleanout opening dimension shall be 3
in. (76.2 mm) and the cleanout should be of sufficient
size to permit removal of the debris (Ref. 6.2.3).
To ensure that bars are in the proper location to
resist stresses, they must be placed within specific
tolerances as listed in MDG Table 6.2.1. These are as
required by Specification Article 3.4 E. 1 and 3.4 E.2.
If interference exists that requires movement of the
>8 in. (203 mm) >24 in. (610 ram)
+- 1 in. (25.4 mm) + 1-1/4 in. (31.8 ram)

reinforcement more than one bar diameter, or more than
the specified tolerance, the A/E or the owner's
designated representative should be notified as required
by Specification Article 3.4 E.3.
Reinforcing bars must be held in position during
grouting. This can be accomplished by a number of
different methods. One of the most reliable is to use
reinforcing bar positioners. There are no requirements
for the spacing of these positioners, but they are
generally located at the bottom and top of the wall and
at 10-ft (3 m) intervals. Typical reinforcing bar
positioners are shown in Specification Commentary Fig.
7. Specification Article 3.4 A prohibits contact of
dissimilar metals, since galvanic corrosion can occur
when dissimilar metals are placed in contact with each
other. Reinforcing bar positioners should either be of
plastic, or of the same material as the reinforcement.
According to Specification Article 3.4 C.4,
reinforcement is not to be bent after being embedded in
the mortar or grout unless approved by the A/E or the
owner's designated representative. Bending of
embedded reinforcement can break bond, create voids in
mortar or grout, and reduce the reinforcement's
ductility.
To ensure adequate transfer of the forces that the
reinforcement is intended to resist, Specification Article
3.4 C.3 stipulates that all splices in reinforcement should
be made only where indicated in the contract documents,
unless otherwise acceptable.
6.2.2.2 Glass Unit Masonry--Reinforce-
ment of glass unit masonry consists of ladder-type, wire
sections of 9 gauge steel spaced not more than 16 in.
(406 ram) on center, located in the mortar bed joint, and
extending the entire length of the panel, but not across
expansion joints. Longitudinal wires should be lapped a
minimum of 6 in. (152 mm) at splices. Joint
reinforcement should be placed in the bed joint
immediately above and below openings in the panel.
The reinforcement should have no fewer than two
parallel longitudinal wires of size W1.7 and butt-welded
cross wires of size W1.7.
6.2.3 Tie and Anchor Placement
6.2,3.1 G e n e r a l - - The Specification require-
ments for placement of individual ties and anchors are
the same as for reinforcement. Code Section 1.2.2(0
states that the, size, grade, type and location of
connectors should be shown or indicated in the contract
documents and that these requirements be followed
during placement. While it is not the intent of the Code
6-12
Chapter 6
that every connector must be shown, there should be
enough information on the drawings to make it clear to
the contractor what is required. These requirements
are necessary to achieve the design strength and
provide proper connection. If this information is n o t
provided in the drawings and specifications, the
contractor should obtain it before proceeding with the
work.
Proper interaction between the ties and anchors
and the masonry elements relies on sufficient bond to
the embedded portion of the tie or anchor in the mortar
or grout. As described in Specification Article 3.2 A,
the embedded portions should be kept free of mud, oil,
or other material that will adversely affect the bond
with the mortar and grout. Specification Article
3.4 D.3 indicates that the ties and anchors are not to be
bent after being embedded in the mortar or grout
unless approved. Bending can break the bond, create
voids in the mortar or grout, and weaken the
connector.
Specification Article 3.4 D.6 requires the use of
extra wall ties around the perimeter of openings.
Code Section 2.1.2 covers structural design of
anchor bolts solidly grouted in masonry. Spacing and
location are addressed considering potential failure
modes as mentioned in Code Commentary Section
2.1.2.
Wall ties and anchors can be placed directly on
top of masonry units and covered with the bed-joint
mortar; alternatively, the ties and anchors can be
placed in the fresh mortar prior to the placement of the
next unit. Because joint reinforcement must be placed
in fresh mortar, two-piece ties are better suited for
multiwythe walls in which the wythes are not
constructed simultaneously. Specification Article 3.4
D. 1 also stipulates that for hollow units, wall ties must
be extended to the outer face shell and be embedded at
least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) into it. For this reason,
anchors extending into grouted cores should be
considered. Specifying connectors to be placed on
mortared cross webs of hollow units is not
recommended since cross webs often do not line up.
For solid units and hollow units with cells filled
solid, according to Specification Article 3.4 D1 wire
wall ties need to be embedded at least 1-1/2 in. (38
mm) into the mortar bed. For joint reinforcement, 5/8
in. (16 ram) exterior cover and 1/2 in. interior cover
are required. This should serve as a good guideline
for all ties. Hence, for a 3-5/8 in. (92 mm) brick unit
the wall ties can be embedded from 1-1/2 in.
Quality Control
Table 6.2.2 Maximum Spacing and Area for Veneer Anchors and Ties for Other Wall-Types

Anchor or Tie Type and Size

Wall Type Adjustable Non-Adjustable Non-Adjustable Corrugated

All Sizes Wl.7 Wire W2.8 Wire 22 gage **

Anchored Veneer
Area per Tie 2.67 ft 2 (0.25 mz)
Horizontal Spacing 32 in. (813 mm)
Vertical Spacing 18 in. (457 mm)
Other Wall Types
Area per Tie 1.77 R2 (0.16 m2)
Horizontal Spacing 16 in. (406 ram)
Vertical Spacing 16 in. (406 ram)
* Spacing reducedby 50% if ties have drips.
** Permittedwhenconnectingveneerto woodframebacking.
(38.1 mm) to 3 in. (76 ram) into the brick. This allows
standard sizes of wall ties to be used for a variety of
collar joint widths.
The portion of the Code dealing with masonry
veneer uses the term "anchor' to describe the device that
attaches the veneer to the backing. It requires that
corrugated sheet metal anchors (Code Section 6.2.2.5.1),
sheet metal anchors (Code Section 6.2.2.5.2), and wire
anchors (Code Section 6.2.2.5.3) for veneers have at
least 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) embedment with at least 5/8 in.
(15.9 mm) mortar cover on the exterior face. Code
Section 6.2.2.5.5 requires that pintle anchors for
veneers have no greater than a 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm)
offset, and Code Section 6.2.2.5.7 states that the joint
thickness be at least twice the thickness of the anchor.
The space between the inside face of the masonry and
the backing must be at least 1 in. (25.4 mm) and no
more that 4-1/2 in. (114 ram), according to Code
Sections 6.2.2.6, 6.2.2.7, and 6.2.2.8.
Code Section 6.2.2.5.6 and Specification Article
3.4 D stipulate requirements for the spacing of veneer
anchors and ties for other wall types. MDG Table 6.2.2
lists the different spacing requirements.
As stated above, Code Section 6.2.2.5.6.4 requires
additional anchors at 3 ft. (1 m) on center around all
openings larger than 16 in. (406 ram) and within 12 in.
(305 mm) of the edge of the opening. Code Section
6.2.2.5.7 requires that the mortar joint be at least twice
the thickness of the embedded anchor. Under normal
circumstances, this should not create a deviation from
the Specification requirement for 3/8 in. (9.5 ram) thick
2.67 Rz (0.25 m2) 3.50 ft~ (0.33 m2) 2.67 ft2 (0.25m2)
32 in. (813 mm) 32 in. (813 mm) 32 in. (813 ram)
18 in. (457 ram) 18 in. (457 mm) 18 in. (457 ram)
2.67 ft2 (0.25 m 2) 4.50 ftz (0.42 m2) not permitted
36 in. (914 nun) 36 in. (914 mm)
24 in. (610 mm) 24 in. (610 mm)
mortar joints. If a deviation in joint thickness should
appear to be necessary the A/E or owner's
representative should be contacted.
6.2.3.2 Glass Unit Masonry-- In con-
trast to veneers, anchors in glass unit masonry are
employed to fix panels to the adjacent structural
framework and consequently, anchors are always
placed within the plane of the panel, not perpendicular
to it (MDG Fig 6.2-5). When anchors are chosen over
channel edge restraints, panel anchors provide support
along the top and sides of panel construction. Anchors
are composed of hot-dipped galvanized, perforated
steel strips, 20-gauge by 1-3/4 in. (44.5 ram) wide by
24 in. (610 mm) long. Anchors are spaced not more
than 16 in. (406 mm) on center and are designed to
resist applied loads, or a minimum of 200 pounds per
foot (2900 N/m) of panel.
6.2.3.3 A d h e r e d V e n e e r - - Adhered
veneers do not require mechanical anchors like glass
unit masonry or anchored veneers. They do, however,
have requirements for unit sizes, wall area limitations,
the backing system and adhesion. Code Section
6.3.2.4 requires that the adhesion between the veneer
units and backing have a shear strength of at least 50
psi (345 kPa) based on the gross unit surface area.
6.2.4 Unit Placement
6.2.4.1 G e n e r a l - - The placement of the
units, according to Specification Article 3.3 B, occurs
in conjunction with the placement of the mortar. The
requirements governing placement of mortar are
equally as important as those governing the placement

6-13

of the units. The plastic mortar serves as a separator to
allow for dimensional tolerances in the units. The
hardened mortar is the bonding agent that holds the
individual units together to act as a complete assembly.
Unless the units are properly placed, the mortar bond
will be weakened or destroyed, creating paths for air and
water infiltration.
When required, units should be wet-cut with a
masonry saw or other means that will not damage the
exposed manufactured faces or edges. Wet cutting of
units will add moisture to the units. The unit should be
surface dry before placement to ensure adequate bond
between the unit and the mortar. Wet concrete masonry
units should be allowed to dry before laying to reduce
subsequent shrinkage.
Bond strength begins to develop the instant the unit
comes in contact with the mortar. This makes it
essential that the unit be shoved tightly into position so
that the joint size is achieved without further disturbing
the unit. Disturbing the unit after it has been placed
breaks the initial bond of the mortar to the unit and will
reduce bond strength. According to Specification
Article 3.3 B.6.a, any unit that is moved after initial
positioning will require the following procedure: the unit
is removed, the mortar is removed from the unit, and the
unit is reset after placement of new mortar. MDG Fig.
6.2-5 shows the unit being properly shoved into
position. To enable the appropriate amount of cement
paste to be absorbed from the mortar by the unit, the
units should be free of laitance or other bond inhibitors,
such as dirt, sand, oil, or debris that will inhibit suction
by the units. The units should be placed soon after
mortar placement to prevent water loss from the mortar
by evaporation.
On dry, normal-temperature days, absorptive clay
masonry units may have to be wetted to reduce the
initial rate of absorption (see MDG Section 6.1.3 and
Fig. 6.2-5 Unit Placement
6-14
Chapter 6
Specification Article 3.2 C). Water additions should
be adequate to alter the absorption characteristics to
the desired range at the time of laying, that is, less than
or equal to one gram of water per minute per in7
(0.0016 grams per min. per mm 2) of masonry unit. By
reducing the initial rate of absorption the bond
strength is increased. Clay masonry units should not
be wetted if the initial rate of absorption is less than
0.2 g/min/in, z (0.00031 g/rain/minE). According to
Specification Article 3.2 C.1 concrete masonry units
should not be wetted before use in masonry, unless
otherwise required.
By altering normal construction practices, the
masonry contractor can also influence the performance
of the masonry assembly in the completed
construction. Shading materials and equipment from
direct sunlight, flushing equipment with cool water
before contact with mortar, and using ice in mixing
water are some of the ways to improve masonry
construction during dry, high-temperature conditions.
(Specification Article 1.8D, MDG Section 7.1) The
"pick and dip" method, in which mortar sufficient for
one unit is spread and the upper unit is immediately
laid, is another method for increasing the bond
strength ofmasoury under these conditions.
Moist curing of masonry will promote further
hydration of the cement and increase all performance
characteristics, most significantly bond strength of the
masonry. Curing by a fog spray is required when the
mean daily temperature exceeds 100°F (37.8°C) or
exceeds 90°F (32.2°C) with a wind velocity greater
than 8 mph (12.9 km/hr) (Specification Article
1.8D.3). The application of excessive water should be
avoided as soluble bases and salts may be dissolved
and concentrate on the surface of the masonry as
efflorescence (MDG Section 6.1).
Quality Control
Vertical cells in hollow units to be grouted are to be
aligned according to Specification Article 3.3 B.3.d.
One should consider the coring pattern of the unit so
that cores can be aligned for grouting purposes.
6.2,4,2 Glass Unit Masonry- Glass unit
masonry is nonloadbearing; typical applications consist
of panels designed for resisting only lateral loads and
the dead weight of the panel components.
There are two systems for tying glass-block panels
into the surrounding jamb and head flaming to provide
lateral support: panel anchors and channels or chases
(MDG Fig. 6.2-6 and 6.2-7). Preparation for the
system to be used must be completed before the actual
laying of glass block.

16 IN, (406 ram) O.C.

MAXIMUM SPACING AT

~ES)

SI -MENT
(E
C.
SI )
E)
S1
P/
A~

Fig. 6.2-6 Panel Anchor Construction

- ~'VD A klqlt~kl

nm)

Cl ~T
T' 4[)
RI
S)
P
A
S
(I lENT
S

Fig. 6.2-7 Channel-Type Restraint Construction

6-15

The panel anchor method is typically used when the
glass-block panel will butt up against an existing flush
wall surface and is restricted only by building code
requirements and the requirements of the architect.
Anchors are used along the jambs and at the head;
alternatively, they can be used in combination with
channel construction, where one type of construction is
used at the jambs and the other at the head. Anchors are
placed a maximum of 16 in. (406 mm) on center; this
means that for an 8-in. (203-mm) block, panel anchors
would be placed in every other course, beginning at the
first joints from the bottom and top of the panel.
Placement and spacing of panel anchors across the head
location is similar to their placement at the jambs.
To install panel anchors, the strips should first be
bent 90 degrees to form a short leg about 6 in. (150 mm)
long and a longer 18 in. (450 mm) leg. The short
portion is attached to the frame and the longer portion is
embedded into the adjoining mortar joint. Fasten
anchors at the jambs and head prior to placing the block,
using at least two fasteners per anchor. For wood, use
wood screws; for masonry, use masonry anchors; and
for metals, use self-tapping screws.
The second detailing method is channel or chase
construction. Either metal channels or metal angles
combined to form a channel can be used. The charmet
opening for a 4-in. (102-mm) thick nominal block
should be 4-1/4 in. (108 mm) to 4-1/2 in. (114 ram)
wide by a minimum of 1-3/8 in. (34.9 mm) deep to
allow for a 1 in. (25 mm) minimum recess of the glass
block in the channel and for placement of the expansion
material (backer rods) and sealant between the recessed
faces of the glass block and the channel legs.
To lay glass block, first lay a full, unfurrowed
mortar bed joint on the sill. Next, set the lower course
of glass block with a uniform joint width of 1/4 to 3/8 +
1/8 in. (6.4 to 9.5 + 3.2 mm). Tap the block into place
with the rubber-tipped trowel handle, but do not realign,
tap, or move the block after initial placement. For solid
glass block, it may be necessary to use wood wedges in
the lower courses to prevent mortar from being
displaced, unless drier mortar is used.
Panel reinforcement is installed at the top of the
in'st course and thereafter at a maximum of 16 in. (400
mm) on center for subsequent horizontal courses, as well
as immediately above and below all panel openings.
Install reinforcement by placing half of the joint mortar
onto the block, pressing the reinforcement into the
mortar (but not so much that it touches the block below),
then covering the reinforcement with the upper half of
6-16
Chapter 6
the mortar bed (without furrowing). Reinforcement
should run the full length of the panel, but not bridge
expansion joints. Where overlap is necessary, it
should be at least 6 in. (150 mm).
6.2.5 Grout Placement
Spaces to be grouted should be prepared and the
grout placed in accordance with Specification Article
3.5 and with the project drawings and specifications.
Prior to placing the grout, the cells or voids to receive
the grout should be inspected to ensure that they are
clean and free of all debris that could inhibit the free
flow of the grout and complete filling of the space. All
required cleanouts should be in place and fillers ready
to plug the cleanouts. To ensure proper placement of
the reinforcement and proper bond between the
reinforcement and the surrounding grout, the
reinforcement should be in place before the grout is
poured. Do not force the bars into previously-poured
grout. All reinforcement in place should be inspected
to ensure that it is properly located, supported to
minimize movement, and has sufficient surrounding
space for grout.
To ensure proper flow and bond, grout should be
placed within 1-1/2 hours from the time water is
introduced into the mixture. Cold-weather procedures
discussed in MDG Section 7.2 apply to the placement
of grout. The grout should be confined to the spaces
to be grouted.
Grout should be poured in lifts not more than 5 ft.
(1.5 m) high. Lifts should not be terminated at a bed
joint. Stop 1-1/2 in. (38.1 mm) below the bed joint to
create a shear key. One or more lifts comprise a grout
pour. A grout pour is the total height of grout placed
in a masonry wall before constructing additional
masonry; it usually should not be higher than 24 ft.
(7.3 m). The type of grout (fine or coarse) and the size
of the grout space limit the maximum height of a grout
pour. Specification Table 7 gives maximum grout
pour heights for minimum width of the grout space or
minimum grout space of ceils in hollow units when
either fine or coarse grout is used. The maximum lift
heights and pour heights used by the contractor for
each project must take into account the ability of the
wall, with or without bracing, to resist the fluid grout
pressure without damage to the wall.
Each lift of grout should be properly consolidated
and reconsolidated according to Specification Article
3.5 E to ensure complete filling of the space,
surrounding of the reinforcement, and filling of voids
Quality Control
created by water loss and settlement. The Specification
requires mechanical vibration of the grout during the
placement and reconsolidation after initial water loss
and settlement for all pours exceeding 12 in. (300 mm)
high. Reconsolidation should occur within a range of 10
to 15 minutes after initial placement of grout. Pours 12
in. (300 ram) or less in height need only be vibrated or
puddled. The required vibrator size and type, velocity,
time in the grout, and spacing of the points vibrated are
a function of the type of grout, the size of the space
being grouted, and the absorption of the unit being
grouted. A low-velocity vibrator placed in the grouted
space at intervals of 12 to 16 in. (300 to 400 mm) for
one to two seconds is considered sufficient. Additional
vibration time might be necessary for 3 ft to 5 ft grout
lifts.
Additional discussions on methods of grouting are
given in the literature (Ref. 6.2.3, Ref. 6.2.4., Ref. 6.2.5)
In some parts of the U.S., full-height grouting (up to 24
ft [7.3 m] height of wall in one lift at one time) has been
successfully used and this practice is acceptable by the
Uniform Building Code (Ref. 6.2.6).
6.2.6 Flashing and Weep Hole
Placement
Flashing and weep holes are required to conform to
the contract documents by Specification Article 1.1 C. 1,
and also are mentioned in Specification Article 3.3 E.6.
Proper placement of the flashing and weep holes is
required to allow them to perform their intended
purpose. The following are MDG recommendations.
The specified flashing and weep systems should be
installed so that water will be directed to the exterior of
the wall without allowing it to flow to the interior.
Flashing should collect and contain the water; the weep
holes provide a conduit for the water to travel to the
exterior. Typically, flashing is installed at all
interruptions in the vertical plane of a masonry wall,
such as tops of the foundation, above shelf angles, over
openings, and above bond beams. All lap joints should
be sealed with adhesive to maintain continuity of the
flashing and prevent intrusion of water into the exterior
wall and the interior of the building. End dams should
be used at the ends of discontinuous flashing.
The flashing should also be installed so that it
channels the water to the exterior of the wall. This
requires that the flashing extend to or beyond the
exterior face of the masonry. Some flashing materials
cannot maintain a permanent formed drip.
6-17
Weep holes transfer water collected by flashings
to the wall exterior. They should be installed and
protected during construction to maintain drainage.
Types of weep holes used in today's construction are
open head joints and open head joints filled with
louvers, cellular material, cotton sash cord, or
polyethylene tubes. Polyethylene tubes and cotton
sash cord are easily clogged by debris and do not
provide a direct path for the water to follow.
The base of the flashing and weep holes should be
kept clean to prevent accumulated debris from
blocking the open path. Small open weep holes and
polyethylene tubes can be clogged by small pieces of
mortar or other debris that cannot clog open head
joints. Open head joints result in a larger opening for
more positive drainage, but could also allow intrusion
of bugs, dirt, or water. Louvers or cellular material
inhibit intrusion while still allowing drainage. Cotton
sash cord removes the water by absorption and
evaporation, and may become clogged by salts. This
is a slower means of removing the water than open
paths but it also prevents infiltration. To allow for
significant absorption it is best to leave an 8 in. (200
mm) minimum tail of sash cord in the collar joint or
air space. Open weep holes are normally
recommended to be spaced at a maximum of 24 in.
(610 mm) on center, and sash cord or other wick type
drains at a maximum of 16 in. (410 ram) on center.
Code Chapter 6 requires 33 in. (840 mm) maximum
spacing of weep holes for anchored veneer. Care must
be taken when sealants or paints are applied near weep
holes to prevent clogging or coating them.
To help keep the base of the flashing clear,
proprietary devices can be used in the cavity space.
Options include web or cellular materials that break up
mortar droppings while allowing water to pass
through. These devices are used in conjunction with
weep holes to promote free drainage of the cavity.
Care should be taken when selecting and detailing
these devices to ensure that they do not allow water to
bridge the cavity space.
6.2.7 Movement Joint Construction
Code Sections 1.2.2 (h) and 1.7.4 require
consideration of the effects of forces and deformations
provided by movement due to many factors. MDG
Chapter 10 addresses such factors. Control joint and
expansion joint materials are specified in Specification
Article 2.5 A and B; their installation is required to
conform to the contract documents by Specification

Article 3.3 E.7. Proper placement of the joints is
required to allow them to perform their intended
function. See MDG Chapter 10 and NCMA TEK 10-
2A.
Control joints and expansion joints should be
installed in a manner that will allow for the expected
movement and provide watertight conditions. These
joints should be located and detailed on the drawings
and described in the project specifications. If this
information is not provided in the contract documents,
the contractor should request it before construction
starts. Control joints in concrete masonry create a
weakened section, forcing tensile cracking to occur at
that predetermined location when tensile stress from
restrained shrinkage exceeds the material's tensile
Chapter 6
strength. Expansion joints in clay brick masonry are
intended to accommodate expansion from thermal
effects, moisture effects, and freeze-thaw effects. Both
joint types should have their exterior surface sealed to
prevent water penetration.
Control joints in concrete masonry are typically
constructed by aligning a vertical head joint, raking
back the mortar in the joint to create a weak plane for
the crack to occur, and installing sealant to prevent
migration of moisture. The ends of adjacent units may
be laterally supported with an interlock, a cross-
shaped gasket, or with cementitious fill where a bond
breaker, such as building paper, has been installed to
prevent bond on one side. MDG Fig. 6.2-8 shows
three methods of constructing control joints

S Preformed Gasket

RaC
ke
and
Joi
aunkl%
t
RaC
kJoi
and
eaunkl_t _ ~ ~
SpecUni
a
iClotsntrol
Joint

Fig. 6.2-8 Control Joint Types

~ CopperWaterstop -- Premoldedfoam
rubber or plastic'

~ S e a l a n t and ~~~/~Sealant and

backer rod backer rod

Neoprene pad

\ Sealantand ~-- Sealantand

backer rod backer rod

Fig. 6.2-9 Expansion Joint Types

6-18
Quality Control
Vertical expansion joints are made by leaving an
unobstructed vertical void in clay brick masonry, thus
allowing in-plane movement in two directions. These
joints are constructed by aligning vertical head joints,
keeping the joints free of mortar or other materials that
could restrict the movement of the masonry units toward
each other, and sealing the exterior with a sealant and
backer rod or a manufactured joint cover to prevent
moisture from entering the joint. Compressible
materials such as those shown in MDG Fig. 6.2-9 can be
placed in the joint during construction and left in place
6.3 T O L E R A N C E S
6.3.1 Introduction
Construction is not a completely controllable
process. Dimensional variations of components,
variations in materials, and workmanship must be
considered. Every building component and construction
operation is subject to dimensional variations that must
be understood and allowed for in the design and
construction process. This must include not only the
masonry components and assemblages, but also the
other building systems such as foundations, structural
frame, floor slabs, and finishes. The final manufactured
or fabricated product must be integrated with the
ongoing construction.
During the design process, tolerances for building
systems must be detailed and identified. These
dimensional tolerances accommodate the needed
dimensional variations, and allow the various systems
and components to form an integrated building.
Design dimensions can not be achieved exactly in
construction and some deviation from the ideal has to be
permitted. These variations are the difference between
the specified size and location (as designed) and the
finished size and location (as built). The design
dimension combined with the tolerance dimension
(controlled variation) locates the design elements within
established limits. This anticipated dimension range
(design dimension ± tolerances) can be larger or smaller
than the design dimension. Awareness of the dimension
range allows the designer to properly consider the
variations that potentially will occur during construction.
The construction process consists of a series of
independent actions that must be coordinated to result in
a predictable product. All of the building systems must
fit. For example, windows must fit into openings,
concrete foundation walls must align with the
construction above, steel supports must be level and
6-19
if they have the ability to be compressed the necessary
amount to prevent damage to the units.
Glass unit masonry is normally constructed in
panels. Once the particular detailing method for
framing is selected, expansion between the panel and
the support framing must be provided for. The
expansion spaces are never filled with mortar, but
rather must be open to allow free movement between
the building elements and the glass unit masonry.
align within the wall. The different trades, working
together as a team, coordinate their work with existing
and future construction. Only by anticipating
tolerance requirements can the completed construction
meet the design requirements.
6.3.2 M S J C Specification
References
Most successful construction work is based on
repeated successes involving professionals working
together in a timely manner. Design professionals
maintain these successes from project to project by
following the standards of each industry. The masonry
industry has provided standard tolerances.
Specification Articles 3.1, 3.3 G, and 3.4 E include the
present masonry standards on tolerances.
Specification Article 3.1 addresses foundation
tolerances, Specification Article 3.3 G presents
tolerances on erecting masonry, and Specification
Article 3.4 E. covers tolerances on placing
reinforcement. The Specification tolerances are
intended to ensure structural performance, and may
not be satisfactory from an aesthetic viewpoint.
6.3.3 Tolerances
Units and other products should be located at the
specified location within the specified tolerances.
Construction is referenced to other vertical linear
planes that are in alignment, level, and plumb for that
referenced construction. These conditions are defined
as follows:
1. Alignment (plan- or elevation-oriented) is an in-
or-out placement variation (tolerance) from the
design dimension measured from the control
reference.
 Chapter 6
2. Leve/ (elevation-oriented) is an up-or-down
placement variation (tolerance) from the design
dimension measured from the control reference in
elevation - floor elevation.
3. Plumb (vertically-oriented) is an in-or-out
placement variation (tolerance) from the design ®
dimension measured from the control reference (see
MDG Figs. 6.3-1, 6.3-2, and 6.3-3).
(~) (')
In the three figures, the actual element variation is
(+)
not shown but would fall within the boundary
represented by C. These dimensional deviations should
be annotated in the contract documents where required.
Tolerance also restricts the size of construction
Elevation View
elements. For example, the thickness of the mortar Legend:
joint, the collar joint width, the thickness of masonry A - Control Reference (Finish Floor Elevation)
wails, the size of openings in a wall and other * Top o f Ste~l or Concrete
dimensions are controlled to account for variations in * Top of Foundation
the size of masonry units and workmanship of the B - Dimension Specified
mason. The specifications, however, do not now give C - Tolerance Range (Limited Variation)
dimensional tolerances for movement joints. Tolerance
requirements set the limits as to how work should be Fig. 6.3-2 Level Tolerance
performed to fit within the design. Tolerances are not
cttmulative.

% i
i ®
............... ~ .................... f .........
I
!

I
® I!
I
I
!
m ~_).
® I
(+) I!
®
I

i
E

Plan View Vertical Section View

Legend:
Legend
A - Control Reference; (Grid Centerline) A - Control Reference (Grid Centerline)
B - Specified Design Dimension B - Dimension Specified
C - Tolerance Range (Limited Variation) C - Tolerance Range (Limited Variation)

Fig. 6.3-1 Alignment Tolerance Fig. 6.3-3 Plumb Tolerance

6-20
Quality Control

6.3.4 Tolerance Examples
6.3.4.1 M o r t a r J o in t - - The most basic
tolerance contribution in exterior masonry wall
construction is the variation in the mortar joint
thickness. Specification Article 3.3 G.l.b requires that
the mortar bed joint thickness not vary more than + 1/8
in. (3.2 rnm). If the design thickness were 3/8 in. (9.2
mm), the range of acceptable mortar bed joint
thicknesses would be from a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4
ram) to a maximum of 1/2 in. (12.7 mm).
The thickness of the mortar head joint could vary
from the design value by - 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to + 3/8 in.
(9.5 mm) as given in Specification Article 3.3 G.l.b.
For a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) design thickness, this is
equivalent to a minimum joint thickness of 1/8 in. (3.2
ram) and a maximum thickness of 3/4 in. (19.1 mm).
These variations in the mortar joint thickness are in part
caused by variation in the masonry units and by the
workmanship of the individual mason.
6.3.4.2 Openings in Masonry --
According to Specification Article 3.3 G.l.a, a masonry
opening can vary in elevation dimension from - 1/4 in.
(6.4 mm) to + 1/2 in. (12.7 mm). If the design masonry
opening width is 4 ft - 3/8 in. (1.23 m), the actual
permissible dimension could range from 4 ft - 1/8 in.
(1.22 m) to 4 ft - 7/8 in. (1.24 m). If the A/E specifies
the sealant joint width to be 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) as shown
in Fig. 6.3-4, the sealant will fit only if the masonry
opening is constructed according to the design
dimension, which is not always possible. Suppose the
window manufacturer fabricates the window to 3 ft -
11-7/8 in. (1.22 m). A potential for the masonry
opening being constructed at the smaller dimension
exists, leaving the possibility for the joint width to be
0 in. on one side and 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) on the other
side, or 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) on both sides (see MDG Fig.
6.3-5). Three out of the four dimensions are not
acceptable relative to the minimum sealant width
requirement of 1/4 in. (6.4 ram). Therefore, wider
perimeter-sealant joints should be designed. To
anticipate variations in the construction of a masonry
opening, the minimum perimeter sealant joint should
be 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) wide or closer coordination must
be achieved between the window manufacturer and the
mason.
6 . 3 . 4 . 3 V e r t i c a l Expansion J o i n t s -
Vertical expansion joints in brick masonry are often
undersized due to insufficient attention to tolerance.
If, for example, the expansion joint width was
specified as 3/8 in. (9.2 mm), this width could be
inadequate if construction tolerances mentioned earlier
were not considered (see MDG Fig. 6.3-6). The
tolerance for expansion joint width must therefore be
specified. The tolerances should be such that the
minimum sealant joint width, as recommended by
different sealant manufacturers, is met. The joint
sealant would then perform under these circumstances.

4'- 0 3/8"
w=.,.-- y
M.O.
\ [~ 3'-11 718" ~
~ y
h....=

I W.O.

Y////////A y / I l l 1/4" Sealant

/ /
/#"
//"
//" Aluminum Frame
/ /
/ /
/ /
#'/
#-/
/ /
/'/
/,I
#'/
/ /
/'/
/ / Glass
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /

Fig. 6.3-4 Corner of Window as Specified (Elevation)

6-21
 Chapter 6

M.O. constructed -1/4" from the

design dimension
4 " 0 1/8" ~_ ~__
MO.
3'-11 "(I.8" ~ ~___
W.O.
,,i,,,././././1.////-/ f////,,-//////--,=1-~ Unacceptable Sealant Width

Aluminum Frame

Glass

Fig. 6.3-5 Corner of Window as Built (Elevation)

Joint Filler

Brick

Backer - -

3/8" Design
+ ToleranceAs Speolred

Fig. 6.3-6 Undersized Expansion Joints

6.4 CLEANING
6.4.1 General
The Specification requires that exposed masonry
surfaces be cleaned of all stains, efflorescence, mortar or
grout droppings, and debris. Cleaning requirements are
found in Specification Article 3.8; products used for
cleaning are mentioned in Specification Article. 2.5 D.
Cleaning operations affect the fmished appearance of
masonry. Improper cleaning materials or procedures
can be the source of difficult or permanent discoloration
and in extreme cases can damage mortar joints and
units. Even with construction protection in place,
mortar smears and spatters can occur during
construction. While fresh mortar spatters can be cleaned
fairly easily, removing stains may not be as simple.
Specific information is available for identifying
unknown stains and determining optimum cleaning
methods (Ref. 6.4.1.).
The principal rule when cleaning masonry is to try
the gentlest possible means first. Chemical cleaners
are regularly employed in cleaning new masonry wails.
However, the manufacturer's recommendations and
application procedures must be followed. Improper
sandblasting or acid washing can damage masonry.
All sandblasting and acid washing are not improper.
Different masonry materials such as brick, concrete
block, glass block, stone, and mortar require different

6-22
Quality Control
cleaning techniques and products. Because of this,
many unit manufacturers also provide information on
compatible cleaning methods and products.
Test sections should be cleaned prior to attempting
to clean the entire wall. Either the project sample panel
or a small portion of the completed project may be used
for this purpose.
6.4.2 Cleaning Glass Unit Masonry
Clean mortar from the glass unit faces while it is
still plastic, using a wet sponge or a stiff-bristled brush.
6.5 Q U A L I T Y A S S U R A N C E / Q U A L I T Y C O N T R O L C H E C K L I S T
MDG Chapters 5, 6, and 7 deal with masonry
construction materials, testing, quality assurance, and
quality control provisions related to the Code and
Specification. Specification Articles 1.5 A.1 and 2 state
that, when required by the project specifications,
material samples, shop drawings, and documentation
shall be submitted and written acceptance obtained prior
to the use of materials or methods. Specification Article
1.5 B lists several types of submittals for specific
materials and procedures that may be required. MDG
Section 5.1 also discusses submittals. Specification
Article 1.6 A defines testing laboratory services during
construction. Included in this is the requirement for
inspection of the work. Testing Agency's duties and
inspection agency's duties for 3 levels of quality
assurance are given in Specification Tables 3, 4, and 5.
MDG Sections 5.3 and 5.4 provide a more detailed
discussion on inspection and testing. Specification
Article 1.6 D discusses sample panels. MDG Section
5.2 provides a more detailed discussion on sample
panels.
Whether or not it is required by the project
specifications, it is in the best interest of all parties that
the quality assurance and quality control requirements
compiled in MDG Table 6.5.1, Quality Assurance
Checklist and Table 6.5.2, Quality Control Checklist, be
followed for all projects. These tables reference
sections of the Specification and the MDG. These
checklists should be applied to all masonry projects.
Quality assurance and quality control requirements will
vary from project to project. The design dictates the
requirements and what importance they will have for the
particular project. Generic examples should not be
applied without evaluating each aspect under
consideration. The evaluation has to be made for each
project.
6-23
Beginning at the top, wash the block with generous
amounts of clean water. Change the cloth frequently to
avoid scratching the glass surfaces with aggregate
particles. Never use mortar cleaners of any type.
After cleaning, allow any film to dry to a powder.
Perform final cleaning when the panel is out of direct
sunlight, using a soft dry cloth to remove mortar film
and dried mortar particles. For stubborn mortar stains
and as a final polish, gently dry-wipe glass surfaces
with extra-fme steel wool.
Applications of the checklists to an individual
project should begin with identifying the materials to
be used in the construction. This will allow immediate
determination of those items that are applicable. For
example, shop drawings for joint reinforcing would
not be required if joint reinforcement is used only as
ties. To complete the checklists for an individual
project, the items must be analyzed to determine their
importance to the successful completion and
serviceability of the building. An example of this
would be where a particular manufacturer's product is
specified and no substitutions are allowed. In this
case, samples may not be necessary once certification
is received that only these products will be used.
MDG Tables 6.5.3 and 6.5.4 are a suggested
application of the checklists to the three distinct
masonry buildings presented in MDG Chapter 17:
1. TMS Shopping Center
2. DPC Gynmasium
3. RCJ Hotel
Various types of wall construction have been
considered for each of these three buildings, as listed
below. Throughout the example problems, the various
wall construction options for each building are used to
illustrate the application of the structural design
methodology and specific provisions found in the
Code for each wall type.
TMS Shopping Center
Unreinforced Concrete Masonry (A)
Reinforced Concrete Masonry (B)
DPC Gymnasium
Unreinforced Brick-Block Noncomposite (A)
Unreinforced Brick-Block Composite (B)
 Chapter 6
Reinforced Brick-Block Composite (C) example projects. The entries in this table are based on
Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry (D) consideration o f the wall system and the significance
o f the facilities. The following symbols are used:
R C J Hotel
R = recommended
Unreinforced Brick-Block Noncomposite (A)
-- = not applicable
Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry (B)
M = mandatory per specification
M D G Tables 6.5.3 and 6.5.4 show recommend- N = not recommended.
ations for the Q A / QC programs for the three different

Table 6.5.1 Quality Assurance Checklist

Q u a l i t y A s s u r a n c e ( O w n e r ' s effort to measure quality and determine its acceptability)

(Number following each item indicates the appropriate Article in the MSJC Specification.
If preceded by MDG, it references a section in this design guide)

Certification
Brick Units ( 1.5 B.5.c) ................................................................................................................................. O
Concrete Masonry Units (1.5 B.5.c) .............................................................................................................. O
Stone (1.5 B.5.c) .......................................................................................................................................... O
Glass Units (1.5 B.5.c) ................................................................................................................................. O
Mortar Mix (1.5 B.5.d) .................................................................................................................................. O
Grout Mix (1.5 B.5.d) ................................................................................................................................... O
Reinforcing Steel (1.5 B.5.a) ......................................................................................................................... 0
Joint Reinforcement (1.5 B.5.a) .................................................................................................................... O
Anchor Bolts (1.5 B.5.b) ............................................................................................................................... O
Ties and Anchors (1.5 B.5.b) ........................................................................................................................ O
Metal Accessories (1.5 B.5.b) ....................................................................................................................... O

Procedures
Cold Weather Construction (1.5 B.6.a) ......................................................................................................... O
Hot Weather Construction (1.5 B.6.b) .......................................................................................................... O

Material Samples
Brick Units (1.5 B.3.a) .................................................................................................................................. O
Concrete Masonry Units (1.5 B.3.a) .............................................................................................................. O
Stone (1.5 B.3.a) .......................................................................................................................................... O
Colored Mortar (1.5 B.3.b) ........................................................................................................................... O
Sample Panel (1.6D) ..................................................................................................................................... O
Joint Reinforcement (1.5 B.3.d) .................................................................................................................... O
Anchor Bolts (1.5 B.3.d) ............................................................................................................................... O
Ties and Anchors (1.5 B.3.d) ........................................................................................................................ O
Metal Accessories (1.5 B.3.d) ....................................................................................................................... O
Joint Material (1.5 B.3.c) .............................................................................................................................. O

Shop Drawings
Reinforcing Steel (1.5 B.2.a&b) ................................................................................................................... O
Lintels and Door Frames (1.5 B.2.a&c) ........................................................................................................ O
Shelf Angles and Lintels (1.5 B.2.a&c) ........................................................................................................ O

0 = Optional M = Mandatory

6-24
Quality Control
Table 6.5.2 Quality Control Checklist

Q u a l i ~ Control (Contractor's or Manufacturer's effort to achieve a specified result)

(Number following each item indicates the appropriate Article in the MSJC Specification.
If preceded by MDG, it references a section in this design guide)

Pre-Construction Testing
Brick Units - Compression ASTM C 67 ( 1.5 B.4.d) .................................................................................... O
Brick Units - IRA C 67 (1.5 B.4.d) ............................................................................................................... O
Concrete Masonry Units - ASTM C 140 (1.5 B.4.d) .................................................................................... O
Structural Granite - Compression ASTM C 97 (1.5 B.4.d) ........................................................................... O
Building Sandstone - Compression ASTM C 120 (1.5 B.4.d) ...................................................................... O
Structural Slate - Compression ASTM C 99 (1.5 B.4.d) ............................................................................... O
Exterior Marble Building Stone - Compression ASTM C 170 (1.5 B.4.d) ................................................... O
Limestone Building Stone - Compression ASTM C 121 (1.5 B.4.d) ............................................................ O
Masonry Modulus o f Rupture (MDG 5.4.1.5) .............................................................................................. O
Freeze-Thaw Durability (MDG 3.1.4) ........................................................................................................... O
Reinforcing Steel, Joint Reinforcement (1.5 B) ............................................................................................ O
Prism Compression Strength (1.5 B.4) .......................................................................................................... O
Mortar Compression Strength (1.5 B4.a,b &c) ............................................................................................. O
Grout Compression Strength (1.5 B.4.c) ....................................................................................................... O
Grout Slump (2.6 B.2) ................................................................................................................................... O

Construction Testing
Brick Unit Compressive Strength ( 1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ................................................................... O
CMU Compressive Strength (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ............................................................................ O
Prism Compressive Strength (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5; 3.7A) ................................................................. O
Field IRA (MDG 5.4.1.1) .............................................................................................................................. O
Mortar (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5; 3.7 B) ................................................................................................... O
Grout (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5; 3.7 C) ..................................................................................................... O
Adhesion of Adhered Masonry Unit (3.7 D) ................................................................................................. O
Prestressing Force Measurement (3.6 B) ....................................................................................................... O

Review Manufacturer's Reports

Brick (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ................................................................................................................ O
Concrete Masonry Units (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) .................................................................................. O
Mortar (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) .............................................................................................................. O
Grout (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5.) .............................................................................................................. O
Cement Materials (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ............................................................................................ O
Aggregate (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ........................................................................................................ O
Reinforcing Steel (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ............................................................................................. O
Joint Reinforcement (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ........................................................................................ O
Ties and Anchors (1.6 A.1 and Tables 3,4 &5) ............................................................................................. O

0 = Optional M = Mandatory

6-25
 Chapter 6
Table 6.5.2 Quality Control Checklist (continued)

Q u a l i t y C o n t r o l (Contractor's or M a n u f a c t u r e r ' s effort to achieve a specified result)

(Number following each item indicates the appropriate Article in the MSJC Specification.
If preceded by MDG, it references a section in this design guide)

Inspection
Delivery, Storage, and Handling (1.7) ........................................................................................................... M
Brick Units (MDG 6.1.3) .............................................................................................................................. O
Concrete Masonry Units (MDG 6.1.3) .......................................................................................................... O
Mortar Mixing (MDG 5.3.5; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) .......................................................................... O
Grout Mixing (MDG 5.3.5; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ............................................................................ O
Reinforcing Steel (MDG 6.1.4; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ...................................................................... O
Joint Reinforcement (MDG 6.1.4; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ................................................................. O
Ties and Anchors (MDG 6.1.4; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ..................................................................... O
Flashing and Weep Hole Materials (MDG 6.2.6) ......................................................................................... O
Movement Joints (MDG 6.2.7) ..................................................................................................................... O
Foundation Tolerances (3.1 A.1) ................................................................................................................... M
Dimensional Tolerances (MDG 6.3) ............................................................................................................. O
Foundations (3.1 A.1) ................................................................................................................................... M
Attend Pre-Bid Meeting (MDG 5.3.2) .......................................................................................................... O
Attend Pre-Construction Meeting (MDG 5.3.2) ............................................................................................ O

Procedures
Cold Weather Construction Procedure (1.8 C) ............................................................................................. M
Hot Weather Construction Procedure (1.8 D) ............................................................................................... M
Unit Placement (MDG 6.2.4; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ......................................................................... O
Reinforcement Placement (MDG 6.2.2; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ........................................................ O
Tie and Anchor Placement (MDG 6.2.3; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ....................................................... O
Mortar Placement (MDG 6.2.1; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ..................................................................... O
Grouting (MDG 6.2.5; 1.6 B.1 and Table 3, 4 and 5) ................................................................................... O
Flashing and Weep Hole Placement (MDG 6.2.6) ........................................................................................ O
Movement Joint Placement (MDG 6.2.7) ..................................................................................................... O
Cleaning Procedure (MDG 6.4) .................................................................................................................... O
Maintain Daily Log (MDG 5.3.4) ................................................................................................................. O
Construction Loads (1.8 A) ........................................................................................................................... M
Masonry Protection (1.8 B) ........................................................................................................................... M

0 = Optional M = Mandatory

6-26
Quality Control
Table 6.5.3 Application of Quality Assurance Checklist To Masonry Buildings in Chapter 17

TMS
Building Shopping DPC Gymnasium RCJ Hotel
Center
Wall Construction T~,pe A [ B , A [ B [ C [ D AI s

Certification
Brick Units -- R R R R R R
Concrete Masonry Units R R R R R -- R --
Mortar Mix R R R R R R R R
Grout Mix -- R -- R R R -- R
ReinforcinF Steel -- M . . . . R R -- M
Joint Reinforcement M M M M M M M M
Anchor Bolts M M M M M M M M
Ties and Anchors M M M M M M M M
Metal Accessories M M M M M M M M
Procedures
Hot Weather Construction R R R R R R R R
Cold Weather Construction R R R R R R R R
Cleaning Method and Materials R R R R R R R R
Material Samples
Brick Units . . . . ~ R R R R R R
Concrete Masonry Units R R ~ R R R -- R --
Colored Mortar R R . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Panel R R i R R R R R --
Reinforcing Steel -- R ?. . . . . R R -- R
Joint Reinforcement R R l R R R R R R
Anchor Bolts R R i N N N R N N
Ties and Anchors R R R R R R R R
Metal Accessories R R J
N N N N N N
Flashing and Joints R R i R R R R R R
Shop Drawings
Reinforcing Steel -- R • -- -- R R -- R
Lintels and Door Frames R R R R R R R R
Shelf Angles and Lintels R R R R R R R R

R = Recommendedfor this project -- = Not applicableto this project

N = Not recommendedfor this project M = Mandatoryper Specification

6-27
 Chapter 6

Table 6.5.4 Application of Quality Control Checklist To Masonry Buildings in Chapter 17

TMS
Building Shopping DPC G y m n a s i u m I RCJ Hotel
Center
Wall Construction T~pe A[ B A I B [ C I D i A [ B

P r e - C o n s t r u c t i o n Testing(
Brick Units - Compressive Strength M i
M i
M M • M [ M
Brick Units - IRA R i
R i
R R • R R
Concrete Masonry Units M M M M M
' nI
Structural Granite - Compressive Strength i i

Building Sandstone - Compressive Strength , i

Structural Slate - Compressive Strength I I

Exterior Marble Buildings Stone - Compressive Str. I I

Limestone Building Stone - Compressive Strength I I

Masonry Modulus of Rupture N N I

N I
--
Freeze-Thaw Durability N N N I
N I
N N N N
Prism Compressive Strength N N N N N N N N
1 J
Mortar Compressive Strength
Grout Compressive Strength N -- t R ' R R -- R
Construction Testin~
Brick Unit Compressive Strength . . . . •
R I
R I
R I
R •
R R
CMU Compressive Strength R R •
R !
R I
R I
-- •
R --
Prism Compressive Strength R R •
R l
R I
R I
R I
R R
Field IRA . . . .

Mortar R R I
R I
R I
R •
R R
Grout . . . . R R R -- R
Review Manufacturer's Reports
Brick Units R 1
R I
R I
R •
R R
Concrete Masonry Units R R R , R , R , -- • R --
Mortar R R R , R , R , R • R R
Grout I I I •

Cement Material R R R , R , R , R • R R
Aggregates I I I •

Reinforcing Steel R . . . .
I l
R
I
R
•
-- R
Ties and Anchors R R R R R R R R
Inspection
Delivery, Storage, and Handling R R R R R R R R
R R I R I R
Brick Units ' ' I R R
Concrete Masonry Units R R R R I R I -- •
i R --
Mortar Mixing R R R R I R ! R •
R R
Grout Mixing R -- R I R I R •
-- R
Reinforcing Steel R . . . . I
R t R •
-- R
Joint Reinforcement R R R R I R I R •
R R
Ties and Anchors R R R R I R I R •
R R
Flashing and Weep Hole Materials R . . I. . . .I •
R --
Movement Joints R R R I . . .I . •
R --
Foundation Tolerances M M M M I M I M •
M M
Dimensional Tolerances N N R R I R I R •
R R
Foundations M M M M ! M I M •
M M
Attend Pre-Bid Meeting R R R R I R I R •
R R
Attend Pre-Construction Meeting R R R R R R R R

6-28
Quality Control
Table 6.5.4 Application of Quality Control Checklist (continued)
TMS
Building Shopping DPC Gymnasium RCJ Hotel
Center
Wall Construction T~pe A I B AIB ICI D AI B
Procedures
Hot Weather Construction Procedure M M M M M M M M
Cold Weather Construction Procedure M M M M M M M M
Unit Placement N N N N N N N N
Steel Placement -- R .... R R -- R

Tie and Anchor Placement N N N N N N N N

Mortar Placement N N N N N N N N
Grout Placement -- R -- R R R "° R

Cleaning Procedure R R R R R R R R
Maintain Daily Lo8 R R R R R R R R
Flashing and Weep Hole Placement R R R R R R R R
Movement Joint Placement R R R R R -- R --

R = Recommendedfor this project -- = Not applicableto this project

N = Not recommendedfor this project M = Mandatoryper Specification
* Mortar compressivestrengthtesting is N or R dependingon whetherthe mortarwas specifiedusing the proportionspecification(not required)or
the propertyspecification(required).

REFERENCES
6.1.1 "Designing Grout Aberdeen's
Mixes,"
Magazine of Masonry Construction, June 1991,
pp. 218-220.
6.1.2 "Standard Practice for Bracing Masonry Walls
Under Construction," Council for Masonry Wall
Bracing, Lombard, Illinois, 1999.
6.2.1 "Recommended Practice for Engineered Brick
Masonry," Brick Industry Association, Reston,
Virginia, 1969, p. 263.
6.2.2 "Water Resistance of Brick Masonry
Construction and Workmanship Part III of HI,"
Technical Notes 7B, Brick Industry Association,
Reston, Virginia, April 1985, pp. 3-4.
6.2.3 "How to Place Grout," Aberdeen's Magazine of
Masonry Construction, June 1991, pp. 216--217.
6.2.4 "High Lift Grouting," Aberdeen's Magazine of
Masonry Construction, May 1988, pp. 60-62.
6.2.5 "Grouting Concrete Masonry Walls" TEK 3-2,
TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and
Construction, National Concrete Masonry
Association, Herndon, VA 1998.
6.2.6 "Grout 24-Foot-High Wall in One
Aberdeen's Magazine of Masonry Construction,
April 1989, pp. 137-139.
6.4.1 Grimm, C. T., "Cleaning Masonry - A Review of
the Literature," Construction Research Center of
the University o f Texas at Arlington, Arlington,
Texas, 1988.
Select Bibliography
"Brick Masonry Material Properties," Technical Notes
3A, Brick Industry Association, Reston, VA,
December 1992.
"Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls," TEK 10-
2A, TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design
and Construction, National Concrete Masonry
Association, Herndon, VA, 1998.
"Crack Control for Concrete Masonry Walls," TEK 10-
1A, TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design
and Construction, National Concrete Masonry
Association, Herndon, VA, 1998.
"Differential Movement," Technical Notes 18A, Brick
Industry Association, Reston, VA, 1988.
"Design for Dry Single-Wythe Concrete Masonry
Walls" TEK 19-2A, TEK Manual For Concrete
Masonry Design and Construction, National
Lift," Concrete Masonry Association, Herndon, VA
1998.

6-29

HOT AND COLD
WEATHER
CONSTRUCTION
7.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Weather conditions during construction may affect
the performance of completed masonry structures.
Special precautions must be taken during both hot and
cold weather to assure the desired quality. The masonry
7.1 H O T W E A T H E R C O N S T R U C T I O N
Hot weather can cause special problems in masonry
construction. Combinations of high temperatures, low
humidity, and wind create conditions that may adversely
affect the properties and performance of masonry
materials and components.
7.1.1 Performance of Masonry and
Mortar
Rapid evaporation during dry weather reduces the
water content of mortar and grout, lowering both
compressive and bond strength. Mortar workability and
grout flows are reduced, and setting occurs faster. With
high temperature, mortars should have lower air contents
and higher water retention. Board life of mortar is
shorter, and joints must be tooled sooner than normal.
Rapid evaporation at the exterior face of mortar joints
decreases durability and surface strength.
When the water needed for mortar and grout curing
is lost by evaporation and unit suction, the hydration
process may actually stop (sometimes referred to as
7-1
7
contractor should follow the contract document
requirements or submit proposed procedures for approval
before beginning work.
dryonts) and is reactivated only by subsequent
reintroduction of moisture. These conditions can be
avoided by careful attention to material selection, storage,
preparation, and masonry protection.
7.1.2 Material Storage, Protection,
and Preparation
Specification Article 1.8 D requires that specific hot-
weather procedures be implemented when ambient air
temperature exceeds 100°F (37.8°C), or 90° F (32.2°C)
with wind velocities greater than 8 mph (12.9 km/hr).
MDG Table 7.1.1 summarizes the minimum
requirements of Specification Article 1.8 D for
preparation, construction and protection. Materials
should be stored in a cool, shady location. ASTM C 270
requires that sand be in a damp loose condition when
added to the mortar mixer. Therefore it is desirable to
retard evaporation during hot weather by covering
aggregate stockpiles with a light-colored plastic sheet.
High-suction clay brick must be wetted, and

additional mixing water may be needed in mortar and
grout. Metal accessories, reinforcing steel,
wheelbarrows, mixers, and mortar boards should be kept
cool by flushing with water.
Increasing cement content accelerates early strength
gain but does not modify initial setting. Adding extra
lime increases water retentivity. Adding ice or cooling
the mixing water significantly lowers the temperature of
freshly mixed mortar and grout. Hoses running too far
from the source to the mixer can allow the water to
become hot, potentially contributing to flash set of the
mortar.
Set-retarding or water-reducing admixtures should
be used only whert approved by the owner's
representative, and should be tested in advance in
Chapter 7
accordance with ASTM C 780 and C 1019 (see MDG
Section 5.4).
Sun shades, wind screens, and water fog sprays can
reduce the effects of dry, hot, and windy weather. Mortar
should not be mixed too far ahead o f its scheduled use
and after mixing should be stored in a cool, shady
location. Wetting the constructed masonry by fog spray
after the tooled joints have set provides moisture needed
for curing, prevents dry-out, and effectively increases the
tensile bond strength o f the masonry. Covering masonry
slows the natural rate of evaporation and creates a high
humidity environment that aids in moist curing; however,
this could also cause increased efflorescence. When
temperatures are extremely high, consideration should
also be given to scheduling work to avoid the hottest part
of the day.

Table 7.1.1 Hot Weather Construction Requirements

Preparation
Ambient Temperature Action
Above 100%`(37.8°C) or 90%` 1. Maintainsand piles in a damp, loose condition.
(32.2°C) with wind velocity 2. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature below 120%"
greater than 8 mph (12.9 (48.9°C).
km/hr 1
Above 115%`(46.1°(2)or 1. Maintainsand piles in a damp, loose condition.
105%`(40.6°C) with wind 2. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature below 120%`
velocity greater than 8 mph (48.9°C).
(12.9 km/hr) 3. Shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight.

Ambient Temperature
Above 100%`(37.8°C) or 90%"
(32.2°C) with wind velocity
greater than 8 mph (12.9
km/hr)
Above 115%`(46.1°C) or
105°F (40.6°C) with wind
velocity greater than 8 mph
(12.9 km/hr)
During Construction
Action
1. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120%`(48.9°C).
2. Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into
contact with mortar ingredients or mortar.
3. Maintainmortar consistency by retempering with cool water.
4. Use mortar within 2 hrs. of initial mixing.
1. Maintaintemperature of mortar and grout below 120%"(48.9°C).
2. Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into
contact with mortar ingredients or mortar.
3. Maintainmortar consistency be retempering with cool water.
4. Use mortar within 2 hrs. of initial mixing.
5. Use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use. Do
not permit ice in the mixing water when added to the other mortar or gout materials.

Protection
Mean Daily Temperature Action
Above 100%`(37.8°(2) or 90%` Fog spray all newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the masonry is three
(32.2°C) with wind velocity days old.
greater than 8 mph (12.9
km/hr)

7-2
H o t and Cold W e a t h e r C o n s t r u c t i o n
7,2 COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
Cold weather also poses special concerns for
masonry construction and for protection of completed
work. Cold-weather construction is defined as any
construction occurring when either the ambient
temperature or the temperature of the masonry units is
below 40°F (4A°C). Temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C)
affect both materials and performance, and as
temperatures drop, additional protective measures are
required (Specification Article 1.8 C). MDG Section
7.2.2 recommendations should be followed unless
amended to more stringent requirements based on
experience or preference. When the mean daily
temperature falls below 20°F (-6.7°C), masonry
constructions should be protected to maintain its
temperature above 32°F (0°C) for 24 hours. When the
ambient temperature falls below 40°F (4.4°C), masonry
construction should be protected to maintain its
temperature at or above 40°F (4.4°C) for 24 hours.
Specification Article 1.8 C.10 does not permit glass unit
masonry to be laid during cold weather as defined above
and in Specification Article 1.8 C.l.a and b. Specification
Article 1.8 C.10 also requires that the temperature of
glass unit masonry be maintained above 40°F (4.4°C) for
the first 48 hours after construction.
7.2.1 Performance of Masonry and
Mortar
Properties of plastic mortar and grout are changed
significantly at low temperatures. Water requirements
are less for a given consistency, air-entraining admixtures
are more effective, and time of initial and final setting
take longer. Early strength development is slower in cold
weather, but final strength is equal to or greater than that
attained at normal temperatures.
One particular concern in cold weather is the
possibility of masonry freezing. The rate at which
masonry freezes is influenced by ambient temperature
and wind speed, the temperature and absorption
characteristics of the units, the temperature of reinforcing
steel and metal accessories, and the temperature of the
mortar mixture when placed. When mortar freezes, its
performance characteristics are affected by water content
and the amount of strength developed prior to freezing.
Hydration and strength development of the cement are
minimal at temperaaxres below freezing. Frozen fresh
mortar takes on all the outward appearances of hardened
mortar. It develops some compressive strength as
7-3
indicated by its ability to carry loads, and some bond
strength as evidenced by its ability to adhere to other
materials. But it is not cured, and cannot d e v e l o p
additional strength until it thaws and water becomes
available again to continue the cement hydration process.
Moisture to the masonry walls will help provide enough
water to start hydration again so that the mortar can reach
minimum strength.
Water in the mortar expands when it freezes. The
higher the water content, the greater the expansion.
Physical damage to masonry due to freezing during
construction is usually limited to mortar joints in
ungrouted construction. Although grout is not usually
directly exposed to wind, it can freeze when the
masonry is not properly protected from cold weather.
When grout freezes during its early stages, significant
physical distress to the masonry can occur as a result of
water expansion.
Mortar dry-outs can occur during winter as well as
during summer. Heating the masonry to prevent freezing
may result in too-rapid evaporation of moisture from the
mortar. Heating of partially frozen masonry may result
in loss of water by sublimation. In either case, heated
walls may need to be wetted to provide adequate water
for proper hydration.
Heating and protection of masonry materials prior to
construction can assist in combating the adverse effects
of cold weather by elevating the initial temperature of the
masonry. Mortar and grout mixtures may also be
modified to improve their performance in cold weather.
Type III portland cement provides higher early-strength
development but can also cause color variations. Air
entrainment increases workability and resistance to
damage by cycles of freezing and thawing. Excessive
entrained air lowers the compressive and bond strength of
mortar and grout, so mortar-mixing time should be
carefully controlled.
Dispersing agents used in some color pigments have
a retarding effect on cement hydration. This is
particularly undesirable in cold weather. Accelerating
agents increase the rate of early-strength development by
promoting more rapid cement hydration. Calcium
chloride accelerators, however, should not be used in
masonry construction because of adverse side effects
such as increased efflorescence and corrosion of
embedded metals. Non-chloride accelerators include
soluble carbonates, silicates and fluorosilicates, calcium

aluminate, and triethanolamine. These should be
approved and tested before use since they could
potentially cause other problems. So called "anti-freeze"
admixtures that claim to lower the freezing point of
mortar are not recommended since they must be used in
such large quantities to be effective that they lower both
compressive and bond strength below acceptable
levels. Furthermore, for practical purposes cement
hydration still does not occur unless internal temperature
of the water-cement mixture is above 40°F (4.5°C).
Proposed admixtures for masonry mortar or grout must
be approved by the owner's representative, and should be
tested in advance in accordance with ASTM C 780 or C
1019 at the lowest expected temperature at which they
will be used in construction (MDG Section 5.4).
Admixture manufacturers should be required to provide
written certification that their products do not contain
intentionally added chlorides, and do not have adverse
effects on either the plastic or hardened properties of the
mortar, grout, and masonry.
Any masonry that has been constructed during cold
weather should be inspected to ensure that no mortar has
frozen, and that mortar strength development has begun
and continues. Freezing compromises long-term
strength. The original design strength may not then be
achievable regardless of the corrective measures taken. It
may be necessary to accept a reduced but still safe
strength level.
Frozen mortar can be detected in several ways: (1) a
"crow's feet" pattern appears on the surface of tooled
joints; (2) flaking indicates expansion of freezing water;
and (3) friable material scratched from the joint surface
indicates frozen mortar dried through sublimation. When
frozen mortar is detected, the masonry should be thawed
and then sprayed with a water fog to reactivate
hydration. Additional heat should be provided as
necessary to assure continuation of the hydration process
and development of adequate strength.
7.2.2 Storage, Protection,
and Preparation of Materials
The cold-weather considerations given in the
Specification are intended to permit masonry
construction to proceed during cold weather. The
protection required is considered adequate but minimal
for the temperature ranges listed. Proper storage and
protection of materials, heating of materials and mortar
ingredients before construction, and protection of
completed work during mortar and grout curing will
prevent early freeze damage. MDG Table 7.2.1
7-4
Chapter 7
summarizes the minimum requirements of Specification
Article 1.8 C for heating and protection.
The Specification requires two stages of protection.
In the first stage, requirements during construction are
based on the ambient temperature. In the second stage,
requirements during the first 24 hours after construction
(48 hours for glass unit masonry) are based on the mean
dally temperature.
Heating of materials is intended to ensure adequate
cement hydration in mortar and grout by maintaining
temperatures above 40°F (4.4°C). Mixing water is the
easiest material to heat, and it also stores more heat per
pound than any other ingredient (MDG Fig. 7.2-1).
Water that is too hot (above 140°F or 60°C) is a safety
hazard. Since mortar temperatures exceeding 120°F
(48.9°C) pose a personnel safety hazard and may cause
excessively fast hardening, the sand and water should be
combined in the mixer first to lower excessive water
temperature before the cement is added. The temperature
of the mixed mortar or grout should be maintained
between 40° and 70°F (4A and 21°C) until it is used.
Smaller batches will be used more quickly and will stay
warm until placed in the wall. Some mortar silos can be
heated to maintain uniform temperature from batch-to-
batch.
Sand is generally heated to at least 45° to 50°F (7 to
10°C) to assure that all frozen lumps are thawed.
Covered stockpiles should be mixed periodically to
assure uniform heating and to avoid any possibility of
localized hot spots near the heat source. The aggregate
can be piled over a metal pipe containing aftre or can be
heated by steam coils or an ordinary water heater (MDG
Fig. 7.2-2). Cold or frozen masonry units can be heated
with oil, gas, or electric hot-air heaters. During very cold
weather, frozen walls must be thawed before grouting,
and heated enclosures can also be used for this purpose.
When air temperatures are below 40°F (4.5°C), or have
been below 32°F (0°C) during the previous two hours, the
air temperature in the bottom grout space should be
raised above 32°F (4.5°C) before beginning the grout
pour.
In addition to normal material storage and protection
procedures, a temporary cover should be erected over the
mortar mixing area to provide a sheltered location for
mixing operations. Temporary enclosures may also be
necessary at work areas. Heated enclosures of plastic
sheeting or other materials attached to the scaffolding or
supported on other framework permit year-round
construction, provide protection for materials and
workers, help maintain elevated mortar and grout
Hot and Cold Weather Construction

temperatures, and assure sufficient heat for proper safety. One should not provide direct heat via motor
cement hydration ( M D G Fig. 7.2-3). Natural gas, fuel exhaust. This can lead to reduced strength due to
oil, electricity, steam, or bottled propane can provide carbonation o f the surface o f the mortar joints.
heat, but enclosures must also be well ventilated for

Table 7.2.1 Cold Weather Construction Requirements

Ambient Temperature
32 to 40°I: (0 to 4.4°C)
or
When temperature of masonry
units is less than 40°F (4.4°C)
20 to 25°F
(-6.9 to-3.9°C)
Less than 20°F (-7°C)
During Construction
Action
Do not lay glass unit masonry.
Do not lay units that have a temperature below 20°F (-6.7°C)
Remove visible ice on units before laying
Heat mortar sand or mixing water to produce mortar tempera~re between 40 ° F (4.4°C) and 120°F
(48.9°C) at time of mixing
Maintain mortar above freezing until used in masonry
Perform actions required when ambient temperature is 32 to 40°F.
Provide heat sources on both sides of the masonry.
When wind velocity exceeds 15 mph (24.1 kin/h) install wind breaks.
Perform actions required when ambient temperature is 32 to 40°F.
Enclose masonry under construction.
Provide supplementar7 heat to maintain temperature within enclosure above 32°F (0°C)

For 24 Hours after Construction

Mean Daily Temperature Action
32 to 40°F Cover completed masonry with weather-resistive membrane to protect from rain and snow.
(0 to 4.4°C)
25 to 32°F Completely cover completed masonry with weather-resistive membrane.
(-3.9 to O°C)
20 to 25°F Completely cover completed masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection.
(-6.7 to -3.9°C)
Less than 20°F Enclose masonry.
(-6.7°C) Provide supplementary hearto maintain the temperature of the masorLry within the enclosure above 32°F
(O°C).

For 48 Hours after Construction

Mean Daily Temperature Action
All Maintain temperature of glass unit masonry above 40°F (4.4°C).

Fig. 7.2-1 Heating Water

7-5
 Chapter 7

Fig. 7.2-2 Heating Aggregates

Fig. 7.2-3 Heated Enclosures

Select Bibliography
Frohmader, D. L., "Cold Weather Checklist," The
Magazine of Masonry Construction, Addison,
Illinois, November 1990, pp. 503-504.
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council,
Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications
for Cold Weather Masonry Construction,
Washington, D.C., 1973.
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council
Technical Task Committee, "All-Weather Masonry
Construction State-of-the-Art Report," Washington,
D.C., 1968.
Masonry Industry Council, "Hot and C01d Weather
Construction," Mason Contractors Association of
America, Lombard, IL, 1999.

7-6

D IGN P H I L O S O P H Y
AND METHODOLOGY
8.0 W H A T IS M A S O N R Y ?
Masonry consists of relatively small units bonded
together with mortar, and sometimes grouted and
reinforced with steel. Masonry units may be of stone,
fired clay, concrete, or glass. The Code addresses units
off'wed clay, concrete, and glass.
The strength of a masonry element (such as a wall
or beam) depends upon the combination of units,
mortar, grout, and reinforcement. Element strength
depends on individual material strengths, bond between
materials, and the dimensions of the components and
the element. For example, the strength of masonry
construction depends on the strength of the units, the
strength of the mortar, the bond between units and
mortar, and the thickness of the mortar joint. The use
of grout in masonry in single- or multiple-wythe walls
or in the collar joint in multiple-wythe walls increases
the masonry capacity.
The design and analysis of masonry building
structures is an art as well as a science, requiring
professional judgment as well as engineering
principles. Decisions must be made about the type or
types of masonry units to be used. Mortar, grout,
reinforcement, and accessories must be selected. The
structural configuration must be determined.
Serviceability considerations such as fire protection,
acoustics, durability, and appearance must be
coordinated with structural requirements.
The nature and magnitude of loading that the
structure will experience must be predicted. Although
a building's self-weight can be established fairly
accurately, the magnitude of live loads is less certain.
Superimposed gravity dead and live loads may vary
over the life of a building. Lateral loads, most often
8-1
8
due to wind or earthquake, are more uncertain than
gravity loads. Because of the variability inherent in
loads, values used in design are generally probability-
based.
Just as loads can vary, so can the strengths of
materials that make up the structural system, due to
material inconsistencies and manufacturing tolerances.
The quality of workmanship used to assemble these
materials is also variable, depending upon locale, the
experience of the mason, and the extent of inspection.
Previous masonry codes addressed the role of
workmanship on building performance by
differentiating between "inspected" and "uninspected"
construction. The designer was required to use lower
allowable masonry stresses for uninspected
construction. Code Section 1.15.1, however, requires
compliance with the MSJC Specification, which in turn
requires a quality assurance program with some level of
inspection for every job. It is the philosophy of the
Code that satisfactory workmanship will result from
this requirement.
Masonry codes have also developed different ways
of accounting for variabilities in material characteristics
and uncertainties in loads. The current MSJC Code is
based on the allowable-stress method; empirical design
is also permitted for some structures (Code Section
1.1.3). In the allowable-stress method, allowable
stresses (calculated using service or working loads that
are assumed to occur during a structure's life) are
compared to Code-specified allowable values. This
design philosophy is discussed in more detail in MDG
Section 8.2.

8.1 C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S OF M A S O N R Y
8.1.1 Types of Masonry
Masonry units, mortar, and grout are combined to
form different types of masonry elements, such as
walls, beams, pilasters, and columns. Walls are the
most common masonry elements. Walls may be
classified either by construction type or by structural
function.
8.1.1.1 W a l l s Classified by Construc-
tion T y p e
• Single-wythe Wall: A single thickness (wythe) of
masonry, unreinforced or reinforced.
• Cavity Wall: Two similar or dissimilar wythes of
masonry separated by an air space, and connected
by metal ties. The cavity provides a space for
insulation, and also a drainage path for any water
entering the wall. To function properly, the cavity
must be kept free of mortar bridges and droppings,
and flashing and weep holes must be correctly
detailed and installed. There is general agreement
in the industry that a 2-in. (50-mm) air space,
exclusive of insulation, is the minimum for
resistance to water penetration. In terms of
structural function, Code Sections 1.6 and 2.1.3.3
define this system as a noncomposite, multiwythe
wall.
• Prefabricated Wall: A plant- or site-manufactured
panelized wall system that is typically single wythe
and reinforced. The panel must be connected to
structural elements. The panel may be a bearing
wall.
• Barrier Wall: A single wythe or a multiwythe wall
whose collar joint is grouted or mortared solid.
The filled collar joint acts as a barrier against
water. Barrier walls require the same attention to
flashing details as other walls. The wythes may be
of similar or dissimilar materials. Either masonry
units or metal ties are used to mechanically
connect the wythes. Code Section 2.1.3.2 defmes
this system as composite. Single-wythe walls are
generally less effective than multiwythe walls in
stopping water entry.
• Masonry Veneer: A masonry wythe that provides
the exterior finish of a wall system but is not
considered to contribute to its load resisting
capacity. Code Section 1.6 defines this system as
veneer. Code Chapter 6 covers the requirements
8-2
Chapter 8
for design and detailing of two types of masonry
veneer: anchored veneer, and adhered veneer.
Adhered veneer provisions are new to the 1999
MSJC Code and Specification.
• Masonry Bonded Hollow Wall: A wall built of
solid masonry units with separated wythes bonded
by masonry headers.
8 . 1 , 1 , 2 Walls Classified by S t r u c t u r a l
Function
• Veneer Wall: These walls resist only in-plane
loads from self-weight. They transfer out-of-plane
loads through ties directly to the backing material.
• Nonloadbearing Wall: These walls resist only in-
plane loads from self-weight. They resist out-of-
plane loads by out-of-plane flexure.
• Loadbearing Wall: A loadbearing wall is defined
by Code Section 1.6 as a wall carrying, in addition
to its own weight, vertical loads greater than 200
lb/lineal ft (2900 N/m). Walls that do not meet this
defmition may be considered nonloadbearing.
• Shear Wall: These walls resist lateral loads such
as wind or seismic by in-plane shear stresses and
flexural stresses, and may be loadbearing or
nonloadbearing.
8.1.2 Types of Loading on Masonry
8.1.2.1 E x t e r n a l Loads - External loads
are due to gravity, wind, earthquake, earth pressure,
and other sources. Design loads for masonry are
specified in the governing building code, or in ASCE 7.
Many of the design examples in MDG Chapter 17 are
based on the use of such loads.
8 . 1 . 2 . 2 Loads from R e s t r a i n e d Differ-
ential M o v e m e n t - As discussed in MDG Section
6.2.7 and MDG Chapter 10, masonry units change
volume due to moisture, temperature, and other effects.
If these volume changes are restrained, additional loads
will be introduced into the masonry and must be
considered in design. Vertical and horizontal
movement joints are introduced into the masonry to
accommodate differential movement and avoid these
additional loads. The required location and thickness
of those joints depend on the building geometry, wall
composition, masonry material properties, and
anticipated differential movement.
Design Philosophy and Methodology
8.1.3 Construction Details for
Masonry Assemblages
Proper performance of masonry walls requires
attention to construction details as well as structural
analysis. Detailing against water penetration is critical
for wall performance. The designer may choose to
prevent water entry using a barrier wall or a cavity wall.
Proper cavity wall performance depends on flashing
and an unimpeded drainage path to collect water and
direct it to the exterior.
Both wall types require top-of-wall closures and
sill materials, and details that prevent water entry. To
minimize water penetration, mortar joints should be
completely filled and compacted against the sides of
the adjacent masonry units by concave tooling. Joints
8.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
8.2.1 General Requirements
The design procedures of the Code are predicated
on the allowable stress method: structural assemblages
are designed for service loads using an elastic analysis;
and the computed stresses are compared to allowable
stresses that represent failure stresses, reduced by a
factor of safety (see Code Section 1.1.3). The required
factor of safety depends on the variability of material
strength, the variability of construction quality, the
accuracy with which the applied forces can be
estimated, and the accuracy with which the actual
stresses can be calculated.
In an elastic analysis, it is assumed that the
structural materials follow Hooke's Law: deformation
(strain) is proportional to load (stress). All materials
are assumed to be homogeneous; sections that are
planar before bending are assumed to remain planar
after bending; and strains in reinforcement are assumed
equal to those in the surrounding mortar or grout.
Code Section 1.1.3 requires that masonry
structures and their component members be designed in
accordance with Code Chapter 1 and one of the
following: (a) Chapter 2 (Allowable Stress Design), (b)
Chapter 3 (Limit States Design, which has not yet
completed consensus balloting), (c) Chapter 4
(Prestressed Masonry Design), (d) Chapter 5
(Empirical Design), (e) Chapter 6 (Veneers) (f) Chapter
7 (Glass Unit Masonry). Chapters 2, 3 and 4 are based
upon rational design methods; Chapter 5 is based on an
empirical design philosophy. Empirical design is
permitted only for buildings that meet the location,
size, and configuration limitations of the Code (see
8-3
that are raked, struck, or not tooled are poor barriers to
water entry (MDG Chapter 6).
Construction details must be consistent with
assumptions of the structural analysis, since each
influences the other. For example, if a joint is
introduced between two intersecting walls, a monolithic
flanged wall analysis is not appropriate. Special
concrete masonry unit control joints, such as those
illustrated in MDG Fig. 10.5-1, transfer out-of-plane
shear but not in-plane shear. Such joints effectively
divide a shear wall into segments. Flashing may also
affects a wall's structural behavior. Depending on how
it is detailed flashing can create a discontinuity in the
wall, limiting shear and bending moment transfer
across the flashed joint.
MDG Chapter 15), or for some component members
that are not part of the lateral force-resisting systems of
a rationally designed building.
For design purposes, Code Section 1.8 prescribes
the material properties of steel reinforcement, clay
masonry, concrete masonry, and grout (see MDG
Sections 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5). Code Section 2.1.1.2.2
whether cited directly or indirectly requires that rational
design be based on f " , the specified compressive
strength of the masonry. Code Section 2.1.1.2.1 cited
directly for allowable stress design and indirectly for
prestressed masonry design requires the designer to
specify f ' , on the design drawings, but does not
mandate specification of unit strength or mortar type.
The intent of the Code is that the designer determines
the required level of performance (f~,), and that the
contractor meets that level. Specification Tables 1 and
2 provide the contractor with combinations of unit
compressive strengths and mortar types that will satisfy
the specified compressive strength, f~,. Alternatively,
compliance can be verified by compression testing of
masonry prisms (Specification Article 1.4 B.3).
The Specification requires specifying f~,
(Specification Article 1.4 A), because this parameter is
used by the structural designer to determine the
allowable stresses and the modulus of elasticity values
for stiffiaess calculations. Code Chapters 6 and 7
provide requirements for veneer and glass unit
masonry, respectively. These masonry systems have no
requiredf~,,.

8.2.2 General Analysis
Considerations
Masonry components must be analyzed for the
loads acting on them. Vertical loads generally come
from gravity, and may also be due to direct wind loads
or overturning due to wind or earthquake loads. Lateral
loads normally come from wind, earthquake, or soil
pressure.
In a composite multiwythe wall (Code Section
2.1.3.2), gravity loads are considered to be resisted by
all wythes. In a noncomposite wall (Code Section
2.1.3.3), the axial compression resulting from gravity
loads is considered to be resisted only by the wythe
nearest the center of span of the supported members.
However, any moment about the weak axis of the wall,
due to eccentric application of the gravity loads on one
wythe, is considered to be resisted by all wythes, in
proportion to their relative flexural stiffnesses.
Stress computations are based upon the minimum
net cross-sectional area of the masonry (Code Section
1.9.1). In multiwythe masonry of dissimilar materials,
the section properties are determined by transforming
each minimum net cross-sectional area to that of a
single material, using the elastic modulus of each
material. This method uses the elastic analysis concept
required by Code Section 1.9.1.2. To determine the
relative stiffnesses of different wythes, a similar
approach is used, except that the average net cross-
sectional member area may be used, by Code Section
1.9.2. Values for the modulus of elasticity of masonry
are given in Code Section 1.8.2.2.1.
As a loadbearing wall becomes higher and
supports more floors, the loads at its base increase.
These increased loads can be accommodated by:
increasing the thickness of the wall; grouting the wall;
keeping the same thickness and increasing the strength
of the materials; reducing the size of any openings in
the wall; or any combination of these options.
Lateral loads acting perpendicular to the plane of a
masonry wall create out-of-plane flexure. All wythes of
multiwythe masonry are considered to resist this flexure
in proportion to their relative flexural stiffnesses (Code
Sections 2.1.3.2.3, 2.1.3.3.1(d), and 1.9.1.2). In
composite masonry, the resulting shear stresses
between wythes are limited to the values specified in
Code Section 2.1.3.2.2. In noncomposite masonry,
when the width of the space between wythes exceeds 4-
1/2 in. (113 mm), a detailed analysis of the wall ties is
required per Code Section 2.1.3.3.1 (f).
8-4
Chapter 8
A wall without openings can be designed as an
assemblage of one-way strips, or of crossing strips,
spanning horizontally or vertically as appropriate. A
wall with openings can be similarly designed.
Alternatively, more sophisticated analyses can be used
to determine the stresses around the openings.
Floors and roofs act as horizontal diaphragms,
transferring lateral loads to shear walls oriented parallel
to the direction of the lateral load, and producing in-
plane shear and flexure on those walls. The stiffness of
the horizontal diaphragms influences the distribution of
the lateral loads to the shear walls, and is discussed in
more detail in MDG Section 8.4.5.3 and MDG Chapter
9.
In analyzing a structure for the effects of lateral
load, flanges of intersecting walls may be considered as
adding to the stiffness of walls resisting in-plane loads
(Code Section 1.7.5.1). Parameters that limit the
stiffening effect of flanges are given in Code Section
1.9.4.2.
Although cracking significantly reduces the
stiffnesses of masonry components, the Code (Section
1.9.2) permits stiffnesses to be computed on the basis
of uncracked sections. This assumption is emphasized
in the examples of this MDG.
In composite multiwythe masonry, all wythes are
considered to resist in-plane lateral loads in proportion
to their relative shearing stiffnesses. In noncomposite
masonry, only the wythe to which the in-plane lateral
loads are applied is considered to resist the load. Any
transfer of in-plane stresses between noncomposite
wythes is neglected per Code Section 2.1.3.3.1 (c).
Horizontal diaphragms are generally considered to
be rigid in their own planes. If they connect wall
segments at any level, all walls at that level are
generally considered to have lateral deflections
consistent with the rigid-body displacements of the
diaphragm. Wall segments in the same vertical plane
are considered to have the same displacement. Each
segment is considered to resist shear in proportion to its
in-plane stiffness. Wall segments may be considered as
uncoupled or coupled. Uncoupled wall segments are
analyzed neglecting the out-of-plane stiffness of the
horizontal diaphragm. Coupled wall segments are
analyzed including the effects of that out-of-plane
stif-fness. For an example of this difference, see the
RCJ Hotel in MDG Section 17.3. In Building
Construction Option I of the RCJ Hotel, the interior
masonry walls on Grid Line 2 are considered as
Design Philosophy and Methodology
coupled shear walls. In Building Construction Option
11, the same shear walls are considered as uncoupled.
Stresses are introduced into masonry when it is
restrained against differential movement. These
stresses must be considered in structural design.
Material coefficients for use in estimating the
magnitude of these effects are given in Code Sections
1.8.3, 1.8.4, 1.8.5, 1.8.6 and in MDG Chapter 10.
Allowable stresses in masonry are influenced by:
nature of load; masonry unit type and compressive
strength; bond pattern; mortar type; specified
compressive strength of masonry; extent of grouting,
cross-sectional dimensions; and slenderness ratio.
8.3 LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
Structures and their components are required to
resist gravity loads, lateral loads, and other types of
loads. Gravity loads act vertically; lateral loads act
horizontally. Code Section 1.7.4 also requires the
designer to consider the effects of prestressing,
vibrations, impact, shrinkage, expansion, temperature
changes, creep, and differential movement. Restrained
volume changes also induce internal loads.
Gravity loads are of two types: dead and live.
Dead loads come from the self-weight of the structure
and all permanently attached non-structural elements,
such as roofing systems, suspended ceilings,
mechanical equipment and partitions. Live loads are
transient in nature, representing the assumed weight of
building occupants, furnishings, and equipment.
Minimum design live loads for different occupancies
are mandated by the governing building code, or by
ASCE 7 (Ref. 8.3.1). Depending upon the tributary
area supported, design live loads are permitted to be
reduced in accordance with the governing building
code or ASCE 7 (Code Section 1.7.2). Care must be
taken to correctly identify those dead and live loads
that will actually be present for each construction
condition and typical service condition that is
addressed in design.
Lateral loads are typically induced by wind,
earthquake, and fluid or earth pressures. Other sources
of lateral load may include blasts, crane loads, and
horizontal thrust from untied sloped roof framing.
Wind pressures are applied over the surface of a
structure. The magnitude and distribution of the design
wind pressures to the various surfaces are given in the
appropriate building code or ASCE 7. Individual wall
elements must be analyzed for out-of-plane flexure;
8-5
Stronger units or higher mortar compressive strengths
permit higher allowable compressive stresses. Masonry
laid in running bond has higher allowable shear stresses
than masonry laid in stack bond (Code Section 2.2.5.2).
The Code (in Chapter 2) permits allowable stresses to
be increased by one-third when the load combination
considered includes wind or earthquake together with
dead or live loads (Code Section 2.1.1.1.3 and MDG
Section 8.3). Since "uninspected" construction is not
permitted, the Code does not provide for reduced
allowable stresses in "uninspected" construction, as
was permitted in the past with some other codes.
horizontal diaphragms and the shear walls to which
these are connected must be analyzed for in-plane
flexure, shear, and deflections (Code Section 1.7.3).
Seismic loads are inertial forces, frequently
expressed as a fraction of the mass of the building or
affected component. For design purposes, these are
often considered as equivalent lateral forces, applied
statically in accordance with magnitude and distribution
formulas prescribed by the governing building code or
by ASCE 7. Like wind loads, seismic forces are
transferred by horizontal diaphragms to the shear walls.
Fluid and earth pressures are generally treated as
loads acting normal to the wall surface and varying
linearly with height.
Loads must generally be considered to act in
combination with each other. Loading combinations
must be examined to identify the one causing the
highest stress or most critical combination of actions in
the member under consideration. Unless mandated
otherwise by the governing building code, the loading
combinations of Code Section 2.1.1.1 must be
considered:
1. Dead load alone;
2. Dead load plus live load;
3. Dead load plus live load plus either wind or
seismic load. Wind load and seismic load are
considered as non-concurrent. While wind and
seismic loads can act from any direction, they are
usually applied along each of the two orthogonal
plan directions coinciding with the principal axes
of the building, since these are typically critical.
4. Dead load plus wind load acting from any
direction;

5. Dead load times 0.9, plus seismic load. In this
combination the dead load is reduced because it
can help in resisting seismic overturning forces.
The 0.9 reduction factor recognizes that:
a) structural self-weight may have been over-
estimated; and
b) vertical acceleration during an earthquake can
reduce beneficial dead-load effects.
6. Dead load plus live load plus lateral load from
fluids or earth pressures.
7. Dead load plus lateral load from fluids or earth
pressures. The dead-load component is not
reduced when combined with fluid or earth
pressures.
8. Dead load plus live load plus the effects of
restrained movements from temperature, shrinkage
8.4 STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR M A S O N R Y WALLS
Walls resist the following types of structural
actions, acting either singly or in combination:
• out-of-plane flexure only (nonloadbearing
elements);
* axial compression and flexure (loadbearing
elements);
• in-plane shear and flexure (shear-wall elements)
The structural actions in a wall element depend on the
external loading applied to the element, and also to the
way in which the element is supported by and
connected to adjacent elements.
8.4.1 E f f e c t of W a l l C o n t i n u i t y a n d
S u p p o r t C o n d i t i o n s on W a l l
Element Actions
Depending on its support conditions and continuity
over supports, a wall can be considered either simply
supported or continuous for out-of-plane loads.
Continuity between adjacent spans depends upon the
[ I
No connectionbetween
flangeand web
Plan View
Fig. 8.4-1 Examples of Differences in Connectivity between Elements of Intersecting Walls
8-6
Chapter 8
and creep, and other effects.
9. Dead load plus the effects of restrained movements
from temperature, shrinkage and creep, and other
effects.
When prestressed masonry is used, the prestressing
force must be included in the above combinations.
Code Section 2.1.1.1.3 permits an increase in
allowable stresses by one-third when considering load
combinations 3, 4, or 5 (Ref. 8.3.2).
When a structure is provided with adequate
movement joints, differential movement is not
significantly restrained, and does not produce
significant stresses. However, the designer must still
address cases in which differential movement cannot be
accommodated, such as in composite multiwythe walls.
mortar-to-unit bond, unit interlock, reinforcement
across the support, and presence of movement joints.
Walls can be assumed to span horizontally, vertically,
or in both directions.
In walls composed of planar elements lying in
different planes, the structural actions present in the
individual elements, and the behavior of the entire
cross-section, depend on the connectivity between the
planar elements. For example, consider the two wall
cross-sections shown in plan view in MDG Fig. 8.4-1.
In the first case, where a gap exists between the
two perpendicular plan elements comprising the cross
section, the elements act independently. In the second
case, they act together, forming a T-section. The
actions on each element are different for the two cases.
For the elements to be considered as acting together,
the connection at the joint must meet the requirements
of Code Section 1.9.4.2.
1
Connection between
flange and web
Design Philosophy and M e t h o d o l o g y

Similarly, horizontal diaphragm elements that are

assumed to transfer forces to shear walls, must be
connected to the shear walls by combinations of
mechanical anchorage and friction (Code Section
2.1.6). The connection forces can depend on the
zontal strips ~
continuity conditions.
Pilasters, addressed in MDG Sections 11.2 and
12.3, act as vertical beams to support horizontally
oriented wall strips (MDG Fig. 8.4-2). Walls,
supported by pilasters, span horizontally between the Fig. 8.4-2 Horizontal Wall Strips
pilasters, vertically between horizontal diaphragms, or Supported by Pilasters
both ways. Pilasters between walls may provide
continuity between walls and add stiffness (see Code
Section 2.1.5).
uniform vertical load
8.4.2 Loadbearing Walls
8.4.2.1 Types of Vertical Loads
Uniform vertical loads cause uniformly distributed
axial stresses along the length of a bearing wall, as
shown in MDG Fig. 8.4-3. uniform axial
At the level where concentrated loads are applied stresses with
to a bearing wall, they create axial stress concen- depth
trations. At increasing distances below the level of the
applied axial load, the axial stresses become more
uniform along the length of the wall, as shown in MDG
Fig. 8.4-4.
Concentrated loads can generally be considered to
have the same effect as uniform loads when their Fig. 8.4-3 Axial Stresses in Bearing
spacing is less than or equal to the width of bearing Wall with Uniformly Distributed
plus four times the wall thickness, per Code Section Axial Load
2.1.7.1.
Bond beams tend to distribute vertical stresses concentrated vertical
resulting from concentrated loads more uniformly along load
the length of the wall. This can be handled as
presented in MDG Chapter 9.
8.4.2.2 Failure Modes for Masonry
Bearing Walls - - A masonry bearing wall is
usually considered as an assemblage of independent l -

vertically spanning strips. The allowable vertical

capacity of each strip is the product of its cross-
sectional area and its allowable stress, which decreases increasingly
with increasing slenderness ratio (unsupported height of uniform axial
stresses with
strip divided by out-of-plane radius of gyration). In depth
theory walls with low slenderness ratios fail by
compression of the masonry; walls with high
slenderness ratios fail by elastic buckling; and walls
with intermediate slenderness ratios fail by inelastic
buckling. The change in failure mode with increasing Fig. 8.4-4 Axial Stresses in Bearing Wall
slenderness ratio is reflected in Code Sections 2.2.3 and with Concentrated Axial Load
2.3.3.2.

8-7

Localized bearing failures may occur under
concentrated vertical loads. Bearing stress calculations
intended to prevent such failures are described in Code
Sections 2.1.7.2 and 2.1.7.3.
If concentrated vertical loads exceed the allowable
capacity of the wall, and economic or architectural
considerations prevent increasing the wall thickness,
pilasters may be added at the locations of concentrated
load.
8.4.2.3 Effects of Openings on Axial
Capacity of Bearing Walls - - The distribution
of stresses and loads around an opening is governed by
the depth-to-span ratio of the masonry material above
the opening. Where the depth to span ratio of the
masonry above an opening is less than about 0.67, the
masonry should be considered to span as a beam (MDG
Fig. 8.4-5).
When the depth to span ratio exceeds about 0.67,
the masonry can be considered to span as an arch
(MDG Fig. 8.4-6). For masonry above an opening to
act as an arch, sufficient masonry must be present on
each side of the opening to resist the horizontal thrust.
Lintels that act as beams must be designed to
support the entire weight of the masonry above them
and for all the loads applied above them (MDG Section
ii
Fig. 8.4-5 Free-Body Diagram of a Lintel
Acting as a Beam
Fig. 8.4-6 Free-Body Diagram of a Lintel
Acting as an Arch
8.8
Chapter 8
11.3). Lintels that act as arches need to be designed
only for the weight of the triangular volume of masonry
above the opening and for any other loads applied
within that volume (MDG Section I 1.3).
In walls with multiple openings, the openings
should be aligned vertically so that the masonry piers
supporting them are vertically continuous. When the
openings are not so aligned, the piers are vertically
discontinuous, and vertical loads must be transferred by
shear and moment in the lintels.
Arching action within a panel having nonaligned
openings, as shown in MDG Fig. 8.4-7, is possible if
the following conditions are satisfied:
1. The minimum vertical distance, d, between
openings must be greater than or equal to
approximately two-thirds the maximum horizontal
dimension d3 of the lower opening;
2. The dimensions dt and d2 must be sufficient for the
masonry to resist the inclined thrusts from arching
action without exceeding the allowable axial
compressive stress in the masonry; and
3. The masonry on each side of the lower opening
must be able to resist the horizontal component of
the thrust from arching action.
Axial stresses in a bearing wall increase with the
number and size of openings in the wall. As a
building's height and floor span increase, so do the
vertical compressive stresses in bearing wall elements,
due to the accumulation of loads from the upper floors
(MDG Fig. 8.4-8).
d3
Fig. 8.4-7 Arching Action between Multiple
Openings
Design Philosophy and M e t h o d o l o g y
5th
4th
3rd
2nd
1st
Fig. 8.4-8 Accumulation of Axial Load with Height of Bearing-Wall Building
vertical roof diaphragm
strips
Fig. 8.4-9 Action of Horizontal and Vertical Strips Assumed for Design
8.4.2.4 Interaction of Bearing Walls
and Horizontal Diaphragms Under
Gravity Loads J The support conditions of
horizontal diaphragms determine whether or not those
diaphragms will transfer out-of-plane flexure to the
walls that support them. Any flexural stresses resulting
from such interaction should be added to the axial
stresses from vertical loads.
8.4.2.5 Engineered Design of Load-
bearing Walls - - The engineered design of
loadbearing walls is usually carried out by idealizing
the walls as combinations of horizontal and vertical
strips (MDG Fig. 8.4-9). The horizontal strips span
above door openings and above and below window
openings. Reactions from them are transferred to the
vertical strips. Loads are assigned to the strips based
on the judgment of the designer. The design of each
horizontal
\ strips _ _ 7
strip depends on its axial load, its out-of-plane flexure,
and its span and support conditions.
For example, a bearing wall fixed at its base by
dowels embedded into the foundation, and laterally
unsupported at its top, must be designed as a series of
cantilevered vertical strips. This situation occurs when
there are neither perpendicular shear wails nor lateral
supports from horizontal diaphragms (MDG Fig. 8.4-
10).
If the bearing wall is supported out-of-plane by
horizontal diaphragms, it can be designed as a series of
vertical strips, spanning between diaphragms, and
either continuous or discontinuous at those diaphragms
(MDG Fig. 8.4-11).
Because the allowable loads for those vertical
strips depend on their slenderness (ratio of effective
unbraced length to out-of-plane radius of gyration), the
8-9
 Chapter 8

._p=

free single
stdp --t
veaical ~ ; ~ 1
s t d p s ~
f i x e d ~

Fig. 8.4-10 Idealization of a Bearing Wall
as a Series of Cantilevered
Vertical Strips
horizontaldiaphragm
sistrip
ngle
vertical
strips ~ T~
f i x e ~
Fig. 8.4-11 Idealization of a Bearing Wall
Supported by a Horizontal
Diaphragm, as a Series of
Simply-Supported Vertical
Strips
designer must correctly compute the effective unbraced
length of the vertical strips.
The effective height of the cantilevered strips
(MDG Fig. 8.4-10), is twice the total height. The
effective height of the supported strips (MDG Fig. 8.4-
11) depends on the support conditions at each floor. If
the strips are discontinuous at each floor level, their
effective height is the clear story height. If they are
continuous, the effective height is one-half the clear
story height. The assumption of out-of-plane support
for the strips (MDG Fig. 8.4-11), regardless of their
end conditions, depends on the presence of competent
horizontal diaphragms supported by shear walls
oriented perpendicular to the plane of the strips.
If the wall design allows tensile stresses in the
masonry (Code Section 2.2), an additional limit is
Fig. 8.4-12 Structural Actions on Shear
Walls
placed on the allowable axial load. The design axial
load must not exceed one-quarter of the Euler buckling
load, including a penalty factor for effective
eccentricity of axial load (Refs. 8.4.1, 8.4.2).
Allowable flexural tensile stresses due to out-of-
plane loading in um'einforced masonry are given in
Code Table 2.2.3.2.
An unreinforced wall, subject to axial load and
bending is designed by the interaction equation ("unity
equation") involving ratios of calculated to allowable
axial and bending stresses. The unity equation can be
extended to biaxial bending simply by adding a term
equal to the ratio of calculated to allowable bending
stresses about the other cross-sectional axis.
This unity equation includes no moment magnifier
term. Although this omission is not conservative, the
Code committee felt that it was not significant (Code
Commentary Section 2.2.3.1). Flexural shear for
unreinforced walls due to out-of-plane loading is
seldom a controlling design criterion (Code Section
2.2.5 and Code Commentary Section 2.2.5).
In reinforced masonry design, the sum of
compressive stresses from axial loads and flexure is
limited; compressive stresses from axial loads alone
must also be checked separately. An interaction
equation like that of Code Section 2.2 is applicable
only to unreinforced uncracked masonry and is
technically invalid for reinforced masonry sections,
which are assumed to be cracked. However, it is
conservative when used to check compressive stresses
in the reinforced element. The technically correct
approach is to develop a moment-axial force interaction

8-10
Design Philosophy and Methodology
diagram (MDG Chapter 12). The designer must also
check stresses in the tension reinforcement. One-way
shear in reinforced walls due to out-of-plane loading is
rarely a design problem (Code Section 2.3.5).
Engineered design of masonry bearing walls
(unreinforced and reinforced) for combinations of axial
load and flexure is discussed in MDG Section 12.2.
8.4.3 Shear Walls
Lateral loads, applied to walls spanning vertically
between horizontal diaphragms, are transferred through
horizontal diaphragms to shear walls oriented parallel
to the lateral loads. The shear walls then transfer the
lateral forces to the foundation.
The shear walls must resist in-plane shear,
overturning moment, and also axial loads due to self-
weight (MDG Fig. 8.4-12). Their resistance to shear
and axial loads is derived from their cross-sectional
area. Their resistance to overturning is derived either
from the gravity loads on them (unreinforced walls) or
from vertical tensile reinforcement. At the level of the
foundation, any tensile stresses from overturning
moment must be counteracted by the weight of the
structure, or foundation, or transferred to the
underlying soil using special anchors.
8.4.4 Design of Shear Wall Buildings
for Lateral Load
The structural design of shear wall buildings for
lateral load requires that two principal criteria be
satisfied:
1. All structural elements (walls loaded out-of-plane,
horizontal diaphragms, and shear walls) must have
sufficient strength to resist the combinations of
structural actions that can be applied to them.
2. The deformations of the structural elements must
be consistent with the design actions, and with the
intended use of the structure.
In general, shear wall structures can be designed to
meet these criteria. The large cross-sectional area of
shear walls leads to high structural capacity and also
high stiffness.
8.4.5 Analysis of Shear Wall
Buildings
To satisfy the above design criteria, structural
analysis is required to determine the structural actions
and corresponding element deformations and building
deflections. If the structure is statically indeterminate,
8-11
the required analysis can be complex. Examples of this
process are discussed in MDG Chapter 9. General
principles are summarized here.
In prestressed masonry design, the prestressing
force functions essentially as an axial load, decreasing
the net tension in the wall and increasing its flexural
capacity for net compression below the balance point
axial load. Examples of the design of prestressed
masonry walls are given in MDG Chapter 17.
8.4.5.1 E f f e c t s of C r a c k i n g m Under
service loads, a masonry shear wall building is usually
considered to behave in a linear elastic manner.
Stresses are assumed proportional to strains, and static
equilibrium and deformational compatibility must be
satisfied. In the elastic range, the internal distribution
of element actions in a statically indeterminate structure
depends on the relative stiffiaesses of those structural
elements.
Cracking significantly influences the stiffness of
each masonry element. Modern three-dimensional
computer programs permit consideration of cracking
through a series of iterative analyses. All elements are
first assumed uncracked; stresses are compared with
cracking stresses; those elements indicated to have
cracked are appropriately reduced in stiffness; and the
process is repeated until the actions in each element are
consistent with its assumed uncracked or cracked state.
While such iterative analysis can be useful for any
masonry structure, it is costly, and is unjustified for
many structures. The Code permits (Code 1.9.2) the
use of uncracked section properties for analysis
purposes.
8 . 4 . 5 . 2 Role of A p p r o x i m a t e A n a l y s i s
Methods m When three-dimensional computer
programs are unavailable or economically unjustified,
approximate methods can be used to analyze statically-
indeterminate shear wall buildings. As discussed in a
variety of textbooks, some methods consider the
flexural and shearing flexibilities of wall elements;
others consider only the shearing flexibility. The latter
approach is certainly the simplest; given a series of
parallel walls of equal thickness, the relative stiffness
of each wall (and hence its share of the story shear in
the plane of the wall) is simply proportional to its plan
length.
If overall torsional response of the building is
significant (for example, due to a wall layout that is
asymmetrical in plan), this should be addressed in the
analysis. For buildings with many walls, oriented in
both principal plan directions and located

symmetrically in plan, additional shear produced by
plan torsion are usually not significant for design.
8.4,5.3 E f f e c t s of Horizontal Dia-
p h r a g m Flexibility - - Once the above decisions
have been made, the next choice involves the horizontal
diaphragms. Framed structures are often analyzed
assuming that the horizontal diaphragms are rigid in
their own planes. This assumption is technically
reasonable, because the horizontal diaphragms are
usually much stiffer in their own planes than the flames
they connect. It is also computationally convenient,
because it leads to a considerable simplification in the
analysis. In shear wall structures, however, horizontal
diaphragms are not always stiffer than the vertical
diaphragms (wall elements) they connect. Whether a
horizontal diaphragm can be considered rigid depends
on the materials of which it is made, and on its plan
aspect ratio -- that is, its ratio of span to width, where
those terms are defined in MDG Fig. 8.4-13. For
different types of floor diaphragms, MDG Table 8.4.1
gives some generally accepted span-to-width ratios,
beyond which the diaphragms can no longer be
considered rigid.
Whether they are considered rigid or flexible,
horizontal diaphragms must be designed to resist the
structural actions to which they will be subjected.
Their connections to facade elements and shear walls
must be capable of transmitting the required forces and
must be consistent with the end fixity conditions
assumed for the structural analysis.
8 . 4 , 5 , 4 An al ysi s of S h e a r W a l l s - - In
general, the shear wall elements should be analyzed
including the effects of flexural and shearing
deformations. This is accomplished automatically by
most computer programs. For approximate analyses,
simplifying assumptions can be made. For example,
shearwall shearwall
width
lateral load
Fig. 8.4-13 Span-to-Width Ratios for Floor
Diaphragms
8-12
Chapter 8
because the flexural deformations of a tall shear wall
are much more significant than the shearing
deformations, the latter might be neglected. The
converse is true for a low-rise shear wall.
Effects of openings can be included explicitly in
many computer programs. Alternatively, the effects of
a large opening can be analyzed by considering the bay
containing the opening as a flame with equivalent
properties.
When planar elements connect to form shear walls
with T or L cross-sections, the connection must be
capable of transferring the required actions. The
analytical model should be consistent with how the
structure will be detailed and constructed. For
example, if movement joints are required at the
intersection of the planar elements, the designer cannot
use the stiffness corresponding to the full, connected
cross-section. In order to consider the full, connected
cross-section, the elements must be connected in
accordance with Code Section 1.9.4.2. The designer
must carefully review volume change requirements to
ensure that the restraint provided by perpendicular wall
connections will not adversely affect the structure's
performance (MDG Chapter 10).
8.4.6 Rational Design of Masonry
Shear Walls
Rational design of masonry shear walls requires
that the axial, shear, and flexural capacities exceed the
calculated actions under design loads. Design of
masonry shear walls for these actions, singly or in
combination, is discussed in MDG Section 13.2.
8.4.7 Design against Progressive
Collapse
Failure of an individual element that leads to
failure of additional elements is referred to as
"progressive collapse." Although the initial local
failure may be relatively insignificant, the fmal
progressive failure may be major, even including
complete collapse of the structure in extreme cases.
Although not explicitly required by the Code, it is
prudent for the designer to provide sufficient structural
integrity to reduce the risk of progressive collapse.
This integrity is normally achieved by providing some
prescriptive reinforcement within structural elements
(even if that reinforcement is not considered in
calculating the resistance of those elements), by tying
structural elements together with reinforcing steel, by
using redundant structural systems, and by providing
Design Philosophy and Methodology
Table 8.4.1 Maximum Span-to-Width Ratios for Horizontal Diaphragms
to be Considered Rigid
Floor Construction
Cast-in-place solid concrete slab
Precast concrete interconnected
Metal deck with concrete fill
Metal deck with no fill
Cast-in-place ~n/~sum deck (roof)
alternate paths for the transmission of forces from the
point of load application to the foundation.
For example, the following reinforcement can be
provided: vertical reinforcement at each end of a
bearing or shear wall; horizontal reinforcement in walls
at the floor levels; reinforcement around openings in
8.5 S T R U C T U R A L C O N S I D E R A T I O N S FOR M A S O N R Y BEAMS
8.5.1 Beam Behavior reinforcement. Because shear reinforcement is more
A beam is a horizontal member that is subjected to
vertical or horizontal loads, and that spans between
points of support. Axial loads in beams are usually
ignored for design purposes, except in coupling beams
of shear walls. Beams, like other structural elements,
must satisfy conditions of equilibrium, stress-strain
relationships, and compatibility of deformations.
The compressive portion of a beam can buckle
sideways if it is not sufficiently supported laterally.
This is commonly referred to as "lateral-torsional
buckling." To avoid the need to reduce the allowable
compressive stress in beams, Code Section 2.3.3.4.4
requires bracing of the compression portion against
lateral displacement.
8.5.2 E n g i n e e r e d Design of M a s o n r y
Beams
Masonry beams must be designed with satisfactory
flexural and shearing resistance. Because they are
discussed only in Code Section 2.3, and not in Code
Section 2.2, beams are required to be reinforced for
flexure. They may or may not require shear
8-13
Span-to-Width Ratio
5:1
4:1
3:1
2:1
3:1
walls; and anchorage between walls and horizontal
diaphragms. Vertical reinforcement at the ends of all
walls serves as compression or tension reinforcement.
Horizontal reinforcement in walls at the floor levels can
serve as a tensile tie for a masonry arch if part of a wall
is removed.
difficult to detail and place for a reinforced masonry
beam than a reinforced concrete beam, a preferred
design objective for a masonry beam might be to have
sufficient cross-sectional area that shear reinforcement
would not be required. Beam design is discussed in
MDG Section 11.3, Beams and Lintels.
Code Section 2.3.3.4 defines beam span length for
the purposes of analysis. Simple-span beams, or those
not built integrally with supports, have a span length
equal to the lesser of the clear span plus the member
depth, or the distance between centers of supports. The
span length of beams continuous over supports is the
center-to-center distance between supports. Code
Section 2.3.3.4.3 further specifies the minimum length
of masonry beam bearing over supports in the direction
of the span. The span of a cantilever beam is not
defined by the Code, but is usually measured to the face
of the support.
Code Sections 2.3.3.4.5 and 1.10.1 limit the
deflection of beams supporting unreinforced masonry
to//600 or 0.3 in. (7.6 ram).

8.6 STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY BEAM-COLUMNS
8.6.1 Beam-Column Behavior
Beam-columns resist axial load, moment, and
shear. They may fail due to insufficient material
strength, or due to instability.
8.6.2 Engineered Design of Masonry
Beam-Columns
Masonry beam-columns must be designed with
satisfactory resistance to combined flexural and axial
loads, and with satisfactory shearing resistance. Code
Section 2.1.4 gives general requirements for column
dimensions, reinforcement, and analysis. Each nominal
side dimension must be at least 8 in. (200 mm), and the
ratio of effective height to the lesser nominal side
8.7 STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS
WALLS
In concept, prestressed masonry walls act like
conventionally reinforced walls with an additional axial
load, which in this case is due to prestressing.
Prestressing is accomplished using tendons.
Although other materials such as fiberglass or carbon
fiber might also be used for this purpose, Specification
Article 2.4 B requires the tendons to be steel.
8.7.1 Pre-tensioned versus Post-
tensioned Masonry
In pre-tensioned masonry, tendons are first stressed
between temporary external frames; the masonry is laid
around the tendons; and when the masonry has attained
sufficient strength, the tendons are released, placing the
masonry in compression.
In post-tensioned masonry, the masonry is laid,
leaving space for the tendons; when the masonry has
attained sufficient strength, the tendons are inserted and
tightened against the masonry, placing the masonry in
compression.
8.7.2 Bonded versus Unbonded
Tendons
Tendons that are in continuous contact with the
surrounding masonry, so that changes in strain of the
tendons are compatible with changes in strain of the
masonry at each point along the tendons, are referred to
by the Code as "bonded tendons." Tendons not
meeting that requirement are referred to as by the Code
"tmbonded."
8-14
Chapter 8
dimension must not exceed 25. Cohmms must have a
minimum of 4 vertical reinforcing bars; the area of
reinforcing steel may not be less than 0.0025 A, nor
exceed 0.04 A,. According to Code Section 2.1.4.6,
this longitudinal reinforcement is required to be
laterally supported by ties. Columns must be designed
assuming a minimum axial load eccentricity equal to
0.1 times each side dimension, where each axis is
considered independently.
Engineered design of masonry beam-columns for
combinations of axial load and flexure is discussed in
MDG Chapter 12 and their design for shear is
discussed in MDG Section 13.1.
FOR PRESTRESSED MASONRY
8.7.3 L a t e r a l l y R e s t r a i n e d v e r s u s
Laterally Unrestrained Tendons
Laterally restrained tendons deform perpendicular
to a line between their end points, as the masonry
element that they are prestressing deforms. Laterally
unrestrained tendons, in contrast, do not deform, but
remain straight. See MDG Fig. 8.7-1. The Code
Commentary suggests that lateral restraint can be
achieved by providing grouted cells at the quarter
points of the prestressed element. Full grouting will
provide even more lateral restraint.
8.7.4 Prestress Losses
Stresses change in tendons over time, due to creep,
shrinkage and moisture or freeze-thaw expansion of
the masonry, and to relaxation of the tendon itself.
Creep, shrinkage and moisture expansion can be
estimated using coefficients in the Code. Relaxation
data are usually available from the tendon
manufacturer.
Prestress is reduced by elastic deformation of
masonry, which depends on the modulus of elasticity of
the masonry when it is prestressed. Prestress is also
reduced by movement of tendon anchorages or bearing
seats. Reductions in prestress can be compensated for
by re-tensioning.
8.7.5 Conditions at Transfer
When the masonry is first prestressed, it generally
has not achieved its specified compressive strength, nor
the corresponding stiffness. Effective prestress at
Design Philosophy and Methodology

transfer includes instantaneous losses caused by elastic
deformation and anchorage movement. Elastic
deformation must be computed using the modulus of
elasticity at the time of transfer.
8.7.6 Service Conditions
Stresses are calculated as in unreinforced masonry.
Precompression fTom prestress is treated as an
additional axial load. The effective prestress is based
on the tendon stresses (including effects of losses), and
on the modulus of elasticity of the masonry at the time
of loading.
8.7.7 Buckling
Axially loaded elements must be checked against
buckling. If laterally unrestrained tendons are used, the
prestressing force must be included in the buckling
calculation. If laterally restrained tendons are used,
however, the prestressing force is not included.
8.7.8 Moment Strength
For masonry with laterally unrestrained tendons, an
additional check on moment strength is required, using
methods similar to those for prestressed concrete. The
nominal strength of the prestressing tendons is used to
determine the nominal moment strength of the masonry,
Mn. The factored design moments are compared to the
design moment strength, which is that nominal strength
reduced by the appropriate understrength factor.

I|
I
I
center of tendon
I doesn't shift
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I _J
k
Undeflected Wall Deflected Wall

Fig. 8.7-1a Laterally Unrestrained Tendon

V !

tendon deflects
with wall
i !
r I 1
t i I
r i I
r ! I
i ! I
[ I I

~k
!
I
r~
!
! U
k
Undeflected Wall Deflected Wall

Fig. 8.7-1b Laterally Restrained Tendon

8-15
 Chapter 8

REFERENCES
8.3.1 ASCE Standard, ASCE 7-93, "Minimum 8.4.1 Colville, James, "Service Load Design
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Equation for Unreinforced Masonry
Structures," American Society of Civil Construction," TMS Journal, Vol. II, No. 1,
Engineers, New York, NY, 1993. August 1992.
8.3.2 Ellifiit, D. S., "The Mysterious 1/3 Stress 8.4.2 Colville, James, "Stability of Hollow
Increase," AISC Journal, 4 th Quarter, Masonry Walls," TMS Journal, Vol. II, No.
American Institute of Steel Construction, 1, August 1992.
Chicago, IL 1977.

8-16

D I S T R I B U T I O N OF
LOADS
9.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
A major criterion that influences the design of any
structure is the distribution of the dead, live, and other
superimposed loads. This chapter deals with various
load distribution concepts with respect to the design and
analysis of masonry structures.
Two types of load distribution in masonry structures
are considered. Global load distribution is concerned
with the transfer of loads to the various components of
the structure (that is, slabs, beams, walls, pilasters,
columns, and footings). This distribution may have to
consider the stiffiaess of structural components, and must
consider the existence and location of control and
expansion joints. Local load distribution is concerned
with how loads are distributed within individual
structural components; that is, the distribution of
concentrated loads in single wythe, multiwythe, and
composite walls; the distribution of loads under bond
beams; and the distribution of loads within perforated
shear walls.
9.1 GLOBAL D I S T R I B U T I O N OF G R A V I T Y LOAD
Gravity load analysis is usually
straightforward, following common engineerhag
principles using the tributary area concept and simple
statics. Dead load is the weight of all permanent
materials and fixtures in a structure and includes all
framing members, mechanical systems, floor and
9-1
9
The concepts of load distribution, as well as the
application of the Code to the comprehensive design of
typical masonry buildings, are presented in this Guide.
MDG Chapter 9 presents the load distribution concepts;
global load distribution concepts are discussed in MDG
Sections 9.1 and 9.2; concepts of local load distribution
within a wall are presented in MDG Section 9.3. MDG
Chapter 17 presents applications of these concepts to
three typical and realistic masonry structures. The three
structures are:
1. TMS Shopping C e n t e r - MDG Section 17. I
2. DPC Gymnasium-- MDG Section 17.2
3. RCJ H o t e l - - MDG Section 17.3
Numerous situations commonly found in structural
design of masonry elements are examined in the building
example problems in MDG Chapter 17.
ceiling weights. Gravity live loads include use or
human occupancy loads, snow loads, and moving loads.
Typically gravity loads are transmitted from the roof
and the floors to the wails which transmit them
vertically to the foundation.

9.2 GLOBAL D I S T R I B U T I O N OF LATERAL LOAD
Lateral loads include earthquake, wind, soil
pressure, and fluid pressures. The global distribution of
lateral forces to the resisting masonry wall systems
depends on the rigidity of the floor or roof diaphragm
used to transfer the lateral loads to the top of the walls,
and on the relative rigidity of the wall elements
themselves. The global distribution of lateral loads to the
top of wall elements within a masonry building is
discussed in this section.
9.2.1 Global L a t e r a l Load Distribu-
tion to S h e a r W a l l s in Build-
ings w i t h F l e x i b l e D i a p h r a g m s
The in-plane flexibility of a roof or floor
diaphragm is evaluated relative to the flexibility of the
supporting walls. If the diaphragm undergoes
significant in-plane deformation compared to the
supporting walls, the diaphragm is considered flexible.
When flexible diaphragms are used, the lateral loads
are distributed to the resisting wall elements in
proportion to the tributary area of diaphragm supported
by each wall element. MDG Examples TMS-2 and
DPC-I illustrate this concept for the TMS Shopping
Center and the DPC Gymnasium, both of which are
assumed to have flexible roof diaphragms.
9 . 2 . 2 Global L a t e r a l Load
D i s t r i b u t i o n to S h e a r W a l l s in
Buildings w i t h Rigid
Diaphragms
If a diaphragm does not undergo significant in-
plane deformation relative to the supporting walls, it is
considered rigid. When a rigid diaphragm is used, the
lateral loads are distributed to resisting wall elements in
proportion to each wall element's relative stiffness and
for torsional effects the distance from the plan center of
rigidity. The eccentricity of the applied load (torsion
effects) from the center of rigidity also affects the
amount of load distributed to the shear wall elements.
The type of construction used in the floors of the RCJ
Hotel design examples is consistent with the
assumption that the floor diaphragms are rigid.
Several methods are currently used to determine
the relative stiffnesses of the wall elements, and to
subsequently distribute the lateral loads to the top of
each wall. Schneider and Dickey (Ref. 9.2.1) list three
methods; Amrhein fRef. 9.2.2) shows two variations on
another method. Other authors use similar methods.
9-2
Chapter 9
However, when certain configurations of wall openings
are analyzed assuming cantilever action, some of these
methods produce results that erroneously suggest that a
wall with openings is stiffer than a wall without
openings! In fact, the applicability of one method over
another may depend on the building configuration.
9,2.2,1 Hand Calculation Method -
Only one "hand calculation method," Schnieder and
Dickey's Method I fRef. 9.2.1), will be presented in this
chapter. This method has the advantages of being
simple to apply and generally avoids the erroneous
stiffness results described above. For more information
on other methods, detailed descriptions are included in
the indicated references. It should be noted that this
method does not accurately describe the lateral
deformation of the building system and should not be
used to calculate building drift.
Schneider and Dickey's Method I takes the total
lateral load at each diaphragm location (Vtotal) and
distributes the load to each resisting wall element
according to the ratio of the element's stiffness (ki) and
the sum of the stiffness of all the wall elements at this
elevation (kto~at). In equation form this is:
V~ = Vt°'~'×( ki 1 Eq. 9.2-1
\ ktotat J
The stiffness of individual wall elements is
determined based on the assumption that the walls act
as beams that have significant shear deformations.
These beams are assumed to be fixed at the base of the
structure and either free at the diaphragm location (a
cantilevered beam with deflections given as A~), or free
to translate but fully restrained against rotation (fixed
end with deflections given as Ap) (see MDG Fig. 9.2-
1). Boundary conditions determine which equation
should be used to calculate wall stiffness.
Assuming linear elastic behavior, the deflection
(Ac) at the top of a cantilevered, solid, rectangular wall
element is given by:
e,(h') 3 1.2 P, h'
Ac - - - +~ Eq. 9.2-2
3E,, 1 Ev A
Since only relative stiffness is being considered, the
value of Pt can be set to an arbitrary value and Ev
assumed to be approximately 0.4 x Era. Including the
formulas for A and/, MDG Eq. 9.2-2 becomes:
Distribution of Loads
Fig. 9.2-1 Deflection of a Shear Wall Element
Ac ~ t)i [4Ih'13+3/h'/]
E,., L
A similar expression can be developed for the
deflection at the top of a solid, rectangular wall
element, where both ends are fixed against rotation
(ZXF).
AF PI [ f h ' ~ 3 + 3 f h ' l ]
If all walls are of the same material, P~ can be taken
Emt
as any convenient constant value.
MDG Eqs. 9.2-3 and 9.2-4 do not account for
flanged walls or cracked section behavior. The
designer can use MDG Eq. 9.2-2 for Ac and a similar
equation for AF to include these effects if these items
are considered sufficiently important in the
computation. However, in light of the assumptions
used for Method I, it is questionable whether these
refinements will produce significantly more accurate
results. In addition, the Code permits stiffness
calculations based on untracked section properties.
For this reason, examples in the MDG use uncracked
section properties.
The element stiffiaess is calculated by taking the
reciprocal of the deflection at the top of the wall under
the applied load, Pt.
1 stiffiaess (Step 5) of each pier can be used to distribute
kj = -
A the load to the piers on each side of the opening using
For perforated shear walls, MDG Eqs. 9.2-3 and
9.2-4 cannot be used directly to determine deflection.
Schneider and Dickey (Re£ 9.2.1) suggest a method for
calculating the deflection at the top of perforated shear
!/ . . . . . . . .
walls. In their Method I, this deflection is approximated
Eq. 9.2-3
using the following procedures:
1. The deflection at the top of the wall is calculated
using MDG Eq. 9.2-3. This assumes that the wall
acts as a cantilevered beam.
2. The deflection of a section of the wall equal in
height to the tallest opening is calculated using
MDG Eq. 9.2-3 (assuming cantilever action). The
total wall length is used for the l~ calculation.
3. The deflection obtained in Step 2 is subtracted
Eq. 9.2-4 from that obtained in Step 1.
4. The deflections of all piers lying within the strip
used for Step 2 are calculated assuming these piers
are fixed at top and bottom (MDG Eq. 9.2-4).
5. The stiffiaess of each pier is determined using
MDG Eq. 9.2-5, and the stiffnesses of all piers in
the opening strip are summed. The total deflection
of the opening strip is obtained by taking the
reciprocal of the sum of the stiffiaesses. If there are
additional openings in the strip, the wall is
separated into sections and the deflection at the top
of each pier within the section is calculated using
Steps 1 through 5.
6. The deflection of the piers in the opening strip is
added to the deflection calculated in Step 3.
7. The stiffness of the perforated wall is then the
reciprocal of the deflection obtained in Step 6.
The stiffness of the perforated wall can then be
used to distribute the load to the top of the perforated
wall when a rigid diaphragm analysis is used. Once the
load is distributed to the top of the wall, the relative
Eq. 9.2-5
MDG Eq. 9.2-1. It should be noted that the above
analysis assumes that the deflections of the piers at the
diaphragm level are equal.
9-3
 Chapter 9
If either or both of the piers on each side of a R,x = the relative rigidity of each wall element
larger opening are also perforated (that is, if they also resisting forces in the x direction
have openings), the procedure described above can also
be used, but consideration should be given to the
boundary conditions of these smaller piers. If a R~ = the relative rigidity of each wall element
significant amount of masonry is above the openings resisting forces in the y direction
and no movement joints interrupt the wall section, then
the wall section and sub-piers should be considered
fixed in the stiffness calculations in Steps 1 and 2 (see
MDG Examples TMS-13 and TMS-6). x~ = the distance to the center of the wall
There are some significant inconsistencies in the element, along the x axis
above method, particularly with respect to y~ = the distance to the center of the wall
compatibility and load distribution. The method has element, along the y axis
been found, however, to give results that are reasonable The distance from the center of rigidity to the
and usually conservative. center of mass for seismic force, or to the line of action
When a rigid diaphragm analysis is used and the of the resultant wind force, produces a torsional
lateral resisting elements are not placed symmetrically, moment in the plane of each rigid diaphragm. This
or if they have unequal length and cross-section, the torsional moment produces additional shear (additive
center of rigidity of the system must be determined. or subtractive) in each shear wall supporting a rigid
The center of rigidity can be located by determining the diaphragm. Schneider and Dickey (Ref. 9.2.1) suggest
stiffness of the walls resisting the load in each of the distributing both direct shear and the torsional shear
coordinate directions (x and y) and then calculating the using the following equations:
static moments of these stiffiaesses about the center line
of one of the wall systems (see MDG Fig. 9.2-2). The
¢ R,, 5
(Wy)i = [ ~ [ P y +l ~ l P y e , Eq. 9.2-8
formulas used are: Lz J t . s , )

Xr ~ ~ Eq. 9.2-6 (V.),= FLz4,)

R~x]P,:~L R,.~y'
.s, )
~pxe, Eq. 9.2-9

Z R~y, where
y, = ~ Eq. 9.2-7 ( ' V ~ i -~- is the total shear force applied to a
£R,,
particular wall element oriented to
where
resist loads parallel to the y axis
Xr = the distance to the center of rigidity, along
the x axis
y, = the distance to the center of rigidity, along
the y axis
Y

xr ~J
"-I /(Center of Rigidity
. .i./ ~ I

~r
x

Fig. 9.2-2 Center of Rigidity

9-4
Distribution of Loads
(Vx)i= is the total shear force applied to a
particular wall element oriented to resist
loads parallel to the x axis
Py = is the y component of the resultant lateral
force at the diaphragm elevation
Px = is the x component of the resultant lateral
force at the diaphragm elevation
x' = the distance from the center of the wall to
the center of rigidity, parallel to the x axis
y' = the distance from the center of the wall to
the center of rigidity, parallel to the y axis
ey = the distance from the center of rigidity to
the line of action of P~, parallel to the y
axis
e~ = the distance from the center of rigidity to
the line of action of Py, parallel to the x
axis
Jr = relative polar moment of inertia
= Y~(Ri~y'2 + Riyx n) Eq. 9.2-10
Using Method I, a hand analysis of the RCJ Hotel
is presented in MDG Section 17.3.3.
9.3 LOCAL D I S T R I B U T I O N OF LOADS
9.3.0 General
The second area of interest in the load analysis of
masonry structures is the distribution of the loads within
each component element. The various phenomena
considered here include distribution of in-plane and out-
of-plane vertical and horizontal loads on cavity walls and
composite walls. In addition, distribution of in-plane
loads on perforated shear walls is also addressed. The
designs of some typical elements of the example
buildings are then presented in MDG Chapter 17.
9.3.1 Local Distribution Under
Concentrated Loads
To calculate the compressive stress (f~) on a wall
system subjected to concentrated loads, some assumption
must be made about the concentrated load distribution
within the wall system. Code Commentary Section
2.1.7.1 - Fig. 2.1-14 suggests distributing the load using
an angle of 45 ° t~om the vertical. Schneider and Dickey
(Ref. 9.2.1) suggest an angle of 30 ° from the vertical.
The designer must determine what angle should be used
with the knowledge that the smaller the angle, the smaller
the effective length. Whatever the angle, Code Section
2.1.7.1 states that for walls laid in running bond, the
effective wall length resulting from the assumed
9-5
9.2.2.2 Computer Method - With
increasing personal computer use and the development
of relatively inexpensive structural analysis programs,
more and more structural analysis is performed
electronically. These programs allow a more rational
three-dimensional vertical and lateral load analysis of
masortry buildings and, presumably, a more accurate
distribution of lateral loads. Computer analysis can be
extended to include the effects of flexural cracking.
Because this process can be cumbersome, the current
MSJC Code allows stiffness calculations based on
uncracked section properties. The results of a
computerized analysis of the RCJ Hotel are presented
in MDG Section 17.3.3.
MDG Sections 9.1 and 9.2 have described the
procedures for calculating global loads that act on
masonry structures and their distribution to various
components of a structure. MDG Examples TMS-2,
DPC-1, and MDG Section 17.3.3 illustrate this process in
detail.
distribution is limited to the width of the bearing plate
plus four times the thickness of the wall, but not to
exceed the center-to-center spacing between the
concentrated loads.
9.3.2 Local Distribution of
C o n c e n t r a t e d L o a d s A c t i n g on
Bond B e a m s
9.3.2,1 Hollow Masonry Walls n Bond
beams are often used in masonry construction to
distribute of concentrated loads on hollow walls. Since
Code Section 1.9.1.1 requires that applied loads be
resisted by net area only, the use of bond beams allows
concentrated loads to be distributed over lengths greater
than those directly under the bearing plates, The absence
of bond beams could result in bearing stresses that
exceed the maximum bearing stress allowed by Code
Section 2.1.7.3. The Code and the Commentary do not
provide information regarding load distribution through
bond beams except that Code Commentary Fig. 2.1-14
suggests that the effective length of wall under a
concentrated load depends on the bond beam stiffness.
Research by Page and Shrive (Re£ 9.3.1, 9.3.2),
however, has shown that the angle of load distribution in
a bond beam for a hollow wall is smaller than the

commonly assumed value of 45 ° from the vertical. Their
research shows that this angle varies according to the
flexural stiffness of the bond beam which depends on the
number of courses it comprises. For an 8 in. (200 mm)
deep bond beam, an angle of distribution equal to 30 °
from the vertical should be assumed. For a 16 in. (400
ram) deep bond beam, the suggested angle decreases to
25 °. Using the appropriate angle of load distribution, the
amount of bearing area on the hollow wall can be
computed. The applied load is assumed to act uniformly
over this bearing area.
The effective length for calculation of compressive
stresses is determined by assuming that the angle of
distribution changes to 45 ° from the vertical once the
load has been transferred into the hollow masonry
section. According to Code Section 2.1.7.1, the effective
length is limited to the bearing width (L~) plus four times
the thickness of the wall, but is not to exceed the center-
to-center distance between the concentrated loads. Code
Section 2.1.7.1 applies to walls laid in running bond; for
wails laid in stack bond, the load transfer terminates at
the head joint nearest the edge of the bearing area. See
MDG Example TMS-18 for distribution of a
concentrated load acting on a bond beam in a hollow
masonry wall.
9.3.2.2 Solid Masonry Walls - - The
following statement from a paper by Page and Hendry
(Ref. 9.3.3) concerns loads on bond beams in solid
masortry walls: "In the absence of research in this area,
the logical approach to this problem is to assume a
dispersion of the concentrated load through the beam
(say at 60 ° or 45 ° from the vertical) and then to evaluate
the bearing strength enhancement for the masonry
beneath the beam as though it was loaded by a patch
loading of this size."
No example is presented for the case of solid
masonry walls since the procedure of load distribution is
very similar to the one given in MDG Example TMS-18
for hollow masonry walls.
9.3.3 Effective Bearing Area Under
Concentrated Loads
When calculating the effective bearing area of a
concentrated load on a wall system, the Code allows for
an increase in area if the supporting masonry extends past
the direct bearing area on all sides. This increase is
permissible because the confinement of the direct bearing
area by the surrounding masonry increases the bearing
capacity in the vicinity of the concentrated load.
9-6
Chapter 9
Code Section 2.1.7.2 states that the bearing stresses
in a wall are to be computed by distributing the load over
an area determined as follows:
a) The direct bearing area At, or
b) A l ~ - ~2 but not greater than 2 A1
where A2 is the supporting surface wider than A1 on all
sides, or Az is the area of the lower base of the largest
frustum of a right pyramid or cone having AI as upper
base, sloping at 45 ° from the horizontal, and wholly
contained within the support. Area A2 terminates at head
joints in other than running bond.
Code Section 2.1.7.3 also states that the bearing
stress is not to exceed 0.25f'. Typical situations related
to effective bearing area under concentrated loads are
presented in MDG Examples TMS-19, TMS-20, and
TMS-21.
9.3.4 L o c a l L o a d D i s t r i b u t i o n in
Multiwythe Noncomposite
(Cavity) Walls
Multiwythe noncomposite masonry walls, also
known as cavity walls, have an air cavity between wythes
connected by metal ties. Code Section 2.1.3.3.1 states
that each wythe of the noncomposite wall is to be
designed to resist individually the effects of loads
imposed on it. It continues by saying:
Unless a more detailed analysis is
performed, the following requirements
shall be satisfied:
(a) Collar joints shall not contain headers,
grout, or mortar.
(b) Gravity loads ~om supported
horizontal members shall be resisted
by the wythe nearest to the center of
span of the supported member. Any
resulting bending moment about the
weak axis of the wall shall be
distributed to each wythe in
proportion to its relative stiffiaess.
(c) Loads acting parallel to the plane of a
wall shall be carried only by the wythe
on which they are applied. Transfer of
stresses from such loads between
wythes shall be neglected.
(d) Loads acting transverse to the plane of
a wall shall be resisted by all wythes in
proportion to their relative flexural
stiffness.
The noncomposite wall in MDG Examples DPC-2,
DPC-3, and DPC-4 consists of an 8 in. (200 mm) hollow
concrete block wythe, a 4 in. (100 mm) cavity, and a 4 in.
Distribution of Loads
(100 mm) clay brick wythe. The three examples
presented cover the following load distributions:
1. Eccentrically placed vertical gravity load from a roof
truss transferred to the block wythe of the wall
(MDG Example DPC-2).
2. Lateral in-plane loads transferred to the wall through
the roof system which acts as a flexible diaphragm
(MDG Example DPC-3).
3. Lateral out-of-plane loads, such as wind or seismic
loads, that act on an individual wythe of the
nonloadbearing multiwythe noncomposite wall
(MDG Example DPC-4).
To design wall systems for out-of-plane lateral
loads, such as wind and earthquake loads, Code Section
2.1.3.3.1 requires that the load acting transverse to the
plane of the wall be distributed to the individual wythes
of the wall system in proportion to their relative flexural
stiffiaesses. In general, the stiffness of each wythe is
affected not only by EI, but also by its height and
boundary conditions. In the three examples, (MDG
Examples DPC-2 to DPC-4), the height and boundary
conditions of each wythe of the noncomposite (cavity)
wall are assumed to be the same.
For more complicated situations, however, as in the
case of the RCJ Hotel building described in MDG
Section 17.3.3, the height and support conditions of the
two wythes are different. Shown in MDG Fig. 9.3-1 is
the cross-section of the exterior wall system proposed in
Option A of the RCJ Hotel. In that option, the outer
wythe is vertically continuous for four stories, while the
inner wythe is simply supported at each floor level.
Since factors such as tie location and axial stiffness affect
the transverse load distribution between wythes, it is
suggested that a simple plane-frame model be used to
determine the stresses in each wythe of such wall
systems. Since the wall system usually acts in one-way
bending between the floor slabs, especially in the critical
areas between wall openings, a simple two-dimensional
model (MDG Fig. 9.3-1)can be used in conjunction with
any available structural analysis program to quickly
provide a sufficiently accurate solution. The stresses and
tie forces calculated from these analyses can then be
checked for acceptability using the methods described in
MDG Sections 8.4 and 11.1.

Typical Exterior Wall Suggested Analytical Model

-+

Continuous
Simply
Supporte
Out of Plane
Load

Fig. 9.3-1 Wall System Model

9-7

In determining the member properties for the two-
dimensional model, the tributary width of the inner and
outer wythes can be taken as the horizontal distance
between ties. The stiffmesses of the wythes are based on
this width and the net area over which the distributed
load is applied. When the vertical masonry strip being
modeled is adjacent to a window opening, the load will
include the load applied over the tributary width plus the
load on one-half of the adjacent wall opening.
Where opening edge stiffeners or building ~ame
members are arranged to permit significant two-way
action, other analysis methods that account for the
increase in load-carrying capacity of the wall system may
be used.
The wind load on these wall systems can be
determined using the procedures outlined in ASCE 7-93
(the reference document for the 1999 MSJC Code) or the
governing building code. The critical sections for wind
load will typically be near openings or at the comers of
the top level of the building.
9.3.5 Local Load Distribution in
Multiwythe Composite Masonry
Walls
Code Section 2.1.3.2.1 states that a multiwythe wall
designed for composite action shall have collar joints
which are either:
(a) crossed by connecting headers; or
(b) filled with grout or mortar and connected by
wall ties.
The composite wall thus becomes a structural
assemblage whose mechanical properties are dependent
on those of its components (units, mortar and grout).
Code Section 2.1.3.2.2 states further that the average
shear stress developed in the planes of the interface
S AppliedLoad
Brick
Wythe
Fig. 9.3-2 Multiwythe Wall Load Transfer
9-8
Chapter 9
between the wythes and collar joint or within headers
shall not exceed 5 psi (0.034 MPa) for mortared collar
joints, 10 psi (0.069 MPa) for grouted collar joints, and
' for headers. These allowable stresses are based
on tests on composite wallettes (Ref. 9.3.4). If the shear
stress at the wythe-collar joint interface becomes too
large, delamination or header splitting can occur. Loads
cannot then be transferred between the wythes and the
wall would act as a multiwythe noncomposite wall.
The above-cited average values of maximum
allowable shear stresses in the collar joints of multiwythe
composite masonry walls relate strictly to shear stresses
due to out-of-plane loads. The Code does not address the
situation of collar joint shear stresses due to the applied
in-plane vertical and horizontal loads acting only on one
of the wythes in a composite masonry wall. Research at
Clemson University (Ref. 9.3.5, 9.3.6, 9.3.7) has shown
that the shear stresses in the collar joint for such in-plane
loading situations are much larger than 10 psi (0.069
MPa). Nevertheless, due to the absence, at the time of
this writing, of Code provisions for a detailed analysis of
collar joint shear stresses due to in-plane loads, 'this load
case is not considered in the MDG. The load transfer in
a multiwythe composite masonry wall can be explained
schematically with the help of MDG Fig. 9.3-2.
The composite wall in MDG Example DPC-9
consists of a nominal 8 in. (200 mm) hollow concrete
block wythe, a 2 in. (50 ram) grouted collar joint and a
nominal 4 in. (100 ram) clay brick wythe. The example
illustrates the development of shear stress in the collar
joint due to out-of-plane wind loads acting on the wall.
The various symbols used in this example have the same
meaning as those presented in MDG Section 9.3.4.
BrickWythe
GroutedCollarJoint
Distribution of Loads

9.3.6 Local Lateral and Axial Load
Distribution in Single-Wythe
Loadbearing Wall Systems
To design a masonry wall system and its constituent
elements, one must determine the distribution of the axial
and lateral loads throughout the wall. For axial and out-
of-plane loads, critical wall sections are usually around
openings. See MDG Example TMS-8 for an
investigation of the lateral and axial load distribution in a
single-wythe loadbearing wall.
9.3.7 Local Distribution of Lateral
Load Within Perforated S h e a r
Walls
See MDG Examples TMS-13 and TMS-6 for load
distribution in this type of a wall.

REFERENCES
9.2.1 Schneider, g., and W. Dickey, Reinforced 9.3.6 Rahman, M. A., "Analytical Investigations of
Masonry Design, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, the Behavior and Failure of Composite
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1987. Masonry Walls," a Dissertation submitted to
the Graduate School of Clemson University in
9.2.2 Amrhein, J., Reinforced Masonry Engineering
partial fulfillment of the requirements for the
Handbook, Third Edition, The Masonry
degree of Doctor of Philosophy, August 1989.
Institute of America, Los Angeles, CA, 1987.
9.3.7 Yalamanchili, K. K., "Finite Element
9.3.1 Page, A. W., and N. G. Shrive, "Concentrated
Computations on Super Computers and Their
Loads on Hollow Masonry - Load Dispersion
Applications to Failure Analysis of Composite
Through Bond Beams," The Masonry Society
Masonry Wails," a Dissertation submitted to
Journal, July-December 1987, pp. T45-T51.
the Graduate School of Clemson University in
9.3.2 Page, A. W., and N. G. Shrive, "Concentrated partial fulfillment of the requirements for the
Loads on Hollow Concrete Masonry," AC1 degree of Doctor of Philosophy, August 1990.
Structural Journal, July-August 1990, pp. 436-
444.
Select Bibliography
9.3.3 Page, A. W., and A. W. Hendry, "Design Rules
for Concentrated Loads on Masonry," The "Section Properties of Concrete Masonry Walls"
Structural Engineer, Vol. 66, No. 17, NCMA-TEK 14-1, National Concrete Masonry
September 1988, pp. 273-281. Association, Herndon, VA, 1993.
9.3.4 McCarthy, J.A., Brown, R.H. and Cousins, "Allowable Stress Design of Concrete Masonry
T.E., "An Experimental Study of the Shear Lintels," NCMA-TEK 17-1A, National Concrete
Strength of collar Joints in Grouted and Slushed Masonry Association, Herndon, VA, 1997.
Composite Masonry Walls," Proceedings, 3rd
North American Masonry Conference,
University of Texas at Arlington, Arlington,
Texas, June 1985, pp 39-1 through 39-16.
9.3.5 Anand, S. C., Young, D. T., and Stevens, D. J.,
"A Model to Predict Shearing Stresses Between
Wythes in Composite Masonry Walls Due to
Differential Movement," Proceedings, 2nd
North American Masonry Conference (2
NAMC), University of Maryland, College Park,
MD, August 1982, pp. 7.1 - 7.16.

9-9
 10

MOVEMENTS

10.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
This chapter presents the basic principles o f material
volume change and movement control. Construction
materials change in volume due to internal or external
influences such as temperature change, moisture loss or
gain, loading, carbonation and creep. Restraint o f these
volume changes causes stresses within the elements,
which can result in cracking, spaUing, and buckling of
masonry.
To minimize the potential for damage, design must
accommodate differential movement between construc-
tion materials and systems. This can be accomplished by
incorporating a system of movement joints. Use o f
reinforcement will affect crack size and provide restraint.
This chapter contains the basic principles o f movement
control and material volume change characteristics.

10.1 M O V E M E N T S A S S O C I A T E D W I T H C O N S T R U C T I O N M A T E R I A L S
Volume changes cannot be predicted with certainty. design, which can result in over- or under-estimation of
They depend on material properties, exposure to the actual movement potential between materials. Therefore,
elements, loading, material age, and installation individual material movements must be carefully
conditions. They can be permanent or reversible in considered and addressed in design. The types of
nature, and additive or subtractive in effect. Mean values movement experienced by various building materials are
of volume-change coefficients are typically used in shown inMDG Table 10.1.1 (Ref. 10.1.1).

TABLE 10.1.1 Types of Movement of Building Materials

Building Material Thermal Reversible Moisture Irreversible Moisture Elastic Deformation Creep

Brick Masonry X X X X

Concrete Masonry X X -- X X

Concrete X X -- X X

Steel X . . . . X

Wood X X -- X X

Ref. 10.1.1

10-1

10.2 T H E R M A L MOVEMENTS
Construction materials expand and contract with
changes in temperature. If unrestrained, these movements
are reversible. MDG Table 10.2.1, gives typical
coefficients of thermal expansion for different
construction materials (Ref. 10.2.1 and Code Section
1.8.3).
Unrestrained thermal movement is calculated as the
product of temperature change, the coefficient of thermal
expansion, and the length of the component under
consideration. The stress developed by total restraint of
thermal movement is equal to the product of the
temperature change, the coefficient of thermal expansion
Chapter 10
and the modulus of elasticity of the material. In most real
applications, partial restraint is provided by other
structural elements, such as edge restraint along founda-
tions, abutting walls, columns, or roof'mg systems. The
temperature change used to estimate thermal movements
should be based on the mean temperature of the element.
For solid masonry construction, temperatures at the center
of the element should be used. In veneer or cavity wall
construction, air spaces and possibly insulation separate
the wythes of masonry and the calculated mean
temperature at each wythe should be used.

TABLE 10.2.1 Coefficients of Thermal Expansion

MATERIAL Average Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion,

x 1 0 -6 in/in/°F (x 10.4 mm/mm/°C)
Clay Masonry
Clay or shale brick 3.6 (6.5)
Fire clay brick or tile 2.5 (4.5)
Clay or shale tile 3.3 (5.9)
Concrete Masonry
Dense aggregate 5.2 (9.4)
Lightweight aggregate 4.1 (7.7)
Stone
Granite 4.7 (8.5)
Limestone 4.4 (7.9)
Marble 7.3 (13.1)
Concrete
Gravel aggregate 6.0 (10.8)
Lightweight, structural 4.5 (8.1)
Metal
Aluminum 12.8 (23)
Bronze 10.1 (18.2)
Stainless steel 9.9 (17.8)
Structural steel 6.5 (11.7)
Wood, parallel to fiber
Fir 2.1 (3.8)
Oak 2.7 (4.9)
Pine 3.0 (5.4)
Wood, perpendicular to fiber
Fir 32.0 (57.6)
Oak 30.0 (54.0)
Pine 19.0 (34.2)
Plaster
Gypsum aggregate 7.6 (13.7)
Perlite aggregate 5.2 (9.4)
Vermiculite aggregate 5.9 (10.6)

10-2
Movements
The surface temperature of masonry elements may
be much higher than the ambient air temperature.
Orientation, construction type, and surface color greatly
affect surface temperature. It is not unusual for a dark-
colored, south-facing masonry wall to reach surface
temperatures of 140°F (60°C) in some geographic
locations. The mean temperature of the exterior wythe of
an insulated veneer wall surface is very close to the
exterior surface temperature of the wail. Interior wythes
of insulated cavity walls have mean temperatures lower
than the exterior surface temperature.
Other construction materials (such as steel,
aluminum, wood, and concrete) each expand and contract
at rates different from that of the adjacent masonry.
These differences can be large and must be considered to
reduce cracking of the masonry and to prevent possible
damage to non-masonry components attached to
masonry, such as copings and window systems.
10.3 M O I S T U R E - R E L A T E D M O V E M E N T S
Most building materials, with the exception of
metals and glass, expand in the presence of moisture and
contract as moisture is lost. In some materials, these
moisture-related volume changes are reversible; for
others the changes are irreversible or only partially
reversible.
10.3.1 Moisture Expansion of Clay Masonry
Clay masonry units expand slowly over time on
exposure to water, as a liquid or a vapor. Moisture
expansion of clay masonry is not reversible by drying at
normal atmospheric temperatures. A brick unit is
smallest after cooling from kiln firing, and will increase
in size due to moisture gain from that time forward. This
moisture expansion occurs mostly over the first few
weeks or months after production, but continues at a
much lower rate for a number of years, as shown in MDG
Fig. 10.3-1 (Ref. 10.2.1). The moisture expansion of
clay brick masonry depends primarily on the raw
materials used in manufacturing and secondarily on the
kiln firing temperatures. Given the same raw materials,
the higher the firing temperature, the lower the
subsequent masonry expansion.
Moisture expansion of brick units has been estimated
between 2 x 10"4 in./in. (mm/mm) and 9 x 10"4 in./in.
(mm/mm) (Ref. 10.2.1). For design, Code Section 1.8.4
specifies a moisture expansion coefficient of:
10-3
10.2.1 Clay Masonry
The thermal expansion coefficient for design of clay
masonry is given in Code Section 1.8.3.1 as:
k~= 4 x 10"6 in./in./°F (7.2 x 10.6 ml~inm/°C)
This design thermal expansion coefficient is slightly
higher than the mean value shown in MDG Table 10.1.2.
10.2.2 Concrete Masonry
The thermal expansion coefficient for design of
concrete masonry is given in Code Section 1.8.3.2 as:
kt = 4.5 x 10"6 in./in./°F (8.1 x 10.6 mm/mm/°C)
The actual thermal expansion coeffmient for
concrete masonry is dependent on the aggregate type
used in the manufacture of the units and may range from
2.5 x 10"6 in./in./°F (4.5 x 10"6mm/mm/°C) to 5.5 x 10"6
in./in./°F (9.9 x 106mm/mm/°C) (Ref. 10.2.2).
ICe = 3 X 104 in./in. (mm/mrn).
10.3.2 Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry
Concrete masonry units shrink primarily due to
moisture loss. The total shrinkage of concrete masonry
units depends on the water cement ratio, method of
curing, the aggregate type and gradation, the curing
condition, the cement content, cement type, service
exposure, and carbonation. Total drying shrinkage is
determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C 426
(Ref. 10.3.1). The maximum linear drying shrinkage
allowed by ASTM C 90 is 6.5 x 10"4 in./in. (mm/mm)
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 426.
Historically, ASTM C 90 (Ref. 10.3.2) has
distinguished between moisture controlled (Type I) and
non-moisture controlled (Type II) concrete masonry
units. Associated with the use of Type I moisture
controlled units was a maximum allowable moisture
content based on the linear drying shrinkage measured in
accordance with ASTM C 426 and the average annual
relative humidity at the geographic location of
construction. The original intention of distinguishing
between moisture controlled and non-moisture controlled
units was to limit the moisture content of concrete
masonry units, thus reducing the potential for drying
shrinkage.

For design purposes, these requirements, along with
the anticipated differences in performance between
moisture controlled and non-moisture controlled units,
were mirrored within Code Section 1.8.5. However,
subsequent to the publishing of the Code, these type
designations were removed from ASTM C 90, thereby
eliminating the unit type classification.
Chapter 10
While limiting the moisture exposure for concrete
masonry units prior to installation remains good practice,
specification provisions no longer exist to this end.
Instead, industry recommendations have been developed
(Ref. 10.2.2) to design for the potential shrinkage
associated with the drying of concrete masonry.

100
9o
O
09 80
z
<
~ ro f

"' ~ 6o
LU O)

I-" O.
CO
~ SO
40 J
-J 2o

0F- to
! I I I I I I I I
°o 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
TIME, years

Fig. 10.3-1 Projected Moisture Expansion of Fired Brick vs. Time

10.3.3 Drying Shrinkage of Concrete
Concrete shrinks as a result o f moisture loss.
Shrinkage depends on the water-cement ratio, cement
content, cement type, aggregate properties, curing
conditions, service exposure, and carbonation. Basic
shrinkage characteristics of concrete are based on testing
of small unreinforced cylinders or prisms under
controlled laboratory conditions. Concrete typically
shrinks less in actual exposure conditions than in
laboratory shrinkage tests. For typical design of mid-to-
low rise structures, shrinkage coefficients can be
estimated at between 4 x 10-4 in./in. (mm/mm) and 8 x
10.4 in./in. (mm/mm) for unreinforced concrete and
between 2 x 10"4 in./in. (mm/mm) and 4 x 10.4 in./in.
(mm/mm) for typical reinforced concrete sections (Ref.
10.3.3).

10.4 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS

Structural movements are the result of applied loads
(dead loads, live loads, wind loads, seismic loads, impact
loads, hydrostatic loads, and soil loads), internal
deformations (thermal, shrinkage, and expansion), and
support settlement. The resulting movements of
components subjected to loads are dependent on
component properties such as cross-sectional area,
moment of inertia, modulus of elasticity, and support
conditions. These movements must be considered in the
design of structures.
10.4.1 Structural Frame Movements
Loadbearing masonry systems are typically
limited in use to low- to mid-rise structures. Structural
framing systems in mid- to high-rise structures typically
consist of either concrete or structural steel. Typical

10-4
Movements
structural movements associated with each system are
discussed in the following sections.
10.4.1.1 Concrete Deformations-
Concrete deformations consist of instantaneous elastic
deformation and long-term deformation. Long-term
deformation of concrete is commonly referred to as
creep, although it usually involves some shrinkage as
well. Instantaneous deflections of concrete elements are
estimated using the provisions of concrete design codes
such as ACI-318 (Ref. 10.4.1) and consider concrete
compressive strength, modulus of elasticity,
reinforcement, and section cracking. Creep deflection of
concrete elements is due to dimensional change of the
concrete over time due to sustained stress. Creep
deflections depend on the concrete mix components,
level of sustained loading, age when load is applied, and
incremental loading patterns. The ultimate specific creep
of plain unreinforced concrete can range from 2 x 10 -7
in./in. (mm/mm) to 2 x 10 "6 in./in./psi, with a normally
accepted value of 1 x 10"6 in./in./psi (Ref. 10.3.3). For
design purposes concrete creep and shrinkage
movements are usually considered together.
10.4.1.2 Structural Steel Deformations
Structural steel framing systems are subject to elastic
deformations due to sustained loads and therefore
deflection calculations are relatively simple and depend
on the member loading, cross-sectional properties, and
modulus of elasticity.
10.4.1.3 Lateral M o v e m e n t of Structural
Frame - -The drift of a building frame is the lateral
deflection at the top of the structure relative to its base.
The need to limit drift is based on its potential adverse
effects, including frame instability; damage to facade
components, interior partition walls, and mechanical and
electrical components; and occupant discomfort. The
Code does not address drift limits for steel or concrete
building frames due to wind or seismic loading. Many
other codes, however, address this topic. Typical drift
limits in use range from h'/100 for low-rise metal frame
buildings (Ref. 10.4.2) to values of h'/600 for high-rise
concrete structures (Ref. 10.4.3). To control damage,
structures using masonry infill walls or veneers must be
detailed to accommodate these drifts.
Drift limits for masonry structures under wind
loading are not addressed by the Code. Loadbearing
masonry structures typically use shear walls to resist
lateral loads, resulting in a very stiff structural system
with limited drift due to wind loading. Code Section
1.13.2.2 limits the calculated story drift of masonry
structures due to the combination of seismic forces and
gravity loads to 0.007 times the story height.
10-5
Masonry buildings are often constructed using
exterior masonry walls and steel roof and column
framing. Lateral movement from thermal expansion is an
important aspect of design for the roof and wall systems.
Large flat roofs can undergo thermal displacements that
far exceed an attached masonry walls' capacity. Roof
expansion joints and connections between exterior walls
and roof systems and between walls and columns are
important design considerations.
10.4.2 Creep
Creep of materials is a time-dependent volume
change under load. The Code specifies that for clay
masonry the coefficient of creep is 0.7 x 10-7 psi (0.1 x
10"4 MPa) and for concrete masonry, 2.5 x 10-7 psi (0.36
x 10"4MPa).
It is obvious from the relative magnitude of the
coefficients that concrete masonry has considerably more
creep-related volume change than clay masonry. Creep
of masonry is normally significant only in highly stressed
concrete and concrete masonry elements such as
prestressed elements.
The 1999 Code contains a new Chapter 4 on
Prestressed Masonry. That new chapter requires
assessment of the effects of creep and other volume
changes on effective prestress forces.
10.4.3 Deformations of Horizontal
Members
The deflection of horizontal load-carrying members,
such as slabs and beams, must be limited or controlled so
that unanticipated loads are not imposed on masonry
components. Such loading might cause spalling,
cracking, or buckling of masonry.
1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 B e a m s a n d L i n t e l s - - Code
Section 1.10.1 addresses the design requirements for
beams and lintels providing vertical support to masonry
elements designed under Section 2.2 and Chapter 5 of the
Code (unreinforced and empirically designed masonry).
Code Chapters 5 and 6 also require that floor structures
and lintels supporting anchored veneer be designed to
meet the deflection requirements of Code Section 1.10.1.
This section requires that the deflection of elements
supporting masonry be limited to a maximum of l/600 or
0.3 inches (7.6 ram), whichever is less, based on total
dead plus live loads. For masonry designed under the
provisions of Code Section 2.3 - Reinforced Masonry,
the deflection limits on supporting elements are waived.
It is assumed that the crack widths in reinforced masonry
will be controlled by the reinforcement, reducing the
necessity of explicit limits on deflections.
The deflection limit of Code Section 1.10.1 (which
is intended to minimize the cracking of masonry due to

deflection of supporting elements) is much more
restrictive than typical deflection limits of steel and
concrete codes which range from l/180 to l/480 (Ref.
10.4.1, 10.4.4) for structural members.
The ~leflection of beams and slabs must also be
considered when nonloadbearing masonry infill or
partition walls are constructed below these members.
The lack of a clearly defined soft joint between the
masonry and the structural element above may result in
direct load transfer to the masonry due to the deflection
of the structural element. Repetitive floor plans can
result in successive build-up of load in masonry elements
over the height of the structure. Expansion joints
between nonloadbearing masonry elements and the
overlying structural elements should be sized to
accommodate the element deflection based on full design
dead and live load.
10.4.3,2 Shelf Angles Supporting
Masonry V e n e e r - Masonry veneers are usually
supported vertically at floor lines by continuous
structural steel shelf angles connected to the structural
frame. Shelf angles may be installed at each floor or
alternated between a number of floors, depending on the
design and local building code requirements. The use of
shelf angles requires that the movements of the structural
frame, the masonry veneer, and deflections of the shelf
angle all be accommodated below the shelf angle. The
magnitudes of frame and masonry movements have
previously been discussed. The deflections of shelf
10.5 A C C O M M O D A T I O N OF M O V E M E N T S
10.5.1 Design of Movement Joints joints are oriented vertically and must be designed so that
Four types of movement joints are used for crack
control in buildings:
1. masonry control joints, which open to accommodate
shrinkage of concrete masonry;
2. masonry expansion joints, which close to
accommodate expansion of clay brick or stone
masonry,
3. construction joints, which seal the gaps between
masonry and other elements, such as beams,
columns, windows, and doors; and
4. building expansion joints, which isolate roofing and
building framing systems.
A control joint is used in concrete masonry
construction to create a vertical separation, which
controls the location of cracks due to shrinkage of the
concrete masonry. Control joints are typically used in
conjunction with joint reinforcement, or bond beams, or
both, to control cracking of concrete masonry. Control
10-6
C h a p t e r 10
angles are typically considered as three components: the
vertical deflection of the angle between its points of
support on the building frame, vertical deflection due to
torsional rotation of the angle, and bending deflection of
the angle leg. These deflections are due to the dead load
of the masonry veneer, which acts eccentrically with
respect to the shear center of the angle. While not
specifically addressed by the Code, it is typical practice
to design shelf angles to meet the deflection limits
specified in Code Section 1.10.1 for rigid-body rotation
between anchor points and for the deflection at the toe of
the horizontal angle leg (Ref. 10.4.5).
Rotation of shelf angles can also be increased by the
lack of proper bearing between the angle and the
supporting structure at anchor points. Torch-cut holes in
shelf angles can cause excessive downward slippage of
shelf angles under the weight of the masonry, reducing
the effective width of expansion joints. Therefore, field
enlarging of anchor holes in shelf angles should not be
permitted.
10.4.3.3 Foundation Settlement--The
cracking of masonry walls can often be attributed to
foundation movement and differential settlements.
Unsuitable soils, improperly compacted fill soils, and
expansive soils are the most frequent causes of
foundation settlement or movements. Proper foundation
design and fill installation are essential to ensure a stable
foundation or allow uniform tolerable settlements.
the structural function of the concrete masonry is not
adversely affected.
An expansion joint is typically used in clay masonry
to separate clay masonry construction into panels to
prevent cracking due to restrained thermal movements,
moisture expansion, freeze-thaw expansion, thermal
expansion, and frame movements. Expansion joints are
required both vertically and horizontally, depending on
the construction. As with control joints, expansion joints
must be designed so that the structural function of the
masonry is not adversely affected.
A construction joint is used primarily to separate
different components of the building structure such as
masonry and columns, or masonry and window systems.
These joints may or may not be visible in the completed
construction. Depending on the location of the joint and
the materials used in the construction, they may also
function as either control joints or expansion joints.
Movements
10.5.1.1 Sealants U s e d in M o v e m e n t 1 0 . 5 . 1 . 2 C o n t r o l J o i n t s - - Control joints as
J o i n t s - - Joint sealants typically have movement shown in MDG Fig. 10.5-1 are typically used in concrete
capacities ranging from 5% to 100% in compression and masonry construction to prevent the formation of tensile
elongation. Sealants are available in various colors to shrinkage cracks in undesirable locations. Control joints
match the appearance of masonry, mortar joints, or are typically only required in exposed concrete masonry
adjacent components. The type of sealant joint material walls where cracking would affect appearance. Control
depends on the type of joint in which it is used. It is joints in concrete masonry should be placed at the
therefore important to use joint sealants with good following locations (Ref. 10.5.2):
compression properties in expansion joints and 1. At all abrupt changes in wall height.
elongation properties in control joints. MDG Table 2. At all changes in wall thickness, such as at pipe and
10.5.1 presents the movement capacities of common duct chases and adjacent to columns or pilasters.
sealant joint materials. The difference in the 3. Centered over joints in foundations and floors.
compressibility of the different sealants listed in the table 4. Centered below joints in roofs and floors that bear
leads to significant differences in the required thickness on concrete masonry walls.
of the movement joint in which the sealants are to be 5. At a distance not over one-half the required joint
used (Ref. 10.5.1). spacing from bonded wall intersections, comers, or
changes in wall direction.
T A B L E 10.5.1 C o m m o n Sealant Material 6. At the end of lintels and sills on one side of wall
M o v e m e n t Capacities openings six feet (1.8 m) or less in width and at both
sides of lintels and sills where wall openings are
Sealant Type Movement Capacities, % more than six feet (1.8 m) wide, unless bond beams
or equivalent joint reinforcement is placed at the top
Acrylic ±7
and bottom of the opening.
Butyl ±5
Foundation walls typically do not include control
Latex ±7 joints because of the need to ensure water tightness,
possibly under hydrostatic pressure.
Polysulfide ± 25
Empirical crack control criteria and engineered
Polyurethane :~ 25 crack control criteria are available to address control
Low Modulus ± 50 joint spacing (Ref. 10.5.2). The empirical criteria are
based on historical guidelines that have proven successful
Silicone -~ 50 over many years. The engineered criteria are based on a
Low Modulus +100, -50 crack control coefficient which results in more effective
crack control, but requires more detailed knowledge of
+ is extension,- is compression
masonry material properties.

Special Control Joint CMU

Building
/ ~- Paper Gasket

Backer
•--__.Rod and
Sealant
Rod and
Sealant
~ _ G r o u t or
Mortar

Fig. 10.5-1 Control Joints for Concrete Masonry

10-7

The most common, and usually the most cost-
effective, method for controlling cracking in concrete
masonry is to use horizontal reinforcement in conjunction
with control joints. The basis for this method is to limit
crack width to 0.02 in so that water repellent coatings can
be used to effectively resist water penetration..
10.5.1.3 Expansion J o i n t s - Vertical
expansion joints are not required in concrete masonry
walls because drying shrinkage usually exceeds thermal
expansion. Horizontal expansion joints are required,
however, to accommodate building frame movements in
veneer construction of concrete masonry units supported
on shelf angles.
Clay brick masonry walls expand both horizontally
and vertically due to thermal movements and moisture
expansion. Therefore a system of both vertical and
horizontal expansion joints must be considered in clay
masonry designs.
10.5.1.3.1 Vertical Expansion Joints. The spacing
requirements for vertical expansion joints in clay
masonry must be analyzed for each particular structure to
accommodate the anticipated range of movements and to
blend with the geometry of the wall. As a general rule,
vertical expansion joints should be placed in brick
masonry at the following locations:
1. At approximately 25-ft (7.5 m) intervals in exterior
walls not interrupted by openings.
2. At approximately 12 ft (3.5 m) intervals in parapet
walls.
3. At offsets, junctions, and comers (such as pipe and
duct chases and adjacent to columns or pilasters).
4. At window jambs, punched window openings, and
jambs of column covers or piers in veneers.
5. Above joints in foundations and floors.
6. Below joints in roofs and floors that bear on the
wall.
7. At a distance not over one-half the recommended
joint spacing from bonded intersections or comers.
The unrestrained expansion of clay masonry can be
estimated by the following general formula:
m, =[k, +k,(AT)]L Eq. 10.5-1
where:
m,, = total unrestrained movement, in. (ram)
k~ = coefficient of moisture expansion, in./in.
(mm/mm)
10-8
Chapter 10
kt = coefficient of thermal expansion, in./in./°F
(mm/rnrn/°C)
AT = temperature change in masonry, °F (°C)
L = length of segment, in. (mm)
The design coefficients for moisture expansion and
thermal expansion are provided in the Code. As
previously stated, the design temperature change will
vary depending on the location of the structure and may
be on the order of 100°F (38°C). This equation provides
an estimate of the total amount of unrestrained movement
occurring in the masonry. Other movements may also be
incorporated into the value calculated by MDG Eq. 10.5-
I including frame movements, deflections, and
construction tolerances.
MDG Eq. 10.5-2 relates the spacing between
expansion joints to the total unrestrained movement of
the brick masonry and the width of the expansion joint.
wjej
Se = [ke +k,(AT)]×12 Eq. 10.5-2
where:
se = spacing between expansion joints, it (m)
wj = width of the expansion joint, in. (mm)
ej. = compressibility or elongation capacity of the
sealant material, whichever is less, in. (mm)
Expansion joints in masonry construction are
typically sized to match the mortar joint width in the
construction, usually 3/8 in. (10 mm) to 1/2 in. (13 mm).
The maximum size of an expansion joint may also be
controlled by the sealant material installation
requirements.
The spacing and location of vertical expansion
joints calculated from MDG Eq. 10.5-2 may require
reduction based on other factors that affect masonry
construction. For example, spandrel sections of masonry
supported by a beam or floor system may have a
tendency to crack due to the deflection of these supports.
In this case more closely spaced expansion joints may be
required to allow the deflection to occur without causing
cracking in the masonry. Additional expansion joints
should be installed between wall sections that have
different environmental exposures such as heated and
unheated spaces. In walls constructed of a wythe of clay
brick masonry and a wythe of concrete masonry, an
expansion joint is required in the clay brick wythe and a
control joint is required in the concrete masonry wythe.
In cavity wall construction, it is not necessary that the
Movements
two joints be aligned; in composite wall construction,
however, the two joints should be aligned.
10.5.1.3.2 Horizontal Expansion Joints. Horizon-
tal expansion joints may be required when clay or
concrete masonry is used in nonloadbearing elements.
The typical case occurs when masonry is used as veneer
on a building facade or as nonloadbearing partitions in a
building interior. Under these conditions, horizontal
expansion joints are installed below shelf angles in
veneer construction and at the perimeter of partition
wails. In low-rise masonry construction (typically three
stories or less ) and in buildings with shear walls, it is not
necessary to provide shelf angles for the vertical support
of masonry veneers. The anticipated movements should,
however, be accounted for in the design of the veneer tie
system. In high-rise frame construction, shelf angles may
be located at every floor level or at alternating floor
levels, depending on the frame and shelf angle design.
MDG Fig. 10.5-2 shows a typical horizontal expansion
joint detail in a clay brick masonry veneer.
Stiff
Flashing
Sealant
Backer Rod
Fig. 10.5-2 Horizontal Expansion Joint
10-9
The width of the horizontal expansion joint should
be capable of accommodating movements of the veneer
wythe and the structural frame, and deflection of the
angle. To maintain an expansion joint width of 3/8 in.
(10 mm) to 1/2 in. (13 mm), horizontal expansion joints
should be installed at every floor level in high-rise
construction.
In addition, horizontal expansion joints should be
placed at the top of masonry walls infilled in a structural
frame, between the spandrel beam soffit and the wall
(MDG Fig. 10.5-3).
10.5.1.4 Construction Joints --
Differential movement between masonry and adjacent
materials is accommodated by construction joints.
Where masonry is anchored to structural frames, flexible
anchorage should be provided to accommodate wall
expansion, beam deflection, column sidesway, and
colunm contraction.
 Chapter 10

~ /j ~ ~
l-'- Concrete
Spandrel
Seam

Anchor
Clip Angle

ngla

nt Joint
Masonry Wall

Fig. 10.5-3 Expansion Joint Between Interior Partition and Beam Soffit

10,5.1.4.1 Walk'Column Joints. Masonry walls
infilled in structural frames may be designed as shear
walls to provide lateral support for the structure,
eliminating the need for moment-resistant frame
connections or frame bracing. To avoid loading masonry
infill not designed for shear, construction joints provide
clearance between the wall and frame as illustrated in
MDG Fig. 10.5-4.
10.5.1.4.2 Wall/Roof Joints. Roofs and walls
expand and contract, frequently in opposite directions.
To avoid masonry cracks, break the bond between roofs
and walls. If roof anchorage is essential, provide flexible
anchorage. The detail shown in MDG Fig. 10.5-5
provides such flexible anchorage.

Movement Joint

Steel Column

Interior --J L #2 Boa~uWmnelded

Fig. 10.5-4 Flexible Wall Anchorage to Steel Columns

10-10
Movements
SealantJoint ~ /~
Fig. 10.5-5 Wall/Roof Anchor
REFERENCES
10.2.1 "Movement Volume Changes and Effect of
Movement Part 1," Technical Notes 18
Revised, Brick Industry Association, Reston,
Virginia, January 1991.
10.2.2 "Control Joints for Concrete Masonry," NCMA-
TEK 10-2A, National Concrete Masonry
Association, Hemdon, Virginia, 1998.
10.3.1 ASTM C 426-99, "Standard Test Method for
Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masgnry
Units," American Society for Testing and
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, Volume
04.05.
10.3.2 ASTM C 90-99, "Standard Specification for
Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units,"
American Society for Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA, Volume 04.05.
10.3.3 Handbook of Concrete Engineering, Van
Nostrand Reinhold Company, Inc., New York,
New York, 2rid Edition, 1985, Chapter 6.
10.4.1 "Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete (ACI 318-95)," American Concrete
Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1995.
10-11
RoofMembrane ~__
10.4.2 "Low Rise Building Systems Manual," Metal
Building Manufacturer's Association,
Cleveland, Ohio, 1986 Edition.
10.4.3 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures," ASCE 7-95, American
Society of Civil Engineers, New York, New
York.
10.4.4 "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress
Design," 9th Edition, American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, Illinois, July
1989.
10.4.5 "Structural Steel Lintels," Technical Notes on
Brick Construction, 31B Revised, Brick
Institute of America, Reston, Virginia, May
1987.
10.5.1 Standard Guide to use of Joint Sealants, ASTM
C1193-91 (1995), American Society for Testing
and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1999.
10.5.2 "Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls,"
NCMA-TEK 10-2A, National Concrete
Masonry Association. Hemdon, Virginia, 1998.
 Chapter 10
Select Bibliography
Grimm, Clayford T.: Design for Masonry Volume Grimm, Clayford T. and Joseph A. Yura: "Shelf Angles
Change, The Masonry Society, Boulder, CO, 1999. for Masonry Veneer," Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE, Reston, VA, Vol. 115, No. 3,
Grimm, Clayford T.: "Masonry Cracks: A Review of the
March, 1989, pp 509-525.
Literature," Symposium on Masonry: Materials,
Design, Construction, and Maintenance, ASTM 992,
ASTM, West Conshohocken, PA, 1988 pp 257-280.

10-12

11.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
11.0,1 Organization of Chapter 11
The subject of Chapter 11 is flexure. The chapter
is divided into sections based on the type of structural
element to be designed and whether the element is
unreinforced or reinforced. Walls are treated first
(Section 11.1), followed by pilasters (Section 11.2),
and beams and lintels (Section 11.3). This introduction
describes the general basis for the analysis and
develops the flexural working stress design equations.
11.0.2 Flexural Masonry Design
Unreinforced masonry design assumes that the
masonry carries any flexural tensile stresses that
develop. Reinforced masonry design is based on
neglecting tensile strength of masonry and relying
solely on reinforcement to resist tension. Assumptions
common to both are as follows:
1. Plane sections before bending remain plane after
bending.
ln-t'lane
Fig. 11.0-I Wall Loading
11-1
11
FLEXURE
2. Masonry components (units, mortar, grout, and
reinforcement) combine to form a homogeneous
member.
3. Stress is proportional to strain.
4. Moments are in equilibrium with internal stresses.
11.0.3 Direction of Flexure
It is useful to classify flexure as either in-plane
flexure (shear walls or lintels) or out-of-plane flexure
(flexure normal to the plane of the wall). Wall in-plane
flexure is a result of lateral forces on the lateral load
resisting system (shear walls) or eccentrically applied
live or dead loads. This flexure is often considered in
the form of an overturning moment. Wall out-of-plane
flexure is a result of forces applied perpendicular to the
surface of the wall, such as wind loading or seismic
inertial loading. See MDG Fig. 11.0-1 for loading
directions.
Out-of-Plane

For wall in-plane flexure, the width used in design
is the thickness of the wall, and the depth is
approximately the length of the wall. The design width
for lintels (beams) is the thickness of the wall and the
depth is the depth of the lintel. For wall out-of-plane
flexure, the design width is the length of the wall and
the design depth is all or part of the wall thickness.
11.0.4 E f f e c t s of B o n d i n g P a t t e r n
For unreinforced masonry design (design relying
on tension in the masonry), the allowable tensile
stresses according to Code Section 2.2.3.2 vary with
the direction of the tensile stress loading. Allowable
tensile stresses are higher when tension is parallel to the
bed joints in running bond masonry as compared to
tension normal to the bed joints. This increase is due to
the interlocking of the masonry units, which provides
flexural strength comparable to that of the units, rather
than the lower tensile bond strength of the mortar-unit
interface. For stack bonded masonry, the Code
allowable tension across the head joints is zero because
of the highly variable quality of head joints.
Except for these differences, the code does not
consider unit orientation and pattern in the
determination of allowable stresses.
Fig. 11.0-2 Flexure-Tensile Reinforcement Only - - Strain Distribution
11-2
Chapter 11
11.0.5 Flexure: Working Stress
Design
MDG Fig. 11.0-2 presents commonly-used
symbols for flexural analysis of singly reinforced
masonry. Masonry width is designated by the letter b.
The depth to the centroid of the reinforcing steel is
designated by the letter d. Location of the neutral axis
~om the compression face is designated as kd, where k
is the ratio of the distance from the extreme
compression fiber to the neutral axis location divided
by the depth d. For flexural analysis of unreinforced
masonry, the total depth of the masonry section is used
to resist external forces.
The first assumption from MDG Section 11.0.2,
results in the following equation:
kd
~,, = - - Eq. 11.0-1
R
where am is the maximum compressive strain in the
masonry at a distance kd from the neutral axis and R is
the radius of curvature of the flexural element. For
linear elastic behavior, the relationship between the
curvature and the applied moment can be expressed by
the following:
I M
Eq. 11.0-2
R EmI
As
Flexure

where E~ is the modulus of elasticity of the masonry depth of the section, d, is now defined as the distance
and I is the moment of inertia of the cross section. from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
Substitution ofMDG Eq. 11.0-2 into MDG Eq. 11.0-1 the tensile reinforcement. Using Assumption 1 in
results in the following:
MDG Section 11.0.2 and the similar triangles in MDG
Fig. 11.0-2, the maximum strain in the masonry and the
e,, = ~ Eq. 11.0-3 strain in the reinforcement are related as follows:
EmI
e_._~_~= k
Using the assumption that stress is proportional to Eq. 11.0-6
~ (l-k)
strain, o r :
where e,, is the maximum masonry compressive strain
fb = E,,e,, ;f~ = E,e, Eq. 11.0-4 and e, is the steel tensile strain. When the applied
the maximum compressive stress in the masonry may external loading is only flexural, the compression force
be determined as: in the masonry equals the tension force in the
reinforcement. Summing forces on the section
illustrated in MDG Fig. 11.0-2 results in the following
Mkd
A-max - - Eq. 11.0-5 equation:
I
A -~ = As f~ Eq. 1 1.0-7
11.0.5.1 Unreinforced Masonry -- For where f~ is the stress in the reinforcement and As is the
unreinforced masonry, MDG Eq. 11.0-5 can be written reinforcing steel area and b is the width of the
as f = (M(d-kd))/I is used to determine the allowable rectangular section under consideration. Substitution
moment as limited by the allowable tensile stress in the ofMDG Eq. 11.0-4 into MDG Eq. 11.0-7 results in:
masonry. For this condition, the stress f is the e,,, = 2 A s E s
Eq. 11.0-8
allowable masonry tensile stress and d - kd is the e~ kE,, b d
distance from the neutral axis to the location of the Defining the reinforcement ratio, p, and the modular
maximum tensile stress in the cross section. Usually ratio, n as follows:
the allowable tensile stress controls. When axial load A~. E~
acts simultaneously with flexure, however, the p = ~--~; n = Eq. 11.0-9
E,
allowable compressive stress may control, as discussed
and substituting into MDG Eq. 11.0-8, results in the
in MDG Section 12.2.
following:
11.0,5.2 Reinforced Masonry - - The
~m 2np
basic assumptions of the working stress method for Eq. 11.0-10
e~ k
flexural design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry
are presented in MDG Section 11.0.2. Additional and using MDG Eq. 11.0-6 results in:
k _ 2np
assumptions pertaining only to reinforced masonry Eq. 11.0-11
(1 - k ) k
include:
1. Modulus of elasticity of the reinforcement remains which can be rearranged to:
constant throughout the working load range. k z +2npk-2np = 0 Eq. 11.0-12
2. Tensile stresses are resisted only by tensile Solving the quadratic equation results in the following
reinforcement. The tensile strength of the masonry expression for k:
units, mortar, and grout is neglected in flexural
analysis and design. k = 4(np) 2 +2np-np Eq. 11.0-13
3. Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and Summing moments about the centroid of the tensile
bonded to masonry material, and full composite force results in an expression for the allowable applied
action between the two materials is assumed. moment as limited by the allowable flexural
For reinforced masonry design, tension is resisted compressive stress, Fb, in the masonry.
by the reinforcement. The tensile strength of masonry bd 2 .
is neglected. Thus, the masonry is assumed cracked M,,, = - - - ~ - ( k j ) F b Eq. 11.0-14
from the extreme tension fiber of the masonry to the
neutral axis. The neutral axis is located a distance kd
from the extreme compression fiber. The effective

11-3
 Chapter 11
Summing moments about the centroid of the Substitution of the stress-strain equations of MDG Eq.
compression force results in an expression for the 11.0-4 results in:
allowable applied moment as limited by the allowable
emE~, -~-~-+ A" E~s~, - A" EmS'~ = AsEs8 ~
tensile stress in the reinforcement, Fs.
Eq. 11.0-17
M, = AjaF, Eq. 11.0-15
The centroid of the compression reinforcement is
MDG Eqs. 11.0-9, 11.0-13, 11.0-14, and 11.0-15 located a distance d' from the extreme compression
provide the basis for flexural design of rectangular fiber as shown in MDG Fig. 11.0-3.
sections with tension reinforcement only. Additional
By similar triangles:
equations for pilasters where the section may not be
rectangular are developed in MDG Section 11.2. (k-d'/d)
s's - e, Eq. 11.0-18
Flexural elements may contain both compression (l-k)
steel and tension steel (doubly reinforced)- see MDG Where 8', = 8" is the strain at the centroid of the
Fig. 11.0-3. For the compression steel to be considered compressive reinforcement. Substituting MDG Eq. 11.0-
for load-carrying purposes, the compression steel must 18 into MDG Eq. 11.0-17 results in the following:
meet all the applicable requirements of Code Sections
2.3.2.2 and 2.1.4.6. The appropriate equations for kbd A'~(k - dTd). .
8mEre--if- : As&8, (~-k) tE,-Em)8~
doubly reinforced flexural elements are developed as
for singly reinforced flexural elements. Summing Eq. 11.0-19
forces along the length of the beam as shown in MDG
Fig. 11.0-3, results in: Substitution of MDG Eq. 11.0-9 and defining the
compression steel ratio as p' = A'/bd results in:
A--~+A'f'-A'f;=A,f~ Eq. 11.0-16
s__~_~= 2no 2np' (k - d'/d) 29' (k - d'/d)
where A'~. and f " are the area of compression es k k (1 - k) k (1 - k)
reinforcement and the stress in the compression
Eq. 11.0-20
reinforcement respectively, and f 'b is the stress in the
masonry at the location of the compression
reinforcement. Notice that the compression
reinforcement has replaced masonry and a
corresponding force has been subtracted.

~ J
M

"*S

r
AS "S

Fig. 11.0-3 Flexure m Compression and Tension R e i n f o r c e m e n t - - S t r a i n Distribution

11-4
Flexure
This equation can be rearranged to the quadratic form:
k 2 + [2n9+ 2(n - 1)9'k]- [2n9+ 2(, - 1)9'a'/d ]= 0 and (d')
Eq. 11.0-21
from which the following expression for k is obtained:
k= 4[n9+ (, - 1)O']z+ [2-9 + 2(n-1)o'd'/d]
-[.p+(.-1)o'] Eq.ll.0-22
As with the case of tension reinforcement only, once
the location of the neutral axis is known, expressions for
moment as a function of allowable stress can be
determined. By summing moments about the centroid of
the tension force, an expression for moment as a function
of the allowable compressive stress in masonry can be
found. Similarly, by summing moments about the
centroid of the compression force, an expression for
moment as a function of allowable tension stress in
reinforcement can be found. Unfortunately, the centroid
of the compression force is not as obvious in a doubly
reinforced element as in the singly reinforced element
considered previously.
Selecting the extreme compression fiber as a
reference location, expressions for the force in the
masonry and the force in the compression reinforcement
can be obtained.
The compression force in the masonry and the
corresponding moment arm about the extreme
compression fiber are:
The compression force in the reinforcement
(subtracting the area of masonry displaced by the
reinforcement) and the corresponding moment ann about
the extreme compression fiber are:
(A'E,e'-A'E,,e') and (d')
11.1 WALLS
11.1.1 General DescripUon
Most masonry elements are walls. A wall is defined
in Code Section 1.6 as a "vertical element with a
horizontal length-to-thickness ratio greater than 3, used
to enclose space." Elements with a horizontal length less
than or equal to three times their thickness are usually
columns. They are columns if in addition to satisfying
the length-to-thickness requirements, the height is also at
least three times the thickness.
11-5
or
The centroid of the compression forces, if, from the
extreme compression fiber is then obtained by dividing
the first moment by the sum of the forces:
kbd kd
E,,,em 2 3 + A;(E.-E,.)(1-d'/kd)e,.a'
-f=
kbd + A"
Em ~,m- -
2
Eq. 11.0-23
Substituting MDG Eq. 11.0-9 into Eq. 11.0-23 results in:
kd(1//66+P'(k"x)(1-d'/kd)d'/kd)
(~-~ P ' ( 7 1 ) ( 1 - d'/kd))
Eq. 11.0-24
An expression for the moments can now be obtained.
Summing the moments about the centroid of the tensile
force results in:
Mm = l ~ + A:(n-lXl-d'/kd)](d-Y)Fb
Eq. 11.0-25
Summing the moments about the centroid of the
compression force results in:
M, = A~(d - ; ~ . E,q. 11.0-26
MDG Eqs. 11.0-22, 11.0-24, 11.0-25, and I 1.0-26
provide the basis for flexural design of rectangular
masonry elements with both tension and compression
reinforcement. The equations are not applicable to
sections subjected to flexure and axial load acting
simultaneously (see MDG Chapter 12).
The distinction between the definition of walls and
columns is important because of restrictions placed on
columns in the Code. For example, columns are limited
to a minimum thickness of 8 in. (200 mm) by Code
Section 2.1.4.1, an effective height to thickness ratio of
25 by Code Section 2.1.4.2, and must be reinforced to
comply with Code Sections 2.1.4.4, 2.1.4.6, and 1.13.6.5.
Wails are not limited to a minimum thickness or a
maximum height-to-thickness ratio. Walls have

reinforcement requirements that are generally less
restrictive than those for columns.
1. Code Section 1.11 requires walls of stack-bonded
masonry to be reinforced with a minimum horizontal
reinforcement of 0.00028 times the vertical cross
section of the wall, spaced not further than 48 in.
(1200 mm) on center.
2. Code Sections 1.13.3 through 1.13.7 contain special
provisions for masonry walls built in Seismic
Performance Categories A through E.
A literal reading of the Code reveals that some elements
do not fit the definition of either a wall or a column.
Elements with a horizontal length-to-thickness ratio less
than or equal to three and with a height less than 3 times
the thickness are not covered by the Code definition of
wall or column. Such elements are typically designed as
walls.
11.1.2 Flexural Design of
Unreinforced Masonry Walls
Code Section 2.2 contains provisions for
unreinforced masonry wall design. Reinforcement may
be present in the wall but its effect is ignored for design
purposes.
Code Eq. 2-10 is the unity equation for flexure with
axial load. In the absence of axial load the equation
reduces to:
f__L___1 Eq. 11.1-1
Fb
For out-of-plane bending of solid unit masonry or hollow
fully grouted unit masonry, the computed bending stress
equation becomes:
Mc M 6M
= -- = Eq. 11.1-2
fb= 1 S bt 2
In this equation, t is the specified thickness of the wall
and b is the width of the wall taken as the same width
used to calculate the moment M.
For in-plane bending of solid unit masonry or fully
grouted hollow unit masonry, assuming Iv is the length of
the wall, the equation becomes:
6M Eq. 11.1-3
A = tl~
The allowable compressive bending stress Fb is
given in Code Eq. 2-14. According to Code Section
2.1.1.1.3, a one-third increase for short-duration loading
11-6
C h a p t e r 11
(wind or seismic) applies to both compressive and tensile
allowable stresses.
Allowable tensile flexural stresses, Fbt, due to out-
of-plane bending, are given in Code Table 2.2.3.2. The
values depend on the type of mortar, type of
construction, and the direction of the tension stress. In
running bond construction, values for tension parallel to
the bed joint are higher than values for tension
perpendicular to the bed joint because of the interlocking
of the masonry units. Axial tension (as distinguished
from flexural tension) is not allowed in unreinforced
masonry (Code Section 2.2.4).
Walls are often supported on more than two sides.
Under load they often exhibit plate behavior (two-way
bending) rather than beam behavior (one-way bending).
The actual load distribution and resulting stresses can be
very complex. Such determination would require values
for stiffness of masonry both parallel and perpendicular
to the bed joint. The Code assumes a single value of
elastic modulus according to Code Section 1.8.2.2.1.
Nevertheless, the designer should be aware that masonry
exhibits orthotropic behavior and the stiffness of an
unreinforced wall in the running bond direction (typically
horizontal) is greater than in the other direction.
Code Section 1.9.4 contains specific requirements
for including the effects of and for designing intersecting
walls. Code Section 1.7.5.1 requires that intersecting
walls be included in the stiffness determination for lateral
load distribution unless shear transfer is prevented. The
Code limits the effective flange width to 6 times the
thickness of the wall [Code Section 1.9.4.2.3]. Reference
11.1.1 discusses masonry lateral-load-resisting systems
and the structural model for distributing the forces.
The hand calculation of lateral load distribution for
the unreinforced masonry wall construction in the RCJ
Hotel, MDG Section 17.3.3, neglects intersecting wall
stiffness, due to the presence of control joints at the
intersection. The computer calculation of the lateral load
distribution using the ETABS program (Ref. 11.1.2) for
the hotel example (with the reinforced masonry wall
construction option) includes the effects of wall
intersections since the program considers all walls in its
three-dimensional analysis.
11.1.3 Flexural Design of Reinforced
Masonry Walls
Code Section 2.3 contains provisions for reinforced
masonry wall design.
MDG Eq. 11.0-14 gives the maximum moment that
may be placed on the wall, as determined by setting the
Flexure
masonry stress equal to its allowable value. MDG Eq.
11.0-15 gives the maximum moment that may be placed
on the wall, as determined by setting the steel stress equal
to its allowable value. The flexural capacity of the wall
is the smaller of these two values. If the wall is doubly
reinforced, MDG Eqs. 11.0-25 and 11.0-26 should be
used in place of MDG Eqs. 11.0-14 and 11.0-15,
respectively. The allowable tensile stresses in the
reinforcement are given in Code Section 2.3.2.1. Grade
60 steel is the most commonly used reinforcement,
having an allowable tensile stress of 24,000 psi (170
MPa). The allowable flexural compressive stress in
masonry is defined by Code Section 2.3.2.2 as one-third
of the specified compressive strength of masonry.
For short duration loading (wind or seismic), a one-
third increase in allowable stresses is permitted for both
the reinforcement and the masonry, according to Code
Section 2.1.1.1.3.
For out-of-plane bending, the effective width to use
in the flexural equations is limited by Code Section
2.3.3.3.1 to the center-to-center spacing of the bars, six
times the wall thickness, or 72 in. (1830 mm), whichever
is least.
The following iterative procedure is normally used
by the structural engineer to design reinforced masonry
for flexure:
1. Determine the applied moment.
2. Estimate d and the required area of reinforcement
based on an assumedj or k (k = 0.3 o r j = 0.9 is a
good starting point).
3. Select a bar size and spacing based on the steel area
determined in 2.
4. Calculate k (neutral axis location) andj.
5. Iterate if necessary.
6. Usingj and k, calculate M,, and Mr.
7. Compare Mm and Mt to the applied moment (Step 1).
If they are greater than the applied moment, the
procedure is completed. However significant over
capacities result in uneconomical designs. If less,
revise the masonry thickness or reinforcement
amount and return to Step 4.
11.1.3.1 Initial Depth and Steel
E s t i m a t e - - The req.~ed depth of the masonry and
the amount of reinforcement for singly reinforced
11-7
rectangular sections can be estimated using the two
flexure equations and assuming k equal to 0.3.
Rearranging MDG Eq. 11.0-14 gives
deS"= 1.9 12F~4
b Eq. 11.1-4
Rearranging MDG Eq. 11.0-15 gives
AS est. _
M Eq. 11.1-5
0.9dF~
1 1 . 1 . 3 . 2 B a l a n c e d D e s i g n - - I n t h e context
of allowable stress design, a balanced design is one in
which the tensile reinforcement reaches its allowable
tensile stress at the same time that the masonry reaches
its allowable compressive stress. Some designers use the
balanced condition as a starting point since design
parameters such as k, j, and p can be determined based
on the known allowable stresses. This results in easily
generated design aids. Refer to MDG Section 11.3.3 for
development of the balanced conditions for a beam.
Other designers simply use balanced parameters, such as
Pb, as a check to indicate whether in their design the
allowable moment is limited by tension or compression.
While many textbooks present the concept of
balanced design, this concept is of limited practical use.
The problem with balanced design is that it is not usually
the minimum-cost design, because the cost per unit of
masonry strength is not the same as the cost per unit of
steel strength. Moreover, the factor of safety for masonry
in flexuml compression is 3.0 while the factor of safety
for reinforcement varies between 2.0 and 2.5. Thus, the
concept of balanced design is dependent upon the
somewhat arbitrary safety factors in the building codes.
Other methods use reference tables to assist in
selecting the reinforcement; computer programs are also
available for the design of wall elements. When using
computer programs, the designer is cautioned to check
upon which code provisions the software is based. In
recent years, masonry codes have been changing rapidly
and programs can quickly become outdated.

11.2 PILASTERS
11.2.1 General Description
Pilasters consist of a column section built integrally
into a wall. Because of the modular nature of both clay
and concrete masonry units, pilasters can be built within
the coursing pattern of a wall. Units in alternate courses
of a pilaster may be arranged so that they interlock in
directions both.normal and parallel to the plane of a wall.
Unlike an isolated column member (described in
Code Section 2.1.4), pilasters are not required to be
reinforced according to provisions of Code Section 2.1.5.
They may even be ungrouted. For hollow unit
construction, however, pilasters should typically be
grouted if a beam or truss is supported in bearing at the
pilaster's top. Furthermore, grouting of at least the
column section of a pilaster will enhance its flexural
strength, not only because of the increased section
modulus, but more significantly because of the increased
values of allowable tensile stress normal to bed joints that
are permitted for a fully grouted section, according to
Code Section 2.2.3.2. Pilasters typically support wall
panels and act as flexural members spanning vertically
while carrying little vertical load. Thus they are
commonly grouted and reinforced regardless of unit
construction.
Reinforced and grouted pilasters generally should
have symmetrically placed vertical reinforcing bars.
Vertical reinforcement greatly increases the flexuml
strength of a pilaster. Flexure is generally a controlling
factor for pilasters, consequently reinforced pilasters are
often much smaller than unreinforced pilasters.
~ Gravity Load
Out-o~
PlaneAxis ~ ( ~ ~
Momental0out l r ~--.-,--v--7 I I "-r"q
In-Plane Axis --
Fig. 11.2-1 Forces on Pilaster--Wall System
Chapter 11
11.2.2 Role of Pilaster in Resisting
Loads
A pilaster serves the two basic functions depicted in
MDG Fig. 11.2-1. The 5rst is to provide lateral support
for walls subjected to wind or seismic forces normal to
their plane (out-of-plane). The second is to support
gravity loads transferred from beams or trusses
supporting roofs, floors, or overhead cranes.
Vertical reactions from beams or trusses are usually
transferred to a pilaster through steel bearing plates at the
top of the pilaster. The reaction often does not coincide
with the centroid of the pilaster. Since pilaster spacing is
usually greater than the beam spacing, beams or truss
members are often supported on the top of masonry walls
between pilasters. When all beams or truss members are
detailed for identical spans, the reaction will be closer to
the centroid of the wall, rather than the centroid of the
pilaster sections. The eccentricity of the vertical force
results in bending moment at the top of the pilaster.
Wails are commonly designed to span horizontally
between pilasters. This is commonly assumed when the
spacing of pilasters is less than one half the unsupported
vertical span of an out-of-plane wall. The pilaster spans
vertically and sometimes transfers half of its lateral force
to the roof or floor diaphragm above or below. For
unreinforced walls, span length is not the only criterion,
since allowable stresses differ for vertical and horizontal
spans. A system of pilasters and walls resisting lateral
load acts like a system of beams and slabs resisting
uniform floor loads.
Diaphragm
Reaction From
Wall Moment
I I I I ~ .~/ AbgutGravity
q ( " k I~._ I I
-~-i.~.....~Midheight of
1 Pilaster
Gravity
Reaction
11-8
Flexure
The design of pilasters in low-rise buildings will
rarely be governed by gravity forces, unless the centroid
or resultant of the vertical force is outside the pilaster's
kern. The kern is that portion of the cross-sectional area
within which the resultant vertical load must act to
produce only compression throughout the cross section.
For loads outside the kern, the resulting tensile stress may
govern, since the vertical compressive stresses are
usually low in low-rise buildings (in the range of 20 to
50 psi [140 to 350 kPa]). Furthermore, pilasters may be
located in walls that run parallel to roof trusses or floor
beams, and thus do not resist any gravity forces other
than their own weight. In these cases, pilasters may be
thought of as simple flexural members with small
amounts of axial compressive force which may be
conservatively neglected.
This MDG section presents pilaster design for the
special case of flexure without axial force. Design is
governed by flexure resulting from lateral forces applied
normal to a wall containing a pilaster. Both unreinforced
and reinforced pilasters are discussed. In MDG Section
12.3, pilaster design is discussed with respect to
combined axial force and flexure.
11.2.3 Coursing Layout
In hollow-unit masonry, pilasters may be built within
the thickness of a wall by grouting and reinforcing those
cells assigned to a pilaster. The more common situation,
however, is when a deeper and stronger pilaster is
needed. The pilaster may be centered in or through the
wall, fully offset from the wall, or somewhere in
between. The position of the pilaster relative to the wall
is often dictated by nonstmctural considerations.
Two-Unit Pilaster
Alternate Courses
Fig. 11.2-2 Coursing Layout for Hollow Unit Pilasters
11-9
Sometimes a pilaster may be placed so that its
centroid will coincide with a truss or beam reaction.
Unfortunately, this is not common and flexural strength
must be provided to account for the eccentricity of the
vertical reaction. MDG Section 12.3 describes design of
pilasters subjected to axial load and flexure.
To qualify as an integral system, at least 50% of the
masonry units must interlock at the interface between the
pilaster and the wall (Code Section 1.9.4.2.5(a). Walls
may also be effective as pilaster flanges if steel
connectors or intersecting bond beams are used in place
of masonry unit interlock (Code Sections 1.9.4.2.5(b)
and 1.9.4.2.5(c). The latter two methods, however, are
impractical and unnecessary for pilasters.
In hollow unit masonry, pilasters are commonly
made of units laid in a coursing pattern that matches the
running bond pattern of a wall. This provides good
keying action with the pilaster. For this reason, pilasters
like those shown in MDG Fig. 11.2-2 are the most
common. Similar layouts also lend themselves to 24 in.
(600 mm) and 32 in. (800 mm) sections. For larger
pilasters, it may not be necessary for units to be placed in
the interior. The cavity that is formed by the face units
can be filled with grout and reinforced, if necessary. The
effective section of the pilaster varies with the mortar bed
configuration and extent of the grout-filled cores (see
MDG Section 11.2.4).
Unreinforced pilasters with solid units are created by
laying units in a full pattem or on the perimeter of
grouted and reinforced interior cavities. Since bed joints
are fully mortared, the effective section is the gross
section. Solid-unit pilasters can be reinforced by placing
vertical reinforcement in grouted cavities.
Three-Unit Pilaster
N mP ,,

11.2.4 Effective Section
The cross-section that may be assumed effective in
resisting axial and flexural stresses is often much
different than what the architect conceives or the mason
builds. Movement joints are typically located along
both sides of pilasters, thus limiting the effective
Chapter 11
section to the area of the pilaster. If the pilaster is not
isolated by joints and the requirements of Code Section
1.9.4.2.5 are met, then the effective width of the flange
on either side of the web equals 6 times the flange
thickness according to Code Section 1.9.4.2.3.

, iiii iiiiiiiiiiiiiii ii iii: iiiiii:!iiiii iiiiiiiiiiiii iiiii iii! iiiiii iiiii!i iiiii ii ii iiiiiiiiiii ii
t~
iiiiiiiiiii
Iii!iiiiiililii Co~ress~veZone
[__ 6t _ l b ~ _[_ 6t _l

(a) Pilaster And Wall Fully Grouted

K X . L . X X . , K X T - , - ~ r ~ . " • • • • ¸' H

N . A . - - ~

i • |

tp FaceShellBedding
!o o
0 CompressiveZone -~
[~ 6t bw 6t ~__[
v

(b) Pilaster Grouted, Wall Ungrouted

be#
" . . . . . . " " • • " " " ~ : . ' • I

. _

tp FaceShellBedding ~ ~ kdI
~J~ CompressiveZone J._._
I~ 6t _l~ b~ _l_ 6t _1

(c) Pilaster And Wall Ungrouted

Fig. 11.2-3 Effective Sections for Unreinforced Pilasters - - No Expansion/Control Joints

11-10
Flexure
If the section is unreinforced, then both the tensile
and compressive masonry areas are considered. If the
section is grouted, then the full gross area is considered.
If the section is ungrouted, only the mortar bedded area is
considered. Effective sections for three combinations of
unreinforced pilasters are shown in MDG Fig. 11.2-3.
If the section is reinforced, the tensile strength of
masonry is neglected, and only the transformed area of
the tension steel is considered. It then becomes
important to recognize the direction of the moment,
because the effective width of the compression flange
may vary substantially for different directions of bending.
The reinforcement in compression may be considered
effective (steel transformed to masonry by n) if lateral
ties are provided meeting Code Section 2.1.4.6.
Effective sections for three vastly different cases are
shown in MDG Fig. 11.2-4.

J~ beff _1
Yl

• • ~ AS

6t ~ l ~ b ~ ~1~ 6t _ I ---~
I--

(a) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Unreinforced, Flange In Tension

"eS," j_

(b) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Grouted, Flange In Compression

L b~# _1

!:~i:!:i~:i FaceShellBedding P..d

L 6t _l_bw _ _ 6t ~1
I ~ ~ 1 . . . . I

(c) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Ungrouted, Flange In Compression

Fig. 11.2-4 Effective Sections for Reinforced Pilasters

11-11

11.2.5 Flexural Design
As mentioned in the introduction to this section,
pilaster flexure is a result of transverse lateral loads, such
as wind or earthquake forces, and eccentricity of vertical
gravity loads applied to the top of a pilaster. Design
considerations depend on the relative participation of
each of these effects. The latter loading case, involving
flexure plus axial compression, is not discussed here (see
MDG Section 12.3). This section focuses on pilaster
designs governed only by flexural stresses resulting
solely from lateral forces. For these cases, the critical
states that typically must be examined are flexural
tension normal to bed joints for an unreinforced pilaster,
tensile stress in vertical reinforcement and compression
stress in masonry for a reinforced pilaster. In this section,
light amounts of axial compression will only be
considered if needed since axial compression tends to
reduce the effects of flexural tension.
If walls span horizontally with respect to lateral
forces, then the full tributary width of wind or seismic
forces must be applied to the pilaster. The tributary
width is simply half the distance to the adjacent pilaster
or other support dement on both sides of the pilaster in
question. Portions of the wall span vertically, if the
height of the wall is less than the spacing of pilasters or if
an end wall is omitted in an open-front building. For the
case where the pilaster is loaded only with a portion of
the lateral load, values of load distribution on walls and
pilasters have been calculated based on plate theory (Ref.
11.2.1,11.2.2).
Pilasters are usually assumed to span vertically
between story levels. For single-story buildings, this
means that half the lateral load is transferred to the
foundation, and the other half is transferred to the roof
diaphragm. It is common to assume a simple support at
the top of a pilaster even though it translates with a
flexible diaphragm. Since the bottom of a pilaster is also
considered to be a simple support, the vertical element
will be statically determinate, and any translation at the
top will be immaterial provided that the roof diaphragm
is designed for the shear. This is done for simplicity,
although some restraint against rotation may exist if the
pilaster does not rock and if the foundation is relatively
stiff.
Although the examples presented here consider
pilasters to have simple supports at both the top and
bottom, it should not be inferred that these boundary
conditions will be universal. For example, a pilaster can
act as a cantilever, fixed at the bottom and free at the top.
11-12
Chapter 11
Earthquakes produce inertial loads that must be
assumed to act laterally in any direction. Wind forces are
normally applied as direct pressures on the windward
side of a building, but should also be considered as
applying a suction of equal value to the leeward side,
unless a comprehensive wind analysis is done. Loading
standards such as ASCE-7 describe the wind analysis
procedure for both the Main Lateral Force Resisting
Systems (for shear wall analysis) and for Components
and Cladding (for out-of-plane lateral loads on walls).
Because unreinforced pilasters are asymmetrical sections,
flexural tensile stress should be checked for both
directions of lateral loading since the subtmctive load
combination may be more critical than the additive
combination depending on the section properties.
Vertical bars in reinforced pilasters must also be checked
for the critical loading direction.
11.2.5.1 Unreinforced Pilasters--
Fiexural capacity is limited by flexural tensile stress. For
design allowing tensile stress in masonry, the values of
allowable flexural tensile stress are summarized in Code
Table 2.2.3.2. Pilasters are vertical elements rather than
horizontal elements, and thus only the values for tension
normal to bed joints are usually applicable.
For ungrouted hollow-unit masonry, the allowable
flexural tensile stress depends upon the type of masonry
unit and the type of mortar. In addition to increasing the
section modulus, grouting can more than triple the
allowable flexural tensile stress, because tension across
bed joints does not need to be relied on exclusively.
For an unreinforced pilaster subjected to pure
flexure (no axial compression force), there is no need to
check compressive stress; the allowable flexural tensile
stress will control the design.
It is common practice to grout the column portion of
a pilaster and leave the wall portion (the flange of the
pilaster) ungrouted. For this situation, allowable tensile
stresses may be interpolated based on the relative
proportions of grouted and ungrouted masonry areas.
Bending moments resulting from lateral forces are largest
near the midheight. Thus, flexural tensile stress should
be checked at this location. It is permissible to subtract
the compressive stress resulting from the self-weight of
one half the pilaster height from the computed flexural
tensile stress. It is conservative in this case to estimate
the lower bound of the wall weight. If the pilaster
supports roof or floor loads, a minimum value of gravity
dead load may also be used to reduce the flexural tensile
stress. This may not, however, lead to thinner pilasters,
Flexure
because the gravity load may be accompanied by an
additional moment resulting from the load through its
eccentricity (see MDG Section 12.3).
11.2.5,2 Reinforced Pilasters--
Reinforced pilasters are much stronger in flexure than
unreinforced pilasters, particularly if axial compressive
forces are small. For this case, design is essentially the
same as for reinforced beams, once an effective section
has been defined. As noted in MDG Fig. 11.2-4, several
different effective sections can exist depending on the
direction of the bending moment and on whether the
flange is grouted or reinforced. Typically, movement
joints will be located adjacent to pilasters, thus defining
the cross section as rectangular.
Once determined, flexural stresses are compared
with Code allowable values. In Code Section 2.3.2.1,
values of allowable reinforcement stress are 20 ksi (140
MPa) for Grades 40 and 50 steel and 24 ksi (170 MPa)
for Grade 60 steel. In Code Section 2.3.3.2.2 the limiting
masonry compressive stress, Fb, is 0.33 times the
specified compressive strength. Allowable stress values
for both steel and masonry may be increased by one third
for the case of wind or earthquake loading, according to
Code Section 2.1.1.1.3.
11,2,6 Shear Design Considerations
Shear design of pilasters is no different than shear
design of masonry walls or beams. Shear stress for
unreinforced pilasters is determined using Code Eq. 2-
16. For simplicity, only the pilaster without wall flange
11.3 B E A M S A N D L I N T E L S
11.3.1 General Description
The use of reinforcing steel in masonry
construction permits the design of flexural members
such as beams, lintels, and deep wall beams. Lintels
are horizontal members used to span openings in
masonry walls. They may be reinforced masonry,
precast or cast-in-place concrete, or structural steel.
Reinforced masonry lintels may be constructed of
specially-formed lintel units, bond beam units, or
standard units with cut-out webs. Special lintel units
arranged to form a channel for placement of
reinforcement and grout are shown in MDG Fig. 11.3-
1. Typical reinforced brick masonry lintel sections and
a temporary shoring detail are shown in MDG Figs.
11-13
needs to be considered in resisting shear. For a solid
rectangular web, Code Eq. 2-16 reduces to:
3 V
fv = - - ~ Eq. 11.2-1
2 AW
Because pilasters are usually tall slender elements,
shear does not usually control and this simplification is
warranted. Allowable in-plane shear stresses are given in
Code Section 2.2.5.2 for unreinforced members. For
pilasters made with hollow units and face-shell mortar
bedding, the shear area should only be the net bedded
area; that is, the area of the bed joint surface of the
masonry unit on which mortar is placed.
Shear design of reinforced pilasters follows Code
Section 2.3.5. An approximation of the maximum shear
stress below the neutral axis can be computed by
dividing the shear force by the width, b, and the depth, d,
of the cross-section (Code Eq. 2-19). No distinction is
made between a rectangular section and a T-section. If
one interprets the derivation of the flexural shear stress
equation literally, the width b should be taken as the
width of the compression zone, whether of the web or of
the effective flange. For very large flange widths,
however, this would not be reasonable because of shear
lag effects. It is therefore recommended that the web
width be used in all cases. Again, shear typically does
not control the design and thus such a simplification is
warranted.
11.3-2 and 11.3-3, respectively. Steel lintels may
consist of one or more angles, or a C or T section. For
wider spans and heavier loads, a W shape section may
be used (MDG Fig. 11.3-4).
Analysis and design of lintels subjected to vertical
and lateral loads are discussed in this section. The Code
gives general provisions for masonry beams in Code
Section 2.3.3.4, and specific deflection criteria for beams
and lintels supporting unreinforced masonry in Code
Section 1.10.1. The deflection of steel or concrete beams
that support unreinforced masonry above openings is
limited to//600 or 0.3 in. (7.6 mm) under dead and live
load. Beams and lintels supporting reinforced masonry
are not required to meet these deflection limits.
 Chapter 11

Lintel Block
Lintel

"i't
o Cut

Fig. 11.3-1 Lintel Blocks in Place

¼ Width Brick

8" 10" " /

1
Fig. 11.3-2 Reinforced Masonry Lintels (Ref. 11.3.1)

11-14
Flexure
r..,.;~,, ~MtlI

½Wi
Sc

Sof

Short

Fig. 11.3-3 Shoring for Reinforced Masonry Lintel (Ref. 11.3.1)

Steel Angle

(a) Single angle (c) Triple angle

.J ,..

J
St
Weld

Suspension Rod Steel Soffit Plate

(b) Double angle (d) Rolled shape and suspended plate

Fig. 11.3-4 Steel Lintels (Ref. 11.3.1 )

11-15

11.3.2 Assumptions
The working stress method is used to design beams
and lintels in accordance with Code Sections 2.1 and 2.3.
It is very similar to that of the working stress design of
reinforced concrete. Structural dements are designed so
that stresses computed under the assumption of linear
elastic behavior from working or service loads do not
exceed specified allowable stresses. The working or
service loads represent the maximum expected loads
under service conditions and may include dead, live,
snow, wind, and earthquake loads. The allowable
stresses are given in the Code as a percentage of the
specified compressive strength of masonry, f 'm, and a
&action of yield strength based on the grade of the
reinforcement (see Code Sections 2.3.3.2.2, 2.3.2.1,
2.3.2.2 and 2.3.5). MDG Fig. 11.3-5 shows that the
stress-strain behavior of masonry in a standard
compression test is approximately linear up to about 50%
off'm. The stress-strain relationship of reinforcing steel
in tension or compression is linear up to yield. In the
working stress method, stresses under service loads
C h a p t e r 11
are assumed to be within the linear and elastic range, so
that a straight-line relationship is assumed between stress
and strain. The basic assumptions of the working stress
method are detailed in MDG Sections 11.0.2 and
11.0.5.2.
11.3.3 Basic Equations-Singly
Reinforced Sections
The basic equations for general reinforced masonry
design are presented in MDG Section 11.0.5.2. This
section examines those concepts specifically as they
relate to singly reinforced beams.
The transformed section for a reinforced beam with
tension steel only is shown in MDG Fig. 11.3-6. The
neutral axis coincides with the centroidal axis of the
cracked transformed section. The neutral axis is
generally located by setting the fn'st moment of area
about the neutral axis equal to zero.

I Region
""" .

.,..rrl ,'l'

sonry J (b) Steel

/
Strain % Strain

Fig. 11.3-5 Typical Stress-Strain Curves

Neutral
Axis

Beam Strain Stress Transformed

Cross-Section Diagram Diagram Section

Fig. 11.3-6 Singly-Reinforced Beam Section

11-16
Flexure

Substituting p =A,/bd, the steel ratio, f = F~ = allowable steel tensile stress (Code Section
2.3.2.1)
b(kd)2 n p b d ( d - kd)= 0
2 From similar triangles (see MDG Fig. 11.3-6),
k~ d Fb
Dividing by bd 2,
d Fb+Fs/n
k 2 9nO_k)=O where kb is the k value at balanced condition. Thus
2
Solving, F~
kb =
Fb + Y , / n
k=[2pn+(pn~-on Eq. 11.3-1
or

Equation 11.3-1 can be used to locate the neutral axis for

1
a given beam cross-section. kb =
l + F s ~hEb
For the triangular masonry stress block (MDG Fig. 11.3-
6), the resultant compressive force is or

n
c =b L/2 kb = Eq. 11.3-5
n+ F , / Y b
The tensile force is
To obtain the balanced steel ratio, 9b, equate C and T,
T=A,f s
9bbdF~ = Fbkbdb/2
The moment, M, can be expressed as
Substituting for kb and solving,
1 • 2 n
M = Cjd = -~fbkj bd = M . ,
Pb = ( 2 F , / F b X n + F , / F b ) Eq. 11.3-6
M = Tja = A, L j d = obaLjd = M,
ff P < Pb the beam is said to be under-reinforced and the
Solving for the masonry stress,
steel will reach its allowable value first. If 9 > Pb the
fb = 2M,, Eq. 11.3-2 beam is said to be over-reinforced and the masonry will
bd 2j k reach its allowable value first.
Solving for the steel stress,
11,3.4 Basic Equations -- Doubly
f~ = M, Eq. 11.3-3 Reinforced Sections
.4,ja The basic equations for general reinforced masonry
design are presented in MDG Section 11.0.5.2. This
The lever arm, jd, may be expressed as
section examines those concepts specifically as they
kd relate to doubly reinforced beams. Compression
jd=d---
3 reinforcement may be provided in a masonry beam to
increase the compressive resistance of the section, to
from which we obtain
minimize creep and reduce deflections, or both.
k The total resisting moment, M, for a doubly
j = 1- - - Eq. 11.3-4
3 reinforced section may be expressed as
Balanced Beam Design M =M b +M 2 Eq. 11.3-7
The balanced condition is a state where both the
where
steel and masonry reach their allowable limits
M b= moment capacity for the section at balanced
simultaneously as load is increased. Thus,
fb = Fb = allowable masonry compressive stress in
flexure (Code Section 2.3.3.2.2)

11-17
 C h a p t e r 11
condition without compression reinforce- and the compressive reinforcement may be estimated
ment. The tensile reinforcement needed to using
develop Mb is denoted A b.
A" = M2 Eq. 11.3-13
M2 = additional moment capacity developed by
A's and A2, where A~ = As - Ash.
The compressive steel stress can be derived from the Using k = kb in above equations would ignore the
stress diagram in MDG Fig. 11.3-7, moment of compression reinforcement about the NA in
determining the actual value ofk.
f" /n kd-d' The actual location of the neutral axis for the doubly
f,/n d-kd reinforced section is given by Eq. 11.3-14,
or
k = {[np+ ( n - 1 ) P ' 1 2 + 2[np+ (n - 1 ) p ' d ' / d ] ;
, k-d'/d
f~= f s ( l _ - - i - ~ ) Eq. 11.3-8 -In p+ (n -1)p'] Eq. 11.3-14
where
or in terms of masonry stress,
p'= A;/ha
f ," = nfb( .k-d'/d ] Eq. 11.3-9
The reader is encouraged to check the adequacy of a
double reinforced section designed using k as given by
M~
A~b = ~ Eq. 11.3-10 MDG Eq. 11.3-14. Calculate f " andf~ and determine M
Fsjbd (see MDG Example TMS-16 in MDG Section 17.1.4).
where
M b = Fbjbkbbd2/2 Eq. 11.3-11
In design, the additional tensile steel required to resist M2
may be estimated using

A~z= F~(M2d Eq. 11.3-12

d" -f • T.o I L~ ( n - l ) A's

.•. . | .
...,;...

Neutral
Axis

s •
," f'~/ n
s
s

s 4

.....::.,.,... s
s
s"

fJn b"'--.---- nAs

Stirrup
Beam Stress Transformed
Cross-Section Diagram Section

Fig. 11.3-7 Doubly-Reinforced Beam Section

11-18
Flexure

11.3.5 L o a d D i s t r i b u t i o n s on L i n t e l s and is sufficiently anchored. Arching action also

Lintel beams spanning openings in masonry walls
may be subjected to two types of vertical loading: (1)
distributed loads from the dead weight of the lintel and
the masonry above the lintel, and floor and roof dead and
live loads, where the floor and roof construction is
uniformly supported by the masonry; and (2)
concentrated loads from (for example) floor girders or
roof trusses framing into the wall. Because masonry can
arch across openings, lintel beams usually do not need to
be designed for the total tributary loading above the
lintel. That is, if a lintel fails or is removed, only a
triangular portion of the wall immediately above the
opening should collapse because the masonry will form
an arch over the opening.
For arching action to take place, however, there
must be sufficient masonry in running bond on each
side of the opening, or tension ties across the opening,
to resist the horizontal thrust resulting from arch action.
The lintel reinforcement cannot be assumed to act as a
tension tie unless it extends beyond the lintel bearing
requires that the height or depth of the masonry above
Point C (see MDG Fig. 11.3-8) must be sufficient to
resist arching thrust. Assuming arching action exists,
design loads for lintels may include:
• Dead weight of the masonry wall above the opening
within a triangular area ABC as shown in MDG Fig.
11.3-8.
• Uniform live and dead loads of floors and roofs that
bear on the wall above the opening and below the
apex of triangle ABC. Since the floor loads shown
in MDG Fig. 11.3-8 are above the apex, they can be
neglected in the design of the lintel.
• Concentrated loads from floor girders and roof
trusses, framing into a wall may be assumed to be
distributed at 45 degrees as shown in MDG Fig.
11.3-8 (see Code Section 2.1.7 and Code
Commentary Section 2.1.7). Only that portion of the
distributed concentrated load that acts within
triangle ABC is assumed to act upon the lintel.

;;< EffectiveLength
vi
I < Bearing width + 4t I
' < Spacing of concentrated load
I
I
; Concentrated I

Load
!

-~ i UniformFloorLoad

% ,
I % ;
; /
, ~,
D ~h.. 45°
F -- !

A B
; Lintel ',
; Lintel Span ,
(C. to C. bearing)

777

Fig. 11.3-8 Load Distributions on Lintel

11-19

In MDG Fig. 11.3-8, that portion of the concentrated
load shown shaded above segment EF may be considered
as a uniform load partially distributed over the lintel.
Code Section 2.1.7.1 requires that for walls laid in
running bond, the length of wall to be considered
effective for each concentrated load should exceed
neither the width of bearing plus four times the wall
thickness nor the center-to-center distance between
concentrated loads. The Code Commentary states that
when a bond pattern other than running bond is used,
concentrated loads can only be spread across the length
of one unit unless a bond beam or other technique is used
to distribute the load.
11.3.6 Beam Depth Determination
Beams that are parts of a wall are normally designed
to have the same width as the wall thickness. The
effective depth assumed for the beam design will depend
on the height of the wall above the opening. For walls
with heights up to 3 ft (0.9 m) above the beam soffit, the
full height could be considered as the effective depth
(Ref. 11.3.2). For wall heights greater than 3 ft (0.9 m)
above the beam soffit, the effective beam depth is
commonly taken equal to the beam depth that is required
for the masonry to resist all the shear. MDG Example
RCJ-16 in MDG Section 17.3.4 on wall beam design
illustrates these concepts.
11.3.7 Deflection
Realistic predictions of masonry beam and lintel
deflections require the use of reasonable estimates for
moment of inertia, modulus of elasticity, modulus of
rupture, creep factors and, in the case of concrete
masonry, shrinkage factors. Also, the procedure used to
calculate deflections has to be based on a comprehensive
understanding of the mechanics of short-term and
additional long-term deformation of masonry beams and
lintels.
The Code provides expressions for the material
properties of masonry, but does not provide guidelines
for deflection calculations. It is important to account for
the effect of tension stiffening. Tension stiffening is the
flexural resistance provided by undamaged tensile
masonry between flexural cracks and in regions of low
tensile stress, that is between the tips of tensile cracks
and the neutral axis.
Tension stiffening has been accounted for in
reinforced concrete design by using an empirical
equation to define the effective moment of inertia, Ie
11-20
C h a p t e r 11
(Ref. 11.3.3). The effective moment of inertia provides a
transition between the well-defined upper bound of lg
(moment of inertia of the gross section about the
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement), and the lower
bound of I~ (moment of inertia of the cracked
transformed section). I, is defined as a function of the
level of cracking, as represented by Mcr/Maas follows:
I,=(M~13Ig+ 1- Icr<Ig
t M<,J
Eq. 11.3-15
The cracking moment is defined as:
f rlg
Mcr = - - Eq. 11.3-16
Yt
Using these concepts, the designer would use le
along with standard elastic engineering deflection
equations to predict the initial (short-term) deflection of
reinforced concrete members. Comparison of such
calculated deflection with experimental test results on
masonry members show that this method under-predicts
masonry deflections (Ref. 11.3.4).
The UBC (Ref. 11.3.5) shows that the above method
provides fair estimates for short-term deflection of
masonry members although the method tends to
underestimate deflection in some cases (Ref. 11.3.4).
This method will be used for calculating the short-term
deflection of beams and lintels in this section. The
following formulas to predict mid-height deflections of
uniformly loaded, simply supported beams provide a fair
estimate for short-term deflection of masonry members
(Ref. 11.3.5).
A = 5Mm'12 for M ~ < Me, Eq. 11.3-17
48E,,Ig
m-~ 5Mcrl2 de 5(Mms-Mcr)12
48Em1~ 48Emlc,
for Mcr< Mms Eq. 11.3-18
where M,,~= midspan moment.
MDG Eq. 11.3-17 is based on flexural stiffness of
the uncracked section and should give good estimates for
uniformly loaded, simply supported flexural members up
to first cracking.
Flexure
MDG Eq. 11.3-18 is based on a bilinear load- Long-term deflection due to creep from sustained
deflection relation. It is assumed that the member loads and, in the case of concrete masonry, deflection
deflects as an uncracked section until the modulus of due to shrinkage, need to be considered to estimate total
rupture is reached, at which point the member cracks and long-term deflection of masonry beams and lintels. The
the cracked moment of inertia is used in calculating the Code does not give specific guidelines for calculating
additional deflection. MDG Eq. 11.3-18 also assumes a long-term deflection of masonry beams and lintels. One
simple span and uniform loading. These equations will technique (Ref. 11.3.3) used to estimate long-term
be used for calculating the short-term deflections of deflections of flexural members is to compute the
beams and lintels in the MDG example designs. additional long-term deflection resulting from creep and
Expressions for 1cr for singly and doubly reinforced shrinkage by multiplying the immediate deflection
rectangular sections are given in MDG Eqs. 11.3-19 and caused by the sustained load considered, by a factor
11.3-20.
For the singly reinforced section, = ~ Eq. 11.3-21
1 + 509'
3
I~ = bk3d :nA,(d-kd) 2 Eq. 11.3-19 where
3
p' = A'~/bd at midspan for simple and continuous
where spans, and at support for cantilevers
2a45~;-i - 1 = 2.0 for sustained loading of 5 years or longer
kd=
B duration, 1.4 for 12 months, 1.2 for 6 months,
and 1.0 for 3 months.
b
B=-- In the absence of other recommendations, and unless
values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis,
For the doubly reinforced section, the multiplier given above may be considered satisfactory
for predicting long-term deflection of concrete masonry
I~r = ~bk3d 3 nAs(d_ka)2 + (n-1)A'(kd-d') flexural members. Since MDG Eq. 11.3-21 combines
3 creep and shrinkage, it is not applicable to clay brick
Eq. 11.3-20 masonry. The creep coefficient given in Code Section
1.8.6 may be used to estimate long-term creep deflection
where
of clay-brick flexural members.

11.3.8 Deep Beams

A deep beam may be defined as one whose depth is
B
greater than or equal to the span. Deep masonry beams
(n-1)h" are not specifically addressed in the Code. Design
nA~ considerations and provisions for deep beams have,
however, been developed by various groups (Re£ 11.3.6,
11.3.7, 11.3.8, 11.3.9).

REFERENCES
11.1.1 "Concrete Masonry Shear Walls," NCMA Tek 11.2.2 "Engineered Concrete Masonry Warehouse
14-7, NCMA 1992. Walls," NCMA Tek 14-9, NCMA, 1977.
11.1.2 ETABS User's Manual, Computers and 11.3.1 Smith, R.C., T.L. Honkala, C.K. Andres,
Strucatres, Inc., Berkeley, CA, 1995. Masonry: Materials, Design, Construction,
Reston Publishing Company, A Prentice Hall
11.2.1 "Designing Concrete Masonry Walls for Wind
Company, Reston, Virginia, 1979.
Loads," NCMA Tek 14-3A, NCMA, 1995.

11-21

11.3.2 Schneider, R.R., W.L. Dickey, Reinforced
Masonry Design, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1987.
11.3.3 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete (ACI 318-95) arltl Commentary - ACI
318R-95, American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
1995.
11.3.4 Horton, R.T., M.K. Tadros, "Deflection of
Reinforced Masonry Members," ACI Structural
Journal, V.87, No. 4, July-August 1990.
11.3.5 Commentary to Chapter 21, Masonry of the
Uniform Building Code 1997 Edition, TMS
Codes and Standards Committee, The Masonry
Society, Boulder, Colorado, 2000.
11.3.6 Portland Cement Association, "Design of Deep
Girders," ISO79D, Skokie, Illinois, 10 pp.
11.3.7 Portland Cement Association, "Tilt-Up Load-
Bearing Walls, A Design Aid," EBO74D,
Skokie, Illinois, 1980, 28 pp.
11.3.8 International Conference of Building Officials
Research Committee, "Reinforced Brick Wall
Panels," Report No. 2727.
11.3.9 International Conference of Building Officials
Research Committee, "Concrete Masonry Wall
Panels," Report No. 2868.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Blodgett, Omer W., Design Of Welded Structures, The
James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation,
Cleveland, Ohio, 1976.
"Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry
Structures (ACI 531-79) and Commentary (ACI
531R-79)," American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, 1978.
Harold, A., G. Ziab, O. E1-Nawawy, "Modulus of
Elasticity of Concrete Block Masonry," Proceedings
of the Fourth North American Masonry Conference,
Los Angeles, August 1987.
Hendry, A.W., R.E. Bradshaw, D.J. Rutherford, "Tests
on Cavity Walls and the Effect of Concentrated
Loads and Joint Thickness on the Strength of
Brickwork," Clay Products Technical Bureau
(England), Vol. 1, No. 2, July 1968.
11-22
Chapter 11
"Manual of Steel Construction," American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, Illinois, 9th
edition, 1989.
"Recommended Practice For Engineered Brick
Masonry," Brick Institute of America, McLean,
Virginia, 1969.
"Standard for Calculation and Execution of
Manufactured and Natural Bricks," Technical
Standard 113, Swiss Engineers and Architects
Society, 1965.
"Structural Recommendations for Loadbearing Walls,"
British Standard Code of Practice CPIII: 1964, The
Council of Codes of Practice, British Standards
Institution, March 1964.
"Structural Steel Lintels," Brick Institute of America,
Technical Notes 31B revised, McLean, Virginia,
November/December 1981.
"Wall Masonry, Design and Execution," German
Standard DIN 1053, November 1962.
Amde (Wolde-Tinsae), A.M., M.L. Porter, M. Ahmed,
"Shear Strength of Composite Brick-to-Block
Panels," Proceedings of the Third North American
Masonry Conference, Arlington, Texas, June 1985.
Amde (Wolde-Tinsae), A.M., J. Colville, R.H. Najib,
"Modulus of Elasticity of Clay Brick Masonry,"
Ninth International Brick/Block Masonry
• Conference, Berlin, October 1991.
Design Tables for Concrete Masonry and Precast
Concrete Lintels, TR 91A, National Concrete
Masonry Association, Herndon, VA, 1996.
Drysdale, K.G., Harold, A.A., Baker, L.F., Masonry
Structures Behavior and Design, 2nd Edition, The
Masonry Society, Boulder, CO., 1999.

F L E X U RE A N D
AXIAL LOAD
12.0 INTRODUCTION
Most masonry elements support axial load, even if
the axial load is only the dead weight of the element
itself. When lateral loads such as wind or seismic are
added, the element is designed for both flexure and
axial load.
For elements that primarily resist lateral forces
(such as walls on a one-story building), the addition of
axial load usually improves an element's ability to resist
flexure. This is true in both unreinforced and
reinforced masonry where the allowable load is
controlled by tension. In these situations it is often
acceptable to neglect the axial load effect since this
assumption is conservative.
12.1 C O L U M N S
12.1.1 General
Code Section 1.6 defines a column as an isolated
vertical member whose horizontal dimension measured
at right angles to the thickness does not exceed 3 times
its thickness and whose height is at least 3 times its
thickness.
Most of the Code provisions are based on
engineering principles, not rules of thumb. Because o f
the structural importance of columns, restrictions have
been imposed. These are listed in Code Section 2.1.4
and are summarized as follows:
1. Least lateral dimension of 8 in. (203 mm)
(nominal);
12-1
12
For elements that primarily resist axial forces, such
as columns, the addition of lateral forces usually
reduces an element's ability to resist axial load. In
these cases, it is generally not acceptable to neglect the
effects of lateral force.
This chapter presents methods for design of
masonry columns, walls, and pilasters for combined
bending and axial loading. The methods presented are
a sampling of the many approaches available. Many
approaches exist because solutions to the combined
loading case are more easily solved with the use of
iterative or graphical methods.
2. Maximum effective height-to-thickness ratio of 25;
3. Minimum design eccentricity of 0.1 × each side
dimension about each axis independently,
4. Vertical reinforcement of at least 4 bars having an
area between 0.0025An and 0.04A,;
5. Lateral ties at least 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) in diameter,
which may be placed either in mortar or grout.
Other special requirements that relate to columns are as
follows:
1. Code Section 2.1.6.3 requires that devices used for
transferring lateral support from longitudinal
members to columns have a capacity of at least
1,000 pounds (4,448 N).

2. For applications in Seismic Performance Category
C, Code Section 1.13.5.3.2 requires that
connectors be provided to transfer forces between
masonry columns and horizontal elements,
according to Code Section 2.1.6. Anchor bolts
located in the tops of columns are required to be
set entirely within the reinforcing cage composed
of column bars and lateral ties. A minimum of two
#4 lateral ties must be provided in the top 5 in.
(127 mm) of the column.
3. In Seismic Performance Categories D and E, Code
Section 1.13.6.5 requires 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter
lateral ties embedded in grout at not more than 8
in. (203 ram) spacing.
Since columns must be reinforced, the applicable
design procedure is that of Code Section 2.3-
Reinforced Masonry, which uses linear stress-strain
assumptions and linear bending theory. Allowable
tensile and compressive stresses in steel are given in
Code Section 2.3.2, and allowable compressive forces
and stresses in masonry are provided in Code Section
2.3.3.2. Tensile stresses in masonry are neglected. In
addition to the requirement that the ratio of effective-
height to least-nominal-dimension not exceed 25 and
that the compressive stress due to combined flexure and
axial load not exceed 1/3f ", the overall axial force
according to Code Section 2.3.3.2.1, must not exceed
the following:
for h/r < 99 Code Eq. 2-17
or, for h/r > 99 Code Eq. 2-18
Pa = (0.25J'A, +0.65AstFs)(~--) 2
The contribution of longitudinal steel in Code Eqs.
2-17 and 2-18 is given by the term 0.65AstF,. This term
12-2
Chapter 12
was added to the equations in the 1995 Code because
neglecting the steel contribution was considered
unnecessarily conservative.
12.1.2 Development of
Interaction Diagram
The necessary equations for allowable stress
design of masonry columns are very difficult to apply
manually; hence, interaction diagrams are often used.
The axial load-bending moment interaction diagram is
developed using equations and assumptions very
similar to those used in analysis and design of
reinforced masonry flexural members. The only
difference lies in the fact that the compressive force is
not equal to the tensile force, due to the external axial
load on the structural element. This minor difference,
however, results in much greater complexity in solving
the equations directly. Interaction diagrams can be
produced that permit a rapid graphical solution.
To illustrate the development of an interaction
diagram, a rectangular column with two layers of steel
is examined. This choice is based on the code
requirement that a minimum of 4 bars must be placed in
any column; hence, at least two layers are most likely.
As illustrated in MDG Fig. 12.1-1, several states of
stress (stress gradients) can occur in a column cross-
section. These stress states are shown as Cases 1
through 5. Case 1 illustrates concentric compression.
Case 2 is the result of a load applied at the kern
eccentricity to produce zero stress at the bottom fiber.
In Case 3, there is compressive stress in the top fiber
and zero stress in the bottom bars; tensile stress in the
bottom fibers is neglected. Case 4 is the balanced
condition, with allowable compressive stress on the top
fiber, and allowable tensile stress in the bottom layer of
steel. Case 5 is the pure bending case, with no axial
load present. Finally, Case 6 (not shown on MDG Fig.
12.1-1) is a required Code limit for axial compressive
stress. Equations for each of these cases will be
derived.
Flexure and Axial Load

P
Compression Compression
[-
I- b ---I e Fb
~I ~ "~'~ '~"z~'''~i ':~;~~ "i~I /
T
t
~" ~ cg .::~(?~;:,:'::¢:;/" I /

' ~ Gradients

1 Tensior Tension]

(a) Compression (b) Tension

Controls Controls

Fig. 12.1-1 Column States of Stress

Case 1" (uniform compression, e = 0)

Neglecting grout displaced by steel and transforming compression steel to masonry using the modular ratio n:

d"
• A; • -., c; = .F~A; < F f

C~ = Fbbt

0 ~s • -~ Cs = nFbA~ < F,A,

In this case and subsequent cases, steel in compression is assumed to have adequate lateral reinforcement to satisfy
Code Section 2.1.4.6. If lateral reinforcement is inadequate, the compression steel stress is assumed to be zero.

Summing internal forces axially,

P = C m +C" + C s
Summing internal moments about the geometric centroid of the gross cross section,

12-3
 Chapter 12
C a s e 2: (zero strain at bottom fiber)

/4b--

/
d"
• A; • C; = nFbA < FsA:

C,. = + Fbbt

• As •

Summing forces axially,

P = C,. + C~ + Cs
Summing moments about the geometric centroid of the gross cross section,

C a s e 3: (zero strain in bottom steel)

F6
, d-d'
O A,"

c= = ½Fbba
d

• A= C s =0

Summing forces axially,

P =C~. +C"
Summing moments about the geometric centroid of the gross cross section,

Iv2 3) ~,2)

12-4
F l e x u r e and A x i a l Load

C a s e 4: (balanced conditions)

,( kba - a"~ ,
• A; @
~a
C= = 2Fbbkb d

/
/
/
/ T=A~F~

The neutral axis can be defined in terms of allowable stresses using similar triangles:
kbd _ Fb
d Fb+Fs

from which
1
kb " ~ ' ~
1.+ F~
nF~

Summing forces axially,

Pb = C,, +C" - T
Summing moments about the geometric centroid of the gross cross section,

M b
eb = - -

12-5
 Chapter 12
C a s e 5: (pure bending)

I
• A'~ • c; = ,,£4 <_F~A;
kd

cm -- ½ bkaA

p,. T = A~f s

Summing forces axially, P = 0, T = Cm + C'~

To locate the neutral axis,

AsL = bka + A'

From similar triangles,

L= ( ~ d d ] f b n; Thus n A s(k . ~ j f b = l fb bkd+ n f b ( ~ l A" Eq. 1

Define A, = pbd, A "~= p'bd, multiply by kd, and divide b y e :

k2 r d,~
.pba(a-kd)= lb(kd)2 + n(kd-d')p'bd; .e0-k)= 5-+.0'lk--y j

Check k against k0:

If k >--k b , use Fb in above equations; therefore compression controls.
ff k <_ k o , use F, in above equations; therefore tension controls.
Calculate the stress in the compression steel,

~(~-d"~
If f'~ > F,, the solution for k above is not valid. It will then be necessary to replace the term n Jb ~ , ~ ) inEq. 1

above with F~ and then solve for k.

Summing moments about the geometric centroid of the gross cross section,

~.2 3 ) k. 2 ) kZJ

12-6
F l e x u r e and A x i a l Load

C a s e 6: (axial load only)

Check P < Pa from Code Eq. 2-17 or 2-18.
To illustrate the use of these equations to develop an interaction diagram, a specific example will be worked out, as
follows:
A,~ 4 - #7 bars, symmetrically placed
=

g = (9.30)/(15.63)=0.6
A, = A "~= 1.20 in?
h = 15 f t - 4 in.
i 9.38" - Adequate lateral reinforcement is provided to satisfy
.

Code Section 2.1.4.6.

T
15.63"
T
9.38"
f'm = 1,500 psi
CMU strength = 1,900 psi
Type S mortar
Grouted solid, fg = 2,700 psi
• •
F, = 24,000 psi (tension and compression for Grade 60
reinforcement)
15.63"
Fb = 1 f'm = 500 psi

E m = 900f" = 1.35x10~psi Code Section 1.8.2.2.1

Eg = 500fg = 1.35 x 106 psi Code Section 1.8.2.3

n= 29: =21.5, usen=21

1.35

Using the equations previously developed for Cases 1 through 5:

C a s e 1: (uniform strain over section)

Cm= 1,5-~01~ip (15.63 in-)Z = 122kips

C~ = (21)( 500 psi ~ 1.2 in .2 _ 10,500 psi 0.2 in .2)= 12.6 kips < A: F, = 1.2(24) = 28.8 kips .'. OK
1,ooo ) 1,ooo
C~ = C', = 12.6 kips
P = 122 kips + 12.6 kips + 12.6 kips = 147 kips (plot on the vertical axis MDG Fig. 12.1-2 as point 1)

12-7
 C h a p t e r 12
C a s e 2: (zero strain at bottom fiber)

C~, = 1(122 kips) = 61.1 kips

,. (15.63 i n . - 3.13 in.~

C; =12.6~ps~. ~ -) : 10.1 kips

12.6 kips / -15"63 i n . - 12.51 in. /

Cs 1-~.6~1n. -) = 2.5 kips

P = 61.1 kips + 10.1 kips + 2.5 kips = 73.7 kips (plot on MDG Fig. 12.1-2)
(1563in'~ (938in h k" (9.38 in.'~
M=61.1kips~l+ 10.1kips ~ ) - 2.5 l p s ~ - - - ~ )

M = 194.6 in.-kips (plot on MDG Fig. 12.1-2)

The calculated P and Mare plotted on MDG Fig. 12.1-2 as point 2.

Case 3: (zero strain in bottom steel)

C• = 1(" ?O0 psi, )(15.63 in.X12.5 in.)= 48.8 kips

z \ 1uuu m/Kip J

C:= 12.6 kips(3) = 9.45 kips C~ ~ 0

P = 48.8 kips + 9.45 kips = 58.3 kips

M = 48.8 kips( 15"63 in. 12.53in") +9"45 k i p s ( ~ )

M = 223 in.-kip (plot P and Mas point 3 on MDG Fig. 12.1-2)

C a s e 4: (balanced case)
1 kbd= 3.80 in.
kb = 24ksi = 0.304
1+ 21(0.5 ksi)

d" = 3.13 in.

. (3.80 in.-3.13 in.~
C; = 12.6 kips~. ~ -] = 2.2 kips (compression)

Cm = (1/2) (500 psi) (15.63 in.) (3.8 in.) = 14.9 kips

T = 1.2 in) (24 ksi) = 28.8 kips
P = 14.9 kips + 2.2 kips - 28.8 kips = -11.7 kips (tension)

M = 14.9 kips (15"~ in" 3 " 8 O i n ' ) + 2 . 2 k i p s ( ~ ) + 2 8 . S k i p s ( ~ 1

M = 243 in.-kips (plot P and Mas point 4 on MDG Fig. 12.1-2)

12-8
F l e x u r e and A x i a l Load
C a s e 5: (pure bending)

•1-21 1"20 in'2 +21 1"20 in'2 7

k = - L (15.63in.X12.5 in.) (15.63
in.X12--~.5in.)j +
I 2(21](1.2 in.2 ~3.13 in.) 2(21Xl.2 in. 2)
", ~" + =0.366
0"2582+ (15.63in.X12.5in.X12.5in.) (15.63in.X12.5in.)
since k > kb, the compressive allowable stress in the masonry is reached before the tensile allowable in the steel. Hence
the steel stress is

f* =n(lf') d-kd-=kd18.2 ksi < F,

T = 1.2 in.2 (18.2 ksi) = 21.8 kips

C,,= 1 ( 500psi /(15.63in.Xo.366X12.5in.)=17.9kips

2 ~,1,000 lb/kip)

C" = 12"6 kips (4"58 ki n 'i- in.

3"13
p s in')
4 .= 53"99
8 (compression)

M = 1 7 . 9 k i p s ( 1 5 " ~ in" 4 " 5 8 i n " ) + 3 " 9 9 k i p s ( ~ ) + 2 1 " g k i p s ( ~ ) 3

M = 234 in.-kips (plot on MDG Fig. 12.1-2 as point 5)

C a s e 6: (maximum allowable axial compressive stress)

h 15(12)+4
r- = 0.289(15.63) = 40.7 in < 99 use Code Eq. 2-17

P~ =(0.25f'A, +0.65A,,F~) 1-

[0.25(1,500X15.632 - 2.40)+ 0.65(2.40X24,000)] I 1 - (\ 1-~0-)

40.7)z]j = 117,2601b = 117kips
L

Note that in the development of the interaction
diagram, the compressive stress due to axial load plus
bending was limited to 1/3 f~, satisfying the Code.
One would still have to check to ensure that the axial
force satisfied Code Section 2.3.3.2.1, Case 6,
especially for large values of h/r.
These 6 cases are
plotted on MDG Fig. 12.1-2 to form the interaction
diagram for this column only.
Under sustained load, the effective value of n
increases due to creep of the masonry. To iUustrate the
effects of such an increase, a value of 2n was used to
transform steel in compression in order to obtain the
curve labeled 2n in MDG Fig. 12.1-2. The value of 2n
was selected arbitrarily to illustrate the effects of such
an increase. The Code does not give guidance on this
effect other than a general requirement in Code Section
1.7.4. It is possible to construct such diagrams in a
non-dimensional form for a family of columns. This
will be illustrated by reworking the previous example
using different values of b and t, while maintaining the
same steel ratio Or, the same allowable compressive
stress Fb, and same spacing ratio between steel layers,
g. This second example is summarized along with the
previous example in MDG Table 12.1.1.
Now, if the values of P and M are non-
dimensionalized by dividing P by (Fbbt) and M by

12-9
 Chapter 12
(Fbb~), each value o f Examples 1 and 2 when n = l dimensionalized values are summarized in the table
results in the same non-dimensionalized values for load below as Example 3.
and m o m e n t for all 5 cases. These non-

.~9.38,,=
150
• •
15.63" T9.38"
1'
• e-
Example
100 15.63" ~-
90
P
KIPS A,t = 4 - #7 bars g = 0.6

,k
AS -As
_ s = 1.20in. 2

f ' ~ = 1,500 psi Type S Mortar

50
CMU Strength = 1,900 psi
F, = 24,000 psi
Fb = l/3 f'm =500psi
5 E,, = 1.35 x 1 0 6 psi (Table 5.5.1.3)
100 M n = 29 = 13.9, usen=21
1.35
IN.-I~PS

Fig. 12.1-2 C o l u m n Interaction Diagram

Table 12.1.1 Load Moment Interaction Diagram Data

Case N u m b e r
Example b t An 4
No. in. in. in. z
P 147 74 58 -12
15.6 15.6 2.4
M 195 223 243 234
P 77 39 31 -6
16 8 1.26
M 52 60 65 63
P
1.21 .60 .48 -0.1 0
Fbbt
non-dimensionalized
M
0.102 0.117 0.127 0.122
Fbbt 2

12-10
Flexure and Axial Load

12.1.2.1 Compression C o n t r o l s - - If allowable masonry compressive stress controls the

these non-dimensionalized values are plotted, they form
an interaction diagram that has much broader
application than those previously developed. Such a
plot is illustrated in MDG Fig. 12.1-4. If another set of
examples were calculated using a larger steel
percentage, another curve would result. Likewise, if
steel spacing ratio (g) is changed, still another non-
dimensionalized curve results. Two such sets o f curves
are shown in MDG Figs. 12.1-3 and 12.1-5, f o r g = 0.4
and g --- 0.8. These curves are valid only for
rectangular columns with two equal areas of top and
bottom steel (As = A'~), symmetrically placed and
adequately laterally tied. Ast is the total steel area (As+
A "~= As~), and Pt is the ratio o f total steel area to gross
column area (pt=Ast/bt). The curves in MDG Figs.
12.1-3 through 12.1-5 are based on the assumption that
capacity.
1 2 . 1 . 2 . 2 T e n s i o n C o n t r o l s - - If the
eccentricity (M/P) is large enough, capacity will be
controlled by allowable steel tensile stress rather than
allowable masonry compressive stress. Strain gradients
for this case are shown in MDG Fig. 12.1-1(b). Using
basic mechanics as before, design aids can be
developed for this case as well as for the cases
illustrated previously. Three such aids are shown in
MDG Figs. 12.1-6, 12.1-7, and 12.1-8. These curves
control when e > eb or k < kb. Often the designer
cannot readily tell which conditions control. In this
case, calculate the required value of Pt from both the
"compression-controls" and "tension-controls" curves
and use the larger steel requirement.

1.60

I J40
\
/
--\ i
/[
J I I
It "-"
t gt . . . . . ____t__ ,

1.00 ~ /~../~ ~ . ~ ~--e/tmimmum=O.1

.0"0~200, a O. )6 0.08 0.10--"~ 0.40 0.60

0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14

Pe/Fbbt2

Fig. 12.1-3 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram - - Compression Controls

12-11
 Chapter 12

1.60
o 7 o
g=0.6
I •
~
II, e
[

1.2 ~ \ ", / ///

/ ' t

12-'.
gt

I.
-'--

b
__'_
o
-E
l ,

3.1~ 0.20
finimum = (b.1 J
1.00 J

0.80
P/Fbbt 0.30

o.,o / l~
\
~ ~ 0.50

j Jill / - ~ 1.o

~o o ~ ~ ).40
\
C).60
\
0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22
Pe/FbbP

Fig. 12.1-4 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram - - Compression Controls

~0. / ~ ~ .~ _.

P/Fbbt
0.60
// o~
0.40
~ ~ ~ / ~ ~ 1.0
020 ~ / J ~ \\
.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26
Pe/Fbb?

Fig. 12.1-5 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram m Compression Controls

12-12
Flexure and Axial Load

0.60

0.40

g=0.4
P/Fbbt

0.20

0.00 J
0.00 0.02 0.0, 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18
Pe/Fbbt~

Fig. 12.1-6 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram - - T e n s i o n Controls, g = 0.4

0.80 ; ,Z'__ "0.0

e''t= 0"30 " ~ ~~00~1
0.60 g=0.6

,/F,b,°4°/ [ 1
]
0.20~

0.00 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26
Pe/Fbbt 2

Fig. 12.1-7 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction D i a g r a m - Tension Controls g = 0.6

1,20 r
p x~ =0.0
I .CO e/t=0.30..,

0.80

0.40

0.20

0.~ "

0£0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30 0.32 Q34 0.36 Q38
Pe/Fbb~

Fig. 12.1-8 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram - - T e n s i o n Controls g = 0.8

12-13
 Chapter 12

12.2 WALLS
12.2.1 Unreinforced Masonry Walls 1.0
Design of unreinforced masonry walls must meet
several criteria from Code Section 2.2, as follows:
A/Fo
1. The unity equation (Code Eq. 2-10) must be
satisfied. This equation assumes a straight-line
interaction between axial and flexural compressive
stresses. fb/Fb 1.0
. In place of limits on h/t, the Code uses limits on
buckling load (Code Eq. 2-11) to more rationally Code Eqs. 2-12 and 2-13 may be rewritten in the form
restrict the slenderness ratio. This requirement
does not apply to reinforced masonry walls. In the
application of the buckling load (Code Eq. 2-15),
the eccentricity should be based on the virtual where R is a slenderness reduction factor given by
eccentricity (the ratio of moment to axial force)
associated with gravity loads only. In calculating R=I-( h-~ 2 for h/r<_99 Eq. 12.2-2
L140rJ
this virtual eccentricity, moments and axial forces
and
from lateral loads should not be included.
3. Flexural tensile stresses caused by eccentricity of R= for h/r >99. Eq. 12.2-3
axial load or lateral load or combinations of both
must be limited to allowable stresses from Code MDG Fig. 12.2-1 illustrates the variation of R over a
Table 2.2.3.2. Axial tensile forces are not wide range of h/r values. Code Eq. 2-10 can now be
permitted in unreinforced masonry walls in Code written as
Section 2.24.
12. 2. 1. 1 U n it y Equation - - The unity P< AFa Eq. 12.2-4
equation (Code Eq. 2-10) for checking compression 1 ek\4 )
stress
This equation can be nondimensionalized as follows:
fa + fb < 1 (see Illustration)
F~ F~ P
<
R
Eq. 12.2-5
can be restated in terms of P (allowable), by f'A 4+3R e
ek
substituting
Note that for seismic or wind conditions, the right side
f, Pandfb Pe ofMDG Eq. 12.2-5 would be increased by 1/3.
A S
This equation in its nondimensionalized form is
By defining the kern eccentricity ek as the eccentricity plotted in MDG Fig. 12.2-2 for values of R = 1, R =
at which extreme fiber stress changes from compression 0.5, and R = 0.25. MDG Fig. 12.2-2 is a general curve
to tension, another substitution can be made for for any masonry strength and wall thickness, except
that the ordinate can be increased by a factor of 4/3
S when a 1/3 increase in allowable stress is permitted in
ek =--
A accordance with Code Section 2.1.1.1.3. This curve
may be used to determine the maximum value of P for
Replacing these terms in Code Eq. 2-10, results in
a given e or the maximum value of e for a given P as
p <_ AF,, Eq. 12.2-1 limited by Code Eq. 2-10.
1+ e F -
ek Fb

12-14
F l e x u r e a n d A x i a l Load

1.0

0.8
h / r : 99

0.6
R
0.4 \
R = - I ' ( ~ 1' ~ l l l /
0.2

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
h/r

Fig. 12.2-1 S l e n d e r n e s s R e d u c t i o n F a c t o r

0.30 Note: C', = .~/4 ~t me 1/3 incre

in allowable stress in Code 2.
is applicable. Otherwise, C~ = 1.0

ek = ~ Section Modu]
A Area
ek = - ~ For Solid Secti
0.20

P
f~AC~

P
f'A
--<.... 4 + 3R -~ek

R=0.25

o
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.0 1.25

e/e,~

Fig. 12.2-2 General Wall Design Aid For Allowable Compression

Design aids can easily be developed for specific
wall thicknesses and masonry compressive strengths.
MDG Fig. 12.2-3 illustrates MDG Eq. 12.2-5 applied
to an 8-in. (203-mm) concrete masonry wall having a
specified compressive strength of masonry of 1,500 psi
(10 MPa). Four curves are given in MDG Fig. 12.2-3.
Load capacities are given for R = 1 for fully grouted,
full mortar bedding and face shell bedding, assuming
ASTM C 90 (hollow) block. The face shell bedding
case is also plotted for R = 1/2. For other values of R
and hollow CMU face shell bedding, linear
interpolation may be used as an approximation. If
more accuracy is needed, the value for load capacity
obtained from MDG Figs. 12.2-2 or 12.2-3 using R = 1

12-15
 Chapter 12

35

\ f'm = 1,500psi
3C
\ \
8 in. Concrete
Masonry
2~

\
Axial
2ci
Load, =

P, Idf
15

10 ~ ~ FullBeddng

R='O.5 F a ~ $ h e l B e i ~
5 ~ sh B~i~!

0 .T ..
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 ZO 2.5 3.0
*ASTMC90 (Hollow)CMU Eccentddtye,in
Fig. 1 2 . 2 - 3 W a l l D e s i g n C u r v e s - - 8 in. C o n c r e t e Masonry

can be multiplied by a slenderness correction factor
(SCF).
4 +3_~_
e load P only. In calculating this virtual eccentricity,
SCF = R. ek Eq. 12.2-6
3Re
4+--
ek
The slenderness correction factor (SCF) is equal to
R for zero eccentricity and gets larger as the
eccentricity increases. For example, for e/ek = 1 and R
= 0.5, SCF = 0.64.
1 2 . 2 . 1 . 2 E u l e r B u c k l i n g - - Limitations on
Euler buckling, as required by Code Eq. 2-11 using
Code Eq. 2-15, effectively limit h/t for unreinforced
walls. Code Eq. 2-15, divided by A f " to be
nondimen-sionalized, is plotted in MDG Fig. 12.2-4
based on the approximation that Em= 700 f 'm for clay
masonry and 9 0 0 f " for concrete masonry. MDG Fig.
12.2-4 can be used in conjunction with MDG Fig. 12.2-
2, selecting the lower value of P / ( f 'm A). If a curve
such as Fig. 12.2-4 is used, then axial load must be
calculated using 1/4 of the value of Pe/( f " A) and
compared to the value of P from MDG Fig. 12.2-3.
The smaller value governs.
Code Eq. 2-11 requires that P be limited to a
maximum value of Pe /4. This criterion indirectly
places a limit on the maximum permissible slenderness.
In the application of Code Eq. 2-15, the eccentricity
should be based only on the virtual eccentricity (the
ratio of moment to axial force) associated with gravity
moments and axial forces from lateral loads should not
be included.
12,2.1.3 Flexural Tensile Stress-
Calculated flexural tensile stresses must not exceed the
allowable values given in Code Table 2.2.3.2. This
table applies to clay masonry and concrete masonry and
to portland cement lime, mortar cement, and masonry
cement mortars, Type M, S, or N. Values are also
given for stress parallel to the bed joints (horizontal
span) and perpendicular to bed joints (vertical span).
For masonry constructed from hollow units, allowable
flexural tensile stresses are given for fully grouted
construction. For partial grouting, interpolation is
permitted.
Applied flexural tensile stresses resulting from
combined axial load and bending moments are
calculated from the equation
P Pe
- - - + - - < Fbt Eq. 12.2-7
A S

12-16
Flexure and Axial Load

1.0

0.8
e/t = 0

Pe/Af'= 0.6
e/t = 0.10
e/t = 0.20
0.4 e/t = 0.25
e/t = 0.35
e/t = 0.50
0.2
e/t = 0.75
e/t = 1.0
50 100 150
h/r

Fig. 12.2-4 (a) Concrete Masonry, E,, = 9 0 0 f '=

1.0

0.8
e/t 0

Pe/Af'= 0.6
e/t 0.10
e/t 0.20
0.4 e/t 0.25
e/t 0.35
e/t 0.50
0.2
e/t 0.75
e/t 1.0

0 50 100 150
h/r

Fig. 12.2-4 (b) Clay Masonry, E= = 7 0 0 f "

12-17

Using terms defined previously, this equation can be
rewritten
P 1
<~ Eq. 12.2-8
AFbf e _ 1
ek
This expression for checking tension is valid only
for e > ek, and the equation is plotted in MDG Fig.
12.2-5. The value of P obtained from this equation or
from MDG Fig. 12.2-5 is then compared with the other
values of P, as controlled by the unity inequality where
compression controls and by Euler buckling. The
smallest value of the three will control. Obviously,
flexural tension will not control unless eccentricities, e,
become somewhat large, at least > ek.
Note: This curve (MDG Fig. 12.2-5) ensures
compliance with the allowable flexural tension
provisions in Code Section 2.2.3.2. To use this curve,
determine the allowable Fbt from Code Table 2.2.3.2
(applying the 1/3 increase from Code Section 2.1.1.1.3
where applicable) and calculate the kern eccentricity of
the wall, ek, from the expression.
S (section modulus) Eq. 12.2-9
e k =--=
A (area)
From MDG Fig. 12.2-5 read the value for P/(A Fbt) and
solve for P.
Design aids can easily be constructed from MDG
Eq. 12.2-8. MDG Fig. 12.2-6 illustrates a typical design
curve for 8-in. (200-mm) concrete masonry walls.
Curves are shown for solidly grouted walls, walls with
solid units, walls with hollow units with full mortar
bedding, and walls with hollow units with face shell
bedding. Different allowable stresses are shown to
illustrate the effect. The allowable load is read directly
12-18
Chapter 12
from the ordinate. In cases where allowable stresses
are increased by one-third, the designer can either
increase Fbt or simply increase the calculated load, P,
by one-third.
12.2.2 Reinforced M a s o n r y W a l l s
Design of reinforced masonry walls for combined
axial load and bending requires that the following
conditions be met:
1. The average axial compressive force cannot
exceed the allowable values given by Code Eqs. 2-
17 and 2-18, using F.~= 0
2. The extreme fiber compressive stress due to
combined axial load and bending cannot exceed
the allowable value of 1/3f',,,
3. The steel tensile stress cannot exceed the allowable
value given in Code Section 2.3.2.1.
An important provision affecting the design of
reinforced masonry wails is contained in Code Section
2.3.2.2.1. This provision permits compression forces to
be resisted by compression reinforcement only if the
lateral support requirements of Code Section 2.1.4.6
are met. Since it is virtually impossible to meet these
provisions in walls, the contribution of reinforcing steel
to compressive forces must be neglected. This
conservative requirement does, however, result in
greatly simplified design procedures for eccentricities
o f e < t/3. Assuming the wall to be fully grouted with
steel located at the wall centerline, the capacity of a
wall is independent of the amount of reinforcement for
e < t/3. Only when e > t/3 is it necessary to account
for reinforcement in the design. This concept will be
clearly illustrated with the development of the
interaction diagram.
Flexure and Axial Load

0.8 ~ P _ 1

0.7 1 AFbt e
ek -1

0.6

0.5

0.4
\
P \
AF bt
0.3 \

0.2 ~ '

0.1

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

e/ek

Fig. 12.2-5 Wall Design Aid for Allowable Flexural Tension

20

Fbt = 25 psi

15

shell bedding, Fbt = 25 psi

lO
P, kips
\ units, Fbt = 40 psi

\ \
Fbt = 68 psi

1 2 3 4 5 6
e, i n.

Fig. 12.2-6 Wall Design Aid - - 8 in. Concrete Masonry

12-19
 Chapter 12

Tension I Compression ,,

e ~

0 0 0
Reinforced Wall Strain Gradient

Fig. 12.2-7 Variable Compression Throughout Cross Section

12.2.2.1 Interaction Diagram for
Reinforced Walls - - The interaction diagram for
solidly grouted reinforced masonry walls with
reinforcement located at the center of the wall can be
divided into three distinct regions: e < t/6; t/6 < e <
t/3; and e > t/3. Each of these will be examined
separately, and a final diagram developed. The masonry
is assumed to have zero tensile capacity. The developed
equations are valid for a solidly grouted wall or for a
section in which kd < face shell thickness.
e < t/6: This region o f the interaction diagram
corresponds to a strain gradient ranging between Case 1
and Case 2 as shown in MDG Fig. 12.2-7. Since Case 2
coincides with the kern eccentricity, this case
corresponds to e = t/6 for fully grouted sections, or S/A
for partially grouted sections.
The resulting interaction diagram for any point in
this region is shown in the top portion of MDG Fig.
12.2-8. Since the reinforcement is in compression and
cannot be laterally tied, its effect is neglected in this
region. The shape of the curve connecting the points
corresponding to Case 1 and Case 2 is a straight line.
P----P--=I- 6 P e O<e<t/6 Eq. 12.2-10
Fbbt Fbbt 2 '
Note: One would still have to check P versus the
maximum allowed by Code Eq. 2-17 or 2-18.
t/6 < e < t/3: This region o f the diagram corresponds
to strain gradients between Case 2 and Case 3 on MDG
Fig. 12.2-7. This region is a curved line when plotted
using the normal interaction diagram parameters as
shown in the middle section of MDG Fig. 12.2-8. It is
linear, however, if expressed in terms o f P/Fbbt and e/t
and can be expressed as
P 3 3e
t / 6 < e <-t/3 Eq. 12.2-11
Fbbt 4 2 t'
e > t/3: In this region the steel is in tension and resists
all tensile stresses. Points on the interaction diagram
in this region correspond to strain gradients between
Case 3 and Case 4 in MDG Fig. 12.2-7. Case 4 can
represent any magnitude o f tensile strain in steel. All
values obtained on the interaction diagram for this
region assume that the allowable compressive stress in
masonry, Fb, controls the capacity. This further
implies that k > kb, where kb is defined by
Fb
kb = - - Eq. 12.2-12
Fs
Fb+--
n
Points on the interaction diagram for various
selections of the location of Case 4 are shown in the
lower portion of MDG Fig. 12.2-8 for a broad
selection of values o f n p t , where n is the modular ratio
EJE,, and 9t is the ratio o f total steel area to gross area
of masonry. In order to facilitate more accurate use of
this figure as a design aid, MDG Fig. 12.2-9 is
provided as an enlargement of the lower part of MDG
Fig. 12.2-8. Values of k are also shown in MDG Fig.
12.2-9 to assist the user to ensure that k > kb.
e > eb: For large eccentricities, steel allowable stress
will control. Values of npt obtained l~om MDG Fig.
12.2-9 would not be correct for such cases.

12-20
Flexure and Axial Load

Another interaction diagram must be developed by
limiting the steel tensile stress to the allowable value and
varying the strain gradient in the cross section to obtain
curves that correspond to different values of not.
Such a
diagram is illustrated in MDG Fig. 12.2-10.
This diagram also indicates values of k that can be
used to verify that k < kb a necessary condition for using
MDG Fig. 12.2-10.
For partially grouted reinforced walls the following
procedure should be used. If the neutral axis depth,
kd, is less than the face shell thickness, t~ of partially
grouted units, the values obtained from the interaction
curve need not be changed. Only the value in Code
Eq. 2-17 or Code Eq. 2-18 would have to be adjusted
to account for the change in area and radius of
gyration. Since the interaction diagrams also include
values of k, the designer can easily confirm whether kd
> tf If kd > th a basic mechanics approach should be
employed.

\
0.8 ~ P=-Fbbt- 6Pe/t

0.7 ~ t --x l+6e/t

0.6

P
0.5
Fg, t

0.4
FJPa~-33 33 et t t/6<e<t/3
0.3

0.2

0.1

0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10

Pe
Fdbt2

Fig. 12.2-8 Interaction Diagram m Reinforced Wall

12-21
 Chapter 12

0.012 0.0233 0.0338 0.0433 0.0531 0.06 0.067 0.073 0.079

t
' ' I I i I ~ '
I I I .Coo~rcssion
Allowable ' I
I I I i Contrds k~kb I I
I I I ] I I /
0.25
k= 0.1 0.2 0.3 0:4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.gf
, , , , ,
I
! I I I I I
0.20 I I I I I
I I I I I I
I I I I I A~
I I I I I
0,15 I
P I 9t= I I I Y ~
bt I
I I I
0.10 i g=0 t I =~
, , ,
i i i~ /t

0.05

~;~~~~S/;/~/~ ': '

0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08
Pe M
~bt' V~bt~

Fig, 12.2-9 Interaction Diagram -- Reinforced Wall - Compression Controls

0,10
0.012
I
I
Tension Allowable Controls
0.0233 0.0338
,
,
0.0433
',
I I I
k < kb
0.08 0.2 0.3 ~ ~ ~0.
to= 0.1
I
I
0.06 I
P I
Fbbt I ~ O0 I
0.04 ~ 1 / j 0.04 ~ ~ l
g=O II / J ~ -~n.os~ / ,

0.02
/~1 ~ / ~ ~ ~ 1I --r

0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04

M Pe
Fbbt2 - F~bt2

Fig. 12.2-10 Interaction Diagram m Reinforced Wall - Tension Controls

12-22
F l e x u r e a n d A x i a l Load
12.2.2.2 Typical I t e r a t i v e Method
In the United States most masonry elements are walls.
Walls commonly resist the effects of combined axial
and bending loads. Bending loads can be either in-
plane or out-of-plane as shown in MDG Fig. 12.2-11.
There are no easy closed-form solutions to the
stress equations for walls subjected to bending
combined with axial compression. Structural engineers
typically rely on iterative methods or design charts.
Design charts for most masonry systems are not readily
available. See MDG Section 12.2.2.1 for discussion
concerning development of wall interaction diagrams.
Thus iterative methods are most common. The
following procedure is one example of an iterative
method (Refs. 12.2.1, 12.2.2).
MDG Fig. 12.2-12 shows a diagram of a wall
subjected to an axial load and bending moment. This
diagram is applicable to both in-plane and out-of-plane
bending of walls.
There are three possible conditions for the wall:
1) uncracked, 2) cracked with the steel in compression
(the extent of the crack has not reached the steel), or 3)
cracked with the steel in tension. The first step in the
analysis is to determine which condition applies to the
wall. It will depend on both geometry and loading.
MDG Fig. 12.2-13 shows the typical bending
moment and axial load diagram. Loading conditions
beyond the limits of the diagram are beyond the
allowable stresses. Loading conditions inside the limits
of the diagram are within the allowable stresses.
The condition of the wall can be quickly
established by using the non-dimensional parameter
In-Plane
Fig. 12.2-11 Wall Loading
12-23
M/Pd. This parameter represents a straight line
radiating from the diagram's origin as shown. By
summing moments, it can be shown that certain values
of M/Pd divide the diagram into three regions. These
values are given in MDG Table 12.2.1.
The determination of the allowable moments for
Regions 1 and 2 can be obtained in closed form with
simple equations. In Region 3, it is more complicated.
Normally the process of evaluating a wall consists
of assuming the thickness, length, and other parameters
(or as specified by the architect), then determining the
required area of steel. This is the basis for the
following iterative solution for Region 3.
In Region 3, the wall is either limited by the
compressive stress in the masonry or the tensile stress
in the reinforcement. Begin by assuming the tension in
the steel controls. By making an initial guess about the
location of the neutral axis, MDG Eqs. 12.2-15 and
12.2-18 provide an iterative process that quickly
converges. The equations are derived from the
summation of forces and moments and by using linear
stress-strain relationships.
The equations should always converge for all
values of P, l~, M, d, Fs, b, and n. If convergence is not
obtained, it is likely the assumed initial value of a
exceeds d. Reduce the initial value of a and try again.
The iteration will often result in a negative steel
area. This means that the element does not need
reinforcement to resist the loads within the allowable
stresses, even though the section is cracked (Region 3).
This can be graphically shown with the interaction
diagram in MDG Fig. 12.2-14.
Out-of-Plane
 C h a p t e r 12

-- A s

I_. lw l,i
i

Fig. 12.2-12 Flexure and Axial Wall Loading

REGION 1

M/Pd = (2/3 - l,~ /3d - A)

AXIAL
L O A D (P)

M/ea = (2/3 - a )

REGION 3

]LIMITED BY LIMITED B Y
TENSION ~, COMPRESSION

MOMENT (M)

Fig. 12.2-13 Interaction Diagram

12-24
F l e x u r e and A x i a l Load

Table 12.2.1 Flexure and Axial Loading - - Wall Analysis

Region [ Condition of Wall Test
1 Wall is in compression and not
M< 1_ l..~ _A
cracked Pd 3d
2 Wall is cracked but steel is in
compression Pd
3 Wall is cracked and steel is in
tension q> -A
Pd

Following convergence, a check is made of the . Perform the following iteration that assumes
initial assumption that tension in the steel controls. If the tension in the steel controls (remember
valid, the analysis is complete. If not valid, then the that As may be negative):
compression controls and a new set of equations that do
not require iteration are used (MDG Eqs. 12.2-20 and Eq. 12.2-15
12.2-21).
The following is a detailed step-by-step procedure M - Mp
of the analysis described above. As = Eq. 12.2-16
F~ (d - a)
S t e p 1: Determine the wall condition.
1. Calculate A as the distance from the axial load (P + AsFs)n
to the centroid of the tension steel divided by d. = Eq. 12.2-17
F,b
2. Calculate the quantity M/Pd.
3. Use MDG Table 12.2.1 to determine the region ~/(2 + 2 ( d - (
for analysis (MDG Fig. 12.2-13). a2 = Eq. 12.2-18
3
Step 2: Calculate the allowable moment.
Where:
REGION 1: The moment is limited by flexural
a = Estimate of internal compression load
compression in the masonry.
centroid distance from the extreme
bl 2 compression fiber
F, - P / ~ Eq. 12.2-13
Mm =--6-- b 6 P = Applied axial load at the center of the wall
M = Applied moment
If M,, is greater than M applied, the section is As = Area of trim or edge steel
satisfactory.
Mp = Moment of applied axial load with respect
REGION 2: The moment is also limited by flexural to the centroid of internal compression
compression in the masonry. force
lw = Length of the wall for in-plane bending
M , , = P ( 1 - A ) d - 2 [ Pz ] Eq. 12.2-14 lw = Thickness of the wall for out-of-plane
3 LFbbj bending
d = Distance from the extreme compression
If M,, is greater than M applied, the section is
fiber to the steel centroid
satisfactory.
Fs = Allowable steel tension stress
REGION 3: The moment may be limited by either
b = Width of the wall for out-of-plane
the compression in the masonry or tension in the
bending
steel. An iterative approach is required.
b = Thickness of the wall for in-plane bending
1. Assume a compression centroid location, a.
Use a2 for a, and repeat until the value of a converges.

12-25
 C h a p t e r 12

Interaction limit matches

applied P and M ]

.......... .Ap.p.l.i.e..d.~ ............. . . . . . . . ~ .

f ,
As is positive

As is zero

As is negative

Fig. 12.2-14 Iteration for Tension-Controlled Section

Step 3: If the iteration converges and the resulting a Increase b or Fb or both. The steel area is:
is less than the following value, the wall is limited
by the tension reinforcement and the analysis is
complete. Otherwise continue:
d
a= I31+ Fs/Fb]n Eq. 12.2-19
In all cases the wall trim steel should not be less
than minimum values. See MDG Example Problem
TMS-14 for application of this technique to shear wall
Otherwise continue to Step 4. design.
Step 4: If the value of a is larger than the above The following is another example of a commonly
value, determine the required steel area using the used procedure (Ref. 12.2.3, 12.2.4, 12.2.5). Draw a
following: free body diagram of a wall with axial load, bending
moment, and tensile and compressive forces (MDG
a=d_ ]d2 2(PAd+M) Eq. 12.2-20 Fig. 12.2-15). The location of C is based on the neutral
2 ~4 3Fbb axis location kd. The location of T is at the centroid of
the reinforcement.
The problem can be solved by taking moments
d~ 2(PAd+M)
If
I 3Fbb
inadequate compression capacity.
is negative, t h e r e is about the centerline of the wall, the tensile

12-26
Flexure and Axial Load

,1 < kd
l ;

Fig. 12.2-15 Free Body Diagram of Wall

reinforcement (assuming that masonry compressive
stresses control), or the compressive force (assuming
that the stresses in the reinforcement control). By --0

4lI
inserting the allowable value of stress, which is ~F.,b
assumed to control, a quadratic equation in terms of kd
may be developed and solved.
For example, if P is at the centerline of the wail,
taking moments about the centroid of the tensile
reinforcement results in the equation:
kd=
2

Inserting the values for P, M, l,~, b, d, and Fm yields kd.

but C = ½Fm bkd and lw - d' = d. Then: Note that this method is iterative since a location of d'
must be assumed.
Having solved for kd one can calculate C.
By ZFv = 0 T = C- P
Dividing both sides by ~/~mb results in From strain compatibility

~F,.b
thus f~ can be calculated. If f~ < F~ the masonry
compressive stress controls and the solution is finished
by calculating A~ = T / f . If, however, f > F~ the
3 ~F,.b assumption that masonry stresses control is incorrect,
and the neutral axis location is wrong.
Multiplying by -3 and rearranging terms:
A good starting assumption to calculate f,, is to
take T assuming that masonry compressive stresses
control, and to divide by F~ to get a trial A~. This
allows the designer to choose a bar layout and verify

12-27
 Chapter 12
the initial assumption of d', the distance to the centroid Zeff = (As )eff f s
of the reinforcement. T = T,g - P
T The masonry stress may be checked by using
F~ 2M'
fm bjkd:
Since C = T + P the effects of the axial load can be
included by using an effective amount of reinforcement where M'=P(~-d)+M
= +__p r+p
F~ ( o r - - ~ ) f,,<F,,,
(A& C = ~ f,,bkd = T~# to double check.
P~# = bd
If, as sometimes happens, f~ > F,, a second iteration
k = [(np)Z + 2np]Y2 _ np may be required with a larger bar size or an extra bar.
In a shear wall if an extra bar is added, the value of d'
j = 1 - k/3
and the moments p [ @ _ _ d , l + M will need to be re-
The steel stress may be checked using
M' evaluated. Then one can reiterate from (As)eft = As + P /
f , = -(~eff j d Fs to r e d u c e r so that it is less than Fs. This technique
is used in MDG Example Problems RCJ-10 and RCJ-
where M'=P(~-d)+M 11.

12.3 PILASTERS
The description of pilasters given in MDG Sections
11.2.1 through 11.2.4 is sufficiently general to apply to
nearly all pilasters whether they are subjected to flexure
only or to flexure and axial load as described in this
section. It is recommended that MDG Sections 11.2.1
through 11.2.4 be read before proceeding with this
section, so that the reader may become acquainted with
loading conditions, coursing layouts, and effective
sections.
12.3.1 Critical Loading Cases
As noted in MDG Fig. 11.2-1, pilasters may be
subjected to vertical loads at roof or floor levels, and
lateral loads along their height. If simple supports are
assumed at the top and bottom (refer to MDG Section
11.2.5 for discussion of boundary conditions), moments
from each load will be as shown in MDG Fig. 12.3-1
for a single-story pilaster. While the sense of the
gravity load moment will be defined by the orientation
of the eccentricity, wind load moment may reverse
itself if a suction is applied rather than direct pressure.
If a seismic load is considered, both directions of load
application should be evaluated. Thus, moments
resulting from gravity and lateral force must be added
as noted in MDG Eq. 12.3-1. If the lateral force can
act in either direction, then the effects of gravity and
lateral loads should be summed algebraically, and the
two cases (sum and differences of effects) should be
checked. This check is typically made at mid height of
pilaster.
wh z Pe
M = +-- Eq. 12.3-1
8 2
If the lateral moment is small relative to the gravity
moment, then the critical case may be at the top of the
pilaster with gravity loads alone, in which case MDG
Eq. 12.3-2 would apply.
M = Pe Eq. 12.3-2
A case involving zero moment may govern if the
gravity load is relatively large and the eccentricity
small. In this case, the critical location for design
would be at the base where the vertical compressive
stress is maximum.

12-28
F l e x u r e and A x i a l Load

Pe

W ÷ At Midheight

Fig. 12.3-1 Moment Diagrams for Pilaster

12.3.2 Design Considerations for at their full value. No load factor is applied to the wind
Unreinforced Pilasters or earthquake loads.
Flexural tensile stress usually governs for Although compressive stress will probably not
unreinforced pilasters. Since allowable compressive control for an unreinforced pilaster, it should still be
stresses are an order of magnitude more than allowable checked (it could control for cases of high gravity force
tensile stresses, compression typically does not control and small eccentricity as noted above). Compressive
except for the case of small eccentricity. However, both stresses resulting from both axial and flexure should be
cases should be checked. For nearly all practical cases, considered using Code Eq. 2-10:
design is controlled by flexure rather than axial force. It for gravity loads
is likely that wind or seismic cases with a minimum
amount of vertical compressive force will govern. f a + f b __1 Eq. 12.3-3
However, if vertical load is applied at a relatively large ro F~
eccentricity, then it may be conservative to consider the for combined gravity and earthquake loads
largest gravity forces together with the lateral forces,
since the gravity moments will increase flexural tension fa + f--L< 1.33
stress. With large eccentricities and small lateral forces, ro F~
gravity effects alone may govern, since the one-third Axial compressive stress, f~, should be computed
increase in allowable stresses does not apply. In over the minimum net area of masonry. Flexural
compressive stress, J~, should be calculated based on the
summary, the following loading cases should be
section modulus for the minimum net section. The
considered when flexural tensile stress governs. minimum net section should be based on the mortar
1. full lateral + minimum gravity (for small bedded area for ungrouted construction. The allowable
eccentricities) axial compressive stress is given by Code Eq. 2-12 and
2. full lateral + maximum gravity (for large 2-13.
eccentricities) F,= 1 , h 2
3. maximum gravity (for large eccentricities, small (-~) f~, I 1- ( 1 - ~ r I ], for h/r < 99 Eq. 12.3-4
lateral)
According to Code Section 2.1.1.1.1, when
or
earthquake forces are considered, dead load is to be
multiplied by 0.9 for loading case (1). When effects of
wind are considered, minimum dead loads are to be taken
Fa = (1) ( 12
f" , for h/r > 99 Eq. 12.3-5

12-29

The allowable flexural compressive stress is given by
Code Eq. 2-14.
12.3-6
If wind or seismic load is considered, then the "1" in
Eq. 12.3-3 may be replaced by "1.33" according to Code
Section 2.1.1.1.3. Even though compressive stress may
not govern the size of an unreinforced section, it may
dictate what the required prism compressive strength
should be.
Shear strength of an unreinforced pilaster subject to
both axial loads and flexure is the same as for pure
flexure (MDG Section 11.2.5).
12.3.3 Design Considerations for
Reinforced Pilasters
All masonry subjected to tension is neglected in a
reinforced pilaster. The unity equation (MDG Eq.
12.3-3) does not apply for checking the compressive
stress under combined flexure and axial stress since the
section is considered to be cracked and the axial force
will not be distributed across the entire net area. Instead,
Code Section 2.3.3.2.2 states that the compressive stress
due to flexure in combination with axial load is not to
exceedf ~, / 3, provided that the axial stress alone is less
than the allowable Fa given by Code Eq. 2-12 and 2-13.
When the compressive stress is due to combined
lateral and gravity forces, the allowable stresses may be
increased by one-third. As noted in MDG Section
12.1.2, an axial load-moment interaction diagram can be
developed by assigning this limiting compressive stress
to the extreme fiber, and determining different
combinations of axial load and bending moment that
result from different assumed depths to the neutral axis.
Similar interaction curves can also be developed based
on limiting the reinforcement to its allowable tensile
stress as prescribed in Code Section 2.3.2.1. These
"tension-controls" curves will govern the reinforcement
design for pilasters with relatively small axial force.
The effective section will depend on whether the
web or flange is in compression, as discussed in MDG
Section 11.2.4. If the bending moment is primarily a
result of lateral force rather than eccentric vertical force,
then moment reversal needs to be considered, and the
critical direction of bending must be identified. If
compression controls the design, then the bending that
produces compression on the web will control [MDG
Fig. 11.2-4(a)], because the compressed area is much
smaller than if the flange were in compression [MDG
Fig. 11.2-4(b)1.
If the pilaster is reinforced symmetrically, and the
effective flange width is unreinforced, the critical sense
12-30
Chapter 12
of moment will be when the web is in compression. This
assumption will reduce the problem to one of a cracked
rectangular beam, for which load-moment interaction
diagrams are available. Design may then be as simple as
plotting the normalized load and moments on the
standard charts to check that the assumed section size is
adequate and to estimate the needed reinforcement. An
equivalent rectangular section can also be used for the
case of the flange in compression, provided that the
neutral axis is within the wall thickness for a fully
grouted wall, and within the exterior face shell for an
ungrouted wall.
If reinforcement is not placed symmetrically across
the pilaster section, then both directions of bending need
to be considered. It may not be obvious which directions
will control the design. For example, if the effective
flange width contains reinforcement as shown in MDG
Fig. 12.3-2, then compressive stresses will be highest
when the flange is in tension. The critical case for
tension, however, will be when the web is in tension
because the amount of reinforcement will be limited. For
either of these two cases, an analysis based on a cracked
rectangular section would suffice provided that the
compressed zone remains a rectangle.
In the rare case that the compressed area is not
rectangular, an interaction diagram needs to be generated
for the particular T-shaped pilaster. No load-moment
interaction diagrams exist for such sections, because they
cannot be generalized in terms of nondimensionalized
parameters. To generate such a diagram, maximum
compressive stress is set equal to Fb [MDG Fig. 12.3-
3(a)], and the depth to the neutral axis, kd, is varied
arbitrarily to result in different combinations of axial
force and moment. This will define points on the
"compression-controls" interaction curve. Correspond-
ingly, tensile stress in the reinforcement at the extreme
layer is set equal to the allowable tensile stress [MDG
Fig. 12.3-3(b)], and the resulting combinations of axial
force and moment define the '~ension-controls"
interaction curve.
For sections with unsymmetrical reinforcement or
geometry, axial loads must be referenced to the plastic
centroid rather than to the geometric centroid of the
cracked transformed section. The plastic centroid is
located at the centroid of all internal forces when a
uniform stress distribution, with an amplitude equal to Fb,
is applied across the transformed section. This definition
is consistent with zero curvature of the section under pure
axial load.
Flexure and Axial Load

b
I" =I
t ~ O ...... • • ....... -0-'0 ..... O ....... 4 ...... O . . . . . A

(a) Wall Reinforced With Flange In Tension

kd

17:: ".: )'.'.:": .': "-2.?':': :.'" !.:'.'.'2. ":.'~ ! - f ." ) ": ":.'" ! .:

tp
I'I .~ 6t
e--.____~. . . .

=l= bw
5.l~
As

6t -,

(1o) Wall Reinforced With Web In Tension

Fig. 12.3-2 Effective Sections for Pilaster with Reinforced Wall

beff =- Stresses Forces

Yb

kd M

As

(a)

b~
"~ fb

ka ~
N,A. /
Plastic Cent~oid

=rs
A s

(b)

Fig. 12.3-3 Stress Distributions for Development of Load-Moment Interaction

Diagrams for Non-Rectangular Sections

12-31
 C h a p t e r 12

REFERENCES
12.2.1 Tawresey, J. G., "Applied Stress Equations- 12.2.4 Drysdale, R.C., A.A. Hamid, and L.R. Baker,
Walls With Axial Load Combined With Masonry Structures Behavior and Design,
Bending Moment," TMS Journal, Vol. 5, No. Prentice-Hall, Englewood, New Jersey 1994.
2, July-December 1986, pp.T16-T20.
12.2.5 Amrhein, J.E., Reinforced Masonry
12.2.2 Tawresey, J.G., "Masonry P-M Diagrams Engineering Handbook, Masonry Institute of
Made Easy," TMS Journal, Vol. 8, No. 2, America, Los Angeles, California 1978.
July-December 1989, T31-T35.
12.2.3 Schneider, R.R and W.L. Dickey, Reinforced
Masonry Design, Prentice-Hall, Englewood,
New Jersey 1987.

12-32

13.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Different methods of analysis are used for shear
design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry. For
unreinforced masonry, shear stress is computed by the
VQ/Ib equation. For reinforced masonry the shear stress
is computed by the V/bd equation.
The allowable shear stresses are also different for
unreinforced and reinforced masonry. The designer
should not combine the two types of masonry design
techniques. Use only one or the other.
In unreinforced masonry, the allowable shear
13.1 DESIGN FOR S H E A R IN M A S O N R Y C O M P O N E N T S
13.1.1 Overall Philosophy for Shear Case 2: Code Section 2.3.5 - Reinforced Masonry -
Design Members where flexural tension is not allowed to be
Shear and flexure occur together in masonry
components such as beams and beam-columns [see
MDG Fig. 13.1-1(a)], in walls spanning vertically to
resist out-of-plane loads [MDG Fig. 13.1-1(b)], in walls
spanning horizontally to resist out-of-plane loads [MDG
Fig. 13.1-1(c)], and in shear walls that resist in-plane
forces [MDG Fig. 13.1-1(d)]. Shear design of beams,
beam-columns, and walls subjected to out-of-plane
loading is addressed in MDG Section 13.1. Shear design
of walls subject to in-plane loading is addressed in MDG
Section 13.2.
Shear design in the Code is considered in two cases
for members subjected to flexure.
Case 1: Code Section 2.2.5 - Unreinforced Masonry -
Members where flexural tension is allowed to be
carried by the masonry, and
13-1
13
SHEAR
stresses depend on the type of masonry element (wall or
beam, for example), the bonding pattern, and the amount
of axial load.
In reinforced masonry, the allowable shear stresses
depend on the type of masonry element (shear wall or
beam, for example), the magnitude of M/Vd, and the
amount of reinforcement.
Chapter 13 first addresses the design ofunreinforced
and reinforced elements other than shear walls. Design
of shear wall elements is then presented.
carried by the masonry.
The first case (Code Section 2.2.5) is often referred
to as "unreinforced masonry," even though some nominal
reinforcement may be present for reasons other than
load-carrying purposes. Shear computations are based
upon "uncracked section" concepts.
The second case (Code Section 2.3.5) is further
divided into the categories of members subjected to
flexural tension and members not subjected to flexural
tension. For members with flexuml tension, the shear
computation must be based upon "cracked section"
properties. In reinforced masonry concepts, the masonry
area subjected to tension is neglected and the
reinforcement is assumed to carry all the tension forces.
For members without flexural tension the shear
computations may be considered in light of either Code
 Chapter 13

,11 P,=iat (if present)

~ateral Loads
i

(b) Vertically spanning wall

(a) Masonry beam subjected out-of-plane shear and flexure
to shear and flexure

v M
==~
S
--- ~ Lateral Loads

--'9

(d) In-plane shear and flexure

(c) Horizontally spanning wall
out-of-plane shear and flexure

Fig. 13.t-1 Masonry Elements Subjected to Shear and Flexure

Section 2.2.5 or 2.3.5, depending upon the stress levels and combined stress is compared with the maximum
usage of'hmcracked" or "cracked" section concepts. allowable tension in Code Table 2.2.3.2. MDG Fig.
Code Commentary Fig. 2.3.5 provides an overall flow 13.1-2 depicts these combined stresses. Note that this
diagram for the shear design of masonry. This chapter case is based upon "uncracked section" concepts. Thus,
(MDG Chapter 13) discusses the Code shear provisions. the flexural stress in MDG Fig. 13.1-2 is found from
the simple flexure equation
13.1.2 Shear Design of Unreinforced Mc
fb- Eq. 13.1-1
Masonry 1
Shear design allowing tensile stresses in masonry is where the moment of inertia,/, is based upon the net
used when the flexural masonry tensile stresses do not uncracked section area. The axial stress in MDG Fig.
exceed the maximum allowable values in Code Table 13.1-2 is found from the simple axial equation
2.2.3.2. For cases involving axial loads and flexure, the P
f~ = - - Eq. 13.1-2
A,,

13-2
Shear
M P
+ =
!~(if present)
f p
Forces Fle×-ral
Stresses Stresses
Fig. t3.1-2 Combined Flexural Stress and Shear Stress Distribution
in Uncracked Section, Unreinforced Masonry
where the A, is the net uncracked cross-sectional area.
Any other axial and flexural stresses,fit, due to factors such
as restrained differential movement, temperature change,
moisture expansion, or shrinkage must be combined with
dead and live load stresses. The combination must satisfy
the provisions of Code Section 2.2; thus, the algebraic sum
offo + 3~ + for cannot exceed the allowable tensile stress
values in Code Table 2.2.3.2. Stresses resulting from
restraint should be controlled by movement joints (see
MDG Chapter 10) or other construction techniques to
ensure that the combined stress does not exceed the
allowable values. The allowable stresses in Code Table
2.2.3.2 govern for out-of-plane bending.
If Code Table 2.2.3.2 is satisfied, the shear calculation
is based upon the uncracked section and the parabolic
shear distribution found from Code Eq. (2-16):
f = VQ
Ib
Any reinforcement in the cross section is simply neglected.
For a rectangular cross-section, Code Eq. (2-16) gives the
maximum shear stress of."
3V
f~ = ~ Eq. 13.1-3
2A
at the midheight, the point of maximum shear stress. Since
Code Eq. (2-16) is used for calculations of both in-plane
and out-of-plane shear in walls, the reader is also referred
to MDG Section 13.2.
MDG Eq. 13.1-3 is sometimes used as a conservative
approximation of the composite interlaminar shear stress
that occurs at the wythe-to-eollar joint interface under out-
of-plane bending. The collar joint is usually only a short
distance from the point of maximum shear stress that
occurs at the cross section mid-depth. See MDG Section
9.3.5 for further discussion of this composite section shear
computation.
m.x= 3__F
Z4.
(For a Rectangular
Section)
Axial Combined Axial Shear Stresses
and Flexural Stresses
(Include O t h e r s If Present)
Even though Code Section 2.2.5.2 specifies
allowable stresses for "in-plane shear," these allowable
values are considered applicable to out-of-plane
bending for masonry elements designed according to
the provisions in Code Section 2.2-Unreinforced
Masonry. Thus, the maximum allowable shear stress is
the least of the following:
• 1.5 ~ m '
• 120 psi (827 kPa)
* 15 psi (103 kPa) for masonry in other than running
bond with other than open end units that are
grouted solid
• v+0.45Nv/A,
where:
v = 37 psi (255 kPa) for masonry in running bond
that is not solid grouted, or
= 37 psi (255 kPa) for stack bond masonry with
open end units and grouted solidly, or
= 60 psi (414 kPa) for masonry in running bond
and solidly grouted.
See MDG Fig. 13.2-7 for a graphical depiction of these
allowable values. An Appendix to the Code gives the
equivalent expressions for SI units.
13.1.3 Shear Design of Reinforced
Masonry
Although rare, masonry that is subjected to axial
tension must be reinforced. The bond between
masonry units and mortar cannot be counted on to
resist axial tension (see Code Section 2.2.4). When net
axial tension exists, or when the fiexural tensile stress
or shear stress values exceed the allowable stresses of
Code Section 2.2, then Case (2) in MDG Section
13.1.1 applies, and the member is designed as
reinforced masonry by Code Section 2.3.
13-3
 C h a p t e r 13

' PA + = + • o

~2 .t',
Reinforcement

Forces on Flexural Axial Combined Flexural

Flexural Member Stresses Stresses and Axial Cases

a) Lonflitudina Stress Distribution

For a unit length or dx
I dx [ forces = 0 (on top segment)
ja
I

V ~---- +tiM fv(b)(dx)=arC= ~ =(assumingjdmomentarm)

Ld,j(ax) = ~ = v

f,~)(ax) Y, =
V
boa')
or approximately
T~ I I ~-- T + d T
jx d~abc= Bond Force f~ = bdV (Code Eq. 2-19)

b) Shear Stress Derivation (for Flexure and Shear in Combination)

n = No. o f Shear Bars

£(b)(dx) = c + dC- C
d
S

v
F~=--
bd
Vm = Shear carried by masonry (IV., + A ~ + Vd + VQ (component) = V
Va = Shear carried by dowel action Neglect Vm, Vj, Vo (component)
Va = Shear carried by aggregate interlock Thus A~ f . d = V and A. = Vs
s f.d

c) Shear Reinforcement Derivation

Fig. 13.1-3 Combined Longitudinal Stress and Shear Stress Derivations for Cracked Section
Concepts, Neglecting Tension in Masonry

13-4
Shear

Any tensile stress contribution of the masonry is 2. Shear walls:

neglected. Thus, when the combined tensile stress a) Where M/Vd< 1.0:
exceeds the allowable values in Code Table 2.2.3.2, the
stress distr~utions in MDG Fig. 13.1-2 change to those
M ¢
in a cracked section as shown in MDG Fig. 13.1-3. Note
F~ = 1 ( 4 - ~--~)~/"~- Code Eq. (2-21)
that in MDG Fig. 13.1-3, tensile stresses in the masonry
are ignored, and all of the tension force is carded by the F~ < 80- 45(~d)psi
reinforcement.
with (M/Vd) taken always as a positive number.
For reinforced masonry, the shear stress is found
from
V b) Where MIVd>__1.0:
v --
Code Eq.(2-19)
bd F~ = ~ - < 35 psi (0.24 MPa) Code Eq. (2-22)
which is an approximation of the formerly used
expression
13.1.3.2 Shear Reinforcement Requir-
V
L- Eq. 13.1-4 ed - -Where shear reinforcement is required, the
bjd calculated shear stress, f~, cannot exceed the allowable
where cracked section properties (MDG Section 11.1) shear stress Fv, which is determined as follows (again,
are used to determine jd, the distance between the note that the Code Appendix gives the equivalent
internal compression and tension forces. MDG Fig. expressions for SI units):
13.1-3 shows thisjd distance and a derivation leading to
Code Eq. (2-19). 1. Flexural members:
Generally, reinforced masonry members without net F~ = 3.0 ~ - _ 150 psi (I .03 MPa) Code Eq. (2-23)
flexural tension can be designed to resist shear by either 2. Shear walls:
Code Section 2.2.5 or Code Section 2.3.5. For a. Where M/Vd< 1.0:
reinforced members subject to flexural tension, shear
must be considered according to Code Section 2.3.5. M
F~ = 1 I 4 - I~-'~)l ~' t

The philosophy of Code Section 2.3.5 is to limit the

allowable shear stress in masonry when no shear
reinforcement is provided. If the shearing stress exceeds
the maximum allowable value for masonry, all shear
stress must be resisted by horizontal and vertical shear
reinforcement. No credit is given for shear carded by the
masonry when shear reinforcement is required. The
required amount of shear reinforcement,A~, is:
Vs
Av - Code Eq. (2-26)
F,d
The derivation of Code Eq. (2-26) is shown in MDG Fig.
13.1-3 (c).
13.1.3.1 Shear Reinforcement Not
Required - Where shear reinforcement is not
- reinforcement, Av, is:
required, the calculated shear stress, f~, as given in Code
Section 2.3.5.2 is not to exceed the allowable shear
stress, F~, determined as follows (note that the Code
Appendix gives the equivalent expressions for SI units):
1. Flexural members:
F~ = ~ < 50 psi (0.35MPa) Code Eq. (2-20)
Code Eq. (2-24)
F~ < 120- 45IV~d/psi
b. Where M/Vd> 1.0
F v = 1.5 ~ ' < 75 psi (0.52 MPa) Code Eq. (2-25)
with (M/Vd) taken always as a positive number.
See MDG Fig 13.2-8 for a depiction of these allowable
values.
Code Section 2.3.5.3.1, requires shear reinforcement
to be provided parallel to the direction of the applied
shear force, and the spacing, s, is not to exceed d/2 or 48
in. (1219 mm). The amount of required shear
Vs
A~- Code Eq. (2-26)
F,a
The derivation of Code Eq. (2-26) is shown in MDG Fig.
13.1-3(c). Code Section 2.3.5.3.2 requires additional
reinforcement of at least (A~ /3) that must be placed

13-5

perpendicular to the shear reinforcement at a uniform
spacing not to exceed 8 ft (2.4 m).
Thus, according to Code Section 2.3, masonry
elements must be reinforced for the primary tension force
in the member, but could be either reinforced or
unreinforced for shear force. The details for Code Eqs.
(2-21), (2-22), (2-23), and (2-24) dealing with shear
walls are included in MDG Section 13.2.
13.1.4 Special Provisions for
Diaphragms
MDG Sections 13.1.1 through 13.1.3 discuss
combined shear and flexure for masonry members
subjected to beam bending, and out-of-plane wall
bending (vertically or horizontally) due to out-of-plane
forces or due to in-plane forces (see MDG Section 13.2).
However, some structural components, such as floor or
roof diaphragms, serve as primary shear elements. These
diaphragm elements are important to the overall lateral
stability of buildings subjected to wind or earthquake
13.2 SHEAR WALLS
The design of shear wails is covered in Code Sections
2.2.3 and 2.2.5 for unreinforced shear walls and Code
Sections 2.3.3 and 2.3.5 for reinforced shear walls.
13.2.1 Definition of a Shear Wall
Code Section 1.6 defines a column as a member
whose ratio of width-to-thickness does not exceed 3 and
whose height exceeds 4 times its thickness. Thus, a
member with a ratio greater than 3 is often considered a
wall. A shear wall is a vertical member that resists lateral
in-plane shear forces from wind or earthquakes in addition
to vertical loads if acting as a loadbearing element (MDG
Fig. 13.2-1).
Vertical Load If
Loadbear|ng
Lateral
Fig. 13.2-1 Illustration of a Shear Wall
13-6
Chapter 13
loads. The force distribution in these diaphragms is
illustrated in MDG Section 9.2.1 for flexible diaphragms
and MDG Section 9.2.2 for rigid diaphragms. Actual as-
built diaphragm stiffness varies between these two
theoretical cases. The designer is cautioned to account
for shear design of the supporting elements to
diaphragms.
Criteria for analyzing diaphragms in masonry
buildings have been developed based on the diaphragm
material type, thickness, configuration, number of sides
connected, and the number of fasteners (Ref. 13.1.2,
13.1.3). The designer must ensure that the connection
between the horizontal diaphragm (floor or roof) and the
vertical lateral load-resisting elements is capable of
transferring the shear. The design of connectors is
covered in MDG Chapter 14. As shown by test results,
the number of sides of a diaphragm that are connected to
vertical lateral load-resisting elements significantly
affects the load capacity of the diaphragm (Ref. 13.1.2).
13.2.2 Function of Shear Walls
Shear wails resist in-plane forces due to wind or
earthquake, and can also act as loadbearing elements to
support vertical loads from the floors or the roof The
stability of a masonry building depends predominantly
on the in-plane capacity of its shear walls. The
building's lateral drift under wind or earthquake loads
is a function of the in-plane stiffness of its shear walls.
A shear wall system uses floor and roof diaphragms to
distribute lateral forces to the shear walls. Load
distribution is based upon the relative lateral stiffnesses
of the shear walls if the floor diaphragms are
lw > 3. 0
t
Shear
rigid, or upon the tributary floor areas if the floor 2. Single or double cross wall system with one-way
diaphragms are flexible. Shear walls also serve as fire slab action [MDG Figs. 13.2-2(b) and 13.2-2(c)],
walls and as building enclosures; in such cases their 3. Longitudinal or spine wall system with one-way
thermal, water-resistance, and acoustical characteristics are slab action [MDG Fig. 13.2-2(d)], and
important, in addition to their appearance and structural 4. Complex systems combining the above systems.
characteristics. In some instances, fire resistance, thermal
In single-story masonry buildings, shear walls are
or acoustical requirements may control the wall thickness.
concentrated at the perimeter where they serve as
enclosures; some also carry vertical loads. Intermediate
13.2.3 Layout of Shear Walls
shear walls can be added to provide stability and
Loadbearing building construction is used
support of the roof system or to reduce diaphragm
predominantly in layouts where the floor area is divided
stresses.
into a number of compartments and in which the floor plan
is repeated at each level for the full height of the building.
13.2.4 Analysis of Shear Walls
Stability in such construction is usually derived from
The global analysis of buildings is covered in
gravity loads and from careful planning of the layout, with
Code Sections 1.1.3, 1.7, and 2.1.1.1. Determination
full utilization of elevator shafts and stairwells to provide
of wall stiffness is required for lateral load distribution
lateral stiffness. The layout is mainly based on the type
and for calculation of building drift. MDG Sections
and function of the building. A large variety of wall
9.2.1 and 9.2.2 discuss global lateral load distribution
arrangements is possible:
on shear walls.
1. Cellular wall system with two-way slab action [MDG
Fig. 13.2-2(a)],

Loadbearing Walls ~- - One-way floor slabs

Non-Loadbearing Walls Two-way floor slabs

__[ ÷--÷ .-.----.-,--.--,-.--.-.-

÷
,,, t

L+ + l = ....=J .... 1=]

a) Cellular wall sWacture b) Single cross-wall structure

i---=l-=-I I' !

I
I
I
,J

1.__-..[_=1
c) Double cross-wall structure
H
d) Spine-wall structure

Fig. 13.2-2 (Plan View) Arrangement of Shear Walls in Multistory Building

13-7
 Chapter 13
Wall stiffness is primarily a function of: For a combination of walls in series [MDG Fig.
1. Wall geometry - - Wall aspect ratio h'/lw affects the 13.2-3(b)] the system stiffness is approximated as:
contribution of shear and bending deformation to the
wall rigidity.
k=( 1 1
2. Boundary conditions - - Restraint at the top of the ~A]+A2+A3' --1- - + l_÷k Eq. 13.2-4
wall affects wall stiffness. Two conditions are
kl k2 k3 J
commonly considered: cantilever and fixed-fixed.
3. O p e n i n g s - The size, location, and arrangement of This expression ignores the effect of rotation at the top of
openings dramatically affects wall stiffness. the wall.
4. Cracking - The extent of cracking applies to For single-story buildings whose wall height-to-
reinforced masonry shear walls. width ratio is less than I, three approximate methods
The lateral stiffiaess of a solid cantilever shear wall based on the parallel and series models can be used,
is: according to Schneider and Dickey (Ref. 13.2.1). The
MDG will present only their Methods I and III.

1
f[ 1 Eq. 13.2-1
Additional information is also presented in Ref. 13.2.2.
kc = ~-~ = Pz(h')3 1.2P~h' Method I - - In this method the wall deflection is
+
L 3E,,1 EvA first calculated assuming a solid cantilever wall, and then
modified to account for openings by subtracting
The lateral stiffness of a solid fixed-fixed shear wall is: deflection of cantilever strips containing openings and
adding deflection due to deformation of piers (considered
frxed top and bottom) within each strip. This method is
= =I l 1.2h'] Eq.13.2-2 presented in detail in MDG Section 9.2.2. Using this
method the rigidity of the wall shown in MDG Fig.
~. 12E,,,I + EvA 13.2-4 can be calculated with the following formulas:
1
The effect of openings on wall stiffiaess depends on the k=--
A
size, shape, and distribution of those openings. Finite
A = A solid -A strip A + A2,3:,5
element methods can be used to accurately determine
1
wall stiffness and response to lateral loading. A2,3,4,5 =
Approximate methods, however, may be used to k2,3,4,5

estimate wall rigidity. k~,3,4,s = k~ + k3,4,5

For a combination of walls in parallel [MDG Fig. 1
k3,4,5 =
13.2-3(a)], the system stiffness is expressed as: A3,4,5

k = k I + k 2 + k3 Eq. 13.2-3 A3,4,5 = A solid3,4,5 - A strip B + m3, 4

1
A3,4 -- _ _
k3 + k4

PL
P,
- - Era,=

a) Walls in Parallel b) Walls in Series

Fig. 13.2-3 Stiffness of Combinations of Shear Walls

13-8
Shear
This method has the advantage that it does not give stiffer than a wall without an opening. This can affect
erroneous results when compared with solid walls. not only the wall in question but also the distribution of
Method III - - In this method, the wall is divided shears to adjacent walls if the floor and roof diaphragms
into elements stacked on top of each other in series; the are rigid or if the walls are in line with each other.
lateral deflection of each element is added to obtain the The percent reduction of wall stiffness due to
total wall deflection. For each part that is a horizontal openings shown in MDG Fig. 13.2-4 has been calculated
strip, the deflection of piers connected in parallel is the using the above two methods and the results are
reciprocal of the sum of rigidities. For the wall shown in presented in MDG Table 13.2.1 for the given geometry.
MDG Fig. 13.2-4, the rigidity is expressed as: As can be seen, Method III results in a higher wall
1 stiffiaess than Method I. Obviously, engineering
k= In-series model
1 + - -1 judgment must be used to select the most appropriate
kl k2,3,4,5 method. For further discussion of this issue, see MDG
Section 9.2.2.
k2,3,4,5 = k 2 + k3,4,5 In-parallel model In multistory construction where corridor openings
I
are common, coupling between adjacent piers may be
k3'4"5= I I In-series model ignored in preliminary design, and the piers can be
--q. assumed to act as cantilevers. This assumption provides
k3,4 k5 a lower bound value for wall stiffness. The continuum
k3, 4 = k 3 + k 4 In-parallel model approach for coupled shear walls used in analysis of
concrete shear walls or the finite element method would
Wall deflection is calculated assuming a fixed provide a more accurate prediction of wall stiffness and
boundary at the top and bottom. Therefore, the method stresses, as long as the coupling beams are stiff enough
ignores the rotation at the top of each strip which is more and are appropriately detailed to transfer the loads
applicable for squat walls where shear deformation is the between wall elements.
predominant mode compared to flexural deformation. Lateral load distribution among walls depends on
This method can give erroneous results. In certain con- relative wall-diaphragm rigidities. When diaphragms are
figurations, a wall with an opening can appear to be stiffer than shear walls, (for example, with rigid concrete
floor slabs) lateral load is distributed among walls in

Table 13.2.1 Reduction of Wall Stiffness Due to Openings

Stiffness of Solid Wall Stiffness of Wall with Openings

Method I Method III

Stiffness % Reduction Stiffiaess % Reduction
0.143 Emt 0.073 Emt 48.9% 0.097 E~t 32.3 %

Strip
A

8'
!
, 2' ,_ 4' _, 2' ,_ 6' _,_2L,

Fig. 13.2-4 Single Stow Wall with Openings

13-9

proportion to their relative lateral stiffnesses. In that
case, if the center of wall rigidities does not coincide with
the line of action of the lateral load, torsion results and
the additional wall shears from this torsional effect
should be considered in the wall design. Most building
codes also require the addition of an "accidental"
torsional moment when earthquake loads are considered
(see MDG Section 9.2.2).
Cracking reduces the stiffness of reinforced masonry
shear walls and therefore affects lateral force distribution
(in the case of rigid floor diaphragms). Cracking also
affects lateral force distribution among wall piers in the
case of perforated walls. The MSJC Code, however,
permits load calculations using untracked sections.
Additional consideration should be given to the
distribution of lateral loads when the diaphragm stiffness
is approximately equal to the overall wall stiffness. The
amount ofhysteretic change in stiffness for each wall and
diaphragm relative to each other should be considered.
However, to account for these changes in relative
stiffness, sophisticated analyses are needed and these
analyses are usually beyond the scope of most designs.
13.2.5 Flexural Design
13.2.5.1 Unreinforced S h e a r Walls -
Shear walls are commonly exposed to combined axial
force from floors and roof and in-plane bending moment
resulting from lateral shear forces. The resulting normal
stresses, fib, can be calculated, assuming plane sections
remain plane, as follows:
fab = f a + fb
P+Mc
fab=A-- I
The resulting stress distribution is shown in MDG Fig.
0.0
(NoTension)U
Fig. 13.2-5 Stress Distribution under Combined Axial and
Flexure for Unreinforced Shear Walls
13-10
Chapter 13
13.2-5. The maximum extreme fiber stress has two
components: one t~om axial load (P/A) and the other
from bending (Me~l). Because the Code provides
different compressive allowable stresses under axial load
and under flexure, the following unity equation is used to
provide a higher margin of safety for compression:
f~ + f b < 1.0 Eq. 13.2-5
Fo F~
Code Section 2.2.3.2 allows flexural tension only in
the transverse direction for unreinforced masonry.
Therefore, flexural tension is assumed not to be allowed
in the in-plane direction (that is, for shear walls), and that
an unreinforced shear wall must have net compression in
the extreme fiber. This condition will control the design
in the case of low gravity loads and high lateral wind or
earthquake loads. In this situation, wails should be
carefully arranged so that enough gravity compression
load exists to fully counteract flexural tension from
lateral loads.
Flanges may be considered effective in resisting
normal stresses from axial load and bending moment.
Code Section 1.9.4 specifies the effective flange width.
The connection of intersecting walls must conform to the
requirements of Code Section 1.9.4.2.5 to achieve
adequate shear transfer at the interface. Code
Commentary Figs. 1.9-2 through 1.9-4 show
recommended details of wall intersections.
13,2,5.2 Reinforced S h e a r Walls - If
flexural tension develops in an extreme fiber of a shear
wall, the wall must have flexural reinforcement,
according to Code Section 2.3.5.2, so that vertical steel
will carry all tension. In this case, Code Section 2.3.3.2.2
limits the masonry compressive stress to 1/3 f " and
Code Section 2.3.2 limits the steel stress to 20 ksi (138
MPa) for Grade 40 or 24 ksi (165 MPa) for Grade 60
~f,,
fb
Shear
steel. In areas of high seismieity, reinforcement of
masonry shear walls is required by local building codes.
Referring to MDG Fig. 13.2-6, the following
compatibility and equilibrium equations can be used to
solve for the location of the neutral axis and the required
amount of steel for rectangular walls (no flanges):
Compatibility Equation:
f,i = fab a, - k a
n kd
Equilibrium Equation:
P =C-T
1
This is a balanced design if the masonry and steel at
extreme locations reach their maximum allowable stress
simultaneously. For less reinforcement than the balanced
amount, allowable tensile stress in the reinforcement will
control the design. This is the most common case for
reinforced masonry walls.
13.2.6 Shear Design
13.2.6.1 Unreinforced S h e a r Walls -
For unreinforced shear walls, the maximum shear stress,
f~, is determined in accordance with Code Section 2.2.5:
f v = VQ
It
where Q,/, and t are calculated based on the uncracked
net cross section of the wall.
The calculated maximum shear stress cannot exceed
the least of four values given in Code Section 2.2.5.2.
The code allowable shear stresses are shown in MDG
Fig., 13.2-7. The Code allows an increase in allowable
shear stress due to friction from gravity load compression
with an upper bound value as shown in the figure. The
friction contribution is due to the assumed force (Nv)
acting normal to shear surface. Nv is typically assumed to
come from dead load only.
Effective flange width should be determined as
shown in Code Commentary Fig. 1.9-5 for calculating
section properties of T, I, or C Sections. Proper
connection details should be provided at the flange-web
interface to ensure adequate shear transfer for full
interaction between the flange and the web. Common
practice is to grout adjacent cells and place horizontal
reinforcement in hollow unit construction for

< di ,,.q
:! p

16

T C

Fig. 13.2-6 Stress Distribution Under Axial Load and

Bending for Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls

13-11
 Chapter 13

1.5dTr~ or 120 psi Maximum

(psi) 60
, , , , ~ ~ Hollow Or Solid

37

50 t00 150 200

N ,(psi)
A

Fig. 13.2-7 Unreinforced Walls - Code Allowables

X ~q'~-7-~) [] Reinforcement resists s h e a r

2.0 ~ n r y resists s h e a r
[ i i i i[1
~ i i HI
r r., ,.+,; ~-
1.5 ....
1.~ M hV h Masonry Shaar Wall
Allowable Shear :s Entire Shear Vd Vd d Fixed at Bottom Only
1.0
v M
,, t d,'i',;, ¸ ~
0.5
re Shear It h

M=hl
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
M = ½,hV.._h Masonry Shear Wall
M/Vd Vd I'd "-2d F i x e d T o p a n d Bottom
ratio

Fig. 13.2-8 Reinforced Shear Walls - Code Allowables

this purpose. See details in the Code Commentary Figs.
1.9-2, 1.9-3 and 1.9-4.
13.2.6.2 Reinforced Shear Walls-Shear
resistance of a wall is provided either by masonry or by
reinforcement. According to the Code, these two
contributions are not additive (see MDG Section
8.4,3.9). If the calculated shear stress exceeds the
allowable shear stress for the masonry, all shear must be
resisted by reinforcement placed parallel to the applied
shear direction (Code Section 2.3.5.3.1). In addition,
Code Section 2.3.5.3.2 requires an accompanying portion
of perpendicular reinforcement in the amount of at least
1/3A~ spaced no more than 8 ft. (2.44m). The allowable
shear stress in either case is given as a function of M/Vd
ratio and the square root off're. Shear wails with lower
aspect ratios (expressed by M/Vd) have higher allowable
shear stress (MDG Fig. 13.2-8). See also MDG Section
13.1.3.2

13-12
Shear

REFERENCES
13.1.1 Higdon, Ohlsen & Stiles, Mechanics of 13.2.1 Schneider, R., and W. Dickey, Reinforced
Materials, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, Masonry Design, 2 "d edition, Prentice Hall,
1960. Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1987.
13.1.2 Porter M. L., A. A. Sabri, "Plank Diaphragm 13.2.2 Drysdale, R.G., Hamid, A.A., Baker, L.F.,
Characteristics. Task 5.1", Final Report, Task Masonry Structures Behavior and Design, 2"~
5.1, Technical Coordinating Committee for Edition, The Masonry Society, Boulder, CO,
Masonry Research, Submitted to National 1999.
Science Foundation, Engineering Research
Institute, Iowa State University, Ames, IA; July
1990.
13.1.3 Porter, M. L., F. S. Yeomans, A. W. Johnson,
"Assembly of Existing Diaphragm Data", Final
Report, Task 5.2, Technical Coordinating
Committee for Masonry Research, Submitted to
National Science Foundation, Engineering
Research Institute, Iowa State University,
Ames, IA; July, 1990.

13-13

REINFORCEMENT AND
CONNECTORS
14.1 GENERAL
This chapter of the MDG addresses issues found in
Code Sections 1.12 and 2.1.8, which provide details of
reinforcement, Code Section 2.1.2, "Anchor Bolts
Solidly Grouted in Masonry," and Specification Article
2.4, "Reinforcement, prestressing tendons and metal
accessories."
14.1.1 Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement for masonry consists of
deformed reinforcing bars, prestressing tendons,
deformed wire, or welded wire fabric, completely
embedded in the masonry. Material requirements for
reinforcement are contained in Specification Article 2.4.
Those items are also discussed in MDG Section 3.5, and
are briefly mentioned here for completeness.
Specification Article 2.4A addresses material
requirements for reinforcing bars. Specification Article
2.4 B addresses material requirements for prestressing
tendons. Material requirements for joint reinforcement,
wire, and welded wire fabric are covered in Specification
Article 2.4C. Material requirements for anchors, ties and
accessories are addressed in Specification Article 2.4D.
Specification Articles 2.4 E, F and G provide
requirements for stainless steel, coatings, and corrosion
protection respectively. Specification Article 2.4 H
provides requirements for prestressing anchorages,
couplers and end blocks.
Deformed reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM
14-1
14
A 615, A 616, A 617, or A 706 (billet, rail, axle, and low
alloy, respectively). Coated, deformed reinforcing bars
must conform to ASTM A 767 (galvanized) or A 775
(epoxy-coated).
Prestressing tendons must conform to ASTM A 421
(wire and low-relaxation wire), ASTM A 416 (strand,
low-relaxation strand), or ASTM A 722 (bars). Other
materials are permitted if they meet the detailed
requirements of Specification Article 2.4 B.
Joint reinforcement must conform to ASTM A 951.
Deformed wire must conform to ASTM A 496, and
deformed welded wire fabric must conform to ASTM
A 497.
Stainless steel reinforcement must comply with
ASTM A 580.
Typical uses of each type of reinforcement are
shown in MDG Figs. 14.1-1 through 14.1-4. Fig. 14.1-1
shows deformed reinforcing bars in a grouted masonry
wall. Fig. 14.1-2 shows j oint reinforcement. Fig. 14.1-3
shows welded wire fabric in the topping of a floor slab
connected to a masonry wall. Fig. 14.1-4 shows a post-
tensioning tendon in a masonry wall.
14.1.2 Connectors
In Code Section 1.6, a connector is defined as "a
mechanical device for securing two or more pieces, parts,
or members together, including anchors, wall ties, and
fasteners." Anchors connect wythes of masonry to

intersecting masonry wythes or other structural elements;
wall ties interconnect wythes of multiwythe masonry; and
fasteners connect nonstructural elements to masonry.
Material requirements for connectors are given in
Specification Article 2.4 D. Those items are also
discussed in MDG Section 3.5, and are briefly mentioned
here for completeness.
Connectors must conform to ASTM A 36 (plate and
bent-bar anchors), ASTM A 366 (sheet-metal anchors
and ties), ASTM A 185 (wire mesh ties), ASTM A 82
(wire ties and anchors), or ASTM A 307, Grade A
(anchor bolts).
Stainless-steel connectors must comply with ASTM
I
Fig. 14.1-1 Typical Application of Deformed Reinforcing Bars in Grouted Masonry Wall
14-2
Chapter 14
A 666 (plate and bent-bar anchors), ASTM A 167 (sheet-
metal anchors and ties), or ASTM A 580 (wire ties and
anchors).
Carbon-steel connectors must be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 641, ASTM A 153, or ASTM
A 653 (depending on their configuration and exposure),
or epoxy-coated in accordance with ASTM A 899.
Typical uses of each type of connector are shown in
MDG Figs. 14.1-5 through 14.1-8. MDG Fig. 14.1-5
shows typical veneer ties, and Fig. 14.1-6 shows typical
adjustable pintle ties. MDG Fig. 14.1-7 shows typical
connectors, and Fig. 14.1-8 shows typical global
applications of them.
Reinforcement and Connectors

15in = 15in I

A) LadderType

IB) 3-Wire Ladder Type

I I
Ig III ' Ig III

,/\/',,.,
C) Truss Type

D) 3-Wire Truss Type

E) Tab Type

Fig. 14.1-2 Typical Bed Joint Reinforcement (BIA Technical Note 44B)

Welded Wire Fabric

In Slab Topping ~ I

Fig. 14.1-3 Typical Use of Welded Wire Fabric

14-3
 C h a p t e r 14

.,~......~TOP ANCHORAGE
TOP ANCHORAGE

I .
-
BLOCK OR BOND
BEAM
...~-MASONRY UNITS
(SINGLEWYTHE
SHOWN)

......_PRESTRESSING
f TENDONS(BONDED
OR UNBONDED;
RESTRAINEDOR
UNRESTRAINED)
[ OUNDATION
NCHORAGE

FOUNDATION
I L..... I~

Fig. 14.1-4 Typical Use of Post-tensioning Tendons (NCMA TEK 14-20)

~ " ~ A ) RECTANGULARTIE

~ ' ~ B ) 'Z' TIE

~~ '
ORROOAT~O~I~
..:

Fig. 14.1-5 Typical Veneer Ties (BIA Technical Note 44B)

14-4
R e i n f o r c e m e n t and C o n n e c t o r s

Fig. 14.1-6 Typical Adjustable PinUe Ties (BIA Technical Note 44B)

Fig. 14.1-7 Typical Connectors (BIA Technical Note 44B)

14-5

Grout both ceils
Fig. 14.1-8 Typical Global Applications of Connectors (NCMA TEK 12-1)
1 4 . 1 . 3 C o n n e c t i o n s B e t w e e n Inter-
secting Walls
According to Code Section 1.9.4.2.5, masonry walls
depending upon one another for lateral support are to be
anchored or bonded at locations where they meet or
14.2 S T E E L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
14.2.1 Requirements for Steel
Reinforcement
In general, steel reinforcement must be sufficiently
strong to safely resist the forces to which it will be
subjected; it must be sufficiently corrosion-resistant to
last as long as the structure in which it is used; and it
must have enough embedment at each end to transmit the
forces acting on it.
In unreinforced masonry design (Code Section 2.2),
reinforcement is not used to resist calculated tensile
stresses from applied loads, but rather to control the
effects of movements from temperature changes,
shrinkage, and other sources.
In reinforced masonry design (Code Section 2.3),
reinforcement resists calculated tensile stresses and
sometimes calculated compressive stresses from applied
loads. For example, fiexural stresses in reinforcement
caused by wind forces acting perpendicular to the
masonry wall are limited to Code -allowable values; the
reinforcement area must not be significantly reduced by
corrosion; and the reinforcement must be firmly
14-6
C h a p t e r 14
intersect, using interlocking units, reinforcement, or
connectors. One example of the use of connectors for
this application is shown in MDG Fig. 14.1-8(c).
Additional illustrations of these techniques are given in
Code Commentary Figs.l.9-2, 1.9-3 and 1.9-4.
anchored, at each point, to carry the stresses developed at
that point.
14.2.1,1 Strength Requirements for
Reinforcement m The designer specifies a
sufficiently large reinforcement area so that the tensile or
compressive stress in the reinforcement does not exceed
the corresponding allowable values specified in Code
Section 2.3.2.
14.2.1.2 Corrosion Resistance and
Protection Requirements for Reinforce-
ment M I n the context of the Code, the corrosion
resistance and protection of reinforcing bars and welded
wire fabric are provided for by ensuring that the
reinforcement has sufficient cover as specified in Code
Section 1.12.4. Joint reinforcement requires both
corrosion-resistant materials and sufficient cover.
14.2.1.3 Embedment Requirements
for Reinforcement - - W e l d e d w i r e f a b r i c d e r i v e s
its anchorage primarily from the grip of the cross wires.
Deformed reinforcing bars are anchored primarily by
interlock at the deformations themselves. If the cover
and the distance between reinforcing bars are large,
R e i n f o r c e m e n t and C o n n e c t o r s
failure occurs by yielding and fracture of the
reinforcement itself, or by pullout of the reinforcing bar.
If the cover to the reinforcing bar or the spacing between
adjacent bars is relatively small, failure can occur by
splitting fi'om the reinforcement to the free surface, or by
splitting from one bar to another. Code Section 1.12.2.1
prohibits the use of reinforcing bars larger than bar
size #11.
Code Section 2.1.8 specifies that at least the
required embedment length be provided on each side of
each critical section. The required embedment length
corresponds to a uniform allowable bond stress of 160
psi (1.1 MPa).
By treating anchorage requirements for deformed
reinforcing bars in terms of a required development
length, additional checks are required for some specific
situations. For designing against bar-to-bar and bar-to-
surface splitting, discussed previously, another
significant check concerns the required development
length for reinforcing bars terminating at a simple
support or point of inflection. At first glance, since stress
in the reinforcing bars at the simple support is zero, no
development length would apparently be required
beyond the simple support, regardless of the bar
diameter. However, if the reinforcing bar stress (and
consequent reinforcing bar force) increases away from
the simple support at a rate faster than that force can be
resisted by bond, the reinforcing bar will be insufficiently
anchored at the simple support, and additional
14.3 C O N N E C T O R S
14.3.1 Requirements for Connectors
In general, connectors must be sufficiently strong to
safely resist the forces to which they will be subjected;
they must be sufficiently corrosion resistant to last as
long as the structure in which they are used; they must
have sufficient anchorage at each end to transmit the
forces acting on them; and, they must be sufficiently stiff
so that the masonry they connect actually behaves as
assumed in design.
For example, ties connecting the two wythes of a
masonry cavity wall must have an adequate factor of
safety against failure under the loads imposed by wind or
earthquake forces acting on the outer wythe; their area
must not be significantly reduced by corrosion; they must
remain firmly attached to both wythes; and, their stiffness
must be consistent with that assumed in computing the
distribution of load between the wythes. Usually, this
last requirement means that the ties, when loaded axially,
14-7
embedment must be provided, either by a standard hook
or by extending the reinforcing bar past the simple
support. A code for a different material (Re£ 14.2.1),
which also uses the development length approach,
addresses this issue. The MSJC Code currently contains
no provisions or recommendations. A check for this
situation, as demonstrated in MDG Example TMS-16,
should be made.
Code Section 2.1.8.3.2 requires that for flexural
members that are part of a primary lateral load-resisting
system, no less than 25% of the positive moment
reinforcement is required to extend into the support and
be anchored in order to develop the allowable tensile
stress, Fs. This requirement is an attempt to achieve a
ductile response in the event ofoverstress.
Code Section 2.1.8.3.3.2 requires that at least one-
third of the total reinforcement provided for moment at a
support be extended beyond the point of inflection a
certain limiting distance to provide for possible shifting
of the moment diagram.
14.2.2 Design of Steel
Reinforcement
Examples of design of reinforcement for strength
and corrosion resistance are given in MDG Chapter 17.
Code Section 1.12.2 addresses limitations on sizes of
reinforcing bars and joint reinforcement. Code Section
1.12.3 covers placement limits for reinforcement.
must be rigid compared to the walls when loaded out of
plane. The Code requires that wythes of multiwythe
walls be connected using wire ties or cross wires of joint
reinforcement. Code Sections 2.1.3.3.2 and 2.1.3.2.5
specify the number and size of the ties.
14,3.1.1 Strength Requirements for
Connectors The Code assumes that connectors
- -
with negligible shear stiffiaess (for example, dovetail
anchors and wire ties) act primarily in tension and
compression rather than shear. Connectors with
significant shear stiffness (for example, bolts) can act in
shear as well as tension or compression. The strength of
a connector itself is provided for by ensuring that the
connector has sufficient cross-sectional area to resist the
forces acting on it. This is accomplished either by
specifying maximum allowable loads on
 Chapter 14

? P (failure) ? P (failure)

Assumed Cone for Calculation

\ of Ap, Code Equation 2-3

lb I !~'~:!~.~ " ~ c a l
~'•" lb S i ~ : ! ~ ~.~~..~
"" ~ ~ ~ Conical
" ' " "...Failure - ~ . ' - ' " •. . . . •- ~ ~ :. ~Failure
!•~•i: :.:} •••:: • ••: "•'•" Surface •: • "••: • • " "'. Surface
. = • " . O o . . ; " w
i I ~ I i I i I i I ii i i i i i i I ~1 . • o =o • • • • • • ==
, .• • • • ° . m m • ° • . • ° "| ; I ••° o• ° • • • . . . • , • • • °= |
• •. • . ° ° ° ~ . • ° • . ° • - • • o• . . . . . m = = . • . o • ~ •

Fig. 14.3-1 Typical Conical Breakout Failure of Anchor Bolts

connectors (Code Section 2.1.2), or by specifying material, and the proximity of the connector to other
maximum spacing requirements (Code Section 2.1.3.3.2 connectors or to free surfaces.
and Specification Article 3.4 D). Connectors acting in Connectors without heads (for example, flat anchors,
compression must have sufficient elastic buckling bolts, or wall ties) transfer tensile forces by frictional
resistance. In the case of wire ties, this is ensured by resistance between the connector and the surrounding
limits on maximum cavity width and anchor spacing material. If the cover to the connector is small and the
[Code Section 2.1.3.3.1 (f)]. connector transfers sufficient force to the surrounding
14.3.1.2 Corrosion Resistance and material, failure can also occur by transverse splitting
Protection Requirements for Con- between the connector and the free surface. This type of
n e c t o r s - - The Code requires that a connector either failure is discussed further in MDG Section 14.2.1.3
be of stainless steel (Specification Article 2.4 E) or have dealing with reinforcing bars.
a sufficient thickness of corrosion-resistant galwnizing The Code requires that embedment requirements for
or epoxy (Specification Article 2.4F). Embedded connectors be satisfied in the following ways: headed
connectors must be protected by a sufficient thickness of anchors, as shown in Code Commentary Fig. 2.1-1, must
cementitious material (Specification Article 3.4 D. 1). be embedded as specified in Code Section 2.1.2.2.1; wall
14.3.1.3 E m b e d m e n t Requirements ties must be embedded as specified in Specification
for Connectors m Headed connectors (for example, Article 3.4 D.1. No specific requirements apply to
bolts) transfer tensile forces by direct bearing against the unbent anchors without heads.
surrounding mortar or grout. Typical bolt heads have 14.3.1.4 Stiffness Requirements for
sufficient area to preclude local bearing failure of the Connectors - - Although design is typically more
surrounding cementitious material. Headed connectors concerned with strength than with stiffness, connectors
located far from a free edge and loaded in tension or must be sufficiently stiff so that the masonry they connect
shear either fail in the anchor itself, or by the breaking actually behaves as assumed in design. As noted above,
out of a roughly conical volume of grouted masonry connectors (with the exception of bolts) are usually
surrounding the anchor (MDG Fig. 14.3-1). A headed assumed to transfer tensile and compressive forces only.
connector's tensile or shear capacity as governed by steel The axial stiffness of most connectors is given by the
failure depends on the connector steel embedment depth product of their cross-sectional area and modulus of
and its cross-sectional area; a headed connector's tensile elasticity, divided by their unsupported length. Even ties
or shear capacity as governed by grout, mortar, or unit with small cross-sectional areas have a higher axial
failure depends on the embedment depth of the stiffness than the out-of-plane stiffness of the masonry
connector, the tensile strength of the surrounding wythes they connect and are therefore sufficiently stiff to

14-8
R e i n f o r c e m e n t and C o n n e c t o r s
satisfy the general requirement given previously. 14.3.2 Design of Connectors
Adjustable ties, however, as described in Code Design procedures for connectors are illustrated in
Section 2.1.3.3.2, are usually more flexible than straight MDG Examples TMS-22, TMS-23, TMS-26, TMS-27,
ties. Their flexibility is due to the fact that they deform DPC-17, DPC-18, DPC-19, DPC-20, DPC-21, RCJ-3,
in flexure and shear, as well as axially. Adjustable ties RCJ-4, RCJ-1 I, RCJ-12, RCJ-13, RCJ-14, and RCJ-18
have a gap between the two parts comprising them. The in MDG Chapter 17.
flexibility of adjustable ties is intended to be controlled
by the maximum limitation [Code Section 2.1.3.3.2(c)]
of 1-1/4 in. (31 mm) on misalignment of bed joints
between wythes.

REFERENCES

14.2.1 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete ACI 318-99 and Commentary ACI
318R-99, American Concrete Institute,
Farmington Hills, Michigan, 1999.
Select Bibliography
ACI Committee 408, "Suggested Development, Splice,
and Standard Hook Provisions for Deformed Bars in
Tension" (ACI 408.1R-90), American Concrete
Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1990.
BIA Technical Note 44B, "Wall Ties for Brick Masonry
Construction, March 1987, Reissued September
1988.
Brown, R. H. and Whitlock, A. R., "Strength of Anchor
Bolts in Masonry," Journal of the Structural
Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, New
York, NY, v. 109, No. 6, June 1983, pp. 1362-1374.
NCMA TEK 12-1A, "Anchors for Ties for Masonry,"
1999.
NCMA TEK 14-20, "Post-Tensioned Concrete
Masonry," 1997.
Maurenbrecher, A.H.; R.J. Brousseau; and C.T. Grimm:
"Corrosion of Metal Connectors in Masonry
Cladding," The Construction Specifier, The
Construction Specifications Institute, Alexandria,
VA, Ocotber 1998, pp. 51-64.

14-9

EMPIRICAL DESIGN
& VENEER
15.1 HISTORY
Beginning with the Code of Hammurabi (2123 -
2081 B.C.), man has been developing design standards
for structural masonry. Some of the first standards
specified such requirements as minimum wall thickness
and maximum building height. The structural design of
historic buildings was based upon requirements for
mass, minimum wall thickness, maximum wall height,
crosswalls, quality of materials, and workmanship.
The modem empirical standard (ANSI A 41.1,
American Standard Building Code Requirements for
Masonry) was originally issued by the National Bureau
of Standards as Miscellaneous Publication 211 in
1944. That document has been the basis for empirical
design standards in model building codes, engineering
15.2 G E N E R A L D E S C R I P T I O N
Code Chapter 5, Empirical Design of Masonry,
describes requirements for unreinforced masonry only;
reinforcement is not considered. Empirically designed
masonry has been structurally satisfactory and "cost-
effective." If the proposed structural masonry system is
not permitted to be designed with the empirical design
requirements, the designer is required to design
according to the rational design requirements presented
in Code Section 2.2 for Unreinforced Masonry and
Code Section 2.3 for Reinforced Masonry Code
Chapter 4, Prestressed Masonry Design, provides a
further rational design options. Members not
participating in the lateral force-resisting system of a
building may be empirically designed by Code Chapter
15-1
15
reference standards, architectural graphic standards,
and textbooks.
These standards have been based on historical
performance, including lateral stability, buckling of
masonry walls, compressive strength, minimum wall
thickness, and associated requirements. Because
masonry materials have substantial compressive
strength and durability, but low tensile bond strength,
empirical design usually contemplates walls that are
thick enough for the vertical compressive force
resultant to act in the middle third of the structural
wall. This prevents flexural tension.
5 even though the lateral force-resisting system is
designed under Code Chapters 2, and 4.
The Code empirical design section has been
improved over the previous empirical standard, ANSI
A 41.1. Arbitrary requirements have been removed
which required very thick masonry wails and unrealistic
masonry sizes when compared with masonry designed
using rational requirements. The empirical design
procedure continues to be successful when used
according to the criteria prescribed in the Code. The
important difference between this Code and previous
codes is the restricted use of empirical design under
certain loading criteria and building configurations.

MONADNOCK BUILDING, CHICAGO, IL
Sixteen Story Building, Six Foot Thick Walls
An Example of Empirical Design Requirements
Before Rational Engineering Methods
Fig. 15.1-1 Examples of Empirically Designed Buildings
15.3 LIMITATIONS
In accordance with Code Section 5.1.2, the
empirical design procedure is not to be used in the
following circumstances:
1. Buildings, any parts of buildings, or any other
masonry structure located in Seismic Performance
Categories D or E; nor for lateral force-resisting-
systems for structures in Seismic Performance
Category B or C. Empirical design procedures
have, however, been successfully used in areas
currently identified as Seismic Performance
Category A.
2. Strucatres subjected to wind velocity pressure in
excess of 25 psf(1200 Pa);
3. Horizontal loads from sources other than permitted
wind or seismic loads;
15-2
C h a p t e r 15
BRICK AND CONCRETE MASONRY
CONSTRUCTION EXAMPLE
Recommended Empirical Design
According to the Code Requirements.
4. Foundation walls not satisfying Code Section
5.6.3;
5. Unreinforced masom-y laid in other than running
bond (Code Section 5.7.5.2);
6. Masonry veneer walls (Code Chapter 6);
7. Buildings taller than 35 ft (10.7 m) that rely on
masonry walls for lateral load resistance (except
for masonry infill walls);
8. Cantilevered retaining walls and
9. Glass unit masonry (Code Chapter 7).
Masonry infill walls not part of the lateral load-resisting
system can be designed by the empirical procedure for
Seismic Performance Categories A, B, or C.
Empirical Design & V e n e e r
15.4 E M P I R I C A L DESIGN R E Q U I R E M E N T S
15.4.1 Materials and Specifications then apply to the l/t ratio. Code Section 5.5 specifies
As with all masonry, empirically designed masonry span-to-thickness ratios, which determine the required
must be constructed in accordance with the thickness for a given span (see MDG Figs. 15.4-1 and
Specification to assure compliance with the design. 15.4-2). No matter what lateral support system is used,
The Specification requires the designer to specify the masonry element must be adequately anchored to
selected materials and methods. The extent of quality the support element in order for it to function properly
control and inspection necessary for each project is also (see MDG Section 15.4.7).
defined by the Specification. For empirical design the Design of lateral support addresses two distinct
Code does not require thatf'm be specified. The reader issues:
is referred to MDG Chapters 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 for 1. Lateral support systems (cross walls, pilasters,
additional information. buttresses, or other structural frame members)
based upon empirical or rational design methods,
15.4.2 Lateral Stability and
Shear wall spacing requirements are an integral 2. Masonry wall thickness based upon h/t or l/t ratios
part of the Code requirements for empirical design. and minimum thickness requirements.
The structural integrity of an exterior masonry wall is Code Table 5.5.1, Code Section 5.5.2, and Code
based not only on its' flexural and axial strength, but Section 5.6.3 provisions for lateral support are
also on lateral stability normally provided by shear summarized in MDG Table 15.4-1.
walls. Out-of-plane forces caused by wind or seismic
loads, imposed on an exterior wall surface, are The designer must not only determine the wall
transferred to the roof or floor diaphragm system and thickness but also design the lateral support system and
then to the shear walls. Code Section 5.3.1.1 stipulates the connections transferring the forces from the wall to
a minimum thickness of 8 in. (200 mm) for masonry the lateral support. As an example, roof diaphragms
shear walls. Code Section 5.3.1.3 specifies shear wall must be designed to transmit out-of-plane forces on
spacing requirements, which previously had been listed
in other documents as recommended practices. Table 15.4-1 Wall Lateral Support
Requirements
15.4.3 Compressive Stress Require-
ments CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM
Code Section 5.4 specifies conservative values of //t or h/t
allowable compressive stress for empirical design of
Bearing Walls
masonry. The allowable stresses in Code Table 5.4.2,
are based on the gross cross-sectional area of the Solid or Grouted 20
masonry wall, using actual dimensions rather than All Other 18
nominal dimensions.
Non Bearing Walls
15.4.4 Lateral Support Require- Exterior 18
ments Interior 36
Lateral support is a primary requirement in the
Cantilever Walls
structural design of masonry walls using the empirical
requirements. Lateral support elements brace the Solid 6
masonry and permit the transfer of loads to the resisting Hollow 4
elements. Decisions about the types and locations of
Parapets (8 in. thick minimum) "3
support elements for the masonry affect the masonry
design. For example, a wall may span vertically The Codecalls for the thicknessto be the nominalwallthicknessfor
between floors and roof. The floor to floor height solid walls and for hollowwalls bonded by masonryheaders; and to
determines the span length of the wall and the Code be the sum of the nominalthicknessof the wythesfor non-composite
limits the h/t ratio. Alternatively, walls may span walls.
horizontally between crosswalls, and the Code limits

15-3
 Chapter 15

'orced Bond
1 Distributes
al Loads to Roof

j°
c

/ E

rough
II Flashing

SINGLE WYTHE WALL D O U B L E W Y T H E WALL ( N o t e : t = t, + t2 )

Fig. 15.4-1 h/t Ratios

1" ExpansionGap,Typical ~Steel Column,Typical

-~ l = Horizontal Span ~--

~Control I< l = H°riz°nta' Span ~ ~ ~aSs~n~

~,

SimpleSpanDeflection

Fig. 15.4-2 l/t Ratios

15-4
Empirical Design & V e n e e r

Floor
Floor Structure
Anchorage
\
Grade Away
From Bldg.

N,--
.,-.,CO
e-
t-- Thickness
+., :=_- •~ E
t'~LL Table 5.6.3.1
-r- E
Eo Extruded
Polystyrene
Insulation
x
~D Radius and
Damp-Proof

Continuous ~ ' ~.... ~ ° ~ -°

Perimeter ~ i ~ ~'
Drain

Fig. 15.4-3 Foundation Wall Section

wails to the in-plane lateral force-resisting shear walls.
A bond beam, although not required by the Code, is
commonly installed at the level of the diaphragm
support element to transfer forces from the wall to the
diaphragm, and vice versa.
15.4.5 Thickness of Masonry
15.4.5.1 Minimum Thickness Cri-
teria- Code Section 5.6.1 requires an arbitrary
minimum nominal masonry thickness to limit
inadvertent axial load eccentricity in masonry bearing
walls. Unreinforced masonry walls may crack under
eccentric loading that produces tensile stresses in the
wall. The arbitrary minimum thickness requirement,
together with appropriate details, will limit cracking.
Flexural cracking in unreinforced masonry constitutes
failure. In empirically designed masonry, flexural
tensile stresses are intended to be limited by arbitrary
minimum thickness (Code Section 5.6.1) requirements,
plus appropriate detailing.
1 5 . 4 , 5 . 2 Foundation W a lls - - Masonry
foundation walls, as shown in MDG Fig. 15.4-3, may
be designed according to the empirical design
provisions of Code Section 5.6.3.
The following empirical criteria are intended for
basement foundation wall design:
1. The maximum height of the wall between
lateral supports (usually between the basement
floor and the first floor) is 8 ft-0 in. (2.44 m).
Cantilever walls (no lateral support at top) are
not permitted.
. The finished terrain must be graded to drain
surface water away from foundation walls.
3. Backfill must be designed to drain ground
water away from foundation walls.
Recommended details include:
a) clean granular backfill, and
b) an operational drain system.
. Lateral support must be provided at the top of
foundation walls prior to backfilling.
5. The length of foundation walls between
perpendicular masonry walls or pilasters must
not exceed 3 times the basement wall height.
. The backfill must be granular and soil
conditions in the area must be non-expansive.
7. Masonry must be laid in running bond using
Type M or S mortar.
1 5 . 4 . 5 . 3 Foundation Piers - - A new Code
Section provides for the minimum thickness of
masonry for foundation piers. Foundation piers have
been used for residential construction and other lightly
loaded conditions where the pier height is usually not
more than four times the thickness of the masonry.
The minimum dimension offoundation piers shall
be 8 in., as required by Code Section 5.6.4.

15-5

C o d e T a b l e 5.6.3.1 F o u n d a t i o n W a l l C o n s t r u c t i o n
Foundation Wall Construction Nominal Thickness,
in. (mm)
8 (203)
Hollow Unit Masonry 10 (254)
12 (3.5)
8 (203)
Solid Unit Masonry 10 (254)
12 (305)
8 (203)
Fully GroutedMasonry 10 (254)
12 (305)
15.4.6 Bond
Code Section 5.7 addresses the required
connections between the facing and backing of
multiwythe masonry walls.
1 5 . 4 , 6 , 1 M a s o n r y H e a d e r s m Before the
development of metal ties, masonry headers were used
to connect the wythes of multiwythe wails. The details
shown in Code Commentary Fig. 5.7-1 describe the
Code requirements for the lapping of masonry unit
headers to achieve monolithic action of multiwythe
walls. The Code establishes minimum requirements to
connect the two wythes for any masonry material
types. There is the potential for water transmission
across wythes. Differential movement between the
inner and outer wythes due to unequal gravity loading
or due to differential thermal or moisture behavior
could potentially result in fracture of the masonry
header. If masonry headers are used, then the same
type of masonry unit should be used for both wythes.
As with all masonry construction, the structural system
must be designed for expansion and contraction by the
addition of movement joints, however with masonry
header construction, the designer must also consider the
rigid tie connection between wythes.
Masonry header details for both solid masonry
units, according to Code Section 5.7.2.1, and hollow
masonry units, according to Code Section 5.7.2.2, are
shown in Code Commentary Fig. 5.7-1. If both hollow
and solid masonry units are combined in a wall, the
stricter Code requirement governs.
1 5 , 4 . 6 , 2 M e t a l T i e s - - The most common
system for connecting multiwythe masonry walls is
15-6
Chapter 15
Maximum Depth of
Unbalanced Backfill, ft (m)
5 (1.52)
6 (1.83)
7 (2.13)
5 (1.5)
7 (2.13)
7 (2.13)
7(2.13)
8 (2.44)
8 (2.44)
metal ties (see Code Section 5.7.3). The metal tie
system has several advantages compared with the
masonry header system: 1) it accommodates vertical
and horizontal adjustment during construction,
resulting in straighter walls; 2) it allows minor
differential movement between multiwythe walls; and
3) it provides more water resistance than header
bonding.
The empirical metal tie requirements shown in
Code Commentary Fig. 2.1-8 have been successfully
used in multiwythe masonry walls, with cavity widths
not exceeding 4 in. (100 mm), to transfer lateral loads
to both wythes. A typical cavity wall system has a 4 in.
(102 mm) brick masonry outer wythe, a 3 in. (76 mm)
cavity which includes 1 in. (25 mm) rigid insulation,
and an interior concrete masonry wythe whose
thickness is based upon other empirical requirements
described in this chapter.
15.4.7 Anchorage
15.4.7.1 Intersecting Walls m
Intersecting masonry walls that depend upon each other
for lateral support must be anchored at their
intersection to enhance structural integrity of the
building. Code Section 5.8.2 requirements represent
standards for masonry walls that have been successful
in the past. Interior nonloadbearing walls may be
mortared or mechanically tied to the floor below for
lateral support. Without specific restraint at the top,
such walls must be considered cantilevered from the
floor. It is undesirable to connect the interior
nonloadbearing wall rigidly to the roof or floor above,
Empirical Design & V e n e e r

Metal Deck on
h CMU Steel Joists
n Joists

)od Floor
CMU Wood Joist
Header Joint Attached to
Bond Beam
Block
. .~.
Bond Beam .

Solid
CMU
Anchors 112" Bolts on q
~"0.C. Spacing 15" L Into
- - Masonry or Hooked to
Bond Beam
am

th (To
Grout)

WOOD FLOOR JOIST STEEL ROOF J O I S T

Fig. 15.4-4 Typical Floor and Roof Anchorage Methods

w
t -I

4" min.

t I
Lintels Required for Section Through
Openings > 12" Lintel
Fig. 15.4-5 Opening Support

because the temporary live load deflection of the
structure can impose unanticipated stresses that may
cause cracking. Connections that permit vertical slip
may be used (MDG Section 15.4.7.2), or the
intersecting walls may be anchored with masonry
bonding, as described in Code Section 5.8.2.1 and
shown in Code Commentary Fig. 1.9-2, or metal straps
may be used as described in Code Section 5-.8.2.2
through Code Section 5-.8.2.5. and illustrated in Code
Commentary Fig. 1.9-3.
15.4.7.2 Floor and Roof Anchorage
Floors and roofs must be anchored to the exterior
masonry wall to provide lateral support for the wall and
to transfer lateral loads to the horizontal diaphragm.
Diaphragm connections are required not only at the
bearing walls, but also at the nonloadbearing walls,
where floor or roof framing is parallel to the wall.
Examples of the fastening systems described in Code
Section 5.8.3 are shown in MDG Fig. 15.4-4. Interior
nonloadbearing walls may be connected to the floors or
roof above for lateral support, if the connection permits
the diaphragm to freely deflect vertically.
15.4.7.3 Walls Adjoining Structural
Framing - Code Section 5.8.4 presents a general
minimum requirement of metal anchor area and spacing
that permits the masonry to be keyed to the structure.
Where masonry walls are anchored to structural
framing for lateral support, care must be taken to
provide lateral support while isolating the masonry
from the structural frame. Inadvertent loading of
unreinforced masonry walls connected to ductile steel
frames may cause masonry fracture. If net uplift occurs
based on roof loading in Code Section 1.7.2, the uplift
must be resisted entirely by a design anchorage using
Code Section 2.1 & 2.3.

15-7

I I
//~
Fig. 15.4-6 Minimum End Bearing Length
15.4.8 Miscellaneous Requirements
15.4.8.1 Chases and Recesses-
Lintels are required above openings wider than 12
in.(300 mm) according to Code Section 5.9.1 (see
MDG Fig. 15.4-5).
15.4.8.2 Lintels - Lintels may be steel,
concrete, or masonry. Masonry lintels must be
designed in accordance with Code Sections 1.10.1 and
2.3.3.4. Code Section 5.9.2 requires a minimum lintel
end bearing length of 4 in. (100 mm) as shown in MDG
Fig. 15.4-6. The minimum bearing length is intended
to allow for minor imperfections within the several
building materials involved. All masonry bearing
conditions must be sized for width, length, and material
type using a bearing stress analysis. The required end
bearing lengths are greater for heavier loads or longer
span lintels. Lintel bearings, in general, do not require
bearing plates. If they do, the edge of the bearing plate
should be at least 1 in. (25 mm) back from the opening,
as shown in MDG Fig. 15.4-6. Lintels rarely need
15.5 V E N E E R
Masonry veneers are often selected for the exterior
walls of buildings. Code Chapter 6 addresses masonry
veneer constructed of fired clay and portland cement
materials. The Code currently does not cover stone
veneers.
Veneer is, by definition, nonstructural. It is the
facing or ornamentation attached to a structural
C h a p t e r 15
NNI
+
r~ r="- Opening
4" Minimum
End Bearing
Grout Hollow
~ Units at Lintel
Bearing or Use
Solid Units
anchor bolts. For long lintels care should be taken to
avoid edge loading of the masonry by deflection of the
lintel.
15,4.8.3 Support on Wood --Code
Section 5.9.3 prohibits the support of masonry by
wooden girders or other forms of wood construction.
The basis of the exclusion is the concern of the wooden
element's fire resistance compared with that of the
masonry, and the potential implications to public health
and safety.
15.4,8.4 C o r b e l l i n g - - Code Section 5.9.4
states the provisions for corbelling in masonry walls of
hollow and solid units. Only solid units may be used
for corbelling. The general design requirements are
shown in Code Commentary Fig. 5.9-1. If choosing a
corbelling arrangement more extreme than that
permitted by Code Section 5.9.4, the designer must
verify general structural stability and flexural tensile
capacity using the rational design sections of the Code.
backing. The selection of a veneer facing is usually
based on appearance, resistance to water penetration,
heat loss or gain, ability to resist the effects of weather,
and maintenance costs. The backing is the structural
surface or assembly to which the veneer is attached and
can be constructed of concrete, masonry, steel, wood,
or other materials.
15-8
Empirical Design & V e n e e r
The Code recognizes two methods for attaching
the masonry veneer to the backing. The first, anchored
veneer, is connected across a cavity by metal anchors
fastened to the backing. The second adhered veneer, is
connected to the backing by bonding with portland
cement-based materials, without an intervening cavity
or air space.
Because the definition of veneer includes masonry
exterior material, it is necessary that the Code contain
provisions for masonry veneer. Requirements for
veneer are found in model building codes. Since it is
the intent of the MSJC Code to cover all model
building code requirements for masonry applications, it
is logical to include requirements for masonry veneer
even though it is not structural.
Before addressing the specific requirements for
anchored veneer and adhered veneer, general design
concepts will be presented.
15.5.1 General Design Concepts for
Veneer
The Code states that masonry veneer is not subject
to the limitations on tensile stresses contained in Code
Section 2.2 on uureinforced masonry. Veneer is
usually urtreinforced. But unreinforced masonry is
designed not to crack, while masonry veneers are
allowed to crack. Ties for veneer are required to be
spaced closely enough so that cracking of the veneer
does not adversely affect the stability of the wall.
Cracks, however, may increase the amount of water that
penetrates through the wall.
Code Section 6.1.1.2 exempts veneers from the
Code Section 1.2.2(c) requirement of specifying f "
The designer is thus not required to specify the f ~, of
the veneer wythe. Although, because the Code and
general practice require construction using specific
materials and procedures, such as Type S mortar, there
is generally a minimum implied compressive strength
for the veneer. Without some compressive or tensile
strength, the veneer would not perform satisfactorily.
The typical structural drawing (if a structural
consultant is part of the design team) consists of details
of the typical wall sections. Often the only section
shown is the solid wall without windows or doors. The
structural engineer seldom designs the veneer or its
anchorage to the backing, since it is defined as
nonstructural. It is common, however, for the structural
engineer to design the dead-load support and the
backup wall.
15-9
The typical architectural drawing consists of
details laying out the masonry and the backup system
and generally presenting the arrangement of the
elements, such as window jambs, sills, and heads. The
flashing details are also shown. The architectural
specifications provide the contractor with additional
information about the veneer anchor spacing.
For buildings less than 30 ft (9 m) tall, the veneer
is customarily supported vertically on the building
foundation only. The design of the foundation is
usually not significantly affected by the weight of the
veneer. The concrete dimensions, however, are often
increased to accommodate the extra width of the wall.
For buildings taller than 30 ft (9 m), the veneer is
usually supported at each floor level. Such support is
required for backings of cold-formed steel and wood
framing. The design of the floor and exterior beams is
influenced by the weight of the veneer. Code Section
1.10.1 limits the supporting member deflection to 1/360
or to 0.3 in. (7.6 mm), whichever is less. This is more
restrictive than designs without veneer and can have a
significant effect on the sizing of members near the
edge of the floor.
The veneer backing provides out-of-plane support
of the veneer. The backing can be wood, masonry,
concrete, steel, or other materials. The backing wall is
typically designed for wind load or out-of-plane
seismic loading, whichever is larger. Limitation on the
stresses (or minimum strength) of the backing wall is in
accordance with the appropriate material specifications
and standards. Limitation on the deflection of the
backing is a subject of controversy. The Code requires
that the out-of-plane deflection of the backing be
limited to maintain the stability of the veneer wythe
including an adhered veneer separating from the
backing.
Most building codes limit deflections of structural
walls to 1/360. This limit is commonly accepted for
masonry veneers. However, at this amount of
deflection, the veneer will be cracked. Curtainwall
structural systems typically limit the out-of-plane
deflections to 1/175 or 3/4 in. (14 mm). This is
probably too high, and the consequences of excessive
deflection in the wall will be larger cracks and more
leakage.
In recent years, design approaches for veneers and
their backing have evolved. A recent approach is to
assume that the veneer cracks at mid-height between
supports and consequently, the load of the ties near the
ends of the backing and near the crack can be

calculated neglecting the influence of other ties (Ref.
15.5.1, 15.5.2, 15.5.3, 15.5.4).
Code Section 6.2.2.10 addresses seismic
provisions for anchored veneer. The Code does not
contain similar provisions for adhered veneer. The
seismic load from adhered veneer is assumed to be
transferred directly to the backing through adhesion.
Thus the backing must be design for this load. No
additional consideration for the adhered veneer is
necessary.
15.5.2 Design of Anchored V e n e e r
Anchored veneer is connected to a backing by
metal anchors, across a cavity. The anchors are
mechanically fastened to the backing.
Anchored veneer and the backing must conform to
three general requirements (Code Section 6.1.2).
1. The backing must resist water penetration.
Exterior sheathing, if present on the backing, must
be covered with a water-resistant membrane or the
sheathing itself must be water-resistant and the
joints sealed.
2. Weep holes and flashings are required to divert
water to the exterior.
3. The veneer and its connection to the backing are
required to be designed and detailed to
accommodate differential movement.
Anchored veneer can be designed under Code
Section 6.2.1 (alternative design) or by the prescriptive
requirements of Code Section 6.2.2. Alternate design
of veneer (Code Section 6.2.2) requires compliance
with Code Section 1.3, "Approval of Special Systems
of Design or Construction," and five additional
requirements:
1. Loads must be distributed in accordance with the
principles of mechanics. In reality, this is very
difficult to do. Many researchers have studied the
distribution of loads in a veneer with extensive
nonlinear finite-element analysis. Testing also has
been done with inconclusive results.
2. The deflection of the backing is limited to avoid
instability of the veneer. Stability of the veneer is
dependent on its thickness, tie spacing, and the
deflection of the backing which is dependent on
the loading. Again, this subject is very complex.
For example, the design of steel studs for flexure
and torsional stability is a formidable problem.
3. Any masonry backing must meet the other
provisions of the MSJC Code. This is self-
explanatory.
15-10
Chapter 15
4. Veneer is not subject to the provisions for
unreinforced masonry even is seismic regions.
5. The provisions of Code Sections 6.1.1, 6.1.2,
6.2.2.9, and 6.2.2.10 are to be applied. Section
6.1.1 is the general scope of Chapter 6 and adds no
new information; Section 6.1.2 contains the
provision previously described which applies to all
veneers; Section 6.2.2.9 requires joint
reinforcement if the veneer is laid in a bonding
pattern other than running bond; and Section
6.2.2.10 contains the seismic provisions which are
addressed above.
The remaining sections of Code Chapter 6 cover
the prescriptive method for veneer design in locations
where the design wind velocity pressure is less than
25 lb/ft2 (1200 Pa), approximately 100 mph fastest
mile. The provisions define for the designer the
minimum prescriptive requirements, such as tie spacing
and cavity width. The Code assumes adequate
performance and capacities.
The provisions of Code Chapter 6 are not typically
included in the structural portion of the building design,
but are shown in the architectural details and
specifications. In areas of the U.S. where wind loads
are greater than those permitted for the prescriptive
requirements, anchored veneer construction must be
designed, specifying anchor sizes and spacings that
must be included in the contract documents.
As a general background, it is useful to review the
seismic performance criteria established by the
Structural Engineers of California (SEAOC) in the
1996 Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and
Commentary (Sixth Edition).
Judgment is required on the part of the engineer to
develop appropriate building design criteria based on
these objectives. Clearly, failure of the brick veneer
(anchored or adhered) over a firehouse door in a
moderate or even a major earthquake is not acceptable.
Complete separation of the veneer on a suburban office
building with surrounding planters and parking may,
however, be acceptable during a major earthquake.
The provisions require isolation of anchored
veneer and additional anchors and joint reinforcement
to provide added load transfer and post-cracking
continuity. The Code does not provide seismic
requirements for the backing unless it is masonry.
These are given in the design provisions for the backing
material, and must be followed so that the entire wall
(veneer and backing) will comply with Code
requirements. The Code requires the veneer to be
Empirical Design & Veneer
isolated from the seismic loading for Seismic
Performance Categories C and higher. The seismic
loading combinations are those of the relevant code or
ASCE 7. The requirement may be either for moderate
or for major earthquake displacements, depending on
the governing code being applied. If ASCE 7 is
combined with the Code, the displacements to be
accommodated include significant inelastic
displacements of the structure. In a steel building, for
example, interstory displacements can exceed 3.5 in.
(90 mm). Such isolation of the veneer by the
provisions of the Code is not currently in conformance
with standard design practice, particularly at the
building comers. However, in recent years some West
Coast cities (Seattle, Portland) with downtown
concentrations of buildings, sidewalks and streets are
requiring full compliance to seismic drift provisions.
It is difficult to completely isolate a veneer from
the displacements of a major earthquake. One first
establishes the isolation requirements. One then writes
Code provisions mandating them. Additional research
is needed to develop methods to accomplish adequate
isolation at building comers.
The seismic provisions for Seismic Performance
Categories D, and E require single wire joint
reinforcement of minimum wire size W1.7 at a
maximum spacing of 18 inch on center vertically. The
1997 Uniform Building Code has a similar but not
identical provisions. The purpose is for engagement
with the tie, not to provide strength or ductility though
reinforcement. The tie engaging the wire is required to
increase the resistance to pull-out of the tie from the
masonry. The wire does not have to be continuous.
Splices are not required.
In the personal opinion of the author of this MDG
section, the most probable origin of this Code provision
is an attempted emulation of the Uniform Building
Code provision. It is probable that the current
discrepancy between the Code and the UBC will be
resolved in the next edition of the Code.
15.5.3 Adhered Veneer
Common adhered veneer units include thin brick,
REFERENCES
15.5.1 Mayes, Ronald, and Asher, Jefferson, PE.,
Wind and Earthquake Foces on Brick Veneer
with Steel Studs, Report No. 5620.01,
15-11
cast stone, glazed tile, terra cotta, thin stone and many
other materials. Popular because of low cost and many
choices of materials, adhered veneer can be found
throughout the United States in a broad range of
applications.
The Code limits the thickness of the units to 2-5/8
inch thickness. Typical units are one inch or less.
Units of 2-5/8 inches will typically weigh much more
than 15 pounds per square foot. Weights less than 15
pounds per square foot and thickness greater than 1½
inch are unusual and would probably be too porous for
external use.
Units are also limited to 36 inches in any
dimension and less than 5 square feet in total area.
This limitation is based on field experience and the
designer should not rely totally on this provision to
guarantee performance.
Unit size is limited to provide stress relief at the
joints similar to expansion/contraction joints in a wall.
Differential movements between the backing and the
veneer cause stresses in a veneer. For example, if a
thickness of brick units is adhered to a thickness of
concrete masonry units, differential movements include
shrinkage of the concrete masonry and moisture
expansion of the brick. Such differential movements
result in shear stress between the adhered veneer and its
backing support. Based on satisfactory performance of
adhered veneer, such calculations to determine the
differential movement effects is unwarranted. Design
of adhered veneer is based on principles that have
proved successful in service.
Specifications Article 3.3 C provides a method for
installation that uses Type S mortar. Neat cement is
applied to the veneer and to the backing and then Type
S is applied to both and the unit is pressured to the
backing. This type of installation is unusual in today's
construction. Most adhered veneers are being applied
with latex-modified mortars and thinner joints. The
designer should investigate and specify the materials in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
to ensure that the system proposed has had successful
applications.
Computech Engineering Services, Inc. and
KPFF Consulting Engineers, September 1989.

15.5.2 Mayes, Ronald, and Asher, Jefferson, PE.,
Report on the Behavior and Design of
Anchored Brick Veneer/Metal Stud Systems,
Computech Engineering Sevices, Inc. and
KPFF Consulting Engineers, September 1989.
15.5.3 Design Guide for Anchored Brick Veneer
Over Steel Studs, Western States Clay
Products Association, by KPFF Consulting
Engineers, January 1995.15.5.4 Kelly, T.,
M. Goodson, R. Mayes, and J. Asher, Analysis
of the Behavior of Anchored Brick Veneer on
Metal Stud Systems Subjected to Wind and
Earthquake Forces, Fifth North America
Masonry Conference, The Masonry Society,
June 1990. pp. 1359-1370.
15-12
Chapter 15
Select Bibliography
"Guide to Residential Cast-In-Place Concrete
Construction," ACI 332R-84, American Concrete
Institute.
"Recommended Lateral Force Requirements,"
Structural Engineers Association of California,
1959.
"Design Guide for Anchored Brick Veneer Over Steel
Studs," Western States Clay Products Association,
2550 Beverly Boulevard, Los Angeles, Ca 90057
"Design Guide for Structural Brick Veneer," Western
States Clay Products Association, 2550 Beverly
Boulevard, Los Angeles, Ca 90057
Brick Veneer, Technical Note 28 Series, Brick Industry
Association, Reston, VA.

PROVISIONS FOR
SEISMIC DESIGN
16.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Masonry buildings, like those constructed of other
materials, respond to the seismic inertial forces caused
by ground shaking. Soil characteristics and many other
factors influence the actual ground motion to which a
building is subjected in an earthquake. Because the
resisting forces are caused by an inertial response, the
building's distribution of mass, stiffness, and strength
are important characteristics that must be considered in
distributing the equivalent design forces to the resisting
elements of the building.
Unlike designing for wind forces, in which all
structural elements are normally assumed to remain
elastic, earthquake-resistant design assumes that
structural elements retain their integrity even when
stressed beyond the elastic limit. Therefore it is
important to detail masonry elements for ductility, that
is, the ability to resist cyclic inelastic deformation
without significant loss of strength. Code Section 1.13
provides special provisions to improve the ductile
performance characteristics of masonry elements.
These provisions are consistent with an earthquake that
has a 90% probability of the ground motion not being
exceeded in 50 years for each of the five Seismic
Performance Categories, A through E. This probability
corresponds to ground motions that are expected to
occur, on average, about once every 475 years.
This chapter of the MDG provides a general
overview of the additional Code seismic requirements
(Code Section 1.13) pertaining to the configuration,
16-1
16
materials, element design, and reinforcing details of
masonry structures. Additional information regarding
the seismic design of masonry is available in references
(Ref. 16.0.1, 16.0.2, 16.0.3 and 16.0.4.).
An important part of seismic design is the
conceptual planning of the building to determine the
proper configuration of lateral force-resisting elements,
particularly shear walls. If possible, avoid significant
plan asymmetry, large plan eccentricity between the
center of mass and the center of lateral stiffness, and
discontinuities of lateral stiffiaess or strength. Collapse
of buildings in earthquakes throughout the world has
been attributed to designs having these irregularities.
ASCE 7-93 (Ref. 16.0.5.) and all of the model codes
have provisions that impose additional requirements for
design, detailing, or both on structures with plan or
vertical irregularities.
Conceptual design is followed by the lateral force
determination and distribution of lateral design forces.
The inelastic deformation capacity, or ductility, of
lateral force-resisting elements (masonry shear walls)
needs to be adequate. Prescriptive design provisions
and reinforcement details given in Code Section 1.13
are intended to provide the building with a lateral
force-resisting system that should retain most of its
strength even if it is subjected to reversed cyclic
displacements into the inelastic range, although highly
stressed elements may require additional reinforcement
beyond the minimum prescriptive requirements.

ASCE 7-93 (Ref 16.0.5) references the 1991
edition of the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction
Program (NEHRP) Recommended Provisions for
Seismic Regulations for New Buildings (Ref. 16.0.7).
These provisions are published by the Federal
Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) in FEMA
Document 222A. Part 1 contains the text of the
provisions and Part 2 contains commentary to the
provisions.. Two of the model building codes, the
1999 edition of the National Building Code, published
by the Building Officials and Code Administrators
International, Inc. (Ref. 16.0.8) and the 1999 edition of
the Standard Building Code, published by the Southern
Building Code Congress International, Inc. (Ref.
16.0.9), modified the 1997 version of the NEHRP
provisions transforming them into enforceable language
and incorporating them into each code's Chapter 16.
These provisions are substantially the same as the
provisions in ASCE 7-93.
The 2000 edition of the International Building
Code, published by the International Code Council
(Ref. 16.0.10) also used the 1997 edition of the
NEHRP provisions
By using the 1991 NEHRP provisions, the later
1994 or 1997 NEHRP provisions, or recent editions of
any of the model building codes, one obtains probable
seismic forces at a strength design level. Thus, in a
strength design analysis method such as the one used by
ACI 318 for design of concrete structures, the load
factor on seismic forces would be 1.0.
Masonry design under the MSJC Code uses an
allowable stress design approach. Code Sections
1.13.2 and 2.1.1.2.3 provides a method for dealing with
the differences between the allowable strength design
approach of the MSJC Code and the strength-level
seismic forces derived from ASCE 7-93, the National
Building Code, the Standard Building Code or the
International Building Code. In this method the
strength design level seismic forces are combined with
dead loads and other loads using load factors from the
strength design section of ASCE 7 or the load
combinations section in Chapter 16 of the National
Building Code, the Standard Building Code or the
International Building Code. The combined factored
loads are used to develop moments, axial loads, and
shear forces on elements. The capacity of masonry
elements to resist these forces is developed using
allowable stress procedures as defined in Code Chapter
2. In other words, a triangular stress block is used, but
the allowable masonry stresses are increased to a
16-2
Chapter 16
nominal strength or "pseudo-strength" level by
multiplying the allowable stresses by a factor of 2.5 and
a strength reduction factor, d0. These ~ factors are given
in Code Section 2.1.1.2.3.3. This methodology was
first promulgated in the commentary of the 1991
NEHRP provisions.
The nominal-strength or "pseudo-strength"
allowable stresses may be further increased by one-
third for load combinations including earthquakes per
Code Section 2.1.1.2.3.2. However, Section 1616.3 of
the National Building Code (Ref. 16.0.8) does not
permit this increase for load combinations that include
seismic forces. With the one-third increase, the
nominal strength of Grade 60 reinforcement used to
resist flexural loads is 64 ksi (440 MPa) and the
masonry bending compressive strength is 0.89 f~,. Code
Commentary Section 2.1.1.2.3.2 alerts the user to this
apparent anomaly and states that the procedure
"produces designs which are intended to give similar
levels of performance as using working stresses in
combination with service-level seismic loads."
The commentary to Chapter 9 of ASCE 7-95 (Ref.
16.0.6) gives some insight into this method of
combining stresses and increasing allowable strengths
to a nominal level. More information is provided in the
commentary to Appendix Chapter 8 of the 1994
NEHRP provisions.
The 2000 edition of the International Building
Code has two allowable strength design load
combination sections. In one section seismic forces are
multiplied by 0.7. In the other, seismic forces are
divided by 1.4. If either of these sections is used, a
normal allowable stress design methodology is
followed, that is, without the "pseudo-strength"
approach of multiplying the allowable stresses by a
factor of 2.5 and a strength reduction factor, 6-
In addition to the strength requirements provided
in Code Sections 1.13.1 and 2.1.1.2, Code Section
1.13.2.2 provides story drift limits for masonry
structures.
Code Chapter 1.13.3 allows masonry buildings in
Seismic Performance Category A to be designed by
Code Chapters 2, 4 or 5. That is, empirical design is
allowed in addition to unreinforced or reinforced or
prestressed masonry design procedures. This is
because of the low inelastic deformation demands on
building structures in this Seismic Performance
Category.
Provisions for S e i s m i c Design
Code Section 1.13.3.2 requires a minimum
anchorage of masonry walls in Seismic Performance
Category A.
Code Section 1.13.4 restricts the lateral force
resisting system of masonry buildings in Seismic
Performance Category B and above to design by
Chapters 2 or 4 of the Code. That is, unreinforced
masonry design, reinforced masonry design, or
prestressed masonry design procedures must be used.
Empirical design is not allowed for the lateral force
resisting buildings in Seismic Performance Category B
or above.
Masonry buildings in Seismic Performance
Categories C, D, and E require minimum amounts of
reinforcement to provide ductility. These reinforcing
requirements are discussed in MDG Section 16.4,
Detailing.
16.1 H I S T O R Y OF S E I S M I C CODE P R O V I S I O N S
The 1925 Santa Barbara earthquake prompted
several cities in California to adopt earthquake
regulations. These earliest earthquake provisions used
a lateral force coefficient of 0.20, and were codified in
the fh'st edition of the Uniform Building Code (UBC)
(Ref. 16.1.1), published by the International
Conference of Building Officials 0CBO), known at the
time as the Pacific Coast Building Officials
Conference. The first edition of the UBC, published in
1927, contained an optional appendix chapter on
seismic design. Buildings seismically designed by this
document had an applied horizontal force at every
floor. This force was derived by multiplying the dead
and live load above the level being considered by a
foundation-dependent factor C. For buildings on good
foundation material, C was assigned a value of 0.075.
Early adoption and enforcement of these
provisions was sporadic until the 1933 Long Beach,
California earthquake. This Richter Magnitude 6.2
event was the motivation for the development of
mandatory seismic design regulations in the western
U.S. Many cities in California adopted a lateral force
coefficient of 0.10 shortly after this earthquake.
In 1935 the UBC seismic provisions were amended
to include seismic zoning. The value of C from the
1927 UBC was reduced and the definition of building
weight, W, was changed to be the sum of the dead load
plus 50% of the live load. These reductions resulted in
a lower force that was then increased by a seismic-
zoning factor. Regions of low, moderate, and high
seismicity were assigned to Zones 1, 2, and 3, which
16-3
Under severe seismic loads, masonry elements can
be subjected to reversed inelastic deformations and
high axial, flexural, and shear forces. Masonry elements
in Seismic Performance Categories D and E should be
designed to withstand these conditions without
significant loss of strength or stiffiaess.
The 2000 Edition of the International Building
Code uses Seismic Design Categories A through F.
These correspond to Seismic Performance Categories A
through E in the Code, except that Seismic Design
Categories E and F are equal to Seismic Performance
Categories E . The 2000 Edition of the International
Building Code also has different minimum prescriptive
requirements for reinforcement for the various Seismic
Design Categories.
had zone factors of 1, 2, and 4, respectively. Design
lateral forces range between 0.08W and 0.16W in Zone
3.
In the 1949 UBC, seismic design provisions were
again modified. The building weight, W, was redefined
to be equal to the dead load above the story under
consideration. The seismic force coefficient, C, was
modified to account, somewhat, for the dynamic
response of the building. The equation for C was:
C = 0.15Z / (N+4.5)
where Z was the seismic-zone factor and N was the
number of stories above the story under consideration.
In 1957, a committee of the Structural Engineers
Association of California (SEAOC) began the
development of a Uniform Seismic Code for California.
This resulted in the SEAOC recommended lateral force
requirements (Ref. 16.1.2 - - also known as the "Blue
Book") which was published in 1959. Commentaries
to the recommendations were first issued in 1960. The
1961 UBC seismic provisions were adopted from the
1959 Blue Book and resulted in the seismic base shear
equation of:
V= Z K C W
In this equation Z was a zone factor set equal to 1.0 in
Zone 3 (the region of highest seismieity), 0.50 in Zone
2, and 0.25 in Zone 1. K was a horizontal force factor
(the precursor of Rw), C was a function of the
fundamental period of the building, and W was the total
dead load of the building. K was assigned the value of
1.33 for a bearing-wall structure.

The 1970 UBC added two more factors to the base
shear equation: an importance factor, I and a local soil
profile factor, S. Thus the base shear equation became:
V = ZIKCSW
In the mid 1970s, the Applied Technology Council
(ATC) commenced work on the development of
seismic regulations for buildings. In 1978, ATC 3-06
(Ref. 16.1.3) was published as a resource document for
the development of model building codes. Major
departures between this document and previous
building code seismic provision included the
embodiment of several new concepts such as:
classification of building use categories into seismic
hazard exposure groups, national seismic hazard maps,
tools for elastic dynamic analysis, use of response
factors in place of K-factors, explicit drift limits,
influence of orthogonal excitation effects, designs
based on strength methods instead of allowable stress
methods, provision for soil-structure interaction, and
detailed seismic design requirements for architectural,
electrical and mechanical systems, and components.
The minimum seismic design base shear for the
strength method for use with static lateral force
procedures was specified by ATC 3-06 as follows:
Cs W = 1.2 Av SW / RT °'67
where Cs was the seismic design coefficient, Av was the
coefficient representing effective peak velocity-related
acceleration, S was a site soil profile-related
coefficient, R was the response modification factor, and
T was the fundamental period of the building.
The ATC 3-06 strength design equation is similar
in form but fundamentally different from the design
equations given in the UBC in 1976. Elastic spectral
demands in ATC 3-06 were computed explicitly and
then reduced to a strength design approach by using the
R-factor. Values of R were specified for different
permissible structural systems and benchmarked against
the K-factors in the UBC. The seismic design
coefficient, Cs, was capped at:
Cs= 2.5 A~/ R
where Aa was the coefficient representing effective
peak acceleration.
In 1985 the Building Seismic Safety Council
(BSSC) published The National Earthquake Hazard
Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended
Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations
for Buildings. Development of this document was
16-4
Chapter 16
funded by the Federal Emergency Management Agency
(FEMA). The provisions and commentary were based
on the ATC 3-06 (Ref. 16.1.3) document and these
provisions and commentary were further modified in
1988. The 1988 National Building Code (NBC) (Ref.
16.1.4) and the 1988 Standard Building Code (SBC)
(Ref. 16.1.5) adopted the NEHRP provisions and the
subsequent modifications to them.
The 1988 editions of the Blue Book and the UBC
made major revisions to the UBC seismic design base
shear equations. This edition of the UBC used the
ATC 3-06 as a resource document. The design base
shear equation was recast 'into the ATC format as
follows:
V = ZICW/Rw = 1.25 Z I S W / ( T °'67Rw)
where Z was a seismic zone coefficient ranging in value
between 0.075 and 0.4, I was an "importance factor, " S
was a site soil profile-related coefficient, Rw was the
response modification factor (at the allowable stress
level), T was the fundamental period of the building,
and Wwas the seismic dead load.
Since 1988 the National Building Code and the
Standard Building Code have made only minor changes
to their seismic design provisions and currently use the
same formulas, noted above, for seismic design in their
most recent editions.
Coincidentally, 1988 was the year that the MSJC
Code was first published. Appendix A to that Code
had special provisions for seismic design, and
referenced ANSI A58.1 (Ref. 16.1.6) as the basis for
seismic force determination. ANSI A58.1 used a UBC-
type format for seismic load determination.
The 1992 edition of the MSJC Code relied on the
ASCE 7-88 document for determination of seismic
forces. ASCE 7-88 was the successor to the ANSI
A58.1 document. Like its predecessor, ASCE 7-88
relied on the UBC-type formulation of seismic forces.
The 1995 and 1999 editions of the MSJC Code
refer to ASCE 7-93 for seismic force determination, but
the earthquake chapter of ASCE 7-93 was formulated
in the NEHRP provisions language, that is, it was based
on a strength-level earthquake design. The 1997
edition of the UBC made the transition to a strength
level seismic methodology, in anticipation of the
introduction of the 2000 International Building Code.
The design base shear equation was changed to:
V = C j W/RT
Provisions for S e i s m i c Design
where Cv was a velocity domain seismic zone
coefficient modified for site soil characteristics, I was
an "importance factor," R was the response
modification factor (at the strength level) and was set at
Rw/1.4, T was the fundamental period of the building,
and W was the seismic dead load. The seismic base
shear was capped at:
//'=2.5 Co lW/ R
where Co was acceleration domain seismic zone
coefficient modified for site soil characteristics.
The 2000 International Building Code modified the
1997 NEHRP provisions and used a seismic design
coefficient, Cs, with the formulation:
Cs = SdI1/ R T
where Sdl is a design spectral acceleration for short
periods and is based on 2/3 of the value from the 1
second map, multiplied by a velocity based site
coefficient which accounts for soil characteristics.
The seismic design coefficient, Cs, is capped at:
Cs = Sd~ I/ R
16.2 M A T E R I A L S
Code Section 1.13.6.6 does not allow the use of
Type N mortar nor masonry cement as part of the
lateral force-resisting system in Seismic Performance
Categories D and E. This is due to the wide range of
16.3 DESIGN OF M A S O N R Y ELEMENTS
In Seismic Performance Categories B and C, Code
Sections 1.13.4 and 1.13.5 permit the tensile strength of
masonry to be considered. In other words, masonry
elements may be designed according to Code Section
2.2. They may also, of course, be designed according
to Code Section 2.3. Code Section 1.13.6 does not
permit consideration of masonry tensile strength in
buildings in Seismic Performance Categories D and E;
therefore, masonry elements must be designed
according to Code Section 2.3, and reinforcement must
be provided to carry all tensile forces.
Code Section 1.13.5.2 requires that for buildings in
Seismic Performance Categories C, D, or E all masonry
elements that are not considered to be part of the lateral
force-resisting system be designed for vertical load and
16-5
where Sds is a design spectral acceleration for short
periods and is based on the value of 0 from the 0.2
second map, multiplied by a velocity based site
coefficient which accounts for soil characteristics.
The purpose of this rather lengthy historical
narration of seismic design provision in the United
States is to show that the more things change the more
they stay the same. Since 1927, seismic design
provisions have been based on a percentage of the
building weight. Since 1927 many lessons have been
learned from earthquakes, regarding seismic-resistant
building methodologies. These lessons have been
embodied in subsequent codes by the changes noted
above and by the prescriptive detailing requirements.
For a more detailed discussion of the history of
seismic design codes in the United States, the reader is
referred to ATC-34 "A Critical Review of Current
Approaches to Earthquake-Resistant Design" (Ref.
16.1.7), available from the Applied Technology
Council.
variability permitted in those mortars. Grout must
properly surround all bar reinforcement. Where
permitted, joint reinforcement must be adequately set in
mortar.
induced moment corresponding to the design story drift
resulting from Code seismic forces. This provision
may control the design of masonry elements such as
flexural wails that are loaded perpendicular to the
direction of the seismic shear force (MDG Fig. 16.3-1).
These walls will experience out-of-plane drift from the
displacement of the diaphragm, and should be designed
to resist internal shear and moments corresponding to
the Code-level drift. This induced displacement results
in out-of-plane shear force and bending moment, which
are further magnified by P-A effects and boundary
conditions (MDG Fig. 16.3-1). If the building has
more than one level, relative displacements of each
level at its top and bottom should be considered.
 Chapter 16

i ............................................................................ i

H w''A H
!

Ej
I/ \
Drift Wall Moment = p(A) Drift Wall Moment

Wall A-Free To Rotate At Top Wall A-Fixed At Top

Fig. 16.3-1 Effect of Out-of-Plane Building Drift on Flexural Walls

16.4 DETAILING
16.4.1 Reinforcement
In Seismic Performance Category C, Code Section
1.13.5.2.3 specifies minimum horizontal reinforcement
consisting of joint reinforcement or #4 bars and
minimum vertical reinforcement of #4 bars at key
locations, as shown in MDG Fig. 16.4-1 for masonry
elements that are not part of the lateral force-resisting
system.
For masonry elements that are part of the lateral
force-resisting system (shear walls), Code Section
1.13.5.3.3 specifies minimum horizontal joint
reinforcement of at least two W1.7 wires spaced not
more than 16 in. (400 ram). on center, or bond beam
reinforcement of 0.2 in.2 (130 mm2). Vertical
reinforcement of at least 0.2 in.2 (130 mm2) must also
be provided at key locations, as shown in MDG Fig.
16.4-1.
Additional reinforcement requirements
specified for masonry wails in Seismic Performance
Categories D and E. In accordance with Code Section
1.13.6.3, masonry walls, other than those covered by
Section 1.13.5.2.2, must be reinforced with both
vertical and horizontal reinforcement. The sum of the
reinforcement in these two directions must have a
minimum area of 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional
area of the wall. A minimum area of reinforcement
equal to 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area
must be provided in each direction, at a maximum
spacing of 4 ft (1.2 m), if the walls are solidly grouted
and constructed of hollow open-end units, hollow units
laid with full head joints, or two wythes of solid units.
The maximum spacing of reinforcement is to be 2 ft
(0.6 m), for all other masonry. Horizontal reinforce-
ment must be adequately anchored around vertical
reinforcement with a standard.hook. MDG Fig. 16.4-2
shows minimum reinforcement requirements for
masonry walls in Seismic Performance Categories D
and E.
For walls laid in other than running bond in
are buildings in Seismic Performance Category E, Code
Sections 1.13.7.2 and 1.13.7.3 have special
requirements: minimum horizontal reinforcement of
0.0015 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall
for elements that are not part of the lateral force-

16-6
Provisions for Seismic Design

resisting system; 0.0025 times the gross cross-sectional Code Section 1.13.6.5 specifies minimum
area of the wall for elements that are part of the lateral requirements for column ties, which are shown in MDG
force-resisting system, as shown in MDG Fig. 16.4-3. Fig. 16.4-4. Lateral ties should be embedded in grout
These elements must be constructed of hollow open- rather than in mortar joints for columns in Seismic
end units or two wythes of solid units and must be Performance Categories D and E, according to Code
grouted solid. Section 1.13.6.5.

RC Frame
0.2 in2At Wall Ends

- - lnfill Masonry Wall

#4 @ 48" O.C.
Around Opening _ Joint Reinforcement @ 16" O.C.
or #4 bars @ 48" O.C. max

Masonry Elements that are not Part of the Lateral-Force Resisting System

Bar Reinforcement (0.2 in 2) Each

~ - Side of Openings and at Top &
Bottoms Of Opening
_ At Floor or Roof / /
At Top l ,eel / / 0.2in2 bars ~

0.2 in 2 At
Wall nds • r - - l - - , - - - , . . . . r - - r - - - r - - - , - - ~, . . . . . . . i. . . . . ~ - - - r . . . . . . . . . . r,"
- - ~ '
I---i---I-.
' '1\/1'
'I X II
'IN
il %
/I A '/ li
t 'i l F ~ 7 / / 1 I '
--I.__-I
'. . . . . . . . . .
"
-IJ
l l~"~l d i \ l ' I[ \t/ 11 / i l I % 1 i I ~ I I
I I I . . I ~. . .~ . . .I . . . ~ _ j 11
. . . . . . .~ . . . . m_ _ _ I I i
' IV' _1 '1_ ' '[ X H i , i , , ~ , ,
I I / \ I ~ I II I \ II i i~ j I I ~ Ii
I , [%1 24"lilin I '/ / \ II I 10"Max I- .x.,~ i -- -- i i
-_---'=---_. -i- i il/ \11 I \ I -~r--q' %~
, _i__ I .[ . . . . L--L'- ..... ..~J------;Jl.=~.~--m. i _k _ _ / i i

Joint reinforcement @ 16" O.C. max or ~

Bar reinforcement (0.2 in 2) @ 10 ft. max
Bar reinforcement (0.2 in 2) @ 10 ft. max
Masonry Elements that are Part of the Lateral-Force Resisting System

Fig. 16.4-1 Minimum Reinforcement Requirements (Seismic Performance Category C)

16-7
 Chapter 16

4" max when using open end units

grouted solid or 2 wythes solid units
other masonry

Horizontal Steel
- ] > 0.0007 A S

L I ..... - IJ
I Adequate
Anchorage
I
i
!
/
~___L_ !
Same limits as I
vertical spacing i
4" or2" Vertical Steel
> 0.0007 A S
'II
! Horizontal + Vertical Steel > 0.002 Ag
I
!
I I--
I I

Fig.16.4-2 Minimum Wall Reinforcement (Seismic Performance Categories D and E)

As -- 0.0025 Ag in open ended bond beams for walls

that are part of the lateral-force resisting system.
Joint reinforcement can
Otherwise As = 0.0015 A, -satisfy part of the horizontal
requirements

Max spacing: .... 1[ _ . . . . J

Part of lateral-force --ll I~_ ___~_.J~ J. . . . i
resisting system=16" --]I IF II IF J. . . .
Otherwise = 24"

Fig. 16.4-3 Minimum Horizontal Reinforcement in Walls Laid in Other Than

Running Bond (Seismic Performance Category E)

16-8
Provisions for S e i s m i c Design
16.4.2 Anchorage
Code Section 1.13.3.2 requires that all masonry
walls be anchored to floors and roofs, with connections
capable of resisting the greater of a seismic lateral force
induced by the wall or 1000 times the peak velocity-
related acceleration (Av), in lb per lineal foot of the
wall. Code Section 1.13.5.3.1 further requires that
masonry walls in Seismic Performance Categories C,
D, or E be anchored to floors and roofs with connectors
capable of resisting a minimum of 200 lb. per lineal
foot (2.9 kN/m). Since anchors are at floor or roof
levels, they will be embedded in reinforced bond beams
or reinforced vertical cells, as shown in MDG Fig.
16.4-5.

Ties @ 8"

iL [ o.c.
Over Full
I Height

!I _T-f---F
I-_.L_.L-
II I
N - . . . . . i-
ll I
iI - . . . . . I-
II I
II I

II I

I', ~/I

Figure 16.4-4 Tie Requirements for Masonry Columns

(Seismic Performance Categories D and E)

<

Fig. 16.4-5 Anchorage of Masonry Walls to Roofs and Floors

16-9
 Chapter 16

REFERENCES
16.0.1 Drysdale, R.G., Hamid, A.A. and Baker, L.R. 16.0.9 Standard Building Code, Standard Building
Masonry Structures: Behavior and Design, Code Congress International, 1999.
The Masonry Society, Boulder, Colorado,
16.0.10 International Building Code, International
1999
Code Council, 2000.
16.0.2 Schneider, R.R. and W.L. Dickey, Reinforced
16.1.1 Uniform Building C o d e , International
Masonry Design, Prentice Hall, Inc.,
Congress of Building Officials, 1927.
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1987.
16.1.2 Recommended Lateral Force Requirements,
16.0.3 Englekirk, R. and G.C. Hart, Earthquake
Structural Engineers Association of California,
Design Of Concrete Masonry Buildings,
1959.
Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey, 1984. 16.1.3 Tentative Provisions for the Development of
Seismic Regulations for Buildings, ATC 3-06,
16.0.4 Paulay, T. and N. Priestley, Seismic Design Of
Applied Technology Council, Redwood City,
Reinforced Concrete And Masonry Buildings,
California, 1978. Also NBS Publication 510.
Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey, 1992. 16.1.4 National Building Code, Building Code
Officials and Code Administrators
16.0.5 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
International, 1988.
Other Structures, ASCE 7-93, American
Society of Civil Engineers, 1993. 16.1.5 Standard Building Code, Southern Building
Code Congress International, 1988.
16.0.6 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures, ASCE 7-95, American 16.1.6 Building Code Requirements for Minimum
Society of Civil Engineers, 1995. Design Loads in Buildings and Other
Structures, ANSI A58.1, American National
16.0.7 National Earthquake Hazard Reduction
Standards Institute.
Program, Recommended Provisions for
Seismic Regulations for New Buildings, 1991 16.1.7 A Critical Review of Current Approaches to
Edition, Federal Emergency Management Earthquake-Resistant Design, ATC34,
Agency. Applied Technology Council, Redwood City,
California.
16.0.8 National Building Code, Building Officials
and Code Administrators International, Inc.,
1999.

16-10

BUILDING DESIGN
17.0 I N T R O D U C T I O N
Three buildings are presented in this chapter: a
single story strip shopping center, a gymnasium, and a
four story hotel. These buildings and their masonry
elements are used to demonstrate masonry structural
design procedures. The purpose of using design
examples on three typical buildings is not to provide the
reader with final designs for each structure, but to
illustrate the application of design methodology and
philosophy presented in MDG Chapters 8 through 16 to
typical real-life situations and to provide some insight
into the practical masonry design requirements of the
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS 402-99).
This chapter contains a general description of each
building, followed by the example problems for that
building, as follows:
17.1 TMS Shopping Center page 17-2
17.2 DPC Gymnasium page 17-107
17.3 RCJ Hotel page 17-193
17-1
17
Each masonry element (such as an exterior
loadbearing wall) may have a number of different
configurations (solid wall, noncomposite wall, etc.). In
addition, both reinforced and unreinforced conditions can
be applied to the different configurations. Examples of
some potential variations are considered.
Since the design of masonry structural systems
requires a detailed analysis of the building loads, a
typical global load analysis is performed and presented
for each building example using the load distribution
concepts discussed in MDG Chapter 9. Code Section
1.1.3 requires that structures and their components be
designed by elastic analysis trader service load
conditions. The presented analyses are based on elastic
material behavior and will be restricted to the
determination of gravity loads on walls, and global
earthquake and wind loadings. Although an elastic
design method is acceptable for seismic loading per Code
Section 1.13.2.1, this Guide uses the pseudo strength
method of Code Section 2.1.1.2.3 in addressing seismic
load combinations. The rationale for this direction of
design lies in the philosophy of the referenced standards
related to loads.
 Chapter 17

17.1 T M S S H O P P I N G C E N T E R
17.1.1 Plans and Elevations wails and steel columns, with a five-foot overhang on the
MDG Figs. 17.1-1 and 17.1-2 show the plan and south side. This roof framing system is typical of many
elevations of a single-story, 16,000 square foot shopping low-rise masonry commercial buildings.
center. The north, east, west and central flrewalls are To illustrate the application of the Code to typical
constructed of concrete masonry. The south wall is structural design considerations for this type of structure,
primarily a glass curtain wall with one masortry shear example problems are presented in MDG Section 17.1.4.
wall element and glass units around the entrance. An example problem index is included in this section to
The roof framing system consists of a one-way steel assist the reader in correlating the illustrated example
joist and beam system supported on the concrete masonry design issue to the plans and elevations of the structure.
TMS SHOPPING CENTER EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX
All Wall Construction Options
Example # Page Design Issue
TMS-1 17-9 Control joint locations
TMS-2 17-10 Lateral load distribution
Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced CMU)
Example # Page #. Design Issue
TMS-3 17-12 Exterior wall design---out-of-plane flexure (east wall)
TMS-4 17-15 Interior wall design---out-of-plane flexure and shear
TMS-5 17-19 Wall design for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
TMS-6 17-23 In-plane lateral load distribution within perforated wall (east wall)
TMS-7 17-26 Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (east wall)
TMS-8 17-30 Out-of-plane lateral and axial load distribution within perforated wall (east wall)
TMS-9 17-36 Empirical wall design (all walls)
Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced CMU)
Example # Page # Design Issue
TMS-10 17-41 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure and shear (east wail)
TMS-11 17-51 Wall design for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
TMS-12 17-55 Pier design (east wall)
TMS-13 17-59 In-plane lateral load distribution within perforated wall (east wall)
TMS-14 17-64 Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (east wall)
Miscellaneous
Example # Page # Design Issue
TMS-15 17-69 Glass unit masonry (south wall)
TMS-16 17-72 Double reinforced masonry lintel design for flexure, shear and anchorage (east wall)
TMS-17 17-81 Concentrated load distribution without bond beam (north wall)
TMS- 18 17-83 Concentrated load distribution with bond beam (north wall)
TMS-19 17-85 Concentrated load bearing area (east and west walls)
TMS-20 17-86 Concentrated load bearing area (east and west walls)
TMS-21 17-87 Concentrated load bearing area (east and west walls)
TMS-22 17-88 Joint bearing connection to wall (north wall)
TMS-23 17-93 Steel beam bearing connection to wall (east and west walls)
TMS-24 17-94 Straight bar foundation dowel anchorage
TMS-25 17-95 Hooked bar foundation dowel anchorage
TMS-26 17-96 Roof diaphragm to shear wall connection (interior wall)
TMS-27 17-97 Roof diaphragm to shear wall connection (bolt design)
TMS-28 17-99 Design of unreinforced exterior nonloadbearing wall using prestressed masonry
TMS-29 17-103 Design of reinforced loadbearing wall using prestressed masonry

17-2
 m
¢
m|
m
¢1,
ml

¢2
0
Q ® W
ml|
204'-8"
I I w
2S'-S" M.O. 18'-0" M.O. 36' -8" M.O. 9'-0" I 9'-0" M.O, 36'-8" M.O. 18'-0" M.O. 28' -8" =1

"11
¢a
...t.
",4

--I
=¢
=lk
O0
0
"0
"2_.

c)
¢D

"0
W
3

Roof Framing Plan

Notes:
1. Roof Dead Load = 15 psf
2. Roof Snow Load = 30 psf
t Wall Construction:
3. Design Wind Pressure = 20 psf
Option A - Unreinforced Single 4, Seismic Performance Category A
Wythe CMU for both Unreinforced and Reinforced
North 5. Columns on Gridline B are TSSx5x5116
Option B - Reinforced Single
6, Columns on Gddline C are TS4x4x1/4
Wythe CMU
7. Beam Bearing Plate at B-1 and B-3 is 3/4 -x 5"x 10"
B. Beam Bearing Plate at C-1, C-2 and C-3 is 3/8 -x 5"x7"
9. Roof Construction: Built-up Roofing, 2" Rigid Insulation
on Metal Roof Deck - 15 psf (Flexible Diaphragm)
10. Wall Construction is Single Wythe CMU
(See Elevation Views for Exterior Wall Control
Joint Locations when CMU is Unreinforced)
11. Allowable Soil Bearing Capacity = 3,000 psf
 ® Q
1 102"-4" 102'-4" L
2'-6" ' 23'-6" 21'-4" 21'-4" 21'-4" 21'-4" 21"4" 21'-4" 23'-6"

Joist 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 Control Joint

Bearing
levatlon
Locations for
Unreinforced CMU
~" Masonry
~ {ias°nry~i Construction Only

1 28'-8" ~'~ I ~s'-~ I ~ 3'-4" ~'-~" 3'-4"I"~ [ 18'-0" I / 3'-4" 36'-8" 3'-4"J~
E 18'-0" /'~ 3'-4# 28'-8"
M.O. M.O. M.O. M.O. M,O, M.O.

'11
m,
North Elevation

® © @ @ Q ® ®
I I 102'-4" I I I 1o2'-4" I I I
= t'
L I 1 I I
~.'~" . . . . . . . . . . . ~ ELE.~F ~ . ~'~_EIFS F . ~ P - , - - . . --
-4 Top of Masonry J o i s t t ~ 1
Bearing Elevation "~"~_., ~. Glass
Glass " ~ I Curtainwall" ~
¢n Curtainwall ~
_x ¢n 1 =-o- I~-1'-4" 101'-0" /
"4 32'-4" /Glass Brock
O " Glass Block
"O
"2. South Elevation

C)
¢D ® ® Control Joint Locationsfor
® 6"
"~'4-6 Contro Jo nt Locations
,.¢ 4-6" 6" 40'-6" _~ 41'-0" I Unreinforced CMU Construction [ 41'-0" 40'-6" I. '." for Unreinforcad CMU
1#-8" 17'-B" ~ 17'-5" '. Only ~ 22"-o" }'. } Construction Only ,
Bottcmof
EtFS ~
Fascia
1 i Bottom of Bottom of Beam II / / Bottom of Beam
rn BeamBearing ~ ~=~
Plateat GridC.~..'L . ,~Lt' --.Ma~sgn~35-.~.
Bearing Plate at
_Grid B (Pilaster)
Be lg Plate at
Gr (PilastE
'~ [ Bearing Plate at
- ~-o,r ~ Grid C
<
9~ h.~ ~asonry --~
~ l:,r~ L ,~. r-

0
U)
M.O~.~2,M;O-

East Elevation West Elevation

O
=1"
t=
(D

"4
Building Design
17.1.2 Gravity Design Loads
It is assumed that the dead load of the roofing
system, including all framing members, mechanical
systems and ceiling, is a uniformly distributed 15 psf.
The governing roof live load is a 30 psf snow load. In
addition, the height of the parapet wall is such that drifted
snow load need not be considered.
The steel joists spanning between Grid Lines A and
B are spaced at 5 It, so that each is uniformly loaded by:
live load dead load
w = (30 psf x 5 ft) +(15 psf x 5 ft)
= 150.0 plf + 75.0 plf = 225 plf
Assuming an average wall thickness of 8 in., the joist
reactions on the north bearing wall (Grid Line A) and on
the beams on Grid Line B are:
RA = Rm = (41 ft - 8 in./(12 in./it)) x 225 plf
2 These reactions are spaced at 5-it centers along the
= 4,538 lb; use 4,540 lb
For the cantilevered joist (steel joists with extended
ends) spanning between Grid Lines B and C, it is
conservatively assumed that full snow and dead load on
6,050 Ib 5 ft Typical 9,060 Ib Typical
,
i
II
Fig. 17.1-3 Cantilevered Beam System on Grid Line B - Section A-A in Fig. 17.1-1
the center span and dead load minus wind uplift on the
cantilevered span will produce the greatest reaction at
Grid Line B. Assuming a fascia dead load of 10 psf (or
70 plf for the 7 It deep fascia) and a wind uplift of 1.5 x
20 psf = 30 psf, this reaction is:
- (70plf x5 It x5 It)
RBa = 1____~ + (30psf - 1 5 p s f ) x 5 i t x
(5ity
40.5 It 2
+225 plf x (40.5 tt) 2
2
RB2 = 4,536 lb; use 4,540 lb
(Note that the wind load is increased by a factor of 1.5 to
account for pressure buildup under the canopy)
The total load on Grid Line B from the joists is 4,540 lb
+ 4,540 lb = 9,080 lb.
cantilevered beam support system. The joist reaction
located at 1 it - 6 in. from the outside face of the walls is
only 6,050 lb due to the reduction in tributary area (MDG
Fig. 17.1-3).
I Suspended
17-5

The total beam reaction load on the masonry walls at
B-1 and B-3 is 15,770 lb, of which 5,090 Ib is dead load
and 10,680 lb is live load.
Assuming full dead and live load on the cantilevered
joist between Grid Lines B and C, the typical load from
each joist on Grid Line C (ignoring the wind uplift under
the canopy) is:
(40"5 ft +5ft)2 +70plfx (40"5ft +5fi)l
Rc = 225 plf x (2 x 40.5 ft) 40.5 ft J
R c = 5,830 lb (2,000 Ib dead load and 3,830 lb live load)
The corresponding load from the joist located 1 ft - 6 in.
from the exterior face of the wall on Grid Line 1 onto the
W 16 x 26 is 3,890 lb (1,330 lb dead load and 2,560 lb
live load).
The W 16 × 26 beam reaction to the masonry walls
at the junctions of Grid Line C and Grid Lines 1 or 3 is:
[3,890 lb x 20 ft + 5,830 Ib (15 ft + 10 ft + 5 ft)]
Rl-c'3-c = 21.67 ft
Rl_c.3_c = 11,490 lb (4,090 lb dead load and 7,850 live load)
(assumes an 8 in. wall thickness)
The reaction o f the W 16 x 26 beam on the wall at Grid
Line C, between Grid Lines 1 and 2, is:
5,830 lb
Rcl_ 2 = (5 ft + 10 ft + 15 ft + 20 ft) x
21.33 ft
Rcl_ 2 = 13,666 lb = 13,670 lb
(4,690 dead load and 8,980 live load)
(assuming 6 in. bearing o f the steel beam onto the
masonry wall yields a 21 if-4 in. span)
The reaction of the beam and joist at the junction o f
Grid Lines C and 2 is:
= 12 in./ft < x 5,830 lb
5ft
÷ 5,830 lb (5 fi +10 ft + 15 ft)
19ft
RC_2 =12,4121b; usel2,4101b
(4,260 lb dead load and 8,150 lb live load)
17-6
C h a p t e r 17
This calculation used the ratio o f joist tributary widths to
calculate the joist reaction and assumed a beam span of
19ft.
17.1.3 Lateral Design Loads
Both seismic and wind loads must be investigated
for the lateral loading on the strip shopping center.
Seismic Loads
The TMS shopping center is located in a seismic
area with peak velocity-related acceleration Av and
effective peak acceleration Aa of 0.05 resulting in an
assigned Seismic Performance Category of A. According
to ASCE 7-93 Section 9.4 (Equivalent Lateral Force
Procedure) (Ref. 17.1.1), the minimum seismic base
shear applied to a structure in the direction o f each
principal plan direction is V, given by
v=c.w
where:
W = total dead load.
1.2 A~ S 2.5A~
C~ = Seismic Design Coefficient = RT2/3 <
• R
where:
S = coefficient for soil profile; use 2.0
R = response modification factor
1% for unreinforced masonry and 3.5 for
reinforced masonry
T = fundamental elastic period o f vibration of the
building or structure in the direction under
consideration, in seconds
Crh~ '4 = 0.02(16) 3'4 = 0.16see
where
Cr = 0.020 for masonry
h, = height
For unreinforced masonry in Seismic Performance
Category A (Option A):
Cs = 1.2(0.05)(2.0) = 0.33 < 2.5(0.05) = 0 . 1 0 0 ~ Controls
1.25(0.16) ~ - 1.25
For reinforced masonry in Seismic Performance
Category A (Option B):
Cs = 1.2(0.05)(2.0) = 0.12 < 2.5(0.05) = 0 . 0 3 6 ~ Controls
3.5(0.16) ~ 3.5
Building Design
W will vary with wall type. Assume that the average Therefore the total seismic force to be resisted (i.e., base
constructed weight of all wall configurations is 60 psi'. shear) for wall construction Option A (unreinforced) and
Assume that the weight of the glass and the partition is 10 wall construction Option B (reinforced) are:
psf each, and that 1/2 of the lateral inertial force from the
glass and partition mass is transmitted to the roof. V = 0.100 x 657,400 lb = 65,740 lb in either direction
Ignoring the parapet and assuming an 8 in. thick - unreinforced
wall, the total roof area V = 0.036 x 657,400 = 23,700 in either direction
- reinforced
x 204.67 ft - 3 (8 in.)
12 in.fit 12 in./ff
The lateral force (F~) induced at any level per ASCE
= 17,400 ft 2
7-93 is

The weight of the roof and ½ of the partitions F~=CvxV

where
C~, = Vertical Distribution Factor

Since there is only one level for this building the entire
The weight of ½ of the glass
base shear, V, is applied at the roof diaphragm level.
12ft The previous calculations did not include any
=lOpsf× × 182 if= 10,9201b
2 portion of the roof live load in the calculations.
However, ASCE 7-93 requires the entire roof snow load
The weight of the fascia to be included in the calculation of W when the ground
= 10 psf x 7 ftx 204.67 ft = 14,330113 snow load exceeds 30 psf (although this may be reduced
by up to 80%). To simplify the design example, the
The ½ weight of the short masonry wall on Grid Line C added weight due to snow load was not included. In a
real design situation this added weight must be
18ft addressed.
=60psfx x21.33 ft = 11,5201b
2
Wind L o a d s
Assuming that the remaining masonry walls are simply The wind loading on buildings can vary
supported at the roofline and foundation, and extend 2 ft significantly. Different building codes across the U.S.
above the roof support, the weight of these walls applied use different wind load values and distributions. These
to the roof vary from a simplistic value of X psf over the wall
surface, to the complexity of ASCE 7-93 with its internal
and external coefficients. A document designed to assist
= (60 Psf x 18 ft ~ - / x 202.67 ft the professional in the understanding and use of the
16ft complex wind load provisions of ASCE is available
(Ref. 17.1.2). An update of this guide is in preparation.
( 6 0 p s f x 18 ftx 182ft)
Since this is a masonry design guide and not a wind
+3x x82ft manual, a simplistic approach to wind loads will be
16ff
= 27,600 lb followed. A wind pressure of 20 psf, acting uniformly
and over the wall areas, will be used. If a more complex
W = 348,000 lb + 10,920 lb + 14,330 Ib analysis were used the wind pressure on the individual
elements, such as the parapets and wall comers, would
+ 11,520 lb + 272,600 lb vary significantly.
W = 657,400 lb The walls are assumed to be simply supported
between the foundations and the roof diaphragm, with a
2-ft cantilevered parapet.

17-7
 Chapter 17

For wind from the north: ~M about foundation Wind load = 203 plf

2'
Also, an additional wind load from the fascia of 4.5 ft x 7
~b---- R f t x 20 psf = 630 lb will be applied to the wall on Grid
Line C.
It should be noted that wind loading produces a
20 psf 16' lateral force in the north-south direction that exceeds the
seismic loading and, therefore, wind governs in this
direction. In the east-west direction, the seismic loading
produces the larger total force and thus governs in this
direction.
The global distribution of these lateral design loads
to individual masonry walls is discussed in MDG Section
I20 psf x 18 ft x ~-fl-) 9.2.
Wind load = = 203 plf = R
16ft 17,1.4 E x a m p l e Problems - - T M S
Shopping C e n t e r
For wind from the south, blowing against the glass and To illustrate the application of the Code to typical
fascia: structural design consideration for strip shopping center
type masonry structures, 29 example problems are
Wind load = 20psf x (19~1-~ R
9"5 f l )f = 226
t Plf = presented for the TMS Shopping Center in this MDG
section. A listing of the examples is included in MDG
(This load governs for the north-south direction)
Section 17.1.1 to give the reader a summary of the design
For wind in the east-west direction: issues addressed by each example problem.
The material properties typically used in the design
examples related to the TMS Shopping Center are:

Property Concrete Masonry Grout

CMU Compressive 2000 N/A

Strength, psi
Mortar Type N N/A
f ~ psi; fg, psi 1500 2700
E, psi 1.35×106 1.35x106
/,/ 21.5 21.5

17-8
Example TMS-1 m Vertical Control Joint Locations
Determine the control joint locations in the concrete masonry exterior and interior walls for Wall
Construction Option A (unreinforced).
Unless the horizontal reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 4 of NCMA TEK 10-2A
by reinforced bond beams, the same control joint locations are recommended for Wall
Construction Option B (reinforced).

Calculations and Discussion

This example illustrates the application of the recommended material properties found in Code
Section 1.8 for determination of location of vertical control joints. For the TMS Shopping Center
the exterior and interior walls are constructed of concrete masonry meeting the minimum
requirements o f A S T M C 90. Bed joint reinforcement, 9 gage, is assumed to be placed at 16 in.
vertically (discontinued at control joints). Additional horizontal reinforcement would be
necessary for solid grouted construction.

Code Considerations
For temperature effect."
Code Section kt = 4.5 x 10-6 in./in, per degree F
1.8.3.2
Assume: AT = 100°F for exterior walls
A T = 40°F for interior walls
Exterior Wall Temperature Strain = (100)(4.5 x 10-6)= 4.5 x 10-4
Interior Wall Temperature Strain = ( 40)(4.5 x 10-6)= 1.8 x 10-4
For Drying Shrinkage:
I Code Section Assume a conservative value km= 4.5 x 10-4 in./in.
1.8.5.1 (This value may be overly conservative for some units and geographic regions.)
For Carbonation Shrinkage:
Assume k ~ , = 2.5 x 10-4 in./in.
Crack control coefficient for exterior walls
CCCE = 4.5 X 10-4 + 4.5 X 10-4 + 2.5 X 10-4 = 0.00115 in./in.
Crack control coefficient for interior walls
CCCI = 1.8 x 10-4 + 4.5 x 10-4 + 2.5 x 10-4 = 0.00088 in./in.
For exterior walls:
From Table 2 N C M A TEK 10-2A
Linear interpolation for maximum length between control joints;

0.0~'--0-~015 (0.00115)+ 35 = 23.5'

Which shall not exceed an aspect ratio of:
( 2.5-2.0 ](0.00115)+3.5 = 2.35
0 . 0 0 1 - 0.0015J
.'. For an 18' wall height, the distance between control joints cannot exceed:
l < (2.35)(18') = 42.3'
23.5' distance controls
Use exterior control joint spacing of 23 '-6"
For the control joints in the interior walls, use maximum recommended spacing of 25' unless local
experience justifies otherwise - - 25'-0"
Control joints should be located in accordance with MDG Section 10.4.1.2.

17-9
 C h a p t e r 17

E x a m p l e T M S - 2 n Lateral L o a d Distribution

The r o o f diaphragm in this example is considered flexible and is located at a height o f l 6 fl.
All lateral loads will be assumed to be applied at this elevation. Determine the lateral load
distribution to the east-west walls on Grid Lines A and C and to the north-south walls on
Grid Lines 1, 2, and3. Consider both seismic loads a n d w i n d loads.

Vc
-©

v v:

Lateral Loads on Masonry Shear Walls

Calculations a n d Discussion

Seismic Loads
East- West Direction
Since the roof diaphragm is assumed to be flexible and the tributary areas of the roof loads to
the walls on Grid Lines A and C are equal, these two walls share the lateral load equally.
Using the total earthquake load computed in MDG. 17.1.3, each wall is subjected to a load
of:
Wall Construction Option A - - Unreinforced Concrete Masonry
65,700 lb
VA = Vc - - 32,850 lb
2
Wall Construction Option B - - Reinforced Concrete Masonry
23,700 lb
V A = Vc - = 11,850 lb
2
It should be noted that we could also design the wall on Grid Line A to take the entire east-
west lateral load and design walls on Grid Lines A, 1, 2, and 3 to take the resulting torsion.
North-South Direction
The tributary areas of the roof to the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3 are equal. As explained
above, they will share the lateral load equally. The tributary area of the roof load for the wall
on Grid Line 2 is twice that of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3. The lateral load on each wall
is given as:

17- 10
Example TMS-2

Wall Construction Option A - - Unreinforced Concrete Masonry

65,700 lb
V~ = V 3 - = 16,425 lb
4
65,700 lb
V2 - - 32,850 lb
2

Wall Construction Option B - - Reinforced Concrete Masonry

23,700 lb
= V3 - - 5,925 lb
4
23,700 lb
V2 - - 11,850 lb
2

Wind Loads

East- West Direction

The tributary areas of the masonry walls on Grid Lines A and C are equal. However, the
wall on Grid Line C also carries the wind load applied to the 4.5-ft projection o f the fascia.
Using the distributed wind load calculated in MDG Section 17.1.3, wind loads resisted by
these elements are:

82ft
VA = 203 p l f x - - = 8,320 lb
2

/
Vc = 203 p l f x + (4.5 f t x 7 f t x 20 psi) = 8,950 lb

Again, the wall on Grid Line C could be ignored and diaphragm analysis with torsional
effects could be performed.

North-South Direction

The governing wind load will be produced by winds from the south applied to the glass and
fascia. The load is 226 plf, as given in MDG Section 17.1.3.

Since the tributary areas of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3 are equal, they will share the
lateral load equally. The tributary area of the wall on Grid Line 2 is twice that of the walls
on Grid Lines 1 and 3. The lateral load on each wall is therefore:

204.7 ft
= ~ = 226 p l f x - 11,600 lb
4

V2 = 2 x ( 2 2 6 p l f x 2 0 4 7 f t ) = 23,200 lb

17-11
 Chapter 17

Example TMS-3 m Design of Unreinforced Exterior Nonloadbearing Wall for Out-of-

Plane Flexure
Design the East Wall on Grid Line 3 using Wall Construction Option A (single-wythe
unreinforced concrete masonry).
Materials (values verified by testing)
Un# Strength =2, 000 psi (net area)
Mortar = Type N (PC-L)
f " = 1,500 psi
Em =1.35 x 106 psi
Loading
Wind: 20 psf
Neglect self weightfor initial analysis

Calculations and Discussion

© ®
East Wall

N ~_Tr-
y × l

~o

I[ I 11 IZ"-°[
I nlS i::::xample P'er[alns i o I n e s e A r e a s

Assume wall is pin supported at the top of the foundation wall and at the joist bearing
elevation (+16 ft-0 in.).

= Calculate imposed bending moment per 1 ft-O in. tributary width of wall
due to wind
;~2 Roof
~
,L

40 plf / 163 plf 40 ft Ib/ff

~B~~ 6
~;~
~:× 20 plf -~
~-~*,-- 203 plf ;
18'-0"
<~ '-0" -I~
/
~ ' 615 ft-lb/ft
~X
A 7.85'
<× -.,.
\
I,
;~ ~r ;: 157plf 157 plf
Loadin,q Shear Moment

17 - 12
Example TMS-3
Check seismic load

Fp = A~CcP WcperASCE7
assumeA, = 0.05; Cc = 0.9; P = 1.5 (worst case); and W~ = 40 psf
Fp = 0.05 (0.9)(1.5)(40) = 2.7 psf <<wind load = 20 psf
.'. seismic does not control

. Determine wall section properties

Alternate A: 12 in. face-shell-bedded hollow CMU

-~ 3 # 1 t .63"

I_ 12- _1
Tributary Width ~.5#

M o m e n t o f Inertia - 12 in.(11.63 in.) 3 12in.(8.63in.) 3

12 12
1 = 929 in.4
See Table 7 in MDG Appendix.

929 i n /
Section M o d u l u s = S - - 160 in. 3
0.5(11.63 in.)

Alternate B: 8 in. hollow CM~, grouted solid (groutper ASTM C 476)

1 2 in .(7 .63 in. /2 - 116 in.3

Section Modulus = S -
6

. Compare actual stresses to allowables

Alternate A: 12 in. face shell bedded hollow CMU; ignoring weight of wall
M
fb~ = < F~t (Code Table 2.2.3.2 for PC-L, Type N mortar hollow ungrouted
S
units normal to bed joint)
CodeSections I 615 ft- lb (12 in.fit)
2.2.3.2and = 160 in.3 = 46.0 psi > Fbt =19 psi(1.33) = 25 psi .'. N . G .
2.1.1.1.3
Alternate B: 8 in. hollow CMU,, grouted solid
M
fb, = < Fbt (Code Table 2.2.3.2 for PC-L Type N mortar, solid grout units,
S
normal to bed joints)
_ M _ 615 ft- lb(12 i n . / f t . ) = 63.6 psi < F~, = 58 psi(1.33) = 77 psi
fbt S 116 in .3
.'. tension stresses acceptable for the 8 in. solidly grouted construction alternate only.

17- 13
 Chapter 17

In a nonloadbearing, unreinforced masonry wall, flexural tension capacity will usually

govern over flexural compression capacity. Therefore, a 12 in. single-wythe face-shell-
bedded hollow wall, with Type N portland cement-lime mortar is not an acceptable
design solution• The 8 in. hollow single-wythe CMU, grouted solid is an acceptable
solution.

Note that Alternate A would still not be acceptable even if self weight were included.
The added compression stress at mid-height would be:

10.17ft(60 psf) = 17.0 psi

1.5in.(2)(12)
This would reduce the tension to 29.0 psi >25 psi " N.G.

Alternate C." 10 in. hollow CM-~, partially grouted

For a fully-grouted 10 in. CMU wall:

S = 185 in.3; fit = 40 psi <Fbt = 58 psi (1.33) = 77 psi

Since the allowable stress is much greater than the actual stress for the solidly grouted
walls, one might modify the fully-grouted wall to a partially-grouted wall• If the wall is
50 percent grouted, the allowable stress is:

Fbt = / 1 9 p s i 2p 5 8 ps s i ,/ xi 1 .33
- = 51

The section modulus for the wall 50 percent grouted (grout spacing = 16 in.):

I(50%) _=_
Iho,ow + Igrout,~ = 567 + 892 = 729.50in.4
2 2

I _ 792.97 _ 165 in. 3

c 9.625/2
615x12
fb = = 44.7 < Fb, =51 psi
165
.'. 50 % grouting of a 10 in. CMU wall is acceptable•

Alternate D: Empirical Design

ICodeTable Nonload-bearing walls:
5.5.1 Exterior h'/t = 18 (max)
h' 16 ftx 12
=10.7in. • 12 in. CMU wall required
treq'd 18 18
Parapet:
t,,~,= 8 in.
h'/t = 3 (max)
24in.
treq.~ = h'/3 = = 8 i n . • 12in. C M U w a l l i s O K
3

17 - 14
Example TMS-4 u Design of an Unreinforced Interior Nonloadbearing Wall for
Out-of-Plane Flexure and Shear
For the interior wall on Grid Line 2 (Wall Construction Option A), design a hollow unreinforced
8 in. concrete masonry wallfor out-of-planeflexure and shear
f'~ = 1,500 psi
Unit Weight = 46.5 psf (see MDG Appendix A)
Type N Mortar (PC-L) usedfor face shell bedding

Calculations and Discussion

OUT-OF-PLANE FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Since a bar joist is placed along each side of this wall, no roof load is transmitted to the wall. The
wall span for bending due to seismic effect is 16 ft. Although the wall extends two ft above the
joist bearing elevation, this portion is not being included in calculations to be conservative.

The seismic loading from ASCE 7-93 is:

Fp =AvCcPWc
P = 1.5
Av = 0.05
Cc = 0.9 (interior partition normal to flat surface)
Wc = 46.5 psf
Fp = (0.05)(0.9)(1.5)(46.5) = 3.14 psf
Note that some building codes require a minimum wind load of 5 psf on interior walls.

Per ASCE 7-93 check load combination 1.2D + 1.0E

The axial force at the mid point between lateral support is:

CodeSection P = (8 ft)(46.5 psf) (1.2) = 446.4 plf

2.1.1.2.3.1 ]
The associated bending moment and shear force are:
M ~ = 1/8 F; (h') 2 = 1/8 (3.14 psf)(16 ft) 2 = 100.4 ft-lb/ft
Vma~= 1/2 Fp h ' = 1/2 (3.14 psf)(16 ft) = 25.2 plf

Assuming face shell bedding, a 1' design width and using MDG Appendix A, the calculated
stresses are:
P 446.4 lb
= - = 14.9 psi
f~ A 30 in.2
M (100.4 ft- lb/ft)(12 in.fit) _ 14.9 psi
fb = ~ - - 81 in.3
CodeEq. (2- fv = VQ - - -3- ~V- - 3 (25.2 lb) _ 1.26 psi
16) I
Ib 2A 2 30 in .2

CodeSection I The nominal strength = 2-1/2 times the allowable stress value. For f " = 1,500 psi that is:
2.1.1.2.3.2 I

17- 15
 Chapter 17

Nominal flexural compressive strength = 2.5 (I/3f'm) = 2.5 (1/3)(1,500) = 1,250 psi
CodeSection Design strength = nominal strength x strength reduction factor do
2.1.1.2.3.3
= 1,250 (0.8) = 1,000 psi
The h/r ratio is:
CodeSection
1.9.3 [ =~= /364 in. 4 =2.69 in.
r ~50.1 in. 2

Note thatA is the average area of the unit, not the face shell area. See Table 8 Appendix A.
h/r = (16 ft)(12 in./ft)/2.69 in. = 71.3 < 99

Hence,
Code Eq. (2-
12)
Fo= f" 1-
1 I((16ft)(12in./ft)~2]
Fa = ~ (1,500 psi) 1 - . . " i 4 ~ ) j=Z78psi

Nominal strength = 2.5(F,) = 2.5(278) = 694 psi

Design strength = Nominal x do = 694 psi (0.8) = 555 psi
CodeTable Fb~= 19 psi for Type N mortar
2.2.3.2 ]
Check axial compression plus flexural compression:
f~ + fb <1.33
Fo Fb
14.9 psi ~- 14.9 psi = 0.027 + 0.015 -- 0.042 < 1.33 • OK
555 psi 1000 psi

I Code Section[ Hence, this requirement is satisfied, where the right side of Code Eq. (6-1) has been increased by
2.1.1.2.3.2 [ 1/3 because the flexure is caused by seismic load.

Code Eq. (2- An additional requirement is

11) P < (1/4) P~ (2-1/2)(0.8) = 1/2 Pe
and Section
2.1.1.2.3.3
CodeEq. (2- where P , - ~r2EmI
h2
(1_ 0.577e) a
15)
e=0

Assuming 2,000 psi net compressive strength of units

Codetable E,, = 9 0 0 f " = 900 (1500) = 1,350,000 psi = 1.35 x 10 6 psi

1.8.2.2.1 ]
~r2 (1.35 x 1 0 6 psi)(364 i n . 4 ) (1 - 0 ) 3 = 131,563 plf
p, - [(16 ft)(12 in./ft) ]2

17 - 16
Example TMS-4

Then,
446 plf < 1--(131,563 plf) = 65,782 plf • OK
2

Determine the net tensile stress at mid-height

3~t(net) =A -f~

fit(net) = 14.9 psi - 14.9 psi = 0.0 psi

Code Section
Thus, no tension develops in the wall. Had there been tension, it would have to be less than (19
2.2.3.2 and psi)(1.33)(2.5)(0.4) = 25.3 psi to be acceptable.
2.1.1.2.3.3
The designer would also have to consider dead load alone. Working stress design concepts would
be checked instead of the pseudo-strength procedures.

Therefore, the interior nonloadbearing wall is satisfactory, with respect to out-of-plane flexure, if
constructed of 8 in. concrete masonry units with Type N or S mortar.

SHEAR CONSIDERATIONS

Now, consider the shear design of the unreinforced 8 in. CMU wall. The example assumes that
seismic controls. Check state and local building codes for minimum lateral loads.

Vm~x= 25.2 plf from this example problem

The shear stress is:

f_VQ_3V
Ib 2 A
For a 1 fi width of wall, the shear stress is
3 ( V ) _ 3(25.2plf) -1.2psi
f" = 2 -A 2(30in. 2/ft)
Note that the shear is assumed to be resisted by two face shells since the wall is unreinforced and
untracked. Some engineers conservatively use only a single face shell in their calculations to
cover both the uneracked and cracked conditions. For this case f, = 2.4 psi.

Code Section 2.2.5 provides allowable stresses for in-plane shear stresses in combination with
axial load. Separate shear stresses for out-of-plane bending shear are not stated. It is
recommended that Code Section 2.2.5 values also be used for out-of-plane loading.

17 - 17
 Chapter 17
CodeSection For combined axial load and shear, Code requires that the least of the following allowable shear
2.2.5 I stress values, F~, be used:

(a) F~ = 1 . 5 a f ~ ' = 1.541,500psi = 58.1 psi

(b) F~ = 120 psi

(c) Fv = v + 0.45 N ~ = 37 psi ~ 0.45(446 lb)

A,, 30 in .2 - 43.7 psi ¢=GOVERNS
Where v = 37 psi for running bond not solidly grouted
Co~ctio~ ]
2.1.1.2.3.2and For seismic, Fv = 1.33(43.7 psi) (2.5)(0.6) = 87 psi
2.1.1.2.3.3
For this example, the computed shear stress << 87 psi therefore OK

CodeSection
1.13.3.2 I Code requires that for seismic category A, connections between masonry walls and roof
construction be capable of resisting a seismic lateral force of 1,000 times the effective peak
velocity related acceleration per lineal foot of wall.

Force = 1,000(0.05) = 50 p l f = out of plane shear

3V
• f~ - - 5.0 psi < 87 psi • OK
2A

17 - 18
Example TMS-5 n Design of an Unreinforced Loadbearing Wall for Eccentric Axial Load
For the North Wall on Grid Line A, determine the size of wall needed for Wall Construction
Option A (Unreinforced Concrete Masonry).

Unit Strength = 2, 000 psi (net area) Three Load Combinations Examined
f "~ = 1,500 psi D+L; D+L+W; D+W
Em= 1.35 x 10e psi
Type N PC-L Mortar
fg = 2, 700 psi
Eg = 1.35 x 106 psi

P
k

18'

_1
r I

Calculations and Discussion

The obvious difficulty in designing this wall without reinforcing wiU be accommodating the
very large moment for the D + W combination (calculated in Example TMS-11) without
exceeding the allowable flexural tensile stresses in Code Table 6.3.1.1. Using M D G Eq.
12.2-8 with section properties from MDG Appendix A for a fully grouted 8 in. wall, and
assuming Type N PC-L mortar:

For D + W:
P = 305 + 780 = 1,085 plfat 8 ft above the base
M = 7,980 in.-lb/ft at same location

e = virtual eccentricity = M/P = 7,980/1,085 = 7.4 in.

t7-19
 C h a p t e r 17

MDG Section P < AFb, M

12.2.1.3 e
where e in this equation is the virtual eccentricity,
P
ek

p _< (91.5 in.2)(58 p s i ) ( 1 . 3 3 ) = 1,462 lb > 1,085 lb " OK

(7.4 i n . ) 1
(1.27 in .)

One could also use MDG Eq. 12.2-7 for design:

P M
_ _ + < Fb,
A S

1,085 7,980
- - ÷ = - 1 1 . 9 p s i + 68.8 psi
91.5 116
= 56.9 psi t e n s i o n < 58 ( 4 / 3 ) = 77.1 psi " O K

Checking an 8 in. ungrouted wall laid in face shell bedding (wall weight = 40 psi'):
P = 305 + 80 = 385 plfat 8 ft above the base
M = 7,980 in.-lb/ft
e =M/P = 7,980/385 = 20.7 in.

P <_ AFb, <_ ( 3 0 i n . 2 ) ( 1 9 p s i ) ( 1 . 3 3 )

=114plf<385plf • N.G.
e 20.7 in.
---1 1
ek 2.7 in.

or, by MDG Eq. 12.2-7:

P M 385 7,980
-----t- =- + ~
A S 30 81
= - 1 2 . 8 + 9 8 . 5 = 85.6 psi > 19 psi ( 4 / 3 ) = 25.2 psi .-. N . G .

Clearly, even full-mortar bedding will not be acceptable.

A similar check of other load cases using the fully grouted 8 in. trial section indicates:
ForD + L eD = eL = 1.98 in. from Example TMS-11

D + L, p < (91.5 in .2 )(58 psi) _ 9,4701b > 1,0711b.'.OK

(1.98 in.) 1
(1.27 in.)
P M 1,071 1,810
or---+ - --÷-~=-11.7+15.6 = 3.9psi< 58psi.'.OK
A S 91.5 116

17- 20
Example TMS-5

and for D + L + W e = 5.07 in. from Example TMS-11

D + L + W , P < (91.5 in.2)(58 psi)(1.33) = 2,359 lb > 1,695 lb .'.OK

(5.07in.) 1
(1.27in.)
P M 1,695 8,590
or---+ - -- ~- = -18.5 + 74.0 = +55.5 psi < 77.1psi .'. O K
A S 91.5 116

The trial 8 in. solidly grouted section satisfies MDG Eq. 12.2-7 or Eq. 12.2-8 (the tension
stress limitation) for all three loading conditions. Now check the unity equation
(compression check) for the same loadings:

f~+fb<l.O0 or 1.33
Fo Fb

or use the rearranged unity equation, MDG Eq. 12.2-4, given below.

p<_ AFo

ekk, 4 )

Fa=0.25 f" 1-

Fa =(0.25)(1,500 psi) 1 \ [ 140x2.2in. )j=229 psi

D+L, p < (91.5 in.2)(229 psi) = 12,200 lb > 1,071 lb • OK

1 -~(1.98 in .)(3)(0.611)
(1.27 in .)(4)

D+L+W, p _<(91.5 in .2 )(229 psi)(1.33) = 9,950 Ib > 1,695 lb .'. OK

1 ~ (5.07 in .)(3)(0.611)
(1.27 in .)(4)

D+W, p < (91.5 in.2)(229 psi)(1.33) _ 7,670 lb > 1,085 lb .'. OK

14 (7.4 in .)(3)(0.611)
(1.27 in .)(4)

All three loadings meet the requirements of Code Eq.(2-10), using the trial section.

17- 21
 Chapter 17
Finally, check Euler Buckling [Code Eq. (2-15)] for each loading case.

Pe
- h2 L
577el 3
D+ L,e=l.98in.,
~2 (1 Q35 10 6 psi)(443 in. 4)
p, = x 1 - 0.577 (1"98 in')l = 17,785 lb
(192in.) 2 (2.20in.)J

P = 1,071 lb< P~ - 17,785 lb _ 4,446 lb • OK

4 4

Euler buckling loads for load cases D + L + W and D + W are calculated using actual
eccentricities from gravity loads without including effects o f lateral loads. Hence, the largest
value o r e will be 1.98 in. from the previously considered load case. Since the allowable load
from this case exceeds the design loads of cases D + L + W and D + W, no further check is
necessary.

In summary, use an 8 in. solidly grouted unreinforced concrete masonry wall, PC-L type N
mortar.

17- 22
E x a m p l e T M S - 6 m Distribution of Horizontal Load Within Unreinforced Perforated S h e a r
Walls

Determine the horizontal load distribution in the unreinforced perforated shear wall on Grid Line
3 (East Wall) for Wall Construction Option A. The analysis will consider the control joints that
are required in the unreinforced concrete block masonry wall.

The figure below shows the configuration o f this wall, the control joints and the openings.

Control Joints

82 '-0" =_1
,-- \ "'-I 32,850 Ib seismic
11,600 Ib wind

@ '
I
I
I
!

I_.. 1 4 ' - 8 " ~ I ~ 14'-8"=__11 I 17 -8 ~ 1 ~ 17 -8

I-- 30'-0" Yl \ 36 '-0 " ~ I

l //

'-4"

Calculations and D i s c u s s i o n

Since the loads in this example are relatively small and the wail is unreinforced, it is again
appropriate to use a linear elastic, uncmcked section analysis for the distribution of the
horizontal shear loads.

The largest shear load applied near the top of the wail on Grid Line 3, is produced by
either wind or seismic loads. From MDG Example TMS-2 the seismic shear load is
32,850 lb while the wind shear load is 11,600 lb.

There are five sections of wail separated by control joints. It is usually a good idea to
assume that the control joints will not transfer in-plane shear so that each section of the
wail acts as an independent pier, joined by the diaphragm. As shown in MDG Example
TMS-13, the small pier between the two doors will resist very little of the wail shear.
Thus, the section with openings can be ignored with little effect on the anaiysis.
Therefore, four piers resist the in-plane load. The load can be distributed to each pier in
proportion to its relative stiffness. The caiculations only consider bending and shear
deformations over the 16-ft height (from the foundation to the point of load application).
The total cantilever deflection of the wail can be calculated using MDG Eq. 9.2-3:

17- 23
 C h a p t e r 17
p, F fh,) 3 {h')]
=-t 4- +3
=.,I t,.J t,.JI
Since all walls have equal thickness and only relative stiffness is required, assume

g 1.
~=--ln.
E=t 10

The deflection at the top of the 14 ft - 8 in. wide piers, Ac 16x 14-8,is:

l in I4( 16ft ~3+3( 16ft ~1

Acl6xl4-8='i-'O L k,14-.7--ft) \ \ ) j = 0 . 8 4 i n .
1
This produces a stiffness, k i -
A
k16x14_8 _ 1 _ 1.19 in.-1
0.84 in.

Similarly the deflection of the two 17 ft-8 in. piers is

l in [4~ 16ft ~3+3 ~ 16ft_.~l=0.57in.
Ac16x17-8= "i"O k ~ , ~ . ] k.17.7 ftJJ
Therefore
k16×17_8__ 1 -- 1.75 in.-1
0.57 in.

The total stiffness of the wall system is

kto=,t = 2 x 1.19 in .-1 .at. 2 x 1.75 in.-~ = 5.88 in.-1

The total load of 11,600 lb can be distributed to the piers by the ratio of pier stiffness to
total wall stiffness as summarized in the table below.

Piers Pier Stiffness, kpler / ktotat Wind Pier Shear Seismic Pier Shear
l~pler (Ib) (Ib)
1 1,19 0.20 2,320 6,570
2 1.19 0.20 2,320 6,570
4 1.75 0.30 3,480 9,855
5 1.75 0.30 3,480 9,855
Total] 5.88 1.00 11,600 32,850

17- 2 4
Example TMS-6

Note: If one simply distributes the shear in proportion to shearing stiffness (that is, in
proportion to plan length of walls), as shown below, one arrives at a quite reasonable
answer with 5% of the effort of the method shown above.

Piers Pier Length, Li ~IL~ Wind Pier Shear Seismic Pier Shear
(Ib) (Ib)
1 14.7 0.23 2,668 7,555
2 14.7 0.23 2,668 7,555
4 17.7 0.27 3,132 8,870
5 17.7 0.27 3,132 8,870
Total I 64.8 1.00 11,600 32,850

17- 25
 Chapter 17

Example TMS-7 - - Unreinforced Shear Wall Design for In-Plane Flexure and Shear
Design Pier 1 of the perforated shear wall on Grid Line 3, between Grid Lines A and C. The
analysis shown in MDG Example TMS-6 indicates that Pier I is subjected to a shear load from
the diaphragm of 2.32 kips due to wind load and 6.57 kips due to seismic load, applied at the roof
height of l 6fl.
Control Joints

82 '-0"
32,850 Ib seismic

'- ""4 @ !
!
I
11,600 Ib wind

I
!
I
N:!
I_.. 14 .-8. ~. 1 ~. 1.4 . - 8 ~ ~ 10 . . L..
. 17
. -8 ..._t~.. 17'-8"

30 -0 I 36'-0"
,,, ": l ' "
3'-4"

Calculations and Discussion

Loads
14.7 ' The loading of pier 1 is shown in the figure at left. It is
seismic= 6.57 kips assumed that there is no gravity roof load applied to this
wind= 2.32 kips T wall pier.

16'
b
I
18'
Assume that 12 in., hollow, face shell bedded CMU's are
used with a weight of 46.5 psf. See MDG Appendix A
for unit and wall properties tables.

Check two load combinations: D + Wand D + E

Load Combination D + W
For this load combination, the allowable stress method is
used. At base of wall:
P = (46.5 psf)(18 ft) (14.7 ft) = 12.3 kips
M (1,000 lb/kip)
M = (2.32 kips)(16 ft) = 37.1 ft- kips
Check normal stresses assuming face shell bedding (face shell thickness, t = 1.5 in. from MDG
Appendix A)

.'. A. = 2 x ( 1 4 . 7 f t x l 2 i n . / f t ) x l . 5 i n . = 529in. 2

S = bd2 = 2 x (1.5 in.) x (14.7 f t x 12 in./ft) 2 = 15,600 in.3

6 6

17- 26
Example TMS-7

1n-Plane Flexural Considerations

P M
Max. tensile stress = - +
A, S
_ (12.3x103)lb v (37.1x103 x l 2 ) i n . - l b
529 in .2 15,600 in .3
= - 23.3 psi + 28.7 psi = 4.4 psi (tension)

Code Section I Tension stresses are not allowed for unreinforced wall elements subjected to in-plane forces since
2.2.3.2 [ values in Code Table 2.2.3.2 apply only to out-of-plane loading.

Try 12 in. solid grouted CMUs (Assume 140 pcf). At base of wall:

p _ (11.63in.) (140pcf)(18ft) (14.7ft) - 35.9 kips

(12 in. fit) (1,000 lb/kip)

A, = (11.63 in.)(14.7 ft x 12 in.fit) = 2,050 in 2

(11.63 in.) x (14.7 f t x 12 in./ft) 2

S 60,300 in. 3
6

Max. tensile stress - 35,9001b + (37.1x103 x l 2 ) i n . - l b

2,050 in 2 60,300 in .3
= -17.5 psi + 7.4 psi = -10.1 psi (compression)

Therefore, no net tensile stresses.

Since the compressive stresses are so low the unity equation:

Code Section
2.2.3 f= + fb < 1.33 (increased by 1/ 3 for wind) is OK by inspection.
Fa Fb

Shear Considerations
Code Section
VQ
Shear Stress =
2.2.5 /bw
£- 3V
for rectangular sections:
2 A,

3 (2"32× 103 l b ) 17
" f,=-~ 2--~(~i~i ~ -)= . psi

17- 27
 C h a p t e r 17

Code Section The allowable shear stress (F~) is the least of:
2.2.5.2
a) 1.5

b) 120 psi
c) v + 0.45 N ,
A,
Assume fro = 1,500 psi from prism testing of 2,000 psi units and Type N mortar.
U s e f ~ = 1,500 psi

a) F v = 1.5 (~/1,500 psi) = 58.1psi

c) Fv = 60 psi (solidly grouted units)
, , Fv = 60 psi + 0.45(17.5 psi) = 67.9 psi
, o F~ = 58.1 psi governs and is much greater thanfi = 1.7 psi .'. OK

Use grouted 12 in. CMUs with a minimum compressive strength of 1,300 psi and Type N mortar.

Load Combination/> + E

D + E - - The pseudo strength method of Code Section 2.1.1.2.3 is used

Code Section
2.1.1.2.3.1
Use ASCE 7-93 Load Factors 1.2 D + E

P = 1.2(46.5 psf)(18)(- 14.7ft ~ = 14.8 kips

k 1000 lb/kip)
M = (6.57 kips)(16 ft) = 105.1 ft- kips

Check 12 in. solid grouted CMU (assume 140 pcf) as required for D+W

__116
12 (140)(18)
(14e 1.2 = 43 kips
1000)
A , = 2,050 in. 2, S = 60,300 in?

- 43,000 105.1x 103 x 12

Max tensile stress -
2,050 60,300
= -20.87 + 20.95 ~ 0
• no net tensile stress

Again the compressive stresses are so low the unity equity equation
Code Section
2.1.1.2.3.2
f. ~ ib
-< 1.33 is OK by inspection.
Fo

17- 28
Example TMS-7

Shear stress = VQ = f~
Ib
3 V
For rectangular section f~ = 3//22

3/~2(6 57x103 xl.2]

fv = 3 "-- . . . . 5.7 psi
2050in. 2
CodeSection Assumingf'm = 1,500 psi
2.1.1.2.3.2 I
Fv = 58.1 (2.5X0.6) = 87.1 psi > 5.7 psi OK

Use a solid grouted CMU, PC-L Type N Mortar

t 7 - 29
 C h a p t e r 17

Example TMS-8 Out of Plane Lateral and Axial Load Distribution in Single-Wythe
Loadbearing Wall Systems
Determine the axial and out-of-plane lateral Pier # 1
load distribution to the elements in a single
Pier #2
wythe wall system. \
\
The east wall section under consideration is •i ~ B e a m bearing i rib

located on Grid Line 3 shown in MDG Fig. I

17.1-1. This section of wall is subject to a I

18'
concentrated reaction from the roof girder (IV
14' - 7 - 3 / 8 "
16x 31) on Grid Line 3, near Grid Line B.
7'
Wind Load 20 p s f positive pressure or suction
pressure (includes interior pressure loading).
10' "/

2" - 8" -

Calculations and Discussion

Loading on Wall Pier 1

When designing masonry systems, the Code requires a number of different load combinations to
be investigated to determine the critical loading conditions.

D + L, 0.9D + E, D + L+(Wor E), or D + Ware the load combinations that usually govern the
design of wall systems, using working stress design per Code Section 2.1. The designer could
also, from Code Section 2.1.1.2.3, use a "pseudo" strength method and ASCE load combinations
for the seismic loads.

For the purpose of this example, the following assumptions are made:
1. When designing wall sections to resist out-of-plane loads in Seismic Performance
Category A, the D + L + W load combination usually governs and will be assumed to
govern in this example.
. The wall system is constructed of 8 in. reinforced concrete block with a 88 psf dead load.
3. The roof system provides simple lateral support to the wall at the base of the parapet.
4. The foundation provides negligible restraint to out-of-plane rotations, that is, it can be
assumed to act as a simple support.

It should be noted that when analyzing unreinforced wall systems, control joints will affect the
continuity of the wall system and therefore the load distribution. In these cases, the designer
can assume that the wall system is separated into discrete elements defined by the control joints.
Such discrete elements are assumed to transfer out-of-plane shear but not in-plane shear or axial
stresses.

Axial Loads
In MDG Section 17.1.2, the W 16 x 31 girder reaction, P, to the wall at B3 is given as 15,770 lb.
It should be noted that the uplift effect of the dead load of the fascia suspended at the end of
cantilevered joists between Grid B and C was ignored in the calculations. This uplift was

17- 30
Example TMS-8

ignored because it simplified the calculations and the uplift forces acting on the soffit would likely
balance out a significant portion of the fascia dead load. This simplification results in a slightly
conservative value for the reaction.

The girder reaction is applied to the wall at the center of a door opening. This girder reaction is
transferred symmetrically to the wall sections on either side of the opening. Thus, Pier #1 will be
subjected to 1/2 of the girder reaction, 7,890 lb. Even though the 7,890 lb axial load is applied to
Pier #1 over the height of the wall above the opening, it can be conservatively assumed that the
entire load comes onto Pier # 1 at the girder bearing elevation.

The rotation of the girder produces a varying bearing stress distribution on the wall. As shown in
the figure below, a simplified triangular stress distribution is assumed to model the conditions
under the bearing plate. The axial load applied to Pier #1 will act at an eccentricity from the
centroidal axis of the wall cross section. For a 5 in. wide bearing plate,

P/2

(1_)(1
e= -~x7.63in.- x5in.+0.5in.
) =1.65in.
r
I/'/ /'/I

L_
--~.A I Interior
Other than the girder reaction, the wall section has no applied
axial loads. However, a portion of the dead loads from the sections above the door openings are
also transferred to Pier #1. Half of this load will be assumed to go to each side of these openings.
The additional axial load on Pier #1 (Po) is therefore:

eo = 88 psf x E(.3"~ ft.) x 11 ft + ( ~ - / x 8 t t l = 5,132 lb

This load is assumed to be applied to Pier #1 at the top of the tallest opening, i.e., at 10 ft from the
floor level. If desired, the wall dead loads can be considered as two concentrated loads applied at
heights of 10 ft and 7 ft.

Lateral Loads Due to Wind

It is assumed that the interior and exterior wind pressures combine to produce a uniform wind
loading of 20 psf on the wall system.

Because of the wall system configuration, these wind loads are primarily distributed in one-way
bending to the foundation and roof supports. Further, due to the flexibility from the openings,
most of the load on sections of the wall system with openings is transferred first to the continuous
wall sections on either side, and subsequently to the foundation and roof. Based on these
assumptions, the uniform lateral load on Pier #1 is calculated as:
w = 20 psf x (2.67 ft + ~ - 3+"23ft3 1Oft) = 187 plf

17- 31
 C h a p t e r 17

It is important that the wall sections above the door openings be analyzed to determine whether
they have sufficient strength to transfer the loads to the supporting piers. A simply supported
beam analysis using the opening length as the beam span is suggested for this wall section.

The total loading applied to Pier # 1 is summarized in the figure at 7,890 Ib

/
right. From this loading, critical moments and shears, and
1.65"---b" ~ -
subsequently stresses, can be determined. These stresses can then
be used to evaluate whether the maximum stresses in the proposed
wall section design are within allowable limits. During this
evaluation, the self weight of the wall system must be added to the rS, 13 .>Ib
axial stress to provide an accurate stress determination at these
critical sections. 187 plf

In most cases, the suction wind loading (or the outward seismic
loading), combined with eccentric axial load, will produce the
critical design conditions for a wall system. However, in load !
combinations that include wind load, allowable stresses may be T I T
increased by one third, per Code Section 2.1.1.1.3. k

If the designer so desires the loading shown for Pier #1 can be Pier 1
further simplified by assuming that both axial loads are applied at
the girder bearing elevation.

Loading on Wall Pier #2

Using procedures similar to those outlined above, the axial and
lateral loads on Pier #2 can be calculated. To simplify ~k
calculations, since Pier #2 is not subjected to an axial load from
the roof, a typical vertical strip of Pier #2 carries the same loading. ,613 Ib
Each foot width of Pier #2 would have to support its own weight 53.3 plf ~o
¢-

plus a 20 psfwind load. A strip of Pier #2 next to the 7-ft opening

IT
must carry an additional wind loading transmitted to this strip
from the opening effect. The width of the strip to be used next to
the opening is debatable. One might suggest a width equal to 3t.
It has been assumed conservatively that the strip is 1 ff wide. L
Axial loads at top of door
I
po = 88 psf x (3"33 f t ) x 11 ft = 1,613 lb Pier 2

Lateral loads
W = 2 0 p s f x (1 ft + 3"33 f t l = 53.3 plf

The loading for Pier #2 is summarized in the figure at right.

17- 32
Example TMS-8

Design of Lintels A and B

The load distribution to the lintels over the door openings is an indeterminate analysis problem.
The distribution of vertical load to the lintels depends on the size of the opening, the depth of the
masonry above the lintel, the restraint provided by the piers on each side, the presence of control
joints, and the type of vertical loading. As the ratio of the length of opening to the depth of
masonry above the lintel decreases, more of the vertical load is transferred to the piers by arching
action. This arching action will occur only if sufficient restraint is provided by a tension tie over
the opening, or if sufficient masonry exists on either side of the opening to resist the arch thrusts.

Tension ties can be provided by sizing the lintel reinforcement to resist both the beam tension
stress and the tie force for arch action over the opening. This reinforcement must be adequately
anchored within the piers on either side if these bars are needed to develop sufficient strength to
resist the arch thrusts.

For uniformly distributed vertical loads applied to walls which have heights of masonry above the
lintel that are less than one-half the lintel support spacing plus 16 in., NCMA Tek-Note 81 (See
Chapter 9 Select Bibliography) suggests that the lintel be designed for the entire vertical load, and
be assumed simply supported over the wall opening. This same analysis can be used for cases
where movement joints are present on one or both sides of the openings. Concentrated loads can
be distributed to the lintel in a manner similar to that described in MDG Section 9.3.1.

For lintels that have heights of masonry above the lintel that exceed one-half the lintel span
spacing plus 16 in., the designer can assume that all of the uniformly applied vertical load at the
top of the wall above the opening, and the self-weight of the wall above the apex of a 45 °
triangular area over the opening, is carried by arching action. If arching action is taken into
account, then the lintel should be designed to support the sum of the dead weight of the masonry
in a 45 ° triangular area above the lintel and the self weight of the lintel. If a concentrated load is
applied to the wall away from the center of the lintel opening, some of this load may be
distributed to the lintel and must be accounted for. The reader should refer to Schneider and
Dickey (MDG Ref. 9.2.1) for further information on this subject and a suggested analysis method.

If the designer is uncertain whether there is sufficient masonry above or on each side of the
opening to form the arch, arching action should be neglected.

Lintel A /
The location, dimensions, and loads for ~ Loads Above Apex Of
Triangle, If Present,
lintel A are as shown at right. Are Carded By Arching
Action
Code Sections I A minimum bearing length of 4 in. is
2.3.3.4.1 and 45°
assumed on each side of the opening, so W-
2.3.3.4.3
the center-to-center span of the lintel, per
Code Sections 2.3.3.4.3 and 2.3.3.4.1, is:
/ /
4.0in. 3.67'
S p a n = 3.33 ft + = 3.67 ft
12 i n . / f t
The height of the masonry above the lintel to the top of the wall is:

17- 33
 Chapter 17

H e i g h t = 1 8 f t - 7 . 0 ft=11 ft

3.67 ft 16in.
llft > ~ - 3 . 1 7 ft
2 12in./ft
Therefore, arching action is present and the lintel can be designed for the weight of the lintel and
the weight of the wall within the triangular area defined by the arch. The loads on lintel A are
summarized below.

If a 45 ° angle of distribution is assumed, the arch thrusts can be calculated as the horizontal
component of the arch forces. Therefore the thrust is

Thrust=[I(18ft-7f0x 3"627ftI (3"67ft)(l'84ft)]x88psfxcos45°

Thrust = 1,151 lb

/<' ~
7'/2) = 162 plf

-- A s s u m e d 90 plf Lintel
/
Selfweig ht
Y ~r

Lintel

3.67'

and must be resisted with a tension tie or the in-plane shear capacity of the piers on either side of
the opening.

Lintel B
The location, dimensions and loads for P
lintel B are as shown at right.
I ~( GirderBeadng--~
A minimum bearing length of 4 in. was
assumed on each side of the opening, so
the center to center span of the lintel is:

4.0 in. I
Span=lOR+ -10.3 ft 14.6'
12 in./ft

The height of the masonry above the lintel

(to girder bearing elevation) is:

Height = 14.6 f t - 10.0 ft = 4.6 ft

17- 34
Example TMS-8

10.3 ft 16in.
4.6ft < ~ + =6.5ft
2 12in./ft
Therefore, no arching action exists. If load were applied above the 6.5-ft distance above the
opening, such load would be arched across the opening.

The loading for the lintel is shown below. This load includes the weight of the lintel, the weight
of the wall immediately above the opening and the distributed concentrated load. Note that a
distribution angle of 30 ° was used and the distributed length was limited to the bearing plate width
plus 4 times the wall thickness. The effect of the bond beam was ignored, since this results in a
conservative loading and simplifies the analysis. If these loads produce an uneconomical lintel
design further refmement of the load analysis can be conducted.

Lintel B must be designed to resist the above distributed loads.

15,770 Ib

10" Length Of
30 ° ,. Bearing Plate

" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "y
I_ _l
10" + 4 x 7 . 6 3 " = 40.5"
88 psf (8') = 704 plf

Lintel

10.3'
__I--

17- 35
 Chapter 17
Example TMS-9 - - Empirical Design of Masonry Walls
Design the masonry walls using Wall Construction Option A. See MDG Section 17.1.1 for
building plans and elevations.
Roof Deck: Metal Deck With No Fill Concrete Masonry ASTM C 90
Roof Live Load = 30 p s f Unit Strength = 2, 000 psi
Roof Dead Load = 15 psf Unit Weight = 120 p c f
Thickness to be determined
Seismic Performance Category A Mortar ASTM C 270 Type N
Design Wind Pressure = 20 p s f

102'-4" ~ I~- 102'-4" -p

v

__~ q~_l
2"

Forpilasterdesign
see MDG Section11.2

t-- 21' 4" wl

TMS Shopping Center Framing Plan

Calculations a n d Discussion

lo EMPIRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA CHECK

CodeSection A. Seismic Performance Category A < Category B .'. OK
5.1.1 ]
CodeSection B. Design Wind Velocity Pressure = 20 psf < 25 psf .'. OK
5.1.2.2
IC;/eSecti°n I C. Building Height = 18 ff < 35 ff .'. OK
• Empirical design may be used

, DESIGN OF LOADBEARING WALLS, GRID LINES A & C

Try 12 in. hollow, concrete masonry units, based upon lateral supp6rt requirements
CodeSection A. Minimum Shear Wall Thickness: 8 in. < 12 in. • OK
5.3.1.1 [
B. Minimum Shear Wall Length
1. Shear walls are required on Grid Lines A & C to resist wind in the east or west
direction. The Code requires shear wall spacing and shear wall length
considerations.
Solving for the minimum shear wall length

17- 36
Example TMS-9

ICodeSection minimumlength =
shear wall spacing
5.3.1.3 ] ratio
82ft
l- - 41 ft < Length Wall Grid LineA= 204.6 ft- 6(3.33 ft) = 184.6ft
2
> Length Wall Grid Line C = 21.3 ft
Therefore, need to add an additional 20 ft. to the existing 21.3 ft. on Grid Line C.

Code Commentary Section 5.3 recommends a minimum shear wall length equal
to the story height = 16 ft.

For the TMS Shopping Center to comply with Empirical Design, an additional
shear wall length of approximately 20 ft must be added on Grid Line C. Refer to
the figure on last page o f this example problem showing the revised TMS
Shopping Center masonry wall layout.

. Minimum Cumulative Length = 0.4 x long dimension

ICodeSection minimum length = 204.7 f t x 0.4 = 81.9 ft
5.3.1.2 ] actual length (deducting openings) = North + South walls

l = 204.7 ft - 6 x 3.33 ft + 21.33 ft + 20 ft = 226 ft > 81.9 ft

C. Compressive Stress
1. Wall Grid Line A
axial compressive stress,
i CodeSection P
5.4.2 ] f, = < F , = 70 psi See Code Table 5.4.2
Ag
Compute compressive stress at base o f wall for roof live + dead loads + wall
weight (consider a 1 ft. width o f the wall). Assume wall weight = 55.5 psf.

fo = [(30 p s f + 15 psf) 1 f t x 40 ft x 0.5]+ (19 f t x 55.5 p s f x 1 ft)

12 in.x 11.63 in.
=13.6 psi < 70psi .'.OK

. Wall Grid Line C

Overhang on wall = 253 plf

f a = 1,900 p l f + 253 p l f
12 i n . / f t x 11.63 in.
2,153 p l f
- 15.4 psi < 70 psi " OK
12 in .fit x 11.63 in.

17- 37
 Chapter 17

D. Lateral Support: Grid Lines A & C

(a) 16 ft tall; assume lateral brace at roof with roof diaphragm

CodeSection h' 16ft x l 2 i n . / f t

5.5.1 =16<18 " OK
t 12in.
Use 12 in. hollow CMU

Co) 2 ft parapet cantilever - Assume 8 in. units

I Code Section h' 2ft x l 2 i n . / f t

5.6.5 --= =3 =3 .'.OK
t 8in.

Use 8 in. hollow CMU

e DESIGN OF NONLOADBEARING WALLS, GRID LINES 1, 2, & 3

Code Section A. Minimum Shear Wall Thickness: 8 in.
5.3.1.1 I B. Minimum Shear Wall Length:
Shear walls are required on Grid Lines 1, 2, & 3 to resist wind in the north or south
direction.
I Code Section 1. m i n i m u m length = shear wall spacing
5.3.1.3 ratio
101.33 ft
min.l = - 50.7 ff for e a c h wall
2
Grid Line 1 Wall length = 82 ft > 50.7 ft
Grid Line 2 Wall length = 82 ft > 50.7 ft
Grid Line 3 Wall Length = 82 ft - 10 ft - 3.33 ft
= 68.7 ft > 50.7 ft .'. OK
2. Minimum cumulative length = 0.4 x long dimension
Minimum length = 204.7 ft x 0.4 = 81.9 ft
Actual length = Grid Lines 1 + 2 + 3
I Code Section Actual length = 82 f t - 3 . 3 3 f-t- 10 f t + 82 f-t+ 82 ft
5.3.1.2 = 2 3 2 . 7 f t > 81.9ft .'. OK

C. Compressive Stress
1. Wall Grid Lines 1 & 3
Try 12 in. hollow CMU to match thickness o f intersecting wall and to satisfy
Code Table 5.4.2.

fo = 18ft x 5 5 . 5 p s f x 1ft=7.16psi < 70psi

12in. × 11.63in.

. Wall Grid Line 2

Try 8 in. hollow CMU (minimum wall thickness for a shear wall)

18 ft x 40 p s f xl ft.=7.87
L =
p s i < 70 psi
12 in:~7.63 in.

17- 38
Example TMS-9

D. Lateral Support
1. Grid Line 1 & 3, exterior nonloadbeadng
(a) 16 ft tall, assume lateral brace at roof with roof diaphragm
ICodeSection h' 16 ft x 1 2 i n . / f t
5.5.1 --- =16<18 .'.OK
t 12 in.
Use 12 in. hollow CMU
(b) 2 ft parapet cantilever
Code h' 2 ft x 1 2 i n . / f t
Section5.6.5 --- -3=3 .'.OK
t 8 in.
Use 8 in. hollow CMU
2. Grid Line 2, interior nonloadbearing wall
I Code Section h' 16 it x 1 2 i n . / f t
5.5.1 - -24<36 .'.OK
t 8 in.
Use 8 in. hollow CMU

. PILASTER DESIGN
At B-l, C-l, C-1.4, C-2, C-3
Pilasters are not specifically described in Code Chapter 5, Empirical Design. Suggested
configurations are noted below. Design calculations should be conducted according to Code
Chapter 2.

Ao Pilaster at B-1
Control
Jo

umn
dlar

G_Beam

B. Pilaster C-1, C-1.4, C-3

17- 39
 Chapter 17

Shopping Center Design Summary_

Use single wythe 12 in. hollow concrete masonry units, ASTM C 90, unit strength = 2,000 psi
with ASTM C 270 Type N mortar. For the parapet use 8 in. hollow CMUs. For pilasters add 12
in. x 16 in. hollow concrete masonry units; all other specifications remain the same. Many other
design details are required for a successful project as well as to satisfy the Empirical Design
requirements in Code Chapter 5. The roof structure must be properly fastened to the top of the
walls to provide lateral bracing and to transfer diaphragm shear loads to the lateral load resisting
shear walls as given in Code Section 5.8.3.

(
102'-4" / =.[., 102'-4"

'12"
u

•12
41'-0"
For PilasterDesign
See MDG Section 11.2

41'-0"

---q "3 El--

TMS Shopping Center Masonry Wall Layout

17- 40
Example TMS-10 - - Design o f Exterior Reinforced C M U N o n l o a d b e a r i n g W a l l for Out-of-Plane
Flexure a n d Shear

Design the East Wall on Grid Line 3 for out-of-plane flexure and shear. Use Wall Construction
Option B (reinforced hollow concrete masonry).

Materials Loading
Wind 20 psf
Unit Compressive Strength 2000 psi (net area)
Neglect Self- Weight
f'm 1,500 psi
Em 1.35x 106 psi
Mortar Type N (PC-L)
n 21.5
Reinforcement Grade 60 (E, = 29 x 106 psi)

Calculations a n d Discussion
FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Geometry
Roof - - Part 2 - - Part 1

- 6'-0" 10'

IiI= ~
Design For These
Wall Elements

Assume the wall is pin supported at the top of the foundation wall and at the joist bearing
elevation (16 ft- 0 in.).

Wall Element Part 1

Calculate Wall Reactions at Roof and Foundation

( 20 psf x) (182 ft)2
RR
R rt = - 203 plf
16ft
20 Psf
,

R F=20psfx 16ft 2 :-157plf

T,,F. =0 RF
20 psfx 18 ft=203 plf+ 157 plf • OK

17- 41
 Chapter 17

- - ~ Roof
203 plf 40 plf , 163 plf
570 kip-ft @ head ~ 40 ft-lb/ft

18'-0"
-,Y--I

16,-o"
L
20 psf
620 ft-lb/ft
/I =
7.9'

157 plf 157 plf ~__J

Forces Shear Moment

1 5 7 p lf
Calculate M a x i m u m M o m e n t x - - - - 7.9 ft
20 p s f
7.9 ft 620 ft- lb
M=157plfx---
2 ft
Note: From earlier calculations, wind governs the design instead of seismic.

Estimate R e i n f o r c e m e n t
Try 6 in. CMU, assume steel at mid-depth

5.63 in.
d = - - - 2.8 in.
2
M
As-
Fsjd

Assumej = 0.9 for initial estimate.

[
C~e~c~o~
2.1.1.1.3and
2.3.2.1
Use the 1/3 stress allowable increase for wind load

620 ft- lb x 12 i n . / f t
Asreqd - - 24,000 psi x 1.33 x 0.9 x 2.8 in. = 0.093 in.2/ft

Try #4 @ 24 in. o.c. (A~prov~ded = 0.20 X 124

2 = 0.10 in.2/ft.)

Code Section C h e c k Effective Width

2.3.3.3.1
The width of the compression area that is used in the stress calculations is the smallest of
the following:
(a) Bar spacing = 24 in. (controls)
(b) 6t = 6 (6) = 36 in.
(c) 72 in.

17 - 42
Example TMS-IO

Check Stresses
Design moment = 620 ft-lb/ft
As 0.10in. 2
P= = 0.003
bd 12 in. x 2.8 in.
n 9=0.0639 k 2+2pnk-2pn =0

k = 0.299, j = 0.90 (versus 0.9 assumed)

k d = 0.299(2.8) = 0.84 < 1 in. face shell

Allowable tension flexural stress limit on moment

M t = A s jdFs
1.33
M t = (0.10 in.Z) x 0.900 x 2.8 in. x 24,000 psi x
12in./ft
M t = 672ft- lb/ft > 6 2 0 f t - lb/ft " OK

Allowable compression flexural stress limit on moment

bd 2
M,,, = k jF b
2
F b = (1 / 3 ) f " x 1.33 = (1 / 3 X1,500 psi)1.33 = 665 psi
Code Section
2.3.3.2.2 12 in. x (2.8 in.)2 665 psi
M m= x 0.299 x 0.900 x
2 12 i n . / f t
M,, = 701 ft- lb/ft > 620 ft- lb/ft .'. O K

Use #4 reinforcing bars @ 24 in. o.c. with the reinforced cells grouted for Wall Element
Part 1 as shown below.

#4 #4

I 12 24"

Wall Element Part 2 (next to opening)

Calculate Bending Moment ~
Assume door wind load is transferred to door head as a concentrated reaction.

~R
Door
R = (10 f l x 10 f l x 20 psf) = 500 lb at each reaction location
R
4
10'

17 - 4 3
 Chapter 17

Reactions at roof and foundation due to door load reactions (500 lb)
/

RR = (500 lb x 10 ft) = 313 Ib

16ft
RR--~~
RF = (500 lb x 6 ft) + 500 = 687 lb • OK
16ft ~ I 6'
Total = 1000 lb 500 Ib

10'
500 Ib

Calculate Maximum Moment

By inspection, the maximum moment is located at the concentrated load location (at door
head) due to door reaction.

M = 187 lb x 10 ft = 1,870 ff-lb

Assume wall area above door opening spans horizontally to jamb masonry strip.

w = (10 f t x 20 psf) = 100 p l f

2

Reactions due to loading from wall area above door opening

(100 p l f x 8 ft x 14 ft)
RR = 16 l°t
= 700 lb
RR---~
ii 6'

R F = 100 p l f = 100 lb
16ft
Total = 800 Ib .'.OK --10' = Door
RF---~- ~ .... Height

Moment at head location due to masonry loading

above lintel

M = 100 lb x 10 ff = 1,000 ff-lb

Moment at head location due to uniform wind load on Wall Element Part 2
(10 ft) ~
M = 157 p l f x 10 fl - 20 p s f x = 570 ft- lb/ft
2

17-44
Example TMS-IO

Assuming a 2 ft - 8 in. effective strip (size o f strip on opposite jamb), the maximum moment is

M = 570 ft- lb/ft x 2.67 ft + 1,000 ft- lb + 1,870 ft- lb

M = 4,390 ft- lb

Estimate Reinforcement
Try 6 in. CMU to match Wall Element Part 1
5.63 in.
d - - - - 2.8 in.
2
M
AS -- - -
Fsjd

(Assumej = 0.9 for estimate)

As = 4,390 ft- Ib x 12 in./ft = 0.65 in. 2

24,000 psi x 1.33 x 0.9 x 2.8 in.

Try two #6 bars, As = 0.88 in. 2

#4 Reinforcing bar
Determined in Wall Element
Part 1 Design o f this example
#6 #6

j" I- 8"-1- 1'-8" ~ 12" 24"

2'-8"
E f f e c t i v e W i d t h O f A s s u m e d Strip
( S a m e A s Isolated Pier)
Check Effective Widthof Compression Area
Check that the effective width o f the compression area each side o f the bar does not
exceed the least of:
CodeSection (a) 1/2 center-to-center bar spacing each side of bar = 4 in.
2.3.3.3.1 I
(b) 3 6 in. each side Of bar ~:
(c) 3t each side of bar
3 x 6 = 18in.
.'. Width = 4 in. + 8 in. + 10 in. = 1 ft - 10 in. < 2 ft - 8 in. assumed in design

17 - 4~,
 Chapter 17

Moving the #6 bar to the next cell, as shown below, satisfies width assumed in design.

Width = 4 in. + 1 ft-4 in. + 1 ft-0 in. = 2 ff - 8 in. = 2 ff - 8 in. Assumed width

#4 @ 24': O.C.
Determined in Wall Element Design
Part 1 o f this example problem

#6 #6

4" '-4" 1 '-0" 1 '-0" 24"

Check Stress
Design Moment = 4,390 ft-lb

(21.48)0.88 in .2
np= -0.211
32 in. x 2.8 in.
no = 0.158 k = 0.472 j = 0.843
k d = 0.472 (2.81) = 1.33 in. > 1 in. face shell thickness

Since kd > 1 in., it is conservative to assume kd = 1 in. if masonry stresses govern

design. If steel stresses govern design, the assumptions slightly overestimate steel
moments.
• k= 1/2.8=0.36 j = 0.88
Using these values:

M t = A s ]dF~

1.33
M t = 0.88 in .2 X 0.88 X 2.8 in. x 24,000 psi x
12 i n . / f t
M t = 5,770 ft- lb > 4,390 ft- lb .'. O K
bd 2
M m - kjF b -
2

32 in. x (2.8 in.)2 1,500 psi 1.33

m m = X 0.36 x 0.88 x x
2 3 12in./ft
M m = 2,220 ft- lb < 4,390 ft- lb " N.G.

17 - 46
Example TMS-IO

Options
1. Increase wall thickness to 8 in. CMU
2. Add pilaster
3. Increase masonry strength
4. Add more steel.

As an illustration o f Option 4, adding more steel will be investigated:

Try four #6 bars as shown below; A, = 4 (0.44) = 1.76 in. 2

Wall used in Part 1 Design

#4 @ 24" O.C.
#6 #6 #6

1 '-0"

2'-8"
Effective Width Of Assumed Strip (Same As Isolated Pier)
(21.48)1.76 in .2
np= - 0.422
32 in. x 2.8 in.

k = 0.589 j = 0.804 kd = 1.65 (OK since section grouted)

1.33
M t = 1.76 in.Z x 0.804 x 2.8 in. x 24,000 psi x
12 in .fit
M , = 10,565 ft- lb .'. O K

Mm = 32 in. x (2.8 in.) 2 x 0.589 x 0.804 x 1,500 psi x 1.33

2 3 12 i n . / f t
Mm = 3,300 ft- lb <4,390 ft - ib • N.G.

Note that from the Mm equation, it is necessary to increase the kj product to raise the Mmto 4,390
if-lb.

Solving gives:

4,390(2)(12)(3)
kj > = 0.63
32(2.81) 2 (500)(4)

Sincej = 1 ---k k must exceed 0.9. This requires a lot of steel.

3'

17 - 4 7
 Chapter 17

k 2 +2pnk-2pn =0
(0.9) 2 + 2 p n ( 0 . 9 ) - 2 p n = 0
p n > 4.05
p =0.1885
As,eq a = 0.1885 (32)(2.81) = 16.95 in. 2

Clearly this is n o t a practical solution.

Consider reducing the steel requirements by increasing the masonry strength. Assume f " =
2,500 psi rather than 1500 psi.

As 1.24
T r y A s = 4 - # 5 bars; p = - 0.0138
bd (32)(2.8)

I Code Section E m = 900x2500 = 2.5x106 psi

1.8.2.2.1
n=12.9

np=0.178 k=0.445 j=0.852

M t = As j d F s
1.33
M t = 1.24 in.2 x 0.852 x 2.8 in. x 24,000 psi x
12in./ft
M t = 7,886 ft- lb > 4,390 ft- lb .'. O K
bd 2
M,, = ~kjF b
2

32 in. x (2.8 i n . ) 2 x 0.445 x 0.852 x 2,500 psi x 1.33

M m=
2 3 12in./ft
M m = 4,402 ft- lb > 4,390 ft- lb .'. O K

Consequently, the successful design has resulted from the following:

f " = 2,500 psi j = 0.9
E,, = 2.25 x 106 psi d = 2 . 8 in.
n = 12.9 b=32in.
Grout Properties Grade 60 steel
f~ = 4,500 psi Wind = 20 psf
Eg = 2.25 × 10 6 psi

n = 12.9

17 - 48
Example T M S - I O

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Now that the wall segments have been designed for flexure, shear needs to be considered.

Shear and Moment Diagrams

Part I & Part 2 Part 2

f --~

Wind on Wall Wind on Door Wind on Wall

(Width = 2.67') above Door Lintel

S ~K Y
e~ t-i

o3

Q
/ )/
,
,
/
---
o
o
LO
mm p
CO

-~
Q.
b..
\ o
,
!o0
.o
co
co

Forces Moment Shear Forces Moment

Shear Forces Moment Shear

Wall Element Part 2 will be examined for shear first. The width of 2.67 ft is fully grouted.

Maximum shear from above diagrams occurs just below the roof support reaction
V = (163 plf)(2.67 ft) + (312 Ib) + (500 lb) = 1,250 lb

According to Code Section 2.3.5.5, the shear at d/2 from face of support could be used provided
support reaction is in compression; however, the amount of change is small and therefore
neglected.

The shear stress is found from Code Eq. (2-19):

Code Section V
2.3.5.2.1
f~ bd

17 - 4 9
 Chapter 17

From the flexural design portion of this problem, we know that b = 32 in. and d = 3.81 in.,
therefore
1,250 lb
fv = = 13.9 psi
(32 in.)(2.8 in.)

The allowable shear, F~, is:

Code Section
2.3.5.2.2
1.33xf-f~ <-l.33(50psi)
1.33~,500 = 66.5 psi < 1.33(50.0 psi) = 66.5 psi

For this problem 13.9 psi < 66.5 psi, thus shear is okay and no special shear reinforcing is needed.
Typically out-of-plane shear for walls is small enough that no shear reinforcing is required. Since
the actual shear stress is significantly less than the Code-allowable shear stress for Wall Element
Part 2 (the critical element), Wall Element Part 1 need not be checked. Even though this wall
segment is grouted at 24 in. on center the shear to be carried is only 326 lb.

A sliding shear failure at the base of the wall may occur if there is insufficient bond between the
floor slab and the wall. See MDG Chapter 14 for connections of walls to foundations design.

17 - 5 0
Example TMS-11 m Design of Reinforced Loadbearing Wall
For the North Wall on Grid Line A o f the TMS Shopping Center determine the size o f wall needed
for Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced Concrete Masonry).

Unit Compressive Strength = 2, 000 psi

f " = 1,500 psi
Type N PC-L Mortar
Grade 60 Reinforcing Steel.

! I
~

-
4 u - -

I / / / /
I// / / / /

k.
I- t

t 1. 4.
e =-----ln.---m.
2 2 3

Calculations and Discussion

CodeSection [ Fb = 1 / 3 f " = 500 psi for axial plus bending

2.3.3.2.2
Fs = 24,000 psi
CodeSection I
2.3.2.1 Em= 900 (1500) = 1.35 x 10 6 psi
CodeSection I
1.8.2.2.1
eo = ~-~(15) 305plf

40.5
PL = ~ ( 3 0 ) =610plf
2
Eccentricity o f dead and live load, eo = eL = t/2 - 1/2 i n . - 4 / 3 in.

W i n d l o a d = 20 psf, M ~ = w12 - 2 0 p s f ( 1 6 ft)2 x 1 2 in. = 7,680 i n . - lb at m i d h e i g h t

8 8 ft
Note: Parapet loading is neglected for simplicity. Moment of 7,680 in.-lb is slightly conservative.
For purposes o f analysis, the base o f the wall is considered pinned.
Try an 8 in. wall, solidly grouted

t = 7-5/8 in., wall weight = 78 psf

7.63. 1. 4.
eD = e L = ~ in. - -- in. - -- in. = 1.98 in.
2 2 3

17- 51
 Chapter 17

Wall weight = 156 plf(at joist beating), 1,404 plf(at base), and 780 plf(at midheight).

Code Section Loading Combinations D + L, D + L + W, D + W

2.1.1.1
D +L P = 305 plf+ 610 plf+ 156 plf= 1,071 plf at joist bearing
M = (305 + 610) 1.98 = 1,810 in.-lb/ft at joist bearing plate

The eccentricity of D + L including wall weight is maximum at the joist bearing

elevation:
1,810 in. - lb/it
emax = = 1.69 in.
1,071 plf
D+L+ W P = 1,695 plf@ 8 ft above base
The maximum moment at midheight results from eccentricity ofD + L plus wind load,
Pe wl 2
AI = + ~
2 8
M = 1,810 in.- lb
+ 7,680 in. - lb = 8,590 in. - lb/ft
2
8,590 Pe
- - -
e mia~eight -- 1,695
5 . 0 7 i n .

W/2
Using the interaction diagram (MDG Fig. 12.2-11):

D+L
_ 1,071plf = 0.0234 ]
F b bt 500 psi (12 in.)(7.63 in.)
=0
Pe 1,810in.- lb nPt
F b bt 2 = 500 psi (12 in.)(7.63 in.)2 = 0.0052

P 1,695 plf ]
F bb---~- 4/3 x 500 psi (12 in.)(7.63 in.) = 0.028
D+L+W =0
Pe = 8,590in.- lb J npt
Fbbt 2 4/3 x 500 psi (12 in.)(7.63 in.) 2 = 0.0185
k=0.15
Es 29x106 psi
n=--= =21.5
Em 1.35x10 6 psi
kb = Fbz, = 500 psi
=0.309>0.15
24,000 psi
Fb+'s 500 p s i +
n 21.5

17 - 52
Example TMS-11

Therefore, MDG Fig. 12.2-11 is not applicable (i.e., compressive allowable stress is not the
controlling factor) since k < kb. Use MDG Fig. 12.2-12 (steel controls), with the same ordinate
and abscissa and read for D + L + W combination:
T " I

P, ~ = 0 . 0 1 2 , k = 0 . 1 6 < k b " OK to use Fig l2.2 -12

D+W P = 305 + 780 = 1,085 p l f @ 8 ft above base

M = (305 plf)(1.98 in.) F 7,680 in. - lb/ft = 7,980 in. - lb/fi

2

M 7,980 i n . - lb/ft
e= - - 7.4 in.
P 1,085 plf

P 1,085 p l f
=0.018
Fbbt 1.33 (500 psi)(12 in.)(7.63 in.)

Pe = 0 . 0 1 8 0 ( 7 . 4 0 ) = 0.0175
F~-b-)2 \7.63)

From MDG Fig. 12.2-11, not = 0.0024, k = 0.13 < kb therefore, compression does not control and
MDG Fig. 12.2-12 must be used. For the D + Wordinates above MDG Fig. 12.2-12 gives:

F,
p, = 0.02

Ast =Pt bt = pt ( F- ~s ' l'~- Fb

- ~ b t = (0.02)(- 5 0 0 p s i .](12in.)(7.63 in.) = 0.038 in.2/ft
t, b ) t, s ~.24,000 p s i )

Spacing of various bar sizes

12in./ft
S req. = x bar area
0.038 in.2/ff

Bar Size Area 8reqd

#3 0.11 in.2 35 in. use #3 @ 32 in.

#4 0.20 63
#5 0.31 98

Code Section The effective compression width per bar shall not exceed:
2.3.3.3.1
(a) center-to-center bar spacing = 32 in. ~ controls
(b) six times wall thickness = 48 in.
(c) 72 in.

17 - 5 3
 Chapter 17

The average axial compressive force cannot exceed Code Eq. (2-17) or (2-18) depending upon h/r.

Code h = 16 x 12 = 192 in.

Commentary
Section 2.2.3 r =~
t = 0.29t = 2.21 in.

h/r = 192/2.21 = 86.9 < 99 .'. Code Eq. (2-17) controls.

But, since the longitudinal steel is not tied, Fs = 0 in Code Eq. (2-17), and

Pa = 0 . 2 5 f ' A ~
I1 - (~ h )2] =0.25(12)(7.63)(1,500psi) [ _1 ( "~14()x~-.~in.J
192 in. ~21j

-- 21,100 plf

Max applied force is 305 + 610 + 1,404 = 2,319 plf .'. OK

Use 8 in. concrete masonry wall with #3 vertical bars spaced at 32 in. on center, fully grouted with
f " = 1,500 psi, Type N mortar, andfg = 2,700 psi.

17 - 54
Example TMS-12 -- Pier Design

Based on the results of Example TMS-IO, Wall

Element Part 2, the wall area adjacent to the large Roof - - Pier E l e m e n t 1
door is inadequate without increasing the wall
thickness or changing the material properties of the
masonry. The loadings are further complicated for
the pier between the doors. Design this pier.

2;8:
Calculations and Discussion

Assume the lintels bear 4 in. into the pier. The net effective width of the pier is 2 ft - 8 in. To
avoid designing this section o f wall as a column, the wall thickness is limited by 3t = w or t =
10 in. (maximum). If the wall thickness is greater than 10 in., the column criteria for ties and
vertical reinforcement is required. This is difficult to achieve in a single-wythe thickness o f
masonry.

To maintain a 6 in. CMU wall, add a pilaster to support each side o f the overhead door.

Loadings
Example TMS-8 produces the loadings for Pier #1 in the east wall. These are:

,890 Ib (roof girder)

ZP = 13,610 lb + self weight o f the pier

Mw @ 1/2 height of pier = (0.187)(16)2/8

= 6.0 R-kips
5,720 Ib (wail load)
above adjacent opening
187 plf
(wind)

ZP

17 - 55
 Chapter 17

Try a solid pilaster (b x t): use 8 in. CMU, -=----- b - - - - - -

f " = 1,500 psi, Type N PC-L mortar, and grout
w i t h f g = 3,600 psi.

I
To support M~ only, using unreinforced masonry,

12Mxl000
= 933 in. 3
Sreqd = 1.33 Fbt

where Fbt= 58 psi for Type N mortar.

Trial: b = 16 in., t --- 16 in. =:> S = 683 in. 3

b = 16 in., t = 24 in. ~ S = 1,536 in. 3 OK

A d d axial load and calculate eccentricity:

16" y

S Is

bearing of girder
24"
Ignore for
convenience
of computation

4 Is

32" at bearing
of girder
Eccentricity Distribution

Eccentricity o f r o o f load = (24 in./2) - 8 in. = 4 in

Then, assuming zero eccentricity at the base: 2"

at top of
overhead door

M,oo/= Proo/e= 7,890 lb ~ = 1,315 ft - lb = 1.3 ft - kips

Eccentricity o f wall load = 24 in./2 - 3 in. = 9 in.

Mwatl = 5,720 lb x (9 in./12 in.fit) = 4.3 ft-kips

assumes zero
ece~n~ci~ at base

Eccentricity Distribution
17 - 5 6
ExampleTMS-12

Load Condition 1: Maximum P and M

Total M = M~i,a- M~oof+ M~H = 6.0 - 1.3 + 4.3 = 9.0 ft-kips

Total P = P~ooy+ P,~tt + self weight (at point of maximum moment)

= 7.9 + 5.7 + 2.3 = 15.9 kips

24x16
where, s e l f w e i g h t - - - x8 f t x l l 0 p c f = 2.3 kips
144

For unreinforced pilasters, check the following three conditions:

CodeSection
2.2.3 f~ + fb < 1.0(1.33)
Fo Fb
I CodeSection
2.2.5 I £<Fv

CodeSection
2.2.3 I
4

Calculating these parameters @ point of maximum moment:

f , = --=P 15.9 kips = 41psi

A 24 i n . x l 6 i n .
1 2 M _ 12(9.0 ft- kips) = 70 psi
fb= S 1536in. 3

F~ h 16xl 2 ~
= 6.92 in.

h
- = 27.7
r

F~ -- 1/4.E,
F~ = y 3 f " = 500 psi

.fa ~ f b = 0.11+ 0.14 = 0.25 < 1 . 3 3 "OK

Fo Fb

f=fi-f~=57-41=16psi < 58 x 1 . 3 3 = 77 psi " OK

17 - 57
 C h a p t e r 17

p_<¼e,
2 3
Pe =~r E m l C l _ 0 . 5 7 7 e ~
h~ \ r)

= n'2 (1"35 x 106)(18'432) [ (~n)] 3

(192)2 1 - 0.577 6 .

= 1,972 kips

P e = 493 kips > 15.9 kips " OK

4

Load Condition 2: Minimum P and M

Assuming an uplifting wind on the roof, dead load ~ 0 and self weight (as previously
calculated) of 2.3 kips:

P = P~ooy+ P ~ , + 2.3 = 0 + 5.7 + 2.3 = 8.0 kips

M = Mwind+ M, ooy+ M~t = 6.0 + 0 + 4.3 = 10.3 ft-kips

Check:
10.3x12 8.0
f, - - - = 81 - 21 = 60 psi < 77 psi OK
1536 24x16
and
Code Section
2.2.5

fv = 3/~2× V///A = 3//22x l'5 kip/~ll 6 x 24 = 5.9 psi < Fv = 58 psi

Therefore, use 16 in. by 24 in. deep unreinforced pilaster.

17 - 58
Example TMS-13 - - Distribution of Horizontal Load Within Reinforced Perforated Shear
Walls
Determine the hor&ontal load distribution to the piers in a reinforced perforated shear wall.

The wall section under consideration is located on Grid Line 3, between Grid Lines A and C.
This 8 in. reinforced, partially grouted, concrete block wall has two door openings separated by a
2 f l - 8 in. pier o f masonry. The figure below shows the configuration o f this wall and its
openings.

@
82'

11,600 Ib
- (wind)

18'
7, i... ~ lo,
1

30' -/ 10' 36'

3'-4 ~-- 2 ' - 8 "

Calculations and Discussion

Using Method I described in MDG Section 9.2.2, the lateral load applied to the top of this wall
can be distributed to each wall section.

Since the loads in this example are relatively small, it is appropriate to use a linear elastic,
untracked section analysis for the distribution of the horizontal shear loads. With higher load
levels or smaller wall piers, a cracked analysis may be more appropriate. Furthermore, the section
analyzed is assumed to be reinforced and has no movement joints within the wall. If movement
joints are present, they will separate the wall into isolated piers and must be accounted for in the
analysis. See MDG Example TMS-6.

As shown in MDG Example TMS-2, the largest shear load applied near the top of the wall on
Grid Line 3 is produced by the wind loading and has a value of 11,600 lb.

The following calculations on horizontal load distribution of above wall are illustrated graphically
on next page. It is assumed that only the stiffness of the wall below the diaphragm will be
effective in resisting the lateral loads. The total cantilever deflection of the wall can be calculated
at the 16 ft elevation using MDG Eq. 9.2-3.

,3 U.)'1
L k l. J

17 - 59
 Chapter 17

Since all walls have equal thickness and only relative stiffness is required, assume

P__~__t- 1 i n "
Emt 10
The relative cantilever deflection of a solid 16 ft x 82 ft shear wall would be

A,6xs2 = liv in. [ 4 (l 182

6 ft
ftJ
k f +. 3¢\ 816
- - ~ft~
J = 0.062 in.

This produces a relative stiffness, k16×8 2 - 1 - 16.3 in.-1 = solid wall stiffness
0.062 in.

The largest opening in the wall is the 10 ft by 10 doorway. Thus, the relative cantilever deflection
of a 10 ft by 82 ft opening strip, z~ o, is

1 I4¢10ft~3 3¢10ft~l
Ac° = b in. + = 0.037 in.
10 t.8--2-ff) t,,8--2-ff)
There are two sections of wall within the opening strip, a 10 ft x 36 ft section to the right of the
door opening, pier 3, and a 10 ftx 36 ft section to the left of the 10 ft by 10 ft opening. The left
section has a 3.33 ft x 7.0 ft opening and contains piers 1 and 2. For either 10 x 36 section, the
fixed pier deflection from MDG Eq. 9.2-4 is

AF Pl
Emt
Elh/3-- +3--
lw lw

[¢1o7
AF10×36= ~10 in. L36 ) + 3(lOft ~ 1=0.085 in.
t3-g-ffJ J
1 = 11.7 in. -1
k1°×36= 0.085 in.
Since there is a 3.33 ft by 7 ft opening in the left section, the composite stiffness of the two piers,
1 and 2, must be determined before the stiffness of this section can be calculated.

The fixed pier deflection of the 7 ftx 36 ff section, ignoring the opening, is

AF7×36___1
-- 10 .ln.[¢7ft~3+3(7ft~
~,3---if-if)
1
~,3 - - ~ ) = 0.059in

The fixed pier deflection of pier 1 is

- 1 in.[(7ftf+
Ayp,e,] 10 3-0--ffJ

17 - 60
Example TMS-13

therefore,

k pier 1 - - 14.0 i n . -1
0.071 in.

The fixed pier deflection of pier 2 is

= l__in[( 7ft f+3( 7ft ~]=2.60in.

AeP"r2 10 Lk.2.67ft) k.2.67ftJ
J
therefore,

kp,er: _ 1 - 0.385 in. -1

2.60 in.

Adding the stiffness of pier 1 and 2 results in a composite stiffness for this pier group of

14.03 in £1 + 0.385 in .-1 ____.14.4 in.-1

The deflection of this pier group is therefore,

1
A Fpierl+2 -- -- 0.069 in.
14.4 in. -1

The net deflection of the 10 x 36 section to the left of the 10 ft opening is

A l e f t section = Ac10×36- - AF7×36 + AFpier1+2

A~a soctio.= 0.085 i n . - 0 . 0 5 9 in. + 0.069 i n . = 0.095 in.

therefore

kleftsection -- - 1 0 . 5 i n . -1
0.095 in.

This left section stiffness, 10.5 in."1, is less than the solid right section stiffness, 11.7 in. "1, as
expected.

The composite stiffness of the two 10 x 36 wall sections is

kcomplOx36 = 10.5 in.-t + 11.7 in.-1 = 22.2 in.-I

therefore producing a relative deflection of

1
Ac°mPl°×36 22.2 in.-1 = 0.045 in.

The method discussed in MDG Section 9.2.2 defines the net stiffness of the perforated wall as the
reciprocal of the solid wall cantilever deflection, minus the cantilever

17 - 61
 Chapter 17

deflection of a solid wall with the same height as the largest opening, plus the fixed end deflection
of the piers in the opening strip. While this net wall stiffness will not be used for proportioning
the loads within the wall, it would be used to obtain the load on the top of the wall if the building
had a rigid diaphragm.

To illustrate how this quantity would be determined, the required calculations are shown below.

Anet perforated16×82 = l~ c -- A co q- AcomplO×36

Anetperforated16x82 = 0.062 in. - 0.037 in. + 0.045 in. = 0.070 in.

therefore
in.-~
knetperf°rated16×82_ 1
0.070 in.
- 14.4

This stiffness compares well to the solid wall stiffness of 16.3 ill. "1

The loads are proportioned to each wall section by the ratio of their relative stiffness to the total
stiffness of the section. Using MDG Eq. 9.2-1, the load carried by the left section is

ki
v,o soo,io° = V,o,o, × k,o,a,

Vie, Sooao"= 11,600 lb x ( 10.5 in. -1,/ = 5,480 lb

\ 22.2 in.-I )

Similarly, the load carried by the right section is

Vp,,r 3 =
(11.7
n.-1)
11,600 lb × ~,2 7 5 ~n Y = 6,110 lb

The load in the left section is distributed to piers 1 and 2 in proportion to their relative stiffnesses
to the total stiffness of the section. Therefore, the shear force applied to the top of pier 1 is

~.14.4 in.-' )

and the shear applied to the top of pier 2 is

Vpi,r2=5,4901bx~, 1-~.4i-~._~ =1501b

Check 6,110 lb + 5,340 lb + 150 lb = 11,600 lb .'. OK

17 - 62
Example TMS-13

It should be noted that pier 2 resists very little of the lateral load and could have been neglected in
the analysis with very little effect, while greatly simplifyingthe analysis.

Using shear stiffness only (proportional to plan length) reasonable shear values result from little
effort:

36 ft )=
Vp~,3 = l l , 6 0 0 1 b x 36+-Z.)--+ 30) 6,0801b

Vpie, 2 = 11,600 lb x ( 2.7 ft "]

36 +'-~.~+ 30J = 460 lb

Vp~e,1 = 11,600 lbx ( 36 +30ft

2.7 + 3 0./=5,0601 b

The pier shears for the larger piers (1 and 3) are within 5% of each other using both methods. The
shear on pier 2 is over 200% different depending on the method used. This difference is
explained by the fact that for tall/shallow piers flexural deformations are significant and much
larger than shear deformations. Readers are cautioned about using plan length to distribute shears
to piers where flexural deformations are significant.
A reasonable distribution of the 11,600 lb shear load can be obtained by assuming all piers act as
fixed-fixed sections over the tallest opening height. This would result in:
kF-FpierI, 10X30= 9.64 in.-1
kF-Fpier2,10X2.67= 0.157 in. -1
kF-Fpier3,10X36= 11.7 in. -1

VPier]= 11'600 lb x ( '9.64 +9"64

in10.157+ 1 1 . 7 / = 5'3601b

VPier2= 11'600 lb × l 0"157 inl "71 85 lb

9.64 + 0.157 + 11..

Vpier3=ll'6OOlbx( 9.64+0.157+11.711"7
inl )=6,3131b

This approach gives a much closer agreement to Method I, is relatively simple to use, and will
account for situations where flexural deformations are significant.

Further discussion and examples of shear wall load distribution are included in MDG Section
13.2.

17 - 63
 C h a p t e r 17

Example TMS -14 m Reinforced Shear Wall Design for In-Plane Flexure and Shear
Design the shear wall on Grid Line C for Seismic Performance Category A. Use Wall
Construction A or B as required

8 in. Hollow CMU- 2, 000 psi Type N Mortar

f ~ = 1,500 psi Grade 60 Steel

Calculations and Discussion

Flexural Design Considerations
From MDG Example TMS-2, the seismic analysis gives Vc= 32,850 lb at roof diaphragm location
for the unreinforced option and V~ = 11,850 lb for the reinforced option.

Check Wall Construction Option A - Unreinforced Concrete Block.

The moment at the wall base is Vc h' =32,850 (16) = 525,600 lb-ft for the unreinforced wall and
11,850(16) = 189,600 lb-ft for the reinforced wall. From MDG Section 17.1.2, the joist reactions
on the wall are 2,000 lb dead load and 3,830 lb live load, except for the joist next to Grid 2 where
half these values apply.

The left beam reaction (look from the outside) is 4,690 lb dead load and 8,980 lb live load. The
right beam reaction is 4,260 lb dead load and 8,150 lb live load. Using the self weight of the wall
at 46.3 psf and uniformly distributing the loads (by inspection a reasonable assumption) the dead
load is:
DL = 4,690 Ib + 3 x 2,000 lb + 1,000 lb + 4,260 lb + 46.3 psf x 16 ft x 21.3 ft
DL = 31,7 kips

And the live load is:

LL = 8,890 lb + 3 x 3,830 lb + 1,915 lb + 8,150 lb
LL = 30.5 kips

The wall will be investigated for the following ASCE 7-93 load cases:
Casel. 0.9D+I.0E
Case 2. 1.2 D + 1.0 E + 0.5 L + 0.2 S

The computed stresses are calculated using the following equation:

f = -___P_P+ Mc
A 1
For Load Case 1
P = 0.9 x 31.7 kips = 28.5 kips
M = 525.6 kip-ft

For Load Case 2

P = 1.2 x 31.7 kips+0.5 x 30.5 kips = 53.3 kips
M = 525.6 kip-ft

17 - 64
Example TMS-14

The net bedded area and moment of inertia are:

Net bedded area = (2 x 1.25 in.X21.3 ft)(12 in.fit) = 640 i n )

Moment of Inertia = bd3 = 2.5 in.(256 in.)' _ 3,500,000 in.4

12 12

28,500 lb 525,600 ft-lb(12 in./ft)( 2 5 6 i n ' 1

f- 2+
640 in. 3,500,000 in .4
f = - 44.5 psi + 230.7 psi
f t = + 186.2 psi fc = - 275.2 psi

+186.2 psi

Stress Distribution -275.2 psi

No tension for in-plane loading is allowed by the Code for unreinforced shear walls. Thus, this
wall must be reinforced.

Wall Construction Option B - - Reinforced Concrete Masonry

Using the pseudo strength method in Code Section 2.1.1.2, the allowable stresses are multiplied
by 2.5 and ~bto obtain strength levels for design.

Note: For the purpose of this example, the remainder of the building is assumed unreinforced
with Rw = 1.25
Code Section
2.3.3.2.2,
2.I.1.2.3.2 and
2.1.1.2.3.3

F s = 24,000 x 1.33 x 2.5 × 0.80 = 63,840 psi

7.625"L~As ~ ~
1.25"

l w= 21.3' = 256" -=
Wall Cross Section
P

i~ d= 248' ~!
I kd =I

~r fob

Stress Distnbution
17 - 65
 Chapter 17

Assume steel is located in the last two cells of the wall on both ends. Consider only tension steel.
Apply iterative method given in MDG Section 12.2.2.2. Also assume that only the face shells of
the units are resisting compression stresses to allow for only partial grouting.

Load Case 1
M = 525.6 kip-ft A = (256 / 2) - 8 = 0.484
248
2
P = 28.5 kips - - - A = 0.186
3
d = 248 in. E = 1500 x 900 = 1.35 x 10 6 psi
n = 21.48
M M 2
= 0.89 >- - A thus Region 3 applies from
Pd Pd 3
MDG Chapter 12 (Table 12.2.1)

In R e g i o n 3

(MDG Eq. 12.2-15)

Assume a = 75 in.
1st Iteration
,. ('256in.
M , = 28.5 l¢lps~" 75 i n . l = 1,510.5 kip - in. = 125.87 kip - ft

AS-- M - M , ( 5 2 5 . 6 - 1 2 5 . 9 ) x 12 =0.434 in. z (MDG Eq. 12.2-16)

F s ( d - a) 6 3 . 8 4 ( 2 4 8 - 75)

x - (P+AsFs)n = (28.5+ 0 . 4 3 4 x 6 3 . 8 4 ) x 2 1 . 5 = 7.45in. (MDG Eq.12.2-17)

F~b 63.84 x 2.5

~/¢e + 2 ~ d - ¢ _ 4(7.45) 2 + 2× 7 . 4 5 × 2 4 8 - 7 . 4 5
a = = 17.93
3
2nd Iteration

M p = 28.5 kips I 2 5 2 6 - 1 7 . 9 3 1 / 1 2 = 261.4 kips - ft

A~ = ( 5 2 5 . 6 - 2 6 1 . 4 ) × 1 2 = 0.22in.2
63.84(248-17.93)
= (28.5 + 0 . 2 2 × 6 3 . 8 4 ) × 21.48 = 5.73
63.84 × 2.5

a = (~/(5.73) 2 + 2(5.73)(248) - 5 . 7 3 ) / 3 = 15.96 in.

17 - 66
Example TMS-14

3rd Iteration
Mp = 266.1 Check tension
As = 0 . 2 1 0 248
= 25.6 > 15.85
= 5.64
3[ 1+63"84/21"511.33
/
a = 15.85 Converges.'. O K
T e n s i o n controls .'. O K

Thus 0.204 in.2 of steel is required, so use (1) #4 bar changing d t o 252 in.

Recalculate results with As =0.201 in.2 ~ (1)#4 bar OK

Load Case 2
256
---4
M = 525.6 kip-ft A- 2 - 0.492
252
2
P = 53.3 kips -- - A = 0.175
3
d = 252 in. E = 1,800,000 psi

n=21.5
M M 2
- 0.469 > --- A T h u s R e g i o n 3 applies
Pd Pd 3

1st Iteration: Try_a = 15 in.

t'256in ]/
M =53.3kips~ ~ " 15in. 2=502kip-ft

(525.6 - 502)× 12
As = 6 3 . 8 4 0 ( 2 5 2 - 1 5 ) =0.0187 in. 2

= (53.3 + 0.0187 × 63.84)× 21.5

= 7.34 in.
63.84 x 2.5

~/(7.34) 2 + 2(7.34)(252) - 7.34

a = = 18.0 in.

2nd Iteration
M p = 488.7 kip- ft
A s = 0.030 in.5
= 7.43
a = 18.1 in. c o n v e r g e s .'. O K

17 - 6 7
 Chapter 17

Check tension :
d 252
= 26.0 > 18.1
311+63384/21.5 ]

Tension controls .'.OK

As = small amount required

It is standard design practice to place steel at the end of the walls. Use (2) #5 bars at each end of
the wall. Also since the wall is key to the stability of the entire structure for lateral loads, a good
design would be to grout it solid.

Shear Design Consideration

For the shear wall the bedded thickness is the face shell thickness = 2(1.25 in.) = 2.5 in.

Computing the actual shear stress:

£- V
bd
ICoaeeq. :2'i9) ]
32,850 lb
L- 2.5 in.x 252 in.
fv = 52.1 psi

Compare actual shear to Code-allowable shear, Code Section 2.3.5.2.2

M _ 525.6 ft- kips x 12 in./ft

=0.76 < 1.0
Vd 32.85 kips x 252 in.
M

I 2-21 I
Fv = 1 1 4 - (0.76)1 ~/1,500 psi x 4=613 psi

< [ 8 0 - 4 5 x 0.76]x 4 = 6 1 psi

Fv = 61 x 2.5 x 0.6 = 91.5 psi

F v > f~ .'. No shear reinforcement required

17 - 68
Example TMS-15 - - Glass Unit Masonry
The south wall in this example has a glass curtain-wall. At the entrance, glass unit masonry is
to be designed.

Glass Glass ~u~so~r~

gh~rLain~l Curta}nwall

Partial South Elevation

Calculations and Discussion

I s o l a t i n ~
entrance, consider the area 7 W16
enclosed by glass unit masonry.

There are several options for

supporting the glass unit masonry.
The two likely possibilities are
.~
?16'
shown below.

5' 2 -.~ 10' ~ ~

Entrance Opening
20'
I-
Additional Framing for
lass Unit Masonry

OPTION 1 OPTION 2

17 - 69
 Chapter 17

Panel Size and Glass Unit Size

Option 1
Code Sections Panel A 1 6 f t x 5 ft = 80 ft~ < 144 ft 2 for standard units
7.3.1and 7.3.2 [ < 85 ft 2 for thin units
16 ft < 20 ft max for standard units
> 10 ft max for thin units
Code Sections I Panel B 8 ft x 10 ft = 80 ft 2 < 144 ft 2 and 85 ft 2
7.3.1 and 7.3.2 II 10 ft < 25 ft for standard units
< 15 ft for thin units
For Option 1, standard units must be used.
Option 2
Code Section Panel C 10 f t x 20 ft = 200 ft 2 > 144 ft2 for standard units
7.3.1 ] • Option 2 exceeds the maximum allowable panel size.
Use Option 1 with standard units.

Loading on Supplemental Framing --Option 1

Beam 1
Vertical Load

Code Section
7.4.3
I w = 8 ft x 20 p s f ( D L ) = 160 p l f
[]
+ 8 f t x 15 p s f ( d o o r ) = 120 p l f
16'
280 p l f
Lateral load
DOOR
J 8'
I Code Section 8ft
7.4.3
20 p s f x
2
= 80 p l f f r o m Panel B
J \
8ft 10'
20 p s f x
2
= 80 p l f fromDoor
from Door _
- - - 5' _
v

-I- -I

160 p l f use 200 p l f

Column 2
Lateral Load
5ft
w = 20 p s f x - - - 50 p l f f r o m Panel A
Code Section 2
7.4.3
10ft
+ 20 p s f x - - = 100 p l f from Panel B
2
150 p l f u s e 200 p l f

Beam I
M v =0.28(10) 2 / 8 = 3.5 ft- kip
M w ---0.2(10)2 / 8 = 2.5 ft- kip
Torsional load = 0.2 kip/ftx 6 in. = 1.2 in. - kip/ft

17 - 70
Example TMS-15

Code Section Design a tube for the glass unit masonry which supports the lateral load and vertical load yet
7.4.2 limits deflection to 1/600 (include the torsional loads created by the eccentric load of the units).

Column 2
Design the column for the combined loads from the \

wind and Beam 1. It is also preferable to limit the /

lateral deflection to //600. Provide a slip connection R from Beam 1
8'
between Column 2 and the roof framing. )T from Beam 1
/
\
To complete the design, a) recheck the columns and W(suction)
roof girder for the added lateral load from the glass unit
masonry and supplemental framing, b) provide
horizontal joint reinforcing per Code Section 7.8, and c)
J 8'

provide movement joints along the top and sides of each

glass unit masonry panel.
/

17 - 71
 Chapter 17

E x a m p l e T M S - 1 6 - - D o u b l y Reinforced M a s o n r y Lintel Design

Consider the concrete masonry lintel above the lOft x l O f t opening in the east wall on GrM Line
3 for Wall Construction Type A. The loading for the lintel from MDG Example TMS-8, is shown
below. The figure shows a uniformly distributed load, wl = 792 plf, and a uniform load at the
center distributed over a span o f 40.5 in., we = 4,670 plf. Load w~ includes the weight o f the lintel
and the weight o f the wall above the lintel. Load w~ is the effect o f the concentrated load from a
girder. No arching action is assumed. The concrete masonry lintel is to be designed assuming:

Type N mortar Reinforcement = Grade 60

f " = 1,500 psi Em =900 f'm = 1.35 X 106 psi
Concrete masonry unit strength = 2, 000 psi
15,770 Ib

10" Length Of
.,-, Bearing Plate

tI "l

10" + 4 x 7.63" = 4 0 . 5 "

88 psf (9') = 792 plf

Lintel

10.3'

Calculations a n d Discussion
FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. Determine effective depth, modular ratio, and allowable stresses
Assume the total depth that is to be solidly grouted and considered for lintel depth is limited
to h = 32 in.

Assume cover to centroid o f tension steel = 3.0 in.

then, d = 32 in. - 3.0 in. = 29 in.

Assume b = 7.63 in.

Code Section Es = 29 x 10 6 psi
1.8.2
E s _ 2 9 x 106 psi _ 21.5
The modular ratio, n = - -
Em 1 . 3 5 x 1 0 6 psi

The allowable compressive masonry stress,

Code Section
2.3.3.2.2 Fb = ( 1 / f " =l(l,500psi) = 500psi

I Code Section The allowable tensile steel stress, Fs = 24,000 psi

2.3.2.1

17 - 7 2
Example TMS-16

, Determine span length and maximum moment

CodeSections I Assume minimum end beating length of 4 in.
2.3.3.4.3and Then span length,
2.3.3.4.1
4in.
/=10ft+ -10.3 ft
12in./ft
M = 1 (792plf)(10.3ft) 2
8
4,670plf (40.5in.]2 ( 1
+ [ 4'670plf[ 1 ~ )
2 ~,. 2 ) ~144in. 2 / f t ~)
M = 10,500 ft- lb + 40,600 ft- lb- 6,650 ft- lb = 44,450 ft- lb = 44.5 ft- kips
CodeSection
2.3.3.4.4 Compression face of beam needs to have lateral support at intervals less than or equal to 32
times beam width= 32 x 8" = 21.3 ft.

. Determine moment capacity of section for balanced condition

Using M D G Eq. 11.3-5,
n 21.5
k~ - - = 0.309
n + Fs/Fb 21.5 + (24 ksi/0.5 ksi)

Using MDG Eq. 11.3-4,

j =1-kb=0.897
3

Using MDG Eq. 11.3-11,

2

F~kbjbbd
g b -
2
2
(0.5 ksi)(0.309)(0.897)(7.63 in .)(29 in.)
g b- = 444.6 in.- kips = 37.1 ft- kips
2
Additional moment capacity needed,
M2 = M - Mb = 44.5 ft-kips - 37.1 ft-kips = 7.4 ft-kips
Design as a doubly reinforced section
Assume d' = 2.0 in.

. D e t e r m i n e t e n s i o n steel a r e a
Using MDG Eq. 11.3-10,
M~ (37. lft- kips)(12 in./ft)
- 0 . 7 1 i n .2
Fs Jbd (24 ksi)(0.897)(29 in.)

Using MDG Eq. 11.3-12,

M, _ (7.4 ft- kips)(12 in./ft)
A~2- - 0.14 in. 2
F~ (d - d') (24 ksi)(29 i n . - 2 in .)

17 - 73
 Chapter 17

Then, As =Ash+As2= 0.85 in.2

Use 2 #6 bars (As = 0.88 in.2)

. Determine compression steel area

Assume k = 0.3 for the doubly reinforced section
Using MDG Eqs. 11.3-9 and 11.3-8

..((0.3)(29 in .) - 2 in..]
Code Section f " = (21.5)(500 pso~ ~ i n S
2.3.2.2 ,/

f : = 8,279 psi < F , = 24,000 psi

or

f~= "~. 1 - k )

Code Section f : = (24,000 psi)( 0.3-21___6~in./29in .]

2.3.2.2

f~ = 7,921 psi < F s = 24,000 psi

Use smallerf's to determine A's

Using MDG Eq. 11.3-13
M2
A'-

A,s = (7.4 ft- kips)(12,000) = 0.43 in .2

• (21.5-1]
(7,921psi)(Z9in.-2m.)~ ~

Code ~ c t i o ~ Use 2 #5 bars; A's provided = 0.62 in.2

I
2.3.2.2a~
2.1.4.6
1 Provide #3 ties at 8" spacing for compression steel.

6. Revise k and check adequacy of section

k= [(np +(n-1)p')2 + 2(np + (n-1)p'd'/dll ~ -[np + (n-1)O']
A. 0.88 in 2
p- - " = 0.00398
bd (7.63 in.)(29 in.)
np = (21.5)(0.00398) = 0.086

p, _ A" _ 0.62 in .2
-0.0028
bd (7.63 in.)(29 in.)

17 - 7 4
Example TMS-16
//

(n - 1)p'= (21.5 - 1)(0.0028) = 0. 057 7.39" 7 5.4"

n p + (n - 1 ) p ' = 0.143

• k = [0.0203 + 0.1798]'J~ _ 0.143 21.6"

k = 0.3 -~ A s s u m e d 0.3
k d = 8.7 in.

Assuming masonry compression stress = 500 psi and neglecting hole effect
f ~ m o \

f'= (500 8,279 psi

\~./m.)
f

f s = (21.5)(500psi)(20"3i--n-'] = 25,083 psi > F s • Steel controls

\ 8.7 in. )

M = (478 psi)(7.63 in.)(8.7 /e9 873"[+ (8,279 psi)(0.62 in .2 )(29 in. - 2 in.)

M = 34.5 ft- kips + 11.5 ft- kips

M = 46.0 ft- kips > 44.6 ft- kips • O K

.'. Section is adequate

. Check Placement of Reinforcement

Check placement limits for 2 #6 bars for As ; and 2 #5 bars for A '~
I CodeSection • Clear distance between parallel bars shall not be less than the nominal diameter o f the
1.12.3 bars, nor less than 1 in.
I CodeSection • Thickness o f grout between the reinforcement and masonry units shall not be less
1.12.3.5 than 1/4 in. for fine grout and 1/2 in. for coarse grout.
ICodeSection • Minimum masonry cover required for reinforcement:
1.12.4 If exposed to earth or weather, 2 in. for bars larger than #5, 1-1/2 in. for #5 bars or smaller
If not exposed to earth or weather, 1-1/2 in.

(a) Check if 2 #6 bars for As will fit

Assume 1 row o f 2 #6 bars
From MDG Appendix Table 4 face shell thickness of 1-1/4 in., assume fine grout and
#3 stirrups

Minimum beam width required = 2 (diameter o f # 6 bar, 0.75 in.) + (1 in. clear distance) + 2
(minimum cover required; or thickness of grout required plus face shell
thickness) + 2 (diameter o f stirrup)
= 2 (0.75 in.) + (1 in.) + 2 (1.5 in.) + 2 (0.375 in.)
= 6.25 in. < 7.63 in. .'. OK

17 - 7 5
 Chapter 17

(b) Check if2 #5 bars forA's will fit

Minimum beam width required = 2(0.625 in.) + 1 in. + 2(1.5 in.) + 2(0.375 in.)
= 6.0 in. < 7.63 in. " OK

The final cross section and steel placement are as shown:

2 - #5 bars

#3 hairpin ties ~;
2~'
8" spacing L_~
32"

2 #6 bars
-

3"
_1 ,, I_t T
t\l-i
2.94"~ 2.94"
7.63"

. Check Deflection
Using MDG Eq. 11.3-20
3

I~, = bk ~d + n A ~ ( d _ k d ) ~ + ( n _ l ) A , ( k d _ a , ) ~
3
k = 0.255
1o, = 1,029 in.4 + 6,610 in.4 + 528 in.4

1o, = 8,167 in.4

Use MDG Eq. 11.3-18 to calculate short-term deflection

112 1/2
f~ = 2.5 ( f ' m ) = 2.5 (2,500 p s i ) = 125 psi

lg = (7.63 in.) (32 i n . ) 3 _ 20,835 in.4

12
M , - f " I~ _ (125 psi)(20,835 in .4 ) _ 162,773 in. - lb = 163 in. - kips
Yt 16 in.
M , , s = 535 i n . - kips

17 - 76
Example TMS-16

Then short-term deflection,

5Mcrl 2 5(M,,~ - M c r ) l 2
A- t-
48E,, Ig 48E,, Icr
2

A - 5(163 in.- kips)(10.3 f t x l 2 in./ft)

48(1.35 x 103 ksi)(20,835 in.4)
2

+ 5(535 in.- kips- 163 in.- kips)(10.3 ftx 12 in./ft)

48(1.35 x 103 ksi)(8,167 in. 4)
A --- 0.0092 in. + 0.0539 in. = 0.063 in.
Determine additional long-term deflection for creep and shrinkage for total load.
Using MDG Eq. 11 •3-21,

l+50p'
1.20 in.2
p' = = 0•0054
7.63 in .(29 in .)
Use ~= 2 then,
2
A= - 1.57
1 + 50(0.0054)

• Total deflection = 0.063 in. + 1.57(0.063 in.) = 0.162 in.

Allowable deflection,
1
---<_0.3
I CodeSection A at°"~t"- 600
1.10.1 [
(10.33 ft)(12 in./ft)
Ao,,owo..= 600

A.,..o,. = 0 . 2 0 7 i n . > 0 . 1 6 2 i n . • OK

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

15,770 Ib

10" Length Of
.... BearingPlate

...
i ............... /<4o. /12

10" + 4 x 7.63" = 40.5"

10.3'
t 7 - 7"t
 C h a p t e r 17

. The shear force at the face of reaction is

V = wll + w2a
2 2
where a = length of load w2
4,670 p l f ( 4-<0.'--5i,~ /
V = 792 plf(10.33 ft) ~ \ ~ z m . / r t ) _ 12,000 lb
2 2

. According to Code Section 2.3.5.5, find shear at all2 from face

V = 12,000 lb - 792 plf ~ ~ -- 11,043 lb

. From Code Eq. (2-19), find the shear stress

V
fv- bd
CodeSection
2.3.5.2.1 ] 11,043 lb
f, - = 49.9 psi
(7.63 in.)(29 in.)
. The maximum shear stress for no shear reinforcement is
CodeSection r, =1 _< 50 psi
2.3.5.2.2 [
.'. F v = 1 . 0 ~ , 5 0 0 = 38.7 psi

49.9 psi > 38.7 psi " N.G.

, Check to see if F, is exceeded when shear reinforcement is used

CodeSection F = 3 . 0 ~ ' < 150psi
2.3.5.2.3 ]
F~ = 3 . 0 ~ , 5 0 0 = 1 1 6 p s i > 49.9psi " OK

Thus, shear reinforcement is permissible.

. Design shear reinforcement

Code Section 2.3.5.3 requires that all shear be carried by reinforcement, according to:
CodeEq. 2-26 [ Vs
A. Fsd
CodeSection ] The maximum Fs = 24,000 psi thus,
2.3.2.1
(11,043 lb)s = 0.016s
A, (24,000 psi)(29 in.)
ifs = 16 in. A, = 0.25 in. 2
ifs = 24 in. A, = 0.38 in. 2
ifs = 8 in. A, = 0.13 in. 2 Use 1 - #4 each cell (f~ = 0.20 in. 2)

17 - 78
Example TMS-16

Use 1 - #4 bar at 8 in. o.c. for vertical shear reinforcing. Check maximum spacing o f
d / 2 < 4 8 in.
CodeSection d / 2 - 2 9 i n - - - ~ ' - 1 4 . 5 i n . > 8in. • OK
2.3.5.3.1
2
ICodeSection The computed shear reinforcement requirements are satisfied by the compression steel tie
2.1.4.6
requirement.

. Code Section 2.3.5.3.2 requires that Av/3 be provided perpendicular to shear

reinforcement
0.13in. z
Thus, - 0.04 in.2 Satisfied by supplied flexural bars.
3

Check steel placement

b = 7.63 in. 2 #5 bars
Face shell thickness = 1.25 in.
Shear reinforcing = #4 stirrups = 0.5 in. diameter
Flexural reinforcing
Compression steel
A, = 2 #6 bars tieand shear
A, '= 2 #5 bars hairpin stirrup
#3 @8"

2 #6 bar,'

7.63"
Minimum beam width required
= 2 (minimum cover required; or thickness of
grout required plus face shell thickness)
+ 2 (diameter of#6 bar, 0.875) + 1 (1 in. clear distance between longitudinal bar)
+ 1 (diameter o f #4 stirrup)
= 2 (1.75 in.) + 2 (0.75 in.) + 1 (1 in.) + (0.5 in.) = 6.50 in. < 7.63 in. .'. OK
ICodeSection Check development of shear reinforcement
2.1.8.2 [
la = 0.0015 dbF, = 0.0015 (0.5) (24,000) = 18 in.
For standard hook in tension an equivalent embedment length
= 11.25 db = 5.6 in.
CodeSection A single leg stirrup can be anchored by providing a standard hook plus an effective
1.12.5 ]
embedment o f 0.5 la
CodeSection 0.5 la= 9 in. < 14.5 i n . - 3 in. = 11.5 in. .'. OK
2.1.8.5.1.2 !

17 - 79
 Chapter 17

ANCHORAGE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

An anchorage at a simple support is to be designed for the main reinforcement of the doubly
reinforced lintel. The lintel has bottom reinforcement consisting of 2-#6 bars.

As pointed out in the text of MDG Chapter 14, the current Code does not require a check for
anchorage at a simple support. An approach to this problem, consistent with other codes which
use a development length approach, would be to calculate the ratio of M/V (allowable flexural
capacity / service-level shear), and compare it with the required development length. That
procedure will be followed in this example. This check is not a part of the current Code, it is
consistent however, with the Code's intent, and similar provisions are included as typical
engineering design practice.

Calculations and Discussion

# 6 bars
. . . . . . . . . L .......

10.3 ft

Shear

Moment

Allowable flexural capacity at simple support = 46.4 ft ki )S

-

I CodeEq. 2-8 ] For a #6 bar,

la = 0.0015 dbFs
la = 0.0015(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi)
la= 27 in. = required development length (embedment length)

The ratio of allowable flexural moment to service level shear gives the available
development length:
(M/V) = (46.4 ft-kips x 12 in./ft / 11.98 kips) = 46.5 in.

This exceeds the required development length of 27 in. and therefore no bar extension
CodeSection or hook is needed at the simple support for this situation by calculation. However for
2.1.8,3.2 [ flexural elements that are part of a primary lateral load-resisting system, at least 25%
of the positive moment reinforcement must extend into the support and be properly
anchored. For this example to satisfy this Code provision 1-#6 would extend beyond
the support a distance of 27 in. A shorter extension is possible if a standard hook i s
used.

17 - 80
Example TMS-17 - - Load Distribution Within Single Wythe Walls Under Concentrated
Loads
Determine the effective area of wall acting under concentrated loads for calculation of
compressive stress (f~).

The north loadbearing wall, Grid Line A, is used to illustrate the distribution of load under
typical roofjoist supports. The portion of the loadbearing wall above the joist bearing elevation
is ignored and the loading of a section of the wall is as shown below.
3"x5" Steel Bearing Plate
Long Dimensions Across

I I I I
I I
I
I ~
I .7/..
/ r-~\
\~
Joist Reactions

i / 5' i i /cry\
I / I i I V/
L/ ~
I
Wall Thickness.

I t I /I/x-.-cL ~ \
Lr
k I
I I
I
I I I

IEl I II M~
_1 I" _1
Effective Length Effective Length 8" C
Load
Spacing

Calculations and Discussion

I CodeSection For walls laid in running bond, the limiting effective length per the Code equals the bearing width
2.1.7.1 I plus 4 times the wall thickness. See MDG Appendix A for concrete masonry unit dimensions.
Effective Length = 3 in. + (4 x 7.63 in.) = 33.5 in.
(thickness of 8 in. nominal concrete block is 7.63 in.)

CodeSection The Code also states that the effective length shall not exceed the center-to-center distance
2.1.7.1 between concentrated loads.
33.5in. < 5ftxl2in./ft=60in. .'. OK
The net area of the wall is then calculated based on the limiting effective length calculated above.
If the wall was grouted solid, the net area would be:

A, = 33.5 in. x 7.63 in. = 255 i n )

CodeSection If the wall was hollow, the Code would require that the minimum net area be used; for face shell
1.9.1.1 [ bedding this would equal 33.5 in. times the thickness of 2 face shells, or 2.5 in.
Ao = 3 3 . 5 i n . x 2.5 i n . = 8 4 i n . 2

17 - 81
 Chapter 17

For walls laid in running bond the load distribution must be terminated at movement joints if the
distribution intersects the joint.

For walls laid in other than running bond, the Code Commentary Section 2.1.7 states that no stress
shall be transferred across head joints. Therefore, the load distribution must stop at the head joint
closest to each edge of the bearing plate. The Commentary suggests distributing the load over a
45 ° angle. Thus, if the previous wall system was laid in stack bond, the distribution of load shown
by the shaded areas in the figure that follows should be assumed. Consequently, the effective
length of wall is limited to one unit. Again, minimum area (based on face shell bedding) should
be used if wall is not grouted solid.

_J t5o_~--
45°
Effective
I
Effecti,
Length
Lengt

Determination of Effective Length in Walls of Other Than Running Bond.

17 - 8 2
Example TMS-18 m Load Distribution Within Single Wythe Walls With Bond Beams
Under Concentrated Loads

The north wall on Grid Line A is a loadbearing wall supporting steel joists spaced on 5 fi centers.
Assuming that the top course of the wall is replaced with a bond beam, calculate the net bearing
area of the hollow wall section and the effective length over which the concentrated load can be
distributed

Calculations and Discussion

44 o 3oo --- 7.63"

-F-
.-". /

"-%,

The bearing plate dimensions are 3 in. x 5 in. The nominal wall thickness and the bond beam
depth are assumed to be 8 in. The angle of load dispersion through the bond beam is taken as 30 °
from the vertical as suggested in MDG Section 9.3.2.1. See MDG Appendix A for properties of
concrete masonry units.

Bearing Stress Check

The gross effective bearing area of the hollow wall that can be used to resist the load is given by:
Gross Bearing Area = t x L~
in which t is equal to the actual thickness of the wall and LB is calculated as

LB = [Lp + 2(7.63 i n . / t a n 30°)]

where Lp is the length of the bearing plate = 3 in.

For this example, t = 7.63 in. (8 in. nominal block), and Lp = 3 in., which leads to a value for LB
of:
L 8 = 3in. + 2(7.63 in .Xtan 30°)= 11.8in.

Combining the above equations and substituting these values gives:

Gross Bearing Area = (7.63 in.)(11.8 in.) = 90 in.2 underneath bond beam

17 - 83
 Chapter 17

Code Section 1.9.1.1 requires that the load be resisted by the minimum net cross-sectional area.
As this area for an 8 in. CMU laid in full bedding is equal to 41.5 in.2 per foot of wall, the net
effective bearing area below the bond beam can be calculated by proportionality as

NetBearingArea=[(12 in41"5
i n(7.63
' 2 . ) in .) 190 in'2 = 40"8 in'2

at the bottom of the bond beam (assumes face shell and cross webs are mortared).

Wall Compressive Stress Check

The effective length over which concentrated loads can be distributed is limited to the bearing
width plus four times the wall thickness, but not to exceed the center-to-center spacing of the
concentrated loads. For this example, the effective length is given by

Code Section
Effective Length = LB + 4(7.63 in.)
2.1.7.1 Effective Length = 11.8 in. + 4(7.63 in.) = 42.3 in.

This distance is less than the center-to-center spacing of the concentrated loads and, therefore,
governs. The net cross-sectional area, An, for calculating compressive stress in the wall can again
be calculated by proportionality as

An = "41.5 in. z ] 42.3 in. = 146.2 in. 2

12in. J

If only the face shells are assumed to be mortared, then the net area for calculating compressive
stress is given as

An= 42.3 in. x2(1 1/~4)in. = 107 in.2

17 - 84
Example T M S - 1 9 - Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated Load
For the walls on Grid Lines 1 or 3, the W 16 x 31 steel beams running along Line B are supported
on 5 in. x 10 in. x 3/4 in. bearing plates. Assume the bearing plate is placed at the center of an 8
in. grouted block wall laid in running bond. The bearing plate is located at a distance ofl-5/16
in. from each face of the wall. Calculate the effective bearing areafor this plate location.

7.63" --
I" 5" -I

44

a A2

X ~ured
his
1 On
J te

Bearing
r Area A~

Plan V i e w Section X -X

Calculations and Discussion

Referring to MDG Section 9.3.3,

A 1 = 5 i n . x 1 0 i n . = 50 in. 2

A 2 = (7.63)(10 in. + 2.63 irl.) = 96.4 in. 2

The load can be distributed over an area given by

IC°aeSeca°n
2.1.7.2 I Area=A 1 but not greater than 2A1

/96.4in. 2
Area = 50 in.2 ~ 50 in.2 = 69.4in.Z but not greater than 2(50 in.2) = 100 in.2

Therefore,
Effective Bearing Area = 69.4 in. 2

17 - 85
 Chapter 17

Example TMS-20 - - Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated Load

Assume the 5 in. x 10 in. x 3/4 in. bearingplate in MDG Example TMS-19 is located at the edge of
the masonry wall. Calculate the effective bearing areafor this plate location.

AreaA2 Is
X MeasuredOn
This Plane

10' l

Plan View Section X -X

Calculations and Discussion

Since the edge of the bearing plate, in this case, is in line with the face of the block, the effective
bearing area is equal to the actual area of the bearing plate.

CodeSection Therefore,
2.1.7.2 I
Effective Bearing Area = 50 i n J

Note: Typically the bearing plate is placed no closer than 0.5 in. from the face o f the masonry
unit.

17 - 86
Example TMS-21 - - Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated Load
Assume the 5 in. x 10 in. x 3/4 in. bearing plate in MDG Example TMS-19 is placed at the center
o f an 8 in. grouted block wall laid in stack bond but at a distance o f ¾ in. from a head joint.
Calculate the effective bearing area for this plate location.

3/4"

/// // //~L _ _ Y

45° .-/'-7- ....................

3/4" J
3/4"
," ~Aorne} A~ Ip~Measured
10"

Stack Bond

Section X - X
Plan

Calculations and Discussion

Code The Code Commentary states that A2 shall terminate at head joints in other than running bond.
Commentary As the bearing plate is assumed to end at a distance o f 3/4 in. from the head joint o f the stack
Section 2.1.7 bond masonry the value o f A2 can be calculated as:

A2 = [5 in. + 2(0.75 in.)] [ 10 in. + 2(0.75 in.)] = 74.8 in.2

The load can be distributed over an area given by

Area = .,t 1 but not greater than 2A1

[74.8i_n_.2
Area = 50in. 2 ~ 50in.2 = 6 1 . 1 i n . 2 but not greater than 1 0 0 i n . 2

• In this case, effective bearing area = 61.1 in. 2

17 - 87
 C hapter 17

Example TMS-22 - - Joist Connection to Loadbearing Wall

A joist connection detail is to be designed for the wall on Grid Line A. The detail must transfer
in-plane gravity loads, in-plane shear loads, and out-of-plane wind loads.

Calculations and Discussion

Two detail options are given. The first option involves a bearing plate on a bond beam. Because
the design steps are quite similar to those of MDG Example TMS-23 they are not repeated here.
The second option involves anchors placed horizontally into a grouted masonry bond beam, and is
described here in detail.

~ .75"
Bulb Tee
~ ~-/L 7"x4" 1" BoltsSpaced

Equall , j i eel Joist

First Option Second Option

Design Detail

The joist are spaced at 5'-0" on center. The building dimensions usually do not provide for the
ability to maintain the exact spacing. The designer could specify the layout on his drawings, but it
is more common to specify the maximum spacing (5'-0") and allow the joist supplier to provide
the detailed layout. The detailed layout is communicated to the designer with a shop drawing,
which is submitted for review by the engineer for conformance with design.

Thus, when using an angle ledger, the exact location of the joist load is not known until after the
shop drawings are submitted. It is therefore common to design the ledger for any location of the
joist. The easiest method to do this is to uniformly space the bolts along the ledger. A good
design should also recognize that the ledger could not be one piece. A detail showing the end of
the angle piece condition would be helpful.

With the design of ledger angles, it is almost always the case that the critical load combination is
the load combination resulting in the maximum reaction at the end of the joist. This typically is
caused by the D+L, or D+L+W loading combinations. The maximum joist reaction for the dead
and live load combinations was given by 4.54 kips (see MDG Section 17.1.2). This loading
condition usually governs since a significant prying tension will be produced on the anchor bolts
by this type of connection, as shown in the following diagram.

17 - 88
Example TMS-22

Prying Tension

The prying tension force on the bolt produced by the eccentricity of the axial load is significantly
influenced by the tolerances of the construction. Further, it is recommended that the horizontal
leg of the angle needs to the 4 in. (possibly 3-1/2 inch with top quality construction) in order to
assure at least 2 inches of bearing of the joist on the angle.

Thus, for the purposes of this problem, it is assumed that a 7 in. x 4 in. angle is used and the bolts
placed at the center of the 7 inch leg. It is also assumed that there will be a 1/2 inch construction
tolerance on the location of both the bolt and the center of the joist reaction. With these
assumptions, the pullout on the bolt due to dead and live load reaction is:

Tension (prying) - 4,540 ( 2 + 1/2) / ( 3-1/2 - I/2 ) = 3,784 lb per joist

If it is further assumed, that the bolts fastening the ledger angle to the wall are spaced at 16 inches
on center (3.75 bolts per joist). The pullout per bolt is:

Pullout tension = 3.784 lb/3.75 = 1,009 lb

It should be noted that the bolt spacing matches the dimensions of the CMU (16 inches long)
making it easy for the contractor to locate the bolts (every other cell).

Try a 3/4 inch diameter bolt with 6 inches of embedment. Using Code equations the following
allowable bolt loads result:

For masonry controlling tension:

Code Section
Ba =0.5 Ap~ =0.51r x 6.02 x 15a/]-5-~=2190 lb
2.1.2.2.1
For bolt steel controlling tension:

Code Section B a = 0.20 A b × f y = 0.2re × 0.44 × 36000= 3181 lb

2.1.2.2.1

The masonry controls at 2190 lb per bolt.

The couple on the ledger produces a bearing of the angle toe on the masonry. This bearing stress
on the masonry should also be checked. Ira triangular stress distribution as shown is assumed:

17 - 89
 Chapter 17

4.54 Kips

then the applied eccentric moment per bolt is:

M = (4540 x 2-1/2) / 3.75 = 3027 in-lb / bolt

Assume that
d = 3-1/2 -- 1/2 = 3.0 inches
b = 3.0 x 2 + 3/4 = 6-3/4 inches (assumes 45 ° spread from the bolt)
n = 21.5 (see previous problems)
As = 0.44 in2 (3/4 inch diameter bolt)

Using the formulas for single reinforced sections described previously, the depth of the neutral
axis can be determined (kd) where k is given by the quadratic listed in MDG Chapter 11.

k=0.61
and
j = 1 - k/3 = 0.80

Using these values, the peak bearing stress can be determined as j% by equating the applied and
internal moments.

M 3027
fbr bd 2 6.75 x 3.02 206 psi
~kj" x0.61x0.80
2 2
The allowable bearing stress in masonry is 0 . 2 5 f ' , or 375 psi and is greater than the computed
value of 206 psi.

The next check will be to evaluate the bolt for combined pullout and shear:

The bolt shear limit for the masonry is:

Code Section B v = 350 ~ Ap = 350× ~ 1 5 0 0 x 0.44 = 1774 lb

2.1.2.2.3

The limit for the bolt shear is:

Code Section By = 0.12 A b f y = 0.12x 0.44x 36000 = 1900 lb

2.1.2.2.3

Again the masonry limits the allowable.

The applied shear per bolt is 1210 lb (4540 lb / 3.75 bolts).

17 - 9 0
Example TMS-22

Looking at the combined loading using the unity equation from the Code.

I2.1.2.2.4
Coa~Section I ba
B,, + BV - 2190 1774
1 10
bY < 1.0 = __1009 ~ - - - = 1.14 • N.G.

The 3/4 inch bolt at 16 inches on center doesn't work. A different spacing could be tried but since
the spacing of 16 inches on center is very beneficial to the ease of construction, it would be best to
increase the diameter of the bolt. Try a 1.0 inch bolt.

Pullout limited by the masonry:

B a = 0.5 Ap ~ m ' = 0.5ZX 6.02 X ~ = 2190 lb

Pullout limited by the bolt:

Ba = 0.20 A b x f y = 0.2 ~r x 0.44 x 36000 = 3181 lb

Shear limited by the masonry:

B~ = 350 ~ = 350 × ~ 1 5 0 0 x 0.44 = 1774 lb

Shear limited by the bolt:

B,, = O. 12 A bf y = 0.12 x 0.44 x 36000 = 1900 lb

Combining the results again:

b~ by 1009 1210
+ --<1.0- + ---1.05
Bo B~ 2190 2054

It is common in a problem like this to allow a 5% overstress. There were many assumptions along
the way and most of them were conservative assumptions. For example, the dead load and live
load reaction location on the 4 inch leg of the angle could have been assumed as a triangular
distribution, moving the centroid of the load closer to the wall and reducing the eccentric moment.

Assume the 5% over stress is OK. Thus the design requires 1 inch diameter bolts at 16 inches on
center.

It should be noted that the D + L + W load combination should be checked to ensure that this
connection detail is adequate for this loading condition. Under the D + L + W loading condition,
the tension load on the bolts will be increased slightly by the out-of-plane wind load reactions
(1013 lb/joist). However, the capacities, B~ and B~ can be increased by 1/3 and, by inspection,
this loading condition will not govern in this case.

17 - 91
 Chapter 17

In addition, the load combinations that include seismic load should be checked as well. This must
be done using the appropriate load factors from ASCE 7. In this case, 1.2D + 0.2S + E would
produce the critical loading. It should be noted that the vertical loads would produce a prying
force on the bolts as described before and the critical applied shear load would be the vector sum
of the in-plane seismic load and the factored vertical load. Further, the capacities of the bolts in
shear and tension would have to be multiplied by the product of 2.5 x 0.6 = 1.5, since the pseudo-
strength design method would have to be used. Since all these load combinations produce loads
less than 1.5 greater than the ones used for this design, they will not govern.

Finally, to complete the design a check of the angle thickness is also required. However, this was
not done here since this is beyond the scope of this masonry guide

17 - 92
Example TMS-23 w Connection of Steel Beam Bearing Detail
Design a bearing detail for the W 16 x 31 beam on Grid Lines I and B.

Calculations and Discussion

The bearing detail is shown below:

ifrequJred

Plate ¾ " x 5 " x 8" \

.ded Stud
3rout

U
As in previous examples, the wall must be designed for gravity loads, in-plane shear, and out-of-
plane shear. Bearing under the plate must also be checked. These conditions are described in
more detail below. Usef'm = 2,000 psi.

Gravity Loads (See MDG Section 17.1.2)

The masonry bond beam must be designed for the vertical reaction from the W 16 x 31. The
governing reaction is 15,770 lb.

Check the bearing stress directly under the plate:

CodeSection 15,770
= 395 psi
2.1.Z3 I 5in~8in.
This bearing stress is less than 0.25f'm = 500 psi " OK

17 - 9 3
 Chapter 17

Example TMS-24 m Design of a Straight Bar Anchorage

A straight bar anchorage is to be designed To make this example relevant to the overall building
designs which are part of this MDG, the design will involve the anchorage of a #6 foundation
dowel, embedded vertically into the foundation of one of the walls. Use of this example does not
imply that such a foundation-wall connection would always have to be reinforced MDG
Examples DPC-19 and DPC-20 deal with an unreinforced connection.

Calculations and Discussion

/, mas(

. , . ~

I
I l a concrete

I
I
Use #6 dowel, Grade 60. The required development length is given by the following
equation (See Code Commentary Section 2.1.8.2 for derivation).

2-8 I 4 = O.O015dbF,

Id = (0.0015)(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi) = 27 in.

CodeSection Also check that la is not less than 12 in. for bars. • OK
2.1.8.2 [
Note that when epoxy-coated bars are used, the ld computed by Code Eq. (2-8) must
be increased by 50 percent.

17 - 94
Example TMS-25 m Design of a Hooked Bar Anchorage
A hooked bar anchorage is to be designed To make this example relevant to the overall building
designs which are part of this MDG, the design will involve the anchorage of a #6 foundation
dowel, embedded vertically into the foundation and one of the walls. Use of this example does not
imply that such a foundation-wall connection would always have to be reinforced MDG
Examples DPC-19 and DPC-20 deal with an unreinforced connection.

Calculations and Discussion

Standard hook in
plane of masonry
wall

I
)
m m ,..m~. J

Use #6 dowel, Grade 60. As previously computed in MDG Example TMS-24, the total required
embedment length is 27 in. The equivalent embedment length provided by a standard hook is
equal to
CodeSection le = 11.25 db = 11.25(0.75 in.) = 8.44 in.
2.1.8.4.1 ]

The remaining required embedment length is therefore

27 i n . - 8.44 in. = 18.6 in.

• Use 19 in. additional straight embedment measured from start of standard 90 ° hook.

17 - 95
 C h a p t e r 17

Example TMS-26 - - Roof Diaphragm Connection to Shear Wall

Design the connection between the roof diaphragm and the shear wall on Grid Line 2. The
connection must transfer lateral loads from the roof to the wall, but will not transfer vertical load.

Calculations and Discussion

The connection detail is shown. The "butterfly plate," as given in detail at the bottom of the
figure, allows vertical flexibility. The lateral tie must be designed for the in-plane shear
transmitted to the wall.
In-Plane Diaphragm Shear
The total seismic shear is 32.85 kips from MDG Example TMS-2. Half comes from each side of
the wall. The wall is 82 ft long. The shear per ft per side of the plate is therefore
32,850 lb
= 200 plf
2x82ft
1-1/2 in. x 22 gage metal deck with nominal fastening will be satisfactory for transferring shear to
open-web joists.
Butterfly Plates
Try 1/S-in. butterfly plates at 4 ft. Plate shear (horizontal) is
4ftx200plf = 8001b

Dimensions of the legs of butterfly plate must be checked for horizontal shear and flexure.

~ Vl--.%

Typ

BondBeamWith
2-#5Continuous
~ DatailOf"ButterflyRate"
I Pl=e,, ~'~ ~ (GalvanizedBentPlate
2 ~ = ~ ~ ~ 1x ,8"~x 1'-2"
. - cutas shown)

Alternative Plate
A 1/8 inch flat plate with a bolt hole and bolt through it would be easier to install and probably
more cost effective.

17 - 96
Example TMS-27 - - Design of Anchor Bolts Connecting Shear Wall to Roof Diaphragm
Bolts will be designed for the connection of the nonloadbearing shear wall on Grid Line 2 to the
metal roof deck. The bolts will be designed to transfer the wind-induced shears from the metal
deck roof diaphragm to the wall. Bolt heads will be anchored in a bond beamformed by grouting
the top course of the wall. Thefree ends of the bolts will project through a steel plate. Angles at
the edge of the roof deckwill be welded to the plate. Assume the wall length is 81.5 ft.

Calculations and Discussion

Angles Welded To Metal

l a . • • , ,

Anchor

The total shear from the metal deck is 23,200 lb (see MDG Example TMS-2). Half of this shear is
transferred from each side. Try 1/2-in. diameter A 307 bolts. Assume the bolt threads will be
outside the shear plane, so the effective tensile stress area equals the gross area. Use the lesser of:

[CodeEq. 2-5 ] = 35 42
or

CodeEq. 2-6 [ B. = 0.12Abfy

Assumef'm = 2,000 psi and Ab = 0.20 in)

By = 350 4X/2,000 psix 0.20 in.2 = 1,565 lb

Assume the bolt is in the center of the wall. Therefore, the distance measured from the anchor
bolt to the nearest free surface (lbe) is given by:
7.63 - d~
lbe 2
7. 63 in. -0. 5 in.
lx = 2 = 3.56 in.

17 - 97
 Chapter 17

Because lbe is less than 12 db, the value o f By in Code Eq. (2-5) must be reduced by linear
interpolation to zero at an/be distance o f 1 in.:
Code Section
2.1.2.2.3
(lb, --1 in.)
B~(reduced) = B~x (12db_ l in.)

(3.56 in.-1 in .)
By(reduced) = B~ x
(12x 0.5 i n _ l in.)
By (reduced) = By x 0.51 = 1,565 lb x 0.51 = 798 lb ~ GOVERNS
or
[Code Eq. 2-6 B~ = 0.12 x 0.20 in) x 36,000 psi = 864 lb (does not govern)

I Code Section The governing load per bolt can be increased by one-third, because the loading combination
2.1.1.1.3 involves wind.

The allowable load per bolt is therefore 798 lb (1.33) = 1,064 lb/bolt

Number o f bolts = (23,200 lb)/(1,064 Ib/bolt) = 22 bolts

Wall length is 81.5 ft • space bolts at 45 in. along the top o f the wall.

17 - 98
Example TMS-28 n Design of Unreinforced Exterior Nonloadbearing Wall for Out-of-
Plane Flexure Using Prestressed Masonry
Design the East wall on Grid Line 3 using wall construction option A (simple wythe unreinforced
concrete masonry) and prestressed masonry. For design using prestressed masonry. For design
using unreinforced masonry only see TMS-3. For design using conventionally reinforced
masonry see TMS-I O.
Materials (values verified by testing)
Mortar: Type N (PC-L)
CMU density: 140 p c f
f " = 1500 p s i ; f ' i = 1250 psi at 3 days
Em= 900 f'm = 1.35 x 10e psi; E,,i = 1.125 x 106 psi
fw = 100 ksi;f~ = 122 ksi
7/16 in. diameter tendon: As = O.14 sq. in.
Loading
Wind: 20 p s f
Neglect self weight for initial analysis
Losses_for tendons use 35%for CMU at service loads.
Use 2%for CMU at transfer

Calculations and Discussion

Code Section [
4.5.3 Use laterally-restrained tendon detailing and design.

Allowable tendon stresses:

Code Section I At jacking, lessor of 0.94fpy (94 ksi) or 0.80fp~ (97.6 ksi)
4.3.1

Code Section i At transfer, lessor of 0.82fev (82 ksi) or 0.74fp~ (90.3 ksi)
4.3.2
At service, lessor of 0.78fw (78 ksi) or 0.70fr~ (85.4 ksi)
Code Section
4.3.3 I
Tendon forces for 7/16 in. dia. Tendon= Effective Prestress (Area)
At jacking, (1.0)(94 ksi)(0.14 in. 2) = 13.2 kips

At transfer, (0.98)(82 ksi)(0.14 inT) = 11.7 kips

At service loads, (0.65)(78 ksi)(0.14 in. 2) = 7.1 kips

1. Check service conditions first - using 8 in. CMU

M = 615 ft-lb/ft
Wall weight = (18 '-7.85 )(46.5 psf/ft) = 472 pit" at maximum moment

17 - 99
 Chapter 17

a. Compression:
-L- +
fb < 1.0(1.33) with wind increase
Fo Fb
Use face shell bedding: Determine required Pp,,prestressing required per foot.
Pw..,+Pp. 472 + Pp, p$
f~= = = 15.73 +
A, 30 30

1 [1
F~ = ~ - f m

=10,00f
- r (16 ftX12 inA)]2

F a = 278 psi
M 615x12
fb = . . . . 91.1psi
S 81
Fb = 1/3 f" = 500psi

15.73 +/'ps
30 + 91.1
.'. <1.33
278 500
0.06+ Pps +0.18<1.33
8340
Pv, < 9091 plf
b. Tension:
f b - L < Fb, (1.33)
91.1- (15.73 + P ; ) < 19 (1.33)

P
91.1-15.7- p~ <25.3
30
Pm > 1503 plf
.'. 1503 < required Pp, < 9091
Try: 7.1 kip tendon @ 24 in. which gives Pv~= 3550 plf
C. Check stability
I Code Section P = Pwau = 472 plf (Note: Pp, does not contribute to buckling for restrained
4.5.3.1.1 tendons.)

17-100
Example TMS-28

1 ~2Eml 1 3
"<1/~4P"=1/~4( ' ~7 ' 1 ( - 0 " 5 7 7 e /

Pe = ( ~r2 x(l'35xlO6)x364~(1
),-- 0-577(0 )
Pe = 131,564 plf of wall
P = 4 7 2 p l f < l~4Pe =32,891plf • OK
. Check moment strength
Mu = 1.3M= 800 ft-lbs/ft
P, = 1.2 Pwan= 566 plf
a- fpsAps + f y A s + P , ,
CodeEquation
4-I I O.85f~b
fp~ = fs, = (0.65)(78ksi) = 50.7 ksi

50.7( 0"14in'2 ) x 1 0 0 0 + 0 + 5 6 6 p l f
a- (, 2 ft. on center) - -4,115
- - 0.27
0.85(1500)(12) 15,300
ICode~cao~ a < face shell of CMU = 1.25 inches • OK compression zone fully in face shell
4.5.3.2.5 [ 0.27
a//d = 0.07 < 0.425 OK
3.81
Co~ction
4.5.3.2.6 ]

M" = (50"7 ksi x 1000x 0"14

2 + 0 + 566)~ ' i2 "~

M, : (3549 + 0 + 566](3"67")= 1259 f t . - lb/ft.

Co~ction "k 1 2 )
4.5.3.2.2 [ M,, =~M,, =0.8M,~ =lO07ft.-lb/ft.>800 • O K

3. Check transfer
a. Compression check
Co~ction
2.1.1.1.3 I

17 - 101
 Chapter 17

f~i + fbi < 1.0(1.33)

Fo,
P,~,,u + Ppsi
f,,i = A~,
Pps~ = 11.7 kip tendon + 2 ft. on c e n t e r - 5 8 5 0 p l f
472 + 5850
fat = = 211psi
30
F~; = Lm~ (Fa at service) = 11250
- - ~ ( 2 7 8 ) = 232psi

fb~ = 91.1 psi (assumes full wind load would occur anytime after stressing the tendon)

Fbi = l~3 f'~i =417psi

fai+fbi 211 91.1
=
+ =0.91+0.22=1.13<1.33 ' OK
F,, i Fbi 232 417
without wind :

fo___L+ 0 = 0 . 9 1 + 0 = 0 . 9 1 < 1 . 0 • OK
Fo,
ICodeSection b. Tension check
4.5.1
fb,,t = fbi - fai = 91.1 - 211 = 120 psi ( C o m p r e s s i o n ) " OK

Result: Use 7/16 in. diameter tendons at 24 in. on center; use laterally-restrained details; 8 in.
CMU

Additional details to check:

Bearing stresses at jacking
Shear - not usually a concern for out-of-plane loadings.
Deflections - use untracked moment of inertia since section remains in
compression for service loads

17 - 102
Example TMS-29 m Design of Reinforced Loadbearing Wall using Prestressed Masonry
For the North wall on Grid Line A of the TMS shopping Center determine the size of wall needed
for wall construction option B using prestressed masonry. For design using unreinforced
masonry see Example TMS-5. For design using conventionally reinforced masonry see Example
TMS-11.
Materials (values verified by testing)
Mortar: Type N (PC-L)
CMU density: 140 p c f
f'~ =1500 psi;f~,i = 1250 psi at 3 days
Em = 90Of'= 1.35x lOe psi," Emi= 1.125x 106 psi
Fpy = I00 ksi; f ~ = 122 ksi
7/16 in. diameter tendon: A = O.14 sq. in.
Loading

See Example TMS-11

Pe

615 ft.-lb/ft.

D + L effects Wind

Calculations and Discussion

Determine Loads
CodeSection
,

4.5.3 I Po = 305 plf; PL = 610 plf

e D = eL = 1.98 in.

Pw~ at midheight = 472 plf

M = MD -4-ML + Mw = 766 ft.-lb/ft.

2. Check service conditions for D + L + IV. (Nonloadbearing wall accommodates D + W)

17 - 103
 Chapter 17
a. Compression
I CodeSection f~ + f b < 1.0(1.33)
2.2.3 ro
Try 7/16 in. diameter tendons

ew.,, +PL +Cs 472+305+610+3550

= 164.6
A~ 30

See MDG Example TMS-28 for P~

F,,=-4f,. 1- liar

1, ,F ((16 ftX12 inA)]2 ]

F, = 278psi

M 766x 12
fb - - - - -- 113.5psi
S 81
F b = 1~3f" = 500 psi
f~ + fbu = ~164"6+ 113.5
= 0.59 + 0.23 = 0.82 < 1.33 • OK
F,, Ft, 278 500

b. Tension:
fb - fa = 113.5 - 164.6 = 51 psi (compression... no tension OK)

C. Stability:
P= 1387 plf(no Ppsdue to laterally restrained tendon)
y4pe = 1/~4n'z h2E , I ( 1 - 0.577 e ] 3

l~4Pe =1~4( jrr2 x l'35x106(16x12)

2 x 364]( 1 - 0"577(1'98/]3k.3.21))

= 32,891(1-0.36) 3 = 8,622plf > 1387plf • OK

17-104
Example TMS-29

3. Check moment strength

M, = 1.3M= 996 ft.-lbs/ft.

P , = 1.2P = 1664 lbs/ft.

a=fp, Aps+fyA, +P,

a=
o7oo(/+1664 5,213
- - = 0.34"< face shell
0.85(1500)12 15,300

a 0.34
. . . . 0.09 < 0.425 " OK
d 3.81

M, =(3,549+ 0 + 1,664(3.81--~-~/= 1,581 f t . - lb/ft.

M,, = ~ M , , = 0.8M,, = 1,265 > 996 .'. O K

4. Check transfer

a. Compression
L, + f~i< 1.o
Fo, F~,

Pwo,, + P,,,, + ?~ 472 + 5,850 + 305

Li "" = 220.9 psi
A 30

See MDG Example TMS-28 for Ppsi

1 7 - 105
 Chapter 17

Faj = 232 psi

fbi = MW + M °
S
3o51I 640
- - - - 94.8 psi
S 81

Fbi = 417 psi

f,,i + fbi =
220.9 +
94.8
~ =0.95+0.23=1.18<1.33 " OK
Fai Fb~ 232 417

b. Tension

fb, + f,i = 94.8 + 220.9 = 126.1 psi compression .'. OK

Use 7 / 16 in. ~ tendon @ 24 in. on center

17-106
Building Design
17.2 DPC Gymnasium
17.2.1 Plans and Elevations
MDG Figs. 17.2-1 and 17.2-2 show the plan and
elevation of a 7,500 square foot, single-story gymnasium
building. This building has four wall construction
options, including two unreinforced and two reinforced
masonry wall systems. The roof framing system consists
of gabled roof trusses supporting a metal roof deck,
insulation, a membrane, and miscellaneous equipment.
The north and south walls are loadbearing.
The roof framing system is, again, a simple one-way
system. Simple tributary area analysis of the loading can
be performed.
To illustrate the application of the Code to the
typical structural design considerations for this type of
structure, example problems are presented in MDG
Section 17.2.4. An example problem index is included in
this section to assist the reader in correlating the
illustrated example design issue to the plans and
elevations of the structure.

DPC G Y M N A S I U M EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX

All Wall Construction Options

Example # Page # Design Issue
DPC-1 17-113 Lateral load distribution (all walls)

Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced Noncomposite Brick and Block)

Example # Page # Design Issue
DPC-2 17-116 Eccentric gravity load distribution to the wythes (north and south walls)
DPC-3 17-119 In-plane lateral load distribution to the wythes (east and west walls)
DPC-4 17-120 Out-of-plane lateral load distribution to the wythes (all walls)
DPC-5 17-121 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure (west wall)
DPC-6 17-123 Unreinforced and reinforced pilaster design for out-of-plane flexure (east and west walls)
DPC-7 17-129 Wall design for axial and out-of-plane flexure (noah wall)
DPC-8 17-133 Unreinforced and reinforced pilaster design for out-of-plane flexure and axial load (north
and south walls)
DPC-9 17-142 Wall tie design for out-of-plane loading (all walls)
DPC-10 17-143 Shear wall to foundation connection (east and west walls)
DPC-11 17-146 Roof diaphragm to shear wall connection (east and west walls)
DPC-12 17-147 Steel lintel design (south wall)

Wall Construction Option B (Unreinforced Composite Brick and Block)

Example # Page # Design Issue
DPC-13 17-152 Collarjoint design for out-of-planeshear (castand west walls)
DPC-14 17-155 Wall design for out-of-planeflexure(west wall)
DPC-15 17-159 Wall design for axialand out-of-planeflexureand for out-of-planeshear (north wall)
DPC-16 17-163 Wall design for in-planeflexureand shear (eastwall)
DPC-17 17-168 Empirical wall design (allwalls)

Wall Construction Option C (Reinforced Composite Brick and Block)

Example # Page # Design Issue
DPC-18 17-172 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure and out-of-plane shear (west wall)
DPC-19 17-179 Steel lintel design (south wall)
DPC-20 17-183 Shear wall to foundation connection (east and west walls)

17-107
 Chapter 17
DPC G Y M N A S I U M E X A M P L E P R O B L E M I N D E X ( c o n t i n u e d )

Wall Construction Option D (Reinforced Clay Masonry)

Example # Page,,# Design Issue
DPC-21 17-185 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure (west wall)
DPC-22 17-188 Wall design for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)

Miscellaneous
Example # Page # Design Issue
DPC-23 17-191 Typical reinforcing details

1 1/2"x1 1/2"x 7/64AnglesWith3/8'DiameterBolt

~~ 0 = ~
~o
J- o~~~, ,o
4 EqualSpacesDiagonalBddging "/
®
-~.~.~ ~o a~ o~.~-~.0._~ -
T T
I I I
I I I
I I I ~,_o m 0 o

I I I
I I I .ai ~,4 ,6

I I I o~
._ >. o

~o_
, , 2'
{- @ ~~ '"o
x c

I I~,~ ~I
I I I
I I I 8B~ ® C
~ 0 CO"~

I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
Q r"
I 1 I
~o
Z
O

i 18-0"
112'•-0" 34-0"

Fig. 17.2-1 DPC Gym nasi um Plan

17-108
Building Design

4'.0" typ..
-T Roofing - - - ~ - - - ~ - - ~
k~ Top Of Roof High Point

Top Of Masonry
L . . . . IT . . . . I~ l-r . . . . . . I-I 1--I T1 l-I Truss Bearing Elevation
II Ij' II II II II II
II II ~ .a,on.,-l--L~ II it 8,-0. 2o,.~.
I.I III I,I I,I \~, I,I I,I [ ~°"I I I
III III III III
Iii III lil I lil lit°l=
I
28'-0" t l -o I. 23'-0" 10'-0" 19'-0" Control Joints (CMU), Expansion J
(Back), Unreinfnrood Construction
16'-0" ." 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'-0" 16'4Y' 16'-0" 16'-0"
I ] ] ~ i" = Intedor Wythe Pilasters At
Wall Construction Option A Only
128'-0"

South Elevation (North Elevation Opposite Hand)

I 1 -II

III
tiII III ~ M....
~"-~--
-- II

Joints
Pilasters 16'-0" 16'-0" ,~ 16'-0" . 16'-0" , 16'-0" 3,, 16'-0" 1t , 16'-0" 281 16'-0" t
84'-0" 64"0"

YY~.stEIewati~ East Elevation

Fig. 17.2-2 DPC Gymnasium Elevations

17.2.2 Gravity Design Loads (31 ft)2

It is assumed that the dead load of the roofing
system, including all framing members, mechanical
/')
~"= 6-~
I [8ft × (20 psf + 40 psf)]× 2 +

x '[[8 ft x (20 psf + 20 psf)]× 31 t~ × (31 ft + 312ft)J

l

systems and ceiling, is a uniformly distributed load of 20

psf. The governing roof live load is a 40 psf snow load.
This load is either applied across the entire span, or 20 =ll.1601b
psfis applied on one slope and 40 psfon the other slope. (31 ft) 2
The building is 64 ft wide; the masonry wall
thickness will vary slightly depending on the wall
construction option selected. To determine the loads it is
assumed that the total wall width will be 12 in. This
assumption leaves a net truss clear span of 62 ft. = 13,640lb
The reactions of the fully loaded truss under dead
load and live load are therefore: The exterior trusses and the fwst interior trusses have
a reduced tributary area. Taking into account this
R = [8 ftx (20 psf + 40 psf)]x 62 ft = 14,880 lb
2 reduction, reactions were calculated and are summarized
The reactions of the truss loaded with the unbalanced in MDG Table 17.2.1. This table summarizes all the
snow load are: truss reactions.

17-109
 Chapter 17

Table 17.2.1 Truss Reactions

Reaction (lb)

Tributary Width Unbalanced Snow

Truss (t~) Full Load Minimum Maximum

Typical 8.00 14,880 11,160 13,640

(Dead Load) (4,960) (4,960) (4,960)
Exterior 3.50 6,510 4,880 5,970
(Dead Load) (2,170) (2,170) (2,170)
1st Interior 7.17 13,330 10,000 12,220
(Dead Load) (4,440) (4,440) (4,440)

17,2,3 Lateral Design Loads Since the masonry walls in this example may have a
Both seismic and wind loads must be investigated variety of configurations, a 100 psf average constructed
for lateral loading on the DPC Gymnasium. weight is assumed. It is also assumed that the
gymnasium has no partitions or any other items that add
Seismic Loads to its seismic weight. The walls are assumed pinned at
Using an analysis similar to that described for the the top and bottom; thus, only half o f that weight was
TMS Shopping Center in MDG 17.1.3 the seismic included in the calculation of the seismic forces.
loading for the DPC Gymnasium can be calculated using
the formula The weight of the roof
v=csw = 20 psf × 64 ft × 128 ft = 163,800 lb
where:
The weight o f ½ o f the north or south walls
C~ = 1.2A~ R T ~ < 2.5--~-
128ft
= 100psf×24.67 ft × = 157,9001b
in which 2
T =Crh~" The weight o f ½ of the east or west walls
Cr = 0.02
h, = 26.5 ft
= 1 0 0 p s f × I 2 4 . 6 7 f t + 5.33ft I x 62ft = 84,740 lb
S=2.0 2 2
Av = A~ = 0.09
R = 1¼ unreinforced
R = 3 ½ reinforced W = 163,800 lb + 2 x (157,900 lb + 84,740 lb) = 649,100 lb
[Note that the snow loads on the roof are not included in
For unreinforced system in Seismic Performance the weight calculation to simplify the problem (see
discussion in MDG Section 17.1.3)].
Category A
The total seismic load for unreinforced and
C~ = 1 2 ( ° ° 9 X 2 ° ) = 0.46 < 2.5(0.09) = 0 . 1 8 ~ Controls reinforced wall systems is therefore:
1.25(0.23)~ 1.25 V(unreinforced) = 0.18 × 649,100 lb = 116,800 lb
in each direction
For reinforced system in Seismic Performance Category V(reinforced) = 0.064 x 649,100 lb = 41,500 lb
B
C, = 1"2(°'°9X2"°) = 0.16 < 2.5(0.09) = 0.064<= Controls
3.5(0.23~ 3.5

17-110
Building Design
Wind L o a d s The global distribution of these lateral loads to individual
The same assumptions used for the TMS Shopping masonry walls is discussed in MDG Section 9.2.
Center apply to the DPC Gymnasium.
Wind load in the north and south direction at the 17.2.4 Example Problems - - DPC
roof level (based on tributary area) Gymnasium
To illustrate the application of the Code to typical
= 20 psf x ( ~ - + 5.33 ft) = 353 plf structural design considerations for the single story
masonry structures, 23 example problems are presented
Assuming the east and west walls span from the for the DPC Gynmasium in this MDG Section. A listing
foundations to the roof, the average span of the examples is included in Section 17.2.1 to give the
reader a summary of the design issues addressed by each
(24.67 ft + 30 ft) 27.34 ff
example problem.
2
The material properties typically used in the
Wind load in the east-west direction at the roof level
design examples related to the DPC Gymnasium are:
(20 psf × 27.34 ft) 273 plf
2

Property Concrete Masonry Grout Clay Masonry Grout

Unit Compressive 2000 NA 6600 N/A

Strength, psi
Mortar Type N NA N N/A
f ' , psi; fg, psi 1500 2700 2500 3500
E, psi 1.35x 106 1.35 × 106 1.75x 106 1.75x 106
n 21.5 21.5 16.6 16.6

17-111
 Chapter 17

17-t12
E x a m p l e DPC-1 - - Lateral L o a d Distribution

Determine the lateral load distribution to the walls in the north-south (GrM Lines 1 and 2) and
east-west (GrM Lines A and B) directions considering both earthquake loading and wind loading.
The influence of the pilasters in Wall Construction Option A is neglected

® , 128'

64'

~/EW
®

® @
Lateral Loads on Masonry Walls

Calculations a n d Discussion

Seismic Loads
Using ASCE 7-93, the magnitude of seismic load depends upon whether the wall is unreinforced
(Wall Construction Options A and B) or reinforced (Wall Construction Options C and D) because
of the different R factors.

The seismic load on the DPC Gymnasium has been calculated in MDG Section 17.2.3 and is
equal to 116,800 lb for unreinforced and 41,500 lb for reinforced walls in each direction, applied
horizontally.

The roof diaphragm is considered to be flexible in its own plane. Wall shear is calculated
assuming that the horizontal seismic load in each direction (north-south or east-west) is distributed
equally between the walls oriented parallel to the direction of loading.

Conservatively, the shear acting on each wall can be applied at the level of the roof diaphragm.
More realistically, the seismic loads produced by the acceleration of each wall's mass can be
applied at the wall's centroid, and the roof load can be applied at the level of the roof diaphragm.
For example, east-west seismic loading would apply the following horizontal shear to the walls on
Grid Lines A and B:

0 the product of the roof weight and the seismic coefficient, applied at the roof
diaphragm midheight;
b) the product of each wall's self-weight and the seismic coefficient, applied at each
wall's centroid, and
0 the product of one-half of each north-south wall's self-weight and the seismic
coefficient, transferred at the roof diaphragm mid-height.

17-113
 Chapter 17

The remaining seismic forces from the north-south walls are transferred directly to the
foundations.

Both approaches result in the same wall shear. However, the second approach gives a lower (and
more realistic) overturning moment and a lower shear force to be transferred from the roof
diaphragm to the shear walls.

Under the conservative approach, each wall is subjected to an equal seismic load of:
116,800 lb = 58,400 lb for tmreinforced
V ~ =VN~ - 2
41,500 lb
V~ = V~ = 2 = 20,750 lb for reinforced

This load is assumed to be applied at the average diaphragm height (top of metal deck) of 27.0 ft
on the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2, and at a 24.33 ft height on the walls on Grid Lines A and B.

Using the more realistic approach with the weights of the diaphragm and walls from MDG
Section 17.2.3, the seismic loads based on a C, values of 0.18 and 0.064 for unreinforced and
reinforced systems respectively are:

East- West Direction

VEwvi~p = C~ x
•
-16 , oo1 ~
2
(2)(84,740 lb) 1
= 29,995 lb for unreinforced
= 10,664 lb for reinforced
applied at the diaphragm height of 24.33 ft on the walls on Grid Lines A and B and
Vewva,l =C~ x (157,900 lb) x 2
= 56,844 lb for unreinforced
= 20,211 lb for reinforced

applied at the centroid of the walls on Grid Lines A and B.

North-South Direction
-163,800 lb + ( 2 ) 1 ( 1 5 7 , 9 0 0 lb)]
vN o,op =C, x 2

= 43,164 lb for unreinforced

= 15,347 lb for reinforced
applied at the diaphragm height of 27.0 ft on the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2, and
VN S Wall = C, x (84,740 Ib)
= 15,253 lb for unreinforced
= 5,423 lb for reinforced

applied at the centroid of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2.

17-114
Example DPC-1

Wind Loads

Per ASCE 7-93 the magnitude of wind load does not depend on whether the wall is reinforced.

East-West Direction

As calculated in MDG Section 17.2.3, the tributary areas of the wails on Grid Lines A and B are
equal, and each carries a load of

273 p l f
Vew = 64 ft x = 8,750 lb
2

North-South Direction

The tributary areas of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 are equal, and each carries a load of

353 p l f
VNs = 1 2 8 f t x - - =22,5901b

17-115
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-2 - - Distribution of Gravity Load Moment in Multiwythe Noncomposite

(Cavity) Walls
Determine the distribution of bending moment resulting from gravity loads that act on the block
wythe of a two-wythe brick block noncomposite wall (Wall Construction Option .4) on Grid Lines
A andB.
The following material properties have been assumed for the purpose of the load distribution:

Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry

(Hollow Block)
Unit Strength (psi) 2, 000 6,600
Mortar Type N Type N
f " (psi)By Test 1,500 2,500
E= (psi) 1.35 x 106 1.75 x 106

Calculations and Discussion

24 r -

24 t - -

Joint Reinforcement Roof Truss With Sloped Top

3hord With Continuous 6 x 4 To
Support Roof Deck
Brick
3ontinuous Reinforcement Bond
3earn
Bearing Plate 6 x 12 With Headed
a,nchor Studs
~ilaster Beyond
CMU
3.6
Rigid Insulation

Loads for this wall are taken from the north wall (Grid Line A) of the DPC Gymnasium given in
MDG Section 17.2.2. As the vertical gravity loads act only on the block wythe, the loads will be
resisted entirely by that wythe. At the point of load application, any bending moment caused by
I Code Section the eccentricity of the load with respect to the centroid of the block wythe will be resisted
2.1.3.3.1(o) completely by the block wythe. Away from the point of load application, however, some of this
moment is assumed to be transferred to the brick wythe in proportion to the relative flexural
stiffness of the two wythes.

One can conservatively assume a triangular distribution of gravity load bearing stress on the block
wythe as shown.

17-118
Example DPC-2

e~--
P

%
Z N
Z
The total moment, M, is then equal to load, P, multiplied by the eccentricity, e, where e is
measured from the centroid of the load distribution to the centerline of the block wythe. Thus, the
total moment, M, is given as:
M = Pe
The critical truss reaction is calculated in MDG Section 17.2.2 as 14,880 lb. A bearing plate of
size 6 in. x 12 in. placed one-half in. from the inner face of the block wythe, as shown, yields an
eccentricity, e, of
7.63
in.__ - 0.5 in .- 6 in. I l l = 1.31 in.
e= 2
P

7.63"
4

Therefore, the total moment, M, is given by

M = Pe = (14,880 lb)(1.31 in.) = 19. 5 in. - kips
1,000 lb/kip

17-117
 Chapter 17

Although this may not always be true, the wall ties connecting the two wythes are assumed to
ICodeSection I have sufficient axial stiffness so that the two wythes have equal curvature. This fact leads to the
2.1.3.3.2 relationship that

M Mbt M~,
(EI)rot~t (EI)bt (EI)b,
where
(E I I)b, +(E I)b,
In these equations, the subscripts bl and br correspond to the block and brick wythe, respectively.
CodeReference Assuming only face shell mortar bedding for the block wythe, lbt is given by MDG Appendix A,
1.9.2 [ Table 8, as 364 in.a/ft. The value oflbr = (12)(3.625)3/12 = 47.6 in.a/ft. Using the section and
material properties above, each wythe's share of the total moment acting in the wall can be
computed as follows:

M(E I ),,
Ms, =
(El)To,o,
19. 5 in.- kips [(1.35 x 106 psi)(364 in. 4 ) ]
Mb, =
[ (1.35 x 106 psi) (364 in.a ) ] +[ (1.75 x 106 psi)(47.6 in.2 ) ]

M ~, = 0.85M
or
M = 16.6in.-kips
bl
and

Ms, -

(EZ )Toto,
19.5 in.- kips [(1.75 x 10 6 psi)(47.6 in. 4 ) ]
M br
[ (1.35 x 10 6 p s i ) (363.8 i n : ) ] + [ (1.75 x 10 6 psi)(47.6 in.Z ) ]

Ms, = 0 . 1 5 M
or
M Or
= 2.9 in.- kips

Check:
M bl
+M = 16.6 in. - kips + 2.9 in. - kips = 19. 5 in. - kips
M =19.5 in.- kips

Note: At the application point of the vertical load the block wythe is subjected to a total
moment, due to the eccentricity of the load of 19.5 in.-kips. Accordingly, the block wythe
must be designed for this moment magnitude at that level.

1 7 - 118
Example DPC-3 - - In-Plane Lateral Load Distribution in Multiwythe Noncomposite
(Cavity) Walls
Consider the noncomposite wall on Grid Lines 1 or 2 (Wall Construction Option A) subjected to
in-plane lateral loads. Determine the distribution of in-plane lateral load to the individual
wythes.

Calculations and Discussion

./ Reinforced Bond Beam

• ° ,

Connector

Strap Anchor

// / /

3 63" 3 75" 7 63"

As in MDG Example DPC-1, the roof system is assumed to be flexible in its own plane, and is
Code Section attached only to the block wythe, as shown. Thus, according to the Code, the in-plane lateral load
2.1.3AA(c) is resisted only by the block wythe, and any transfer of loads between the brick and block wythes
is neglected.

17-119
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-4 - - Distribution of Out-of-Plane Lateral Loads in Multiwythe

Noncomposite (Cavity) Walls
Consider the noncomposite wall (Wall Construction Option A) on Grid Lines 1, 2, A, and B. The
wall is subjected to lateral loads shown in the figure. Determine the out-of-plane lateral load
distribution to the brick and block wythes.
~ ~ Roof
Di
aphragm
Reaction
7
20psf

- r

Foundation
Wal React
l ion

Calculations and Discussion

To design wall systems for out-of-plane lateral loads, such as wind and earthquake loads, the
CodeSection Code requires that the load transverse to the plane of the wall be distributed to the individual
2.1.3.3.1(d) ] wythes of the wall system in proportion to their relative flexural stiffnesses. In general, the
stiffness of each wythe is affected by its height and boundary conditions. In this building, the
height and boundary conditions of each wythe of the cavity wall are assumed to be the same.

Def'ming the distributed transverse wind load acting on the wall as equal to a force P per unit area,
the resulting load on each wythe can be obtained from:
P P~, Pb,
(E -- (eI),.
in which the subscripts bl and br refer to the block and brick wythe, respectively. This equation is
valid regardless of the boundary conditions, as long as they are the same for both wythes.
Substituting the previously calculated stiffness values from MDG Example DPC-2 and the design
wind pressure of 20 psf into the above equation yields:
Pb, = P - (E1)~,
- = (20 psi") 0.85 = 17.0 psf

P~r = P (EI),, = (20 psi') 0.15 = 3.0 psf

(EI)~o,o,
Total = 20 psf

17-120
Example DPC-5 - - Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe Brick-Block Noncomposite
(Cavity) Wall for Flexure Only
For the material properties assumed below, design the west wall on Grid Line 1 as an
unreinforced multiwythe brick-block cavity wall, Wall Construction Option A, for flexure only.

Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry

Unit Strength (psi) 2, 000 6, 600

Mortar (PC-L) Type N Type N
f ~, (psi) 1, 500 2, 500
Em (psi) 1.35x 106 1.75x 106
Design Wind Pressure = 20 psf

Calculations and Discussion

The multiwythe wall will be constructed with a concrete block wythe of 8 in. nominal width, a
clay brick of 4 in. nominal width, and a 3 in. cavity. In addition, face shell bedding will be
assumed for the block wythe.

The roof truss and wall arrangement are shown in MDG Fig. 17.2-1. As there is a roof truss
located adjacent and parallel to the wall under consideration, the wall is treated as
nonloadbearing, subjected to wind loads only. Since the cavity is ungrouted, the wall will be
designed for noncomposite action in accordance with Code Section 2.1.3.3.

The dimensions of the wall along with the locations of the movement joints and pilasters are
shown in MDG Fig. 17.2-2 as West Elevation. The expansion joints in the clay brick masonry
and the control joints in the concrete block masonry are assumed to be at the same location. The
two wythes are assumed to be sufficiently well connected with wall ties so that the wind load is
transferred directly from the brick wythe to the block wythe through the wall ties.

The expansion joints in the brick wythe are unable to transfer any shear force. The total wind load
is assumed to be resisted by the concrete block wythe. Control joints, when designed and
constructed properly, have the capability to transfer shear. Considering pilasters to act as
supports, a one foot strip of the wall just above the door spanning horizontally will be designed.

Structurally, this horizontal strip of the wall can be treated as a continuous beam (with hinges)
resting against pilasters. The actual beam structural system along with its division into
subcomponents for analysis purposes are shown in the sketch on the following page.

The moments in Sections A'CC' and C'D', shown in the sketch, can be easily calculated by statics.
The moments in the statically indeterminate Section D'DEB' have been computed by moment
distribution. The maximum moment in these sections is 6,240 in.-lb at support E including the
effect of the hinge at B'. Thus, M = 6,240 in.- lb is utilized for the wall design.

17-121
 Chapter 17

® /22 /-22 ®

1'-4" 1'4"
20 plf

C'~D'

~. A' CC' D'D , E , B'.(E)

F-.-I
1"-4." 13;4" 1"-4"
Allowable Tension Stress
As the tension is parallel to the bed joints in hollow block masonry, the maximum allowable
Co~ction
2.2.3.2 tension from Code Table 2.2.3.2 is 38 psi. This value is increased by 33% due to wind moments
to yield
]
Co~ction
2.1.1.1.3 Fb, = 1.33(38psi) = 50.5 psi
Actual Maximum Tension
From MDG Appendix A, the value of I for an 8 in. nominal thickness concrete hollow block wall
with face shell mortar bedding = 309 in.a/ft. Since the bending stresses are horizontal, the wall
section properties are obtained by a vertical cross-section.
(6,240in.- lb)(7"6~ i n ' )
• f~,(max)-
309in. 4
f~, = 77.0psi > Fb, = 50.5psi • N.G.
The above computations assumed the total wind load is carried by the block wythe. Since it is
found to be deficient, one might examine the wall to span vertically and distribute the wind load
to each wythe based upon their respective flexural stiffness.
The initial design concept used different mortar types in each masonry wythe. This is often the
case since the wythes may be constructed at different times and the exterior brick wythe may use
colored mortar.
However, change concrete block mortar from Type N to Type S.
F =1.33(50 psi)=66.5 psi<fht=77.0 psi • N.G.
Hence, the selected unreinforced multiwythe brick-block noncomposite (cavity) wall with a 4 in.
brick wythe, an 8 in. block wythe, and a 3 in. hollow cavity is unsatisfactory for design in flexure
only. The wall can be modified in several ways to correct this overstress. The brick and block
wythe can be treated as a non-composite systems according to Code Section 2.1.3.3. In this way
the brick wythe shares in resisting lateral load in proportion to its stiffness (See MDG Example
DPC-4). Another solution is to partially grout or fully grout the cavity. Finally, a 10 in. CMU
wythe can be used.

17-122
Example DPC-6 u Design of Pilaster for Flexure
UNREINFORCED PILASTER
The walls (see MDG Section 17.2.1 and MDG Fig. 17.2-1) on Grid Lines I and 2 are to be braced
against lateral loads with pilasters at 1 6 f i centers for Wall Construction Option A. Determine
the size of an unreinforced concrete masonry pilaster that is needed to resist bending resulting
from lateral forces acting on the east or west wall.

Calculations and Discussion

Since the roof tresses run in the north-south direction, the east and west walls are not loadbearing
walls. Pilasters are needed only to resist flexure resulting from lateral wind or earthquake forces
applied to the wall in the east or west direction. The pilaster is considered to be fully grouted in
both the units and the enclosed space to achieve the needed flexural capacity. The 8 in. CMU
wall is considered to be ungrouted with face - shell bedding. Since a control joint is to be placed
immediately north of the column portion, the resulting section contains a flange on one side only,
as shown below. For this noncomposite wall, assume brick is a veneer (nonstructural). The block
wythe is assumed to carry all lateral loading. Preliminary estimates have indicated that a 32 in.
square pilaster is needed to resist flexure under lateral loadings. Alternate coursing is shown
below.
31.630

~ ~ InterioFace
r
Coursing for 32 in. Square Pilaster
The earthquake loading for unreinforced masonry is equal to 0.180 times the weight of the wall
per MDG Section 17.2.3. Considering the weight of the exterior brick wythe with the weight of
the 8 in. CMU wythe gives a total weight equal to 140 psf, or an equivalent static lateral seismic
force equal to 25.2 psf. Per Code Section 2.1.1.2.3.2 the pseudo strength method is used to check
seismic, which involves use of load factors and reduction factor. Converting seismic load of 25.2
psfto equivalent load factor for allowable stress design gives 25.2/(L.F. x d~) = 25.2/(2.5 x 0.8) =
12.6 psf< 20 psfwind. Thus wind controls. Neglect wall weight. In the case of design for shear,
d~=0.6 and the seismic load become 16.8 psf (wind controls). In the case of flexural tension
=0.4 and the seismic load of 25.2 psf> wind, so seismic controls only for flexural tension.
If the wind loading is assumed to be uniformly distributed over the wall, each pilaster is assumed
to resist a 16 ft tributary width, or 320 plf along its height. Assuming pin supports at the top and
at the bottom of the pilaster, the maximum moment required strength at midheight is:

Mwj, d = wh____2_~_ (0.320 klf)(29.3 tt)2 = 34.4 ft- kips

8 8
The moment for flexural tension governed by seismic results in a moment
M,,ismic = (25.2 xl 6)(29.3)2 = 43.3 ft- kips
8

17 - 123
 Chapter 17

Because flexural stresses may be high for the 30 ft tall unreinforced pilaster, the controlling
C o ~ ~ction parameter is likely to be flexural tension normal to bed joints. Allowable code values for Fb, are
2.2.3.2 58 psi and 19 psi for fully grouted and ungrouted construction, respectively, for portland cement
Type N mortar. The actual bending tensile stress in the grouted pilaster (Section A) and the
bending tensile stress in the ungrouted flange portion (Section B, C) will be checked against the
allowable stresses.
Co~caon The effective section of the pilaster is shown below. Because the column portion is fully grouted,
2.1.5.1 all of its area is considered. The overhanging flange portion is taken to be six times the wall
~Co~caon thickness, or 45.78 in. Only the area of the mortared bed joints is considered in the flange,
1.9.4.2 because the wall is ungrouted and face shell bedding is specified.
m

The location of the centroid of the section from the interior face, y , is determined by summing

B"
the first moments of the areas of each segment and dividing by the total area as shown below.

1.25" ~r
I

C G31.!3"

,,,.-1--~ 31.63" /

Item Area Arm Moment

A 31.63 in × 31.63 in = 1,000 × 15.81in. = 15,800
B 1.25 in. × 45.78 in. = 57.2 × 23.00 in. = 1,315
C 1.25 in. × 45.78 in. = 57.2 × 16.63in. = 951
Total 1,114 in.2 18,070 in.3
y = 18,070/1,114=16.22 in.
Effective Section o f Pilaster
The moment of inertia is taken about the centroid as follows:

1 = (31.63 in .)4 ~1,000 in.2 (0.41 in.)2 +57.2 in .2(6.79 in.)2 +57.2 in .2(0.41 in.)2
12
1 =86,220 in.4
The required flexural tension strength, fit, is computed for the case of a earthquake loading acting
on the outer face, or when tension is developed on the interior side of the pilaster.

M~,,,c Y _ (43.3k- ft x 12) (16.22in.) x 1,000 = 97.7 p s i > Fb, = 58(1.33) = 77.1 psi
fb'= 1 86,220 in.4
Changing to a Type S mortar increases Fbt to 68(1.33) = 90.4 psi .'. N.G.

17-124
Example DPC-6

The self weight of the pilaster at midheight creates an axial compressive stress that may be
deducted from the flexural tension stress to determine the net tensile stress. Considering concrete
masonry to weigh 140 per, a height of 29.3 ft would result in a compressive stress at midheight
equal to 14.2 psi. Thus, the net tension on the unreinforced pilaster is 97.7 - 14.2 = 83.5 psi. This
is less than the allowable value of 68(1.33) = 90.4 psi, thus the section is adequate to resist
seismic loading using Type S mortar.

If y were less than half of the pilaster depth, then wind loading should be reversed, and tension
on the exterior side checked.

At (43.3 x 12) (7.41)

= x 1,000 = 44.6 psi > Fbt = 25(1.33) = 33.3 psi
86,220
However, if the tension stress of 44.6 psi is reduced by the self weight stress the design strength is
still less than the required strength.

Shear stress must also be checked using Code Eq. 2-16. Because the pilaster is fairly slender, it is
assumed that shear will not control. All of the shear is conservatively assumed to be resisted by
the column portion. Thus, the maximum shear stress is equal to 1.5 times the average shear stress
across the 32 in. square area. The maximum shear due to wind occurs at the top and the bottom of
the pilaster, and is equal to 20 psfx 16 ft. times half the height of 29 ft-4 in. or 4,693 lb. Per Code
Section 2.1.1.2.3.1 the controlling load combination would not be seismic; but wind.

The required shear strength per MDG Eq. 11.2-1, and Code Section 2.1.1.2.3.1, is then:

l CodeSection f =l.5~V =l.5x

4,693 lb
= 7.0psi
2.2.5.1 ]
v A~ (31.63 in.)2
CodeSection
2.2.5.2 [ Allowable shear stresses are given in the code to be equal to the lesser of:
(a) F =1.5

(b) F~ = 120 psi

(c) Fv =v+O.45"v ; where v = 60 psi for solid grouted masonry in running bond
A,
The allowable stress is increased by 1.33 for wind. No matter what the specified compressive
strength is (i.e., 1,000 psi, 1,500 psi, etc.), the actual shear strength is much less than the allowable
shear stress, and does not control, as was surmised.

17-125
 Chapter 17

REINFORCED PILASTER
The unreinforced pilasters for the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 of the DPC Gymnasium were fllt
to be too expensive because of their 32 in. width and depth. Thus, a reinforced concrete masonry
pilaster is designed for Wall Construction Option A to resist the same loading conditions as
prescribed for the previous example, and costs are compared A minimum compressive strength
will be specified as a result of these calculations.

Calculations and Discussion

As previously noted, the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 are not loadbearing walls. Pilasters are
needed only to resist bending resulting from lateral loads. The Code requires the designer to use
the allowable stress method. The design moment at midheight of a pilaster is half as large as for
the unreinforced case since qb changes from 0.4 to 0.8. Hence the moment, as previously
determined, is controlled by wind and is equal to 34.4 ft-kips. As in the unreinforced pilaster the
block wythe is assumed to carry all the wall loading. Except for the pilasters, the remainder of the
masonry system is to be unreinforced. Consequently, the seismic and wind loading for
unreinforced systems should be used. The wind load of 20 psfcontrols.
Exterior Face "

~i ii .... 7.63"

1_

15.63"

Detail for 16 in. Square Reinforced CMU Pilaster

Preliminary estimates have suggested the use of a 16-in. square pilaster with four vertical
reinforcing bars, as shown above. Only the ceils containing reinforcement are grouted. The 8-in.
CMU wall is ungrouted with face shell mortar bedding.

The controlling parameters are tension of reinforcement, and compression in the masonry due to
bending. Since wind can be applied either as a direct pressure or as a suction, flexural strength
will be provided for bending in either direction.

Code Section As noted in the unreinforced pilaster design, an effective flange width equal to six times the wall
1.9.4.2 thickness can be considered. However, since bending is considered in either direction, the
governing case is when the interior face is in compression. For this case, the width of the
compression zone is the width of the column section (15.63 in.), as shown below. Thus, for this
example it makes no difference what the effective flange width is assumed to be, or whether or not
the wall is grouted.

Reinforcement in the compression zone can be relied on to enhance the compressive resistance of
the masonry, provided it is properly tied. However, the contribution of the compression
I Code Section reinforcement is neglected here since the tensile reinforcement is expected to be light, and large
2.3.2.2

17-126
Example DPC-6

• • J fs/nT=.4,fs
A,

~ "~." •
= 15.63"=1
I TM ~1

Effective Section
compressive resistance should not be needed. Furthermore, it is expected that the compressive
reinforcement will be close to the neutral axis and thus relatively ineffective.

Based on the tension steel controlling, the area of reinforcement required is determined using
MDG Equation Eq. 11.0-15:

As _ M,,_______~_ (34.4 ft- kips x 12) = 1.22 in.2

Co~ction Fs j d ( 2 4 k s i x l . 3 3 ) ( 0 . 9 x l l . 8 1 i n . )
2.3.2.1~
The value o f j is assumed as 0.9, and the allowable tensile stress is increased by a factor of 1.33
[
Co~ction
2.1.1.1.3
since wind is the source of the stress. The steel requirement can be satisfied with two No. 8 bars
(As = 1.58 in.2). The gravity stress due to the self-weight of the wall at midheight (12 psi) would
slightly reduce the required area of tensile reinforcement, and can conservatively be neglected. If
considered, one would probably use two No. 7 bars (As = 1.20 in.2).

ForAs equal to 1.58 in.2, p becomes 0.00856 using the section dimensions for b and d as shown in
the figure. The modular ratio, n, is 21.5 if Em is assumed to be 1,350 ksi (considering an
approximate unit strength equal to 1,900 psi based on net area). The term k can then be found
I Code Section using MDG Eq. 11.0-13 to be equal to 0.40. The termj is then equal to 0.87 per MDG Eq. 11.3-4.
1.8.2.2.1
Therefore, the assumption o f j = 0.9 was in error. Recalculating As using j=0.87 results in
As=l.29 in2. Two #7 bars is still appropriate and no revision in np is necessary. Compressive
stress on the interior face,3~, is then determined using MDG Eq. 11.0-14.
2Mwmd = 2(34.4 ft- kips x 12,000)
L = jkbd 2 (0.87)(0.40)(15.63 in.)(11.81in.)2 - 1,090 psi

Code Section Equating this compressive stress with the allowable value of 0.33 f',, x 1.33 results in a required
2.3.3.2.2 prism compressive strength equal to 2,228 psi. Selectf'm =2400 psi which results in Em- 2160
ksi, n=13.4, np---0.1149, k=0.378,j=0.885 and3~=l146 psi. A s f ' ~ is increased, the requiredf'm
also increases because E~ changes. A value off'm of 3000 psi results in3~=1234 psi which is just
below the corresponding allowable value of (4/3)(f'm/3)= 1333 psi. A contractor can comply with
this requirement by using the unit strength method (Specification Article 1.4B.2) or the prism test
method (Specification Article 1.4B.3). In either case, the block strength will need to considerably
exceed the minimum ASTM C 90 strength of 1,900 psi (based on net area). In projects where
high CMU strength is required, it must be so specified on project drawings and specifications.

Also; tensile stress in the reinforcement can be checked with the allowable value:

M 34.4 ft- kips(12,000) = 25,400 psi < 32,000

f " = Asjd - 1.58 in.: (0.87)(11.81 in.)

17-127
 Chapter 17
Since more steel was provided than required (1.58 in.2 vs. 1.24 in.2) it is no surprise that the stress,
Code Section I f,, is less than the allowable. Shear stress is determined using Code Eq.(2-19) of the Code. The
2.3.5.2.1
applied shear force of 4,690 lb with b,j, and d as defined previously gives a shear stress equal to
Code Section I 29 psi, less than the allowable value of 50 psi according to Code Eq.(2-20).
2.3.5.2.2

In summary, the size of the pilaster can be reduced by half if four No. 8 bars are run vertically
down the cells of the units. The steel area could also be reduced by specifying that the bars be
placed against the face shells, assuming adequate coverage. It is likely that the costs of the four
reinforcing bars will be less than the added cost of construction of a 32 in. pilaster. Since the
vertical reinforcing bars are not relied upon to resist compression, lateral ties are not required.
However, a nominal amount of ties will be specified to enhance overall integrity.

#3 ties@ 24"

I~ 15.63" ~1 T
I" "1
Pilaster Cross Section

17-128
Example DPC-7 ~ Design of Unreinforced Multiwythe Noncomposite Masonry Wall
Design the North Wall (Grid Line ./1) using Wall Construction Option A. Assume the wall spans
horizontally between pilasters (at 16"0" on center) to resist out-of-plane wind load. The wall and
its pilasters span vertically to resist eccentric bearing load from roof trusses. Wall Construction
Option A consists of a 4 in. nominal brick wythe, 8 in. nominal block, 3 in. nominal cavity.
) or~)

Concrete Mason~
Type N, PC-L Mortar
24'- 0" Unit Strength = 2000psi

Jo,otRe,ofor~ement__~l~r~xl\X~ \A
f - = 1,5OOpsi
Em = 1.35 x 106psi
2
/X/
II~[ ~ X I X \\ //
.oof T~ss W.h S.o~d "ro.
Chord With Continuous6 x 4 To Clay Masonry
IIL~"--B \1 ' XV Support RoofDeck
BAck~ II1~ ~ 'Ix X ./" Type N, PC-L Mortar
IlK] ~ I\ /~" Continuous Reinforcement Bond
"/1 I1[~ ~] \ k . \ / "~ Beam Unit Strength = 6. 6 ksi
;"'~. II~J
: ~ ~JIk']
~
~
"~ ~w'k \
~ ~
Beadng Plate 6 x 12 With Headed
Anchor Studs
f " = 2500psi
L~LI~V Em= 1.75x 106psi
3.63~ 3.75. L~_.. 7.63. CMU Wind Load = 20 p s f
Rigid Insulation

Calculations and Discussion

CodeSection Since the roof truss acts only on the block wythe, the block wythe must resist all of its axial effect.
2.1.3.3.1(b) I However both wythes may resist weak axis bending from the eccentric application of gravity
load.

The load from a typical roof truss bearing on the wall is shown below:

r
12" longbearingplate

45 o
ICodeSection /
2.1.7.1 [ / \
~_~Width of beating = 12" + 4t
= 12" + 4(7.63") = 42.5"

For simplicity in this example, the distributing effect of the bond beam (see MDG Example TMS-
18) is neglected. Although the trusses are 8 ft. apart, only 42.5 in. of the wall is effective in
resisting the gravity load from each truss. From structural analysis in MDG Section 17.2.2, the
42.5 in. or 3.54 ft length of wall resists these loads:

17-129
 Chapter 17

PD = 4,960 lb PD+L = 14,900 lb

PD = 4960 lb = 1,400 plf 14,9001b
- - PD +L= - 4209 plf
3.54 ft. 3.54ff.

The bearing plate is 1/2 in. from the interior face. Assuming that only inner wythe resists the
eccentric gravity load (more conservative than Code Section 2.1.3.3.1 (b)), the gravity load
moment can be computed.

-I

t 1in. 6 in.
= 1.31 in. (Assumes triangular distribution of bearing stress
e"=eL=2 2 3
- -

immediately under the bearing plate.)

M o = P~ e~ = (1,400 plf)(1.31 in.) = 1,840 in- lb/ft, Mo+~ = 5,520 in. - lb/ft

Check Euler Buckling (Code Eqs. 2-11 and 2-15), assuming that only the CMU wythe resists the
bending due to eccentric gravity.

I CodeEq. 2-15 Pe =
"-'F
h2 1-0.577 where r is based on average net cross-sectional properties.

For hollow CMU, using the actual r is unconservative, because the equation for Pe was
developed based on a solid section. (See Code commentary 2.2.3.1). Therefore, the solid
cross-section r is used herein. From MDG Table 7, Appendix A

1=309 in4/ft (face shell bedding)

r=2.20 in. (solid)

Pe= zc2(1"35x 106 psi)(309 in. 4)

1
0.577 x 1.31 in..
( 2 4 t t x 12 in./ft) 2 /1 2.20 in.

Pe = 14,040 plf
Note that if r =2.69 (for hollow CMU) was used instead of r =2.20 (for solid cross-section), Pe
e=2.69)= 18,465 plf> Pe (,.~2.2o)= 14,040 plf
Since the capacity of a hollow wall should not be greater than that of a solid wall, it is prudent to
use r =2.20.

17-130
Example DPC-7

IcodeEq.2-n I P = 4,209 plf> 1/4 Pe = 3,510 plf • NG

The Euler buckling capacity is exceeded• Therefore, one of the following options must be
pursued:
1) Increase thickness of CMU wythe
2) Increasef'm ofCMU wythe
3) Increase length of truss bearing plate
4) Reinforce the CMU

For this example, we will choose to pursue option 3. The required length of bearing plate is:

[12 -~.
in.]I14,9001b
j~.~)- / 4(7.63) = 20.4in.

Design of the bearing plate (or grillage beam) is not within the scope of this MDG. Resulting
effective width of truss bearing = 20.4 in. + 4 (7.63) = 50.92 in. or 4.24 ft.

Check allowable axial stress.

CodeEq. 2-12 [ 24 ft.(12inA )

h~r= 3.21 " = 89.7 < 99

I h )2]
F. = 1~4 f" 1-I1--~-r I I 24(12)12}
= l~4(1500psi 1-[_140--0-~.21)1 = 221psi
The hollow section r, for face shell mortar bedding is used in this equation.

I Code q 2-14 I fa_ 4209plf =140psi<Fo=221psi • OK

12(2)(1.25)

Check combined stresses

5520 in. - lb/ft
fb = 4.24ft.(81 in. 3 fit) = 16.1psi

CodeEq. 2-14 I 1~3 f" = 1~3 (1500psi) = 500psi

f~ fb 140 16.1
CodeEq. 2-I0 ] t- = -~- ~ = 0.63 + 0.03 = 0.66 < 1.0 • OK
F a F b 221 500

CodeSection Note: The above calculations did not rely on the exterior wythe of brick to share in resisting the
2.1.3.3.1(b) I out-of-plane bending resulting from the eccentricity of gravity loads. If the interior CMU
wythe had not had adequate capacity, the moment could have been resisted by both
wythes in proportion to their relative stiffnesses.

17 - 131
 Chapter 17

Wind Condition
With pilasters at 16 ft centers, the wind can be resisted by the cavity wall spanning horizontally
between pilasters. Per Code Section 2.1.3.3. l(d) the load is distributed between wythes according
to their relative stiffness.

For the brick wythe, E1 = (1.75 x 10 3 ksi)(12 in.)(3.63 in.)3/12 = 83,700 in.2-kips
block wythe, EI= (1.35 x 103 ksi)(309 in.4) = 417,150 in.2-kips

Brick carries 83,700 kip- in.Z = 0.17 or 17% of the wind

83,700 kip- in.2 + 417,15 0 kip- in .2
Block carries 83% of wind

Calculate stresses using moment coefficient, M = wlc]`o"

11
This value is used for those horizontal span areas between pilasters without control joints. For
spans containing control joints the designer would need to modify the moment value.
For Block Wythe,
M = 0.83(20 psf)(16 ft- 1 ft) 2 = 340 ft- lb/ft
11
M 340 ft- lb x 12in./ft
fb~ . . . . 50.3 psi
S 81in. 3
Table 2.2.3.2
Allowable stress for ungrouted CMU parallel to bed joint
Fbt=38psix 1.33 =51 psi>50.3 psi .'. OK
Code Section
2.1.1.1.3 For Brick Wythe,
M = (0.17/0.83)340 ft-lb = 70 ft-lb

M 70 ft- lb x 12 in.fit
fbt- S 12in.(3.63in.)2/6 32psi
[~ble2.2.3.2 Allowable stress Fbt = 60 psi x 1.33 > 32 psi " OK

Note: These walls must be tied in accordance with Code Section 2.1.3.3.2 in order to ensure
out-of-plane load transfer across the cavity. See MDG Example DPC-9.

17 - 132
Example DPC-8 - - Pilaster Subjected to Flexure and Axial Load
UNREINFORCED PILASTER
Design the pilasters on the north and south walls on Grid Lines A and B, respectively, for Wall
Construction Option A. The brick veneer lateral load resistance is assumed negligible.
Determine the minimum size of an unreinforced pilaster, and the minimum specified compressive
strength. Assume Type N PC-L Mortar.

Calculations and Discussion

Alternate roof trusses are supported by each pilaster. Vertical reactions are applied to the pilasters
through 6 in. x 12 in. bearing plates that are located 1/2 in. from inside edge of pilaster. From
MDG Section 9.1.2 truss reactions are 4,960 lb for roof dead load and 9,920 lb for roof snow load.
The governing lateral load from MDG Example DPC-6 is seismic (25.2 psf) which produces a
moment at midheight equal to 29.1 kip-ft for a 24 ft-0 in. high pilaster.

A 32 in. square pilaster, which was the size determined for pilasters on the east and west walls,
will be checked. The proposed section is shown below. The 8 in. CMU walls are ungrouted with
face shell bedding of mortar, and the 32 in. pilaster is fully grouted.

--- . ;.-..-.:. : ..... ,

Centroid (34 l ~ 1~
Vertical Load ~, o~-. -. . . . ~" " •

Interior Face
dl------ 6t = 45.78" t ~v pL 31,63" "t" 6t = 45.78" -

Proposed Pilaster
Section properties for the proposed section are as determined in MDG Example DPC-6 with the
exception that flanges will be on both sides of the web since there are no control joints. The
centroid of the section is 15.06 in. from the exterior face and 16.57 in. from the interior face. The
area of the section is 1,230 in.2 and the moment of inertia is 88,700 in.n.

The centroid of the truss reaction is assumed to occur at one-third of the 6 in. plate width, or 2-1/2
in. from the interior face of the pilaster. This results in an eccentricity of the vertical load equal to
14.07 in. Because the location is outside of the kern, tensile stresses will result from the eccentric
vertical force and the governing load combination is not obvious.

Actual flexural tensile stress must be checked against the allowable of 58 psi for fully grouted
Code Section
2.2.3.2 sections and 19 psi for ungrouted sections (Code Table 2.2.3.2).

Fb, = 58 (1.33) = 77 psi grouted

= 19 (1.33) = 25 psi tmgrouted

1 7 - 133 (
 Chapter 17

Code Section Combined axial and flexural compressive stresses are checked using the unity equation (MDG Eq.
2.2.3.1 12.3-3). The allowable axial compressive stress is obtained using MDG Eq. 12.3-4 noting that
h/r - 24 ft(12 in.fit) = 33.9 where r = - 8.5 in.
8.5 in. -~ 1,230
Code Section
2.2.3.1(a) F =(1/4)f" I1-(33"9~ 2]=0.235f'
° L \140) .J "

The value of r, (8.50 in.) used in MDG Eq. 12.3-3 is the square root of the ratio of I (88,700 in.a)
Code Section over A (1,230 in.z) for the proposed pilaster section shown previously. The allowable bending
2.2.3.1(c)
stress is 0 . 3 3 f ' .
Three loading cases are considered: (a) roof dead plus roof snow, (b) roof dead plus seismic, and
(c) roof dead plus roof snow plus seismic. For case (a) the Code uses the allowable stress method.
For Cases (b) and (c) Code Section 2.1.1.2 uses a pseudo strength method.
Case "a" Roof Dead Load Plus Roof Snow Load
Net Flexural Tension Stress at Top - Exterior Face o f Grouted Section
M = Pe = (14,880 lb) (14.07 in .) _ 209 in. - kips
1,000
f~, = M (15.06 in.) = (209 in.- kips) (15.06 in.) (1,000) = 35.5 psi
I,e, 88,700 in .4
f = PD + Ps = 14,8801b -14.9psi
° A,,t 31.6 in. x 31.6 in.
fb, - f ° = 35.5 psi -14.9 psi = 20.6 psi < Fb, = 58 psi OK

Check ungrouted flange

At = (209 in.- kip)(7.06 in.)(1,000 lb/kip)

- 1 6 . 6 p s i < 19psi " OK
88,700 in. 4
Compressive Stress at Top - Interior Face
f~ = M (16.57 in.) _ (209 in.- kips) (16.57 in.) (1,000 lb/kip) -. 39.0 psi
I,,, 88,700 in.4

f ° +--f~ =1.0= 14.9 ~ 39.0 =1.0 f' =180 psi

Fo F~ 0.235 f " 0.333 f " "'°~"
Case "bl" Roof Dead Load Plus Seismic Load
Per ASCE 7-93 the load combination is 0.9D + 1.0E
Net Flexural Tension Stress at Midheight - Exterior Face o f Grouted Portion

M ~,~,o= 29.1 ft. - kips = 349 in. - kips

e / 2 = ( O . 9 x 4,960 lb) (14"0-7 in'~ 1 - 3 1 . 4 in.-kips
1,000 lb/kip
Total Moment = 380.4 in. - kips

17 - 134
 Example DPC-8

= M (15.06 in.) = (380.4 in.- kips) (15.06 in.) (1,000 lb/kip) = 64.7 psi
f bt
I.~, 88,700 in .4

0.9P 0.9×4,960 lb (0.9)(140 pcf) ( - ~ - 3

+0.9f~ L ~-
f" = A , 1,O00in. 2 144in.2/ft 2
CoaeSeaion [ f = 4.5 psi + 10.5 psi = 15.0 psi
2.1.1.2.3.2and
2.1.1.2.3.3(o) f b-fo = 64.7psi-15psi
= 49.7 psi <Fb, = 58.0psi xl.33 x 2.5 x 0.4 = 77 psi • OK

Check ungrouted flange

fb, = bending tension - wall weight (see Appendix A)

380.4in.-kip(7.06in.)(10001b/kip) (0"9)(46"5)(24/22)
fbt = 88,700in .4 2( 1.25)(12)
fbt =13.6psi < Fbt = 1 9 ( 1 . 3 3 ) = 2 5 p s i " OK

C a s e "b2" - R o o f D e a d L o a d P l u s W i n d L o a d
In MDG Example DPC-6 wind was determined to control instead of seismic for all cases except
flexural tension. The resulting moment at wall midheight is (20/25.2)(349 k-in.) = 277 k-in. and
the total moment is 308.4 k-in.

Compressive Stress at Midheight - Interior Face

f~ _ M (16.6 in.) _ (308.4 in.- kips) (16.6 in.) x 1,000 lb/kip _ 57.7 psi
I,,, 88,700 in .4
f f
° + --=1.33
F a
F~
15.0/0.9 57.7
-+ - 1.33; f'm(required) = 184 psi
0.235f" 0.333f"

Case "c1" - Roof Dead Load Plus Roof Snow Load Plus Seismic
Net Flexural Tension Stress at Midheight - Exterior Face of Grouted Section
Per ASCE 7-93 the load combination is 1.2D + 1.0E + 0.2S
( 1 . 2 p D + 0.2 p~)e/2 = [(1.2)(4,960)+ (0.2)(9,920)]/14"27 i n . ) = 5 6 i n . - k i p s

Mro,at = M sei~,ic + ( P o + P s ) e/2

CodeSection [ M,o,o, = 349 in. - kips + 56 in. - kips = 405 in. - kips
2.1.1.2.3.2and
2.1.1.2.3.3(O)
fb, - M (15.06 in.) _ (405 in.- kips) (15.06 in.) x 1,000 lb/kip = 68.8 psi
I,e, 88,700 in .4

17 - 135
 Chapter 17

f , = 1"2p~ + 0 " 2 p s ÷fDL = 7.9 psi + 1 4 . 0 psi = 2 1 . 9 p s i

Ariel
f~, - f o =68.8 psi - 21.9 psi
= 46.9 psi < Fbt =58.0 psi x 1.33 x 2.5 x 0.4 = 77 psi " OK

Check ungrouted flange

j~ = 32.3 psi - 22.3 psi = 11.0 psi < 25 psi x 2.5 x 0.4 = 25 psi (allowable) :. OK

Case "c=" - Roof Dead Load Plus Roof Snow Load Plus Wind
Compression Stress at Midheight- Interior Face is governed by wind. For the loading
combination D + S + W
M= 14'880(14"07) + 20(16)242(12) = 3 8 1 k - i n .
2x1000 8x1000
14,880 140(12)
fo = - - ~- - =26.5
1000 144
f b _ M (16.6 in.) _ (381 i n . - kips) (16.6 in.)(1000 lb/kip) = 70.9 psi
I,°, 88,700in. 4

fo + fb =1.33
F° Fb
26.5 + 70.9
-1.33; f " q=,,~ = 245 psi
0.235 f " 0.333 f "

SUMMARY
Net Flexural
Tensile Stress
Case Condition fbt -- f~
v ,--fo Fb, f %trequired

(psi) (psi) (psi)

a D +S 20.6 77.1 0.27 180
b] 0.9D + 1.0E 49.7 77.1 0.64 -
bE D + W - - 184
Cl 1.2D+0.2S+1.0E 46.9 77.1 0.61 -
C2 D+S+W 245

dead load with Thus, the critical loading case for flexural tension is the combined effects o f 0.9
times the seismic loading. Case "a" does not control because the truss reaction results in an
eccentric-load moment that is relatively small when compared to the seismic load moment of the
other two cases. Flexural tensile stresses are quite close for Cases "b" and "c", and it is not
obvious which case should control. Flexural compression is controlled by combined roof dead
and snow with wind at wall midheight.

17-136
Example DPC-8

Thus, a 32 in. pilaster is needed to resist flexural tension stress, and a minimum prism strength
equal to 245 psi is necessary to resist combined axial and flexural compressive stresses. Note that
compression capacity does not govern the design of the pilaster sincef ~, for minimum strength
ASTM C 90 block and Type N mortar is approximately 1,350 psi, from Specification Table 2.

Because flexural tensile stresses are not very close to allowable values, it is likely that a smaller
section will work. A quick check using a 24 in. square section shows a net flexural tensile stress
exceeding the allowable for Case "b". Therefore, the 32 in. pilaster as designed will be used.

Shear is checked by adding the seismic shear force (4,860 lb) with a shear due to the eccentric
CodeSection load. The eccentric gravity moment is equal to 14,880 lb times 14.07 in. When divided by the
2.2.5 [ pilaster height of 24.0 ft, the shear force due to the eccentric gravity load is 727 lb. Thus the total
design shear is 5,585 lb. Shear stress is checked in the same manner as in MDG Example DPC-6.
The applied shear stress is 8.4 psi which is much smaller than any of the allowable values per
Code Section 2.2.5.

REINFORCED PILASTER
The 32 in. width of the unreinforced concrete masonry pilasters for the north and south walls
(Grid Lines A and 13) (with Wall Construction Option .4) was felt to be excessive. It is of interest
to examine the feasibility of reinforcing the pilaster. The adequacy of an assumed 16-in. pilaster
is checked, and the necessary amount of vertical steel and the required prism strength are
determined
Extedor Face

• • . , , • .

8,00"

Interior Face ~r YL

6t = 45.8" wI I~ 6t = 45.8"

Assumed Configuration for 16 in. Square Reinforced Pilaster

Fb = 500 psi f ~ = 1,500 psi
Concrete BlockASTMC 90 E,, = 1.35 x 106 psi
n = 21.5 Type NMortar

Calculations and Discussion

Truss reactions are 4,960 lb for roof dead load and 9,920 lb for roof snow load. Although the
pilaster is reinforced, the wall system is unreinforced. Thus, one should design the pilasters for
the load distribution based on an unreinforced system. The governing lateral

17- 137
 Chapter 17

load, per MDG Example DPC-6, is wind (20 psf) which produces a moment at midheight of the
pilaster equal to 23.0 kip-ft (276 kip-in.), as computed previously. The governing lateral load is
discussed in Ex. DPC-6 for both the unreinforced and the reinforced pilaster.

The 16-in. section used for the pilasters in nonloadbearing walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 (see MDG
Example DPC-6) will be checked for combined effects of axial load and moment for the
loadbearing walls on Grid Lines A and B. As for the east and west pilasters, only those cells
containing reinforcement are grouted. Control joints are assumed absent at the design section.
The 8in. CMU wall is considered to be ungrouted with face shell mortar bedding. The 6 in. x 12
in. bearing plate for the roof truss is assumed to be located 0.5 in. from the interior face of the
pilaster. If a triangular distribution of bearing pressure is assumed, the centroid of the vertical
truss reactions is 2.5 in. from the interior face.

Because the web portion is narrower than the effective flange width, the critical case for
compression stress under wind loading is when wind acts as a suction, resulting in compression on
the interior face. This condition is true even when the depth of the effective flange is limited to
the thickness of the face shell as is for this case of an ungrouted wall. This sense of wind moment
is the same as the sense of the eccentric load moment, and should therefore control for all cases of
web compressive stress. Since vertical reinforcement is assumed to be symmetrical about the
column portion, the case of wind suction should also govern for design of reinforcement.

The three loading cases considered here are: (a) roof dead load plus roof snow load; (b) roof dead
load plus wind; and (c) roof dead load plus roof snow load plus wind. Case "a" should govern at
the top of the pilaster if the eccentric vertical load is much larger than the wind load moment for
cases "b" and "c". Case "b" should result in the minimum axial force, and thus the lowest flexural
strength, but the applied moment will not be a minimum. Case "c" should result in the largest
moment, but the axial force (and thus the flexural strength) will not be a minimum.

The assumed 16-in. section is checked using load-moment interaction diagrams for a rectangular
section with two layers of reinforcement (see MDG Section 12.1.2). Because only a portion of
the web is considered to be in compression, the rest of the T-section is assumed to be cracked, and
thus ineffective. Flexural tension is assumed only for the two vertical reinforcing bars. The
overhanging flanges are neglected entirely. The first step is to select an interaction diagram based
on the ratio of the distance between rebars to the overall thickness, g. If it is assumed that the bar
will have 3 in. of cover (distance from edge to centroid of bar), the g value is (15.63 in. - 2 x 3.00
in.)/15.63 in. = 0.62. Interaction diagrams for a g value of 0.6 will be used (MDG Fig. 12.1-4 and
12.1-8).

Any number of design solutions are possible because there are three variables: the section size, the
masonry strength, and the amount of vertical reinforcement. Because the section size must be in
increments of the block size, it will be f'Lxedfirst at 16 in. Prism strength also is restricted within a
narrow range if standard strength units are to be used. Therefore, the amount of reinforcement
will be used as the primary variable for each of the three loading cases. The case resulting in the
most required reinforcement will be the one that governs.

17- 138
 Example DPC-8

Reinforcement requirements are determined as indicated in the following table for each of the
three loading cases. The total axial compressive load is listed as well as the maximum bending
moment for each case. The effective eccentricity is simply the total bending moment divided by
the total axial load. By dividing it by the thickness (15.63 in.), the eccentricity can be used with
the normalized axial load P/Fb bt, as an alternative to moment for locating points on the
interaction diagram. Combinations of axial load and eccentricity are plotted on the interaction
diagram to identify the required percentage of reinforcement, p. For cases of light axial loads,
required amounts of reinforcement must be checked with respect to curves based on allowable
compressive stress (expressed in terms of On) as well as with respect to curves based on allowable
reinforcement tensile stress (expressed in terms of oFgFb).

Based on compression controlling, the maximum value of on is 0.25, which results in a p value
equal to 0.0116 (Case c) f o r f ' = 1 5 0 0 psi. Based on tension controlling, the maximum value of
pFs/Fh is equal to 0.27 (Case b) which results in a p value equal to 0.0056 for Fs = 24 ksi x
ksi x 1.33 = 32 ksi. Compression governs, and the required total amount of reinforcement is
equal to 0.0116 times b and t, or 2.84 in. 2 . This can be satisfied with four No. 8 bars (As =
3.16 in.Z).

Specification Because the anchorage Of a No. 9 bar in an 8 in. CMU may be difficult, it is of interest to see
Article 1.4 B.2 ] what reductions in steel area are possible if the masonry compressive strength is increased. A
prism strength of 2,500 psi will be tried. Since this will require a unit strength in excess of the
Specification
Article 1.4B.3 I minimum set forth by ASTM C 90, the higher prism strength must be specified on project
drawings and in job specifications. A contractor may be able to attain such a strength
according to the unit strength method using 4,000 psi units and Type N mortar (see
CodeSection Specification Table 2). Such a strength may be verified using the prism test method. The
1.8.2.2 assumed modulus of elasticity, Em is 2.25 x 1 0 6 psi according to Code. This gives a modular
ratio, n, equal to 12.9.

With the masonry strength increased to 2,500 psi, the required amount of reinforcement is
controlled by tension. For compression controlling, the maximum value of pn is 0.07 which
results in a p value equal to 0.0054 (Case c). For tension controlling, the maximum value of
pFs/Fb is equal to 0.15 (Case b) which results in a p value equal to 0.0052. The required total
amount of reinforcement is equal to 0.0054 times b and t, or 1.32 in. 2 . This can be satisfied
with four No. 6 bars (As = 1.76 in.2).

In summary, the theoretical required area of reinforcement is 2.84 in.2 withf'm equal to 1,500
psi, and 1.32 in. 2 with f'm equal to 2,500 psi. With the stronger masonry, the controlling
concern is allowable reinforcement tensile stress rather than allowable masonry compressive
stress. Roof dead load plus wind required slightly more reinforcement than roof dead plus roof
snow plus wind. This was because the eccentricity of the vertical truss reaction was relatively
small. Added vertical forces tended to increase the flexural strength more than the applied
bending moment.

17-139
 Table I Design of Reinforced Pilaster Using Load-Moment Interaction Diagram
f ~,=1,500 psi f ~n=2,500 psi

e
M e e~ P P~
Case Condition Po* Pwi Ptotat Mtota= e= t (np)m'd /Fb)req'd " -Fbbt
- " Fbbt2 (np)~'d !,. / FbJmq, d
|
..x P Pbbt Fbbt2
g (kips) (kips) (kips) (kips-in.)
a D+S 14.9 - 14.9 79:~ (5n3) 0.34 0.122 0.04 <0.02 0 0.073 0.025 <0.02 0

b D+W 4.96 2.85 7.8 2899 37.1 2.37 0.048 0.114 0.20 0.27 0.029 0.068 0.058 0.15

c D+S+W 14.9 2.85 17.75 3169 17.8 1.14 0.109 0.125 0.25 0.24 0.065 0.075 0.070 0.14

*Po = Gravity load from supported members

*Pw = Gravity wall weight at midheight
*M=Poe
§M= Poe/2 + Mwir~l

0
=1"
W
'U
m
111
Example DPC-8

The final design is then:

ExteriorFace ' ~ / 4 - #6 3.0" Typ

÷
1'
7.63"

i
* * .

"1 , "°
_
.

•
.

.
.

•
I" *
f
8.00"

InteriorFace
J < 15.63" ~1
'~ ~ #2 at 12"

Type N M o r t a r

Code Section The No. 2 ties at 12 in. spacing are nominal transverse reinforcement. The ties are used to
2.1.4.6 support the vertical reinforcement. Note that the ties should bend around the vertical
reinforcement rather than being sized to fit within the face shell. This is preferred for lateral
support of the vertical bars.

This design is similar to that for the east and west walls (Grid Lines 1 and 2) of the Gymnasium
which were the same size but reinforced with four No. 8 bars. The design requirements are less
for the north and south pilasters because of their shorter height (24 ft - 0 in. rather than 29 ft-4
in.), and the axial compressive force which increased their flexural capacity. The fact that a
control joint cut off one flange of the east and west pilasters was of little concern since the
tensile area of the flange was neglected for the reinforced sections.

As was seen with the east and west pilasters, the addition of four reinforcing bars to the already
grouted section can result in a required reduction of 50% in the required dimensions of the
pilasters.

The column interaction diagrams in the MDG (Fig. 12.1-3 through 12.1-8) are based on lateral
ties provided in accordance with Code Section 2.1.4.6. However, ties are not required for
pilasters if the allowable compressive stress in the compression steel is taken as zero. Since
axial loads are small, design for bending moment only and use the calculated area of tension
reinforcing in both faces to account for moment reversals. The final result using this approach
(see MDG Example DPC-6 reinforced portion for details) is Pt = 0.0068 or a total reinforcing
area of 1.66 in2. Although this is larger than the area of 1.32 in. 2 using the diagrams, the same
area of reinforcing would be selected (4 - #6), and lateral ties would not be required.

17 - 141
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-9 n Design of Wall Ties in an Unreinforced Multi wythe Noncomposite

(Cavity) Masonry Wall
Wall ties are to be provided between the two wythes for Wall Construction Option A. The ties will
transfer out-of-plane loads between the two wythes.

Calculations and Discussion

Co~ctions I
2.1.3.3.2and r i rF 1
2.1.3.2.5

7 24" "1

Wythes of multiwythe walls must be connected by wall ties with wire size W1.7 or
W2.8. Cross wires of joint reinforcement are permitted to be used for this purpose.
Sheet metal ties are not permitted. If W1.7 wire is used, the maximum tributary area of
wall per tie is 2-2/3 ft2. If W2.8 wire is used, the maximum tributary area of wall per
tie is 4-1/2 ft2.

Spec. Articles Choose W2.8 wall ties meeting ASTM A 82, with hot-dipped galvanizing meeting
2.4.D.4 and ASTM A 153 Class B2 (1.50 oz/ft2). Wire ties must be embedded at least 1.5 in. in
2.4.F.1.b mortar beds of solid or solidly grouted masonry units. Wall tie ends must be
Spec. Article embedded at least 1/2 in. into the outer face shell of hollow masonry units. Mortar
3.4D.1 cover of 1/2 in. at interior faces and 5/8 in. at exterior faces should be provided.

]Co~ctio~
2.1.3.3.2and
2.1.3.2.5
I Spacing requirements: Minimum of one wall tie per 4.5 ~ of wall; maximum
spacing 36 in. horizontally and 24 in. vertically.

Select W2.8 ties at 24 in. each direction (actual tributary area = 4.0 f-t2 per tie).

See MDG Table 3.5.2 for wire sizes.

17-142
Example DPC-IO - - Design of Shear Wall-Floor Connection for Unreinforced Multiwythe
Noncomposite (Cavity) Wall
The connection to be designed is between the wall on Grid I or 2 and the foundation or floor slab.
For purposes of this calculation, no dowels will be assumed between the floor and the wall. The
connection will be designed for the in-plane seismic shear carried by the wall as a vertical
diaphragm, and for the out-of-plane shear due to seismic loads. Assume Wall Construction
Option A.

Calculations and Discussion

Design of this connection for in-plane

shear is very similar to that of MDG
Example DPC-20, with one exception: in
½ Shear Is Transferred On
Inside Face Shell Only
this example, shear is assumed to be
transferred only on the inner face shell
Flashing of the inner wythe. The reason for this is
that the flashing acts as a bond breaker
through the entire bottom bed joint of
.o '. the outer wythe, and through the outer
face shell of the first bed joint up from
the bottom in the inner wythe.

Design for In-Plane Shear

Seismic shear governs over wind for wall construction Option A. The design values for seismic
shear are 43.2 kips applied at the average diaphragm height of 27.0 ft. plus 15.3 kips acting at the
wall centroid, per MDG Example DPC-1. The pseudo strength method of Code Section 2.1.1.2.3
will be used for design.

That shear will be carried by the interface between the wall and the foundation. Allowable stress,
F~ is the least of:

Code Section
2.2.5.2 or
120 psi
or

CA.)

17 - 143
 Chapter 17

The last of these requirements will govem and can be evaluated using a wall weight of 37 psf (See
Appendix A) and the least height of 24.67 ft,

ins ,2x i0"9)3 = 049"3

Fv = 37 + 0"45(37 x p24"67

Note that the area of both face shells was used in the calculation.
I CodeSection The allowable stress can be increased by 1/3 for load combinations involving wind and seismic
2.1.1.1.3 [ stresses.
CodeSection Nominal strength equals 2.5 times the allowable stress.
2.1.1.2.3.2 I
Code Section Design strength equals 0.6 times the nominal strength
2.1.1.2.3.3 I = 49.3(2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 98.4 psi

Using an 8 in. wall with face-sheU bedding, the available area on the inside face shell only of the
wall on Grid 2 is:
(64 ft) x (12 in.fit) x (1 face) x (1.25 in.) = 960 in. 2

CodeSection Per Code, the required strength must be less than or equal to the design strength.
2.1.1.2.3 I The required shear strength for a rectangular cross section is

CodeEq. 2-16 [ fv -- -VQ

-
lb
_ 1.5 V
A
Thereforef~ = 1.5 x (43,200 lb + 15,300 lb / 960 in.2) = 91.4 psi
f~ = 91.4 psi < 98 psi, thus no dowels are required at the wall on Grid 2.

Now check the wall on Grid 1.

The available face shell area for this wall is:
(34 ft. + 18 ft.) x (12 in./ft.) x (1 face) x (1.25 in.) = 780 in. 2

fv = 1.5 V = 1.5 (43,200 lb+ 15,300 lb)+ 780in 2 = 112.5 psi

A
fv = 112.5psi > 98psi

Therefore, face shell mortar bedding is not adequate to resist the required shear. Options are to
provide reinforcing dowels or grout the bottom two courses of CMU solid.

Try grouting. For allowable shear, 1.5 f a ~ = 58.1psiwill govern 0 r '~,=1,500 psi per MDG
Section 17.2.4).

Design Strength = 58.1psi (2.5) (0.6) (1.33) = 115.9 psi

Since 115.9 psi > 112.5 psi, dowels are not required if the bottom 2 courses of CMU are grouted
solid.

17-144
Example DPC-IO

Design for Out-of-Plane Shear

The critical point on these walls for out-of-plane seismic force is at the peak of the roof, where the
walls are 30 ft high. Wind shear governs over seismic for wall construction Option A (see MDG
Example DPC-6). The wind loading is 20 psf. Assuming the wall to be simply supported
between the foundation and the roof diaphragm, the maximum base shear per foot of wall length
is therefore

V = (30ft) x (20psf) = 3 0 0 p l f
2

Again assuming that only the inner face shell of the inner wythe is effective in resisting shear, the
available cross-sectional area per foot of wall length is therefore

(12 i n . ) x (1.25 in.) = 15.0 in. 2

The corresponding required stress strength is

fv =1.5 V = 1.5 x 300 lb _ 30 psi

A 15 in .2

The Code does not specifically provide allowable shear stress for out-of-plane forces. However
the Code Commentary recommends using the Code Section 2.2.5.2 values for both in-plane and
out-of-plane shear.

Ignoring dead load, Fv = 37 psi x 1.33 = 49.2 > 30 psi =f,

Thus the design is acceptable without dowels.

17-145
 C h a p t e r 17

Example DPC-11 Roof Diaphragm Connection to Nonloadbearing Shear Wall

Design a connection between the roof diaphragm and a nonloadbearing shear wall for Wall
Construction Option A--Noncomposite Multiwythe Wall.

Calculations and Discussion

Roofing

1/8" Plate ~ i ~ ~

I
Steel Joint ~

This detail concerns the wall of MDG Example DPC-3. The bent plate is very similar to that of
MDG Example TMS-26. Design calculations are also similar.

17- 146
Example DPC-12 w Design of a Steel Lintel
Consider the 8 f l wide masonry opening on the south wall on Grid Line B. Design a steel lintel to
support the masonry in Wall Construction Option A, unreinforced brick and block cavity wall.

f" (brick) = 2,500 p s i ; f " (block) = 1,500 psi; A-36 structural steel

Calculations and Discussion

Truss TrussBearing

.............
~
~--~ . . . . . . . . . "7---'~. . . . .
x 12"BearingPlate) 8"
"t---~ -~ . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ControlJoint ': ': ~ ~ ':. i: CMU I

Arid Bri~k i i J ~ I i i C.IMU I I ......

1 l : l /

_)
i 11
: i', i i', 8'-0"
ii! :i

3'-0" ~ ~/ ' 8'-0" \' ~ 3-0

1'-0" '~ / 16'-0" \ r. 1'-0"

Partial Elevation

. Loading conditions and geometry

The truss bearing length is 12 in., and the maximum width of the load distribution is 42.5 in.,
or 3.54 ft. (see MDG Example DPC-7). The truss reaction becomes a distributed load well
above the apex o f a potential triangular arch above the lintel, as shown in the above sketch.
The location of control and expansion joints at both ends o f the lintel, as shown above and in
MDG Fig. 17.2-2, prevents any possible arching action, since vertical and in-plane horizontal
forces cannot be transferred across those joints. The lintel must therefore be designed to
support the weight o f all the masonry above, as well as the truss gravity load reaction.

For lateral loads, the masonry will span horizontally to the pilasters, since out-of-plane shear
can be transferred across properly detailed control joints. (For instance, see the first detail in
MDG Fig. 10.4-2). Brick expansion joints do not transfer shear forces across the joint.
However, the horizontal joint reinforcement continuously ties the brick to the CMU and
therefore transfers the lateral loads to the CMU wythe. The only lateral load acting on the
lintel, therefore, is the wind pressure on the doors.

17 - 147
 Chapter 17

. Loads - From figure at right 15"

Brick weight: I- r I- rj~

e~ ~1

p, = 40 psf (16.7 ft) = 667plf

CMU weight:
P~ - Brick Weight
P2 = 46.5 psf (16.7 ft) = 777 plf
e2 = c~rt~ weight
(140 pcf density, MDG Appendix A Table 6) Pa "Truss P~aetion

Lintel self-weight:
Assume 40 plf

Truss reaction (D+L):

l.g" [ : 7,2"
(MDG Table 17.2.1) Brick ~ ~ c~go
14,880 lb ~ 9"
P3 - 3.54 ft = 4,203 plf

Assume 6 in. bearing length each end.

Vertical Loading
/)3 = 4,203 plf

Self w~ ight = 40 plf

ill
ill I I i I Pl = 667 pit"

/)2 = 7 7 7 p l f
T

13,750 lb 13,750 lb

2Ag' .... 3.54' L 2.48 r

,2 8.5 ' Center To Center Of Bearing

M = 38.5 ft-kips

Lateral loading E I1
8 (1,000 Ib/kip)
072kips
NOTE: The lateral loading may be neglected, since it is so small and a 1/3 stress
increase is permitted when it is included.

17 - 148
Example DPC-12

. Select lintel based on flexural stresses

A structural steel shape is required, due to the magnitude of the vertical load moment. It is
desirable to select a steel section depth that will match the masonry coursing, so that masonry
units need not be cut to fit around the lintel. A bottom plate is also required, both structurally
to support the two wythes which are separated by the nominal 3 in. (actual 3.75 in.) cavity,
and architecturally to provide a seamless surface against which to install the door frame. If
this opening is designated an egress opening most model codes will require that the
supporting structural member be fire protected.

Select a W8 x 24 with bottom plate 5/16 in. x 14 in.

Since the lintel is supporting all of the masonry above, and the masonry has joints at each end
of the lintel, the lintel is not laterally supported by the masonry. Steel lintel allowable stresses
are therefore based on an unsupported length of 8.5 ft. Stress in the composite steel section is
less than the allowable per AISC (Ref. 11.3.20).

. Check deflection
For a total moment = 38.5 ft-kips, the equivalent uniform load w is

8M 8(38.5 ft- kips) 4.26 klf

l2 (8.5 ft )2
For uniform loading, deflection is
5 w l 4 _ 5(4.26 klf)(8.5 ft)4 (1,728 in .3/ ft 3)
m - - - = 0.14 in.
384 E I 384(29,000 ksi)(129 in.4)
where 1= lw = + 171
The maximum allowable deflection in unreinforced masonry is

CodeSection l
1.i0.1 - - - _ < 0 . 3 - in.
Ao,,o~ 600

m
8.5 ft(12 in.fit) = 0.17 in. < 0.3 in.
allow
600
A ....., = 0.14 in. < A o,,o~= 0.17 in. • OK

. Check shear and torsion - refer to figure on page 17-136

Combined direct shear and torsional shear were computed to be less than the allowable
permitted by AISC.

. Check bearing
Check web crippling per Chapter K.1.3 the AISC Manual o f Steel Construction, 9th edition,
1989. No bearing stiffeners are required.

I CodeSection Check masonry bearing stresses. Per MDG Example DPC-5, the b r i c k f ',, = 2,500 psi; and
2.1.7.3 the C M U f " = 1,500 psi.
The allowable bearing stress Fbr = 0.25f'm
Therefore, the allowable brick bearing is
0.25(2,500 psi) = 625 psi
and the allowable CMU bearing is
0.25(1,500 psi) = 375 psi

17-149
 C h a p t e r 17

Under full dead and live load, the centroid of the end reaction is located at
8.5 ft[(667 plf)(1.8in.) + 777 plf(11.2 in .) + 40 plf(9 in.)] + 3.54 ft(4,203 plf)(11.2in .)
2(13,750 lb)
253,900 in.- lb
- 9.23 in. from brick outside face
27,5001b
_ 3.63" 3.75" 7.63" ~l

I- -t- 7- -I

13,750 Ib

i_ 9.23" - I- 5.7 7"

_1

The centroid of the masonry bearing area is (assuming CMU is grouted solid at the lintel
bearing)
(0.5)(3.63 in.)2 + 7.63 in.[3.63 in. + 3.75 in. + 0.5(7.63 in.)]
3.63 in. + 7.63 in.
91.9 in.
- - - - 8.17 in. from brick outside face
ll.3in.
The moment of inertia of the bearing area is
6 in.(15 in.) 3 6 in.(3.75 in.) 3
1~ - 12 12
- 6 in.(3.75 in.)[8.17 in. - 3.63 in.- 0.5(3.75 in.) ]2
18 = 1,687.5 i n : - 26.4 in. 4 - 160.4 i n : = 1,500 in. 4

The bearing area section moduli are

= 1,500 in .4
- 1'500in'4 = 1 8 4 i n ) S~c~ (15in.-8.17in.) =220in)
S,b,,o~ 8.17 in.

The maximum CMU bearing pressure is

13,750 lb 13,750 lb(9.23 in.- 8.17 in.) = 204 psi + 79 psi = 283 psi
fbr - 11.25 in.(6 in.) -F 184 in.3

f~, = 283 psi < Fb, = 375 psi " OK

However, the CMU must be grouted solid at the lintel bearing.

NOTE: By inspection, bearing stresses for the dead load only case will not govern since the
overall reaction is lower. Also, the eccentricity of the reaction will result in higher
compression in the higher strength material, the brick, rather than the CMU.

17-150
Example DPC-12

. Weld o f t h e plate to t h e W b e a m
Since this section was designed assuming composite action of the plate and W beam, they
must be welded together to resist the shear flow between them.

OKto use 1/4 in. fillet weld, E 70 electrode, 2-1/2 in. long at 12 in. on center each side.

. Check shoring
Since the lintel is designed to support all loads above it, no shoring of the lintel during
masonry construction is required per (MDG Ref. 11.3.19).

. Other c o n s i d e r a t i o n s
a) An open cavity, properly detailed flashings, and adequate weep holes are essential for the
weather (water) resistance of cavity walls. See the MDG Sections 6.2.1 and 6.2.6 for
further discussion.

b) The designer may consider placing insulation in the cavity or in the CMU cells for
thermal control of the building interior.

c) Moisture and thermal movement of the exterior masonry walls has been accommodated
by the locations of expansion and control joints, illustrated in MDG Fig. 17.2-2. See
MDG Chapter 10 for discussion.

d) The severity of the climate is the basis for determining the level of corrosion protection
that should be provided for the steel lintel. In an area of 40 psf design snow load,
galvanizing is recommended. See MDG Section 3.5.6 for further discussion.

e) Masonry anchors are required to tie the CMU to the steel lintel. Select triangular wire
ties and weld on rods at 24 in. on center, placed into fully mortared head joints. The brick
is tied to the CMU by the joint reinforcement.

f) The designer also should consider checking the deflection of the plate supporting the
brick.

The f'mal lintel design is shown below.

Horizontal Joint Reinforcement

~4 ~ , 2 . 5 -12

Masonry Anchors Located

in CMU Head Joints

Steel Lintel: WSx24 Plus Plate 5/16'k 1-1/2"

0.5" ~-~l-- 8.~' _15.5" _,~o.~" NOTE: Items Such As Flashing, Weeps, And
15" -'-r Insulation Are Not Shown For Clarity

1 7 - 151
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-13 n Shear Stress Distribution in the Collar Joint of a Multiwythe

Composite Wall Due to Out-of-Plane Wind Load
Determine the maximum shear stress in the collar joint of the multiwythe composite masonry wall
on Grid Line I or 2 using Wall Construction Option B, due to the out-of-plane wind loads.

The following material properties are used in the analysis.

Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry Grout

(Hollow)
Unit Strength (psi) 2, 000 6, 600 -
Mortar Type N Type N -
f m or fg (psi) 1,500 2,500 3,500
Em or Eg(psi) 1.35x 106 1.75x 10 6 1.75x 106

4" Brick Wythe

2"
/
Grouted Collar Joint
/ 8" BlockWythe

~ ~ 30'max.
20 psf ~

/" ., ~ rl ~ - P I I I I ~
. . .
t ; '1' r[
,~r I
-, • " I

Calculations and Discussion

The wind load for the wall was given previously in MDG Section 17.2 as 20 psf. The highest
point of the wall, which has a height of 30 ft, is utilized to compute the maximum interface shear
stress in the collar joint. This shear stress due to out-of-plane loads is computed after the cross-
CodeSection section of the composite wall has been transformed into one material. The standard shear stress
1.9.1.2 I
formula of the Code, Eq. 2-16, is modified to take into account the existence of more than one
material in the cross section as
f _ VQ
I~b~

17 - 152
Example DPC-13

The location of the neutral axis and the magnitude of the moment of inertia of the composite
section are calculated as follows:

According to the Code, in walls designed for composite action, the shear stress shall be computed
using section properties based on the minimum transformed net cross-sectional area of the
Code Section
1.9.1.2 composite wall. The generally accepted transformed area concept for elastic analysis, in which
areas of dissimilar materials are transformed according to their relative moduli, applies.

Using the material properties of various components given above, a one ft width of wall can be
transformed to an equivalent concrete block by multiplying the brick and grout widths by the
modular ratio of Econck)/Ecolo~k
). In the 12" width of wall, the brick is transformed to 1.75/1.35 x 12"
= 15.6" width. The grout is transformed similarly. The location of the neutral axis from the
centroid of the block is calculated by taking the first moment of area about the block centroid as:
FromMDGAppendixA
12" . A-30.0ila2
Iffi309in4

T
,,3; /
/ - - GroutedCollarJoiat

Block FaceShell ~-~

) ..® ~..~ L. _L

B r i c k 3 ~
112=15.6"

Calculated from the centroid of the CMU

- ~ First moment o f area
x=
Areas
x = (7"6~in" + 2 ~ 1 ( 2 i n . x 15.6in.)+ (7"63in" + 2in.-~ 3"63in')(3.63in. x 15.6in.)

2in. x 15.6in. + 3.63 in. x 15.6in. + 30.0in.2

- 582in 3
x= ~ " = 4.9 in. from the block centroid
118in. 2
• I,r = 309in 4 + 30.0in 2(4.9in.) 2 ~ 15"6in'(2in')3
• " 12
+2in.(15.6in.)(4.9 7.63in.2 2 izn2' ) q 15"6in'(3"63in')3
12
-7.63in. 3.63in.
+ 3.63in.(15.6in.) F2in. 4.9in.12
2 2
I = 1,509 in.4 for a 12 in. wide strip

17-153
 Chapter 17

The value of the shear stress is critical at either the block-collar joint interface or brick-collar joint
interface depending upon where the value of the first moment of area Q is larger. The value of Q
at these interfaces is computed from the transformed area as follows:

Qbt = 30.0 in .2 X 4.9 in. = 147 in.3

Qb,=(15.6in.x3.63in.)x . - +2in.-t 3.632 in_________~.

4.9. in.)

Qbr = 155 in. 3

Therefore, Qb, = 155 in.3 ~ GOVERNS

max shear V - ' (2 0 p l f " )3{0 f t )~-=300 lb

2
The maximum shear stress at the brick-collar joint interface is given by:
_ VQ _ (300 lb)(155 in.3) = 2.57 psi
CodeSections I fv I,,b----~, (1,509in.n)(12in.)
2.1.3.2.2(b) This value is less than (1.33)(10) = 13.3 psi .'.OK
and2.1.1.1.3

17 - 154
Example DPC-14 u Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe Composite Wall for Flexure
Only
Given the following material properties, design the unreinforced multiwythe composite brick and
block wall (Wall Construction Option B) on Gridline 2, as given in MDG Section 1Z2. The
design is to consider out-of-plane flexure only. The wall consists o f a 4 in. nominal face brick
exterior wythe, a 3 in. grouted collar joint and an interior C M U wythe. Material properties are
assumed as follows:
Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry Grout
(Hollow)
Unit Strength 2, 000 6, 600 N.A.
(psi)
Mortar (PC-L) Type N Type N N.A.
f'~ orfg (psi) 1,500 2,500 2, 700
Em or Eg (psi) 1.35 x 106 1.75 x I0 e 1.35 x 106)

Calculations and Discussion

In this design, the wall contains no pilasters and is considered to span vertically between
fotmdation wall and roof diaphragm. Although expansion/control joints are present in this design,
they do not affect the wall's flexural capacity, since the joints are parallel to the direction of span.
Lateral wind load from MDG Section 17.2 is 20 psf. The seismic loading from ASCE 7-93 is:
F. =
Av = 0.09
Cc = 0.9
P = 1.5
Wc = 40 psf (brick) +35 psf (grout)+ 85 psf (50% grouted CMU) = 160 psf
Fp = (0.09)(0.9)(1.5)(160) = 19.4 psf
This load would be used in the pseudo strength method of Code Section 2.1.1.2.3. According to
the ASCE load combination, the loads would be increased by 1.2. The allowable stresses would
be increased by 2.5 and reduced by a ~b factor of 0.8. The result is that wind is the governing
lateral load for design.

The critical one foot wide section is taken at the center of the wall (see MDG Fig. 17.2-1) and is
considered to be pinned at the top and bottom. The maximum moment at midspan, due to wind, is
given by
M - wl2 - (20 psf)( 12 in./ft)(29.3 ft )2 _ 25,800 in. - lb/ft o f wall length
8 8
and the maximum reaction at the supports equals
R - (20 psf)(29.3 ft) = 293 lb
2
The west wall is parallel to the roof trusses and does not resist any gravity loads other than its own
weight. In this design, the wall is considered as a simple flexural element

17-155
 Chapter 17

and the minimal amount of axial compression due to self-weight is neglected. The allowable
compressive stress in unreinforced masonry is much greater than the allowable tensile stress; thus,
for wall systems in simple flexure, the allowable flexural tensile stress is the critical design
parameter. For composite wall designs, the shear stress at the masonry wythe-collar joint
Code Section interface must be checked to ensure that its value does not exceed the Code-allowable of 10 psi
2.1.3.2.2 ('o) for grouted collar joints.

In walls designed for composite action, the stresses are computed using section properties based
Code Section on the minimum transformed net cross-sectional area of the composite member. The generally
1.9.1.2 accepted transformed area concept for elastic analysis, in which area of dissimilar materials are
transformed in accordance with their relative elastic moduli ratios, applies.

For this design example, try a multiwythe composite wall composed of a 4 in. face brick wythe, a
3 in. grouted collar joint, and a 12 in. concrete block wythe in which 50% of the cells are grouted.
The distance of the neutral axis from the center of block is found by equating the first moment of
the transformed areas about the partially grouted CMU centroid as follows:

-E L-.. IT' ~1
V" "fl
1.s,, !i~'~i~i:~~~ ~] A

10.5"
11.63"

Grouted Collar Joint

Ct~y ~ c k

Transformed Area for Composite Wall

Grout and brick areas are transformed by multiplying each material's width by the respective
modular ratio n. For example, modular ratio = E(brick)/E(CMU)= 1.75/1.35=1.30.

17 - 1 5 6
Example DPC-14

The transformed brick width is 1.30(12 in./ft) = 15.6 in. Per NCMA TEK 141A The transformed
brick width is 1.30(12 in.fit) = 15.6 in. Per NCMA TEK 141A (1984), a 12 in. hollow block with
50% of the cells grouted has a net area of 90.2 in.2/ff and Ix of 1,265 in.a/ft. Using these values and
the dimensions of the transformed section shown previously, the centroid distance Y from the
centroid of the CMU is given by

I12.0 i n . x 3 i n . x ( 14"63 i n ' l ] + I15.6 in.x 3.63 i n . x ( 11"63 in.+3.632 in. ~-3 in./l

90.2 in. 2 +(12.0 in.x3 in.) + (15.6 in.x3.63 in.)

263 in .3+ 602 in .3 865 in .3

- - - 4.7 in. below C. G. of block wythe
90.2 in.2+36.0+56.6 in. 2 183 in. 2

" Itr =1265 in. 4 +90.2 in.2 (4.7 in.)2+12.0 in.x(3 in.)3/12
(14.63 in. )2
+12.0 in.x3 in.x 4.7 in. +15.6 in.x(3.63 in.) 3/12

+ 15.6x 3.63 in.x (10.63 i n . - 4 . 7 in.) 2

ltr = 1265 in. 4 +1993 in.4+ 27 in.4+ 246 in.4+ 62 in.4+ 1991 in.4= 5,584 in.4/ft

The distances of the extreme fibers from the neutral axis of concrete block and clay brick
composite can be calculated as 10.5 and 7.75 in., respectively. The maximum tensile stresses
normal to bed joints in concrete block and clay brick masonry, assuming equal values for wind
compression and suction, can be computed as follows.

For concrete block:

Mc (25,800 in.- lb)(10.5 in.) = 48.5 psi
At - - - - - - 5,584 in 4
ltr

For clay brick:

Mc 1.75 (25,800 in. - lb)(7.75 in .) = 46.4 psi
At =H 1.35 5,584 in. 4
fir
ICodeTable The maximum allowable flexural tension for solid clay brick masonry and 50% grouted concrete
2.2.3.2 [ block masonry (by interpolation) are taken from Code Table 2.2.3.2 for tension normal to the bed
CodeSection joints. These values are increased by 33% for wind to yield the following allowable tension
2.1.1.1.3 I stresses:

17-157
 Chapter 17
For concrete block:
Fbt =1.33(58 psi+192 p s i ) =51"2 p s i > 48.5 psi = fbt

For clay brick:

Fbt = 1.33(30 psi) = 40psi < 46.4psi " N.G. changed to Type S Mortar
Fbt = 1.33(40 psi) = 53.2psi > 46.4psi " OK

As these maximum allowable tension magnitudes are larger than actual tension, design is safe for
flexure.

Shear Stress at Collar Joint Interface

For the composite action to be considered, the Code limits the shear stress at the wythe - collar
I
Co~ction
2.1.3.2.2~ joint interfaces to 10 psi for grouted collar joints. A one-third stress increase is allowed because
of wind loading. The shear stress is computed by the formula, Code Eq. 2-16,
I
Co~ction
2.2.5.1

/b
where the standard meanings apply to the symbols used. The critical section is at the block -
collar joint interface. Using the figure shown earlier in this example,

f 3.632 in..)
O = 15.6 in. x3.63 in.x ~11.63 in.-10.5 in.+3 in.q
\
-]-12 in.x3 in'x/11"63 in'-~3
1 in" 2 -4"7 in°
Q = 336 in.3 + 94 in.3 = 430 in .3

The maximum shear force in the wall occurs at the supports where it is equal to the reaction force
of 293 lb calculated previously. Hence the shear stress is:

VQ 1.75 293 lbx430 in)

• fv~gl = 2.4 psi < = 10 psix 1.33 = 13 psi • OK
/b 1.35 5,584 in.4xl2 in.

Since the brick and block wythes are not bonded by headers, minimum wall ties must be provided
Code Section I[ per Code requirements.
2.1.3.2.I

17-158
Example DPC-15- Design of Unreinforced Composite Masonry Wall
Design the north wall on Grid Line A as an unreinforced composite wall (Wall Construction
Option B) using 4 in. nominal face brick and concrete masonry units.
Try 12 in. CMU wall, ungrouted
2 in. grout, fg = 3, 500 psi
Other properties same as Option A.
From Code Section 1.8
Eg = 500fg = 1.75x lOa psi
Ebtock = 1.35X 10 6 psi
Ebrtck = 1.75 x 106 psi
6" X 12" truss bearing plate
3.63" 2" 11,63"

Wall Section

Calculations and Discussion

~ Transforming grout to block

Brick Grout

-y-t/2 CMU 1.75 X 10 6 psi (12 in.) = 15.6 in.

bg = 1.35 x 10 6 psi
Transforming the brick to block
n bb = 1.75 x 106 psi ( 1 2 i n . ) = 15.6in"
15.6 12"
1.35 x 1 0 6 psi
5 y = distance from block centroid to composite
section centroid
Transformed Section

Y = ~, A y _ 6.81 in. (2 in.) (15.6 in.) + 9.62 in. (15.6 in.) (3.63 in.) = 6.1 in.
Y,A 36in. z + 15.6 in. x 2 in. + 15.6 in. x 3.63 in.

I = 9 2 9 in. 4 +36 in. 2 (6.1 in.)2 + 15.6 in.(2 in.) 3 ~ (2 in.)(15.6 in.)(0.7 in.) 2
12
15.6 in.(3.63 in.) 3
+ ÷(15.6 in.)(3.63 in.)(3.5 in.) 2
12
I =929 + 1340 + 10 + 15 + 62 + 674 = 3,050 in. 4
I 3050 in. 4
Sm~ = t 6.1 in.+5.81 in.-- 256 in. 3
y+-
2
in. 4 S _ 256 in. 3 _ 2.1 in.
3,050
r = l ~ 1 - ~ i - ~ .2 - 4 . 9 6 i n . e ~ = A 124in. 2

This value of r is calculated from the minimum cross section, not the average, and hence is
approximate.

17 - 159
 C h a p t e r 17

Flexure and Axial Load

Check D + L + W condition first," assume triangular stress distribution under bearing plate
t 11.63in.
e o=e =y-'--+4in.=6.1in. +4in.=4.28in.
2 2
14,900 lb
PD+Lisspread°verl2+4t=81in"P°÷~ ( 81in. ~ = 2 , 2 0 0 p l f MDG Table 17.2.1

~,12 i n . / f t J
Pe
M=

Moment Diagrams M = 2,200 lb x 4.28 in. ~ 20 psf(24 ft) 2 x12 in.

2 8
= 4,708+ 17,280 = 22,000in. - lb/ft

Self weight of wall at midheight based on wall weight of (40 psf brick +25 psf grout +64 psf
CMU) = 129 psf = 1,550 lb
M 22,000 in. - lb
e. . . . 5.9 in.
P 2,200 lb + 1,550 lb
Checking the Unity Equation in the nondimensionalized form ofMDG Eq. 12.2-5.

h / r - 24 ft x 1 2 i n ' / f t - 58.1, R = I - (14__~) 2 = 1 - 24(12) ]2 =0.83

4.96 in. 140(4.96)

P<Af" R - 124in. 2 (1,500 psi)0.83 x 1.33 - 14,040 plf

4 + 3R e_ 4 + 3 (0.83) 5.9 in_____:.
e, 2.1 in.
Maximum applied load at midheight is 2,200 plf+ 1,550 plf= 3,750 plf< 14,040 plf

Check Euler Buckling

h2 1 - 0.577
I Code Eq. 2-15 I pe _ ~2 (1.35 x 103 ksi)(3,050 in.4) [ 4.28in.13
(24 ft x 12 in./ft)2 1 - 0 . 5 7 7 4.96in.J
Pe = 62.0 kips
The values used for I and r are approximate.
(Using gravity load eccentricity only, as explained in MDG Section 12.2.1.2)
[ Code Eq. 2-11
[ P = 3.75 kips < 1/4 Pe = 15.5 kips, • OK
Note that this value of 1/4 Pe exceeds all axial load combinations. Hence Euler
conditions are satisfied with this trial section for all loadings.

17-160
E x a m p l e DPC-15

Check D + W,, M D G Table 17.2.1

4,960 lb
P~ - !( 81in..'~ - 735 plf plus 1,550 plf self weight at midheight
/
t,12in.lftJ
p~, = 2,285 plf
735 lb (4.28 in.)
M - 2 + M , = 18,850 i n . - lb

18,850in.- lb
e= = 8.25 in.
735 lb + 1,550 lb

Using the Unity Equation as presented in MDG Eq. 12.2-5.

P = 2,285 lb < 124 i n ) (1,500 psi) 0.83(1.33) - 14,900 lb .'. OK
I - 8.25
4 + 3 (0.83) - -
2.1 in.
in.

Euler Buckling Equation

Pe = 62.0 kips since eccentricity is the same as loading case D + L.

Check Flexural Tension

S
This condition need be checked only ife > ek. In this case, e = 8.25 in. and eL = -A
-=2.1in. The

allowable flexural stress is Fbl = 19 psi using the lower value for hollow units (Code Table
2.2.3.2). From MDG Eq. 12.2-8 or MDG Fig. 12.2-7,

p < AFb, _ (124 in.2)(19 psi)(1.33) = 1,070 plf

e 8.25 in.
---1 1
ek 2.1 in.

Since the applied axial load (2,285 lb) is greater than 1,070 lb, flexural tension requirements are
not satisfied.

If the concrete masonry is solidly grouted, the allowable flexural tensile stress increases from 19
psi to 58 psi. The section properties of the wall change as a result, but all of the previous
calculations for the ungrouted wall are found to be within code allowables when the wall is solidly
grouted. Use solidly grouted CMU in the wall.

Note: As discussed in MDG Chapter 9, it is possible that a composite brick-block wall may
experience delamination at the collar joint, due to shear from differential movement, in-plane
loads, and out-of-plane loads. The calculations of this example are valid only if such
delamination does not occur.

Shear Load
Check the interface shear. The building is in Seismic Performance Category A.

Per MDG Chapter 17 Section 17.2.3, wind shear force at the top to the wall is 353 plf of wall
length.

17- 161
 Chapter 17

The seismic shear force at the bottom of the wall is

116,800 lb
= 487 plf of wall length
2(128 ft - 8 ft)

[2.1.1.2.3
Co~ctio. Although masonry is designed to resist wind forces by the working stress method, it is designed to
resist seismic forced by a pseudo-ultimate strength method.

To determine whether wind or seismic forces will govern the interface shear design of this wall,
modify the seismic force as follows and compare it to the wind force.

Load Factor
VE (ultimate)x (Nominal Strength F actorXStrength Reduction Factor) = VE(working)

Co~ctions The load factor is 1.0 per ASCE 7-93, the nominal strength factor is 2.5 and the strength reduction
2.1.1.2.3.2and factor is 0.6 for shear.
2.1.1.2.3.3
1.0
487 x = 325 plf
(2.5)(0.6)
Because Vg (working) = 325 plfis less than Vw = 353 plf, wind design governs.

The calculated shear stress is:

Co~ction vQ
2.2.5.1 I L= Ib
Q = statical moment of area outside interface in question.

In this problem two interfaces exist: (1) between CMU and collar joint grout and (2) between
brick and collar joint grout. Both calculations will be shown (for QI and Q2 respectively). The
transformed section is recalculated for a solid grouted CMU. y = 3.32" and 1 = 5,814 in 4
Qi =140 in.2 (3.32 in.) = 465 in.3
Q2 = 15.6(3.63)(6.3) = 357 in. 3

(353 lb)(465 in.3 )

f~ (5,814 in.4)(12 in.) 2.4 psi between C M U and collar joint g r o u t ~ G O V E R N S

(353 lb)(357 in.3) = 1.4 psi between brick and collar joint grout
f~2 (5,814 in.4)(15.6 in.)
•" fvl controls

Allowable interface shear = Fv = 10 psi (1.33) = 13.3 psi

Thusf~ < F, • OK

Co~ctions I Note: Filled collar joint must be crossed by wall ties.

2.1.3.2.1and
2.1.3.2.5

17 - 162
Example DPC-16 ---Shear Wall Design
Design the East Wall on Grid Line 2 for Seismic Performance Category .4. The East Wall is
subject to a seismic in-plane shear load o f 58,400 lbs and wind in-plane shear load o f 22,600 lbs
from MDG Section 17.2.3. Use Wall Construction Option B, unreinforced composite wall.

fg = 3, 500 psi
o
Eg = 1.75x 106 psi
EBtock = 1.35 x 1 0 6 psi
E,,~, = 1.75 x 106 psi
(f ~bto~k = 1,500 psi
e i
(f "m)b,ck = 2,500 psi
The concrete block wythe is

i ungrouted.

3.6Y~ 2" 7.63" ._~ ""

Calculations and Discussion

24.67 ft + 30 ft
Average Wall Height = - 27.3 ft
2
Wall Weight = Concrete Masonry + Clay Masonry + Grout

Wall W e i g h t = 40 psf + 37 psf + 23 psf = 100 psf

Code Section
2.1.1.2.3 [ Although masonry is designed to resist wind forces by the working stress method, it is designed to
resist seismic forces by a pseudo-ultimate strength method. To determine whether wind or
seismic forces will govern this shear wall design, modify the seismic force as follows and
compare it to the wind force.
Load Factor
Ve (ultimate) x (Nominal Strength FactorXStrength Reduction Factor) = V~ (working)

Co~ctio~ I The Load factor is 1.0 per ASCE 7-93, the nominal strength factor is 2.5 and the strength
2.1.1.2.3.2and reduction factor d?is 0.6 for shear.
2.1.1.2.3.3
1.0
58,400 lb x = 39,000 lb
(2.5)(0.6)

Because 39,000 lb is greater than wind load = 22,600 lb, seismic loading will govern the design of
this shear wall.

17-163
 Chapter 17

. Cheek to see ifwaU is subjected to in-plane flexural tension

Overturning Moment = 58.4 kips (27.3 ft) = 1600 ft-kips = 19,200 in.-kips
For nonloadbearing wall, P is due only to the dead weight of the wall
P = (100 psf)(24.67 ft) = 2,470 plf (using conservative minimum height)
I CodeSection The contribution of the wall flanges will be neglected in this problem. Transform a 12 in.
1.9.1.2 wall length to equivalent concrete masonry:

I_ _l 12 .63'' _[
v l / i- rj
~ ( E" q(2.0)=(l'75](2.0)=2.59"
t.E~,) k].35)

(~) (3"63)= 4'Tr't,1,35J

~1"75](3"63)=
Actual Section Transformed Section

Compute stresses on transformed section

Axial Stress:
P 2,470 lb
fo A (4.71in.+2.59in.+2.5in.)(12in.)=21"0psi

Bending stress due to overturning in-plane moments:

M
fb- S
(19,200 in.- kips)(6)(1,000 lb/kip)
fb =
(4.71 in. + 2.59 in. + 2.5 in.)(64 ft)z (144 in.2/ft 2 )
f~ -- 19.9 psi
CodeSection Walls subjected to flexural tension must be reinforced and designed for shear according to
2.2,4 Code Section 2.3.5.2.
P M
--- 21.0 psi -19.9 psi = 1.1 psi compression
A S
CodeSection .'. Wall is not subject to flexural tension; thus, check the wall design as an unreinforced shear
2.3.5.1 wall (Code Section 2.2.5).

. Consider shear stresses

Note that combined shear due to direct in-plane shear plus shear due to twisting exists
because the building's walls are not symmetrical (door opening in west wall). Therefore, a
torsion stress,x, exists and can be computed from:

17-164
Example DPC-16

Tc
J
where c is the distance from the center of gravity of resisting walls to location of torsion stress
being calculated, T is the torsional moment, and J is the polar moment of inertia of the cross
section. This torsion stress x can be computed and added to the direct shear stress. However,
this torsional shear stress is usually small and in this problem the eccentricity is small. If the
direct shear stress is close to the allowable, then the torsional shear stress would need to be
computed, otherwise it can be neglected.

Because we are evaluating seismic loads, we need to consider required strength versus design
strength.

Co~ctions I Calculate direct shear stress (requiredstrength):

2.2.5.1and Neglecting wall weight the load combinations per ASCE 7 is 1.0E.
2.1.1.2.3.1
f =VQ_3V_3V
Ib 2A 2Lb

3(58,400 lb)
ICodeEq.2-16 ] f v= 2(64 ft)(12 in./ft)(4.71 in. + 2.59 in. + 2.5 in .)

f v = 11.6 psi in CMU

f =11.6 p s i / ~ ' 7 5 x 1 0 6 p s i / =
.35x106)-~) 15.0psi inbrick

f =11.6 p s i ( ~ ' 7 5 x 1 0 6 p s i ] = 1 5 . 0 psi ingrout

\1 .35 x 106 psi)

For CMU, the allowable shear stress, F,~ is the least of"
CodeSection
2.2.5.2 [
(a) Fv=l.5af-ff= 1.Sa]l,500psi = 5 8 p s i
(Note: The designer could split shear by the proportional amount carried by each wythe
and use allowable for each. Since stresses are small, the lowerf',,, will conservatively be
used.)
(b) F, = 120 psi

(c) F =v+0.45(Nv)
t,A.)
CMU is laid in running bond but is not solidly grouted, so v = 37 psi, thus,
F =v+O.45(Nv)=37 p s i + 0 45( 2,470 lb 1
\A,) " ~.(4.71in.+ 2.59i-~.+2.5in.)(12in.)
F = 46.5 psi
v

17-165
 Chapter 17

(d) 15 psi in solidly grouted open end units laid in other than running bond. This does not
apply since units are laid in running bond.

The allowable shear stress, Fv = 1.33(46.5 psi) = 61.8 psi

Co~ctions
2.1.1.1.3and
2.1.1.2.3.3 Design strength = Available stress × 2.5 x ~b= 61.8 x (2.5)(0.6) = 92.7 psi

fi<F,, i.e. 15.0 psi < 92.7 psi .'.OK

It is obvious that the shear in the brick and grout are OK.

. Interface stresses due to differential volume changes

Note that clay brick expansion coupled with concrete masonry and grout shrinkage may
induce an interface shear stress that should be checked. These differential volume changes
are not part o f this problem and are discussed in MDG Chapter 10.

. Interface shear stresses for multiwythe walls

The ties across the interface between wythes must be capable of taking the interface shear
stress, if this stress is deemed to be beyond the usual small amount. Code Section 2.1.3.2.2
provides for an allowable of 10 psi for grouted collar joints. For seismic loading, the design
strength is 2.5(0.6)(10)(1.33) = 20 psi. By observation the interface stress is OK.

. Ties across the interface

Code Section 2.1.3.2.1 requires wall ties across the grouted collar joint. Code Section
2.1.3.2.5 requires at least one W1.7 wire wall tie per 2.67 ft z o f waU, with a horizontal spacing
< 36 in. and vertical spacing < 24 in.

Place a W1.7 wire wall tie at 16 in. on center vertically and 24 in. on center horizontally. Z
wall ties are not acceptable for this wall as per Code Section 2.1.3.2.5.

. Check the unity equation for compression due to in-plane flexure and axial stress
This check will be illustrated, even though the stresses are small and could be ignored.
From Code Section 2.2.3.1:

I Code Eq. 2-I 0

f °+ f b< 1
F a
F b

f~ = 21.0 psi (see above)

[ Code Eq. 2-12

a ilh; 1ifhr<99
Fo=~(f ) 1- ~

1 , (70r)2
ICo~Eq.243 Fo =~(fm)~--~-) if hr > 99

17-166
Example DPC-16

Slenderness (h/r) is govemed by the out-of-plane direction I = 1,509 in.4/ft of wall (per MDG
Example DPC-13). For a 64 ft long wall, 1= 64(1,509) = 96,580 in4

A = 64115.6(3.63 + 2) + 12(2.5)] = 7,540 in.2

For non-rectangular sections

.25"

V 7,540

Use peak height as conservative slenderness: 15,

h _ (30 ft)(12 in./ft) _ 100.67 > 99

r 3.58in.
Thus, usingf'm = 1,500 psi

CodeSection Fo = 1(1,500 psi)-70 ft(3.58) 12

2.2.3.1 I 30(12) J (1.33)
CodeSection F° = 1.33(182 psi) = 242 psi
2.1.1.1.3 [

[CodeEq.2-14 I

(with the 1.33 factor from Code Section 2.1.1.1.3 since in-plane bending is due to seismic
load)

Fb = 1-33(31--)(1,500 psi)= 665 psi

Since seismic loads are involved, allowables are multiplied by 2.5 and d~= 0.8 and loads are
multiplied by load factors:
Unity Eq. :
(0.9)21.0psi + 1.0(19.9) psi = 0.039 + 0.015 = 0.054 < 1.0
CodeEq.2-10 I
(0.8)(2.5)(242) psi (0.8)(2.5)665 psi

thus, as stated previously, this check was not expected to be a problem, but is included for
illustrative purposes.

CodeSections I Since the shear wall is in Seismic Performance Category B, it must be designed in accordance
1.13.4.2and
L13.3.2 I with Code Chapter 2 or Code Chapter 4. Empirical design is not permitted. Walls must be
directly connected to the roof construction. These connections must be capable of resisting
the greater of the seismic lateral force induced by the wall or 1,000 times the effective peak
velocity-related acceleration.

17-167
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-17 - - Empirical Design of Masonry Walls

Design the masonry walls. See MDG Section 17.2. l for building plans and elevations.
Roof Deck: metal deck with no fill Brick Masonry-- ASTM C 216
Roof Live Load = 40 p s f Grade SW 4 in. nominal thickness
Roof Dead Load = 20 p s f
Wind Velocity Pressure = 20 psf Concrete Masonry-- ASTM C 90
Seismic Performance Category A Grade N, Unit Weight = 120 p c f

Mortar - - ASTM C 2 70

Calculations and Discussion

EMPIRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA CHECK

CodeSections]
5.1.2.1and
=

A. Seismic Performance Category A .'. OK to empirically design the masonry lateral force
1.13.3 resisting system. The walls must be anchored to the roof with a direct connection.
CodeSection B. Wind Velocity Pressure = 20 p s f < 25 psf .'. OK, empirical design may be used.
5.1.2.2 I 2. WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION A - Unreinforced Wall
(4 in. nom. brick, 3 in. cavity with rigid insulation, hollow CMU with pilasters at 16 ft o.c.)
Co~ction estimated clear span = 13 ft - 4 in. for interior wythe of CMU; try 6 in. hollow, concrete
5.6.2.1 [ masonry units (minimum thickness for 1 story buildings).
A. Shear Wall Design
Co~ction 1. Minimum shear wall thickness shall be 8 in. or more.
5.3.1.1 [ Because outside brick wythe is not tied directly to the roof diaphragm, only the
CMU resists shear loads. Therefore, must use minimum 8 in. nominal CMU.
The pilasters are neglected in empirical shear wall design.
2. Minimum total shear wall length
a. Grid Lines 1 and 2
[Co~ction Shear Walls: North/South direction, minimum required cumulative length =
5.3.1.2 I 0.4 x long dimension of building, min. required length = 128 ft x 0.4 = 51.2
ff
actual length ----64 ft + 34 ft + 1 8 f t = l l 6 f t > 5 1 . 2 f t .'. OK
b. Grid Lines A and B
Co~ction Shear Walls: EasffWest direction, minimum required cumulative length ---
5.3.1.2 51.2 ft
actual length = (100 ft + 20 ft) x 2 = 240 ft > 51.2 ft .'. OK
CodeSection 3. Maximum spacing of shear walls
5.3.1.3 Per Code Table 5.3.1, maximum ratio of shear wall spacing to shear wall length
is 2:1 for metal roof deck with no fill.
a. Grid Lines A and B
Shear wall spacing = 6 4 f t - 2(0.92ft) = .3 1> 2.0
length 20ft
Therefore, the 20 ft segments of wall are too short to be utilized as a shear
wall. Verify the ratio for the remaining 100 ft segments of wall in this
direction.

17 - 168
Example DPC-17

Shear wall s p a c i n g _ 6 4 - 2"0"92ft'=0.6<(

~ 2.0.'.OK
length 100ft
CodeSection Recheck cumulative length of shear walls, neglecting the 20 ft segments.
5.3.1.2 [ actual length= 2(100 ft) = 200 ft > 51.2 ft required .'. OK
b. Grid Lines 1 and 2
CodeSection
5.3.1.3 [ Shear wall s p a c i n g _ 1 2 8 - 2(0"92tt)-=7.0>-
length 18ft
- 2.0

The 18 ft segment of wall is too short to be utilized as a shear wall. Check

the 34 ft segment.
CodeSection Shear wall s p a c i n g _ 1 2 8 - 2t0"92n)-=3.7>"
"" 2.0
5.3.1.3 I length 34ft
So, the 34 ft segment is also too short. Check the 64 ft segment
on Line 2.
Shear wall s p a c i n g _ 1 2 8 - 2(0.92ft)_~2.0= 2.0 • O K
length 64ft
Therefore, in the north-south direction, only the masonry wall on Grid Line 2
can be used to resist lateral loads. Therefore, the shear wall spacing
requirement cannot be satisfied. Additional means of resisting wind, such as
steel bracing, must be provided near Grid Line 1 unless the door opening can
be eliminated.
B. Compressive Stress
1. Nonloadbearing wall on Grid Lines I and 2
CodeTable
5.4.2 [ f~ < Fa = 70 psi, 8 in. hollow CMU
P
f~ = " P = bottom of wall reaction
Code~ctio~ I Ag
5.4.2and
5.4.2.1 fa = 30 ft ht x 40 p s f x 1 ft length = 13.1 psi < 70psi • OK
12 in. x 7.63 in.
Use 4 in. brick and 8 in. CMU, Type N mortar
table 6
AppendixA [ 2. Bearing wall on Grid Lines A and B
For empirical design, alternate roof trusses have their loads transferred by a
header beam to the adjacent pilasters so that all roof loads are supported by
pilasters. The Code's empirical chapter does not provide direction for the design
of pilasters, since those requirements appear in Code Chapter 2 which is
specifically excluded and exempted from the design of masonry in accordance
CodeSection with Code Chapter 5 (empirical). Therefore, the pilasters cannot be designed
5.1.1 [ empirically and must be designed in accordance with Code Chapters 1 and 2 or 1
and 4.
C. Lateral Support
CodeSection 1. 13 ft - 4 in. horizontal span wall (clear span between 2'- 8" wide pilasters),
5.5.1 [ assuming lateral support at pilasters

h' 13.33 ft x 12 in.fit

- 13.3 < 18 for exterior non-bearing walls • OK
CodeSection t (4 in. + 8 in.)
5.2 [ height = 30 ft < 35 ft • OK

17- 169
 Chapter 17

D. PilasterDesign
1. Pilasters must be rationally designed for combined lateral and roof gravity loads.
See MDG Chap. 8, 11, and 12.
. W A L L C O N S T R U C T I O N O P T I O N B - C o m p o s i t e Wall
For a composite wall of 4 in. nominal clay brick, 3/4 in. full collar joint, and hollow CMU,
determine the wall thickness. No pilasters are used in this wall construction option.
Grid Lines A and B, try 12 in. hollow CMU for interior wythe
Grid Lines 1 and 2, try 16 in. hollow CMU for interior wythe
A. Shear WallDesign
Since the wythes are composite, both act to resist shear loads.
Minimum shear wall thickness = 8 in.
Grid Lines A and B : 4 + 12 =16 in > 8 in .'. OK
Grid Lines 1 and 2: 4 +16 = 20 in > 8 in .'. OK
Shear wall length and spacing same as Wall Construction Option A; that is, the
masonry shear walls are adequate in the east-west direction, but other means o f lateral
load resistance are required in the north-south direction.

I Code Section B. CompressiveStress

5.4.2 1. Grid Lines 1 and 2, nonloadbearing walls
f~ < F~ = 70 psi for Type N mortar (Governed by hollow CMU allowable per
Code Section 5.4.2.2)
P
f, - P = wall wt. at bottom of wall
Ag
brick wt. = 40 psf; 16 in. CMU wt. = 80 psf(See MDG Appendix A)
filled collar joint wt = 140 pcf (.75 in/12 in/R) = 9 psf
f~ = 3 0 l°t ht x (40 + 80 + 9) p s f x 1 ft l e n g t h _ 16.1 psi < 70 psi .'.OK
12in.x (4+16)in.
Use 4 in. brick and 16 in. CMU, Type N mortar
Code Section 2. Grid Lines A and B, loadbearing walls
5.4.2
f~ < Fa = 70 psi for Type N mortar (Governed by hollow CMU allowable per
Code Section 5.4.2.2)
P
f, - P = roof live and dead loads + wall wt.
Ag
brick wt. = 40 psf; 12" CMU wt. = 56 psf;
solid collar joint wt = 9 psf; total = 105 psf

f a = (24 ft ht x 105 psf) 1 ft + [32 ft x (20+40) p s f ] l ft _ 23.1 psi < 70 psi

12 in. x (4+12) in.
Use 4 in. brick and 12 in. CMU, Type N mortar
C. Lateral Support
Code Section 1. Grid Lines 1 and 2
5.5.1
h' 30 ft x 12in./ft
Code Table = 18 = 18(exterior n o n - bearing wall) .'. O K
5.5.1 t 4in.+16in.

17- 170
E x a m p l e DPC-17

2. Grid Lines A and B

CodeTable h' 24 ftx 12 in./ft

= 18 < 18 bearing wall with non-solid or non-grouted units
5.5.1 ] t 4in.+ 12in.

DESIGN SUMMARY
WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION A
Use metal-tied double wythe, 4 in. nominal brick (ASTM C 216), 3 in. insulated cavity, 8 in.
nominal hollow concrete masonry units (ASTM C 90) with ASTM C 270 Type N Mortar.
Pilasters at 16 ft designed by methods other than empirical. Additional building lateral load
resistance required in the north-south direction.

WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION B

Use composite wall with metal ties and full collar joint
loadbearing wall 4 in. nominal brick (ASTM C 216), 3/4 in nominal full collar
joint, 12 in. hollow concrete masonry units (ASTM C 90);
ASTM C 270 Type N mortar
nonloadbearing wall4 in. nominal brick (ASTM C 216), 3/4 in. full collar joint, 2 wythes 8
in. nominal hollow concrete masonry units (ASTM C 90);
ASTM C 270 Type N mortar

Author's Notes: The empirical design for construction option B may be an impractical and
uneconomical solution. A rational approach should be considered in accordance with MDG
Chapters 8, 11, and 12 to determine an engineered wall design. Intermediate lateral braces, such
as steel columns or buttresses may also be considered.

SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
CodeSection In Seismic Performance Category A, the only additional code requirement is that the masonry
1.13.3 ] walls must be directly connected to the roof diaphragm. Refer to MDG Chapter 14 for specific
design requirements for these connections.

17- 171
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-18 - - Design of a Reinforced Multiwythe Composite Wall

Design a reinforced composite brick-block wall (Wall Construction Option C) f o r the wall on
Grid Line 2 o f the DPC Gymnasium. Since this is a nonloadbearing wall, the design considers
flexure and shear due to wind loads only. The wall is composed o f a nominal 4 in. clay brick
wythe, a 2 in. grouted and reinforced collar joint, and a nominal 8 in. concrete masonry wythe, to
create an overall 13.25 in. thick wall. The reinforcement is located in the collar joint. The
material properties are assumed as follows:

Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry Grout

(11ollow)
Unit Strength 2, 000 6,600 N.A.
Mortar Type N Type N N.A.
f ~, (psi) orfg (psi) 1,500 2,500 3,500
CodeSection Em (psi) or Eg (psi) 1.35 × 106 1.75 × I0 e 1.75 x 10a
1.8.2 [
n 21.5 16.6 16.6
Reinforcement- Grade 60, Es = 29 x 106psi

Calculations and Discussion

FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

The wall on Grid Line 2 spans vertically between theoretical pin supports at the top of the
foundation wall and at the roof diaphragm. A one foot wide section located at the center of the
wall governs the design. The moment at midspan is 25,800 in.-lb, due to a lateral wind pressure
of 20 psf (see MDG Example DPC-14). Initially, wind pressure is considered to act in a direction
that causes compression in the brick wythe. The wall will also be checked for the wind suction
case, where the inside face shell of the concrete block is in compression. Determination of wind
pressure and suction in accordance with ASCE 7-93 is likely to result in design suction forces
greater than design pressure forces. However, for simplification of calculations in this Guide, the
design pressure and suction are considered to have the same value. The required steel area can be
calculated from the internal couple shown below:
1.25"

15.63" --I
-j /~

17- 172
Example DPC-18

Wind Pressure Case

[
Co~ction
2,1.1.1.3and
2.2.2.l~)
Estimating the initial value of j as 0.9, and taking the allowable tensile stress, Fs, in steel
(increased by 33% from 24,000 psi due to wind) as 32,000 psi, gives the estimated required steel
area as

M
As-
F,ja

25,800 in. - lb
AS = 0.194 in .2/ft of wall
(32,000 psi)(0.9)(4.63 in.)
Code Section
2.3.3.2.2
Check if maximum allowable masonry compression stress Fb controls:

Fb = / 4 ] / / ] 0 c ' ) = / 4 1 ( 2 , 5 0 0 p s i ) = l , l l l p s i

Also, from the internal couple:

M bkdf~jd 2M
- or fb - - -
2 jkbd 2
Forj = 0.9, k = 0.3 and
2(25,800 in. - lb)
fb - 12 in.(0.3)(0.9)(4.63 in.)2 - 743 psi < F b = 1,111 psi

Therefore steel stress governs.

ForAs req'd = 0.194 in.Z/ft, select #5 reinforcing bars @ 18 in. on center

0.31 in.Z (12in./ft.) = 0.207 in. z/ft
A~ = 18in.
Computing actual flexural stresses in the section:
0.31
p= =0.00372
18(4.63)
p n=0.0617
k = - p n+x/2 p n+(p n) 2 = - 0.0617 + x/0.1234+0.0038
= 0.295

j = l - 0.295 / 3=0.901

M 25,800
fo =Asjd (.207)(.901)(4.63).=29,877psi < 32,000psi

M 25,800
=, = =755psi < 1,11 lpsi
f,, ~bjkd 2 1/22(12)(.901)(.295)(4.63) z

17 - 173
 Chapter 17

Verify:
T=C
1
A, f = f ~(b) (kd)×-
2
or (0.207 in))(29,877 psi)= 755 psi(12 in.)(0.295)(4.63 in.)[ 1 )

6,185 lb ~ 6,187 lb " OK

M, = Tjd = 6,158 lb(0.901)(4.63 in.) = 25,802 in. - lb " OK

Wind Suction Case

fbl
_.1
t = 1.25"

1- / c= AL;~ (1.2S)(12)
L~r = 7.5~t +£2)
d = 8.63"
7.38" ~--A~

i has
['.__. r=a,y,
= 0.207(16.1)

The transformed section is considered with face shell mortar bedding only in CMU masonry.
Forvalues ofj and k
/ \

n× As(d-

or (21.5)(0.207)(8.63-8.63k)=a2(1.25)(8.63k - 1.~5)

or 38.41- 38.41k = 129.5k - 9.38

47.79=167.91k
from which, k = 0.2846. Because 0.2846(8.63)=2.46>t=1.25in. the neutral axis falls below the
face shell.

Co~ctions
Check stresses for the section:
2.1.l.l.3and
2.3.3.2.2 Fb = 1.330~3X1500psi) =667 psi

17 - 174
Example DPC-18

~=1- /
C

N J;2
"/ U
/
/
/
/
/
/
T = A~f~

-I
2/3 (1.25") = 0.833" 1/3 (1.25") = 0.417"

I- J~2

fb2 = 1.21 fbl =0"492fbl

2.46

Stress Volume arm to top Moment

fbl (1.25)()~) = 0.6253~, 0.417 0.261fbl
0.492fbl (1.25)(g) = 0.307f0~ 0.833 0.256fbl

0.932fb~ 0.517fbl

Z='517=0.555 in. a =8.63 - 0.555 = 8.08 in.

.932
T = C-25'800-=3193 lb
8.08
3193
fs = =15,425 psi < 32,000 psi .'. OK
0.207
3193
f~, =.12(0.932).=285 psi<667 psi " OK

1 7 - 175
 Chapter 17

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

The cross section is:

1.25"

X
7.6:

#5 bars
13.3" J 18o.c.

L. ".': • :..." ;.'."

15.63"

This wall is considered to span vertically and is subjected to lateral wind load of 20 psf. The span
length between top of foundation and roof diaphragm is 29 ff 4 in. Initially the wall is designed
for shear under wind pressure producing compression in the brick wythe; however, the wall must
also be checked for suction where the inside face shell of the CMU is in compression.

For Compression in Brick Wythe

d = 4.63 in.
I CodeSection
2.3.5.2.1 [ From Code Chapter 7, the shear stress, fi, is:
V
ICoaeEq.2-19 I f'=bd
The shear force, V, is:
wl
V-
2
According to Code Section 2.3.5.5, the shear at d/2 from the face can be used for design; however,
as discussed in MDG Example RCJ-7, this reduction will conservatively be neglected.

V = (20 plf)(29.3 ft) = 293 lb

2
V 293 ib
.'. f . . . . 5.3 psi
" bd (12in.)(4.63in.)
CodeSection The maximum allowable shear stress, F~, for reinforced section is given by:
2.3.5.2.2 I
F, = ~ < 50 psi
[CoaeEq.2-20 [
Fv = ~ , 5 0 0 = 50 psi(brick)

17-176
Example DPC-18

For wind, Fv = 1.33(50 psi) = 66.5 psi

CodeSeetion [ Forthis case, f i = 5.4 psi < 66.5 psi, .'. OK
2,1.1.1.3 I

For Compression in the Concrete Block Wythe

CodeSection
2,3.5,2.1 [ d = 8.63 in.
L- V
bd
293 lb
L- (12 in .)(8.63 in.)
f~ = 2.9 psi
ICo~etion The maximum F v = ~ , 5 0 0 = 38.7 psi
2.3.5.2.2 ]
Co~ction
2.1.1.1.3 ] For wind, Fv = 1.33(38.7 psi) = 51.5 psi
This design is okay for shear.

As discussed in MDG Chapter 9, it is possible that composite brick-block walls may experience
delamination at the interface of grouted collar joint and masonry due to shear differential volume
changes, in-plane loads, and out-of-plane loads. The calculations of this example are valid only if
such delaminations do not occur.

Check for potential delamination

Code Section
2.1.3,2.2(b) Maximum allowable collar joint shearFv = 10 psi

CodeSection Increase 1/3 for wind = 1.33(10 psi) = 13.3 psi =Fv
2.1.1.1.3
Delamination computations are based on the resistance provided by the contact area.

Brick in Compression

.=
d = 4.63"
I

2"-2
mtial
amination
face

/• 12" ~

Per previous calculations, k = 0.295. Therefore kd = 0.295 (4.63 in.) = 1.37 in.
For 12 in. length of wall and #5 bars at 18 in. o.c.,
h A s = 16.6(0.31 in. 2)(12 in./18 in.) = 3.43 in 2

1 7 - 177
 Chapter 17

Delamination Shear Stress - VQ

Ib
At brick/collar joint interface,
Q = 12 in.(3.63 in.)/3"63 in" 1.27 in.] = 23.74 in .3
L e

12 in. (1.27 in) 3

/cracked section --
12 in.(1.27 in.) 1.2 in.. + 3.43 in. (4.63 i n . - 1.37 in.)2
12
= 2.05 + 6.15 + 36.45 = 44.65 in. 4

f~=VQ=2931b(23"74in'3)=13.0psi<F,=13.3psi • OK
/b 44.65 in. 4 (12 in.)

CMU in ComPression
i

2- ntial
anination
ace
d = 8.63"

h/
L

--r'~¢ 1311ii;ll IYlOI'L~II ~

Per previous calculations, k = 0.285 and kd = 0.285(8.63 in.) = 2.46 in.

For 12 in. length of wall and #5 bars at 18 in. on center,

nA, = 21.5(0.31 in.2)(12 in./18 in.)= 4.44 in. 2
At CMU/collar joint interface, with area from MDG Appendix A, Table 7
• 2(7.63in., /
Q = 41.5m. [ - - - - ~ - 2 . 4 6 i n . = 56.2in)

I~ackcds~o. = 12 in" (1"2512in')3 e 12 in. (1.25 in.)(2.46 in.-1.252 in') 2

+ 4.44 in. 2 (8.63 in. - 2.46 in.) 2

I = 1.95 + 50.51 + 169.03 = 221 in. 4
fv = VQ = 293 lb(56.2in. 3) = 6.2psi < Fv = 13.3 psi .'.OK
Ib 221 in. 4 (12 in.)

17 - 178
Example DPC-19 ~ Design of a Steel Lintel
Consider the 8 f l wide masonry opening on the south wall Grid Line B (MDG Figs. 17.2-1 and
17.2-2). Design a steel lintel to support the masonry in Wall Construction Option C, reinforced
composite brick and block wall.

Calculations and Discussion

4" B R G J .4" B R G
8' -0" O P G

Partial Elevation

t. Loading Conditions and Geometry

The truss bearing length is 12 in. and the maximum width of the load distribution is 12" +
4(13.25") = 65 in. or 5.42 ft. For a 30 ° spread of load, the truss reaction becomes a
distributed load 3 ft-10 in. down from the point of load application and 8 ft - 2 in. above the
apex of the triangular arch above the lintel, as shown in figure above. Since there is adequate
masonry mass on each side of the lintel to resist the arch's horizontal thrust, arching action
will occur. Therefore, the only vertical loads on the lintel, after removal of shoring, will be
from lintel self-weight and weight of the masonry within the triangular arch area.

The lintel is laterally braced by the masonry mass. The lintel angles are not free to twist and
the compression "flange" cannot buckle laterally due to restraint imposed by the grout and the
bottom plate. Refer to the lintel section figure at the end of this example. Lateral loads acting
on the lintel result from wind pressure within the triangular arch area and on the doors.

17 - 179
 Chapter 17

L o a d s - Refer to lintel section figure at the end of this example and to MDG Example
DPC 12
VerticalLoading
M a s o n r y weight = 4 in. brick + 2 in. grout + 8 in. h o l l o w C M U

= 40 p s f + 2 (150 psf) + 47 p s f

= 112 psf
Assuming 4 in. bearing length each end, the center to center span length is 8.33 ft.

M = W f + Wl
.33 t~) = 466 p l f
8 6
25 plf(8.33 ft) 2
M--
8
Lintel
+ [466 plf(8.33 ft)(0.5)](8.33 ft) Self Weight = 25 p l f

6 1,074 lb 1,074 lb
M = 217 ft- lb + 2,695 ft- lb = 2,912 ft- lb
8.33'C-C O f Bearing

Lateral Loading
20 psf (0.5) (8.33 t~) - 833 plf

M ,,,8 6 20 Psf (0"5) (8 f0 = 80 Plf

M=
80 plf(8.33 ft)2 ,0, ro
8.33' C-C Of Bearing
l 507ro

8
~ [83.3 plf(8.33 ft)(0.5)1(8.33 ft)
6
M = 694 ft- lb + 482 ft- lb = 1,176 ft- lb

. S e l e c t lintel s i z e b a s e d o n f l e x u r a l s t r e s s e s
Try three angles 3-1/2 in. x 3-1/2 in. x 5/16 in. To provide a finished surface against which to
erect the door frame, and to contain the grout in the collar joint, add a bottom plate. Since the
plate is not designed to act compositely with the angles, required welding to the angles is
minimal and the bottom plate need not be continuous. The plate thickness of 5/16 in. is
selected for durability in exposed usage and a 13 in. width is selected to support the 13-1/4 in.
thick wall.

For each angle, area = 2.09 in. 2, lx = 2.45 in. 4, Sx = 0.976 in.3

For vertical loading, S = 3(0.976 in.3) = 2.93 in. 3

M _ 2.91 ft- kips(12 in./ft) _ 11.9 ksi < Fb = 22 ksi O K

S 2.93 in .3
For horizontal loading, the section modulus of the angles is greater than 2.93 in. 3, since they
are spaced apart. Since the lateral load moment is less than the vertical load moment, the
horizontal section properties are greater, and the allowable stress is 1/3 greater when the wind
load is considered, flexural stresses are within allowable even when combined, by inspection.

17-180
Example DPC-19

. Check vertical deflection

5wl 4 WI 3
A - - - ~
384E1 60E1
A - (5)(0.025 klf)(8.33 ft )4 (1,728 in .3/ ft 3)
384(29,000 ksi)[3(2.45 in.4)]
+ [0.466 klf(8.33 ft)(0.5)](8.33 ft )3 (1,728 in .3/ ft 3)
60(29,000 ksi)[3(2.45 in .4)]
A = 0.013 in. + 0.1516 in. = 0.165 in.

The Code only limits deflection in beams supporting unreinforced masonry and this wall is
Code Section reinforced.
1.10.1
However, A= 0.165 in. =//592 is OK even if the wall was unreinforced masonry.

. Check shear and torsion

By inspection, shear is not a problem.
Torsion is no problem since the angles are not free to rotate.

. Check bearing
Because the wall is composite, the load will be fairly uniform across the wall cross section.
For 4 in. long bearing each end and assuming solid brick and 50% solid CMU, the bearing
area provided by brick, CMU, and grouted collar joint is
3.63in .(4in .) + 7.63in .(4in .)(0.5)+2.0in .(4in .) = 37.8 in .2
The bearing pressure is
1,074 lb
fbr - - 28.4 psi
37.8 in.
Code Section
2.1.7.3 The allowable bearing is Fbr = 0.25f'~
Per MDG Section 17.2.4, f'm = 1,500 psi in the CMU andf'm = 2,500 psi in the brick.
Therefore the minimum Fb~ = 0.25(1,500 psi) = 375 psi. SinceJ~r = 28.4 psi < Fbr = 375 psi,
bearing stress is OK and the CMU need not be grouted at the lintel bearing.

. Weld of the plate to the angles

Since the plate is not part of the structural member, weld is only required to hold the pieces
together.
The minimum weld size for 5/16 in. thick members is 3/16 in. (MDG Ref. 11.3.20). Use 3/16
in. welds 2 in. long at 12 in. on center at the toe of each angle.

. Check shoring
When arching action has been assumed to reduce the loads on the lintel, temporary shoring of
the lintel must be provided until the masonry has attained sufficient strength to accommodate
arching action. Shoring must be provided for a minimum of 24 hours (Ref. 11.3.19). The
shoring period should be increased to three days when imposed loads are to be supported, and
should be even longer when masonry is built under cold weather conditions (MDG Ref.
11.3.19). For this lintel design, require shoring for a minimum of three days.

17 - 181
 Chapter 17

. Other Considerations
a) Although not required in a solid (barrier) wall, the designer may choose to place a
flashing at the lintel location. The Brick Industry Association recommends using flashing
in barrier walls.

b) While sizing the wall reinforcement, the designer must consider stresses due to moisture
and thermal movement in addition to gravity and lateral load stresses, since no expansion
or control joints are provided in the reinforced composite masonry wall.

c) Severity of the climate and level of maintenance that will be provided determine the
quality of corrosion protection that the steel lintel should have. For this lintel, require
galvanizing of the steel. See MDG Section 3.5.6 for further discussion.

d) Masonry anchors to connect masonry units to the lintel are not required for this lintel
configuration.

The final lintel design is shown below:

~ 13.25" F "~

7.63. 2
r 1--

CMU- Notch Webs

Arom~ Ve~cat Legs
~ Of Angles; Grout
Bottom Covxse Solid

Steel Lintel:
~3 - L 3-]/2tk 3-I/2t~¢5/16"
Plus Plate 5 / W ~ 13"
L- _I
__ 3.75" v F 5.5,, v1~.75,,
F" |3r~

Lintel Section

17 - 182
Example DPC-20 --Design of Shear Wall-Floor Connection for Composite
Nonloadbearing Wall
The connection to be designed is at the interface of walls on Grid Lines 1 or 2 and the foundation.
The Gymnasium utilizes Wall Construction Option C (reinforced composite brick and CMU wall
with filled collar joint) and is rated as Seismic Performance Category B. The connection must
transfer for the in-plane shear carried by the wall as a vertical diaphragm.

Calculations and Discussion

The Wall on Grid Lines 1 or 2 must transfer a wind

shear of 22.6 kips and a seismic shear of 15.5 kips
across the interface between wall and foundation
(MDG Example DPC-1).
Z.Z ....
Per MDG Example DPC-18, the overall wall
thickness is 13.25 in., with a nominal 8 in thick
hollow CMU inside wythe and a nominal 4 in. thick
brick outside wythe. The collar joint is reinforced
Z" and continuously grouted.

d4

For wind, the allowable in-plane shear stress is the

least of:
Code Section
2.2.5.2 1.5xf--~ or120psiorv+O.45(N-~)

Code Section
2.1.1.1.3 I The allowable stress can be increased by 1/3 for load combinations involving earthquake or wind.

In evaluating the last of these, conservatively assume Nv = 0 (neglect compressive axial stresses
Code Section from self weight) since the wall is nonloadbearing. Since the CMU is not solidly grouted, v
2.2.5.2(c) [ equals 37 psi. For all values o f f ~ exceeding 608 psi and where N~ =0, this 37 psi value will be
lower than that given by the other two equations, and will therefore govern.

The allowable in-plane wind shear stress is Fv = (4/3)(37) = 49 psi

Full mortar beds at foundation courses are required by the Specification. Beginning with the first
Spec. Articles bed joint above the foundation, assume face shell bedding only in the CMU. Face shell thickness
3.3.B.3 a. & b
in a nominal 8 in. CMU is 1.25 in. (MDG Appendix A, Table 4).

17-183
 Chapter 17

Using an 8 in. CMU with face-shell bedding, plus the filled collar joint (2 in.), plus the outer
wythe of solid brick (3.63 in.), the available mortar area is:

(64 ft - 12 ft)(12 in./ft)(1.25 x 2 in. + 2 in. + 3.63 in.) --- 5,073 in.2

The maximum shear stress for a rectangular cross section is

Co,teEq. (2- f _ VQ
Ib

fv = l . 5 V
A
Thereforefv = 1.5 x (22,600 lb / 5,073 in.a) = 6.68 psi.

This is much less than the allowable of 49 psi, and the design is acceptable without dowels.

An analogous calculation would also have to be carried out for the out-of-plane loads on the wall
due to wind in the east-west direction. Although no allowable shear values for this case are
specifically provided in the Code, the Code Commentary recommends the shear allowable in
Code Section 2.2.5.2 be used for limiting out-of-plane shear stress.

For seismic in-plane shear, the wall's nominal strength is 2-1/2 times the allowable value, or 49 x
ICo~ctio~ [2.5 = 122.5 psi. The design strength is the nominal strength reduced by a strength reduction factor
2.2.11..11..22..33..23and
qb, to produce 122.5 x 0.6 = 73.5 psi. Calculated seismic shears must be modified by a load factor
of 1.0 when combined with dead load only, per ASCE 7. The calculated seismic shear stress is
therefore,

1.5V = 1.5[(1.0)(15,500 lb)'-4.58] psi < 73.5psi

A 5,073 in 2

Seismic shear does not govern.

17-184
Example DPC-21 - - Design of a Single Wythe Reinforced Nonloadbearing Hollow Clay
Masonry Wall for Flexure
Given the following material properties, design single-wythe reinforced hollow clay masonry wall
for the wall on Grid Line 2 (Wall Construction Option D). The design is to consider flexure only.
Reinforcement is placed in the cells of the hollow units.
Clay Brick Masonry Grout
Unit Strength 6, 600 NA
Mortar Type N NA
f;, orfg(psi) 2,500 (by prism tesO 3,500
CodeSections ]
[1.8.2.2and Em or Eg (psi) 1.75 x 106 1.75 × 106
[1.8.2.3
n 16.6 16.6

Steel Reinforcement - Grade 60, E~ = 29 x 106 psi

Calculations and Discussion

The wall spans vertically between foundation and roof diaphragm. A one-foot wide vertical
section, located at the center of the wall, will be designed. The wall is assumed to be pinned at the
top and bottom. For a vertical span of 29 ft - 4 in., the midspan bending moment is 25,800 in.-
lb/ft., when the wall is subjected to a lateral compressive wind load of 20 psf (see MDG Example
DPC-18). Seismic doesn't control. Grade 60 reinforcement, will be used in 6 in. thick by 4 in.
high by 8 in. long (nominal) hollow clay units.
When the reinforcement is located at the center of the unit thickness, the effective depth is
5.50in.
d - - - - 2.75 in. The first step is to estimate the required steel area for design.

½xkxdxbxFh

7.5 "

From the preceding sketch of the internal couple,

M
As m m

17- 185
 Chapter 17

Co~ctions Assuming an initial value f o r j = 0.9, and increasing the allowable tensile stress in steel (24,000
2.3.2.1and psi) by 33% because the load case considered includes wind, the required A,. can be estimated as:
2.1.1.3
25,800 in.- lb
As = - 0.33 in 2/ft
(24,000 psi)(1.33)(0.9)(2.75 in.)

Check if allowable masonry stress controls

Co~cao~ Because of the 33% increase due to wind, the allowable stress in brick, Fb, is given as
1.3.3.2.2and
2.1.1.1.3

or Fb =l,ll0psi

For the assumed value o f j = 0.9, the corresponding value o f k is 3 - 3j = 3 - 3(0.9) = 3 - 2.7 = 0.3.
For these values o f j and k, the compressive stress in masonry is

2M 2(25,800 in.- lb)

f b - bjkd----5 - 12 in.(0.9)(0.3)(2.75 in.)2 - 2,110 psi > Fb = 1,110 psi

Therefore, for the previously assumed values o f j and k, masonry compressive stress controls.
Continue the problem assuming thatj~ = Fb = 1,100 psi.

Let
2M
bjkd 2 - F b = 1,100 psi

k
j=l---
3
1,100 - 2(25,800 in. - lb)
12 in.(1- k)k(2.75 in.)~

k =0.663
0.663
j =1 - - = 0 . 7 7 9
3

(1--k7
By strain compatibility, f , =l~-~-JnFn

f , = I 1 - 0"663-](16.6)(1,100 psi) = 9,281 psi < F s = 24,000×1.33 psi

k 0.663 J

17-186
Example DPC-21

Therefore, the assumption that compression controls is correct.

M 25,800 in. - lb
A - --- =l.30in.2/ft
"oq L i d (9,281psi)(0.779)(2.75in.)

For this unit, when a head joint thickness is added to the 7-1/2 in. dimension, there are 3 cells per
linear foot. The area of reinforcing steel in each cell is:

As = 4 ( 1 . 3 0 ) = 0.433 in.Z per cell

Select 1 - #6 bar in each cell.

If a higher value o f f " were specified, the area of reinforcing steel could be reduced. If a value of
f %, of 3000 psi is specified, the resulting As reduces from 1.30 in2/ft, to 0.657 in2/ft. This can be
satisfied by a #6 bar in every other cell. This is a large bar size for such a small cell, and a better
selection would be 1 - #5 in each cell. A #4 in each cell is almost enough (0.20 in. 2 vs. 0.22 in. 2
required). If the effect of the wall self weight is considered, the required As would reduce enough
to permit 1-#4 in each cell.

17 - 187
 Chapter 17

Example DPC-22 - - Design of Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry Wall i

Design the wall on Grid Line A using Wall Construction Option D (Single Wythe, Reinforced
Hollow Clay Masonry).
PD&P~
Roof Truss
Type N, PC-L Mortar
Hollow Clay Brick
Unit Strength = 6600 psi
~////////~ ~ - 6 × 12~?late \ f "~ = 2,500 psi
Wind Load = 20 psf
~ HollowClay Em = 1.75 x 106 psi
Brick n = 16.6
fg = 3,500 psi
Eg = 1.75 x 106 psi

7.5,,

Calculations and Discussion

Try nominal 8 in. Hollow Clay Brick Unit (Actual Width = 7 1/2 in.)
CodeSection The load is spread over 42.0 in. width (12 in. bearing + 4 x 7.5 in.)
2.1.7 [ per MDG Example DPC-7
PD +L = 4,180 plf, PD = 1,400 plf, e = 1.25 in. (From MDG Example DPC-7)

For the wall spanning vertically

_ 20 psf (24 ft)2
Mw (12 in. fit) = 17,300 in. - lb/ft
8

Use MDG Fig. 12.2-11

D + L + W M = 17,300 in.- lb/ft+ 4,180 plf(1.25 in .) = 19,900 in.- lb/ft at midheight
2

The midheight moment is approximately the maximum.

]Co~ction Fb = 0.33f',,,
2.3.3.2.2 I P 4,1801b
=0.042
Fbbt 4 (833 psi) (12 in.) (7.5 in.)
3
Pe 19,900 in. - lb
= 0.027
Fbbt 2
(833 psi) (12 in.) (7.5 in .)2

17-t88
Example DPC-22

From MDG Fig. 12.2-11

npt = 0.003
k = 0.25 < kb = 0.35 .'. Tension controls and MDG Fig. 12.2-11 is not valid

UsingMDGFig. 12.2-12
F~=0.017
PtFb
0.017(833)
pt - .=0.00059
24,000
Fb 833
k b =. = = 0.365
24,000
Fb+ F" 833~--
n 16.6
D+L
P 4,1801b
- 0.056
Fbbt (833 psi) (12 in.) (7.5 in.)
Pe 0 056 (1.25 in
F bbt 2 = " \ 7 . - - ~ n ) = 0.0093

From MDG Fig. 12.2-11 and Fig. 12.2-12 no reinforcing steel is required

D+W
P 1,4001b
=0.0144
Fbbt 4 ( 8 3 3 psi)(12in.)(7.5in.)

Pe 18,175 in. - l b
=
=0.0242
F bbt 2 4 (833 psi)(12in.)(7.5in.) 2

From MDG Fig. 12.2-11

np, = 0.008
k = 0.22 < kb

From MDG Fig. 12.2-12

Pt F~ =0.04
Vb
9,=O'04(833).=0.0014
24,000

17-189
 C h a p t e r 17

The largest requirement is Pt = 0.0014 from D + W.

Aa = Pt b t = 0.0014 ( 1 2 i n . ) (7.5 in.) = 0.126 in.2/ft

Area _s

#3 0.11 in. 2 10.5 in.

#4 0.20 in.2 19.0 in.
#5 0.31 in. 2 29.5 in. Use #5 reinforcing bars @ 24 in.
#6 0.44 in. 2 41.9 in.
#7 0.60 in.2 57.1 in.

If units are 12 in. in length (nominal).then the wall will look like this:

17-190
Example D P C - 2 3 - Typical Reinforcing Details

Typical reinforcing details are to be provided for the following situations:

a) wall corners
b) between wythes - composite walls
c) pilasters / columns

Calculations and Discussion

Wall Corner

CodeSection Unless wall intersections are designed to prevent shear transfer between the intersecting walls
1.9.4.1 (isolate the walls from each other), they must be able to transfer shear, using one of the following
means:
• 50% of the units at the interface shall interlock
CodeSection
1.9.4.2.5 I • Walls shall be toothed and joined by steel connectors
• Intersecting, reinforced bond beams shall be provided

The approach of Code Section 1.9.4.2.5(b) is illustrated in MDG Fig. 14.1-4(c). Note that the
intersection must be laid in running bond so that at least some of the units overlap. The steel
connectors must be at least 1/4 in. thick by 1-1/2 in. wide by 28 in. long, including 2 in. long 90 °
bends at each end. The connectors must be spaced no more than 4 ft apart.

CodeSection
2.1.3.2.1
I Connections between Wythes in Composite Wall
CodeSection [
2.1.3.2.5 Wythes of multi-wythe composite walls must be connected by headers; or the collar joint must be
Spec.Articles [ filled with mortar or grout and the wythes connected by wall ties. The ties may consist of W1.7 or
2.4 D.4 and2.4 W2.8 wire. Sheet metal ties are not permitted.
F.l.b

Choose to solidly grout the collar joint and use Wl.7 wire wall ties meeting ASTM A 82, with
hot-dipped galvanizing meeting ASTM A 153 Class B2 (1.50 oz/ftz). Embed ties at least 1/2 in.
into the outer face shell of hollow units; at least 1-1/2 in. into the mortar bed of solid masonry
Spec.Article
3,4D,1 [ units, or solidly grout hollow units. One wall tie must be provided for each 2-2/3 ftz maximum of
wall area. Maximum horizontal spacing is 36 in. and maximum vertical tie spacing is 24 in.
CodeSection
2.1.3.2.5 [

17 - 191
 Chapter 17

Pilasters / Columns

-- #3 Ties

--Four #9 Bars

20" x 20"Column

Assume a 20 in. square column with four #9 vertical reinforcing bars and #3 ties. Ties are used in
Co~ Section pilasters and columns to resist shear and to resist buckling of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.
I2.1.4.6 Lateral ties are required in columns but not in pilasters unless the vertical reinforcement is
[C~eSection
2.1.5.2
required to resist axial compressive stress. For the four vertical bar arrangement shown, the ties
must provide lateral support for every bar, since they are all comer bars.
I Code Section
2.1.4.6(a) Minimum tie diameter is 1/4 in.

Maximum tie spacing is the smallest of 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 lateral tie diameters, or
I Code Section the least side dimension of the column. For the reinforcement shown in the 20 in. square column,
2.1.4.6(b) the maximum spacing is 18 in. (The column side dimension is 20 in., 16 longitudinal bar
diameters is 18 in., and 48 lateral tie diameters is 18 in.)

Code Section The Code has special requirements for connections to masonry columns in Seismic Performance
1.13.5.3.2 Categories C, D, and E. Lateral ties in masonry columns in Seismic Performance Categories D
Code Section I and E must be at least 3/8 in. in diameter, must be spaced no more that 8 in. on center, and must
1.13.6.5 be embedded in grout.

17-192
Building D e s i g n
1 7 . 3 RCJ Hotel
17.3.1 Plans and Elevations
MDG Figs. 17.3-I through 17.3-10 show the typical
floor plans, elevations and details of a multistory hotel.
The north and south walls are glass curtain walls and the
masonry walls are shown cross-hatched. General notes for
the RCJ Hotel are given after the figures.
There are two wall construction options. Option A
uses unreinforced single wythe concrete masonry units on
the interior walls. The exterior walls are composed of 4 in.
face brick, a 3 in. air cavity, 1 in. of insulation and an
interior wythe of concrete masonry units. Option B uses
reinforced single wythe hollow clay masonry for both
exterior and interior wails.
To illustrate how to design both coupled and
uncoupled shear walls the hotel will have two possible
elevation configurations, Building Elevation Option I (40
ft- 4 in. overall masonry wall height) and Building
Elevation Option II (35 ft- 0 in. overall masonry wall
height), respectively. Elevation Option I is used with Wall
Construction Option B. See MDG Figs. 17.3-3, 17.3-4,
17.3-5, and 17.3-6.
As shown in MDG Fig. 17.3-1 and in canopy section
A/6 of MDG Fig. 17.3-7, there is a canopy over the
entrance to the lobby. This canopy is supported on
reinforced masonry columns and beams. The columns
have an unsupported height of 12 ft.
To illustrate the application of the Code to typical
structural design considerations for this type of structure,
example problems are presented in MDG Section 17.3.4.
An example problem index is included below to assist the
reader in correlating the illustrated example design issue to
the plans and elevations of the structure.

RCJ HOTEL EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX

Wall Construction Options A (Unreinforced Non-Composite Brick and Block)
Example # Page # Design Issue
RCJ- 1 17-241 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure (stairwell wall)
RCJ-2 17-243 Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (grid C)
RCJ-3 17-246 Roof diaphragm to shear wall connection (grid F)
RCJ-4 17-248 Expansion joint locations (all exterior walls)
RCJ-5 17-249 Differential movement between wythes (all exterior walls)
RCJ-6 17-251 Column design for axial and flexure (grid E-3)
RCJ-7 17-257 Continuous masonry beam design for flexure, shear, and reinforcementtermination (grid E)
RCJ-8 17-270 Empirical wall design (all walls)
Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced Clay Masonry)
Example # Page # Design Issue
RCJ-9 17-275 Wall design for out-of-plane flexure and shear (stairwell wall)
RCJ-10 17-280 Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (grid C)
RCJ-11 17-286 Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (grid 2)
RCJ-12 17-292 Floor diaphragm to wall connection (grid 2)
RCJ-13 17-294 Floor diaphragm to wall connection (grid D)
RCJ- 14 17-296 Wall to wall connection (grid 2)
RCJ-15 17-298 Wall to wall connection (grid 2-C)
RCJ-16 17-299 Wall beam design for flexure (grid E)
RCJ-17 17-303 Coupling beam design for flexure and shear (grid 2)
RCJ-18 17-307 Coupling beam design for flexure and shear (grid B)
RCJ-19 17-312 Singly reinforced masonry lintel design for flexure (grid B)
Miscellaneous
Example # Page # Design Issue
RCJ-20 17-315 Singly reinforced masonry beam design for flexure and shear (canopy)
RCJ-21 17-319 Beam to column connection (canopy)
RCJ-22 17-320 Unreinforcedretaining wall design
RCJ-23 17-322 Reinforced retaining wall design

17-193
 C h a p t e r 17

RCJ HOTEL NOTES

1. Design Dead Loads
Roof (Hotel) 95 psf
Roof (Canopy) 50 psf
Floor 110 psf (includes partitions)
Glass curtainwall 10 psf
2. Design Live Loads
Roof 20 psf (No Snow)
Dwelling Rooms 40 psf
Public Rooms 100 psf
1st Floor Corridor 100 psf
Corridors above I st 100 psf
Stairways 100 psf
Wind pressure or suction on vertical surfaces 25 psf
Wind uplift on open roofs 40 psf
Seismic Performance Category See Item 4c
3. Soil Conditions
Allowable soil bearing pressure 4000 psf
Equivalent fluid pressure 30 pcf
4. Building Construction
a. Floor and Masonry Elevations
Option I 10' - 10" First floor to second floor
9'- 8" Floor to floor above second floor
40' - 4" Overall masonry wall height
Option 11 8'- 10" First floor to second floor
8'- 8" Floor to floor above second floor
35' - 0" Overall masonry wall height
b. Roof and Floor Construction
8" precast hollowcore planks with 2" thick normal-weight topping at Hotel
4" precast hollowcore planks with no topping at Canopy
c. Wall Construction
Option A - Non-Reinforced, Seismic Performance Category A (Av = 0.04)
Interior loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls, and retaining wall: single wythe CMU
Exterior loadbearing walls: 4" face brick, 3" cavity with 1" rigid insulation, interior wythe of CMU
Option B - Reinforced, Seismic Performance Category D (Av = O.40)
All walls: single wythe hollow clay masonry
d. Canopy Construction
Beams artd columns: reinforced clay masonry
e. Lintels and Beams
Beam BI: W21 x 78 + 2 - L 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 3/8" - - bear each end on stiffened grillage beam W8 x 21 x 2'-0" at Wall
Construction Option A only
Beam B2: W l 0 x 26 with 6" long bearing each end and bearing plate 3/4" x 6" x 0'-8"
LinteILl: W8 x 18 with 8" long bearing each end at Wall Construction Option A or reinforced masonry beam at Wall
Construction Option B
Lintel L2 : 2 Angles 3-1/2" x 3-1/2" x 1/4" with 4" long bearing each end
LintelL3: W8 x 15 with 6" long bearing each end; add 5/16" thick bottom plate for Wall Construction Option A
f. Masonry Openings
All door openings are 3'-4" wide x 7'-0" high, unless noted otherwise

17-194
 m
l=
m|
m
B_
m|

G ® *
® m
¢J
i i
~-~
i
15'
-!-
30'
i
- 30' - !- -- 30'
I
-!-
!
30, -
I
-F
i
15' O
W
m|
i ! ! Masonry Bearing Wall ! ~ 9' ~-~
! i
Expansion Joint In Exterior Bdck Only
Wall Construction Option "A" Only
!
! H ~-~'i ! . ~ Glass Curtainwall i
.........~-©
14'- 8" 14'- 8"

L 29'4" 29'-8"

Wall

( -[ S;O" L- ol9
SIM,

k B/~ t......s~i_~
10 ¢_
Lobby
-r
Entra~ t Dining
28'-4" 28'-8"

'.0"

o . . . . . I_._®
T-- F C
o 3'4"
Glass CuC,ainwall ~ /
~"Brick Expansion Joint Location I Canopy Between Canopy
And C.M.U. Control Joint Locations
20' Above -.~
"Fi i &Building
For Wall Construction Option "A" Only
Wall Cons~uction 1 • Masonry
~..~r~-/-Canopy Column

/
Option A - Unreinforced, Seismic Performance Category A
Interior Beadng And Nonbeadng Walls, And Retaining Wall, .=°_J ~
O
Beams B1 And Center
Single-Wythe CMU Masonry Column For Wall
Exterior Bearing Walls -- 32' -
Construction Option "A" Only.
4" Face Bdck, 3" Cavity With 1" Rigid Insulation At Wall Construction Option
Intedor Wythe Of CMU Masonry Beams
"B", A Deep Reinforced Masonry
Option B - Reinforced, Seismic Performance Category D North Beam Spans From Masonry
Column At E-4 To Column E-3.
All Walls Single-Wythe Hollow Clay Masonry
1st Floor Plan
Top Of Floor Elevation = 100'-0"
 ExpansionJoint In Brick Only
MasonryBearingWall Wall ConstructionOption"A" Only
9'
~ OutsideFace Of Masonry ~~ =
s' l ~ Balcony,Typical
~ Glass Curtainwall

14'- 8 N9 l ~

"11
I[tlllt
6T-8" 9'-4" D/9

",4 SIM.

9
I0
mr,
14;2"
N8
¢D ¢...
01 -I-
(. 8" Hollo t Core
+2" N.W. I'opping
2

"1"I
m
--3
o
o . . . . . . H B/9

I
-o asonry
W Outside Face
Of Masonry
I Thickness
Typical
~L 30' =I= 15' J U.N.O.

150'

2nd, 3rd, & 4th Floor Plan

O
~\ Brick ExpansionJoint Location
And CMU Control Joint Locations ¢
l l=
For Option "A" Only
See Fig. 17.3-3& 17.3-5 For Floor Elevations III
"ll
North
(I
"1
 m
¢¢
Bill
m

¢1,
m|

U
f~
Bill

® ¢Q

E
I
i- 1,. ~. -.i,-~ ~. -~,-. ~. 3'-4" i 3'-4 ~. _,.~f 1,. .I
8.'~t . . . . ,. I~- " -i-8.-i~l ~ ~l~ - ~t~8~t~ ~1- - -I ,. t:"
~.~i i~i i~l,0 , i© ~ i~.~

(Q

O Building Section Looking North (Building Construction Option II Only)

ml
O
~1 See Fig. 17.3-5 For Section With Building Construction Option I
 15' 30'
=•. -30' ~ 30' __~ 30' 15'

r ~ MetalHandrail Roof

I
-~ 111111111111LIIL ~ IIIIT III II]lll] IIIII I I I I I I I I t l r l l l l ~II~IIIIIIIILILI I I l l l l L ] l L l l l l l l l IIIIIlII]LJIII]I] I]l]llll]lllllll ...... ~.FJ~ __

1 ...... llllllllll., IIIIIIlllll]ll '

~IIILILIIIIIIIIII II IIII]llllllrlt ~lllllllllllll II llllLIllllllll II IIIIil11111111111 IIIIIIII]11]1111 3rd Fir
J=
(D C3= -" l
IIIIIIII1~111]1 IIII]l]llllJl]ll~ I]llltflllllllll I I IIIIJIIIIIIfll ]~ITIIIIIIIIIII I I ILIILlllll]lll I • I I]111111111111II I I I I I I I I I I I ] l --l l l 2nd Fir

J\
S ~Metal Stud Partition
[ 1st Fir
\ Retaining
\ G|ass Curtainwatt ~" MasonryWall Wall
\ BuildingConstructionOption I Dimensions Beyond

~ BuildingConstructionOption II Dimensions North Elevation

O
=-
~t
(D
=1
,,q
 W
l=
an
m
a_
i|
==
co
0
0
.=.
(a
==

i-
i~ 15' _] 3,4_,_
, -i ~ 22' 3.~. 13... = 3.~.! 3,4- 22' t5' =t

~l~i.I ~ ~1~ ~i--.~l.I~ ~l~

I

i i!ii -2"~- 8= i i~i'-i-"~

i=
"111
.¢=
.n I T
--L
1'-10"
",4
-,=
Ot t t
;o 1'-10" [~ ~ ~"~'~"~"Masoory~ C St~,~ay
' Stairway
Not Not
Shown ~'~ Shown "~
-~ "t- f f
¢= 0 1'-10"

¢,,
. J
~
~'~,~-
Openings

Section
M=
i
u=
¢,Q

MI
o
;3 Building Section Looking North ~Boi,d,ogcon,,=ct,o.Op,,o.,on,y~
See Fig. 17.3-3 For Section With Building Construction Option tt
 ExpansionJoint In BdckAnd Control
z ~;n'c:~':';'o':o~"0~n°.~:O°,y Joint In CMU At Wall Construction
Option "A" Only.

Top Of ~ . / 29'-8" 9'-4" 28'-8"

Masonry ~ J~
I I Roof
; ..... ,

L,
i ,r 4th Floor

~ - Masonry CMason~--~
'11
J
I r 31d Floor
L

~o 4,
~o o=

r 2nd Floor

0 ¢_
0 -r
"T o
~o

.-- r . . . . . . . ~.
1st Floor

14' I Elev. 100:0"

n \ Grade ~ I ~

m= Building ConstructionOption I Dimensions(reinforcedmasonry)

o LocateJoint At End Of Lintel,Typical
~ Building ConstmctiooOption II Dimensions(unminforcedmasonry)

W e s t Elevation
East ElevationSimilarExcept
OppOsiteHand; NORetainingWall,
And No DoorOpening

o
=1"
=1
e=l=

=I
_.!,
Building Design
~ ~ ~ 4" HollowcorePlanks(SpanNorth-South).
2 Brickf f - - - ~-~--::"----=---"::-'~ GroutCoresSolidAt BearingEnds
Courses

ReinforcedMasonryBeam
\~\ BottomOf MasonryBeam
Elevation= 12'-0"
----~~ ReinforcedMasonry
ColumnBeyond
BeamWidth Equal
~.I To ColumnWidth
I; J

Canopy Section A/6

Top Of RetainingWall
~ ~ ~ .... Elevation= 104'-0"

MasonryRetainingWall

~ ;i:;Wc~l~idewalkElevation= 99,.6,,

!:i'i~:-: ;~';->: :ii;?:!: ;,i:?

Retaining Wall
Fig. 17.3-7 RCJ Hotel Sections

/ NormalWeightTopping
2"] TopOf Floor
Or Roof

8"

_ L

Wl0 Beam ~ PrecastHollowcorePlank

Section A/7

Fig. 17.3-8 RCJ Hotel Section

17-201
 C h a p t e r 17

AllowanceMustBeMade
ForCamberIn SlabAnd \
RoofMovement ,~
FillVoidWithInsulation ~ illlllrlllllllllllllllllllll l l ' T ' ~ l
~, ~ ,~ ~ ,~ j-x---~;:~::::~--[

Section A/9 Section C/9

/ ConcreteTopping -- ~ /~ ConcreteTopping

~ ---" ................... PrecestHollowCoreSlabs

C;;21.11
Section B/9 Section D/9

DetailsAreForWallConstructionOptionA.

Fig. 17.3-9 RCJ Hotel Sections

17-202
Building Design
#3 Bar Or 5/16" Prestressing
Strand Grouted In Keyway
Min Bearing 31/2"
J - UnreinforcedMasonry
2 1/2" Min. Brg.
~ "x Con~te
2" X 0'-4"
Steel Beam ~
1/2" Min. - -
Specify Weld Req'd.
I L.J
Wall ConstructionOption "A" Only
Fig. 17.3-10 RCJ Hotel Sections
17.3.2 Gravity Design Loads
The analysis of this structure is significantly more
complex than the previous two building examples. The
floor and roof flaming systems are hollow core planks that
are assumed to be simply supported on the masonry walls
and beams on the Grid Lines running in the north-south
direction. MDG Figs. 17.3-11 and 17.3-12 show the
vertical load carrying elements on the first and second
through fourth floors, respectively.
The dead load on the roof is 95 psf and the dead load
on the floor systems is 110 psf. The roof has a minimum
live load of 20 psf and a wind uplift of 40 psf. Each floor
has a live load of 40 psf and the corridor live load is 100
psf. An average selfweight for the wall systems was
assumed to be 70 psf and the curtain walls have a
selfweight o f 10 psf.
For live loads less than or equal to 100 psf, ASCE
7-93 allows a reduction in live loads on any member
supporting influence areas in excess of 400 ft2. Influence
Reinforced Masonry
, f "
" ~ ~
ConcreteTopping
• Strip 1/8" X 3"
~ ~ B o n d Beam Or Solid
"~"-~' Masonry Unit
Section A/8
-~---'S Reinforced Masonry
Topping
HIi- ...........
Wall ConstructionOption "B" Only
Section B/8
areas are taken as twice the tributary area for beams and
four times the tributary area for columns. A maximum
reduction of 50 percent is allowed for members supporting
one floor and a maximum of 60 percent for members
supporting more than one floor. ASCE 7-93 also allows a
different reduction in roof live loads for tributary areas in
excess of 200 t~. However, the maximum allowable
reduction only changes the total loads on the top of the
fourth floor walls by 14 percent. The change in the lower
floor loads is significantly less than this value. Since the
reduction in loading is small, no reduction of the roof live
load was calculated for this building example. This
simplifies the analysis and produces slightly conservative
loadings. If so desired, the designer may reduce these live
loads as deemed in ASCE 7- 93, Section 4.8.
Using the tributary areas shown in MDG Figs. 17.3-11
and 17.3-12 the uniform loads on top of each wall at each
floor level can be calculated.
17-203
 Chapter 17

L., 15' ..J -.. 15' ~ L.. 15' ~ 30' ,...

r" vr'- I" ~ v
f,) (]
i
Ii
&jWalI.B,1-2 & . ~ Wall C, 1-2 41s~Wall E,1-2 ~tsWall F, 1-2

I 10' X I
11' • I

I
Middle
6"33' L3 = IT I~W~,D,34 Caum. Wa, F,~4
~ - ~,, ',,~ L,o~ =~ K
Tributary Area for Lead Calculations

Fig. 17.3-11 RCJ Hotel- Vertical Load Carrying Elements On First Floor

I~. 15' ~ 30' ~1

(, b b ~b
® t
I
Wall B,1-2 d~Wall C,1-2 dryWall E,1-2 41jWall 1-2
I
I
®
i B-2 9.33'
®
~
f
|
i B-2
Wall B,3-4 BFWall C,3-4 Lobby
Wall E,3-4

q>
~ Wall D,3-4 Wall F,34

Light Dotted Line IndicatesTributary

Area For Load CalculalJons

Fig. 17.3-12 RCJ Hotel -Vertical Load Carrying Elements On Second Through Fourth Floor

17-204
Building Design

The total uniform roof load on top o f the fourth floor
wall on Grid Line C, between Grid Lines 1 and 2 is
Wc.l_2, a = (95 psf + 20 psf)x 30 ft = 3,450 plf
(2,850 plfdead load)
Since roof uplift may produce a critical loading for
shear evaluation on these walls, this load combination
should be calculated, and is
W~.1_2,R = (95 psf - 40 psf)× 30 ft = 1,650 plf
The roof loads on the remainder of the building elements
on the top o f the fourth floor walls are summarized in
MDG Table 17.3.1 (page 17-219).
Similarly, the total uniform load on top of the third
floor wall on Grid Line C, between Grids 1 and 2, is
calculated as follows:
Floor wall load = (110 psf + 40 psf × 0.606) × 30 ft
= 4,027 plf
The total load on the top of the third floor wall on Grid
Line C, between Grid Lines 1 and 2 is:
Wc.1_2.3 = 4,027 plf + 3,450 plf + 9.67 ft × 70 psf = 8,154 plf
(6,827 plf dead load)
where 9.67 It × 70 psf is the wall weight from the story
above.
The wall loads should be reduced by 1 x 70 = 70 plf
for the shorter wall construction option dimensions,
Building Option II (8 it - 8 in. floor to floor instead of 9 it -
8 in.).
The loads on the top of all the masonry elements from
the third floor to the first floor are summarized in MDG
Tables 17.3.2 to 17.3.4 (pages 17-220 to 17-223).

Tributary Area = 29.67 f t x 30 ft = 890 ft2 Stair Well Landings

The stringers on the stairs have a dead load of 129 psf
The above calculation ignores the tributary area of the due m the increased concrete weight of a slab and treads,
beam in the corridor. However, since the beam has a and the 3 it - 6 in. wide landings have a dead load of 85 psf.
higher live load and produces a concentrated load on the The landings transfer the stair load to the walls on Grid
wall, it is not included in the calculation. Lines 2 and 3. It is assumed that the stair load is applied to
Assuming the wall influence area, AI is twice the the walls over a 2 ft section near the ends of the landing
tributary area, then slab. This portion of wall also supports the landing load
Al = 2 x 890 ft 2 = 1,780 ft 2 over a 2 It section. The 1.5 It stairwell wall section on Grid
Lines 2 and 3 nearest the doorways supports only the
From ASCE 7-93 the live load reduction factor, LLRF, is landing loads (see MDG Fig. 17.3-13). For each section,
15 + 15 the loads on these walls at each landing are:
L L R F = 0.25 + ~ = 0 25 = 0.606
,/A,
The wall load from the fourth floor is therefore,

4" Stairs
t-
"o "10
¢-
t-
oo
,_1 ._J

4' Stairs

% $
Fig. 17.3-13 Typical Stairwell Area

17-205
 C h a p t e r 17
Won Grid Lines 2 and 3, 2 it section is: The global distribution of the above loads to each
story, and to each resisting element within the story, is
W=
I (129 psf + 100 psf) x

8.67 it
x-
2
discussed in MDG Section 9.2.2.

S e i s m i c Loads
+ (85 psf + 100 psf) x ~
2 Using an analysis similar to that described for the
W = 2,630 plf (1,400 plf dead load) TMS Shopping Center in MDG 17.1.3, the earthquake
loading for the RCJ Hotel can be calculated using the
(assumes 1/2 the stair load goes to each side and is formula V = C,W, per ASCE 7-93. The canopy is free
distributed over 2 ft) standing and will be analyzed separately.
The minimum seismic base shear is given by
W on Grid Lines 2 and 3, 1.5 R section is:
v=csw
8.67 It where:
W = (85 psf + 100 psf) x W = total dead load.
2
W = 802 plf (368 plf dead load) C, = Seismic Design Coefficient
_ 1.2/Iv S < 2.5Aa
No live load reduction is taken for the stairwell area, RT 2/3 R
the loads on the walls immediately below each landing are
in which
summarized in MDG Table 17.3.5 (page 17-224). MDG
S = coefficient for soil profile; use 2.0
Table 17.3.5 also summarizes the loads on the canopy.
R = response modification factor
I% for tmreinforced masonry and 3% for
17.3.3 Lateral Design Loads reinforced masonry
The lateral loads applied to the hotel are produced by
T = fundamental elastic period of vibration of
wind or seismic forces. The determination of seismic the building or structure in the direction
forces on the four story hotel is relatively complex.
under consideration, in seconds
Crh3/4
Wind Loads
where
For the same reasons described in MDG Section 17.1,
cr= 0.020 for masonry
a simplistic approach will be taken for wind loading. It
h. = height
will be assumed that all vertical faces have a uniform 25
34.83 It for unreinforced
psf suction or pressure applied to them, and that the first
39.80 ft for reinforced
floor wall transfers ½ the force applied to it directly to the
foundation. This assumption produces a total wind load in
For Wall Construction Option A (unreinforced) use A~
each direction for Building Option 1, Dimensions of:
= Aa = 0.04. Since the building is in Seismic Hazard
Wind load in north-south direction Exposure Group 1, the Seismic Performance Category will
be A. For Wall Construction Option B (reinforced) use A~
= (9.67 ft x3 + 10.83
I t 2 +0"5 f t l x 150 ft x25 Psf = Aa = 0.4. A group 1 building has a Seismic Performance
Category D.
= 130,969 lb

For an unreinforced system

Wind load in east-west direction
1.2(0.04)(2.0)
=(9.67 ft x3 + 10"83
x ft +2 0"5 Itl 67.67 ft x 25 psf C, = 1"25(0"29)g
= 0.175 _< 2.5(0.04) = 0.080 <---Controls
= 59,084 lb 1.25
(neglecting differences in grade).

17-206
Building Design
For reinforced masonry
C~ = vertical distribution factor
1.2(0.40)(2.0)
C s = 3.5(0.32)~
ZW,¢
= 0.59 < 2.5(0.40) = 0.286 4-- Controls
3.5
For Wall Construction Option A (unreinforced) For this building k = 1.0 since T_< 0.050 seconds.
For an unreinforced masonry system,
V= 0.080 x W
The force at the roof = Wh' (rooJ) x Total Shear
For Wall Construction Option B (reinforced) Y~Wh'
V = 0.286 x W _ 37,800 ft- kips x 409 kips = 143 kips
108,200 It- kips
Hand Calculations:
Unreinforced Walls -- Construction Option A
The force calculations for each floor and the story
The following presentation describes a load shears are shown in Table 17.3.6 for the unreinforced
system. The total wind load at the base from the north or
distribution to the resisting elements in the RCJ Hotel for
south is
Wall Construction Option A by hand calculation using
Schneider and Dickey's Method I (described in MDG Vw = 25psf×150ft×I35 f t - 8"83ft
]2
9.2.2). As directed by Code Section 1.7.5 the method
distributes the load with respect to each element's = 114,7001b= 114.7kips
relative stiffness. The configuration of the RCJ Hotel is The total wind load at the base from the east or west is
shown on MDG Figures 17.3-1 through 17.3-10. The
Vw=25psfx66.67ftx(35ft 8.83ft)
unreinforced noncomposite masonry, Wall Construction
Option A, with Building Option II dimensions will be = 51,000 lb = 51.0 kips
examined under Seismic Performance Category A
Since the seismic loads significantly exceed those produced
loading.
by wind, seismic forces govern.
Assuming each story height of wall mass is distributed
The next step in the lateral load analysis is to
equally to the diaphragms above and below, the total
determine the center of mass and center of rigidity at each
weight at each diaphragm elevation can be calculated. The
diaphragm. Since the hotel is approximately symmetrical,
dead load of each floor is 110 psf, including partitions, and
the center of mass, CM, is assumed to be at the center of
the roof dead load is 95 psf. The weight at each diaphragm
each floor area. The location of these centers of mass are
level is calculated based on the total floor or roof area, the
shown in MDG Figs. 17.3-14 and 17.3-15. These mass
applicable dead loads and the total area of masonry wails.
centers can be more accurately determined. However,
The approximate weight of the masonry walls is based on a
ASCE 7-93 requires that an accidental eccentricity of 5
10 in. wall thickness, resulting in a 70 psf self weight. The
percent of each of the horizontal building dimensions be
weights at each floor are summarized in Table 17.3.6.
added to the actual eccentricity between the center of mass
Note that per ASCE-7, only dead loads contribute to the
and the center of rigidity.
seismic lateral loads (except in storage or warehouse
To locate the center of rigidity at each diaphragm, the
buildings).
relative rigidity of each resisting element (walls and
The total building shear can therefore be calculated as
columns which support the diaphragm below the
V = 0.08 x 5,115 kips = 409 kips Unreinforced System
diaphragm elevation must be determined. MDG Fig. 17.3-
14 shows the lateral resisting elements below the second
The loads that are carried by the first floor diaphragm
floor diaphragm, and MDG Fig. 17.3-15 shows the lateral
go directly to the foundations. ASCE 7-93 distributes the
resisting elements below the third floor, fourth floor and
lateral force vertically using the equation
roof diaphragms. Since some of these elements have
Fx=C~, g control joints that create a break in the continuity of the
where

17-207
 C h a p t e r 17

Table 17.3.6-StoryShear Forces-UnreinforcedSystem

Level h' W Wh' Floor Force Story Shear
(ft) (kips) (ft-kips) Unreinforeed Unreinforeed
(kips) (kips)
Roof 34.83 1,085 37,800 143 143
4th Floor 26.17 1,337 35,000 132 275
3rd Floor 17.50 1,337 23,400 88 363
2nd Floor 8.83 1,356 12,000 46 409
Sum 5,115 108,200 409

wall, the wall segments between joints are analyzed as 1

individual piers. MDG Fig. 17.3-16 shows elevations of k=-- MDG Eq. 9.2-5
A
the walls on Grid Line 2 and Grid Lines B and C. The wall
1
on line 2 and the wall on the north side of the elevator shaft ki = = 9.88 in.-i
0.1012in.
are assumed to resist shear in the east - west, or x,
direction. The walls on Grid Lines B through F are
The stiffnesses of the remaining piers below the second
assumed to resist shear in the north - south, or y, direction.
floor diaphragm are calculated in the same manner, and the
The walls surrounding the stairwell on Grid Lines 3, A and
results are summarized in Table 17.3.7 (page 17-225).
G are not included in the analysis because holes in the
The origin is selected as the junction of Grid Lines A
diaphragms at the stair openings make it difficult to
and 4. The x and y coordinates of the center of rigidity can
transmit lateral loads to these walls. Due to the presence of
be obtained using MDG Eqs. 9.2-6 and 9.2-7. Since the
control joints at the intersection of most perpendicular
relative rigidity, R, is found by dividing the stiffness by the
walls, none of the walls are considered flanged.
total stiffness, these equations can be modified to
To further simplify the analysis, the small piers formed
incorporate stiffness values. Using the values in Table
in the walls on Grid Lines B and F, between Grid Lines 2
17.3.7 (page 17-225),
and 3, are neglected. The stair doors are offset between the
second and third through fourth floors, creating small
disjointed piers. As a result, these piers will resist very
little shear and can be ignored. Following this same _ Y. (Riyx,)_ ~ (kiy x,)_ 6,305 _ 78.5 ft
Xr ~" Riy ~, kjy 80.3
reasoning, the first floor columns on Grid Line E, between
Grid Lines 3 and 4, are also ignored in the analysis.
The stiffness of each pier is calculated using MDG
Eqs. 9.2-3 and 9.2-5. All piers are assumed to be Z (Rn Yi)_ ~ (ki~ y,)_ 1,750 _ 37.1 ft
cantilevered from the foundations. Since only the relative Yr - Y" Ri, Y" kix 47.2
stiffness of the wall elements are important, and all wall

thickness are assumed equal, the ratio of P~ may be To determine the amount of shear carried by each
E.t element, the torsional moment, MT, must be calculated.
taken as 0.10 in. This moment is produced by the story shear applied
The stiffness of the pier on Grid Line B between Grid eccentrically to the center of rigidity. As mentioned
Lines 1 and 2 (Wall B, 1-2) at the second floor is therefore previously, ASCE 7-93 requires that an accidental
eccentricity of 5% of the horizontal building dimension be
p, P4¢
A:, =7:7.,L t.C.)'7 +3 -;.- MDG Eq. 9.2-3 added to any actual eccentricity to determine the design
torsional moment. Since this eccentricity can force the
applied story shear to either side of the center of rigidity,
A:, =0.10×[4¢8"83et]' +3¢8"83 et']l = 0.1012in. four load cases must be investigated:
L L29"3 ftJ k 29.3 ftJJ
and

17-208
Building D e s i g n

® ~ @

i/Wall E,1-2 Wall F,1-2

~ WaU B,1-2 Wall C,1-2 /

- - m ., I m m

LC3 r i
CR
Wall B,3-4 I Wall F,3-4
LC2 LC1 /
/ Wal D,3-4 I
Lobby

(~) - X I
Defines LateralLoad Carrying
Wa~ls
L oR cM : +
For Canopy
~, Load Case

Fig. 17.3-14 Lateral Load Resisting Elements Below Second Floor Diaphragm

Wall F 1-2
Wall E,1-2
/ Wall B,1-2
m m
/
Wall C,1-2

• I I l l i / I R I l

CM o-}- CR

Wall C,3-4 Wall D,3-4 Wall F,3-4

Wall E,3-4
J /
Wall B,3-4
Lobby

~ X

Defines Lateral Load CarryingWalls

Fig. 17.3-15 Lateral Load Resisting Elements Below Third Floor Through Roof

17-209
 Chapter 17

Piers On Grid Line 2

~ ~ ~ ~oo,

111 t/111
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor

X Indicates Opening

Piers On Grid Line B

Roof
4th Floor
q

3rd Floor
2rid Floor

Piers On Grid Line C

Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
NN 2nd Floor

Pier On Pier On
Grid 3 Grid 3
Piers On Grid Line D
Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor

Piers On Grid Line E

Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor

Piers On Grid Line F

Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor

Fig. 17.3-16 Piers on Grid Lines 2 and B through F

17-210
Building Design
1. Add 5% of the x building dimension to the actual
eccentricity in the x direction
2. Subtract 5% if the x building dimension to the
actual eccentricity in the x direction
3. Add 5% of the y building dimension to the actual
eccentricity in the y direction
4. Subtract 5% of the y building dimension to the
actual eccentricity in the y direction
For earthquake forces, which govern here, the
actual eccentricity is the distance between the center of
mass and the center of rigidity. For the second floor
level this distance is 3.54 It and 3.30 It in the x and y
directions, respectively, assuming the center of mass at
the geometric center of the building. Five percent of
the building dimension in the x direction is 7.50 It and
five percent of the building dimension in the y
direction is 3.38 It, and these eccentricities control.
Torsional moment for each load case listed previously
is shown in MDG Tables 17.3.7 to 17.3.10 (page 17-
225 to 17-228).
The second floor shear can now be distributed to
the wall elements using MDG Eqs. 9.2-8 and 9.2-9. If
Py ex and P:~ey are replaced by the applicable MT and
R is replaced by k, Eq. 9.2-8 for the second story
diaphragm, load case 2, becomes:
(Vy)=( kly ]358+( ktc~x ' ](1,418)
• 80.33 Jr )
Direct Shear Torsional
Component Component
The torsional component is added to the direct
shear component when the wall under consideration is
on the same side of the center of rigidity as the
application of load. Although theoretically the
torsional shear could be subtracted when the wall is on
the opposite side of the center of rigidity as the
application of load, normally the design shear is not
deducted. Since the accidental eccentricity may
reverse the sign of the torsional moment, the
governing load case for a shear wall design may be the
result of subtracting the accidental eccentricity from
the actual eccentricity.
Substituting relative stiff~esses for relative
rigidities, the relative polar moment of inertia, d~, is
calculated using MDG Eq. 9.2-10. For load cases 1
through 4, the calculations for shear applied to each
resisting wall element at the second floor diaphragm
17-211
level are summarized in MDG Tables 17.3.7 to
17.3.10 (page 17-225 to 17-228).
Piers located above the first floor openings are
assumed to cantilever from the base of the structure.
This assumption is made because of the restraint
provided by the piers surrounding these openings. The
calculations for shear applied to each resisting wall
element at levels 3 through the roof are summarized in
MDG Tables 17.3.11 through 17.3.22 (page 17-229
to 17-240).
Canopy
The canopy weight is 48.8 kips, including roof
and masonry weight. Since the structure is
symmetrical, the center of mass and the center of
rigidity coincide and are located at the center of the
canopy. This symmetry also allows equal distribution
of the direct shear force.
Seismic loading governs the canopy design. The
canopy is constructed of reinforced column and beam
elements. Thus
C, : 2.5(0.04) = 0.029
3.5
and the total diaphragm shear is calculated as follows
V = 0.029x48.8 kips = 1.41 kips in both directions
Allowing for an accidental eccentricity of 5 % of 20 It,
equal to 1 It, each column must resist a maximum
shear of:
Shear to column in the east- west direction
= [1.41kips ~(1.41 kips x ~ ) ] = 0.42 kips
Shear to column in north- south direction
_ 1.41 kips _ 0.35 kips
4
0.05 x 30 ft
The torsion of 1.41 kips × - 0.12 kips due
19it
to north-south seismic loads is resisted by the east-
west portal frame.
These analyses assume that the columns are
spaced at 19 It on center. The columns form a
resisting couple in the east-west direction only because
beams are provided in that direction only. This is a
conservative assumption, since it neglects the
contribution of the columns in the north-south
direction, under north-south loading.

Seismic Loads -- Reinforced System
Computer Analysis
Reinforced Wall --Construction Option B
The following presentation describes a load
distribution to the resisting elements in the RCJ Hotel for
Wall Construction Option B using a computer analysis.
Many PC-based structural analysis programs are
available to the practicing engineer. Some of the most
common are ETABS, STAADIII, SAP90, and
GTSTRUDL. These programs are simple to use and
provide a variety of pre- and postprocessors.
If a computerized analysis program is used, a more
detailed structural analysis of masonry structures is
possible. Applying this method of analysis to the RCJ
Hotel allows the effect of the coupling beams and openings
in both the shear walls and the diaphragm to be readily
incorporated in the analysis.
Most computer structural analysis programs model
diaphragms as rigid elements with 3 degrees of freedom.
The designer must review the program manual to ensure
that the element properties and limitations are clearly
understood.
When determining the cross-sectional properties for
use in the analysis, uncracked section properties are used.
If a more refined analysis is desired, the individual
elements can be subsequently checked to ensure that they
remain untracked. If any element exceeds the cracking
loading, cracked section properties can be calculated based
on the results of the initial loading and the analysis rerun.
The analysis and cracked section calculations can be
repeated until convergence is reached. However, unless
the computed design forces in critical elements change
significantly as a result of the cracking, the additional
computational effort of repeated iterations may not be
justified.
If shear wall elements intersect, the designer is
required by Code Section 1.7.5.1 to consider flanged wall
actions when wall connections comply with the
requirements of Code Section 1.9.4.2. In many building
configurations it is more conservative to ignore flanged
walls and Code Section 1.7.5.1 can be neglected.
Code Section 1.9.4.2.3 limits the effective flange
width on each side of the web to 6 times the flange
thickness and requires minimum connection detail to
ensure composite action. Since it is often difficult to
computer model the building with the 6 times the flange
thickness limitation, considering that the analysis is in
different directions, the designer must use sub-elements to
17-212
Chapter 17
effectively model code requirements.
The lateral load resisting elements of a typical
floor of the RCJ Hotel is shown in MDG Fig. 17.3-17.
This configuration is slightly different from that given for
the hand calculation presentation, incorporating the
resistance of both North and South stairwell walls and
having removed the center column on Grid Line E,
between Grid Lines 3 and 4. Note that the building is taller
with this building option as well.
MDG Fig. 17.3-18 shows the pier and coupling
beam configurations on the major Grid Lines. Where there
are perforations in the walls pier, identification labels are
shown.
Using the model of the lateral load resisting
elements shown in MDG Figs. 17.3-17 and 17.3-18, an
analysis of the RCJ Hotel was performed using the ETABS
program. Seismic loads govern and the magnitude of the
story shears were calculated using the procedures
described in the hand calculation presentation. These
calculations and their results are summarized below. The
three load cases shown in MDG Fig. 17.3-17 were
analyzed to account for the accidental eccentricity
described in the hand calculation presentation. A fourth
load case, the east-west shear applied north of the center of
mass, was neglected since by inspection it does not govern.
Load Calculations
The total seismic load is the same in both
directions and has a value of (for Seismic Performance
Category D):
V = 0.286 x W
V = 0.286 x 5050 kips = 1437 kips Reinforced System
The building shear is distributed vertically to the
floors/roof using the ASCE 7-93 equation:
Fx =c~v
as was previously presented in the hand calculations. The
loads presented in MDG Table 17.3.24 were used in the
analysis and the critical wall shears produced by the three
loading eases are summarized in MDG Table 17.3.25. The
tabulated shear force values are cumulative shears. The
critical end moments on the coupling beams are
summarized in MDG Table 17.3.26.
Building Design

I
® ~)~ IN

~Wall D,1-2 Wall F,1-2

,,//Wall E,1-2 /
/ WallB,1-2 Wall C,1-2 .~EastWest
f

"" , ------~ -~
akCMo '' 3.33'
/ WallB,3-4 Wall F,3-4
~Wall D,3-4 i /
Y . - . - Lobby

- X
'I.. 7.~0,7.50'
Defines Lateral Load-Carrying Walls
..... Defines Lateral Load-Carrying Walls Present Above 2nd Floor
(See Pier Elevations)
I~ Load Case

Fig. 17.3-17 Lateral Load Carrying Elements of RCJ Hotel at First Floor (Neglecting Canopy)

Table 17.3.24 Story Shear Forces - - Reinforced System

Level ht W Wh F Floor Force Story Shear

(ft) (kips) fit-kips) (kips) (kips)

Roof 39.8 1,090 43,200 494 494

4th Floor 30.2 1,320 40,300 461 955

3rd Floor 20.5 1,320 27,400 314 1269

2nd Floor 10.8 1,320 14,700 168 1437

Sum 5,050 125,600 1437

17-213
 C h a p t e r 17

Piers On Grid Line 2

Roof
P1 4th Floor
P1 3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Pl

Indicates Beam X Indicates Opening

Piers On Grid Line B Piers On Grid Line E

P1 B3~ P2 Roof P1 P3 Roof

P1 93~ P2 4th Floor P1 P3 4th Floor
p1B1 93 P2 3rd Floor P1 P3 3rd Floor
P1 ~P3~ P2 2nd Floor I~I P2 P3 2nd Floor
Piers On Grid Line C Piers On Grid Line F
P1 P4 Roof P1 B2 P2 Roof
P1 P4 4th F l o o r P1 B,~ P2 4th Floor
B1 P1B2 P4 3rd Floor P1 B2
BI! P2 3rd Floor
P1 ~]p:;~ P3 P4 2nd Floor P1 M P2 2nd Floor

Piers On Grid Line D (~ <~ PiersOn

P1 P2 Roof p[--~- Grid Line 3
Roof
P1 P2 4th Floor P1 4th Floor
P1 P2 3rd Floor P1 3rd Floor
P1 P2 2nd Floor 2nd Floor

Fig. 17.3-18 Lateral Load Resisting Piers Along the Major Grid Lines

17-214
Building Design

Table 17.3.25 Critical Shear Force Results

Wall Location
I
Level
I
Pier ID Shear Force (kipO
At LineB : Roof , P1 103
t I
P2 93
!
4th I
P1 i
161
I I
P2 I
150
I
3rd I
P1 I
208
| i
P2 i
187
2nd P1 I
84
P2 I
259
P3 I
66
At C B/W 3&4 I
Roof P1 6
I
4th P1 50
i
3rd P1 75
I
2nd P1 14
t
P2 47
t
P3 14
At C B/W l&2 I
Roof P4 49
I
4th P4 98
I
3rd P4 127
I
2nd P4 165
At D B/W 3&4 I
Roof P1 11
I
4th P1 55
I
3rd P1 86
t
2nd P1 132
At D B/W l&2 I
Roof P2 41
I
4th P2 86
I
3rd P2 113
1
2nd P2 142
At E B/W 3&4 , Roof P1 20
4th P1 73
I 3rd P1 115
I
2nd P1 47
!
P2 I
47
At E B/W l&2 I
Roof P3 I
43
i
4th P3 t
90
i
3rd P3 t
119
!
2nd P3 I
139
At F B/W 3&4 i
Roof P1 i
98
I
4th P1 I
153
I
3rd P1 I
197
i
2rid P1 173
At F B/W l&2 I
Roof P2 ~ 90
i
4th P2 142
i
3rd P2 174
I
2nd P2 223
At Line 3 , Roof P1 -8
B/W A&B I
4th P1 40
I
3rd P1 70
!
2nd P1 115
Line 3 I
Roof P2 8
B/W F&G i
4th P2 41
i
3rd P2 73
2nd P2 116

17-215
 Chapter 17

Table 17.3.25 Critical Shear Force Results (continued)

Wall Location , Level , Pier ID Shear Force ~kies~
Elevator , Roof : East-West : 47
Shaft North-South External 0
I t
North-South Intemal I
5
I
4th I
East-West I
96
I I
North-South External 1
9
I I
North-South Internal I
18
i
3rd I
East-West I
47
I I
North-South External I
20
North-South Internal 26
I
2nd I
East-West 136
I
North-South External 38
i
North-South Internal 41
At Line 2B/W A&B !
Roof I P1 9
4th I
P1 57
3rd !
P1 92
2nd I
P1 47
I
P10 17
At Line 2B/W B&C , Roof , P2 95
I
4th I
P2 153
3rd I P2 191
I
2nd I
P2 208
At Line 2B/W C&D I
Roof I P3 109
P8 18
4th i P3 165
P8 17
At Line 2B/W C&D , 3rd I, P3 202
P8 20
I
2nd P3 I
213
P8 17
At Line 2B/W D&E I
Roof P4 I
43
I
P5 I
67
I
4th P4 I
69
I
P5 I
89
I
3rd P4 I
89
I
P5 I
101
i
2nd P4 I
106
P5 I
109
At Line 2B/W E&F Roof P6 I
93
P9 I
18
4th P6 153
P9 17
3rd P6 191
P9 20
2nd P6 208
P9 17
At Line 2B/W F&G Roof P7 9
4th P7 57
3rd P7 92
2nd P7 80
PI1 17

17-216
Building Design

Table 17.3.26 Critical Beam Moment Reaction Results

Wall Level [ Ba~"I.D. ~ Moment At Left End Moment At Risht End
At Line B Roof . B3 ~ 464 384
B3 , 689 626
B3 , 682 650
2rid BI 99 145
B2 I
15 115
At Line C 2nd B1 I
58 61
B2 61 58
At Line E 2nd B1 Neglected Neglected
At Line F Roof B2 ' 444 l 369
4th B2 I
662 604
3rd B2 I
661 627
2nd B1 i
-15 109
At Line 2 Roof B2 407 662
B3 707 314
B4 337 728
B5 794 509
B6 335 190
B7 765 358
B8 243 699
B9 664 409
4th B2 734 907
B3 920 681
B4 718 953
B5 1071 872
B6 574 428
I
B7 I
1008 I
753
I
B8 I
669 I
909
I
B9 [
910 I
737
3rd I B2 I
820 t
1021
I
B3 I
958 I
705
|
B4 i
741 i
991
i B5 , 1161 , 950
I
i B6 I
744 I
571
I
B7 I
1047 I
760
I
B8 I
693 !
946
I
B9 I
1022 1
822
2nd , B1 , 222 -31
I
B2 I
819 1408
!
B3 I
1308 673
I
B4 I
673 1346
B5 1568 970
B6 I
1163 673
B7 I
1461 705
B8 !
666 1299
B9 i
1406 815
B10 -32 225

17-217
 Chapter 17

17.3.4 Example Problems example problems is included in MDG Section 17.3.1 to

To illustrate the application of the Code to typical give the reader a summary of the design issues addressed
structural design considerations for multistory loadbearing by each example problem.
masonry slructures, 23 example problems are presented for The material properties typically used in the design
the RCJ Hotel in this MDG section. A listing of the examples related to the RCJ Hotel are:

Property ConereteMasonry Grout Clay Masonry Grout

Unit Compressive 2000 NA 6600 N/A
Strength, psi
Mortar Type N NA N, S* N/A
f ' , psi; fg, psi 1500 2700 2500 3500
E, psi 1.35x106 1.35 x 1 0 6 1.75x106 1.75x106
n 21.5 21.5 16.6 16.6
* TypeN mortarfor Wall constructionOptionA; TypeS Mortarfor WallConstructionOptionB.

REFERENCES
17.1.1 ASCE Standard, ASCE 7-93, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," American Society of Civil
Engineers, New York, NY, 1993.
17.1.2 Guide To The Use of The Wind Load
Provisions of ASCE 7-88, American Society of
Civil Engineers, 1992.
17.3.1 ETABS User's Manual, Computers and
Structures, Inc., Berkeley, Cal., 1995

17-218
 Table t7.3.t Loads on the Top of Fourth Floor Walls - - B u i l d i n ~ II
R o o f Loads ¢
El
m
eL
Wall Grids Trib Width Length Dead Load Live Load Total Wall Load Remarks Dead Loads m|

(ft) (ft) (psf) (psf) (psO (plO Cl2

B and F, 1-2, 3-4 15.0 29.7 and 95.0 20.0 1,725 Dead + Live 1,425
g)
I |

15.0 28.7 95.0 -40.0 825 Dead + Wind 1,425

gt
C, I-2; C,D & E, 3-4 30.0 28.7, 29.7 95.00 20.0 3,450 Dead+ Live 2,850
(And E & D, 1-2 Away From Elevator Shaft)
30.0 and 19.7 95.00 -40.0 1,650 Dead + Wind 2,850

D, 1-2 & Near Elevator Shaft 15.0 10.0 95.0 20.0 1,725 Dead + Live 1,425

15.0 10.0 95.0 -40.0 825 Dead + Wind t,425

Opposite Side Of Elevator Shaft 7.5 10.0 95.0 20.0 862 Dead + Live 712

_x 70 10.0 95.0 -40.0 412 Dead + Wind 712

"4
._x
E, 1-2 Opposite Elevator Shaft 220 10.0 95.0 20.0 2,587 Dead + Live 2,137
to
220 10.0 95.0 -40.0 1,237 Dead + Wind 2,137

A And G, 2-3 70 9.33 95.0 20.0 862 Dead + Live 712

70 9.33 95.0 -40.0 412 Dead + Wind 712

B And F, 2-3 220 9.33 95.0 20.0 2,587 Dead + Live 2,137

220 9.33 95.0 -40.0 1,237 Dead + Wind 2,137

Wall Load (lb) Wall Load (Ib)

Wall Reaction Loads From Beam B-2 30.0 80 95.0 20.0 14,660 Dead + Live 12,110

30.0 80 95.0 -40.0 7,012 Dead + Wind 12,110

Reaction loads, Lintels On B And F, 2-3 22.5 3.67 95 20 5,092 Dead + Live 4,265
 Table t7.3.2 Loads on the Top of Third Floor Walls - - Building Option
Wall Trib Width Length Dead Load Live Load Influence Area LLRF Floor Wall Total Wall Remarks Dead Loads
(ft) (ft) (psO (ps0 (sq. ft.) Load (plf) Load (plf) (plf or lb)

B and F, 1-2 15.0 29.7 110. 40.0 890 0.753 2,100 4,500 Dead + Live 3,740

B and F, 3-4 Ignoring 15.0 28.7 110. 40.0 860 0.761 2,110 4,510 Dead + Live 4,450
Stairwell Area

B and F Near Stairwell 15.0 6.0 110. 100.0 180. 1.00 3,150 6,410 Dead + Live 4,450

C, 1-2 30.0 29.7 110. 40.0 1780 0.606 4,030 8,150 Dead + Live 6,830

C, D and E, 3-4 30.0 28.7 110. 40.0 1720 0.612 4,030 8,160 Dead + Live 6,830

D, 1-2 Near Elevator Shaft 15.0 10.0 110. 40.0 300 1.00 2,250 4,650 Dead + Live 3,750

Opposite Side Of Elevator 7.5 10.0 110. 40.0 150. 1.00 1,125 2,660 Dead + Live 2,210
Shaft
_x
E, 1-2 Opposite Elevator 22.5 10.0 110. 40.0 450. 0.957 3,340 6,600 Dead + Live 5,290
IO Shaft
IO
0
D & E, 1-2 Away From 30.0 19.7 110. 40.0 1180 0.687 4,125 8,250 Dead + Live 6,830
Elevator Shaft
Load (lb) Total Load
(lb)

Reactions Of Beams B-2 30.0 8.5 110. 100.0 510 0.914 25,680 40,340 Dead + Live 26,140

Reaction-Lintels-GridsB 15.0 3.7 110. 100.0 110. 1.0 11,770 Dead + Live 8,190
and F

Reaction Of Curtain Wall 30.0 9.7 10.0 -- 2,900 2,900 Dead 2 floors
On All But B And F O
~r
Reaction Of Curtain Wall 15.0 9.7 10.0 1,450 1,450 Dead 2 floors
On B And F On All Other
m
II
Elements
...x

"4
 Table 17.3.3 Loads on the Top of Second Floor Walls - - Building Option
Wall Trib Width "Lenl~th
Length (ft) Dead Load Live Load Influence Area LLRF Floor Wall Total Wall Remarks Dead Loads m |
m

Load (Pl0 Load (pli) (plf or lb) a_

(rt) (psi) (psi) (sq. ft.) m|
II
B and F, 1-2 15.0 29.7 110. 40.0 1,780 0.606 4,030 7,110 Dead + Live 6,060 W
i

B and F, 3-4 15.0 28.7 110. 40.0 1,720 0.612 4,030 7,110 Dead + Live 6,080
i |
Ignoring Stairwell area ta
II
B and F, near 2-3 15.0 6.00 110. 100. 360 1.00 3,150 10,240 Dead+ Live 6,790

C, 1-2 30.0 29.7 110. 40.0 3,560 0.501 7,800 12,610 Dead+ Live 10,800

C, D and E, 3-4 30.0 28.7 110. 40.0 3,440 0.506 7,810 12,620 Dead + Live 10,800

D, 1-2 near elevator shaft 15.0 10.0 110. 40.0 600 0.862 4,335 7,410 Dead + Live 6,080

Opposite side of elevator 7.50 10.0 110. 40.0 300 1.00 2,250 4,470 Dead + Live 3,720
shaft
..x
E, 1-2 Opposite elevator 22.5 10.0 110. 40.0 900 0.750 6,300 10,240 Dead+Live 8,440
"4
shaft
M
--I-

D & E, 1-2 away from 30.0 19.7 110. 40.0 2,360 0.559 7,940 12,750 Dead + Live 10,800
elevator shaft
Load (lb) Total Load
(lb)

Reactions of Beams B-2 30.0 8.50 110. 100. 1,020 0.720 46,400 61,060 Dead + Live 40,160

Reaction of Curtain Wall 30.0 9.67 10.0 5,800 5,800 Dead 2 floors
on all but B and F

Reaction of Curtain Wall 15.0 9.67 10.0 2,900 2,900 Dead 2 floors
on Grids B and F

Reactions-Lintel-Grids 15.0 3.67 110. 100. 220 1.00 18,450 3ead+Live 12,120
B&F, 2-3
 Table 17.3.4 Loads on the Top of First Floor Walls - - Building Option I
Wall Trib Width Length (ft) Dead Load Live Load Influence LLRF 3 Floor Wall Total Wall Remarks Dead Loads
(ft) (psi') (psO Area (sq. ft.) Load (plf) Load (plf) (plf or Ib)

B and F, 1-2 15.0 29.7 110 40.0 2,670 0.540 5,920 9,680 Dead + Live 8,380
Ignoring Stairwell Area

B and F near 1 and 2 15.0 6.00 110 100. 540 0.895 3,150 13,600 Dead + Live 9,120

F, 3 -4 15.0 28.7 110 40.0 2,580 0.545 5,930 9,690 Dead + Live 8,410

C, 1-2 30.0 29.7 110 40.0 5,340 0.455 11,540 17,020 Dead + Live 14,780

D, 3-4 30.0 28.7 110 40.0 5,160 0.459 11,550 17,030 Dead + Live 14,780

D, 1-2 near elevator shaft 15.0 10.0 110 40.0 900 0.750 6,300 10,060 Dead + Live 8,410

Opposite side of elevator shaft 7.50 10.0 110 40.0 450 0.957 3,340 6,230 Dead + Live 5,220

E, 1-2 Opposite elevator shaft 22.5 10.0 110 40.0 1,350 0.658 9,200 13,820 Dead + Live 11,590
/o
M
K~ D & E, 1-2 away from 30.0 19.7 110 40.0 3,540 0.502 11,700 17,190 Dead + Live 14,780
elevator shaft

2 sections on B, 3-4 15.0 11.2 110 40.0 1,005 0.723 6,250 10,010 Dead + Live 8,410

C, 3-4 3.33 long 30.0 3.33 110 40.0 599 0.863 13,010 18,490 Dead + Live 14,780

C, 3-4, 10.67 long 30.0 10.7 110 40.0 1,920 0.592 12,030 17,510 Dead + Live 14,780

Load (lb) Total Load

(Ib)

Reactions of Beams B-2 30.0 8.50 110 100 1,530 0.633 66,310 80,970 Dead + Live 54,190

Reactions-Lintels-Grids j 15.0 9.67 110 [ 100 -- 1.00 -- 25,130 Dead + Live 16,050 O
gl"
B and F, 2-3
I I '13
Ill

=4
 Table 17.3.4 Loads on the Top of First Floor Walls - - W
Wall Trib Width Length (ft) Dead Load Live Load Influence LLRF 3 Floor Wall Total Wall Remarks Dead Loads l |
m

(ft) (psi) (psi) Area (sq. ft.) Load (pli) Load (plf) (plf or ib) n_
l ,

Reaction of Curtain Wall on 30.0 9.67 10.0 8,700 8,700 Dead 3 floors tQ
all but B and F U
m
4,350 4,350 Dead 3 floors w
Reaction of Curtain Wall on B 15.0 9.67 10.0 . . . . m|

andF

Reactions of Beams 15.0 6.67 110 40.0 600 0.862 21,680 34,210 Dead + Live 28,030
L3

Reactions of Beams 30.0 6.67 110 40.0 1,200 0.683 41,210 59,500 Dead + Live 49,300
L1

Column Grid E, 4 30.0 7.50 110 40.0 2,700 0.539 88,790 129,900 Dead + Live ] 110,900
OPTION A

Column Grid E, mid. 3-4 30.0 15.0 110 40.0 5,400 0.454 173,000 2 5 5 , 2 0 0 Dead + Live 221,700
-4 OPTION A
Io 40.0 4,140 0.483 144,300 2 0 0 , 1 0 0 Dead + Live 110,900
Column Grid E, 3 30.0 7.50 110

OPTION A 4.00 100

Column Grid E, 4 30.0 15.0 110 40.0 5,400 0.454 173,000 2 5 5 , 2 0 0 Dead + Live 221,700
OPTION B

Colmnn Grid E, 3 30.0 15.0 110 40.0 6,840 0.431 226,900 3 2 3 , 8 0 0 Dead + Live 181,800

OPTION B 4.00 100

Total Load Dead (plf)
(pii)
BEAM 1 30.0 30.0 110 40.0 5,400 0.454 -- 17,020 Dead + Live 14,750

OPTION B
Table 17.3.5 Loads on the Top of Walls in the Stairwell Area and on Canopy
Loads in Stairwell Area Grids I and 2, A-B and F-G, Top of Walls

Wall Landing Loads (plf) Wall Weight (plf) Total Load (plfj Remarks Dead Load (plf)

2 it Section, 4th Floor 1,633 677 2,310 Dead + Live 2,080

1.5 It Section, 4th Floor 801 677 1,478 Dead + Live 1,045

2 ft Section, 4th-3rd 1,633 1,015 2,548 Dead + Live 2,415

1.5 It Section, 4th-3rd 801 1,015 1,816 Dead + Live 1,380

2 ft Section, 3rd Floor 3,266 1,354 4,620 Dead + Live 4,150

1.5 It Section, 3rd Floor 1,602 1,354 2,956 Dead + Live 2,090

2 It Section, 3rd-2nd 3,266 1,692 4,958 Dead + Live 4,490

1.5 It Section, 3rd-2nd 1,602 1,692 3,294 Dead + Live 2,430

2 It Section, 2nd Floor 4,899 2,031 6,930 Dead + Live 6,230

1.5 ft Section, 2nd Floor 2,403 2,031 4,434 Dead + Live 3,135

Loads on Canopy

Elements Trib Width (ft) Length (ft) Dead Load (psi) Trib Area (sq. ft.) Live Load (psi) Total Load (plf)

Beams 10.0 32.0 50.0 320 20.0 700

10.0 32.0 50.0 320 -40.0 100

Load Oh)

Columns 10.0 16.0 50.0 160 20.0 11,200

10.0 16.0 50.0 160 -40.0 1,600

O
W

t~
11I
..x
,q
 W
Table t7.3.7 Lateral Loads to Second Floor Walls, Load Case I t~
mE
aml

Wall On Between Length k(y x k*x X" k*X' k*X'A2 kW(SUM)k k*X'*MT/Jr Wall Shear Load* o_
l |
Number Line (ft.) direct) (kips) (kips) (kips) gl

1 B 1- 2 29.3 9.88 15.0 148.0 63.5 628. 39,880. 50.3 20.0 70.2
2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 1.26 15.0 18.9 63.5 80.0 5,081.0 6.40 2.54 8.95 t~
tD
3 B 3.5-4 13.0 3.04 15.0 45.6 63.5 193. 12,270. 15.5 6.14 21.5 tn
iii,

4 C 1-2 29.7 10.0 45.0 451.0 33.5 336. 11,270. 51.0 10.7 61.7 m
gl
5 C 3-3.1 3.33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0 0.62 0.13 0.75
6 C 3.3 - 3.6 10.7 2.10 45.0 94.7 33.5 70.6 2,367.0 10.7 2.25 13.0
7 C 3.9-4.0 3.33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0 0.62 0.13 0.75
8 D 1 -2 29,7 10.0 75.0 751.0 3.54 35.4 125.0 60.0 1.13 52.1
9 D 3-4 30.0 10.2 75.0 761.0 3.54 35.9 127.0 51.6 1.14 52.8
10 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 2.10 81.0 170.0 2.46 5.18 12.8 10.7 -0.16 10.5
11 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 2.10 90.0 189.0 11.5 24.1 276.0 10.7 -0.76 9.93
12 E 1 -2 29.7 10.0 105.0 1,052.0 2 6 1 5 265. 7,014.0 60.0 -8.44 42.5
13 E 3-4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 78.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
14 F 1 -2 29.3 9.88 135.0 1,334.0 56.5 558. 31,490. 50.3 -17.8 32.5
._L

~4 15 F 3-4 28.3 9.47 135.0 1,278.0 56.5 535. 30,190. 48.1 -17.0 31.1

I0 Floor 2rid Sum k = 80.3 Sum kx 6,305.0 * Shear load from floor applied to top
OT
Height 8.83 ft XCR = 78.5
Floor Shear 409 = (V) of element at diaphragm level,
k(x y k*y Y" k*Y' k*Y'^2
16 1.7 .2-.5 15.7 4.15 48.0 199.0 10.9 45.2 491.0 including torsional effects.
17 2 A-B 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40
18 2 B.1 - B.8 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23
19 2 C.I - C.9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23
20 2 D - D.4 10.7 2.10 38.0 80.0 0.87 1.84 1.61
21 2 D.5-D.9 12.0 2.63 38.0 100.0 0.87 2.30 2.01
22 2 E. 1 - E.9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23
23 2 F-G 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40
24 3 A-B 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0
25 3 F-G 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0
Sum k = 47.2 Sum ky 1,750.0 Jr = 141,500
YCR = 37.1
Load Case I XCM = 75.0 ex = 3.54 e aee = 7.50
e net = 11.0 MT = 3,950.
 Table 17.3.8 Lateral Loads to Second Floor Walls, Load Case 2
Watt Number On Line Between Length (R) k(y dkeet) x k*x X" k*X' k*~^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*~*~/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

I B 1- 2 29.3 9.88 15.0 148.2 63.5 627.0 39,890.0 50.3 -7.17 43.1

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 1.26 15.0 18.9 63.5 80.0 5,082.0 6A0 -0.91 5,48

3 B 3.5 - 4 13.0 3.04 15.0 45.6 63.5 193.0 12,270.0 15.5 -2.20 13,2

4 C 1-2 29.7 10.0 45.0 451.0 33.5 336.0 11,270.0 51.0 -3.84 47.1

5 C 3 - 3,1 3.33 0. t2 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0 0.62 -0.05 0.06

6 C 3.3 - 3.6 10.7 2.10 45.0 94.7 33.5 70.6 2,367.0 10.7 -0.81 9.89

7 C 3.9 - 4.0 3.33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0 0.62 -0.05 0.06

8 D I-2 29.7 10,0 75.0 751.0 3.54 35.5 125.0 60.0 -0.41 50.5

9 D 3-4 30.0 10.2 75.0 761.0 3.54 35.9 127.0 51.6 -0.41 51.2

10 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 2.10 81.0 170.0 2.46 5.1g 12.g 10.7 0.06 10.8

11 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 2. I0 90.0 189.0 11.5 24.1 276.0 10.7 0.27 11.0

12 E 1- 2 29.7 10.0 105. 1,052.0 26.5 265.0 7,013.0 60.0 3.03 53.9

13 E 3 -4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 78.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

14 F 1- 2 29.3 9,88 135.0 1,334.0 56.5 558.0 31,490.0 50.3 6.37 56.5

15 F 3-4 28.3 9,47 135.0 1,278.0 56.5 535.0 30,190.0 48.1 6,11 54.3

_L * Shear load fzom floor applied to top

,q Floor 2nd Sum k = 80.3 Sum kx = 6,305.0

Height 8.83 fl XCR = 78.5 of element at diaphragm level,

Floor Shear 409 kips = (V)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2 including torsional effects.
16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 4.15 48.0 199.0 10.9 45.2 491.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40

18 2 B.I -B.8 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0,87 5.98 5,23

19 2 C. I - C.9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23

20 2 D - DA 10.7 2.10 38.0 80.0 0.87 1.84 1.61

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 2.63 38.0 100.0 0.87 2.30 2.01

22 2 E.I - E.9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23

23 2 F -G 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40

24 3 A- B 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0

25 3 F -G 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0

Sum k = 47.2 Sum Icy = 1,750.0 It= 141,500.0 O

YCR = 37.1
m
Load Case 2 XCM = 75.0 ex = 3.54 e ace = 7.50
till
e net ~ -3,96 MT = -1,418.0 O
11

-4
 m
¢
m|
Table 17.3.9 Lateral Loads to Second Floor Walls, Load Case 3 i
a_
iI
Wall Number On Line Between Length (R) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kVI(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*M'r/Ir (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1-2 29.3 9.88 15.0 148.0 63.5 628.0 39,880.0

t~
2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 1.26 15.0 18.9 63.5 80.0 5,082.0
U
O
3 B 3.5 - 4 13.0 3.04 15.0 45.6 63.5 193.0 12,270.0
Illll
4 C 1 -2 29.7 I0.0 45.0 451.0 33.5 336.0 I 1,270.0 tQ
5 C 3-3.1 3.33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0
6 C 3.3 - 3.6 10.7 2.10 45.0 94.7 33.5 70.6 2,367.0
7 C 3,9 - 4,0 3,33 0,12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0
8 D t -2 29.7 10.0 75.0 751.0 3,54 35.5 125.0
9 D 3 -4 30.0 10.2 75.0 761.0 3.54 35.9 127.0

10 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 2,10 gl.0 170.0 2.46 5.18 12.B

11 D.5 1.7-2 10,7 2.10 90,0 189.0 11.5 24.1 276.0

12 E 1- 2 29.7 10.0 105.0 1,052.0 26.5 265.0 7,013.0

13 E 3 - 4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 78.6 0.0 0.0

14 F 1-2 29.3 9.88 135.0 1,334.0 56.5 558.0 31,490.0 * Shear load from floor applied
15 F 3 -4 28.3 9.47 135.0 1,278.0 56.5 535.0 30,190.0

to top of elemerlt at diaphragm

.4 Floor 2nd Sum k = 80.3 Sum kx = 6,305.0

Height 8.83 R XCR ~ 78.5 level, including torsional effects.

Floor Shear 409 kips = (3/)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y ~ k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15,7 4.15 48.0 199.0 10.9 45.2 491.0 36.0 -0.87 35.1

17 2 A-B 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40 38.4 -0.08 38.3

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 6,84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 -0AI 59.1

19 2 C.1 - C . 9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 -0.11 59.1

20 2 D-D.4 10.7 2.10 38.0 80.0 0.87 1.84 1.61 18,2 -0.03 18.2

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 2.63 38.0 100.0 0.87 2.30 2.01 22.8 -0.04 22.8

22 2 E. 1 - E.9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 -0.11 59.1

23 2 F-G 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40 38.4 -0.08 38.3

24 3 A-B 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0 38.4 0.72 39.1

25 3 F-G 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0 38.4 O.72 39.t

Sum k = 47.2 Sum Icy = 1,750.0 Jr = t41,500.0

YCR = 37.1

Load Case 3 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.30 e acc= 3.38

 Table 17.3.10 Lateral Loads to Second Floor Walls, Load Case 4
Well Number On Line Between L c n ~ h (~) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Ir (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1-2 29.3 9.88 15.0 148,0 63.5 628.0 39,880.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8,33 1,26 15,0 18.9 63.5 80.0 5,082.0

3 B 3.5 - 4 13,0 3,04 15.0 45.6 63.5 193.0 12,270,0

4 C 1-2 29.7 10.0 45.0 451,0 33.5 336.0 11,270.0

5 C 3-3.1 3,33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0

6 C 3.3 - 3.6 10.7 2.10 45.0 94.7 33.5 70.6 2,367.0

7 C 3.9 - 4.0 3.33 0.12 45.0 5.47 33.5 4.07 137.0

8 D 1-2 29.7 I0.0 75.0 75 LO 3.54 35.5 125.0

9 D 3-4 30.0 10.2 75.0 761.0 3.54 35.9 127.0

10 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 2.10 81.0 170.0 2.46 5.18 12,8

11 D.5 1.7-2 10.7 2.10 90.0 189.0 11.5 24. t 276,0

12 E 1-2 29.7 lO.O 105.0 1,052.0 26.5 265.0 7,013.0

13 E 3 -4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 78.5 0.0 0~0

14 F 1- 2 29.3 9.88 135.0 1,334.0 56.5 558,0 31,490.0 * Shear load from floor applied
15 F 3 -4 28.3 9A7 t35.0 1,278.0 56.5 535.0 30,190.0
._x
to top of element at diaphragm
"4 Sum k = 80.3 Sum kx = 6,305.0
Floor 2nd
!0 Height 8.83 R XCR = 78.5 level, including torsional effects.
GO
Floor Shear 409 kips = (V)

k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 4.15 48,0 199.0 10.9 45.2 491.0 36.0 0.01 36.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 4.44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40 38.4 0.0 38.4

18 2 B.I - B.8 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 0,0 59.2

19 2 C.I - C . 9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 0.0 59.2

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 2.10 38.0 80.0 0.87 1.84 L61 18.2 0.0 18.2

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 2.63 38.0 100.0 0.87 2.30 2.01 22.8 0.0 22.8

22 2 E.1 - E . 9 22.0 6.84 38.0 260.0 0.87 5.98 5.23 59.2 0.0 59.2

23 2 F-G 16,3 4,44 38.0 169.0 0.87 3.88 3.40 38.4 0~0 38.4

24 3 A-B 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0 38.4 -0.01 38.4

25 3 F-G 16.3 4.44 28.7 127.0 8.46 37.5 317.0 38.4 -0.01 38.4

Sum k = 47.2 Sum ky = 1,750.0 Jr = 141,500.0

O
YCR = 37.1 W
"a
Load Case 4 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.30 eacc = 3.38

e net = -0.08 MT -30.4 O

ml
..x
,q
 W
Table 17.3.11 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Third Floor, Load Case I m|
Illl
Length (R) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUIV0k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)
a_
Wall Number On Line Between mlU

1 B 1-2 29.3 3.79 15.0 56.8 64.1 243.0 15,560.0 37,5 17.4 54.9

2 B 2,8 - 3.5 8.33 0.23 15.0 3.46 64.1 14.8 947.0 2.28 t .06 3.34
U
3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.28 15.0 4.26 64.1 18.2 1,165.0 2.80 1.31 4.11

4 B 3.7-4.0 t3.0 0.72 15.0 10.9 64.1 46.5 2,976.0 7.17 3.34 10.5 W
mill

5 C 1-2 29,7 3.86 45,0 174.0 34.1 132.0 4,483.0 38.2 9.45 47.7 ta
6 C 3-4 30,0 3.93 45.0 177.0 34,1 134.0 4,566.0 38.9 9.62 48.5

7 D 1-2 29,7 3.86 75.0 290.0 4.08 15.8 64.3 38.2 t.13 39.3

8 D 3-4 30,0 3.93 75:0 295.0 4.08 16.0 65.5 38.9 1.15 40.1

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.44 81,0 35.9 1.92 0.85 1.63 4.38 -0.06 4.32

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 103 0.44 90.0 39.9 10.9 4.83 52.8 4.38 -0.34 4.04

11 E 1-2 29,7 3.86 105.0 405.0 25.9 100.0 2,593.0 38.2 -7.18 31.0

12 E 3 -4 30,0 3.93 105.0 413.0 25,9 102,0 2,641,0 38.9 -7.32 31.6

13 F 1- 2 29,3 3.79 135.0 512.0 55.9 212.0 11,848.0 3%5 -15.2 22.3

14 F 3-4 28.3 3,58 t35.0 483.0 55.9 200.0 11,186.0 35.3 -14.4 20.9

* Shear load from floor applied

Floor 3rd Sum k = 36.7 S u m kx = 2,899.0
./k
Height 17.5 R XCR = 79.1 to top of element at diaphragm
Floor Shear 363 kips = (V)

(D level, including torsional effects.

k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 1.12 48.0 53.8 10.8 12,2 132.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1,04 0.88

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62

19 2 C.I - C . 9 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 0.44 38.0 16.8 0.84 0.37 0.32

21 2 D,5 - D.9 12.0 0.60 38.0 22.6 0.84 0.50 0.43

22 2 E.I - E . 9 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62

23 2 F-G 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88

24 3 A-B 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5

25 3 F-G 16.3 1.23 28,7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5

Sum k = 13.9 Sum ky = 516.0 Jr = 58,470.0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case 1 XCM = 75.0 ex = 4.08 e ace = 7.5

e net ~ 11.6 MT = 3,683.0
 Table 17,3.12 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Third Floor, Load Case 2
Wall Number On Line Between Length (ft) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Sheaz Load* (kips)

I B 1-2 29.3 3.79 15.0 56.8 64.1 243.0 15,560.0 37.5 -5.15 32.4

2 B 2.8 -3.5 8.3 0.23 15.0 3A6 64.l 14.8 94Z0 2.28 -0.31 1,97

3 B 3.5- 3.7 9.0 0.28 15.0 4.26 64,1 18.2 1,165.0 2.80 -0.39 2.41

4 B 3.7 - 4 . 0 13.0 0.72 15.0 10.9 64.1 46.5 2,976.0 7.17 -0.98 6.19

5 C 1- 2 29.7 3,86 45.0 174.0 34.1 t32.0 4,483.0 38.2 -2.79 35.4

6 C 3 -4 30,0 3.93 45.0 177.0 34.1 134.0 4,566.0 38.9 -2.84 36.1

7 D 1-2 29.7 3.86 75.0 290.0 4.08 15.8 64.3 38,2 -0.33 37.9

8 D 3-4 30.0 3.93 75.0 295.0 4.08 16.0 65.5 38.9 -0.34 38.6

9 D.2 1.7-2 10.7 0.44 81.0 35.9 1.92 0.85 1.63 4.38 -0.02 4.40

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.44 90.0 39.9 10.9 4.83 52.8 4.38 0.10 4,48

1t E 1 - 2 29.7 3.86 105.0 405.0 25.9 100.0 2,593.0 38.2 2.12 40.3

12 E 3 -4 30.0 3,93 105.0 413.0 25.9 102.0 2,641.0 38.9 2.15 41.2

13 F I-2 29.3 3.79 135.0 512.0 55.9 212.0 11,850.0 37.5 4.49 42.0

14 F 3 -4 28.3 3.58 135.0 483.0 55.9 200.0 11,186.0 35.3 4.24 39.5

* Shear load from floor applied

Floor 3rd Sum k = 36.7 Sum kx = 2,899.0
_x
"4 Height 17.5 1~ XCR = 79.1 to top of element at diaphragm
Floor Shear 363 kips = (V)
t~
O level, including torsional effects.
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y~'2

16 1.7 . 2 - .5 15.7 1.12 48.0 53.8 10.8 12.2 132.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88
18 2 B. 1 - B.8 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62
19 2 C. I - C.9 22.0 2,27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1,92 1.62

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 0.44 38,0 16.8 0,84 0.37 0.32

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 0.60 38.0 22.6 0.84 0.50 0.43

22 2 E. 1 - E.9 22,0 2,27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62

23 2 F-G 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88

24 3 A-B 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5

25 3 F-G 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10A 88.5

Sum k = 13.9 Stun ky = 516.0 Jr = 58,470.0 O

YCR = 37.2
W
Load Case 2 XCM = 75.0 ex = 4.08 e ace = 7.5
Pit
e net = -3.42 MT = -1,087.0
O
11
 Table 17.3.13 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Third Floor, Load Case 3 mE
m

Wall Number On Line Between Length (fl) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'A2 kV/(SU'M)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips) o_
m|

1 B 1- 2 29.3 3.79 15.0 56.8 64.1 243.0 15,560.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.23 15.0 3.46 64.1 14.8 947.0

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.28 15.0 4.26 64.1 18.2 1,165.0 O

t/l
m|
4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0.72 15.0 10.9 64.1 46.5 2,976.0
W
5 C I-2 29.7 3.86 45.0 174.0 34.1 132.0 4,483.0

6 C 3 -4 30.0 3.93 45.0 177,0 34.1 134.0 4,566.0

7 D 1-2 29.7 3.86 75.0 290.0 4.08 15.8 64.3

8 D 3-4 30.0 3.93 75.0 295.0 4.08 16.0 65.5

9 D,2 1.7-2 10.7 0.44 81,0 35.9 1.92 0.85 1.63

10 D,5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.44 90,0 39.9 10.9 4.g3 52.~.

11 E 1- 2 29.7 3.86 105.0 405.0 25.9 100.0 2,593.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 3.93 105,0 413.0 25.9 102.0 2,641.0 * Shear load from floor applied to top
13 F 1- 2 29.3 3.79 135.0 512.0 55.9 212.0 11,848.0

14 F 3-4 28.3 3.58 135.0 483.0 55.9 2oo.0 11,186.0 of element at diaphragm level,

including torsional effects.

Floor 3rd Sum k = 36.7 Sum kx = 2,899.0
ca
._x
Height 17.5 ft XCR = 79.1

Floor Shear 363 kips = (V)

k(x direct) y k*y Y~ k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 1.12 48.0 53,8 10.8 12.2 132.0 29.2 -0.50 28.7

17 2 A-B 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88 32.0 -0.05 31.9

18 2 B.1 -B.8 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 -0.08 59.2

19 2 C.I - C . 9 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 -O.O8 59.2

20 2 D - n.4 10.7 0.44 38,0 16.8 0.84 0.37 0.32 11.5 -0.01 11.5

21 2 D.5 - D . 9 12.0 0.60 38.0 22.6 0.84 0.50 0.43 15.5 -0.02 15.5

22 2 E. 1 - E.9 22.0 2.2"P 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 -0.08 59.2

23 2 F-G 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88 32.0 -0.05 31.9

24 3 A-B 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5 32.0 0.43 32.4

25 3 F -G 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5 32.0 0.43 32.4

Sumk = 13.9 Sum ky = 516.0 lr = 58,470,0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case 3 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.33 e ace = 3.38

enet= 6.71 NIT = 2,132.0

 Table 17.3.14 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Third Floor, Load Case 4
Wall Number On Line Between Length (R) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1- 2 29.3 3.79 15.0 56.8 64.1 243.0 15,560.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.23 15.0 3.46 64.1 14.8 947.0

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.28 t5.0 4.26 64.1 18.2 t,165.0

4 B 3.7-4.0 13,0 0.72 15.0 t0.9 64.1 46.5 2,976.0

5 C 1- 2 29,7 3.86 45.0 174.0 34.1 132.0 4,483.0

6 C 3-4 30,0 3.93 45.0 177.0 34.1 134.0 4,566.0

7 D 1- 2 29.7 3.86 75.0 290.0 4.08 15.8 64.3

8 D 3-4 30,0 3.93 75.0 295.0 4.08 16.0 65.5

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10,7 0.44 81.0 35.9 1.92 0.85 1.63

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.44 90.0 39.9 10.9 4.°03 52.8

11 E 1- 2 29.7 3.86 105.0 405.0 25.9 I00.0 2,593.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 ' 3.93 105.0 413.0 25.9 102.0 2.641.0 , Shear load from floor applied to top
13 F 1- 2 29.3 3.79 135.0 512.0 55.9 212.0 11,850.0

14 F 3-4 28.3 3.58 135.0 483.0 55.9 200.0 11,190.0 of element at diaphragm level,
_x

including torsional effects.

Floor 3rd Sum k = 36.7 Sum k x = 2,899.0

Height 17.5 fl XCR = 79.1

Floor Shear 363 kips = (V)

k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 1.12 48.0 53.8 10.8 12.2 132.0 29.2 0.0 29.2

17 2 A-B 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88 32.0 0.0 32.0

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 0.0 59.3

19 2 C.I - C . 9 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 0.0 59.3

20 2 D-D.4 10.7 0.44 38.0 16.8 0.84 0.37 0.32 II.5 0.0 11.5

21 2 D 5 - D.9 12.0 0.60 38.0 22.6 0.84 0.50 0.43 15.5 0.0 15.5

22 2 E.1 - E . 9 22.0 2.27 38.0 86.4 0.84 1.92 1.62 59.3 0,0 59.3

23 2 F- G 16.3 1.23 38.0 46.7 0.84 1.04 0.88 32.0 0.0 32.0

24 3 A-B 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5 32.0 0.0 32.0

25 3 F-G 16.3 1.23 28.7 35.3 8.49 10.4 88.5 32.0 0.0 32.0 O
7
W
Sumk = 13.9 Sumky = 516.0 Jr = 58,470.0 "t$
YCR = 37.2 ¢D
=1
Load Case 4 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.33 e ace = -3.38

enet= -0.05 MT = -17.4 ".4

 m
¢
Table 17.3.15 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Fourth Floor, Load Case 1 till|
m
Wall Number On Line Between Length(ft) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips) o_
ma

1 B t-2 29.3 1.81 15.0 27.2 64.6 117.0 7,554.0 28.8 14.3 43.1

1.13 64.6 4.84 313.0 1.20 0.59 1.11

2 B 2.8-3.5 8.33 0.08 15.0 t~
3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.09 15.0 1.40 64.6 6.03 389.0 1.48 0.73 2.21 ¢P
(tl
ll|
4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0.26 15.0 3.88 64.6 16.7 1,078,0 4.10 2.03 6.13
W
5 C 1-2 29.7 1.85 45.0 83,5 34.6 64.1 2,215,0 29.4 7.80 37.2

6 C 3-4 30.0 1.90 45.0 85.4 34.6 65.6 2,265.0 30. I 7.98 38.1

7 D 1-2 29.7 1.85 75.0 139.0 4.56 8.45 38.5 29.4 1.03 30.4

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.90 75.0 142.0 4.56 8.65 39.4 30.1 1.05 31.2

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.15 81.0 12.2 1.44 0.22 0.31 2.39 -0.02 2.37

10 D.5 1.7-2 10.7 0.15 90.0 13.6 10.4 1.57 16.4 2.39 -0.19 2.20

I1 E 1-2 29.7 1.85 105.0 195.0 25.4 47.2 1,200.0 29.4 -5.75 23.7

12 E 3 -4 30.0 1.90 105.0 199.0 25.4 48.3 1,228.0 30.1 -5.87 24.2

13 F 1 =2 29.3 1.8t 135.0 245.0 55.4 100.0 5,571.0 28.8 -12.2 16.6

14 F 3 -4 28.3 1.69 135.0 228.0 55.4 93.6 5,190.0 26.8 -11.4 15.4

..L
Shear load from floor applied to top
Floor 4th Sum k = 17.3 Sum kx = 1,376.0
¢4
Height 26.2 tt XCR = 79.6 to top of element at diaphragm level,
Floor Shear 275 kips = (V)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2 including torsional effects.
16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.42 48.0 20.3 10.8 4.57 49.5

17 2 A- B 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0.31

18 2 B.1 - B . 8 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

19 2 C.1 - C.9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

20 2 D - DA 10.7 0.15 38.0 5.72 0.82 0.12 0.10

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 0.21 38.0 7.91 0.82 0.17 0.14

22 2 E.I - E . 9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

23 2 F-G 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0.31

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.00 34.1

25 3 F-G 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.00 34.1

Sum k = 5.58 S u m ky = 207.0 Jr = 27,220.0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case 1 XCM = 75.0 e,x = 4.56 ear.e= 7.5

¢ net ~
 Table 17.3.16 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Fourth Floor, Load Case 2
Wall Number On Line Between Length (if) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X ~ k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1-2 29.3 1.81 15.0 27.2 64,6 117.0 7,554.0 28.8 -3.48 25.3

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0,08 15.0 1.13 64.6 4.84 313.0 1.20 -0.15 1.05

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0,09 15.0 1.40 64,6 6,03 389.0 1.48 -0.18 1,30

4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0,26 15.0 3.88 64.6 16.7 1,078.0 4. I0 -0.49 3,61

5 C l -2 29,7 1.85 45,0 83.5 34.6 64,1 2,215.0 29.4 -1.90 27.5

6 C 3 -4 30.0 1.90 45.0 85.4 34,6 65.6 2,265.0 30.1 -1.95 28.2

7 D I -2 29.7 1.85 75.0 139.0 4.56 8.45 38.5 29,4 -0,25 29,2

8 D 3 -4 30.0 1,90 75.0 142,0 4,56 8.65 39.4 30.1 -0.26 29.8

9 D.2 1.7-2 10,7 0.15 81.0 12.2 1.44 0.22 0.31 2.39 0,11 2.50

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10,7 0.15 90.0 13.6 10.4 1.57 16.4 2.39 0.05 2.44

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1.85 105.0 195.0 25.4 47.2 1,200.0 29.4 1.40 30.8

12 E 3 -4 30.0 1.90 105,0 199,0 25.4 48.3 1,228.0 30.1 1.44 31.5

13 F 1-2 29,3 1,81 135.0 245,0 55.4 100,0 5,571.0 28.8 2.99 31.8

14 F 3-4 28.3 1.69 135.0 228,0 55.4 93,6 5,190.0 26.8 2.78 29.6

_x

-4 * Shear load from floor applied to top

Floor 4th Sum k ffi 17.3 Sum kx = 1,376.0
Jb Height 26.2 it XCR = 79.6 of element at diaphragm level,
Floor Shear 275 kips =(V)

k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k,Y,^2 including torsional effects.

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0,42 48,0 20.3 10.8 4.57 49,5

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.47 38.0 17,9 0,82 0.38 0.31

18 2 B. 1 - B.8 22.0 0,97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

19 2 C,I - C,9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 0.15 38.0 5.72 0,82 0.12 0.I0

21 2 D.5 - D,9 12.0 0,21 38.0 7.91 0.82 0.17 0,14

22 2 E.I - E.9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65

23 2 F-G 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0,31

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.5t 4,00 34.1

4.00 34.1
25 3 F -G 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51
O
gl"
Sum k = 5.58 Sum ky = 207.0 Jr = 27,220.0
pit
YCR = 37.2 ¢D
Load Case 2 XCM = 75.0 ex = 4.56 e acc= 7.5 .lI
..x
e net = -2.94 MT = -709.0
-4
 Table 17.3.17 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Fourth Floor, Load Case 3 W
m|
Wall Number On Line Betweea Length (fl) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k,X,^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips) m

i|
1 B 1-2 29.3 1.81 15.0 27.2 64.6 117.0 7,554.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.08 15.0 1.13 64.6 4.84 313.0

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.09 15.0 1.40 64.6 6.03 389.0 U

O
4 B 3.7-4.0 13.0 0.26 15.0 3.88 64.6 16.7 1,078.0 W
um|
5 C 1- 2 29.7 t .85 45.0 83.5 34+6 64.1 2,215.0
ZI
6 C 3-4 30.0 1.90 45.0 85.4 34.6 65.6 2,265.0

7 D 1- 2 29+7 1.85 75.0 " 139.0 4.56 8.45 38.5

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.90 75.0 142.0 4.56 8.65 39.4

9 D.2 1.7-2 10.7 0.15 81.0 12.2 1.44 0.22 0.31

10 D.5 1.7 o 2 10.7 0+15 90.0 13.6 10.4 I +57 16.4

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1.85 105.0 195.0 25.4 47.2 1,200.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 1+90 105.0 199.0 25.4 48.3 1,228.0

13 F 1- 2 29.3 1.8t 135.0 245.0 55.4 100.0 5,571.0

14 F 3-4 28.3 1.69 135.0 228.0 55.4 93.6 5,190.0

* Shear load from floor applied to top

-4 Floor 4th Sum k = 17.3 Sum lot = t,376.0 of element at diaphragm,

Height 26.2 t~ XCR = 79.6
¢Jl
including torsional effects.
Floor Shear 275 kips ~ CO
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y+ k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.42 48.0 20.3 10.8 4.57 49.5 18.5 -0.27 18.2

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0.31 20,6 -0.02 20.6

18 2 B.I - B.8 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 -0.05 42.4

19 2 C. 1 - C.9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 -O.05 42.4

20 2 D-D.4 10.7 0.15 38.0 5.72 0.82 0.12 0.10 6.59 -0.01 6.58

21 2 D.5 - D . 9 12.0 0.21 38.0 7.91 0+82 0.17 0.14 9,11 -0.01 9.10

22 2 E.I - E . 9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 .-0.05 42.4

23 2 F-G 16.3 0+47 38.0 17+9 0.82 0.38 0.31 20.6 -O.O2 20.6

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.00 34.1 20.6 0.24 20.8

25 3 F-G 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.00 34.1 20.6 0.24 20.8

Sum k = 5.58 Sum ky = 207.0 Jr = 27,220.0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case 3 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.35 e ace = 3.38

e net ~ 6.73 MT ~ 1,441.0

 Table 17.3.18 Lateral Loads to Walls Below Fourth Floor, Load Case 4
Wall N u m b e r On Line Between Length (t~) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1-2 29.3 1.81 15.0 27.2 64.6 117.0 7,554.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.08 15.0 1.13 64.6 4.84 313.0

3 B 3.5 -3.7 9.0 0.09 15.0 1.40 64.6 6.03 389.0

4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0.26 15.0 3.88 64.6 16.7 1,078.0

5 C 1- 2 29.7 1.85 45.0 83.5 34.6 64.1 2,215.0

6 C 3-4 30.0 1.90 45.0 85.4 34.6 65.6 2,265.0

7 D 1- 2 29.7 1.85 75.0 139.0 4.56 8.45 38.5

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.90 75.0 142.0 4.56 8.65 39.4

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.15 81.0 12.2 1.44 0.22 0.31

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.15 90.0 13.6 10.4 1.57 16.4

1t E 1-2 29.7 1.85 105.0 195.0 25.4 47.2 1,200.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 1.90 105.0 199.0 25.4 48.3 1,228.0

13 F 1-2 29.3 1.81 135.0 245.0 55.4 100.0 5,571.0

14 F 3-4 28.3 1.69 135.0 228.0 55.4 93.6 5,190.0 Shear load from floor applied to top
..x
"4 of element at diaphragm level,
/o Floor 4th Sum k = 17.3 Sum kx = 1,376.0

Height 26.2 fl XCR = 79.6 including torsional effects.

Floor Shear 275 kips - (V)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.42 48.0 20.3 10.8 4.57 49.5 18.5 0.0 18,5

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0.31 20.6 0.0 20.6

18 2 B.I -B.8 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 0.0 42.5

19 2 C. 1 - C.9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 0.0 42.5

20 2 D-D.4 10.7 0.15 38.0 5.72 0.82 0.12 0.10 6.59 0.0 6.59

21 2 D . 5 - D.9 12.0 0.21 38.0 7.91 0.82 0.17 0.14 9.tl 0.0 9.11

22 2 E. 1 - E.9 22.0 0.97 38.0 36.9 0.82 0.79 0.65 42.5 0.0 42,5

23 2 F-G 16.3 0.47 38.0 17.9 0.82 0.38 0.31 20.6 0.0 20,6

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.0 34.1 20.6 0.0 20,6

20.6 0.0 20,6

25 3 F-G 16.3 0.47 28.7 13.5 8.51 4.0 34.1
O
ID
Sum k = 5.58 Sum Icy = 207.0 Ir = 27,220.0

YCR = 37.2
O
Load Case 4 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.35 e ace = -338
.,x
e net = -0.03 MT = -5.56
*4
 W
Table 17.3.19 Lateral Loads to Roof Walls, Load Case 1 II
l

Wall Number On Line Between Length (R) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips) n_
I i

1 B 1- 2 29.3 0.97 15.0 14.6 64.7 63.1 4,086.0 15.0 7.62 22.6

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.03 15.0 0.49 64.7 2.13 138.0 0.50 0,25 0.75
U
3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.04 15.0 0.62 64.7 2.66 172.0 0.63 0.32 0.95 O
0.92 2.73
W
mull
4 B 3.7-4.0 13.0 0.12 15.0 t.77 64.7 7.62 493.0 1.81
m
5 C 1-2 29.7 1,00 45.0 45.0 34.7 34.8 1,208.0 15A 4.20 19.6

6 C 3-4 30.0 1.03 45.0 46.2 34,7 35.7 1,239.0 15.8 4.30 20. I

7 D 1- 2 29.7 1.00 75.0 75.0 4.74 4.74 22.5 15.4 0.57 16.0

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.03 75.0 77.0 4.74 4.87 23.1 15.8 0.58 16.4

9 D.2 1.7-2 10.7 0.07 81.0 5.43 1.26 0.08 0,11 1.04 -0.01 1.03

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.07 90.0 6.04 103 0.69 7.~ 1.04 -0.05 0.96

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1,00 105.0 I05.0 25.3 25.3 638.0 15.4 -3.04 12.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 1.03 105.0 108.0 25.3 25.9 655.0 15.8 -3.12 12.7

13 F 1- 2 29.3 0.97 135.0 132.0 55.3 53.9 2,977.0 15.0 -6.50 8.4

14 F 3-4 28.3 0.90 135.0 121.0 55.3 49.7 2,746.0 13.9 -6.00 7.9

',4 Shear load from floor applied to top

Hoor Roof Sum k = 9.26 Sum kx = 738.0
t~
',4 Height 34,8 R XCR = 79.7 of element at diaphragm level,
Floor Shear 143 kips = 00
k(x direct) y k*y 3P k*Y~ k,Y,^2 including torsional effects.
16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.20 48.0 9.48 10.8 2.13 23.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14

18 2 BA - B . 8 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31

19 2 C. 1 - C.9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18A 0.80 0.39 0.31

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 0.07 38.0 2.55 0.80 0.05 0.04

21 2 D,5 - D.9 12.0 0.09 38.0 3.57 0.80 0.07 0.06

22 2 EA - E.9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31

23 2 F-G 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.22 28.7 634 8.53 1.89 16.1

25 3 F-G 16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1

Sum k = 2.7o Sum k~ = 100.0 Ir = 14,460.0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case I XCM = 75.0 ex = 4.74 oaGG = 7.5

e net = 12.2 MT= 1,530.0

 Table 17.3.20 Lateral Loads to Roof Walls, Load Case 2
Wall Number On Line Between Length (tt) k(y direst) x k*x X' k*X' k,X,^2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1-2 29.3 0.97 15.0 14.6 64.7 63.1 4,086.0 15.0 -1.72 13.3

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.03 15.0 0.49 64.7 2.13 138.0 0.58 -0.06 0.44

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.04 15.0 0.62 64.7 2.66 172.0 0.63 -0.07 0.56

4 B 3.7-4.0 13.0 0.12 15.0 1.77 64.7 7.62 493.0 1.81 -0.21 1.60

5 C 1- 2 29.7 1.00 45,0 45.0 34.7 34.8 1,208.0 15A -0.95 14.5

6 C 3-4 30.0 1.03 45.0 46.2 34.7 35.7 1,239.0 15.8 -0.97 14.8

7 D 1- 2 29.7 1.00 75.0 75.0 4.74 4.74 22.5 15.4 -0.13 15.3

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.03 75.0 77.0 4.74 4.87 23.1 15.8 -0.14 15.7

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10,7 0.07 81.0 5.43 1.26 0.08 0.11 1.04 0.00 1.04

10 D.5 1,7 - 2 10.7 0.07 90.0 6.04 10.3 0.69 7.06 1.04 0.02 1.06

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1.00 105.0 105.0 25.3 25.3 638.0 15.4 0.68 16.1

12 E 3-4 30.0 1.03 105.0 108.0 25.3 25.9 655.0 15.8 0.71 16.5

13 F 1- 2 29.3 0.97 135.0 132.0 55.3 53.9 2,977.0 15.0 1.46 t6.5

14 F 3-4 28.3 0.90 135.0 121.0 55.3 49.7 2,746.0 13.9 1.36 15.3

'.4 Shear load fi'om floor applied to top

Floor Roof Sum k = 9.26 Sum kx = 738.0

Height 34.8 tt XCR = 79.7 of element at diaphragm level,

Floor Shear 143 kips =(v)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*"~ k,Y,^2 including torsional effects.
16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.20 48.0 9.48 10.8 2.13 23.0

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31

19 2 C. 1 - C.9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31

20 2 D -D.4 10.7 0.07 38.0 2.55 0.80 0.05 0.04

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 0.09 38.0 3.57 0.80 0.07 0.06

22 2 E.I - E . 9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31

23 2 F-G 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1

25 3 F-G 16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1

O
Sum k = 2.70 Sum ky = 100.0 Jr = 14,460.0
W
"D
YCR = 37.2
O
Load Case 2 XCM = 75.0 ex = 4.74 e ace = 7.5

e net = -2.76 Mr = -345.0

 W
¢
Table 17.3.21 Lateral Loads to Roof Walls, Load Case 3 im|
i
a_
Wall Number On Line Between Length (fl) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'A2 kV/(SUM)k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips) m|

1 B 1- 2 29.3 0.97 15.0 14.6 64.7 63.1 4,086.0 to

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.03 15.0 0.49 64.7 2.13 138.0

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.04 15.0 0.62 64.7 2.66 172.0 OUt
m|
4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0.12 15.0 1.77 64.7 7.62 493.0 f~
5 C I-2 29.7 1.00 45.0 45.0 34.7 34.g 1,208.0 S
6 C 3-4 30.0 1.03 45.0 46.2 34.7 35.7 1,239.0

7 D 1- 2 29.7 1.00 75.0 75.0 4.74 4.74 22.5

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.03 75.0 77.0 4.74 4.87 23.1

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.07 81.0 5.43 1.26 0.08 0.11

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.07 90.0 6.04 103 0.69 7.06

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1.130 105.0 I05,0 25.3 25.3 638.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 1.03 105.0 108.0 25.3 25.9 655.0

13 F 1- 2 29.3 0.97 135.0 132.0 55.3 53.9 2,977.0

14 F 3-4 28.3 0.90 135.0 121.0 55.3 49.7 2,746.0 * Shear load from floor applied to top

"4 of element at diaphragm level,

Floor Roof Sum k = 9.26 Sum kx = 738.0

Height 34.8 fi XCR = 79.7 including torsional effects.

Floor Shear 143 kips = (V)
k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*Y'^2

16 1.7 .2 - .5 15.7 0.20 48.0 9.48 10.8 2.13 23.0 10.4 -0.14 10.3

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14 11.7 4).01 11.7

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 -0.02 25.7

19 2 C.I - C.9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 -0.02 25.7

20 2 D - D.4 10.7 0.07 38.0 2.55 0.80 0.05 0.04 3.56 0.0 3.55

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 0.09 38.0 3.57 0.80 0.07 0.06 4.96 0.0 4.96

22 2 E.I - E . 9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 -0.02 25.7

23 2 F- G 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14 11.7 -0.01 11.7

24 3 A-B 16.3 0,22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1 11.7 0.13 11.6

25 3 F- G 16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1 11.7 0.13 11.6

Sutrt k = 2,70 Sum ky = t00.0 Ir = 14,460.0

YCR = 37.2

Load Case 3 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.37 e ace = 3.38

e net 6.75 MT = 844.0

 Table 17.3.22 Lateral Loads to Roof Walls, Load Case 4
Wall Number On Line Between Length (fl) k(y direct) x k*x X' k*X' k*X'^2 kV/(SUIV0k (kips) k*X'*MT/Jr (kips) Wall Shear Load* (kips)

1 B 1- 2 29.3 0.97 15.0 14.6 64.7 63.1 4,086.0

2 B 2.8 - 3.5 8.33 0.03 15.0 0.49 64.7 2.13 138.0

3 B 3.5 - 3.7 9.0 0.04 15.0 0.62 64.7 2,66 172.0

4 B 3.7 - 4.0 13.0 0.12 15.0 1.77 64.7 7.62 493.0

5 C 1-2 29.7 1.00 45.0 45.0 34.7 34.g 1,208.0

6 C 3-4 30.0 1.03 45,0 46.2 34.7 35.7 1,239.0

7 D 1- 2 29.7 1.00 75.0 75.0 4.74 4.74 22.5

8 D 3-4 30.0 1.03 75.0 7.98 4.74 4.87 23.1

9 D.2 1.7 - 2 10,7 0.07 81,0 5.43 1.26 0.08 0,11

10 D.5 1.7 - 2 10.7 0.07 90.0 6.04 10.3 0.69 7.06

11 E 1- 2 29.7 1.00 105.0 105.0 25.3 25.3 638.0

12 E 3-4 30.0 1.03 105,0 108.0 25.3 25.9 655.0

13 F 1- 2 29.3 0.97 135.0 t32.0 55.3 53.9 2,977,0 * Shear load from floor applied to top
14 F 3-4 28.3 0.90 135.0 121.0 55.3 49.7 2,746.0

of element at diaphragm level,

._x

Floor Roof Sum k = 9.26 Sum kx = 738,0 including torsional effects.

O Height 34.8 fl XCR = 79.7

Floor Shear 143 kips = (V)

k(x direct) y k*y Y' k*Y' k*y'A2

16 1.7 . 2 - ,5 15.7 0.20 48.0 9.48 10.8 2,13 23.0 10.4 0.0 10.4

17 2 A-B 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0.14 11.7 0.0 11.7

18 2 B.I - B . 8 22.0 0,48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 0.0 25.7

19 2 C.I - C . 9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 0.0 25,7

20 2 D - DA 10.7 0.07 38.0 2.55 0,80 0.05 0.04 3.55 0.0 3,55

21 2 D.5 - D.9 12.0 0.09 38.0 3.57 0.80 0.07 0,06 4.96 0.0 4.96

22 2 E.1 - E.9 22.0 0.48 38.0 18.4 0.80 0.39 0.31 25.7 0.0 253

23 2 F- G 16.3 0.22 38.0 8.41 0.80 0.18 0A4 11.7 0.0 11.7

24 3 A-B 16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1,89 16.1 11.7 0.0 I 1.7

16.3 0.22 28.7 6.34 8.53 1.89 16.1 IL7 0.0 11.7
25 3 F-O
O
gt
Sumk= 2.70 Sum ky = 100.0 Jr = t4,460.0

YCR = 37.2
O
Load Case 4 YCM = 33.8 ey = 3.37 e acc = -3.38 il
..x
enet = -0.01 MT = -1.03
Example RCJ-1 - - Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Brick-
Block Masonry Nonloadbearing Wall for Flexure Only
For the material property values given below, design the wall on Grid Line 3 between Grid Lines
F and G from MDG Fig. 17.3-1 for RCJ Hotel. The wall is an unreinforced multiwythe brick-
block cavity wall of Building Option lI and Wall Construction Option A, and is to be designed for
wind loads only.

Concrete Block Masonry Clay Brick Masonry

Unit Strength (psi) 2, 000 6,600
Mortar Type N (PC-L) Type N (PC-L)
f ~, (psi) (prism test) 1,500 2,500
Em (psi) 1.35x 106 (Code 1.8.2.2.1) 1.75 x 106 (Code 1.8.2.2.1)
Design Wind Pressure = 25 psf

Calculations and Discussion

The multiwythe wall will be constructed of 8 in. wide

nominal concrete block, 4 in. thick nominal clay brick
with a 3 in. cavity separating the two wythes. In addition, I
only face shell bedding will be considered for the block r-"
wythe. F" r -

It is assumed that the wall is supported by the stair and

landings and accordingly spans in the vertical direction, 8'-8" 1
with a span length of 8 ft - 8 in. as shown in the figure. A 4
one-foot strip of wall spanning in the vertical direction
will be designed. For the design wind load of 25 psf, the
maximum moment is calculated as i ~I'--L--L-1 i

15'

M- wl
m 2 _ 25 plf(8.67 if)2 (12 in./ft) _ 2,820 in.- lb
8 8

The total moment is distributed to individual block and brick wythes in proportion to their
Code Section
2.1.3.3.1(d) bending rigidities as shown in MDG Example DPC-2. The moment of inertias of the block and
brick wythes, respectively, can be taken from MDG Example DPC-2 as
Ib, = 363.8 in.4 and Ib, = 47.6 in 4

17 - 241
 Chapter 17

The individual wythe moments are

[fEe),°,°,.]
[ (1"35 x 106 psi)(363"8 in'4) .]
M ~, = (2,820 in. - lb) (1.75 x 106 psi)(47.6 in .4) + (1.35 x 106 psi)(363.8 in .4)
(2,820 in.- lb)(491 x 106 in .2. lb)
M bl - -
(574 x 106 in. z -lb)
M,, = 2,410in.- lb
and

M Or
L(EI )To,.,J
(1.35 x 10 6 psi)(47.6 in .4)
M ~, = (2,820 in.- lb)
(745 x 10 6 in.2 -lb)
(2,820 in.- lb)(83.8 x 10 6 in.2 _ lb)
Ms, = (745 x l 0 6 in.2-1b)
Ms, = 4 1 0 i n . - l b

Bending Stresses
Co~ ~b~ Out-of-plane flexure of a vertical strip produces tension normal to the bed joints. To be
2.2.3.2 [ conservative, the normal compressive stresses due to the weight of the wall have been neglected.

[
Co~ction
2.1.1.1.3
However, using the 33% increase in allowable tensile stress for load cases including wind, the
allowable flexural tension stress becomes:

F ~, = (1.33)(19 psi) = 25.3 psi for concrete masonry hollow units

F~, = (1.33)(30 psi) = 40.0 psi for clay masonry solid units

In concrete block
(2,410 in.-lb)(-7"6~ in.)
f~, Mu c
_ - - - - 25 3 psi = 25.3 psi = Fb, " OK.
! 364 in.4 •

In clay brick
(410 in.-lb)(3"6~ in .]
fb, =M~'c- =15.6psi < 40.0psi=Fbt " OK
1 47.6 in .4
Therefore, an unreinforced multiwythe noncomposite brick-block masonry wall made of 8 in.
wide concrete blocks and 4 in. wide clay bricks with a 3 in. cavity and Type N PCL mortar is
satisfactory for this design.

17-242
Example RCJ-2 - - Design of Unreinforced Masonry Shear Wall for In-Plane Lateral
Loads
Design the shear wall on Grid Line C between Grid Lines 1 and 2 using Wall Construction
Option A (Unreinforced) and Building Construction Option 11. Use hollow concrete masonry
units. Seismic Performance Category A..

Calculations and Discussion

Consider an 8 in. wall and design 1st floor wall section for different load combinations. For the
Code Section
2.1.1.1.1
[ unreinforced wall two critical parameters need to be checked:
1) No tension is developed under minimum dead load and maximum lateral load,
i.e., load case of 0.9 D + E.
2) Compression stress at the other end of the wall complies with the Code
allowables using the unity equation, i.e., load case 1.2D + 0.5 L + 1.0E.

The above two cases are considered below. Other cases may be checked.

Loads
Lateral loads are calculated using hand calculations in MDG Section 17.3.3. Gravity loads are
given in MDG Section 17.3.2. Maximum shear and moment develop at the base section since
wall acts as a free-standing cantilever.

DL and LL DL (plO LL (pit')

19.6 kips
2,850 400
'_8//
37.2 kips
6,830 132
8'-8"
47.7 kips.~..__.~ 10,800 1,810
8'-8"
61.7 kips
14,780 2,240
,,I 29'-8"~. 8'-10"

V= 166.2 kips

~j'M=3036 kip-ft
For the 1st floor wall section assume ungrouted
-

D = 14,780 p l f x 29.66 ft + 125 psf(8.83 ft x 29.66 ft) = 466,000 lb

L = 2,240 p l f x 29.66 ft = 65,700 lb
V = 166.2 kips
M = 19.6 kips (34.8 ft) + 37.2 kips (26.2 if) + 47.7 kips (17.5 ft) + 61.7 kips (8.83 ft)
M = 682 if-kips + 975 if-kips + 835 if-kips + 545 if-kips = 3,037 if-kips

17 - 243
 Chapter 17

Section Properties - Consider face shell bedding, face shell thickness = 1.25 in.
Net area, An = (1.25 in. x 2) (29.66 f t x 12 in./ft) = 890 in.2
Section modulus, S = (1.25 in. x 2) (29.66 ff x 12 in./ft)2/6 = 52,800 in. 3

Normal Stresses
Load Case 0.9 D + E E = 1.0 QE -0.5A~,D = 1.0 Qe - 0.5(0.04)D
.'. Net Load Case = 0.88D + E
P = 0.88 x 466,000 lb = 410,000 lb
M = 3036 if-kips
f_P+_M
A. S
410,O001b 3036 ft-kips x 12,000 i n . - l b / f t - k i p s
f=- 890 in .2
_+ 52,800 in .3
f = - 461 psi + 690 psi
f = - 1,151 psi and + 229 psi

Load Case 1 . 2 D + 0.5L + 1.0E

E=I.0 Qe + 0.5 A,D
E=I.O Q~ + 0.5(0.04)0
E=I.0 Qs + 0.02 D

Therefore, the total Load Combination is

1.22D + 0.5L + Qe
P = 1.22(466,000) + 0.5(65,700) = 601,000 lb
M = 3036 if-kips
P M
A, S
601,000 lb 3036 ft- kips x 12,000 i n . - lb/ft- kips
f=- 890 in .2
_+ 52,800 in .3
f = - 675 psi + 690 psi
f = - 1,365 psi and + 15 psi

Thus Load Case 0.9D + E controls tension stress.

Tension develops - thus this 8 in. hollow concrete block wall must be reinforced or the section
must be modified. Assume that 2.67 ft (2 block units) on each end of the wall will be grouted.

2.67' 2.67'
i<

l,, : 29.66'= 356"

17 - 244
Example RCJ-2

Area = 5.34 ft(12 in./ft)(7.63) + 24.33 ft(12 in./ft)(1.25 in. x 2) = 1,219 in. 2

I = 1 ( 7 . 6 3 in.)(356 in.) a - 1 ( 5 . 1 2 5 in.)(24.33 f t x 12 in./ft)3

1 = 18,500,000 in.4

S = / = 105,186 in.3
¢
P M
f- +
A, S
410,000 lb + 3,036 ft- kips x 12,000 in. - lb/ft- kips
f ~ - - . _

1,219 in.2 - 105,186 in.3

f = - 336 psi + 346 psi
f = - 682 psi and + 10 psi • Tension still exists

No need to check compression stress until the tension issue is solved.

After trying several other options, including grouting additional cells, adding the effects of the
small flange at the hallway, thickening the 4 ft of the wall at the north end of the building, and
including the weight of the grout, there is still a 28 psi tension stress. Thus the ends of the wall
must be reinforced. For an example of a reinforced shear wall refer to MDG Example Problem
RCJ-10.

17 - 2 4 5
 C h a p t e r 17

Example RCJ-3 - - Connection of Rigid Roof Diaphragm to Exterior Loadbearing Wall

A connection is to be designed between the roof diaphragm and the exterior loadbearing wall.
The connection must transfer gravity loads, in-plane shear, and out-of-plane shear from the roof
diaphragm to the exterior loadbearing wall. Differential vertical movement must be
accommodated between the interior and exterior wythes of the loadbearing wall. Consider the
wall on Grid Line F, for Wall Construction Option A and Building Construction Option II.

Calculations and Discussion

Roofing Coping
Bellows

Insulation 2" Foam Gap

2" Topping

J.. . . . . . ~ ~ - - Pressure Treated

8" Precast Hollowcore Planks

The detail is shown above. Refer to MDG Example RCJ-5.

As in previous examples, the wall must be designed for gravity loads, in-plane shear and out-of-
plane shear.

a) Gravity Load: The critical gravity load (DL + LL) is 1,725 lb/ff from MDG Table 17.3.1.

b) The critical in-plane seismic shear is 16.5 kips, distributed over 29.3 ft. See MDG
Section 17.3.3.

c) The critical out-of-plane shear comes from the 20 psf wind load, acting on a total wall
height of:

7.83 ft story height

0.67 ft parapet
0.17 ft parapet extension

8.67 ft

17-246
Example RCJ-3

Assuming the wall to be simply supported at the base and at a height of 7.83 ft, the out-of-plane
shear in lb/ft is then

20 psf x (8.67 ft) 2 = 96 plf

2 x 7 . 8 3 ft

Gravity Load
The connection resists gravity load by bearing. If one assumed all bearing to take place on the
inner face shell, the bearing stress is:
1,725 lb
= ll5psi
1.25 in.x 12 in.
Code Section This is less than the allowable bearing stress ofFbr = 0.25f~. = 0.25 (1,500 psi) = 375 psi
2.l,7.3

Although the Code does not provide for a minimum bearing length, it is recommended that more
than the face shell thickness of the masonry unit be used. A reasonable bearing length would be 4
in. As noted in the detail, extend plank 4 in. into CMU wall and grout bond beam.

In-Plane Shear
The in-plane shear can either be transferred by shear stresses between the inner face shell of the
CMU and the plank, or by shear friction due to the tension developed in the dowel bars. The
shear stress is

16.5kipsxl,OOOlb/kip = 37.5 psi

1.25 in. x 29,3 ft x 12 in./ft

Co~ctio~ This is less than the governing shear allowable in the masonry of 37 psi, which can be increased
2.2.5.1~ and
2.1.1.1.3 by one-third for this load cases involving earthquake forces and increased by an additional factor
of(2.5×0.6) for use with factored loads. Thus an anchor, as shown in the figure, is not needed and
can be omitted.

Out-of-Plane Shear
The out-of-plane shear in lb/ft is less than the in-plane shear, and will not govern.

The design is acceptable.

17-247
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-4 - - Vertical Expansion Joint Size and Spacing Design

Determine the vertical expansion joint locations for Option A (unreinforced) using Building
Construction Option II (short dimensions). The exterior wall is a brick block noncomposite
(cavity) wall with the exterior brick wythe being non-loadbearing.

Calculations and Discussion

Plan dimensions are shown in MDG Figs. 17.3-1 and 17.3-2. The locations of the brick exterior
wythe expansion joints are determined as follows:

Clay brick masonry exterior wythe

Thermal expansion: Assume wall built at 40°F and maximum service mean
temperature of 140°F. Thus the temperature rise is 100°F. From
CodeSection the Code the coefficient of thermal expansion, kt, is 4 x 10 *
1.8.3.1 ]
in./in.-°F. Therefore, thermal expansion strain is:

4 x 106x 100= 0.0004 in./in.

Moisture expansion (ke): 0.0003 in./in.
CodeSection Subtotal clay masonry expansion: 0.0007 in./in.
1.8.4 ]
Sealantjoint
Assumed width, 3/8 in. 0.375 in.
Sealant compressibility 50%
Therefore, maximum joint
movement: 0.5 x 0.375 = 0.188 in.

Maximumjomtspacing
0.188
- 268 in. = 22 ft- 4 in.
0.0007in./in.

Examining the RCJ Hotel floor plans in MDG Fig. 17.3-1, and the exterior wall elevations in
MDG Fig. 17.3-6, the exterior brick wythe expansion joint spacing of 14 ft - 8 in. is less than the
22 ft-4 in. maximum spacing.

17-248
Example RCJ-5 - - Differential Movement in Brick/Block Exterior Wall
The unreinforced exterior wall on Grid Line B between Grids 1 and 2 is composed of a
noncomposite exterior brick wythe and an interior block wythe (cavity wall), for Wall
Construction Option I. The block wythe is loadbearing. The exterior brick wythe is subject to
thermal, moisture, and freezing expansions. The interior block wythe is subject to elastic
deformation, shrinkage, and creep. To accommodate these differential movements an expansion
joint should be provided at the top of the exterior brick wythe. This example estimates the
magnitude of those differential movements and designs the necessary expansion joint.

Calculations and Discussion

Clay Brick Masonry Exterior Wythe

Thermal expansion: Assume wall built at 40°F and maximum service mean temperature of
140°F.
The temperature rise is 100°F
The coefficient of thermal expansion, kt, is 4 x 10"6in./in. °F.
CodeSection [ Therefore, thermal expansion strain is:
1.8.3.1 ] 4 X 10-6 X 100 = 0.0004 in./in.
iCodeSection I Moisture expansion (ke) = 0.0003 in./in.
1.8.4 Subtotal clay masonry expansion = 0.0007 in./in.
Total clay masonry height = 484 in.
Total clay masonry expansion = 0.339 in.
Note that the elastic deformation of the clay masonry is neglected since the brick wythe is
nonloadbearing. Also the creep of brick masonry is ignored due to the low creep behavior
along with low axial forces for the given case.

Concrete Masonry Interior Wythe

CMU elastic deformation:
From MDG Example RCJ-1 the compressive strength of the CMU is 1,500 psi, and the
CMU wythe is 8 in. nominal, fully grouted.
Mortar is ASTM C 270 Type N.
ICodeTable Elastic modulus of the concrete masonry is 1.35 x 10 6 psi
5.5.2.3 From MDG Appendix A: Area = 30 in.2/ft.

Stow Height Concrete Masonry Elastic Deformation (ED):

Story Dead Load Wall P/A Un~ ED, Story ED/story
MDG 17.3.2 Wt. Stress P/AE Height
(lb) (lb) (psi) (10-6 in./in.) (in.) (in.)
1~ 8,380 250 288 213 130 0.028
2nd 6,060 220 209 155 116 0.018
3rd 3,740 220 132 98 116 0.011
4th 1,425 280 57 42 116 0.005
Totalwallelastic deform~ion 0.062

17-249
 Chapter 17

CMU Shrinkage
CMUs are assumed to be Type II (Non-moisture controlled).
Total linear drying shrinkage of the CMUs is equal to be 0.00065 in./in. The
Code Section
1.8.5.2 coefficient of shrinkage of non-moisture controlled concrete masonry is 0.5 st, in./in.
Shrinkage strain deformation:
0.5 x 0.00065 = 0.000325 in./in.
Wall height (concrete block) = 468 in.
Total shrinkage = 0.15 in.

C M U Creep
Code Section Creep strain in concrete masonry is 2.5 x 10-7 in./in. - psi
1.8.6.2
Creep deformation (CD):

Story Stress Unit CD, Story Height CD/story

(psi) (10 -6, in./in.) (in.) (in.)
1st 288 71.9 130 0.0094
2nd 209 52.3 116 0.0061
3rd 132 33.0 116 0.0038
4th 57 14.2 116 0.0016
Subtotal creep 0.0209

Subtotal concrete masonry contraction: 0.062 + 0.15 + 0.0209 = 0.23 in.

Total differential movement = 0.339 (clay brick I~ )+ 0.23 (CMU ~ ) = 0.57 in.
Expansion joint sealant elasticity = 50%
Total expansion joint thickness:
0.57/0.5 1.14 in.

A top of wall detail that accommodates this calculated differential movement is shown.

/ BondBeam
Metal Coping ~ ~ Bellows
PressureTreated ~ / /
Lumber ~ ~ ~
F \ ~ ~" / / ~ Roofing

Exp. Jt. 4 ll~i ~ ' "'.~ ~" J ,

Filler / t@
'I~--S~ ~ ~ ._.,×r , ~,__--,y.~_4 Z 2" Topping
~__/..~ ~ - . . . . - ~ 1 8 " Precast
. . . . -I_ t .o,owcore

17-250
Example RCJ-6 - - Lobby Column Design
Design the column at Grid Line E and Grid Line 3 on the first floor, Wall Construction Option B.
See MDG Fig. 17.3-1. The column is rectangular in plan, having a 2 f l - 8 in. dimension along
Grid Line E. The width b will be established by structural requirements. From gravity load
analysis in MDG 17.3.2, the loads are D = 181 kips, L = 143 kips. Lateral load analysis
(Seismic Performance Category l)) results in a shear force o f 47 kips and strong axis moment o f
255 if-kips and axial force (tension or compression) o f 74 kips.

Hollow Clay Brick Construction

Unit Strength 6, 600 psi
A f'~ = 2,500 psi
Em= 1.75x 106 psi (from tesO
fg = 3,500 psi
Eg = 1.75 × 106 psi
32"
n = 16.6

Calculations and Discussion

ICo~ction T r y b = 16in.
2.1.1.1.1 I Loading Combinations for working stress design
D+L P = 181 + 143 = 324 kips
Co~ction
I2.1.4.3 Minimum eccentricity
e m = 0.1t = 3.2 in.
D+L+E P = 181 + 143 + 74 = 398 kips (Assuming Compression Axial)
M = 255 if-kips
Using Pseudo Strength Method of MSJC Chapter 10 for Seismic design, and ASCE 7-93 factored
loads
1.2D + E + 0.5 L = 1.2(181) + 74 +0.5(143) = 363 kips
Nominal strength = Allowable × 2½
Design Strength = Nominal Strength × d?= nominal × 0.8
Required strength (from factored loads) _<design strength
e -
M 255fl-kips x l 2 i n . / f t = 8 . 4 in.
u

P 363 kips
ICodeSection 0.9D + E (Assume Tension Axial)
2.3.3.2.2 [
P = 163 - 74 = 89 kips

e- M 255ft-kips x 1 2 i n . / f t = 3 4 . 4 i n .
ICodeSection P 89 kips
2.1.1.1.3 I F~ = 0.33 f m = 0.33(2,500 psi) -- 833 psi (no seismic)
F =(2.5 ×0.8)(0.33)(2,500)(1.33) = 2,222 psi (including seismic)

17 - 251
 Chapter 17

Using the interaction diagram (MDG Fig. 12.1-5) for g = 0.8 with working stress design
P 324 kips
= 0.76]
Fb bt 0.83ksi(16in.)(32in.) I npt =0.19
D+L
Pe 3.2 in. if compression controls
= 0.76 ~ = 0.076
F b bt 2 32 in.
Now, using MDG Fig. 12.1-8 for tension controls using the same ordinate and abscissa, a zero
value of 9~F,/Fb is obtained. This process leads to the conclusion that compression, not tension,
controls for D + L.
Code Section
2.1.1.1.3
For the other two loading cases a 1/3 increase in allowable stress Fb is permitted and the pseudo
strength method applies. For compression controlling (MDG Fig. 1.1-5)

P 363 kips = 0.32 ]

F bt = (2.222 ksi)(16 in.)(32 in.)
D+L+E npt = 0 . 0
Pe 363 kips(8.4 in .)
F bt 2 = (2.222 ksi)(16 in .)(32 in .) 2 = 0.08

P = 89kips = 0.078]
Fbt (2.222ksi)(16in.)(32in.) I
0.9D+E n Pt = 0.05
Pe = 0 . 0 7 8 3 4 . 4 i n . = 0.084
Fbt 2 32in.
Again, entering MDG Fig. 12.1-8 for tension controls with the same ordinate and abscissa, a value
of Pt Fs/Fb of 0.13 is obtained. Compression controls for all three load cases.

The required P for tension controls and compression controls are:

Pttension = 0.13fA--= 0.13 833 = 0.0045
Fs 24000
0.05 - -
0.05
.
Pie°raP= n 16.7 - 0.003
The largest amount of required steel area results from loading case D + L(working stress design)
nPt =0.19
0.19
Pt == 0.0114
16.7
Aa = ptbt = 5.86 in.2
Select 8 -#8 bars, 4 in each face
An = 6.32 in.2

I
C o ~ . i o n
2.1.4.4 9t = 0.0124 < 0.04 .'. OK

17-252
 Example RCJ-6

The Code imposes an upper bound on axial compressive force. For h/t < 99,

P,, =(0.25f~,A,+O.65A,tF~) 1-

CodeEq. 2-17 [ Using the trial size of 32 in. x 16 in. and an effective height, h, of 10 ft - 10 in. minus the depth of
the second floor slab (8 in.), and a radius of gyration of 0.289 x 16 in. about the weak axis, the
allowable load becomes

66+00,,66,,4[11140,091,122
=[316+99][0.964]
= 400 kips > 324 kips • OK

Other load cases in the pseudo strength method will not govern because the maximum P, can be
increased by a factor (1.33 × 2.5 x 0.8), while the load side would only increase by 1.2. Provide
cross ties per Code Section 2.1.4.6(c).

32"
).4"

l-" "-[
V

16"

Repeat the design of the same column using CMU construction havingf'm = 1,500 psi, Type N
mortar (PC-L) Em= 1.35 x 106(by test), n = 21.5. Because the check based on the maximum
permissible Pa governed in the preceding case, check that criterion now. Solve for the minimum
Aa as governed by Code Eq. 2-17:

Since h/r < 99

CodeEq. 2-17 ] P~ =(0.25f,~A, +0.65A~ +F~) 1 - ~ >324kips

Try b = 24 in.

17-253
 C h a p t e r 17

Pa= 0.25(1,500)(24)(32)+0.65A,~140(0.
,(24,0200)II-(.
/21>_L
89)(24))122 324 kips

A,t > 5.90 in z

Using Code Eq. 2-17 in this way shows that a minimum A,t of 5.90 in 2 is required to satisfy this
equation. It does not, however, imply that such a steel area can resist the various load
combinations.

Code Section
Loading Combinations, using service loads and allowable stresses
2.I.I,I,I
M D G Fig. D +L~ -
324 kips - 0.843 e/t = 0.1, n p, = 0.30
12.1-5 Fbbt
(0.5)(24 in.)(32 in.)
Using pseudo strength method and Interaction Diagram for compression controls.
P _ 363 0.36
Fb bt 1.33(0.5)(24)(32)(2.5)(0.8)
D +L +E Pe 363(8.4) .np, = 0.0
F b t 2 = 1.33(0.5)(24)(32) 2 (2.5)(0.8) = 0.095

P 89 = 0.087
Fbbt 1.33(0.5)(24)(32)(2.5)(0.8)
0.9D+E, Pe =0.087(34"4~=0.094 'npt=0"07
F b bt ~ ~,32)

D + L and D + L + E load cases result in zero calculated steel area when using MDG Fig 12.1-8
for tension controls. For 0.9D + E tension controls gives of Pt FJFb=O.14.

The required p for tension controls and compression controls are:

P t tension
= 0.14 pb~"= 0.14 1317 = 0.0076
Fs 24000
0.07 0.07
9~oomp-- n 21.5 0.0033

Using the largest value ofnpt of 0.30, pt = 0.30/21.5 = 0.0140

Ast = 0.0140 (24 in.) (32 in.) = 10.8 in.z

Use 14 - #8 bars.

The calculated values of Ast must exceed the value of 5.90 required by Code Eq. 2-17. Provide
lateral ties in accordance with Code Section 2.1.4.6. Ties shall be 1/4 in. diameter spaced at 12
in., with the f'trst tie located not less than 6 in. from the bottom or the top of the column. Code
1.12.2.3 limits joint reinforcement to one-half joint thickness. Thus 1/4 in. ties cannot be placed
in a 3/8 in. mortar joint. The CMU must be notched out to provide sufficient clearance for ties as
shown in the figure. The impracticality of placing 14 bars in such a column is illustrated.

17-254
Example RCJ-6

)"

~1~ 24"~P'~
A better solution may be (1) to use steel in all four faces (this would require interaction diagrams
developed for that purpose), (2) to use a larger value of"b", or (3) to place reinforcement in the
center solid grouted area since this would eliminate notching the masonry units or (4) a
combination of both (2) and (3). The designer would need to verify steel required based on a
reduced value of g resulting from the new location of steel. Alternate solution (4) is illustrated
below.

D • • "o(

4 - # 8 bars .e 32"
o°" •
~L" " (

32"

For Seismic Performance Category D or E, use 3/8 in. ties spaced at 8 in. centers with the first tie
located no more than 8 in. from the top or the bottom. In Category D or E the tie must be
embedded in grout, not in the mortar joint (Code Section 1.13.6.5).

Check shear requirements for CMU column. From Code Eq. 2-19, and a design shear force due to
D + L + E of 47 kips,

V 47,0001b
f~ = b---d- 24in.(28.8in.) = 6 8 . 0 p s i

Fv = 1 . 3 3 ~ f ~ (2.5)(0.6)= 1.33 1 , ~ - ~ ( 1 . 5 ) = 38.7 psi x 1.33(1.5)-- 77.5 psi

Fvmax = 50(1.33)(2.5)(0.6)= 100psi

17-255
 Chapter 17

Hence no shear reinforcement is required for the solution where b = 24 in. and g = 0.8

Check shear requirements for the brick masonry column.

47,000 lb
f v = 24 in.(28 in .) = 69.9 psi

Fv = 1.33(2.5)(0.6)~,500 = 100 psi = Fma~> f ¢ ' . O K

Sincef~< Fv, shear reinforcement need not be provided. Although not required, calculations for
shear reinforcement are shown here to illustrate to the reader the procedure that would have to be
followed if shear reinforcement were required.

Shear reinforcement is determined by Code Eq. 2-26, solved for s using #3 ties, and Grade 60
steel.
A F d (0.33 in.2)(24,000 psi)(2.50)(0.6)(1.33)(28 in.)
s . . . . . 9.4 in.
V 47,000 lb
Using larger diameter ties or a double tie configuration can increase the spacing. Using a #4 tie,
results in s = 17.15 in. Use #3 ties at 8 in. centers to meet shear requirements in Code Section
1.13.6.5 for Seismic Performance Category D. This size and spacing will also satisfy Code
Section 2.1.4.6.

17-256
E x a m p l e RCJ-7 - - Design of a Continuous Masonry B e a m
Design a continuous masonry beam on Grid Line E spanning from column E-3 to E-3.5 to E-4
above the opening on the first floor (Wall Construction Option A with Building Construction
Option I). The continuous beam spans over two openings each 11 fl wide and is supported by
three columns over a length of 2.67fi eaclz Assuming a tributary width of 30 t , dead load of 110
p s f and live load of 40 p s f the loads on the continuous beam are determined to be: dead load =
14, 750 p l f and total beam load = 17, 020 p l f (includes live load reductions). Design a continuous
concrete masonry beam for moment assuming:

Concrete Masonry - 12 in. CMU

Concrete masonry unit strength = 2,000 psi (from manufacturer)
Type N mortar (PC-L)
f'~ = 1,500psi
fg = 3,600psi
Grade 60 steel
Em= 1.8 x 106 psi (from tests)
Design the beam if needed for shear reinforcement and examine termination of flexural
reinforcement. Note: This problem is worked as an illustrative alternative to the steel
beam at this location.

Calculations and Discussion

MOMENT CONSIDERATIONS
1. Determine effective depth, modular ratio, and allowable stresses
Assume the total depth to be solid grouted is h = 72 in.

Assume cover to centroid of tension steel = 5 in.

then, d = 72 in. - 5 in. = 67 in.

Assume b = 11.63 in.

CodeSection
1.8.2.1 [ Es = 29 x 10 6 psi

The modular ratio, n = Es/Em = 29/1.8 = 16.1

The allowable compressive masonry stress,

Co~ ~ction
2.2.3.1~ ]
Fb = 1(1,500 psi) = 500 psi
Co~ ~ction
2.3.2.1~ I The allowable tensile steel stress, Fs = 24,000 psi

. Determine span length and maximum positive and negative moments

I Code Section
2.3.3.4.3 I Assume end bearing length = 8 in.

Assume pin support at center o f middle column

17-257
 Chapter 17

Then span length for each span,

I Code Section l=4ft +llft+ 2.67 ft =12.7 ft

2.3.3.4.1 12 2
Check the depth to span ratio
depth _ 67 in.
- 0.44
span (12.7 ft)(12 in./ft)
Per MDG Example RCJ-16, it is desirable to limit the depth to span ratio to 2/5, since the
Code is silent on the subject of deep beams. Although the actual ratio is slightly greater than 2/5,
it is acceptable for this example.
Mpos Mpos

From an indeterminate beam analysis

( 7,020plf I 2
9 .wl2=1~9 1 1 ~ ( ) " (12.7ft) =192ft-kips
M,o~= 128

M,,g = wle =/.17,020

p l f / ( ~ (12.7 ft)2 _ 341 ft-kips
8 ~. 1,000 ) 8

. Determine steel area required for positive moment

M = Mpo s =192 ft- kips
Assumej = 0.9
M 192 ft- kips (12 in.fit)
As - - - - --
F. jd (24 ksi)(0.9)(67 in.)
As = 1.59 in.2
Try 4 #6 bars, As = 1.76 in. z

Check stresses:
1.76 in .2
9- - 0.00226
(11.63 in.)(67 in.)
pn = 0.03 64
k = [2pn + (pn )2ll/2 - pn
= [2(0.0364) + (0.0364) 2 ]1/2.0.0364
k = 0.236
j=l-k=0.921 > 0.90 "OK
3
17-258
 Example RCJ-7

M 192 ft- kips (12 in./ft)(1,000 lb/kips)

s Ajd (1.76 in.2)(0.921)(67 in.)
f s
= 21,200 psi < F = 24,000 psi .'. OK
s

2M 2(192 ft- kips)(12,000)

f~ bd2jk (ll.63in.)(67in.)2(0.921)(0.236)
f b
= 406 psi < F = 500 psi .'. OK
b

Use four #6 bars for positive moment

. Determine steel area required for negative moment

M = Mneg = 341 ft- kips
Assumej = 0.9
M 341 ft- kips (12 in./ft) _ 2.83 in.2
As - - - - --
F~jd (24 ksi)(0.9)(67 in.)
Use five #7 bars, A~ = 3.00 in.2
Check stresses:
3.00 in .2
p= = 0.00385
(11.63 in.)(67 in.)
pn = 0.0620

k = 0.296

j = l - k-= 0.902
3
M 341 ft - kips(12,000)
As---~- (3.00 in.2)(0.902)(67 in.)
f = 22,570 psi < F~ = 24,000 psi • OK
s

2M 2(341 ft - kips)(12,000)
f ~ - bd 2j------k-(11.63 in.)(67 in.)2 (0.902)(0.296)
f , = 587 psi > F~ = 500 psi .'. NG
Increasef~, of the concrete masonry to 1,800 psi. Verify by test. Thus:
Fb = 600 psi >J~ therefore OK
Use five #7 bars for negative moment

. Check placement requirements for flexural reinforcement

Assume #4 stirrups and coarse grout.
I Code Section Minimum clear distance between bars is the bar diameter or I in.
1.12.3.1 Minimum grout thickness between rebar and masonry unit 1/2 in.
Code Section Minimum masonry cover is 1-1/2 in.
1.12.3.5
A 12 in. CMU face shell is 1-1/2 in. thick; assume the bottom of the lintel block is 2 in. thick.
I Code Secaon
1.12.4.1(b)

17-259
 Chapter 17

Check width required for negative moment reinforcement (governs over positive moment
reinforcement).

2(1.5 in.) shell + 2(0.5 in.) grout + 2(0.5 in.) stirrup + 3(0.87 in.) rebar
+ 2(1 in.) clear = 9.62 in. required < 11.62 in. provided • O K

Check depth of cover to negative moment reinforcement (from the top)

= 1.5 in. grout + 0.5 in. stirrup + 0.87 in. rebar + (1 / 2X1 in.) clear
= 3.37 in. actual < 5 in. assumed • OK

Check depth of cover to positive moment reinforcement centroid (from bottom)

= 2 in. + 0.5 in. grout + 0.5 in. stirrup + 0.75 in. rebar + (1/2X1 in.) clear
=4.25 in. actual < 5 in. assumed • OK
The final beam cross section and steel arrangement is shown below.

.5"

5 #7 Top
r II

I.I

72"

--~at 8" o.c.

r/

4 #6 Bottom
tf

11.63" .~

17-260
Example RCJ-7

SHEAR CONSIDERATIONS

Perform the shear design for the continuous beam determining stirrups and location.
17,020 plf

I I
Bearing 8"
I I I I
=8I, Bearing
[ ~ 11'-0" Clear I 2"8"1 11'-0" Clear =I I
Column ....
2'-8" Column 2'-8" Column
Loading

192 ft-kips 192 ft-kips

341 ft-I~ps
MomentDiagram

. Determine Calculated and Allowable Shear Stress

From statics:
1 [(17,020 plf)(12.67 ft) 2
V'-12"67 ilL (1--~()~2) -341ft-kips = 80.9 kips

v R= 17,020 plf(12.67 ft)- 80,900 lb= 134,700 lb

The length of the center column is 2 ft - 8 in. Thus, the shear, V, at the face of the center
support is:
_( 16in. ~(17,020plf)
V = 134,700 lb k,12 in./ft)
V=112,100 lb
At d/2 from the face, the shear, V, is:
11 1oo1 l )l 1
IC~e~ction
2.3.5.5

V = 64,600 lb
Neglecting flexural tension (consistent with previous moment design considerations), the
shear stress from Code Eq. 7-3 is as follows:
[Co~ction
2.3.5.2.1 f ' = bd
V

64,600 lb = 82.9 psi

fv - (11.63 in.)(67 in.)

17-261
 Chapter 17

17,020 plf

0,9 Ib 269,500 Ib 80,900 Ib

12'-8" Ot_-OuOfBearing _ 12'-8" OcCLOf Bearing

Reactions
/_6/I _ 12,-4" _ I_ 6,-6,, _I
< Shear Shear Reinforcement = 2 #4 @ 8 " oc ~ ~ Shear
t Reinforcement I Reinforcement
Not Required Not Required

u} oo~. . ~(/) ~ I
~ LO - b,,
d N ~ o5 d

4'-9"

. 7½ /1\1 2' 10½ / I--- Face Of Support

4 ~ 1'-6½"

Face Of Support ~ 2,-10vJ~ 1,-9. 1' 5' 7'-11"

d12 From Face Of Support d12 Fro ce Of Support

Shear Diagram

The maximum allowable shear stress, Fv, is given by:

I CocleSection Fv = ~;-~' < 50 psi
2.3.5.2.2
Fv = a/l,800 psi = 42.4 psi < 50 psi

For this beam,fi --- 82.9 psi > 42.4 psi; therefore, shear reinforcement is required. Code
Section 7.5.2.3 requires that the maximum Fv when shear reinforcement exists is:

I CodeSection F =3.0~f-~' <150 psi

v
2.3.5.2.3
•". Fv = 3.0 a/l,800 psi = 127 psi < 150 psi but > 82.9, therefore O K

For this example:

f v = 82.9 psi < 127 psi
Thus the beam is allowed by Code to be reinforced for shear.

. Select Size and Spacing of Shear Reinforcement

Note that according to Code Section 7.5.3 the shear reinforcement must resist all of the
Code Section
2.3.5.3 calculated shear (that is, no contribution o f the masonry is counted). Code Eq.(2-26) is used:

17-262
Example RCJ-7

Vs
My-
(64.6 kips) s
- 0.0402s
Av 24 ksi(67 in.)
Options:
Av
8in. 0.32 in. 2

12 in. 0.48 in. 2

16 in. 0.64 in. 2

Select t w o #4 bars @ 8 in. o.c. (vertically). Av = 2(0.20 in.2) = 0.40 in. 2

CodeSection Check spacing:

2.3.5.3.1 I
Maximum s < d/2 < 48 in.
d 67 in.
----33.5in. > 8in.
2 2

. Check shear reinforcement requirement throughout span.

a) Where is shear reinforcement not required?
where f v = f ~ f ' = 42.4 psi < 50 psi

_--.-
V
f v bd ' V = 42.4 psi(11.63 in.)(67 in .) = 33,039 lb =6.15 ft

and (80.9-33.0)/(17.02)
134.7 - 3 3 . 0
V = 33.0 kips occurs at
17.02
= 2.81 ft from center line of end bearing
b) Where can shear reinforcement be reduced to 2-#4 reinforcing bars at 16 in. o.c.
Vs
Av-
F,d
v _ AvFsd
s
V - 0.40 in.2 (24 ksi)(67 in.) _ 40.2 kips
16in.
V = 40.2 kips occurs at 40.2 kips (12.67 ft) + 4.75 ft
80.9 kips +134.7 kips
= 7.11 ft from center of end bearing
Since the point at which shear reinforcement spacing can be doubled is so close to the point at
which shear reinforcement is not required, provide the maximum shear reinforcement
everywhere that shear reinforcement is required. See the shear diagram for layout.

t7 - 263
 Chapter 17

Where shear reinforcement is not required, the designer may choose to use #3 stirrups at 24
in. on center, as a means of supporting the flexural reinforcement.

Reinforcement is required perpendicular to the shear reinforcement, i.e., horizontal, in this

case, by the amount of (1/3) Av = 0.32 in.2/3 = 0.11 in. 2. Although not specifically stated in
the Code or suggested in the Commentary, the author's understanding is that for the bending
element under consideration the flexural steel can be used to satisfy this Code provision.
Previously from MDG Example RCJ-7, As = 3.0 in. 2 > 0.11 in. 2 .'. OK.

If the designer decides to satisfy this Code provision by adding additional reinforcement, then
an acceptable solution is as follows: this reinforcement must be uniformly distributed, and
the spacing must be less than 8 ft-0 in. Prefabricated joint reinforcement with two W1.7 side
CodeSection
2.3.5.3.2 I rods and cross rods, with an effective area of 2(0.0173 in. z) = 0.0345 in.2 can be placed 1 ft-6
in. o.c. horizontally. For four layers of reinforcement, the horizontal reinforcing area is
4(0.0345 in. z) = 0.138 in.Z> 0.11 in. 2 required. OK

Ladder-type joint reinforcement is preferable to truss-type joint reinforcement when vertical

bars are also used. In the truss type, the diagonal cross wires may interfere with the bar
placement.

CodeSection The shear reinforcement must be anchored. Provide U-shaped stirrups with lap slice length =
2.1.8.5.1.5 I
1.71a
1.71a=l.7(O.OO15dbF9
CodeSection
2.1.8.2 [ = 1.7(0.0015)(0.5 in.)(24,000 psi)
1.71 a = 3 0 . 6 i n . use31in.laplength

Cover requirements are detailed on following page. The horizontal joint reinforcement can be
developed or anchored by extending into the neighboring masonry elements.

For a check on steel placement within the beam, see MDG Example RCJ-7.

The required out-to-out dimension of the stirrup is

11.62 in. - 2(1.5 in.) face shell - 2(0.5 in.) grout = 7.62 in.

ICodeSection The minimum bend radius is 6 bar diameters or 6(0.5 in.) = 3 in.
1.12.6 ] Therefore the minimum out-to-out dimension of the stirrup is
3 in.+3in.+0.5in.+0.5in.=7in.<7.62in..'. OK

17-264
Example RCJ-7

The f'mal beam cross section and steel arrangement are shown below.

5-
2 - #-4 I ~ l a t 8" o.c. Where Indicated on Shear Diagram

2 - #3 at 24u o.c. Elsewhere

7 2 it 1.7lt= 31 "

14 11.63"
? ~v

TERMINATION OF FLEXURAL REINFORCEMENT

Determine the required lengths of theflexural reinforcement.

In design office practice it would be typical to continue all flexural reinforcement the entire
length of the beam plus the required development length. In this example, however, some
bars will be terminated to show the designer the required calculations.

17-265
 Chapter 17

1. Shear Diagram and Shear Reinforcement.

I ~ 6'-6" 12'-4" 6'-6"
S~'ear Stee~- 'S~'hearSteel= 2#4 @8'~-~ Shear SteeT
Not Required 134.7kips " Not Required

80.9 kips

80.9 kips

134.7 kips

2 '-9 ' ~ 7'-11"

--- 7'-11"
I -"12'-8" CE~of Bearing--' -'~2'-8" CE~of Bearing ~ J

Shear Diagram

2. Moment Diagram and Required Reinforcement (previously designed)

1 '-8" 1 '-8"
~l I 3'-1"1 3'-1"1 I 3'-2" I ~

-"4'-9;"-I-- 7'-11"

12'-8" CE~ of Bearing v

~.kips
7'-11" v 1--'-.4,.9,;r

1~"12'-8" CE~ of Bearing

2#7 x 17'-6"
Moment Diagram
2o,,F-,--

.I 2#7 x 14'-4 " ~

'~i~'~
~-2#7 x 17'-6"
1#7 x 14'-4"

Reinforcement Layout
J

17-266
Example RCJ-7

CodeSection 3. Positive Moment Reinforcement Anchorage and Cut-Off Lengths

2.1.8.3.2 At least 25% of the positive moment reinforcement must extend into the support and
be anchored to develop the allowable tensile stress.

Choose to make 2 bars, of the total 4 required, continuous. This decision is based on the
symmetry o f the bar locations (see previous moment design considerations) and the need to
have bars to which to tie the stirrups.

The two extended bars must be anchored for length,

l d = 0.0015dbFs
I CodeSection
2.1.8.2 ] l d = 0 . 0 0 1 5 d (2,400 psi)

l = 36d b
For a #6 rebar, 36 db = 36 (0.75 in.) = 27 in.
I CodeSection
2.1.8.4.1 A standard hook develops an equivalent length = 11.25 do, or
CodeSection 11.25(0.75 in.) = 8.44 in. for a #6 rebar.
1.12.6
A standard 90 ° hook for a #6 rebar consists o f a 6 bar diameter bend plus an extension of 12
'CodeSection bar diameters for a total length of 12 in.
1I.I2.5(b)
The bar must be extended 27 in. - 8.44 in. = 18.56 in. past the center of bearing before
hooking into the column. To fit into masonry cores use 20 in. extension. It is 4 in. from the
face of the support to the center of bearing.
20 in. + 4 in. = 24 in. < 32 in. column • OK
To determine where the remaining two bars may be cut off, it is necessary to find the
flexural capacity of the section with two #6 bars.

2(0.44in))
p= = 0.00113pn = 0.00182
11.63 in .(67 in .)
k = - p n + X/2 p n + (p n) 2 = - 0 . 0 0 1 8 2 + x/2(0.00182) + (0.00182) 2 = 0.174

j = 1-k- = 1 (0.174) _ 0.942

3 3
M, = F,A, jd
(24 ksi)[2(0.44 in. 2) ~0.942)(67 in.)
m t =
12 in ./ft.
M , = 111 f t - kips based on allowable steel stress

OR

F, bd2jk
M,~-
2
(600 psi)(11.63 in.)(67 in. )2 (0.942)(0.174)
Mm-
12,000 in. - lb/ft- kips
M,, = 428 ft- kips based on allowable masonry stress

+ M = 111 ft-kips occurs at 1 ft - 8 in. from the point of zero moment.

17-267
 Chapter 17

These bars are not permitted to be terminated at the point at which they are no longer required
Code Section
2.1.8.3.1.3 to resist flexure, but instead must be extended for a length equal to the greater of the member
depth or 12 db.

The member depth of 67 in. or 5 ft - 7 in., exceeds the distance from the point at which + M =
1 1 1 ft-kips to the center of bearing. Therefore, no positive-moment flexural reinforcement
bars may be terminated short of the supports.

Make all four #6 bottom bars continuous and hooked into the end supports for a distance of
32 in.

Code Section If the bars cannot be provided full length in one piece, provide lap splices of
2.1.8.6.1.1 0.002 db Fs > 12 in.

For #6 bars, lap length = 0.002(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi) = 36 in.

. Negative Moment Anchorage and Cut-Off Lengths

CodeSection At least 1/3 of the total negative moment reinforcement must be extended beyond the point of
2.1.8.3.3.2 zero moment for a distance equal to the member depth or equal to one-sixteenth of the span.

Since the total negative moment reinforcement consists of five #7 bars, extend two #7 bars for
a distance of
la = 12.7 ft(12 in. fit) = 9.53 in.
16
or

l a = d = 67 in. GOVERNS
The total length of these bars is 2(3.17 ft) + 2(67 in./12) = 17.5 ft. It may be desirable to
extend these bars the full length of the beam, to provide something to which to tie the stirrup
bars.

To determine where the remaining bars may be cut off, it is necessary to find the
flexural capacity of the section with the two #7 rebars.
2(0.60in. 2)
p= = 0 . 0 0 1 5 4 pn = 0.0248
11.63 in.(67 in.)

k = - pn + X/2pn + (pn)2 = _ 0. 0248 + ~/2(0. 0248) + (0. 0248)2 = 0.199

j = l _ k = 1_ (0' 199) = 0.934

3 3
_ Fbba2jk
M
2
_ (600 psi)(11.63 i n . ) ( 6 7 in.)~ (0. 9 3 4 ) ( 0 . 1 9 9 )
M-
12,000 in.- lb/ft - kips
M , = 485 ft - kips based on allowable m a s o n r y stress
OR

17-268
Example RCJ-7

M, = F A jd
(24 ksi)[2(0.60 in.Z)~o.934X67 in).
M, = 12 i n . / f t
M , = 150 ft- kips based on allowable steel stress ¢=: G O V E R N S

-M = 150 ft-kips occurs at 1 ft - 7 in. from the point of zero moment.

The remaining three bars may not terminate at the point at which they are no longer
CodeSection
2.1.8.3.1.3 required to resist flexure but instead must be extended for a length equal to the greater of the
member depth or 12 db. The member depth of 67 in. governs over
12db = 12(0.875 in.) = 10.5 in. for #7 bars. The extension of 67 in. or 5 ft - 7 in. means that
the bars terminate in the zone of positive moment, or in the compression zone. Therefore the
requirements of Code Section 2.1.8.3.1.5 need not be met.

I CodeSection By inspection, the continuing reinforcement has embedment length > ld beyond the point of
2.1.8.3.1.4 terminated reinforcement.
The total length of the terminated bars is 2(1 ft - 7 in.) + 2(5 ft - 7 in) = 14 ft - 4 in.
Bond capacity to develop the bars should also be checked at the point of zero moment. See
MDG Section 14.2.1.3 and MDG Example TMS-16.

17-269
 C h a p t e r 17

Example RCJ-8 - - Empirical Design of Masonry Walls

Design the masonry walls using Wall Construction Option A (unreinforced brick and block
noncomposite exterior walls and unreinforced block interior walls), and Building Construction
Option 11dimensions. See MDG Section 17. 3.1 for building plan dimensions and elevations.

Roof Deck: Precast Concrete Concrete Masonry

Roof (Hotel) Dead Load = 95 p s f ASTM C 90, Grade N
Floor Dead Load = 95 p s f Hollow Units
Partition = 15 p s f
Glass Curtain wall DL = l Op s f Mortar, ASTM C 270
Roof Live Load = 20 psf Mortar Type to be specified
Dwelling Room LL = 40 p s f
Public Rooms LL = 100 psf
Corridors LL = 100 p s f
Stairs LL = l OOp s f
Design Wind Pressure = 25 p s f
Seismic Performance Category = A
Use modified framing plan shown below

Calculations and Discussion

The building scheme presented in MDG Figs. 17.3-1 through 17.3-10 cannot be designed by the
empirical section of the Code, since it does not satisfy the Code requirements for shear walls in
the east-west direction. A revised scheme, which may be designed empirically, is presented in the
modified framing plan shown below. In this revised scheme, the interior nonloadbearing wall on
Grid Line 2 is removed and exterior nonloadbearing walls are added to Grid Lines 1 and 4. All
other aspects of the building scheme are as shown in MDG Section 17.3.

30' 30' 30'

29'-8"

,
0
9'-4" 7'-8"

28'-8"
'
®
2nd, 3rd, and 4th FloorPlan

17-270
Example RCJ-8

= TYPICAL INTERIOR LOADBE ARING W A L L

I CodeSection A. Empirical Design Criteria Check
5.1.2.1
Code Section 1. Seismic Performance Category A < Seismic Performance Category B .'. OK
5,12.2 2. Design Wind Velocity Pressure = 25 p s f < 25 psfmax, wind velocity pressure .'. OK
Code Section 3. Maximum Height = 35 ft < 35 ft max. permitted .'. OK
5.2
B. Shear Wall Design
l CodeSection
Try 8 in. fully grouted concrete masonry units, unit strength = 4,500 psi
1. Minimum nominal shear wall thickness 8 in.
5.3.1.1
2. Minimum total shear wall length
Shear Walls: North/South direction. Minimum cumulative length required = 0.4 x long
CodeSection dimension. Min. length = 150 f t x 0.4 = 60 ft required
5.3.1.2 ] Actual length = I0 x 30 ft = 300 ft > 60 ft .'. OK
Note: stairwells and elevator shafts may be included, but the design is adequate without
them.
3. Maximum spacing of shear walls:
Code Section ratio = shear wall spacing/shear wall length = 30 ft/30 ft = 1.0 < 4 .'. OK
5.3.1.3 [ with precast concrete slab diaphragms

C. Compressive stress: typical interior wall

P
axial compressive stress, f a = < Fa
Ag
l Coder~b~ F , = 225 psi for fully grouted units, Type M or S Mortar,
5.4.2 [
7 . 6 3 i n . x 1 f t x 1 ft
wall w t . = 140 p c f x - 89.0 p s f
12in./ft
Check stresses at the base of the wall.
Loading Case: Reduced Live Load + Dead Load (ASCE 7-93)
Dwelling unit live load reduction:
15
factor = 0.25 +

15
factor = 0.25 -t = 0.441
~]6 x 30 x 34.33
Roof Live Load = 30 ff x 20 psf = 600 plf
Roof Dead Load -- 30 f t x 95 p s f = 2,850 plf
Roof Load over Corridor: Concentrated Load that spreads through wall
LL = 4.0 ft x 30 ft x 20 psf = 2,400 lb
DL = 4.0 ft x 30 ft x 95 psf = 11,400 lb
2nd, 3rd, 4th FloorLL. = 30 it (40 psi) (0.441) O) = 1,590 plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th FloorDL = 30 ft (110 psi) (3) = 9,900 plf
18,055 plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor Corridor: concentrated load that spreads through wall
LL -- 4 ft (30 ft) (100 psi) (0.441) (3) = 15,900 lb
DL = 4 ft (30 ft) (110 psi) (3) = 39,600 lb
Wall DL = 35 ft (89.0 psi) = 3,115 plf
Total = 18,055 p l f + 69,300 lb

17 - 271
 Chapter 17

The concentrated loads from the beams supporting the roof and floors over the corridors may be
spread over a distance = bearing plus 4 thickness, say 12 in. + 4 (8 in.) = 44 in. (spreads over both
CodeSection legs of flanged wall).
2.1.7.1
_ 18,055 plf 69,300 lb
Code Table - 197 + 207 = 404 psi > 225 psi " N.G.
5.4.2 f° 12(7.63 in.) ~ 44 in.(7.63 in.)

Reevaluate using nominal 12 in. fully,grouted wall.

19,700plf 69,3001b - 1 4 1 + 99 = 240 psi > 225 psi • N.G.
f° 12(11.63in.) ~ 6 0 i n . ( l l . 6 3 i n . )
The designer is limited to 12 in. thickness for normal product run concrete block units. To
achieve the required compressive strength using empirical design, one would need to use brick
rather than block, as shown in Code Table 5.4.2.

The reader should compare the allowable compressive stresses within MDG Example RCJ-2 to
this example to evaluate the altemate design method.

D. Lateral Support Design

1. 8 ft 10 in. floor to floor dimension, 8 ft 0 in. clear, assume lateral brace at each floor
- -

with floor diaphragm action.

CodeSection h' 8 ft x 1 2 i n . / f t
5.5.1 [ - = 8 < 2 0 .'. OK
t 12 in.

= TYPICAL EXTERIOR LOADBEARING WALL

A. Empirical Design Criteria Check
CodeSection
5.1.2.1 ] 1. Seismic Performance Category A < Seismic Performance Category B .'. OK
CodeSections 2. Design Wind Velocity Pressure = 25 psf < 25 psf max. wind velocity pressure .'. OK
5.1.2.2andS.2 [ 3. Maximum Height = 35 ft < 35 ft max. permitted .'. OK

B. Shear Wall Design

Try 8 in. fully grouted concrete masonry units. Per Code Section 1.6 brick outside wythe is
not used to resist shear loads.
See Calculations under item 1.B above

C. Compressive stress: typical exterior wall

CodeSection axial compress stress, f o = - P- _<F a
5.4.2 [
Ag
wall wt. = 140 p c f x 7.63 in .× 1 ft x 1 ft = 89.0 p s f
Loading Case: Reduced Live Load + Dead Load
Check stress at base of wall. Dwelling unit live load reduction:
15
factor = 0.25 +
,/-gl
15
factor = 0.25 ÷ = 0.520
~/6x15x34.33

17 - 272
Example RCJ-8

Roof Live Load = 15 ft x 20 p s f = 300 plf

Roof Dead Load = 15 ft x 95 p s f = 1,425 plf
R o o f Load Over Corridor
LL = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (20 psf) = 1,200 lb
DL = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (95 psf) = 5,700 lb
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor LL = 15 ft (40 psi) (0.520) (3) = 936 plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor DL = 15 ft (I 10 psi) (3) = 4,950 plf
10,726 plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor Corridor: Concentrated Load that spreads through wall.
LL = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (100 psf) (0.520) (3) = 9,360 lb
DL = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (110 psi) (3) = 19,800 lb
Wall DL = 35 ft (89.0 psi) = 3,115 plf
Total = 10,726 p l f + 36,060 lb

I Code Section The concentrated loads from the beams supporting the roof and floors over the corridors may
2.1.7.1 be spread over a distance = bearing plus 4 (thickness), say 12 in. + (4) (8 in.) = 44 in. (spreads
out over both legs of flanged wall.

_ 10,726 p l f 36,060 lb
f" 12 (7.63 in.) ~ 44 in. (7.63 in.) = 224.7 psi < 225 psi" • OK

Code Table Use 8 in. fully grouted 4,500 psi unit, Type M or S Mortar
5.4.2

D. Lateral Support Design

See item 1.D above

= EXTERIOR NONLOADBEARING WALL, COLUMN LINE 1 AND 4

Between B-C, C-D, D-E, and E-F
Code Section Empirical Design Criteria Check
5.1.2.1 I A. 1. Seismic Performance Category A < Category B .'. OK
Code Section
5.1.2.2
Code Section
I 2.
3.
Design Wind Pressure = 25 p s f < 25 psfmax, permitted .'. OK
Maximum Height = 35 ft < 35 ft max. permitted .'. OK
5.2 I B. Shear Wall Design
Try 8 in. solid, concrete masonry units. Per Code Section 1.6, brick outside wythe is not used
to resist shear loads.
Code Section
5.3.1.1 1. Minimum shear wall thickness 8 in.
. Minimum total shear wall length: ..
Shear Walls to resist an east or west wind.
minimum cumulative length = 0.4 x long dimension
min, length = 150 ft x 0.4 = 60 ft
actual length (see modified framing plan) =10ftx8x2
[Co~ ~ction
5.3.1.2 = 1 6 0 f t > 6 0 f t • OK
. Minimum wall length by shear wall ratio:
Co~ction E wall length _ 80 ft
5.3.1.3 -1.18>0.25 • OK
spacing 67.67 ft

17-273
 C h a p t e r 17

C. Compressive Stress:
typical exterior or interior nonloadbearing wall
CodeSection
P
axial compressive stress, f , = - - < Fo
5.4.2 Ag
estimate average wall wt. = 89 psf
Loading Case: Wall Weight only
Wall DL = 35 ftx 89 psf = 3,115 plf
3,115 lb
f~ = 12 in. x 7.63 in. = 34.0 psi < 160 psi .'. OK
The low axial compressive stress can be adequately supported by many types of concrete
masonry units and type of mortar. The same masonry unit and mortar as the adjoining wall
described above is recommended, for ease of construction.

D. Lateral Support Design

See item 1.D above

Code Section 5.8.3 specifies connection requirements for the anchorage of masonry walls to floor
and roof diaphragms and at tops of columns.

Many architectural design details are required for a properly functioning masonry structure.
Required masonry joints, including control joints and expansion joints, are described in MDG
Chapter 10. The cavity must be adequately flashed, weeped and vented. See MDG Chapter 6.
Another critical detail location is the top of the wall, where the coping must be capable of
withstanding differential movement of the brick and block wythes. See MDG Chapter 10.

17-274
Example RCJ-9 m Design of a Reinforced Clay Brick Nonloadbearing Wall for Out-of-
Plane Load
For the material property values given below, design the wall of MDG Example RCJ-1 for
Building Option I, Wall Construction Option B, as a hollow reinforced clay brick nonloadbearing
wall for out-of-plane flexure and shear due to wind only.
Clay Brick Masonry Grout

Unit Strength (psi) 6, 600 NA

Mortar Type S NA
f'm orfg (psi) 2,500 3,500

Code Section Emor Eg(psi) 1.75x 106 1.75x 10 6

1.8.2.2.1
n 16.6 16.6
Reinforcement - Grade 60, Es = 29 x 106 psi

Calculations and Discussion

FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The stair and landing arrangements for this wall are similar to those shown in the figure of MDG
Example RCJ-1 except that the floor height in this building option is 9 ft - 8 in., for coupled shear
walls. The design wind load in this example is equal to 25 psf.
The following assumptions are made in this reinforced wall example,
1. The landings are connected to the walls.
2. The stairs are not connected to the wall.
3. The wall above and below landings behaves as a strip and spans in the vertical direction
between landings.
4. The 7 ft wide horizontal portion of the wall spans horizontally between the vertical strips.
5. The wall will be designed for flexure due to wind only.
Horizontal Steel
Center to center of landing is considered as the span
s p a n = 15 ft - 2 ft - 2 ft = 11 ft
Considering a one foot wide strip, the maximum moment is given as

M - wl~ _ 25 plf(11 ft )2 (12 in. fit) = 4,540 i n . - lb/ft

8 8
[Code~ction
2.3.2.1 ] The allowable stress in Grade 60 steel is 24,000 psi which can be increased by 33% for wind load,
thus
Code~ction
2.1.1.1.3 [ Fs = 1.33(24,000 psi) = 32,000 psi

17 - 275
 Chapter 17

Considering a 7-1/2 in. thick hollow clay brick wall, the effective depth, d as shown, is equal to
3.75 in. Assumingj = 0.9, the required steel area in the horizontal direction is calculated as

M 4,540 in - lb/ft
A~ - - - - " = 0.042 in .2/ft
F, jd (32,000psi)(0.9)(3.75 in.)

Use 1 - # 4 @ 4 0 in., A~ = 0.06 in.Z/ft

or 2 - #3 @ 40 in., A~ = 0.066 in.2/ft

or joint reinforcement at equivalent spacing, with d based on steel location in wall.

Typically for seismic areas whole bars would be used with notched masonry units.

Check k:

] = nA,

or ( 1 2 ) ( 3 . 7 5 k ) ( - ~ k ) = ( 1 6 . 6 ) ( 0 . 0 6 ) ( 3 . 7 5 - 3.75k)

or 84.4k 2 = 3.73 - 3.73k

or k 2 + 0.04k - 0.04 = 0

from which
k=0.19
.'. j = 1 - - k = 1 - ~ 0 "19 = 1 - 0.06 = 0.94
3 3
.'. Steel Stress, for #4 @ 40 in. o.c.
M 4,540 i n . - lb
f~- A j d - (0.06in.)2(0.94)(3.75 in.)
fs = 21,500psi<Fs= 32,000psi.'.OK

Masonry Stress:
Code Section
2.2.3.1 I F~=-3 f~'
1 ,

With a 33% increase due to wind

Code Section F~ = ( 1 . 3 3 ) ( 1 ) ( 2 , 5 0 0 p s i ) = 1,110 psi
2.1.1.1.3

2M (4,540 i n . - lb)(2)
f _ _ --
b
bkJ"d' (12 in .)(0.19)(0.94)(3.75 in. )2

f = 303 psi < F , = l , l l 0 p s i • OK

b

17-276
Example RCJ-9

Vertical Steel
Distance between landings = 9 f t - 8 in.

It will be conservatively assumed that the wind on half of 15 ft wall width between Grid Line F
and G acts as a load on 4 ft wide wall strip spanning vertically between the landings. The strip
will be assumed to be simply supported at its ends. Based on this assumption,
Wind load on 4 ft wide strip = 152 ft (25 psi') = 188 p l f

M = (188 plf)(9.67 ft)z (12 in.fit) _ 26,370 in. - lb/4 ft w i d e strip

8
26,370 in. - lb/ft
.'. M per f l width = = 6,590 in. - lb
4ft
Assumingj = 0.9,

M 6,590 i n . - lb
As(req'd) = _ _ = 0.061 in.Z/ft
Fjd (32,000 psi)(0.9)(3.75 in.)

Use #4 bars @ 36 in., As = 0.066 in.2/ft

Check k:

or ( 1 2 ) ( 3 . 7 5 k ) ( - ~ k / =(16.6)(0.066)(3.75-3.75k)

or 84.4k 2 -- 4.11 - 4.1 lk

or k 2 + 0.049k - 0.049 = 0
From which
k = 0.20
.'. j = l - - - = k 1 - - 0 " 2 0 - 1 - 0 . 0 7 = 0 . 9 3
3 3
Steel Stress for #4 @ 36 in. o.c.:
M 6,590 i n . - lb
fs- As j d - (0.066 in.2)(0.93)(3.75 in.)
= 28,500 psi < F, = 32,000 psi .'. O K
Masonry Stress:
2M (2)(6,590 i n . - Ib)
f ' - bkj" d ' - (12 in.)(0.20)(0.93)(3.75 in.)2
=423psi < Fb=l,ll0psi • OK
Provide steel as shown in sketch on next page.

For Seismic Performance Category D the total minimum empirical seismic reinforcement required
Code Section I
LI3.6.3 is 0.002 A~ A minimum of 0.0007 Ag reinforcement is required in each direction.

17-277
 Chapter 17

Steel Areas
0.20 in 2
Horizontal - 0.00067 < 0.0007
(40 in.)(7.5 in.)
Vertical
0.20 in.2
= 0 . 0 0 0 7 4 > 0.0007
(36 in.)(7.5 in .)
Total = 0.00141 < 0.002
Therefore, increase the amount o f steel to that shown in the sketch to meet seismic criteria.

15'

Horizontal Steel #4
One At Level Of
Landing And One
In Between
Landings.

VerticalSteel#4 @ 24" O.C.

0.20 in .2
Horizontal - 0.00092>0.0007
29 in .(7.5 in .)

0.20in. 2 = 0.00111 > 0.0007

Vertical 24 in .(7.5 in.)
Total = 0.002 >_ 0.002.'.OK

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

The wall is subjected to a wind load of 25 psf. The resulting wind load moment for the 11 ft span
was 4,540 in.-lb/ft. Thus, the shear, V, is
:w,(I)
V = (25 plf)(lI ft) = 138 ib
2

17-278
Example RCJ-9

This wall is a single-wythe wall composed of 8 in. nominal clay units with N o . 4 reinforcing steel
bars placed in the center of a grouted cell at 40 in. o.c. with d = 3.75 in.

d = 3.75-

According to Code Section 2.3.5.5., the calculated maximum shear for "non-cantilever beams" is
taken at d/2 from the face. The commentary says "beam or wall loading". Even though the shear
CodeEq.2-19 ] at d/2 or 2 in., in this case, could be used, most designers simply use the end span reaction for
walls for use in finding the shear stress in Code Eq. (2-19) as shown below:

Coercion V
2.3.5.2.2 f~-
ICode~ction bd
2.3.5.2.1 [ 1381bs
fv- - 3.1 p s i
(12 in.)(3.75 in.)

The maximum allowed shear stress, Fv, is given by:

Fv = 4~' <450 psi
CodeSection
2.1.1.1.3 .'.F~ = 50 psi x 1.33 = 66.5 psi

For this wallf~ = 3.1 psi < 66.5 psi; therefore, no shear reinforcing is needed.

17-279
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-IO m Design of Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall for In-Plane Lateral
Loads
Design the shear wall on Grid Line C between Grid Lines 1 and 2 for Seismic Performance
Category D using Wall Construction Option B and Building Construction Option 1. Use
Hollow Clay Masonry Units.
Clay Brick Masonry Grout
Unit Strength 6, 600 NA
Mortar Type S NA
f'm orfg (psi) 2,500 3,500
Em or Eg (psi) 1.75 x 106 1. 75 x 106
n 16.6 16.6
Reinforcement = Grade 60; Es = 29 x 106 psi

Calculations and Discussion

The wall geometry and loading are obtained from MDG Section 17.3.3.
The critical lateral load case on this wall is seismic load. The wall geometry and loading are
obtained from MDG Table 17.3.25,

Geometry: Assume 8" brick wall; Type S mortar grouted solid

lw = 29.67 ft = 356 in.
d = 344 in. (assumed)
b = 7 . 5 in

29~-8"

9 ' - 8"
I

9,_8 H

9'-8"

10'-10"

17-280
Example RCJ-10

Lateral Loads Shear, kips Moment, kip-ft

49
49
49
98
29
127

38
165
436

Axial L o a d s
Level DL LL
(Top of Wall) (kips) (kips)
4 84.6 17.8
3 202.6 39.4
2 320.4 53.4
1 439.1 66.5

Check shear for assumed wall thickness.

Code Section I f , = V _ 165,000 lb = 64.0 psi
2.3.5.2.1 I bd 7.5 x 344
M = 4436kip- ftx 12 in./ft = 0.94
Vd 165kipsx 344 in.

Where shear reinforcement is not provided to resist the calculated shear.

Co~ ~ction F~ = ~ I 4 - V~dlX~' 4(~3X2.5x 0.6)

2.3.5.2.2~ I
[Code Eq. 2-21 I F, = ~ ( 4 - 0 . 9 4 ) ~ 4~3X2.5 × 0.6)=102.1 psi

]Co~ ~ctio~
2.I.1.2.3.2a~
2.1.1.2.3.3
] but F v<[80 -45(M/Vd)](~)(2.5 x 0.6) = 75.4
fv = 64.0 psi < F~.'. No shear reinforcement needed
~ GOVERNS

Now consider the flexural design requirements for the shear wall using the interaction
technique of MDG Section 12.2.2.2. Because of the high gravity loads, either compression or
tension might govern.

17 - 281
 Chapter 17

1) Assume d ' distance from maximum tension face of masonry to center of

gravity of tension steel.
2) Assume compression governs, solve for kd, check if compression actually
governs. If it does, go to (4). If not go to (3).
3) Assume tension governs, get equation for kd.
4) Using governing equation, solve for kd.
5) Get As, check As, adjust above steps.

I f compression governs:

kd
F,./E,.

Asf~

F~

(a) f~/E, _ F~/E~ ~ f~ =nF., ( l - k )

( a - pd) ka k

P =C -T
(b)
P =~bh/F. - a s L

(c)

Substitute from (b) into (c)

A.f~ = P - ~ bkdF.,

This can be solved for k

Then substitute into (b) for A,, and into (a) forf~.

17 - 2 8 2
Example RCJ-10

ff tension governs:

P
fm/Em

.4sF~

f~

(a)
Fs/Es fm/E,,, kFs
- ::::~fm = - -
(d - kd) kd n(1 - k)

P --C - T
(b)
P-- £ b ~ f ~ - AsFs

(c)

Substitute from (b) into (c)

Substitute from (a) into the above

L 2 n ~l-k)

This can be solved for k

Then substitute into (b) for As, and into (a) for fro.

17 - 2 8 3
 Chapter 17

FirstFloor
check 0.9D+E
e,-O~ -0.SAvD
(Av = effective velocity - related acceleration, ASCE 7)
Av = 0.40g
E = QE - 0 . 2 D
0.9D + E = 0.9D + Qe - 0.2D
0.9D + E = 0 . 7 D + Qe
P = 0.7(439.1) kips = 307.4 kips
M = 4,436 kip-ft

Assume compression governs

M = 4436 x 12 = 53,232 kip-in.

P = 307.4 kips
b = 7.5 in.
d = 344 in. (assumed)

~o _ - ~ ~ ~~0 ~ ) _ - ~ ° ° ( ~ ~ 0 ~)= ~ , ~
lw= 356 in" ~ ~
d '= 6 in. (2 rows of reinforcement)
('2rows)

M=[P-~(7.5in.)(k)(350in.)(2.22kip/in.2)I~-~-6 )

M = (P - 2916 k)172+2916 k(178 - 116.7 k)

Substitute M = 53,232 kip-in.
P = 307.4 kips
Solve for k: k ~ 0.03 (no convergence)

Tension will govern. Use other equation.

F, = 24 ksi 4(,543X2.5+ 0.8)= 64 ksi

17-284
Example RCJ-10

166

+~(7"5in')k(350in')(k~64ksi~356-k×3~----O-O
3 ~ ,16.6l -~, 2k )

I k2 ] k2
M= 5069(1_k ) P 172 + 5069 (1_ k) (178 -116.7k )

This yields a cubic equation in k

k3-3kZ-0.179k + 0.179 = 0
Solve for k: k = 0.224

fm = F ~ / l _ ~ ) = 6 4 k s i ( 0.224 .~=l.lX5ksi
n 16.6 1 - 0 . 2 2 4 )
As =--~(~zbkdf,,-P)
As = ~4 [(~ × 7.5 in.× 0.224 × 350 in.× 1.115 ksi)- 307.4]
As = 0.32 in. 2

One #5 bar trim reinforcement is required by calculations. However, use minimum prescriptive
flexural reinforcement of 2 - #5 bars at each end of wall.

Nowcheck
1.2D + 0.5L + 1.0E
Since compression is greater in this case than the above case, minimum prescriptive steel still
controls.

Since the wall is in Seismic Performance Category D, provide total vertical plus horizontal
reinforcement of at least 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall. Use at least
0.0007 Ag~osseach way.

Code Section Minimum required reinforcement per foot = 0.0007(7.5 x 12) = 0.06 in.2/ft
1.13.6.3

Horizontal: Use #5 bars @ 2 ft 9=0.0017

Vertical: Use #5 bars @ 4 ft 9=0.0009

Total reinforcement provided = 0.0026 > 0.002 required.

17-285
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-11 m Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall Design

Design the shear wall on Grid Line 2 between Grid Lines E and F using reinforced hollow clay
masonry (Wall Construction Option B) and Building Construction Option 1. Seismic Performance
Category D.

Calculations and Discussion

Loads
The critical lateral load case on this wall is seismic load. The wall geometry and loading are
obtained from MDG Fig. 17.3-5 and Table 17.3.25, MDG Section 17.3.3.

8~
3'4" 22'0" 3'4" /8"

93 kips
'-8"
7'(Typ.)

153 kips
(Cumulative) '-8"

191 kips
(Cumulative) '-8"

208 kip~s
(Cumulative) 10'-10"

Shear Wall

17 - 286
Example RCJ-11

Lateral
Lateral loads are as shown in figure below.

Shear, kips Moment, if-kips

93

153 00

191 ,380

208

"~480

Axial
Loads for this wall were not previously calculated in MDG Section 17.3.2. See MDG Section
17.3.1 for Roof, Floor, and Wall Construction.

Dead Load:
Roof 95 psfx 4 ft = 380 plf
Corridor 110 p s f x 4 ft = 440 plf
Wall 70 p s f x 9.67 ft = 677 plf
70 p s f x 10.8 ft = 758 plf

Length for Corridors and Roof = 22 ft + 3 ft - 4 in. = 25.3 it

Length for Wall = 22 ft
Neglect Coupling Beams

Element Dead Load Cumulative Dead Load

(kips) (kips)

Roof 9.6 9.6

Wall 14.9 24.5

4~ 11.1 35.6

Wall 14.9 50.5

3 rd 11.1 61.6

Wall 14.9 76.5

2 "a 11. I 87.6

Wall 16.7 104.3

17-287
 C h a p t e r 17

Live Load: R o o f 20 psf x 4 if = 80 plf

Floors 100 p s f x 4 ft = 400 plf

Element L i v e Load Cumulative Live Load

(kips) (kips)

Roof 2.0 2.0

4~ 10.1 12.1

3 rd 10.1 22.1

2 "d 10.1 32.1

TRIM STEEL DESIGN (The vertical steel placed at both ends of a shear wall)
I CodeEquation 0.9 D + E ~ controls by inspection
2.1.1.1.1 I E=Qe -0.5 A, D
A~ = 0.40
ASCE7-93 ] E = QE - 0 . 2 #
.'. 0.9D+ QE-O.2D=O.7D+ Qe

1~tFloor 0.7 DL = 0.7 x 104.3 kips = 73.0 kips = PDL

M = 6,480 if-kips = Mot
CodeEquation Verify that wall can carry axial load without shear or moment
2.3.3.2,1 [ r = 2.17 M D G Appendix A Table 2
h = 1 2 0 " h / r = 120/2.17 = 55.3 < 9 9

ICodeEq.2.17 ] Pa = (0.25f,~A, +0.65A~,F,) 1 -

Pa = 1044 kips > 73 kips .'. OK

M
T P [_ kd _

d"

lw
-I
First Estimate: (See MDG 12.2.2.2)

17-288
Example R C J - 11

Assume 8 in. Wall b = 7.5 in.

d = 264 in. - 18 in. = 246 in.

Assume masonry stresses control. Take ~ M a b o u t centroid of tension steel

try 6 bars at 6 in. on center at each end of wall d ' = 18 in.

lw = 22 ft = 264 in. lw - d = d = 246 in.

PDL
~~'x Mor Assume 6 Bars

~F6"~II< 6" _l_

~1TM6" _I_
"-I 6" _"1TM
TM
r_ 6" _,
"-I 3 " ~ I - ~

_L , Lzl
18" -I
v F
141 264" i~I

C[246- 3~-~-]= 73 x 1 0 0 0 [ ( 1 3 2 - 1 8 ) ] + 6,480 (12,000)

C =~ Fmbkd
F m =I/3 (2500)(2.5)(0.8)(1.33) = 2,222 psi

(2,222)(7.5)(kd)[246--~- =73,000(114) +77,760,000

8'333kdi246--~1 =86,082,000

- 2 7 7 8 k d 2 + 2,050,000kd - 86,082,000 = 0
k d 2 - 7 3 8 k d + 30,980 = 0

k d = 44.7 k= 44.7/246 = 0.182

C = ½ (2,222)(7.5)(44.7) = 372,500 lb
T = C - P = 372,500 - 73,000=299,500 lb
Em=700 (2,500) = 1,750,000
n = Es ~Era = 29,000,000 / 1,750,000 = 16.6

From strain compatibility f s = ( ~ S ~ ) n F m

f~ = ( ! - 0.182 ~(16.6)(2,222) = 165,780 > 24,000(2.5)(0.8)(1.33) = 64,000 psi

\ 0.182 J

17-289
 Chapter 17

.'. Masonry did not control and the neutral axis location is not correct.
Recheck with Fs = 64,000 psi
Try As = 299,487/64,000 = 4.67 in. z Try six #8 bars = 4.74 in. z
As_e#= 4.74 + 73,000/64,000 = 5.88 in. /
5.88
Pc# 7.5(246)=0.0032 np=16.6(0.0032)=0.053

k = [(np) 2 + 2 n p ] ~ - n p = 0.276 j = 0.908

f~ = 65,917 psi > 64,000 psi N .G. 3 % overstresed T r y more, smaller bars
Try 13-#6 bars As = 5.72 in. 2
L.., 6 " ~ r ~ 6"~J~ 6'¢=1~ 6'/=1~ 6" =r~ 6//=1 3 " [ _ . ,
I-" "-I-" "1-" "T" "T" "1" 'vl

• • • • • • • ]

I
~.. d' = 21" .._I
I" "-I
As_e~ = 5.72 .+ 73,000 = 6.86in.2
64,000 d = 2 6 4 - 21 = 2 4 3 "

6.67
= 0.0041 n p = 16.6 (0.0041) = 0.067
Pe# = 7.5(225)

k=[(np) 2 +2np~/2 -np=0.306 j = 0.898

60000 C7 000( 4
=

6.86(0.898)(225)
f s = 60,390 < 64,000 psi

Teff = 6.86(65,390) = 418,400 lb

T = Te# - P = 4 1 8 , 4 0 0 - 73,000 = 345,400
C = T + P = 345,400 + 73,000 = 418,400
2(390,000)
fb = 2'-)~kdP/= 7.5(0.306)(225) = 1,622 psi < 2,222 psi

Design for Shear

V = 208 kips
Code Section fv = V / b d = 208 x 1000/7.5(225) = 123 psi
2.3.5.2.1
M / Vd = 6480(12) / 208(225) = 1.66

17-290
Example RCJ-11

Where shear reinforcement is not provided

[Code Eq. 2-25 [ F v = 35(1.33)(2.5)(0.6) = 69.8 psi < 123 psi .'. shear reinforcement n e e d e d

M/Vd > 1 so for case where shear reinforcement is provided

Fv = 1.5~r~' (2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 1.5 2~-0-0(2.5)(0.6)(1.33)

= 75(2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 150 psi > 123 psi
.'. section OK if shear reinforcement is provided to carry all the shear.

As = Vs /Fs d A s / s = V/Fs d
I Code Eq. 2-26 [
Fs = 24,000(2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 48,000 psi

A s / s = 208,000 lb / 48,000 psi (225 in.)

Code Section
2.3.5.3
A~/s = 0.0193

Sm~ = 48 in. A~ mi,, - 0.0193(48) = 0.92 i n ) too big a bar

Try s = 16 in. As = 0.0193(16) = 0.308 in. 2

use #5 bars @ 16 in. o.c. horizontally

Reinforcement must be provided perpendicular to the shear reinforcement in the amount

o f Av
3

Av 0.0178
- - - = 0.0064 in. 2
3 3

For a 6 ft spacing As req'd= 0.0064(72) = 0.46 in. 2

Use #6 bars at 6 ft spacing to match trim steel.

17 - 291
 C h a p t e r 17

E x a m p l e R C J - 1 2 - - C o n n e c t i o n o f F l o o r D i a p h r a g m to N o n l o a d b e a r i n g W a l l

Design the connection between a floor diaphragm and a nonloadbearing wall. Use wall on Grid
Line 2 between Grid Lines C and D on second floor using Wall Construction Option B with
Building Construction Option I. The connection must transfer shear loads only.

Calculations and Discussion

A connection detail is shown below. Refer to MDG Section 17.3.3.

Welded Wire Fabric

Or Reinforcement ~ 2"

--;r------- . . . . -jL, ,
@
t , I

The connection is designed for in-plane seismic shear loads. Because the precast planks are
cambered, they cannot be attached directly to the wall. In-plane shear transfer is achieved through
the topping, with additional transfer from the planks to the bond beam.

From MDG Section 17.3.3, Table 17.3.25, the total shear transferred through the diagram to the
wall at the roof is 109 kips, over a length of 29.3 ft.

Because this shear must be transferred along 2 sides of the wall, through a 2-in. thick topping, the
corresponding shear stress is

109 kipsx 1,000 Ibs/kip = 77.5 psi

2 sidesx 29.3ft/sidex 12 in/ft× 2 in.

Using topping withf~ = 3,000 psi, the allowable shear stress of topping per ACI 318-99,
C o ~ ~ction Appendix A.3.1(b) (no increase for seismic) is 1 .l~fff = 60psi This is less than the factored
2.1.1.1.3
stress and the design will not work.

17-292
Example RCJ-12

It is therefore necessary to transfer the shear by shear friction. Use the appropriate provisions of
the ACI 318-99.
V,, = ¢ A , fyp,

The research on which ACI 318-99 provisions are based shows coefficients of friction (tx) ranging
from 0.8 to 1.0 for concrete. Conservatively assume that the coefficients of friction will be
somewhat less for topping (0.6). The required stress at the interface (factored loads) is
151.5 lb/in2. The necessary steel percentage is therefore
77.5psi
p= = 0.00253
60,000 psi × (0.6)(0.85)

The required steel area per linear foot of topping is therefore:

0.00253 x 12 in. x 2 in. = 0.06 in.2/ft

The required steel could be provided by welded wire fabric or by deformed reinforcing bars.

17-293
 C h a p t e r 17

Example RCJ-13 m Connection of Floor Diaphragm to Interior Loadbearing Wall

Design the connection between a floor diaphragm and an interior loadbearing wall. Use Grid
Line D between Grid Lines 1 and 2 (Wall Construction Option B with Building Construction 1).
The connection must transfer gravity loads plus shear.

Calculations and Discussion

The connection detail is shown below, refer to MDG Section 17.3.3.

#5 @ 5'-o"
Each Cell Break
Out Planks To Set Reinforcement As
Required

H B ~ d R N

I I ~ Continuous 2" high-densityplastic

Grout Dams - ~ - ~ bearing strip

Bond Beam
I

2-112" bearingJ ~ ~---2-1/2" bearing

The connection is designed for gravity loads plus in-plane seismic shear. Because the precast
planks span perpendicular to the wall (in contrast to the previous example), they can bear on pads
placed on the face shells.

Design for Gravity Loads Transferred by Bearing

The gravity load to be transferred from the concrete planks to the masonry wall by bearing is the
dead load during setting and the total dead plus live load after the connection is made. This load
is transferred from the planks to the wall by bearing of the planks on thin plastic bearing strips
placed on the face shells of the units. For construction purposes, the planks should extend far
enough over the edge of the face shells so that they bear securely, but not so far that they obstruct
the flow of grout into the cells of the wall. The minimum grout space is given in Code Table
1.15.2.

The bearing stress under the pads during setting of the planks is
1.5 kips x 1,000 lb/kip
12 in.x 2(2.5 in.) = 50 psi < 0 . 2 5 f ' m
Code Section
2.1.7.3

17-294
Example RCJ-13

The bearing stress under the pads after connection includes dead + live load
2.25kip(1000) = 75psi < 0.25f',,
12(2.5)

Design for In-Plane Shear

(From MDG Section 17.3.3 Table 17.3.25)
The maximum in-plane shear transferred from the roof diaphragm to the wall (2 sides) is
86 kips - 41 kips = 45 kips
It is often assumed (without a diaphragm analysis) that half comes into the wall from each side.
The connection should be designed for 22.5 kips over a length of 29.3 ft. This shear is transferred
through the topping.
22.5 kips x 1000 lbs/kip = 32psi
29.3 ftx 12in/ft × 2in.
Assuming the same concrete conditions as MDG Example RCJ-12, the allowable shear stress of
topping per ACI Code is 60 psi. Thus the design is adequate.

17-295
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-14 - - Connection of Exterior Nonloadbearing Wall to Exterior Loadbearing

Wall

Grid Line 2 4 = = 9 kit"~ R

Drag Strut
48 4
N
I ,1=111 35 3

Grid Line F
45 2

Plan 1

Elevation

The stair tower wall (Grid Line 2) between Grid Line F and G is to be connected to the rest of the
RCJ Hotel through Grid Line F. Use Wall Construction Option B with Building Construction
Option I. Drag struts will provide the connection at each floor level. The figure shows the
overall arrangement of the stair tower with respect to the rest of the RCJ Hotel. Story shears in
the stair tower are (from top to bottom) 6, 37, 60, and 52 kips from MDG Section 17.3.3, Table
I7.3.25. The drag struts must be designedfor these forces.
Calculations and Discussion

Shears are produced by the lateral forces transmitted to the tower at each floor level. For purposes
of this example, it is conservatively assumed that all the lateral force transmitted to the tower at
each level must be transmitted through the drag strut. The drag strut forces at each floor level are
therefore given by the difference between the story shear above and below that floor level. From
top to bottom, the drag strut forces are therefore 9, 48, 35, and 45 kips, as shown on the figure
above.

The figure on the next page shows how a typical drag strut will connect the stair tower to the rest
of the RCJ Hotel. The required area of the drag strut is determined by the load it must resist.

Code ~ction In this case, the critical drag strut has a seismic tensile force of 48 kips. Using an allowable steel
12.3.2.1~ stress of 24,000 psi, increased by 1/3 for loading combinations involving earthquake and
Code ~ction increased by an additional factor of (2.5 x 0.8) for use with factored loads, the required steel area
2.1.1.1.3
is

I Code Section
2.1.1.2.3.2 A _ 48 kips =0.75in. 2
~'°'~' 6 4 k s i x 0.9

This can be satisfied using 3-#5 bars, providing a total steel area of 0.93 in. 2 The required
embedment length of the bars at each end (the stair tower bond beam and the

17-296
Example RCJ-14

Grid ILine F

Drag Strut --~ I ; Stair Tower

• ee n , ! | I I i- m
/ Bond Beam

Precast Floor Plank

Connection Detail

topping of the hotel slab) is determined by development length requirements. The development
length of the drag strut bars is measured from the near face of the wall in each direction.

l a = 0.0015 d b F.,
la = 0. 0015 (0. 63 in.) 24,000 psi × 1.33
[Code Eq.(2-S)
la = 30.0in.

17-297
 Chapter 17

Example R C J - 1 5 - Connection of Interior Nonloadbearing Wall to Interior Loadbearing

Wall
Design the connection between corridor wall (nonloadbearing) and cross wall (loadbearing on
Grid Line C between Grid Lines 1 and 2). Use Wall Construction Option B and Building
Construction Option 1. The corridor slab is composed of precast, prestressed concrete planks,
spanning along the corridor. The planks are supported on W 10 structural steel beams that span
across the corridor.

Calculations and Discussion

Grid Line 2

2 #4 Bars

Cross Wall wl0~

B~'am "E
o
L)

Af
Partial Plan View Section B-B

Grid Line 2 2 # 4 Bars Plus

WWF

Hotel '~ Corridor

Room Slab ~ ~' , -I~ Slab

1_2 - B
W10
Beam

I E -
Section A-A

The figures show plan and section views of the connection. The W 10 beam sits in pockets in
each corridor wall. Precast, prestressed concrete planks (8 in. thick) sit on top of the lower
flanges of the W 10 beam. The W 10 beams are tied to the cross walls and the rest of the slab by
the 2 in. slab topping (reinforced with welded wire fabric), and also by two-#4 bars placed above
the planks on either side of the W 10 web. Calculations follow those of MDG Examples RCJ-12
and RCJ-13.

17-298
Example RCJ-16 - - Wall Beam Design
Design the wall beam on Grid Line E, between Grid Lines 3 and 4, for Wall Construction Option
B, Building Construction Option 1. The design is for in-plane bending. The wall is a loadbearing
wall The most desirable material is 8 in. hollow brick to match the other walls M the hotel

Calculations and Discussion

Geometry & Loads (See MDG Section 9.1.3.1'
Floor* Cumulative Cumulative
DL LL
q -- 6" ROOF
plf plf
0'-8"
i
J| ' 4th Roof
9'-8' 4th 2,850 600
3rd 6,830 1,320
J_ 3rd
I 2"d 10,800 1,820
'9'-8" 1 st
P_ 2nd
q * Load at top of the floor
24"
~10'-10"
Lintel load includes the 2nd floor DL and LL plus
Jr 1st

L~ ,-J the lintel DL

"91----
Total DL 11,000 plf
.~'-8" 24'-8 ~ 2'-8"
LL 1,820 plf

By inspection, the 34 in. deep lintel (24 in. + 10 in.) cannot resist the total loads. By shoring the
wall during construction, part or all of the wall above will participate in resisting the loads.
However, the wall is a deep beam and the Code is silent about this type of element.

An acceptable procedure is to divide the wall into strips with depth to span ratios less than 2/5.

First Strip
Code Section The first strip assumed is the 34 in. deep lintel. Span = 24 ft-8 in. + 1 ft + 1 ft
2.3.3.4.1
Assume 24 floor loading plus DL of wall above. Neglect any Live Load reduction.

DL 110 psfx 30 ft = 3,300 plf

70 psfx 9.67 ff = 680 plf
70 psfx 2 ft = 140 plf
LL 40 psfx 30 ft = 1,200 plf
Total = 5,320 plf
M = 5,320 plf (26.67 ft) 2 _ 473,000 ft- lb
8

17-299
 Chapter 17

Code Section Estimate Reinforcement (Assume Grade 60 reinforcement)

2.3.2.1

;~'° "-° .°L'.,~~ 10"

/I I/

24"

"~" O"

473,000ft- lb x 12 in./ft _ 10.1 in. 2 too m u c h steel for normal construction.

A, = 24,000 psi x 0.9 x 26 in.
Use 4 ft additional wall above. Shore until strength is reached. Vertical steel should not be
spliced in this area.
Total Loading 5,320 p l f + 280 plf = 5,600 plf
M = 491,000 ft-lb

Estimate Reinforcement."
d=24+ 10+48- 10=72
A, = 497,900 ft- lb x 12 in ./ft _ 3.84 in .2 try (8) #7 bars as shown in figure.
24,000 psi x 0.9 x 72 in.
A, = 4.80 in .2

Specify Masonry
Specify masonry f ' = = 2,500 psi, Type S mortar with a brick net area compressive strength of
6,600 psi.
Es = 29 x 106 psi
Code Table Em= 700 (2,500) = 1.75 x 10 6 n = 16.6
1.8.2.2
2 9 x 1 0 6 psi ) 4.80in.Z
n p = , 1 ~5--~-i-0-6-~-~i.) 7.5 i n . x 72in. = 0"147
k = 0 . 4 1 j = 0.86
Mt = 613,000 ft-lb > 491,000 ft-lb " OK
Mm = 506,000 ft-lb > 491,000 ft-lb • OK Masonry stresses control the design

Check Shear
Code Section ] V = 5,600 p l f ( 2 6 ~ ft (72 in ./12 in ./ft) ~ _- 57,960 lb
2.3.5.5 2 J

t7-300
Example RCJ-16

CodeSection £- V
2.3.5.2 [ bd
CodeSection
2.3.5.2.3 [ fv = 7 . 572in.57'960
i n . x lb - 107 psi < F~ = 3 . 0 ~ ' < 150 psi

CodeSection Vxs
A - use every cell with s = 6 in.
2.3.5.3 [ v F xd

CodeSection 57,960 lb x 6 in. d

2.3.5.3.1 [ A = =0.20in. 2 use#4bars@6in.o.c. < --
v 24,000 psi x 72 in. 2

CodeSection Code requires reinforcement of Av/3 perpendicular to shear reinforcement. The designed flexural
2.3.5.3.2 steel satisfies this requirement.
Next Strip
The next strip begins 4 ft above the 2"d floor. Assume the strip is 72 in. deep (to the top of the 3~
floor). Include the weight of the wall and contribution weight and load from the 3r~ floor. Shoring
on the first strip to remain until strength of this strip is achieved.
d - 72 - 10 = 62.
DL 30 x 110 = 3,300 plf
70 x 6 = 420 plf
LL 30 x 40 = 1,200 plf
Total = 4,920 plf
M = 437,000 ft-lb
A = 437,000ft- Ibx 12in./ft _3.92in.2 Try(8)#7 bars A = 4.80 in.2
24,000 psi x 0.9 x 62 in. s

4.8 in. 2 ( 29x106 psi

np= n 9 = 0.171 k = 0.43 j = 0.86
7.5 in. (62 in.) ~ , 1 ~ g p-si)
Mm = 475,000 ft-lb .'. OK
Mt = 526,000 ff-lb .'. OK
Shear
62 in. ]
V=4,9701b 26.7ff 12in./_______~ = 53,5001b
2 2

f~ = 115 psi trys = 6 in.

53,500 lbx 6 i n .
Code~efion Av = = 0.21 in.2 use #4 bars @ 6 in. o.c.
I2.3.5.3 24,000 psi x 62 in.

]2.3.5.3.2
Co~ction The Code requirement for steel in the amount of Av/3 to be provided perpendicular to the shear
reinforcement is satisfied by the designed flexural reinforcement.

The floors above are basically analyzed in the same way.

Note: Using the 3 ft of wall above the 2 nd floor requires a check to assure the 2 nd floor is
adequately attached to the beam. Bearing is not sufficient since the majority of the beam
is above the floor.
Assume all of the floor load must be transferred.

17-301
 Chapter 17

w = (110 + 40) x 30 = 4,500 plf

(2) #5 ~ f~ = 7,300 psi
Add standard hooks to #5 bars in bottom bond beam

Check anchorage of flexural steel

[
C~e~cdon
2.1.8.3.1.6
I d = 0 . 0 0 1 5 d bF ,

[
Code~caon
2.1.8.2
= 0.0015 x 7 x 24,000
8
l d = 31.5 in.

Embed flexural bars into support column

3rd I

#5 x 12'-2" @ 12" o.c.

LAP -]~- ! ~--6 - #7

li 0
#5 @ 6" o.c.

~,_ ~ :~x
3'
2nd

2'-10"
.-_-_----z - _ E - - -
Stnd Hook
(8) #7 x 32'

l
(no splices) [

Shore Lintel For Entire Length Until

The Full HeightOf The Wall Is
Complete.

Reinforcement Arrangement

Note: Additional horizontal reinforcement is required for seismic design and minimum
reinforcement (Code Section 1.13.6.3)

The design approach used in this example is rather novel but might be considered by some to be
rather conservative. For heights greater than 12 ft-4 in. above the opening the designer might
consider arching of the masonry with the floors acting as tension ties.

17 - 302
Example RCJ-17 -- Design of a Coupling Beam

Given the following material properties, design a single-wythe reinforced brick lintel, Wall
Construction Option B. The design is for the door openings along wall Grid Line 2 (see M_DG
Fig. 17.3-1) and is to consider in-plane flexure only and shear.

Clay Brick Masonry Grout

Unit Strength (psi) 6, 600 N.A.
Mortar Type S N.A.
f',, (psi) or fg 2,500 3,500
E,, (psi) or Eg 1.75x 106 1.75x 106
n 16.6 16.6

Steel Reinforcement- Grade 60

Calculations and Discussion

FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

0 B
e
O
Q
•" . " " 3-. " - ." Q
e
9

8"

E
- 1

1'-10"

3" 1

7'-0"

17 - 303
 Chapter 17

The lintels of wall Grid Line 2 of the RCJ Hotel have a clear span of 3 ft-4 in. They are
considered fixed on both ends and resist flexure due primarily to seismic loads. From MDG
Section 17.3.3 Table 17.3.26, the maximum coupling moments occur in beam B5 at the 3rd floor.
Higher moments exist on the second floor but this beam is deeper.
Additional moments exist due to the dead load of the lintel, but these are small relative to the
coupling moments and are neglected.
The maximum moment is taken as 1,161 in.-kips.
Using the pseudo strength method of Code Chapter 10, the value o f j is initially assumed as 0.9,
and the area of steel required to resist the maximum moment is estimated using the expression:
M
Code Section
2.1.1.2.3 As- j d ( F s x 2.5 x ~bx 1.33)
[ Code Section where M = 1,161,000 in.-lb, = required strength
12.1.1.1.3
Code Section Fs = 24,000 psi x 1.33 × 2.5 x 0.8 = 64,000 psi
2.3.2.1
j = 0.9 (assumed), and
d = 29 in.
Substitution yields
1,161,000 in. - lb = 0.70 in.2
A, ( 0 . 9 ) ( 2 9 i n . ) ( 6 4 , 0 0 0 psi)
• use 2 - #6 bars (As = 0.88 in. 2)
A, _ 0.88 in.2
= 0.00405
9 = b d - (7.5 in .)(29 in.)
n9 = 0.0671
k = 0.305 j --- 0.90 = Assumed
M t = A s j d F s = (0.88 in.2)(0.9)(29 in.)(64,000 psi) = 1,470,000 in. - lb
bd 2
M - kjFb
" 2

(7.5 in.)(29 i n . ) 2 (0.305)(0.9)(.2,500 p s i . ) ( 1 . 3 3 ) ( 2 . 5 × 0 . 8 0 )

M'= 2

= 1,922,000 in. - lb .'. O K

Use two #6 bars top and bottom

All requirements of Code Section 2.1.8.3 must be met concerning the flexural reinforcement and
development lengths.

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

Even though the flexural analysis is based on center-line-to-center-line distance, shear is taken at
d/2 from the face of the support, according to Code Section 2.3.5.5. The clear span of lintels on
Grid Line 2 is 3 ft.-4 in. and subjected to a uniform load of 264 plf (from MDG Example Section
17.3.3 - Seismic Controls). Assume an effective bearing of 4 in. on each end. Thus, the shear
forces V1 and V2 are calculated from

17 - 304
Example RCJ.17

V~ = 1,161 i n . - kips+ 950 i n . - kips- 0.264 k l f (3.33 ft.)(1.67 ft.)(12 in.fit)

40
V~ = 52.3 kips

264 plf

950 in.-kips

1161 in. - kips + 950 i n . - kips + 17.6 in. - kips = 53.2 kips
V2 - 40 in.

According to Code Section 2.3.5.5, the calculated maximum shear for noncantilever beams can be
taken at d/2 from the face of the support. Thus design V = 53.2 kips - 0.3 kips = 52.9 kips

Shear design of beams is governed by Code Section 2.3.5. Therefore, the shear stress is found
from Code Eq. 2-19:

lco~c.o. V
2.3.5.2.1 I f v - bd
f v _ 52.9 kips (1000 lbs/kip) _ 243 psi
(7.5 in.)(29 in.)

The maximum shear stress allowed, Fv, if shear reinforcement is not provided is

Fv = ~ < 50 psi x 1.33x2.5 x0.6 = 100 psi

Code~cao~
z~2.2~,
Zl.l.Z3.2a~
ZI.I.Z~3 100 < 243 psi "." N.G.

Shear reinforcement is required.

2.3.5.2.3,
2.1.1.2.3.2and F ~ = 3.0 ~f-~" x l . 3 3 × 2.5 x 0 . 6 = 3 0 0 p s i
2.1.1.2.3.3
300 psi > 243 psi .'. O K for shear reinforcement

If a 6 in. spacing is selected:

Vs 52,900 lb x 6 in.
,tL/v-- - --- - 0.23 in.2
Fsd 24,000 psi x 1.33×2.5x 0.6 x 29 in.

Use 2-leg stirrup of#3 @ 6 in. o.c.., As = 0.22 in. 2 - Say OK

17-305
 Chapter 17

Check steel placement

b =7.5 in.
Face shell thickness = 1-1/4 in.
Shear Reinforcing = #3 = 0.375 in.
Flexural Reinforcing = #6 = 0.75 in.

O Q

I~ IL-
l-
7.5"
Code ~ c t i o ~
Code requires 1/2 in. thickness o f grout between masonry unit and bar and 1 in. minimum
1.12.3.1and between bars.
1.12.3.5
Minimum beam width:
= 2 (0.375 in.) + 2 (1.25 in.) + 2 (0.75 in.) + 2 (0.5 in.) + 1 in. = 6.75 in. < 7.5 in. " OK

Code Section Reinforcement is required perpendicular to shear reinforcement by the amount o f 1/3 Av. The
2.3.5.3.2 longitudinal flexural steel may be used to satisfy this requirement.

A v _ 0.22 in .2
- 0.0733 in .2 _<4 - # 6 bars
3 3

17-306
Example RCJ-18 w Design of a Masonry Coupling Beam
Design the masonry coupling beam on Line B, fourth floor (Wall Construction Option B, Building
Construction Option 1). The left and right end moments on the coupling beam due to seismic
loading are both clockwise with the magnitude of 689 kip-in, and 626 kip-in., respectively. The
end moments were obtained from an envelope considering four possible combinations of seismic
loading direction and accidental plan eccentricity. Assume the opening below the beam to be 3 fi
- 4 in. wide and the total beam depth (top of opening to floor slab) to be 2fl - 8 in. Determine the
flexural reinforcement required and perform a shear investigation.

Clay Brick Masonry Grout

Unit Strength (psi) 6, 600 N.A.
Mortar Type S N.A.
f'm or fg (psi) 2,500 3,500
Em or Eg (psi) 1.75 x 106 1.75 x 106
n 16.6 16.6

Steel Reinforcement- Grade 60

Calculations and Discussion

FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

1. Determine effective depth, modular ratio and allowable stresses.
Code Section I Assume cover to centroid o f tension steel = 3 in.
1.8.2 I then, d = 32 in. - 3 in. = 29 in.
Em= 29 x 10 6 psi
The modular ratio, n = EflEm = 16.6

C o , Sections, The allowable compressive masonry stress,

2.3.3.Z~
2.1.1.Z3.2and
Fb = (1/3 ) f'm (2.5 x 0.8)
2.1.1.Z3.3
Fb = 1/3 (2,500 psi)(2.5 x 0.8) = 1667 psi

Co~cfion Allowable stresses are permitted to be increased by one-third when considering load
2.1.1.1.3 combination 3, 4, or 5 o f Code Section 2.1.1.1
Co~c~o~ •". Fb = 1.33 (1667 psi) = 2,220 psi

I2.3.2.1and
2.1.1.2.3.3
The allowable tensile steel stress (pseudo-stresses with factored loads),
Fs = (24,000 psi)1.33(2.5 x 0.8) = 64,000 psi

. Determine steel area required at the left end

M = 689 in.-kips
A s s u m e b = 7.50 in.
A s s u m e j = 0.9
As __ -
M
- m
689 i n . - kips = 0.41 in .2
F, j d (64 ksi)(0.9)(29 in .)
Use two #4 bars, As = 0.40 in. 2

17-307
 Chapter 17
Check stresses:
0.40 in .2
p- -0.0018
(7.50in.)(29 in.)
pn = 0.030

k = [2 pn + (pn )2I'~ - pn

k: [2(0 030~+ (0.030 ¢ l '2- 0030

k=0.218
j = 1 - k/3 = 0.927
M _ (689 in.- kips)(1,000 lb/kips)
f =
A, j d (0.40 in .2)(0.927)(29 in .)
f , = 64,000 psi " F s = 64,000 psi .'. OK
_ 2M _ 2(689 in.- kips)(1,000 lb/kips)
fb bd2jk (7.5in.)(29in.)Z(0.927)(0.218)
f~ = 1079 psi < F~ = 2,220 psi .'. OK
Use two #4 bars at the left end (check placement tolerances)

. C h e c k placement limits for reinforcement

Assume #4 stirrup, and f'me grout
Assume face shell thickness = 1.25 in.

Minimum beam width required OK by inspection

--~ 7.5"

eo

' 28"1
e*
~2"

• lP I

0 . 0 - - ~
~ 4"

Run reinforcement the entire length of the coupling beam, plus the required anchorage length.

17-308
Example RCJ-18

. Determine steel area required at the right end

M = 626 in.-kips
Assumej = 0.9
M 626 in. - kips
A ~ -- - - --

Fsjd (64 ksi)(0.9)(29 in.)

A, = 0.37 in. z
Use two #4 bars, As = 0.40 in.2
Run reinforcement the entire length of the coupling beam, plus the required anchorage length.

--• 7.5" ~-
r

• l-
ee •

• e ,

• °' - 28-

• i

*•e •

°° Ir

Sttlr~AR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

First find the end shears from the free-body diagram of beam forces: for dead weight, assume
solidly grouted. Thus, weight, w = (88 psf)(2.67 ft) = 235 plf

w = 235 plf

689 in.-kips 626 in.-kips

v = wt +(M,-M,,)
2 l
- 2 3 5 plf(3.33 ~) (689 in ~ kips+ 626 in ~kips) 1000 lb/kip
VL - ~-
2 3.33 ft x 12 in ./ft
= 32,500 Ib
VR = 391.31b + 32,9001b = 33,300 lb

Find the shear force, V, at d/2 from face

CodeSection (29in.~( 1 )
2.3.5.5 [ V = 33,300 lb - \-----2---J\l 2 in ./ft (235 plf) = 33,000 lb

17-309
 Chapter 17

Code Section Find the shear stress,f~, from

2.3.5.2.1
V
fv-
bd
I Codeeq. (2- 33,000 lb = 152 psi
19) f~ (7.50 in.)(29 in.)

Code Sections The maximum allowable stress, F~, is

2.3.5.2.2,
2.1.1.2.3.2 and
=
2.I.1.2.3.3
F~ ~ ' ( 2r . 5 ×
0.6)<50psi(2.5x0.6)

Fv = 2,~-0-6(1.5)= 50(1.5) = 75 psi

Code Eq. (2-
20)
F~ is permitted to be increased by 1/3
Code Section .'. F~ = (75 psi)(1.33) --- 100 psi
2.1.1.1.3
For this example, fi = 157 psi > 100 psi
Therefore, shear reinforcement is needed.

Code Section
Check maximum permissible shear stress (when shear reinforcement exists).
2.3.5.2.3 Thus, maximum
Fv = (1.33) 3 . 0 ~ f f ~ (2.5 × 0.6) <_ (150 psi)(1.33)(2.5 x 0.6) = 300 psi
Code Eq. (2-
23) and Code
Section Fv = (1.33) 3.0 2,~f~-~ (2.5 x 0.6) = 300 psi
2.1.1.2.3.3
For this example, 157 psi < 300 psi, so a design using shear reinforcement is possible.

Code Section All shear must be carried by reinforcement

2.3.5.3 Vs
A v-
I Code Section Fd
2.3.2.1
Maximum F~ = (24,000 psi) 1.33 (2.5 x 0.6) = 48,000 psi
Code Section
2.1.1.1.3 Thus,
(33,000 lb) s
= 0.0237 s
A v = 48,000 lb (29 in.)

if s = 24 in., Av = 0.57 in. 2

s = 18 in., Av = 0.43 in. 2
s = 12 in., A~ = 0.28 in. 2
s = 6 in., A, = 0.14 in.2 2 - #3 bars each cell

Code Section • Use 2 - #3 bar at 6 in. o.c. for vertical shear reinforcement.
2.3.5.3.1

Check maximum spacing of d/2 < 48 in.

d
- - - ' 1 6 i n . > 6in. • OK
2
Code Section 1/3 A~ must be provided perpendicular to shear reinforcement.
2.3.5.3.2

17 - 310
Example RCJ-18

0.17in. 2
- 0.057 in.2 ~4
3
This can be provided by the flexural
tension steel.

Check steel placement

Code Section
1.12.3.1 and
1.12.3.5 b = 7 . 5 in. ~4
Face shell thickness = 1.25 in.
Shear reinforcement = #3 = 0.38 in.
Flexural reinforcement = #4 = 0.40 in.
~ - - 7.5" ~-

The Code requires 0.5 in. thickness o f grout between masonry units and bars and
1 in. minimum between bars.

Minimum beam width = 2 (1.25 in.) + 2 (0.38 in.) + 2 (0.5 in.) + 1 in.
= 5.3 in. < 7.5 in.

17 - 311
 C h a p t e r 17

Example RCJ-19 Design of a Reinforced Clay Brick Lintel

For the material property values given below, design a single-wythe reinforced clay brick lintel
for the service entrance on Grid Line B of RCJ (Wall Construction Option B, Building
Construction Option II," see MDG Fig. 1 Z 3-6). The design is to considerflexure only.

Clay Brick Masonry Grout

Unit Strength (psi) 6, 600 "N.A.
Mortar Type S N.A.
f'm or fg (psi) 2,500 3,500
Em or Eg (psi) 1.75x 106 1.75x 106
n 16.6 16.6

Steel Reinforcement - Grade 60, Es = 29 x 106

Calculations and Discussion

The lintel will be built with hollow clay bricks of dimensions 7-1/2 in. thick x 3-1/2 in. high x
11-1/2 in. long. The floor height in the Building Construction Option II is 8 f~ - 10 in. Reduction
of 7 ft - 0 in. for the height of the service entrance gives total lintel height of 1 ft -- 10 in. The
entrance is 6 t~ - 8 in. wide. Allowing for 8 in. bearing at each end (the Code requires a minimum
of 4 in., see Code Section 2.3.3.4.3), the center line span, l, to be used for calculation is
l = (6 ft- 8 in.) + 8 in. = 7 ft- 4 i n . = 7.33 ft
The dead load and live load for RCJ Hotel are given in MDG Section 17.3.2 as 110 psfand 40
psf, respectively. The corresponding self weight of the wall from the same MDG section is 70
psf. It is conservatively assumed that the floor above the kitchen (see MDG Fig. 17.3-1) is
supported along Grid Lines B and C. In addition, the lintel supports only the wall self-weight
defined by 45 ° angles from its supports, due to arching action.

.'. Floor dead+ live load= (1 lOpsf + 4 0 p s f ) ( ~ - ) = 2,250plf

{ 7.5 in. ~[ 22 in. "~

Self weight of 7 ~ in.x 22 in. lintel = ~ l~m-Yft.J~ 12 i-n ~-ft J(140 pcf)= 160 plf

w -- 2,410 plf
Self weight of wall above lintel (see sketch)
257 pff

t.33'/2

Lintel Span = /

17 - 312
Example RCJ-19

• I
I I
I I
!
W = (1/2)(7.33 ft)/.7" ~ ft.l(70 psf) i J
I I
I I
W = 940 lb ' I
! I
d = 20" i
i
!

22" I !
I I
I I
i
!! I
I

2
wl Wl
M. = +~
8 6
= 2,410 plf(7.33 ft.)2 (12 in./ft) ~ 940 lb(7.33 in .)(12 in./ft)
8 6
M,~ = 194,230 in. - lb + 13,780 in. - lb = 208,010 in. - lb

Code Section For Grade 60 steel, allowable stress F~ = 24,000 psi. The effective depth, d, can be conservatively
2.3.2.1 [ assumed as (22 in. - 2 in.) = 20 in.
M
~'~' Fjd

in w h i c h j will be initially estimated as 0.9

•". A, = 208,000 in. - lb = 0.48 in.Z
(24,000 psi)(0.9)(20 in .)

Provide two #5 bars A~ = 0.62 in.2

Recompute k for steel provided:
First moments of area about neutral axis are equal

or (7. 5)(20k)(1 Ok) = (16.6)(0. 62)(20)(1- k)

or 1500k 2 = 2 0 5 - 206k
Or k 2 + 0 . 1 3 7 k - 0 . 1 3 7 = 0
Solving the quadratic equation yields
k = 0.308
.'. j = l - k = l --0"308-1-0.103=0.897
3 3

17 - 313
 Chapter 17

Checking Steel Stress: Ors vs. Fs)

M 208,010 in. - lb
-18,700psi < 24,000psi .'. OK
A, j d (0.62 infl)(0.897)(20 in.)

Check Stresses in Masonry: (fi vs. Fb)

2M 208,010in.- Ib
fb - bkjd 2 (7.5 in.)(0.308)(0.897)(20 in.) 2

fb = 5 0 2 p s i < F b = ( l f ' ] = l ( 2 5 0 0 p s i ) = 833p si • OK

Check for Shear Stress: ~ vs. Fv)

Code Section From Code Eq. 7.3, shear stressfi is given by
2.3.5.3

L- V
Code Section bd
2.3.5.5 in which for computing maximum shear stress, V is computed at d/2 from the face of the support.
Code Section
The shear stress shall not exceed
2.3.5.2.2(a)
Fv = ~ ' < 50 psi

F~ = a/2,500psi = 50 psi

End reaction = 2,410 plf(7"33 ft] + 940 lb

2
R = 8,833 lb + 470 Ib = 9,303 lb

V @ d from face=9,3031b-2,410o1( 20in. ] 1 _ 1/t58 3 a ( 1 0 / ~ : 7,2701b

2 - ~.12in./ft)2 / 2 ~ " ) \ / 1 2 J
• fv = 7,2701b - 4 8 . 5 p s i < 50 psi • OK
(7.5 in .)(20 in .)

Check for Bearing Stress: (fi, vs. Fbr)

Code Section The maximum allowable bearing stress is given as
2.1.7.3
0.25(f'm) = 0.25(2,500 psi) = 625 psi

For the bearing length on each end of 8 in. assumed earlier,

Bearing Stress - 9,3031b -155psi < 625psi OK
(7.5 in.)(8 in.)

17 - 314
Example RCJ-20 - - Design of a Singly Reinforced Masonry Beam
Consider the canopy beam that is part of a masonry frame. The canopy beam spans 31 fl center
to center in the east-west direction (see MDG Fig. 17.3-1). Assuming a tributary width of l o f t
and 50 p s f dead load and 20 psf live load, the loads on the canopy beam are determined to be:
dead load = 500 p l f and live load = 200 p l f A canopy section is shown below. Design the beam
for flexure and for shown.

Clay Brick Masonry Grout

Unit Strength (psi) 6, 600 (from manufacturer) N.A.
Mortar Type S (PC-L) N.A.
f'm or fg (psi) 2,500 3,500
Em or Eg (psi) 1.75x 106 1.75x 106
n 16.6 16.6

Steel Reinforcement- Grade 60 Steel

~ ~ 4" HollowcorePlanks (Span North-

2 Bnck South). Grout Cores Solid At
Courses I Bearing Ends.

Reinforced MasonryBeam
Beam
Depth

Bottom Of Masonry Beam

Elevation = 12'-0"

Reinforced MasonryColumn Beyond

Beam Width Equalto ColumnWidth

Canopy Section A/6

Calculations and Discussion

FLEXURAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
1. D e t e r m i n e e f f e c t i v e d e p t h , m o d u l a r ratio, a n d a l l o w a b l e s t r e s s e s
Assume the total depth that is to be solid grouted is h = 24 in.

A structural analysis of the reinforced brick beam-column frame for Seismic Performance
Category D yields controlling load combinations of 1.4D + 0.5L + 1.0E and 0.7D - 1.0E

17 - 315
 Chapter 17

(with modifications from A S C E 7-93 section 9.3.7). The maximum positive m o m e n t -- 116 ft-
kips. The maximum negative moment at the centerline o f the beam-column frame
intersection is 87.3 ft-kips.

Assume cover to centroid o f tension steel = 3.5 in.

then, d = 24 in. - 3.5 in. = 20.5 in.

[1.8.2.1
co~ction Assume beam width equal to column width (11.5 in.)
b = 11.5 in.
Es = 29 x 106 psi

The modular ratio, n = Es/Em = 16.6

ICo~cfion The allowable compressive masonry stress,

2.2.3.1 ] F0 = (1/3)f',,
Fb = 1/3 (2,500 psi) = 833 psi

Commotion The allowable tensile steel stress,

2.3,2,1 [ Fs = 24,000 psi

Co~ctions I
2.1.1.2.3.2and
Since the load combination used includes seismic forces the nominal strength is taken as 2-1/2
times the allowable stress value with a 1/3 stress increase. For flexure a d~ value o f 0.8 is
2.1.1.2.3.3
used.

• Fb = (833 psi) 1.33 × 2.5 × ~b= 2,220 psi

ICodeSection and Fs = (24,000 psi) 1.33 × 2.5 × ~b= 64,000 psi
2"!"1'1"3 I
2. D e t e r m i n e steel area required for negative m o m e n t
M = M.~g = 116 ~-kips
A s s u m e j = 0.9
M 116 ft- kips(12 in.fit)
Fjd (64 ksi)(0.9)(20.5 in.)
As = 1.17 in.2
Use 2 #7 bars, As = 1.20 in. 2

I f the steel becomes excessive the designer could correct the design moment to the moment at
the column face (a reduction) resulting in smaller quantity o f steel required.

Check stresses:
1.20 in .2
p- = 0.005
(11.5 in .)(20.5 in .)
p n = 0.084

k=[2pn+(pn)Z~/2 -pn
k = 0.335
j = 1 - k = 0.89 < 0.9 assumed
3

17 - 316
E x a m p l e RCJ-20

M 116 ft - kips (12,000)

f s - A, jd (1.2 in.2)(0.89)(20.5 in.)
fs = 63,700 psi < F s = 64,000 psi .'. OK
2M 2(116 ft - kips)(12,000)
f b - bdZjk (ll.5in.)(20.5in.)2(0.89)(0.335)
fb = 1,940 psi < Fb = 2,220 psi .'. OK Steel Controls

Use 2 #7 bars for negative moment.

The seismic moments are very large in this example compared to the dead load and live load
moments. Since the seismic forces are reversible, only a very short length in the middle of the
beam would not be subjected to negative moment. No calculation of possible cut off
locations of reinforcement, was done. See MDG Section 14.2.2, Design of Reinforcement,
for a description of calculating cut offs.

. Determine steel area required for positive moment

M = Mpo, = 87.3 R-kips
Assumej = 0.9
As_ M _ 8 7 . 3 f t - k i p s ( 1 2 i n . / f t ) =0.9in.=
Fsjd (64 ksi)(0.9)(20.5 in.)

Use 2 - #7 bars, As = 1.20 in. 2

No need to cheek stresses (see Section 2 above)

The canopy beam construction detail is shown below.

~ith

I
al)

retcher

17 - 317
 Chapter 17

SHEAR DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

6.2 kips

0.Sklf ~ I~ ]

CodeSection [ t. Find design shear Vat d/2 from face of column

2.3.5.5 d
distance =--1_(column width) +
2
(11 n)+l 0 in) 2

distance = 16.0 in.

.'.V = 18,600 lb-(1 ~.-~ft-)(800 plf)

V = 17,533 lb

[CodeEq.2-19 [ 2. Find shear stress f~

V
L= bd
17,533 lb
fv =(11.5 in.)(20.5 in.) = 74.4 psi

3. Check Code maximum shear stress, if no shear reinforcement

CodeSection F, = ~ = ~/2,500 psi (2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 50 psi (2.5)(0.6)(1.33) = 100 psi

2.3.5.2A(a) [
I CodeSection
2.1.1.1.3 I Thus Fv = 100 psi (for load combination) > 74.4 psi.
Therefore, no shear reinforcement is needed.

17 - 318
Example RCJ-21 - - Connection Between Canopy Beam and Column
The connection between the canopy beam and column is to be designed The canopy beams are
11.5-in.-wide by 23.5-in.-deep masonry beams; the column is 11.5 in. square and is constructed o f
6-in. hollow clay units.

Calculations and Discussion

A connection detail is shown below. The beam must be designed as described in MDG Example
RCJ-20.
Cdumn Reinforcement= 4 #7 With #2 Ties
12" O.C. Hook BarsAt
Top Into Beams

I ~-~ Beam
~ ~:~_,~_~_~- - - - - - ~/q~ Reinforcement
~ # 7 Bars With 12"
~/I I /~Hooks Typical
I I ', / ~'7 (2BarsTop,

Plan View - Canopy Beams

11.5"Actual
12" Nominal

?,
Beam Reinforcement
Hook At End With
PerpendicularBeam

f--
n

f f - - t 23"5" Actual
[ 24"Nominal
6"
6"
--;f ~ - Column Ties t
~ L
12" 1 ~ CdumnVerticalReinfomement
12" ~-

Section View --
~ J_ Beam/ColumnConnection

12" Nominal
17 - 319
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-22 - - Unreinforced Retaining Wall Design for Out-of-Plane Flexure

For the retaining wall shown on Grid Line A in MDG Fig 17.3-1 determine if an unreinforced
concrete masonry wall is sufficient.

Unit Compressive strength = 2, 000 psi Weight o f masonry

f'm = 1,500 psi (from prism tesO (12-in. thick - solid grouted) = l OOp s f
Type N mortar (PC-L) Running bond
Weight o f soil y = l OOp c f Active earth pressure coefficient Ko = 1/3

Calculations and Discussion

1.63"
Elevation 104'-0"

Unreinforced CMU

4'-6"
Sidewalk , , - - - - . . ~
~ \x,U/~//-,\\\V///

100)(1/3)(6.0) = 200 psf

/
vY-i Stem Height
Elevation99 -6" - ~ . yy-,
......

, , ~

Reinforced Concrete ~ " "~" "/ x- /. vx ,.,1, i

Footing ~ 1 '-6" x~/,\\~,,,<, XY"!
CXMI

¢
1'-0" . _

. Stem Height -~
For purposes of setting the stem height, assume that the footing will be 12 in. thick. The
bottom of the footing should be below the frost line. In this example, it is assumed that 30 in.
of cover above the bottom of the footing is sufficient to place it below the frost line.
30in.
Height o f stem = 104.0 ft - 99.5 ft + 1 ft = 6 ft
12in./ft

= S t e m D e s i g n - for a t ft - 0 in. l o n g strip o f wall

CodeTable The allowable flexural tensile stress normal to the bed joints with Type N mortar is 58 psi, if
2.2.3.2 [ the wall is assumed fully grouted. At the base of the wall, where the interface is masonry to
concrete, this allowable value may not be applicable. However, no Code values are given for
this condition and the Code allowable value for masonry to masonry interface will be used.

Section modulus of 1 ft long strip of wall -- (12 in.)(11.63 in.)2 _ 270 in.3
6
Pressure at base o f stem = 200 psf
Force on stem = (200 psf)(6 ft)(1 ft) _ 600 lb
2
See above sketch for assumed soil parameters.

17-320
Example RCJ-22

Moment at base of stem = (600 lb)(6 ft) _ 1,200 ft- lb

3
Tensile stress at base of stem =
(1 ,200 ft- lb)(12in./ft)
f~, - - 53.3 psi < Fb, = 58 psi " OK
270 in .3

Check shear stress in stem

Code Section
fv - vO - 3V for a rectangular section
2.2.5.1
lb 2A

Code Section F~ is at least of:

2.2.5.2
(a) 1.5xf~-
~' = 1.5 1 ~ - ~ = 58.1 psi
(b) 120 psi
(c) 60+0.45Nv/A .
By inspection, (a) controls and Fv =58.1 psi

600 lb
Code Section f, 6.5psi < 5 8.1psi .'.OK
2.2.5.1 (11.63 in.)(12 in.)

. Joint Reinforcement
Use joint reinforcement consisting of No. 9 longitudinal wires and No. 9 cross rods in each
mortar bed for crack control.

. Stability and Soil Pressure Check

The dimensions of the reinforced concrete footing should be set to prevent overturning and/or
sliding of the wall. In addition, the pressure under the toe of the footing must be smaller than
the allowable pressure for the type of soil involved. Refer to texts on geotechnical
engineering or concrete design for examples of these calculations.

. Footing Design
The reinforced concrete footing should be designed in accordance with the provisions of the
latest edition of ACI-318.

17 - 321
 Chapter 17

Example RCJ-23 ~ Reinforced Retaining Wall Design for Out-of-Plane Flexure

For the retaining wall shown on Grid Line A in MDG Fig 17.3-1, design the necessary wall size
and reinforcement.

Clay Brick Strength = 6, 600 psi

f " = 2,500 psi 8 in. hollow clay brick (7.5 in. x 3.5 in. x 11.5 in.)
Type S mortar Running bond
Weight o f soil y = l OOp c f Active earth pressure coefficient Ka = 0.45
Grade 60 steel (F~ = 24, 000 psi) n = 16.6

Calculations and Discussion

7-1/2"
Elevation 104'-0"

Reinforced CMU l0 O~
'A)~/
10)(0.45)(6.0) = 270 psf
Sidewalk ~
Elevation 99'-6" - ~
4'-6"

~-~,
v ~~
A x /
Y
,,,,,'~'~(
.~.~
Stem Height /
Reinforced ConePete
Footing
~

i
1 '-0" .
' -~°- v-¢~
1 '-6" 7.-/,\\~

_
\
"~ /\A
v v\

qT.N
/

o
t H

1. S t e m Height
The stem height for this problem will be the same as for M D G Example RCJ-22 (6 ft).

. S t e m Design - For a I ft-0 in. long strip of wall

Lateral pressure at base of stem = 270 psf
Force on stem - (270 psf)(6 ft) = 810 lb
2

M o m e n t at base o f stem = (810 lb)(6 ft) = 1,620 ft- lb/ft = 19,400 in.- l b / f t
3
d = 3.75 in. A s s u m e j = 0.9

M 19,400 in.- lb/ft

3 ~ , m
= 0.240 in .2/ft
(24,000 psi)(0.9)(3.75 in .)
Try # 5 bars @ 12 in. o.c. As = 0.31 in.2/ft
0.31 in.2 .5"
p= - 0.007
(3.75 in .)(12 in .)
n p -- (16.6)(0.007) = 0.114
k - ~/(np) 2 + 2 n p - n p - X/0.1142 + ( 2 ) ( 0 . 1 1 4 ) - 0 . 1 1 4 = 0 . 3 7 7

17 - 322
Example RCJ-23

j=l_k=l 0"37_____~7
- 0.874
3 3
kd = 0.279 (3.75)- 1.42"> 1.25"
Check steel stress
L __ - M- 19,400 in. - lb
= 19,030 psi < Fs = 24,000 psi " OK
Asjd (0.31 in. ~)(0.877)(3.75 in.)

Provide matching dowels from wall to footing.

Check masonry stress

Code Section Fb _ f ' _ 2,500 psi _ 833 psi
2.2.3.1(c)
3 3

M
fb =(l_tl/~2kd](btf)y d

19,400

fb (1 2(0.379)(3.75))1"25
-]12.0(1.25)(0.877)(3.75)

fb=702psi< 833 psi" OK

Check shear stress

Code Section Allowable shear stress F = f ~ = ~ , 5 0 0 = 50 psi
2.3.5.2.2 Calculate shear area = 6(3.75) + (12-6)(1.25) = 30
f , _ V _ 8101______b_27.0psi < 50psi " OK
A 30
V 8101b
fv - b d (12in.)(3.75in.) -18"Opsi < 50psi ' O K

I Code Section Shear steel is not needed.

2.3.5.2.1
. Horizontal Steel
Although not required by the Code, the author recommends providing some horizontal steel.
Provide a bond beam at the top of the wall, reinforced with one # 5 bar. Provide standard
joint reinforcement every 16 in. for crack control.

. Stability and Soil Pressure Check

The dimensions of the reinforced concrete footing should be set to prevent overturning and
sliding of the wall. In addition, the pressure under the toe of the footing must be smaller than
the allowable pressure for the type of soil involved. Refer to texts on geotechnical
engineering or concrete design for examples of these calculations.

. Footing Design
The reinforced concrete footing should be designed in accordance with the provisions of the
latest edition of ACI-318.

17-323
 APPENDIX A
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
CLAY MASONRY SECTION PROPERTIES
(Tables 1, 2, and 3)
Table 1 Minimum Thickness* of Face-Shell and Webs - ASTM C 652 Units
Nominal Width (W) Face Shell Thickness Interior Web Thickness End Web Thickness
of Unit, in. (FST) minimum, in. (WT) minimum, in. minimum, in.

4 3/4 1/2 3/4

6 1 1/2 1

8 1-1/4 1/2 1

10 1-3/8 1/2 1-1/8

12 1-1/2 1/2 1-1/8

* Most manufacturers produce units which have greater face-shell thicknesses than the minimum values listed in Table 1

Table 2 Section Properties*
Property per ft of Wall
4 in. Walls
Hollow Clay Unit Walls, ASTM C 652 Units
Mortar Bedding
Solid or Fully Grouted**
Face-Shell Full
Specified Unit Thickness = 3-1/2 in.

Area ~4~ in°2 18.0 22.0 42.0

Moment of Inertia /, in4 34.0 35.7 42.9

Section Modulus S, in.3 19.4 20.4 24.5

Kern Eccentricity ek, in. 1.07 0.93 0.58

Radius of Gyration r, in. 1.37 1.27 1.01

A-1
 Appendix A

T a b l e 2, c o n t ' d . S e c t i o n P r o )erties* - H o l l o w C l a ~ / U n i t W a l l s , A S T M C 6 5 2 U n i t s

Property per ft of Wall I Face-Shell

Mortar BeddingFull
I t s°lid °r Fully Gr°uted**
4 in. Walls Specified Unit Thickness = 3-1/2 in.

Area A, in. 2 24.0 32.8 [ 66

Moment of Inertia /, in.4 122 132 166

i

Section Modulus S, in.3 44.2 48.1 60.5

i

Kern Eccentricity ek, in. 1.84 1.47 0.92

i

Radius of Gyration r, in. 2.25 2.01 1.59

8 in. Walls Specified Unit Thickness = 7-1/2 in.

Area A, in.2 30.0 42.5 90

i

Moment of Inertia /, in.4 293 323 422

Section Modulus S, in.3 78.1 86.1 113

i

Kem Eccentricity ek, in. 2.6 2.03 1.25

Radius of Gyration r, in. 3.13 2.75 2.17

i

10 in. Walls Specified Unit Thickness = 9-1/2 in.

Area A, in.2 33.0 51.6 114

Moment of Inertia /, in.4 544 621 857

Section Modulus S, in.3 115 131 180.5

i

Kern Eccentricity ek, in. 3.47 2.54 1.58

I
Radius of Gyration r, in. 4.06 3.47 2.75

12 in. Walls Specified Unit Thickness = 11-1/2 in.

Area A, in.2 36.0 59.4 138

Moment of Inertia ! /, in.4 900 1,048 1,520

i i

Section Modulus S, in. 3 157 182 i 265

Kern Eccentricity ek, in. 4.36 3.06 1.92

i t

Radius of Gyration r, in. 5.00 4.20 3.32

* Table 2 values are based on minimum thicknesses given in Table 1
** Valid values only if grout stiffness is identical to clay unit stiffness

A-2
Material Properties
Table 3 Avera~le Wall Wei~lhts - Hollow Clay Units With Grout {psf)

Nominal Grout Spacing

Width (W)
o f U n i t , in.
None 4 ft - 0 in. 3 ft - 0 in. 2 ft - 0 in. 1 ft - 6 in. 1 ft-0 ft. Fully

18.6 21.3 22.3 24.1 26.0 29.7 40.7

27.6 32.1 33.5 36.5 39.5 45.5 63.3

35.7 42.0 44.1 48.3 52.5 61.0 85.8

10 43.3 51.5 54.3 59.8 65.3 76.3 107.8

12 49.7 60.0 63.5 70.4 77.3 91.2 130.8

A-3
 Appendix A

CONCRETE MASONRY SECTION PROPERTIES

(Tables 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8)
Table 4 Minimum Thickness of Face-Shell and Webs - ASTM C 90
Nominal Width (W) Face Shell Thickness Web Thickness
of Unit, in. (FST) minimum, in. (WT) minimum, in.

4 3/4 3/4

6 1 1

8 1-1/4 1

10 1-3/8 1-1/8

12 1-1/2 1-1/8

Table 5 Avera~le Wei~lht of Concrete Masonry Units (Ib) - ASTM C 90

Density, pcf
Nominal
Size, in.
80 90 100 110 120 130 140

4 x 8 x 16 14.5 16.5 18.0 20.0 22.0 23,5 25.5

6 x 8 x 16 17.0 19.0 21.5 23.5 25.5 27.5 30.0

8 x 8 x 16 22.5 25.0 28.0 30.5 33.5 36.0 39.0

10 x 8 x 16 27.5 31.0 34.5 37.5 41.0 44.5 48.0

12 x 8 x 16 31.0 35.0 39.0 43.0 47.0 50.5 54.5

Table 6 Avera~le Weight of Un~lrouted Concrete Walls, plf/ft of hei~lht

Unit Density, pcf

Wall
Thickness,
in.
80 90 I00 110 120 130 140

4 18.0 20.0 22,0 24.0 26.5 28.0 30.5

6 21.0 23.5 26.0 28.5 30.5 33.0 36.0

8 28.0 30.5 34.0 37.0 40.0 43.0 46.5

10 33.5 37.5 41.5 45.0 48.5 52.5 56.5

12 37.5 42.0 46.5 51.0 55.5 59.5 64.0

A4
Material Properties

Table 7 Section Properties - CMU Walls - ASTM C 90 Hollow Units

Mortar Bedding
P r o p e r t y per ft of Wall Solid or Fully Grouted*
Face-Shell Full
Unit Designation 4 x 8 x 16
4 in. Walls A v e r a g e Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 3.63 in., Length = 15.63 in.,
Height = 7.63 in.
Area A~ in.2 18.0 21.6 43.5

Moment o f Inertia /, in. 4 38.0 39.4 47.6

Section Modulus S, in.3 21.0 21.7 26.3

Kern Eccentricity ek, in. 1.17 1.00 0.60

Radius o f Gyration r, in. 1.45 1.35 1.05

Unit Designation 6 x 8 x 16
6 in. Walls A v e r a g e Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 5.63 in., Length = 15.63 in.,
Height = 7.63 in.
Area A, in.2 24.0 32.2 67.5
i
Moment o f Inertia /, in.4 130 139 178
i
Section Modulus S, in.3 46.3 49.5 63.3

K e m Eccentricity ek, in. 1.93 1.54 0.94

Radius o f Gyration r, in. 2.33 2.08 1.62

Unit Designation 8 x 8 x 16
8 in. Walls A v e r a g e Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 5.63 in., Length = 15.63 in.,
Height = 7.63 m.
Area A, in. 2 30.0 41.5 91.5

Moment o f Inertia /, in. 4 309 334 443

Section Modulus S, in. 3 81.0 87.6 116

K e m Eccentricity ek, in. 2.70 2.11 1.27

Radius of Gyration r, in. 3.21 2.84 2.20

* Table 2 values are based on minimumthicknessesgiven in Table 1
** Valid values only if grout stiffness is identicalto clay unit stiffness

#,-5
 Appendix A

Table 7 Cont'd. Section Pro )erties - CMU Walls - ASTM C 90 Hollow Units
Mortar Bedding
Property per ft o f Wall Solid or Fully Grouted*
Face-Shell Full
Unit Designation 10 x 8 x 16
10 in. Walls Average Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 9.63 in., Length = 15.63 in.,
Height = 7.63 in.
Area A, in2 33.0 50.4 116

Moment o f Inertia /, in.4 567 635 892

Section Modulus S, in) 118 132 185

Kem Eccentricity ek, in. 3.57 2.62 1.60

Radius of Gyration r, in. 4.14 3.55 2.78

Unit Designation 12 x 8 x 16
12 in. Walls Average Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 11.63 in., Length = 15.63 in.,
Hei[ht = 7.63 m.
Area A~ in.2 36.0 57.8 140

Momentoflne~ia /, in. 4 929 1,065 1,571

Section Modulus S, in) 160 183 270

Kem Eccentricity ek, in. 4.44 3.17 1.94

Radius o f Gyration r, in. 5.08 4.29 3.36

Valid values only if grout stiffnessis identicalto concreteunit stiffness

Table 8 Avera~le Section Properties of Concrete Masonry Units

Area M o m e n t of Inertia Section Modulus
Grout A= in.2/ft I = in.4/ft Sfin.3/ft
Spacing,
in.
6 in. 8 in. 12 in. 6 in. 8 in. 12 in. 6in. 8in. 12 in.

No Grout 42 50 69 153 364 1,180 55 95 203

48 46 57 80 158 377 1,244 56 99 214

40 47 58 83 158 380 1,257 56 100 216

32 48 60 86 160 384 1,277 57 101 220

24 51 64 92 162 390 1,309 57 102 225

16 55 71 104 166 404 1,375 59 106 237

Solid 8 in. 68 92 140 178 443 1,571 63 116 270

A-6
Material Properties

COMPOSITE MASONRY SECTION PROPERTIES

(Tables 9 and 10)
Table 9 Transformed Section Properties of Composite Masonry Walls of 3 in. Solid Masonry Units
and Hollow Concrete Masonry Units for Various Modular Ratios, n=Es/Eh*
Nominal M o m e n t of Section Modulus M o m e n t of Section Modulus
Thickness Inertia, in. 4 Hollow Solid Unit, Inertia, in. 4 Hollow Solid Unit,
of Hollow I Unit, in. 3 Sh in. 3 Ss I Unit, in. 3 Sh in. 3 S,
Masonry,
in., T
n =0.5 n =1.0
4 174 48 105 229 54 84

6 371 77 178 476 85 140

8 675 112 272 847 122 210

10 1,112 153 387 1,368 164 293

12 1,706 201 523 2,064 213 389

n =1.5 n =2.0
4 263 58 72 289 61 64

6 539 89 121 585 93 108

8 951 127 181 1,024 130 163

10 1,525 170 253 1,634 174 227

12 2,286 219 335 2,440 223 301

n=2.5 n =3.0
4 311 64 59 331 67 54

6 620 96 99 650 98 91

8 1,079 133 149 1,124 136 138

10 1,716 177 208 1,780 179 193

12 2,555 226 277 2,644 228 257

C.T. Grimm,MechanicalProperties of Masonry Walls, The MasonrySocietyJournal, Vol. 16, No. I, June 1998.

A-7
 Appendix A
Table 10 Transformed Section Properties of Composite Masonry Walls of 4 in. Solid Masonry
Units and Hollow Concrete Masonry Units for Various Modular Ratios, n=EslEh*
Nominal Moment of Section Modulus Moment of Section Modulus
Thickness Inertia, in. 4 Hollow Solid Unit, Inertia, in. 4 Hollow Solid Unit,
of Hollow I Unit, in.3 Sb in.3 Ss I Unit, in? Sh in) Ss
Masonry,
in, T
n =0.5 n =1.0
4 220 55 121 290 63 97

6 441 85 198 568 95 157

8 772 120 296 974 132 231

10 1,241 162 416 1,536 174 319

12 1,871 210 557 2,278 223 421

n =1.5 n =2.0
4 337 68 83 374 73 74

6 646 100 135 703 105 120

8 1,096 138 199 1,181 142 177

10 1,713 181 274 1,836 186 245

12 2,524 230 362 2,692 235 324

n =2.5 n =3.0
4 407 78 68 437 82 63

6 750 109 109 790 113 101

8 1,248 146 161 1,303 150 149

10 1,928 190 224 2,003 193 206

12 2,818 238 296 2,917 242 274

* C.T. Grimm,Mechanical Properties of MasonryWalls, The MasonrySocietyJoumal, Vol. 16, No. 1, June 1998.

A-8
 APPENDIX B
SI U n i t s C o n v e r s i o n F a c t o r s *
To convert from [ to [ multiply by**
Length
Inch millimeter (mm) 25.4E
Foot meter (m) 0.3048E
yard meter (m) 0.9144E
mile (statute) kilometer (km) 1.609
Area
square inch square centimeter (cm2) 6.452
square foot square meter (m:) 0.09290
square yard square meter (m 2) 0.8361
Force
kilogram force newton (N) 9.807
kip force kilonewton (kN) 4.448
pound force newton (N) 4.448
Pressure or Stress (Force per Area)
kilogram force/square meter pascal (Pa) 9.807
kip force/square inch (ksi) megapascal (MPa) 6.895
newton/square meter (N/m2) pascal (Pa) 1.000E
pound force/square foot pascal (Pa) 47.88
pound force/square inch (psi) pascal (Pa) 6895
Bending Moment or Torque
inch pound force newton meter (Nm) 0.1130
foot pound force newton meter (Nm) 1.356
meter kilogram force newton meter (Nm) 9.807
Mass
ounce mass (avoirdupois) gram (g) 28.35
pound mass (avoirdupois) kilogram (kg) 0.4536
ton (metric) megagram (Mg) 1.000E
ton (short, 2000 Ibm) megagram (Mg) 0.9072
Mass per Volume
pound mass/cubic foot kilogram/cubic meter (kg/m 3) 16.02
pound mass/cubic yard kilogram/cubic meter (kg/m 3) 0.5933
pound mass/gallon kilogram/cubi c meter (kg/m 3) 119.8
Temperature
deg Farenheit (F) deg Celsius (C) tc=(tv - 32)/1.8
deg Celsius (C) deg Farenheit (F) tF=l.8tc + 32

* This list givespractical converstionfactorsofunits found in masonrytechnology. The referencesourcefor informationon SI units and more
conversionfactorsis "Standardfor MetricPractice"ASTME 380. Symbolsof metric units are given in parentheses.
** E indicatesthat the factorgivenis exact.

B-1

A C
Acceptable/accepted: .................................. 3-2, 3-3
Adhered veneer: Definition ................... 2-5, 8-2, 15-9
Adjustable tires: .............................. 14-2, 14-5, 14-9
Admixtures: ....................................................... 3-12
Allowable compressive stress: notation ............. 2-1,
8-7, 8-10, 15-3
Allowable Stress: ............. 3-12, 8-1, 8-3, 8-5, 13-3
Allowable tensile stress: notation ..................... 2-2,
8-10, 11-6
Anchor: definition ........................... 2-3, 3-17, 14-1
Anchor bolt: ............................... 14-1, 14-8, 15-8
Anchorage: ................. 14-7, 14-8, 15-6---8, 16-9;
design ............... TMS-24, TMS-25
Anchored veneer: definition ............... 2-5, 15-9--10
Anchors: ................................... 6-12, 6-13, 14-1
Architect: definition ................................. 2-3, 3-2
Area: notation .............................................. 2-1;
definition ......................... 2-3, 8-4
Axial compression: ............................... 8-7, 8-8
Axial design load: ....................................... 8-5
B Concentrated load: ......................... 8-7, 8-8, 9-5,
Backing: definition ..................... 2-3, 8-2, 15-8--10
Bar: splicing .............................................. 6-12;
bending ............................... 6-12
Beam: ........................... 8-13, 10-10, 11-13--21;
deep beam ......................... 11-21
design .................. RCJ-7, RCJ-16,
RCJ-17, RCJ-18, RCJ-20
Bearing: ................................. 8-8, 8-13, 9-5, 9-6
Bearing area: ............................................. 9-6
Bearing stress: ...................................... 8-8, 9-6
Bearing walls: ...................................... 8-7, 8-8
Bed joint: definition ................................ 2-4, 3-13
Bolt: ....................................................... 14-1
Bond: ................................ 6-12, 7-1, 11-2, 15-6
Bracing: .................................................... 6-7
Brick specifications: .................... 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6
Buckling, Euler: ............................... 8-10, 12-16
Building code: .................................. 1-1--3, 3-1
Building official: definition ............................... 2-4
C-1
APPENDIX C
MDG INDEX
Cantilevered walls: ..................................... 15-2
Cavity wall: definition ................................ 2-4, 8-2
Chase: ................................................... 15-8
Clay masonry: ................................... 3-13, 3-14
Cleaning: ......................................... 6-22, 6-23
Cleanouts: ............................................... 6-15
Coefficient of expansion: ............................. 10-2
Cold weather construction: ....................... 7 - 3 ~ 5
Collar joint: definition ............................... 2-4, 6-8;
design ............................ DPC-13
Column: definition ................. 2-4, 8-14, 12-1, 12-2;
design .............................. RCJ-6
Com )liance: ............................................. 5-10
Com ~osite action: definition ............................. 2-4
Com )osite masonry: definition ......................... 2-4
Com ~osite wall: ........................................... 8-4
Corn ~ression: ............................................ 3-13
Com )ressive strength: definition ......... 2-4, 3-9, 3-10,
3-13, 3-11,
3-12, 3-14
Compressive stress: ..................... 8-5, 8-10, 15-3
9-6, 11-19, 11-20;
design ............... TMS-17, TMS-18,
TMS-19, TMSo20, TMS-21
Concrete masonry: ..................................... 3-14
Connector: definition ..... 2-4, 14-1m3, 14-5---7, 6-12
design ................. TMS-22, TMS-23,
TMS-26, TMS-27, DPC-17, DPC-18,
DPC-19, DPC-20, DPC-21, RCJ-3,
RCJ-4, RCJ-11, RCJ-12, RCJ-13,
RCJ-14, RCJ-18, RCJ-21, DPC-23
Construction details: ..................................... 8-3
Contract documents: ........................ 3-2, 5-4, 5-5
Contractor: ........................... 5-2, 6-14, 6-18, 8-3
Control joint: .............................. 6-17, 6-18, 10-7
design ............................... TMS-1
Corbelling: empirical design: ........................ 15-8
Corrosion: ........................................ 14-6, 14-7
Creep: ............................................. 10-1, 12-9
Cross-sectional area: ............................ 8-4, 8-13

D Frame: anchorage to ................................... 15-7
Dead load: definition ................................ 2-4, 8-1
Deflection: beams ............ 8-13, 10-6, 11-20, 11-21;
shelf angles ...................... 10-6
Deformation: ............................................ 10-1
Delivery of products: .................................... 6-1
Design: ............................................... 8-3, 8-5
walls .............. 8-6--13, 11-5--7,
12-14--27;
beams ............ 8-13, 11-13--18;
beam columns....8-14, 12-2--13;
pilasters.... 11-8--13, 12-28--31;
columns .................. 12-1, 12-2;
out of plane shear ......... 13-1---6;
in plane shear ............. 13-6---12;
empirical ..................... 15-3--8;
seismic ....................... 1 6 - 5 - 9 ;
Design story drift: definition .............................. 2-4
Diaphragm: definition ................ 2-4, 8-4, 8-9, 8-13;
design ........... TMS-26, TMS-27,
DPC-11, RCJ-3, RCJ-12, RCJ-13
Differential movement: ......................... 8-2, 10-1;
design ........................... RCJ-5
Dimension: definition ............................. 2-4, 6-19
Drawings: .......................................... 6-8, 6-18
Drift limit: ................................................. 10-5
E Intersecting walls: ............................. 11-6, 14-6;
Earthquake loads: ..................................... 16-1
Earthquake provisions: .......................... 1 6 - 1 - - 9
Effective height: definition ....................... 2-4, 8-10
Elastic modulus: ................................ 3-13, 3-14
E m b e d m e n t length: ................................... 14-7
Empirical design: ........... 8-1, 8-3, 15-1---8; TMS-9,
DPC-17, RCJ-8
Engineer: ............................................ 2-3, 3-2
Euler buckling: ................................. 8-10, 12-16
Expansion: ....................................... 10-2, 10-3
Expansion joint: .......... 6-18, 6-19, 6-21, 10-9--11;
design ........................... RCJ-4
F design .............. TMS-2, DPC-1,
Flanges: ................................. 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-6
Flashing: ............................................ 6-17, 8-3
Flexural reinforcement: ........................... 11-3---7
Flexural tension: ........................................ 8-10
Flexure: ............................................. 11-1--21
Floors: anchorage ........................................ 15-7
Foundation: ................................................ 6-3
C-2
Appendix C
Foundation walls: ............................... 15-5, 15-6
Frame construction: ................................... 10-5
G
Galvanizing requirements: .......................... 3-17
Glass unit masonry: definition ......................... 2-4;
units ................................. 3-8;
reinforcement .................... 6-11;
anchors ............................ 6-12;
design ......................... T M S - 1 5
Gross cross-sectional area: .......................... 15-3
Grout lift: .......................................... 6-16, 6-17
Grout/grouting: ................. 3-12, 4-1,4-2, 5-7, 6-5;
placement ................. 6-16, 6-17
H
Handling of products: .............................. 3-8, 6-1
Head joint: definition ...................................... 2-4
Header: definition .......................................... 2-4
Height: .............................................. 8-9, 8-10
Horizontal reinforcement, seismic design: ....... 16-6,
16-7
Hot weather construction: ....................... 7-1, 7-2
I
Inch-pounds: translation table .......................... B-1
Inspection: ......................... 5-4, 5-5, 5-9, 6-3, 6-4
design ............. RCJ-14, RCJ-15
J
Joint: m o v e m e n t ....................... 6 - 1 7 m 1 9 , 1 0 - 7 - - 1 1
Joint bed: ................................................... 5-3
Joint fillers: ................................................ 5-3
Joint reinforcement: .................................... 3-17
/
Lateral load: ............................................. 8-4;
distribution ......... TMS-2, TMS-6,
TMS-8, T M S - 1 3
Lateral load distribution: .......................... 9-2---5;
DPC-3, DPC-4
Lateral stability: empirical design: .................. 15-3
Lateral support: ........................... 8-7, 8-13, 15-3
Lateral thrust: ............................................. 8-8
Lateral ties: .............................................. 12-1
Lintel: ................................................ 8-8,15-8;
design ............. TMS-16, DPC-12,
MDG Index
DPC-19, RCJ-19
Live load: definition ................................. 2-4, 8-1
Load: definition ...................................... 2-4, 8-4;
combinations .................... 8-5, 8-6;
gravity distribution ..................... 9-1;
lateral distribution ................. 9-2---5;
concentrated ..................... 9-5, 9-6;
multiwythe ............................ 9-6--8
Load design, axial: ....................................... 8-7
Load transfer: ....................................... 8-4, 8-7
Load bearing wall: ........................... 8-2, 8-7--11
Loading: .............................................. 8-2, 8-5
M Radius of gyration: ...................................... 8-7
Masonry, unreinforced: ........... 3-13--15, 8-1, 8-10
Masonry cement: ............................... 3-10, 3-11
Masonry erection: ................................... 6 - 5 - - 7
Masonry headers: ...................................... 15-6
Masonry materials: .................. 3-1--11, 3-17--21
Material: .................................................... 6-1
Maximum height: ....................................... 15-3
Maximum value: ........................................ 15-3
Mean daily temperature: ............................... 7-5
Minimum thickness: empirical design ...... 15-3, 15-5
Mixing: ................................................ 6-4, 6-5
Modulus: definition ......................................... 2-4
notation .................................... 2-1
see modulus of elasticity,
modulus of rigidity
Modulus of elasticity: notation .......................... 2-1;
definition ................................. 2-4;
clay masonry .................... 3-13, 8-4;
concrete masonry ........ 3-14, 8-3, 8-4
Modulus of rigidity: notation ............................ 2-1;
definition ................................... 2-4
Moisture expansion: notation ................... 2-2, 10-3
Moment of inertia: notation .............................. 2-2
Mortar: ............ 3 - 9 ~ 1 1 , 4-1, 4-2, 5-7, 5-8, 6-4, 6-8
Multiwythe walls: ............................. 8-1, 8-4, 9-8
N Shear force: .............................................. 16-4
Net cross-sectional area: .............................. 8-4
Noncomposite action: ............................. 8-2, 8-4
Notation: ................................................... 2-1
P Specifications: .......................... 3-1, 3-2--8, 3-10
Pigments: ................................................ 3-12
Pilaster: ....................... 8-7, 1 1 - 8 w l 3,12-28---31;
design ...................... DPC-6, DPC-8
Plate anchor: ............................................ 14-2
C-3
Prefabricated masonry: ................................ 8-2
Prism test method for compressive strength: .........
3-13, 4-2, 4-3, 5-6, 5-7
Project drawings: definition ....................... 2-5, 6-8
Project specifications: ............................ 3-2, 5-1
Protection: ........................................... 6-6, 6-7
Q
Quality assurance: ............................... 5-1, 5-2;
testing .................. 5-5---9, 6-23, 6-24
Quality control: ..................................... 6 - 1 - - 2 8
R
Reinforced masonry: ....... 11-1, 11-3--7,12-18--22
design ........ 11-6, 11-7, 12-30, 12-31
TMS-10, TMS-11, TMS-12,
TMS-13, TMS-14, DPC-18,
DPC-21, DPC-22, RCJ-9,
RCJ-10, RCJ-11, RCJ-16,
RCJ-17, RCJ-18, RCJ-19,
RCJ-20, RCJ-21, RCJ-23
Reinforced placement: ....................... 6-11, 6-12
Reinforcement diameter: ............................ 3-19
Reinforcing steel: .............................. 3-18, 3-19
Roof anchorage: ....................................... 15-7
Rubble stone masonry: definition ...................... 2-5
Running bond: definition ................... 2-4, 8-5, 15-2
Running bond masonry: definition ..................... 2-5
S
Samples: ................................................... 5-2
Sample panel: ................................ 5-2, 5-3, 5-4
Sealant: .................................................. 10-7
Section p r o p e r t i e s : ....................................... 8-4
Seismic design: .................................... 16-1--9
Seismic load: ........................................ 1 6 - 3 ~ 5
Service load: ............................................... 8-3
Settlement: ............................................... 10-6
Shear: ............................................... 13-1m12
Shear stress: ............................. 13-1, 13-3, 13-5
Shear wall: ...... 8-2, 8-11, 8-12, 9-9, 13-6---12, 15-3
Shrinkage: notation ........................... 2-2, 1 0 - 3 - 5
Span: ................................................ 8-8, 8-13
Specified compressive strength: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
definition ........................... 2-4, 8-3
Stack bond: definition .................................... 2-5
Stainless steel: .......................... 3-17, 3-18, 14-1
 Appendix C

Standards: .................................... 3-2, 3-3, 3-17 RCJ-22, RCJ-23

Steel: ...................................................... 3-17 Weather: .............................................. 7-1---6
Steel reinforcement: ................... 14-1, 14-3, 14-6 Weep hole: ........................................ 5-3, 6-17
Wetting masonry units: .................... 6-3, 6-4, 6-14
Stiffness: ..................... 8-4, 8-11, 13-7--10, 14-6
Wind load: ................. 8-5, 9-2, 17-7, 17-13, 17-27
Stone masonry: definition ............................... 2-5; Wire: ................................................ 3-17--19
ashlar ............................................ 2-5; Wire anchors, veneers: ...................... 14-1, 14-5
rubble ...................................... 2-5, 3-6 Wire reinforcement: ................................... 3-17
Storage of products: .................................... 3-8 Wythe: definition ..................................... 2-5, 8-4
Stress: ...................................................... 8-5
Submit/submitted/submittals: .......................... 3-2 Y
Yield stress: ..................................... 3-18, 3-19
T
Temperature, ambient: ............................. 7-3--5
Temperature change: .......................... 10-2, 10-8
Tensile stress: ........................................... 8-11
Test/testing: ................. 3-8, 3-12, 4-1---3, 5-5---10
Thermal expansion: ............................ 10-2, 10-3
Thickness: ................................................ 15-5
Thrust, lateral: ................................... 8-8, 11-19
Tie: lateral ................................................... 2-4;
wall .............................................. 2-4;
placement .............. 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 15-6
Tile, structural clay: .......................... 3-3, 3-4, 3-6
Tolerances: ................................ 6-11, 6-19--22

I.I
Unit strength method: ......................... 3-12, 3-14
Units: ...................................... 3-1, 3 - 2 ~ 9 , 6-3;
placement ............................. 6 - 1 3 ~ 1 6
Unreinforced masonry: definition ...................... 2-5,
11-1--3, 12-14---18;
design ............ 11-6, 11-12, 12-29, 12-30,
TMS-3, TMS-4, TMS-5, TMS-6,
TMS-7, TMS-8, TMS-9, DPC-2,
"DPC-3, DPC-4, DPC-5, DPC-14,
DPC-15, DPC-16, DPC-17,
RCJ-1, RCJ-2, RCJ-8, RCJ-22

V
Veneer: definition .................... 2-5, 8-2, 15-8---11
Vertical reinforcement, seismic design: .. 16-7, 16-8
Volume change: ....................................... 10-1

W
Wall intersections: ....................... 8-4, 8-12, 14-6;
design .......................... RCJ-14, RCJ-15
Wall tie: .................. 2-4, 3-19, 6-4, 6-11, 6-12, 8-4
Walls: definition .......................................... 2-5;
load bearing .................................. 2-5;
masonry bonded hollow ....... 2-5, 11-5m7;
design ............... TMS-3, TMS-4, TMS-5,
TMS-7, TMS-9, TMS-10, TMS-11,
TMS-12, TMS-14, DPC-5, DPC-7,
DPC-8, DPC-14, DPC-15, DPC-16,
DPC-18, DPC-21, DPC-22, RCJ-1,
RCJ-2, RCJ-9, RCJ-10, RCJ-11,

c.4